DL405 User Manual

Manual Number: D4--USER--M

WARNING
Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com, doing business as,
AutomationDirect. We want your new automation equipment to operate safely. Anyone who installs or uses this
equipment should read this publication (and any other relevant publications) before installing or operating the
equipment.
To minimize the risk of potential safety problems, you should follow all applicable local and national codes that regulate
the installation and operation of your equipment. These codes vary from area to area and usually change with time. It is
your responsibility to determine which codes should be followed, and to verify that the equipment, installation, and
operation are in compliance with the latest revision of these codes.
At a minimum, you should follow all applicable sections of the National Fire Code, National Electrical Code, and the
codes of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). There may be local regulatory or government
offices that can also help determine which codes and standards are necessary for safe installation and operation.
Equipment damage or serious injury to personnel can result from the failure to follow all applicable codes and
standards. We do not guarantee the products described in this publication are suitable for your particular application,
nor do we assume any responsibility for your product design, installation, or operation.
Our products are not fault--tolerant and are not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as on--line control
equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail--safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities,
aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems, in
which the failure of the product could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental
damage (High Risk Activities). AutomationDirect specifically disclaims any expressed or implied warranty of fitness
for High Risk Activities.
For additional warranty and safety information, see the Terms and Conditions section of our Desk Reference. If you
have any questions concerning the installation or operation of this equipment, or if you need additional information,
please call us at 770--844--4200.
This publication is based on information that was available at the time it was printed. At AutomationDirect we
constantly strive to improve our products and services, so we reserve the right to make changes to the products and/or
publications at any time without notice and without any obligation. This publication may also discuss features that may
not be available in certain revisions of the product.

TRADEMARKS
This publication may contain references to products produced and/or offered by other companies. The product and
company names may be trademarked and are the sole property of their respective owners. AutomationDirect
disclaims any proprietary interest in the marks and names of others.

Copyright 2013, Automationdirect.com Incorporated

All Rights Reserved
No part of this manual shall be copied, reproduced, or transmitted in any way without the prior, written consent of
Automationdirect.com Incorporated. AutomationDirect retains the exclusive rights to all information included in
this document.

AVERTISSEMENT
Nous vous remercions davoir achet lquipement dautomatisation de Automationdirect.commc en faisant des
affaires comme, AutomationDirect. Nous tenons ce que votre nouvel quipement dautomatisation fonctionne en
toute scurit. Toute personne qui installe ou utilise cet quipement doit lire la prsente publication (et toutes les
autres publications pertinentes) avant de linstaller ou de lutiliser.
Afin de rduire au minimum le risque dventuels problmes de scurit, vous devez respecter tous les codes locaux
et nationaux applicables rgissant linstallation et le fonctionnement de votre quipement. Ces codes diffrent dune
rgion lautre et, habituellement, voluent au fil du temps. Il vous incombe de dterminer les codes respecter et de
vous assurer que lquipement, linstallation et le fonctionnement sont conformes aux exigences de la version la plus
rcente de ces codes.
Vous devez, tout le moins, respecter toutes les sections applicables du Code national de prvention des incendies,
du Code national de llectricit et des codes de la National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). Des
organismes de rglementation ou des services gouvernementaux locaux peuvent galement vous aider dterminer
les codes ainsi que les normes respecter pour assurer une installation et un fonctionnement srs.
Lomission de respecter la totalit des codes et des normes applicables peut entraner des dommages lquipement
ou causer de graves blessures au personnel. Nous ne garantissons pas que les produits dcrits dans cette publication
conviennent votre application particulire et nous nassumons aucune responsabilit lgard de la conception, de
linstallation ou du fonctionnement de votre produit.
Nos produits ne sont pas insensibles aux dfaillances et ne sont ni conus ni fabriqus pour lutilisation ou la revente
en tant ququipement de commande en ligne dans des environnements dangereux ncessitant une scurit absolue,
par exemple, lexploitation dinstallations nuclaires, les systmes de navigation arienne ou de communication, le
contrle de la circulation arienne, les quipements de survie ou les systmes darmes, pour lesquels la dfaillance du
produit peut provoquer la mort, des blessures corporelles ou de graves dommages matriels ou environnementaux
(activits risque lev). La socit AutomationDirect nie toute garantie expresse ou implicite daptitude lemploi
en ce qui a trait aux activits risque lev.
Pour des renseignements additionnels touchant la garantie et la scurit, veuillez consulter la section Modalits et
conditions de notre documentation. Si vous avez des questions au sujet de linstallation ou du fonctionnement de cet
quipement, ou encore si vous avez besoin de renseignements supplmentaires, nhsitez pas nous tlphoner au
770--844--4200.
Cette publication sappuie sur linformation qui tait disponible au moment de limpression. la socit
AutomationDirect, nous nous efforons constamment damliorer nos produits et services. Cest pourquoi nous
nous rservons le droit dapporter des modifications aux produits ou aux publications en tout temps, sans pravis ni
quelque obligation que ce soit. La prsente publication peut aussi porter sur des caractristiques susceptibles de ne
pas tre offertes dans certaines versions rvises du produit.

Marques de commerce
La prsente publication peut contenir des rfrences des produits fabriqus ou offerts par dautres entreprises. Les
dsignations des produits et des entreprises peuvent tre des marques de commerce et appartiennent exclusivement
leurs propritaires respectifs. AutomationDirect nie tout intrt dans les autres marques et dsignations.
Copyright 2013, Automationdirect.commc Incorporated
Tous droits rservs
Nulle partie de ce manuel ne doit tre copie, reproduite ou transmise de quelque faon que ce soit sans le
consentement pralable crit de la socit Automationdirect.com Incorporated. AutomationDirect conserve les
droits exclusifs lgard de tous les renseignements contenus dans le prsent document.

1
Manual Revisions
Refer to this history in all correspondence and/or discussion about this manual.
Title: DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A
Manual Number: D4--USER--M

Issue

Date

Description of Changes

Original

1/94

Original Issue

2nd Edition

4/95

Major revision

3rd Edition

1/97

Major revision

Rev A

5/98

Minor corrections

Rev B

11/99

Minor corrections

Rev C

12/00

Added CE information, new PID features,

minor corrections

Rev D

9/03

Added memory information, MODEM

corrections, major and minor corrections

Rev E

7/04

Added ASCII table, minor corrections

4th Edition

8/09

Made corrections throughout the manual;

updated Chapter 4 dialogs, revised Chapter 8; added Numbering
Systems appendix.

2/11

Manual reprinted with these 4 corrections:

1. Page 5--45: Replaced graphic for Accumulator Timer Example Using Comparative Contacts.
2. Page 5--80: Replaced graphic for Exclusive OR Formatted (XORF) Example.
3. Page 8--23: Made 2 changes to Bit 7
row in table:
A. After Autotune start, added note
saying Bit 7 can be used to cancel Autotune mode by setting it to 0.
B. In fourth column, change autotune
done to autotune/cancel done.
4. Appendix page I--5: Added enclosure
graphic.

4th Edition

5/11

Corrected the number of memory regs

needed in the print message instruction.

Rev A

3/13

Updated Inductive Load Suppression info.

1
Table of Contents

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Purpose of this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Where to Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplemental Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conventions Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Topics for Each Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DL405 System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DirectSOFT 5 Programming for Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handheld Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DL405 System Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DirectLOGIC Part Numbering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Start for PLC Checkout and Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steps to Designing a Successful System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1--2
1--2
1--2
1--2
1--2
1--3
1--3
1--4
1--4
1--4
1--4
1--4
1--4
1--4
1--4
1--5
1--8
1--10
1--14
1--16

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plan for Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Three Levels of Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Power Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Orderly System Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class 1, Division 2 Approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Base Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel Layout & Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agency Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Component Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing DL405 Bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Three Sizes of Bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting the Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2--2
2--2
2--3
2--3
2--4
2--4
2--4
2--5
2--5
2--6
2--7
2--7
2--8
2--8
2--9
2--10
2--10
2--10

ii

Table of Contents
Choosing the Base Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Components in the Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the CPU DIP Switches (DL430/440 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU and Expansion Unit Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expansion Unit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Programming Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Operator Interface Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Wiring Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Isolation Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Powering I/O Circuits with the Auxiliary Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Powering I/O Circuits Using Separate Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sinking/Sourcing Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Common Terminal Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting DC I/O to Solid State Field Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solid State Input Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solid State Output Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relay Output Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transient Suppression for Inductive Loads in a Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prolonging Relay Contact Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Module Wiring and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Module Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Color Coding of I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring a Module with a Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring 32 and 64 Point I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Part Numbers for Module Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ribbon Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ribbon Cable Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Wiring Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DL405 Input Module Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DL405 Output Module Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Begin Input Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Begin Output Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary of Specification Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2--11
2--12
2--12
2--13
2--13
2--14
2--14
2--15
2--16
2--16
2--17
2--18
2--19
2--20
2--21
2--21
2--21
2--23
2--23
2--28
2--30
2--30
2--30
2--30
2--31
2--32
2--32
2--33
2--33
2--33
2--34
2--35
2--35
2--36
2--42
2--50

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operation

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General CPU Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DL430 CPU Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DL440 CPU Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DL450 CPU Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyswitch Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3--2
3--2
3--2
3--2
3--3
3--4
3--5
3--6
3--7
3--7

iii

Table of Contents
Setting the CPU DIP Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port 0 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port 1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port 2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port 3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Battery Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Program Storage Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volatile and Non-volatile Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Storage Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Cartridge Capacity Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Clock and Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variable/Fixed Scan Time Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearing an Existing Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initializing System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the CPU Network Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Retentive Memory Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Run Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read Inputs from Specialty and Remote I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Peripherals and Force I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Update Special Relays and Special Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Bus Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Update Clock, Special Relays, and Special Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solve Application Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solve PID Loop Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Write Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Write Outputs to Specialty and Remote I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Is Timing Important for Your Application? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal Minimum I/O Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal Maximum I/O Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Improving Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Scan Time Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initialization Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Inputs from Specialty I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Bus Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Update Clock/Calendar, Special Relays, Special Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing Outputs to Specialty I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3--8
3--9
3--9
3--9
3--10
3--11
3--12
3--13
3--13
3--13
3--14
3--14
3--15
3--15
3--15
3--15
3--16
3--17
3--17
3--17
3--17
3--18
3--18
3--19
3--19
3--20
3--20
3--20
3--21
3--21
3--21
3--22
3--22
3--22
3--23
3--23
3--24
3--24
3--24
3--24
3--25
3--26
3--27
3--27
3--28
3--28
3--29
3--29
3--29
3--30
3--30

iv

Table of Contents
Application Program Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Numbering Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V--Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Binary-Coded Decimal Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hexadecimal Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octal Numbering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete and Word Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V--Memory Locations for Discrete Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Points (X Data Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Points (Y Data Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Relays (C Data Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timers and Timer Status Bits (T Data type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timer Current Values (V Data Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Counters and Counter Status Bits (CT Data type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Counter Current Values (V Data Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Word Memory (V Data Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stages (S Data type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Relays (SP Data Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote I/O Points (GX Data Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Parameters (V Data Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DL430 Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DL440 Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DL450 Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DL405 Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X Input/Y Output Bit Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Relay Bit Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timer and Counter Status Bit Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote I/O Bit Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stage Control / Status Bit Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3--31
3--32
3--32
3--33
3--33
3--33
3--34
3--34
3--34
3--34
3--35
3--35
3--35
3--35
3--36
3--36
3--36
3--36
3--37
3--37
3--37
3--38
3--40
3--41
3--42
3--43
3--44
3--46
3--50
3--51
3--55

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

DL405 System Design Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Networking Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Placement and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Valid Module/Unit Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Configuration Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing a Manual Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power--On I/O Configuration Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating the Power Budget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing your Power Resource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Budget Calculation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4--2
4--2
4--3
4--4
4--4
4--5
4--5
4--5
4--6
4--6
4--7
4--7
4--7
4--7
4--9

Table of Contents
Power Budget Calculation Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local I/O Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local Base and I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local Expansion Base and I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote I/O Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Add Remote I/O Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the CPUs Remote I/O Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure Remote I/O Slaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Remote I/O Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote I/O Setup Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote I/O Test Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Connections to MODBUS and DirectNet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the CPUs Comm Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MODBUS Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DirectNET Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Slave Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MODBUS Function Codes Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MODBUS Data Types Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining the MODBUS Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If Your Host Software Requires the Data Type and Address... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 1: V2100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 2: Y20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 3: T10 Current Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 4: C54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If Your MODBUS Host Software Requires an Address ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 1: V2100 584/984 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 2: Y20 584/984 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 3: T10 Current Value 484 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 4: C54 584/984 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Master Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 1: Identify Master Port # and Slave # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 2: Load Number of Bytes to Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 3: Specify Master Memory Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 4: Specify Slave Memory Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications from a Ladder Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Read and Write Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4--10
4--11
4--11
4--11
4--12
4--12
4--13
4--15
4--15
4--16
4--17
4--18
4--18
4--20
4--21
4--22
4--22
4--22
4--23
4--23
4--24
4--24
4--24
4--24
4--25
4--27
4--27
4--27
4--27
4--28
4--29
4--29
4--30
4--30
4--31
4--31

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Boolean Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simple Rungs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normally Closed Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contacts in Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Midline Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Joining Series Branches in Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Joining Parallel Branches in Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combination Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5--2
5--4
5--4
5--4
5--5
5--5
5--5
5--6
5--6
5--6
5--7

vi

Table of Contents
Comparative Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boolean Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Immediate Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boolean Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comparative Boolean Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Immediate Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timer (TMR) and Timer Fast (TMRF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timer Example Using Discrete Status Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timer Example Using Comparative Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accumulating Timer (TMRA) and Accumulating Fast Timer (TMRAF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accumulating Timer Example using Discrete Status Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accumulator Timer Example Using Comparative Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Counter (CNT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stage Counter (SGCNT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stage Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stage Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Up/Down Counter (UDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Up/Down Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Up/Down Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift Register (SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accumulator/Data Stack Load and Output Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying Data to the Accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Accumulator Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Accumulator Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accumulator and Accumulator Stack Memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accumulator Logic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transcendental Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bit Operation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number Conversion Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shuffle Digits Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy Data From a Data Label Area to V--memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy Data From V--memory to a Data Label Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock/Calender Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interrupt Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intelligent I/O Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5--7
5--8
5--9
5--10
5--26
5--32
5--41
5--41
5--42
5--43
5--43
5--44
5--45
5--45
5--46
5--47
5--48
5--48
5--49
5--50
5--50
5--51
5--52
5--52
5--53
5--54
5--54
5--54
5--55
5--56
5--57
5--58
5--70
5--87
5--118
5--121
5--128
5--140
5--142
5--163
5--165
5--175
5--177
5--179
5--185
5--189
5--191
5--194

vii

Table of Contents

Chapter 6: Drum Instruction Programming (DL450 CPU only)

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drum Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drum Chart Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drum Instruction Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timer-Only Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timer and Event Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event-Only Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Counter Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Last Step Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Drum Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drum Instruction Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Powerup State of Drum Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drum Control Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drum Control Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Self-Resetting Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initializing Drum Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cascaded Drums Provide More Than 16 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handheld Programmer Drum Mnemonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drum Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timed Drum with Discrete Outputs (DRUM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event Drum with Discrete Outputs (EDRUM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Masked Event Drum with Discrete Outputs (MDRMD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Masked Event Drum with Word Output (MDRMW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6--2
6--2
6--2
6--3
6--3
6--4
6--4
6--4
6--5
6--6
6--6
6--7
6--8
6--8
6--9
6--10
6--10
6--11
6--11
6--12
6--13
6--15
6--15
6--18
6--21
6--24

Chapter 7: RLLPLUS Stage Programming

Introduction to Stage Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overcoming Stage Fright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Learning to Draw State Transition Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction to Process States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Need for State Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A 2--State Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RLL Equivalent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stage Equivalent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lets Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Stage Bits Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stage Instruction Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Stage Jump Instruction for State Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stage Jump, Set, and Reset Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stage Program Example: Toggle On/Off Lamp Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A 4--State Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four Steps to Writing a Stage Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stage Program Example: A Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7--2
7--2
7--3
7--3
7--3
7--3
7--4
7--4
7--5
7--5
7--6
7--6
7--7
7--7
7--8
7--8
7--9
7--10

viii

Table of Contents

Garage Door Opener Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Draw the Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Draw the State Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Safety Light Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify the Block Diagram and State Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Timer Inside a Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Emergency Stop Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exclusive Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stage Program Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stage Program Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Instructions Work Inside Stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Stage as a Supervisory Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stage Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unconditional Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Flow Transition Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel Processing Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Converging Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convergence Stages (CV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convergence Jump (CVJMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convergence Stage Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing Large Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stage Blocks (BLK, BEND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Call (BCALL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RLLPLUS Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stage (SG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Stage (ISG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump (JMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Not Jump (NJMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Converge Stage (CV) and Converge Jump (CVJMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Call (BCALL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block (BLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block End (BEND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Questions and Answers about Stage Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7--10
7--10
7--11
7--12
7--12
7--13
7--14
7--14
7--15
7--15
7--16
7--17
7--17
7--18
7--18
7--19
7--19
7--19
7--19
7--20
7--20
7--21
7--21
7--22
7--23
7--23
7--24
7--24
7--24
7--25
7--27
7--27
7--27
7--29

Chapter 8: PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

DL450 PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DL450 PID Control Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction to PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What is PID Control? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introducing DL450 PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process Control Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PID Loop Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PID Position Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset Windup Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Freeze Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting the Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Bias Proportional to Step Change SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eliminating Proportional, Integral or Derivative Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8--2
8--2
8--4
8--4
8--6
8--8
8--9
8--9
8--10
8--11
8--11
8--12
8--12

ix

Table of Contents
Velocity Form of the PID Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bumpless Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Loop Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ten Steps to Successful Process Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PID Loop Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Some Things to Do and Know Before Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PID Error Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Establishing the Loop Table Size and Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Table Word Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PID Mode Setting 1 Bit Descriptions (Addr + 00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PID Mode Setting 2 Bit Descriptions (Addr + 01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode/Alarm Monitoring Word (Addr + 06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ramp/Soak Table Flags (Addr + 33) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ramp/Soak Table Location (Addr + 34) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ramp/Soak Table Programming Error Flags (Addr + 35) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure the PID Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PID Loop Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open--Loop Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Tuning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alternative Manual Tuning Procedures by Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuning PID Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Tuning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use DirectSOFT 5 Data View with PID View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open a New Data View Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open PID View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Special PID Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Change Loop Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Panel Control of PID Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Modes Effect on Loop Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Mode Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating an Analog Filter in Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use the DirectSOFT 5 Filter Intelligent Box Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FilterB Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ramp/Soak Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ramp/Soak Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ramp/Soak Table Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ramp/Soak Generator Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ramp/Soak Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ramp/Soak Profile Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ramp/Soak Programming Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing Your Ramp/Soak Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DirectSOFT Ramp/Soak Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup the Profile in PID Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program the Ramp/Soak Control in Relay Ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test the Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cascade Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cascaded Loops in the DL450 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8--12
8--13
8--13
8--14
8--14
8--16
8--18
8--18
8--18
8--19
8--21
8--22
8--23
8--24
8--24
8--25
8--25
8--26
8--40
8--40
8--41
8--44
8--44
8--45
8--49
8--49
8--49
8--52
8--52
8--53
8--53
8--53
8--54
8--55
8--55
8--56
8--56
8--57
8--59
8--59
8--59
8--60
8--60
8--60
8--61
8--61
8--61
8--62
8--63
8--63
8--64

Table of Contents
Tuning Cascaded Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time-Proportioning Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On/Off Control Program Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feedforward Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feedforward Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PID Example Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Setup for the PID Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary of PID Loop Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8--65
8--66
8--67
8--68
8--69
8--70
8--70
8--72
8--74
8--76

Chapter 9: Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Hardware Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CMOS RAM Memory Cartridge Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fatal Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-fatal Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding Diagnostic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V-memory Error Code Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Relays (SP) Corresponding to Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Module Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Message Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PWR Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Run Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BATT Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAG Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COM Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TXD and RXD Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Module Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Some Quick Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Used to Test an Output Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Noise Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Noise Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reducing Electrical Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Machine Startup and Program Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplicate Reference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEST-PGM and TEST-RUN Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Run Time Edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing an Instruction During Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9--2
9--2
9--2
9--3
9--4
9--4
9--4
9--4
9--4
9--5
9--5
9--6
9--7
9--8
9--9
9--10
9--11
9--12
9--12
9--12
9--12
9--13
9--13
9--14
9--14
9--15
9--15
9--16
9--16
9--16
9--17
9--17
9--18
9--19
9--21
9--22

xi

Table of Contents
Inserting an Instruction During Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting an Instruction During Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Debug Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9--23
9--24
9--25

Appendix A: Auxiliary Functions

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What are Auxiliary Functions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing AUX Functions via DirectSOFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing AUX Functions via the Handheld Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 1* Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 11 Go to Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 12 Go to Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 13 Go to Program Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 14 Run Time Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 2* RLL Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 21 Check Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 22 Change Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 23 Clear Ladder Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 24 Clear Ladders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 25 Select MC or Flash Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 26 Copy MC Contents to Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 27 Copy Flash Contents to MC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 28 Verify Flash Contents = MC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 3* V-memory Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 31 Clear V--Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 32 Clear V-memory Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 33 Find V-memory Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 4* I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 41 Show I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 42 I/O Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 44 Power-up Configuration Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 45 Select Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 46 I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 47 Intelligent I/O Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 5* CPU Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 51 Modify Program Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 52 Display /Change Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 53 Display Scan Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 54 Initialize Scratchpad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 55 Set Watchdog Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 56 CPU Network Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 57 Set Retentive Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 58 Test Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 5C Display Error History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 5D Select PLC Scan Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 6* Handheld Programmer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 61 Show Revision Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 62 Beeper On / Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 63 Turning Off the Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A--2
A--2
A--3
A--3
A--4
A--4
A--4
A--4
A--4
A--5
A--5
A--5
A--5
A--5
A--5
A--5
A--5
A--5
A--6
A--6
A--6
A--6
A--6
A--6
A--6
A--6
A--7
A--7
A--7
A--8
A--8
A--8
A--8
A--8
A--8
A--9
A--9
A--9
A--9
A--10
A--10
A--10
A--10
A--10

xii

Table of Contents
AUX 64 Select Online / Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 65 Run Self Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 7* Memory Cartridge Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferrable Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 71 CPU to Memory Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 72 Memory Cartridge to CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 73 Compare Memory Cartridge to CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 74 Memory Cartridge Blank Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 75 Clear Memory Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 76 Display Memory Cartridge Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 77 Tape to Memory Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 78 Memory Cartridge to Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 79 Compare Memory Cartridge to Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 8* Password Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 81 Modify Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 82 Unlock CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX 83 Lock CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A--10
A--10
A--11
A--11
A--11
A--11
A--11
A--11
A--11
A--11
A--11
A--12
A--12
A--12
A--12
A--13
A--13

Appendix B: DL405 Error Codes

Appendix C: Instruction Execution Times
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V-Memory Data Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V-Memory Bit Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Read the Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boolean Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comparative Boolean Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Immediate Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock/Calendar Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accumulator/Data Stack Load and Output Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accumulator Logic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bit Operation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number Conversion Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interrupt Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RLLPLUS Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intelligent I/O Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drum Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C--2
C--2
C--2
C--2
C--3
C--5
C--11
C--11
C--12
C--13
C--14
C--15
C--16
C--19
C--20
C--20
C--21
C--21
C--21
C--22
C--22
C--22
C--22

xiii

Table of Contents

Appendix D: Special Relays

Startup and Real-time Special Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Status Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Monitoring Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accumulator Status Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Monitoring Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D--2
D--2
D--3
D--3
D--4

Appendix E: DL405 Product Weights

Product Weight Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E--2

Appendix F: PLC Memory

DL405 PLC Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

F--2

Appendix G: ASCII Table

ASCII Conversion Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

G--2

Appendix H: Numbering Systems

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H--2
Binary Numbering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H--2
Hexadecimal Numbering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H--3
Octal Numbering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H--4
Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) Numbering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H--5
Real (Floating Point) Numbering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H--6
BCD/Binary/Decimal/Hex/Octal -- What is the Difference? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H--7
Data Type Mismatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H--8
Signed vs. Unsigned Integers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H--9
AutomationDirect.com Products and Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H--10
DirectLOGIC PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H--10
C--more/C--more Micro--Graphic Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H--10

Appendix I: European Union Directives (CE)

European Union (EU) Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Member Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Installation Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Sources of Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic EMC Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suppression and Fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I--2
I--2
I--4
I--4
I--4
I--5
I--5
I--5

xiv

Table of Contents
Internal Enclosure Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equi--potential Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications and Shielded Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog and RS232 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multidrop Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shielded Cables within Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Modules and RF Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Powered Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Items Specific to the DL405 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Index

I--6
I--6
I--6
I--7
I--7
I--7
I--8
I--8
I--8
I--8

Getting Started

11

In This Chapter. . . .
Introduction
DL405 System Components
Programming Methods
DirectLOGIC Part Numbering System
Quick Start for PLC Checkout and Programming
Steps to Designing a Successful System
Frequently Asked Questions

1--2

Getting Started

Getting Started

Introduction
The Purpose of
this Manual

Thank you for purchasing our DL405

family of products. This manual shows you
how to install, program, and maintain the
equipment. It also helps you understand
how to interface them to other devices in a
control system.
This
manual
contains
important
information for personnel who will install
DL405 PLCs and components, and for the
PLC programmer. If you understand PLC
systems our manuals will provide all the
information you need to get and keep your
system up and running.

Where to Begin

If you already understand PLCs please read Chapter 2, Installation, Wiring, and
Specifications, and proceed on to other chapters as needed. Be sure to keep this
manual handy for reference when you have questions. If you are a new DL405
customer, we suggest you read this manual completely so you can understand the
wide variety of features in the DL405 family of products. We believe you will be
pleasantly surprised with how much you can accomplish with our products.

Supplemental
Manuals

If you have purchased operator interfaces or DirectSOFT, you will need to

supplement this manual with the manuals that are written for these products.

Technical Support

We realize that even though we strive to be the best, we may have arranged our
information in such a way you cannot find what you are looking for. First, check these
resources for help in locating the information:
S
S
S

Table of Contents -- chapter and section listing of contents, in the front

of this manual
Appendices -- reference material for key topics, near the end of this
manual
Index -- alphabetical listing of key words, at the end of this manual

You can also check our online resources for the latest product support information:
S Internet -- Our Web address is
http://www.automationdirect.com
If you still need assistance, please call us at 770--844--4200. Our technical support
group is glad to work with you in answering your questions. They are available
Monday through Friday from 9:00 A.M. to 6:00 P.M. Eastern Standard Time. If you
have a comment or question about any of our products, services, or manuals, please
fill out and return the Suggestions card that was shipped with this manual.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Getting Started

1--3

Conventions Used

When you see the notepad icon in the left--hand margin, the paragraph to its
immediate right will be a special note.
The word NOTE: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text.

When you see the exclamation mark icon in the left--hand margin, the paragraph to
its immediate right will be a warning. This information could prevent injury, loss of
property, or even death (in extreme cases).
The word WARNING: and text will be in boldface.
Key Topics for
Each Chapter

The beginning of each chapter will list the

key topics that can be found in that
chapter.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Getting Started

When you see the light bulb icon in the left--hand margin, the paragraph to its
immediate right will give you a special tip.
The word TIP: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text.

1--4

Getting Started

Getting Started

DL405 System Components

CPUs

The DL405 product family is one of the most versatile and widely accepted PLCs
used for medium control applications. The CPUs are small, yet powerful. Their
modular design and expansion capability blend well with todays fast-moving
industry. The following is a summary of the major DL405 system components.
There are three feature-enhanced CPUs in this product line, the DL430, DL440, and
the DL450. All include a built-in power supply and communication ports. Each CPU
offers a large amount of program memory, a substantial instruction set and
advanced diagnostics. The DL450 features drum timers, floating-point math, built-in
PID loops, and additional communications ports. Details of these CPU features are
covered in Chapter 3, CPU Specifications and Operation.

Bases

Three base sizes are available in the system: 4 slot, 6 slot and 8 slot.

I/O Configuration

The DL430/440 CPUs can support up to 640 I/O between the CPU base and
expansion bases (the DL450 up to 1024 local I/O). A maximum of 512 additional I/O
for the DL430, 1024 for the DL440, or 1536 for the DL450 can be added to the system
in the form of remote I/O bases and slice I/O blocks. Each of these I/O configurations
is explained in Chapter 4, System Design and configuration.

I/O Modules

The DL405 family has some of the most powerful modules in the industry. They
include a complete range of discrete modules which support 24 VDC, 125 VDC,
110/220 VAC and up to 10A relay outputs. Analog modules provide 12-bit resolution
and several selections of input and output signal ranges (including bipolar).
Specialty modules include a 100KHz high-speed input, thermocouple, general
purpose communication, magnetic pulse input, 16 loop PID function and more.

Programming Methods

DirectSOFT
Programming for
Windows

Handheld
Programmer

There are two programming methods available to the DL405 CPUs, RLL (Relay
Ladder Logic) and RLL PLUS.Stage Programing. Both the DirectSOFT programming
package and the handheld programmer support RLL and Stage.
The DL405 CPUs can be programmed with one of the most advanced programming
packages in the industry ----DirectSOFT 5, Ver. 5 or later. DirectSOFT 5 is a
Windows-based software package that supports many of the Windows features you
already know, such as cut-and-paste between applications, point-and-click editing,
viewing and editing multiple application programs at the same time, browsers, and
newly added Intelligent Box (IBox) Instructions which will help ease your
programming tasks. DirectSOFT 5 universally supports the DirectLOGIC CPU
families. This means you can use the same DirectSOFT 5 package to program
DL105, DL205, DL305, DL405 or any new CPUs that we add to our product line.
There is a separate manual for the DirectSOFT 5 programming software.
All DL405 CPUs have a built-in programming port for use with the handheld
programmer (D4--HPP). The HPP can be used to create, modify and debug your
application program. A separate manual for the DL405 HPP is available.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Getting Started

The diagram below shows the major components and configurations of the DL405
system. The next two pages show specific components for building your system.

COMPUTERS
and
OPERATOR
INTERFACE

PEER-TO-PEER and
MASTER/SLAVE
COMMUNICATIONS

Printer

305

System Migration
or Expansion

DirectNET/Modbusr Communication
(max. 3300ft/1000m)

DirectNET/Modbusr
Communication
(max. 3300ft/1000m)
1. ONLINE/OFFLINE
Programming
2. Reporting
3. Monitoring
4. Debugging

405

General RS232C/
RS422 Port
(max. 3300ft1000m)

DirectNET Communication (max. 3300ft/1000m)

Local Operator
Interface or
handheld programmer
405

RM

Connects to
DL405 Programming Port

DCM MB DCM
MSTR

EX

(Max. 3.3ft/1m)

EX
Up to 3 expansion
bases total
(only 2 shown)

RS

REMOTE I/O

RS

1. Flexible
Placement of I/O
2. Reduced
Installation
Costs
3. Versatile I/O
Offering

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Getting Started

DL405 System
Diagrams

1--5

Getting Started

1--6

Getting Started

Direct LOGIC
DC INPUT
8pt 24--48 VDC
16pt 12--24 VDC
16pt 12--24 VDC
(1ms response)
32pt 24 VDC
32pt 5--12 VDC
64pt 24VDC

AC INPUT
8pt 110--200 VAC
16pt 110 VAC

AC/DC INPUT
8pt 90--150 VAC/DC
Isolated
16pt 12--24 VAC/DC

PROGRAMMING
Handheld Programmer
with Built-in RLL PLUS
DirectSOFT 5 Programming for Windows

COPROCESSORt MODULES
RS232C / RS422 / RS485
Telephone Modem
Program Memory Ranges
from 128K to 512K

SPECIALTY MODULES
8/16pt Input Simulator
8pt Interrupt Input Module
High Speed Counter Module
8 pt. Magnetic Pulse Input Module
16 Loop PID Module
4 Loop Temperature Controller
SDSt Interface Module
Filler Module

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPUs
DL430 -- 110/220 VAC P/S,
6.5K Built-in EPROM Memory
DL440 -- 110/220 VAC P/S,
22.5K Memory (Memory Cartridge Required)
DL440 -- 24 VDC or 125 VDC P/S,
22.5K Memory (Memory Cartridge Required)
DL450 -- 110/220 VAC P/S
7.5K Built-in Flash Memory
DL450 -- 24 VDC or 125 VDC P/S
7.5K Built-in Flash Memory

BASES

4 Slot Bases (expandable or nonexpandable)

6 Slot Bases (expandable or nonexpandable)
8 Slot Base (expandable or nonexpandable)

MEMORY CARTRIDGES
CMOS RAM w/battery
UVPROM
EEPROM

Getting Started

1--7

RELAY OUTPUT
DC OUTPUT
8pt
8pt
16pt
16pt
32pt
32pt
64pt

12--24 VDC
24--250 VDC
5--24 VDC
12--24 VDC
5--24 VDC
12--24 VDC
5--24VDC

8pt
8pt
8pt
16pt

AC OUTPUT
8pt 18--220 VAC
16pt 18--220 VAC

10A/pt
5A/pt
2A/pt
1A/pt

I/O SYSTEMS
Expansion Bases
Local Base Expansion Unit
110/220 VAC P/S
Local Base Expansion Unit
24 VDC P/S
Local Base Expansion Unit
125 VDC P/S
Remote I/O
Remote I/O Master Module
Remote I/O Slave Unit 110--220 VAC
Remote I/O Slave Unit 24 VDC
DL450 CPU
Direct remote I/O link on Port 3

NETWORKING
Ethernet Communication Module
Data Communication Module
DirectNET Network/Modbusr
DL450 CPU (Ports 1 and 3)
DirectNET Network/Modbusr
Modbusr Master Module
Modbusr Slave Module
TIWAYt Network Interface Module
Shared Data Network Module

ANALOG
4CH
8CH
16CH
4CH
8CH
16CH
8CH
8CH

Input
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Thermocouple Input
RTD Input

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Getting Started

DL405 Family

1--8

Getting Started

Getting Started

DirectLOGIC Part Numbering System

A DL405 PLC control system may be comprised of many products from the DL405 family. The part
numbering system below shows how the part numbering systems work for each product category. Part
numbers for accessory items such as cables, batteries, memory cartridges etc. are typically an abbreviation
of the description for the item.

CPUs and Micro PLCs

Specialty CPUs
Product family

D1/F1
D2/F2

D4--

440DC

--1

D3--

05B

D4--

16

D3--

16

D3/F3
D4/F4
Class of CPU / Abbreviation

230...,330...,430...

Denotes a differentiation between

similar modules

--1, --2, --3, --4

Bases
Product family

D2/F2

DC

D3/F3
D4/F4
Number of slots

##B

Type of Base

DC or empty

Discrete I/O
DL205 Product family
y

D2/F2

DL305 Product family

D3/F3

DL405 Product family

D4/F4

Number of points

04/08/12/16/32/64

Input
p

Output
p

Combination

AC

DC

Either

Relay
Current Sinking
g

R
1

Current Sourcing
g

Current Sinking/Sourcing

High
g Current

Isolation

Fast I/O
Denotes a differentiation between
Similar modules

F
--1, --2, --3, --4

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

F
--1

1--9

Getting Started

DirectLOGIC Part Numbering System

DL205 Product family
y

D2/F2

DL305 Product family

D3/F3

DL405 Product family

D4/F4

Number of channels

02/04/08/16

Input
p ((Analog
g to Digital)
g )

AD

Output
p ((Digital
g
to Analog)
g)

DA

Combination
Isolated

xADxDA
S

Denotes a differentiation between

Similar modules

--1, --2, --3, --4

Communication and Networking,

Special I/O and Devices
Programming
DL205 Product family

D2/F2

DL305 Product family

D3/F3

DL405 Product family

D4/F4

Name Abbreviation

see example

CoProcessors and ASCII BASIC Modules

DL205 Product family
y

D2/F2

DL305 Product family

D3/F3

DL405 Product family

D4/F4

CoProcessor

CP

ASCII BASIC

AB

64K memoryy

64

128K memoryy

128

512K memory

512

Radio modem

Telephone modem

F3--

04

AD

Getting Started

Analog I/O

--1

Alternate example of Analog I/O

using abbreviations
F3--

08

THM

--n

note: --n indicates thermocouple type

such as: J, K, T, R, S or E

D4--

DCM

D3--

HSC

HSC (High Speed Counter)

D3--

HPP

HPP (RLL PLUS Handheld Programmer)

F4--

CP

DCM (Data Communication Module)

128

-- R

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

1--10

Getting Started

Getting Started

Quick Start for PLC Checkout and Programming

If you have experience with PLCs, or if you just want to setup a quick example, this
section is for you! This example is not intended to tell you everything you need to
start-up your system. It is only intended to give you a general picture of what you will
need to do to get your system powered-up.
Step 1: Unpack the Unpack the DL405 equipment and verify you have the parts necessary to build this
DL405 Equipment demonstration system. The minimum parts you will need are:
S Base
S CPU (with a memory cartridge if you are using a DL440 or DL450)
S D4--16ND2 DC input module or a D4--16SIM input simulator module
S D4--16TR Relay output module
S Power cord
S Hook up wire
S A 24 VDC toggle switch (if not using the input simulator module)
S A screwdriver, regular or Philips type
You will need at least one of the following programming options:
S DirectSOFT Programming Software, DirectSOFT Manual, and a
programming cable (connects the CPU to a personal computer), or
S D4--HPP Handheld Programmer (programming cable is optional), and
the Handheld Programmer Manual

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Getting Started

Insert the CPU and I/O into the base. The CPU must go into the far left side of the
base in the position marked CPU/Power Supply. When inserting components into
the base, tilt the component slightly forward sliding the tab on the bottom of the
component into the slot in the base. Push the top of the component into the base until
it is seated firmly, then tighten the securing screw at the top of the module/unit.
Placement of discrete, analog and relay modules are not critical and may go in any
slot in any base however for this example install the output module in the slot next to
the CPU (slot 0) and the input module in the next slot (slot 1). Limiting factors for
other types of modules are discussed in Chapter 4, Bases, Expansion Units and I/O
Configuration. You must also make sure you do not exceed the power budget for
each base in your system configuration. Power budgeting is discussed in Chapter 4,
System Design and Configuration.
S
S

Step 3: Remove
Terminal Strip
Access Cover

Each unit has a plastic tab at the

bottom and a screw at the top.
With the unit tilted slightly
forward, hook the modules plastic
tab on the base.
Gently push the top of the unit
back until it is firmly installed in
the base.
Secure the unit to the base by
tightening the top screw.

Remove the terminal strip cover. It has a

small retention snap on the left edge. Push
in and up then pull the cover off.
Push in
and lift off

Step 4: Install
Memory Cartridge

If you are using a DL440 CPU (optional on

DL450) you need to install the memory
cartridge in the slot to the right of the
battery. Make sure it is firmly seated. To
find out more about memory cartridges
see Chapter 3.
Memory
Cartridge

Step 5: Select
Operating Power
Range

If you are using 110VAC install the voltage select jumper on the bottom two
terminals. If you are using 220VAC power, do not install the jumper. You can find a
detailed explanation of the terminal block on both the CPU and expansion units in
Chapter 2, Installation, Wiring, and Specifications.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Getting Started

Step 2: Install the

CPU and I/O
Modules

1--11

Getting Started

1--12

Getting Started

WARNING: Damage will occur to the power supply if 220 VAC is connected to
the terminal connections with the 110 VAC shunt in place.

Run Relay

If using D4--0X--1 type bases,

install this shunt to connect
grounds, for proper noise
immunity.

24V
Auxiliary
Power
Logic
Ground
Chassis
Ground

Install shunt to select

110 VAC range, leave shunt
off to select 220 VAC range.

AC Power

110/220
Voltage
Select

Step 6: Add I/O

Simulation

To finish this quick-start exercise or study other examples in this manual, youll need
to install an input simulator module (or wire an input switch as shown below), and
add an output module. Using an input simulator is the quickest way to get physical
inputs for checking out the system or a new program. To monitor output status, any
discrete output module will do.

--

Toggle switch

Output
Module

Input
Module

Wire the switches or other field devices prior to applying power to the system to
ensure a point is not accidentally turned on during the wiring operation. Wire the
input module (X0) to the toggle switch and 24VDC auxiliary power supply on the
CPU terminal strip as shown below for the 16ND2 input module. Chapter 2,
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications provides a list of I/O wiring guidelines.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

1--13

Getting Started

Connect the wires as shown. Observe all

precautions stated earlier in this manual.
For details on wiring, see Chapter 2,
Installation, Wiring, and Specifications.
When the wiring is complete, replace the
CPU and module covers. Do not apply
power at this time.

Getting Started

Step 7: Connect
the Power Wiring

Ground
Line
Neutral

Step 8: Connect
the Handheld
Programmer

Remove the connector cover at the top

right of the CPU. Join the Handheld
programmers 15 pin D type connector
(located on the back) to the connector you
just uncovered on the CPU. Finger tighten
the securing screws on the top and bottom
of the Handheld programmer.

Step 9: Switch On
the System Power

Apply power to the system and ensure the PWR indicator on the CPU is on. If not,
remove power from the system and check all wiring and refer to the troubleshooting
section in Chapter 9 for assistance.

Step 10: Enter the

Program

Turn the key switch on the CPU to the STOP position and then back to the TERM
position. This puts the CPU in the program mode and allows access to the CPU
program. The PGM indicator should be illuminated on the HPP. Enter the following
keystrokes on the HPP:

Securing screws

NOTE: It is not necessary for you to configure the I/O for this system since the DL430
CPUs automatically configure I/O and the DL440 and DL450 CPUs default to
automatic I/O configuration.

CLR

CLR

AUX

CLR

$(AD)

STR

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

X0

Y0

NXT

END

END

After entering the simple example program turn the key switch from the TERM
position to the RUN position and back to TERM. The RUN indicator on the CPU will
come on indicating the CPU has entered the run mode. If not repeat Step 10 insuring
the program is entered properly or refer to the troubleshooting guide in chapter 9.
During Run mode operation, the output status indicator 0 on the output module
should reflect the switch status. When the switch is on the output should be on.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

1--14

Getting Started

Getting Started

Steps to Designing a Successful System

Step 1: Review the
Installation
Guidelines

Always make safety your first priority in

any system application. Chapter 2
provides several guidelines that will help
provide a safer, more reliable system.
This chapter also includes wiring
guidelines for the various system
components.

Step 2: Understand
the CPU Setup
Procedures

The CPU is the heart of your automation

system. Make sure you take time to
understand its various features and
setup requirements.

Step 3: Understand It is important to understand how to

configure the I/O system. You have
the I/O System
several different types of systems:
Configurations
S Local System
S Expansion System
S Remote I/O System
S Network connections
It is also important to understand how the
system Power Budget is calculated. See
Chapter 4 for more information.
Step 4: Determine
the I/O Module
Specifications and
Wiring
Characteristics

Emergency
Stop

16pt
Input

8pt
Input

32pt
Input

X0

X20

X30

16pt
Output
Y0

8pt
Output

16pt
Output

Y20

Y30

--

--

--

--

--

--

X17

X27

X67

Y17

Y27

Y47

There are many different I/O modules

available with the DL405 system. Chapter
2 provides the specifications and wiring
diagrams for the discrete I/O modules.

32 pt. Module

OR

Ribbon connector

NOTE: Analog and other specialty modules have their own manuals and are not
included in this manual.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

1--15

Getting Started

Step 5: Understand Before you begin to enter a program, it is

the CPU Operation very helpful to understand how the DL405
CPU processes information. This involves
not only program execution steps, but also
involves the various modes of operation
and memory layout characteristics. See
Chapter 3 for more information.

Getting Started

Power up
Initialize hardware
Check I/O module
config. and verify

Step 6: Review the The DL405 PLC provides four main approaches to solving the application program,
including the PID loop task depicted in the next figure.
Programming
Concepts
S RLL diagram-style programming is the best tool for solving boolean logic
and general CPU register/accumulator manipulation. It includes dozens
of instructions, which will augment drums, stages, and loops.
S The DL450 has four timer/event drum types, each with up to 16 steps
They offer both time and/or event-based step transitions. Drums are
best for a repetitive process based on a single series of steps.
S Stage programming (also called RLL Plus) is based on state-transition
diagrams. Stages divide the ladder program into sections which
correspond to the states in a flow chart you draw for your process.
S The DL450 PID Loop Operation uses setup tables to configure up to 16
loops. Features include alarms, SP ramp/soak generation, and more.
Timer/Event Drum Sequencer
(see Chapter 6)

Standard RLL Programming

(see Chapter 5)
X0

LDD
V1076
CMPD
K309482

SP62

Y0
OUT

Stage Programming
(see Chapter 7)
Push--UP

PID Loop Operation

(see Chapter 8)

RAISE

SP
DOWN

LIGHT

UP

PID

Process

-PV

LOWER

Push-DOWN

Step 7: Choose the After installation and studying the main

programming concepts, you can begin
Instructions
writing the application program or
configuring loop operation. Youll discover
a powerful instruction set!

TMR

K30

T1
CNT

K10

CT3

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Getting Started

1--16

Getting Started

Step 8: Understand
the Maintenance
and
Troubleshooting
Procedures

Sometimes equipment failures occur

when we least expect it. Switches fail,
loads short and need replacement, etc.
Often, the majority of the troubleshooting
time is spent in locating the problem. The
DL405 system has many built-in features
such as error codes that can help you
quickly identify problems. See Chapter 9
for diagnostics and troubleshooting tips.

Frequently Asked Questions

Q. How do I reset my DL405 CPU back to factory defaults
A. Resetting the processor to factory defaults is a two step process. First clear the
processor memory using DirectSOFT PLC>CLEAR PLC MEMORY. Next initialize
the scratchpad PLC>SETUP>INITIALIZE SCRATCHPAD. Be aware that
initializing the scratchpad will reset the system V--memory to defaults. System
V--memory contains parameters such as retentive ranges, communications port
settings, etc.
Q. How often should the CPU backup battery be changed?
A. All of the 405 CPUs have an LED indicator that will flash when the battery voltage
is getting low. The typical battery life is 5 years.
Q. Where can I obtain the most current firmware for the DL450?
A. In the tech support section of www.automationdirect.com. The firmware and
instructions on how to update the CPU are available.
Q. Do the DL405 PLCs have ethernet capability?
A. Yes, the H4--ECOM module is needed to support ethernet.
Q. Can the DL405 use the Modbus protocol?
A. The DL450 supports Modbus on port 1 or 3 as a master or slave. The DL--430/440
can support Modbus using the F4--MAS--MB master or F4--SLV--MB slave module.
Q. Can I have more than 16 PID loops on a system using the DL450?
A. Yes. You can still use the 16-loop PID module in the base, plus the DL450s loops.
Q. What are the networking capabilities of the DL450?
A. The DL430/DL440 CPUs can serve as DirectNET slaves. The DL450 has two
network ports, which can serve as DirectNET masters or slaves, or MODBUS
masters or slaves.
Q. Are more FAQs available for the DL405 and other products?
A. Yes, visit www.automationdirect.com for more FAQs and other technical
information.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

12

In This Chapter. . . .
Safety Guidelines
Mounting Guidelines
Installing DL405 Bases
Installing Components in the Base
CPU and Expansion Unit Wiring Guidelines
I/O Wiring Strategies
I/O Module Wiring and Specifications
Glossary of Specification Terms

2--2

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

Safety Guidelines

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

NOTE: Products with CE marks perform their required functions safely and adhere
to relevant standards as specified by CE directives provided they are used
according to their intended purpose and that the instructions in this manual are
adhered to. The protection provided by the equipment may be impaired if this
equipment is used in a manner not specified in this manual. A listing of our
international affiliates is available on our web site: http://www.automationdirect.com.

WARNING: Providing a safe operating environment for personnel and

equipment is your responsibility and should be your primary goal during
system planning and installation. Automation systems can fail and may result
in situations that can cause serious injury to personnel or damage to
equipment. Do not rely on the automation system alone to provide a safe
operating environment. Sufficient emergency circuits should be provided to
stop either partially or totally the operation of the PLC or the controlled
machine or process. These circuits should be routed outside the PLC in the
event of controller failure, so that independent and rapid shutdown are
available. Devices, such as mushroom switches or end of travel limit
switches, should operate motor starter, solenoids, or other devices without
being processed by the PLC. These emergency circuits should be designed
using simple logic with a minimum number of highly reliable
electromechanical components. Every automation application is different, so
there may be special requirements for your particular application. Make sure
you follow all national, state, and local government requirements for the
proper installation and use of your equipment.

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

Plan for Safety

The best way to provide a safe operating environment is to make personnel and
equipment safety part of the planning process. You should examine every aspect of
the system to determine which areas are critical to operator or machine safety.
If you are not familiar with PLC system installation practices, or your company does
not have established installation guidelines, you should obtain additional
information from the following sources.
NEMA The National Electrical Manufacturers Association, located in
Washington, D.C., publishes many different documents that discuss
standards for industrial control systems. You can order these
publications directly from NEMA. Some of these include:
ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems
ICS 3, Industrial Systems
ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Control Systems
NEC The National Electrical Code provides regulations concerning
the installation and use of various types of electrical equipment. Copies
of the NEC Handbook can often be obtained from your local electrical
equipment distributor or your local library.
S Local and State Agencies many local governments and state
governments have additional requirements above and beyond those
described in the NEC Handbook. Check with your local Electrical
Inspector or Fire Marshall office for information.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

Three Levels of
Protection

Emergency Stops

2--3

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

The publications mentioned provide many ideas and requirements for system
safety. At a minimum, you should follow these regulations. Also, you should use the
following techniques, which provide three levels of system control.
Emergency stop switch for disconnecting system power
Mechanical disconnect for output module power
Orderly system shutdown sequence in the PLC control program
It is recommended that emergency stop circuits be incorporated into the system for
every machine controlled by a PLC. For maximum safety in a PLC system, these
circuits must not be wired into the controller, but should be hardwired external to the
PLC. The emergency stop switches should be easily accessed by the operator and
are generally wired into a master control relay (MCR) or a safety control relay (SCR)
that will remove power from the PLC I/O system in an emergency.
MCRs and SCRs provide a convenient means for removing power from the I/O
system during an emergency situation. by de--energizing an MCR (or SCR) coil,
power to the input (optional) and output devices is removed. This event occurs when
any emergency stop switch opens. However, the PLC continues to receive power
and operate even though all its inputs and outputs are disabled.
The MCR circuit could be extended by placing a PLC fault relay (closed during
normal PLC operation) in series with any other emergency stop conditions. This
would cause the MCR circuit to drop the PLC I/O power in case of a PLC failure
(memory error, I/O communications error. etc.).
Use E-Stop and Master Relay

Guard Limit Switch

E STOP

Power On

Emergency
Stop

Guard
Limit

Master
Relay

Master Relay Contacts

PLC Power

To disconnect output
module power

Output
Module

Saw
Arbor

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

Master
Relay
Contacts

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--4

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

Emergency Power
Disconnect

Orderly System
Shutdown

A properly rated emergency power disconnect should be used to power the PLC
controlled system as a means of removing the power from the entire control system.
It may be necessary to install a capacitor across the disconnect to protect against a
condition known as outrush. This condition occurs when the output triacs are
turned off by powering off the disconnect, thus causing the energy stored in the
inductive loads to seek the shortest distance to ground, which is often through the
triacs.
After an emergency shutdown or any other type of power interruption, there may be
requirements that must be met before the PLC control program can be restarted. For
example, there may be specific register values that must be established (or
maintained from the state prior to the shutdown) before operations can resume. In
this case, you may want to use retentive memory locations, or include constants in
the control program to ensure a known starting point.
Ideally, the first level of fault detection is
the PLC control program, which can
identify machine problems. Certain
shutdown sequences should be
performed. The types of problems are
usually things such as jammed parts,
etc., that do not pose a risk of personal
injury or equipment damage.
WARNING: The control program must
not be the only form of protection for
any problems that may result in a risk
of personal injury or equipment
damage.

Jam
Detect

Turn off
Saw
RST
RST
Retract
Arm

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

Class 1, Division 2
Approval

This equipment is suitable for use in Class 1, Division 2, groups A, B, C and D or

non--hazardous locations only.
WARNING: Explosion Hazard! -- Substitution of components may impair
suitability for Class 1, Division 2.

WARNING: Explosion Hazard! -- Do not disconnect equipment unless power

has been switched off or area is known to be non--hazardous.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

2--5

Mounting Guidelines

Base Dimensions

4.375
111mm
3.94
100mm

CPU
Expansion
Unit, Remote
Slave

4 holes, clearance
for M4 screw

4.312
110mm

5.9
150mm

4 Slot Base

6 Slot Base
14.45
367mm
13.74
349mm

11.54
293mm
10.83
275mm

0.47
12 mm

0.75
19 mm

Base mounting
dimensions given to
upper (fully seated)
location

8 Slot Base
Mounting hole
close-up

0.47
12 mm

17.36
441mm
16.65
423mm

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

5.91
4.69
150mm 119mm

0.28
7 mm

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

In addition to the panel layout guidelines, other specifications can affect the
installation of a PLC system. Always consider the following:
Environmental specifications
Power supply specifications
Regulatory Agency Approvals
Enclosure Selection and Component Dimensions
The following diagram shows the outside dimensions and mounting hole locations
for the 4-slot, 6-slot, and 8-slot bases. Make sure you follow the installation
guidelines to allow proper spacing from other components.

5.91
4.69
150mm 119mm

0.75
19 mm

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--6

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

Panel Layout &

Clearances

There are many things to consider when designing the panel layout. The following items
correspond to the diagram shown. Note: there may be additional requirements,
depending on your application and use of other components in the cabinet.
1. The bases must be mounted horizontally to provide proper ventilation.
2. There should be a minimum of 7.2 (183mm) and a maximum of 13.75
(350mm) between bases.
3. A minimum clearance of 2 (50mm) between the base and the top, bottom
and right side of the cabinet should be provided.
4. A minimum clearance of 3 (75mm) between the base and the left side of
the cabinet should be provided.
5. There must be a minimum of 2 clearance between the panel door and the
nearest DL405 component.
Temperature
Probe

Power
Source

50mm
min.

DL405 CPU Base

3
75mm
min.

2
50mm
min.

7.2 -- 13.75

DL405 Local Expansion Base

183 -- 350mm

Panel

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

min.

BUS Bar

Star Washers
Ground Braid
Copper Lugs

Earth Ground

Star
Washers

2
50mm

Panel or
Single Point
Ground

Panel Ground
Terminal
Note: there is a minimum of 2 (50mm)
clearance between the panel door
and the nearest DL405 component.
Not to scale

6. Connect the ground terminal on the DL405 base to a single point ground.
Use copper stranded wire to achieve a low impedance. Copper eye lugs
should be crimped and soldered to the ends of the stranded wire to ensure
good surface contact. Remove anodized finishes and use copper lugs and
star washers at termination points. A rule of thumb is to achieve 0.1 ohm of
DC resistance between the DL405 base and the single point ground.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

2--7

7. There must be a single point ground (i.e. copper bus bar) for all devices in
the panel requiring an earth ground return. The single point of ground must
be connected to the panel ground termination.
The panel ground termination must be connected to earth ground. For this
connection you should use #12 AWG stranded copper wire as a minimum.
Minimum wire sizes, color coding, and general safety practices should
comply with appropriate electrical codes and standards for your area.
A good common ground reference (Earth ground) is essential for proper
operation of the DL405, which include:
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

a) Installing a ground rod as close to the panel as possible.

b) Connection to incoming power system ground.
8. Installations where the ambient temperature may approach the lower or
upper limits of the specifications should be evaluated properly. To do this
place a temperature probe in the panel, close the door and operate the
system until the ambient temperature has stabilized. If the ambient
temperature is not within the operating specification for the DL405 system,
measures such as installing a cooling/heating source must be taken to get
the ambient temperature within the DL405 operating specifications.
9. Device mounting bolts and ground braid termination bolts should be #10
copper bolts or equivalent. Tapped holes instead of nut--bolt arrangements
should be used whenever possible. To assure good contact on termination
areas impediments such as paint, coating or corrosion should be removed
in the area of contact.
10. The DL405 system is designed to be powered by 110 VAC, 220 VAC, or 24
VDC normally available throughout an industrial environment. Isolation
transformers and noise suppression devices are not normally necessary,
but may be helpful in eliminating/reducing suspect power problems.
Your selection of a proper enclosure is important to ensure safe and proper
operation of your DL405 system. Applications of DL405 systems vary and may
require additional features. The minimum considerations for enclosures include:
Conformance to electrical standards
Protection from the elements in an industrial environment
Common ground reference
Maintenance of specified ambient temperature
Access to equipment
Security or restricted access
S Sufficient space for proper installation, cooling, and maintenance

Agency Approvals

Some applications require agency approvals. The DL405 agency approvals for
which DL405 products are submitted are;
UL (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.)
CE EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility)
CUL (Canadian Underwriters Laboratories)
A complete listing of agency approvals for each product in the DL405 family is
available in the sales catalog, or you may call 1--800--633--0405 (U.S.).

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

Enclosures

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--8

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

Environmental
Specifications

Specification

Rating

Storage temperature

--4 F to 158 F (--20 C to 70 C)*

Ambient operating temperature

32 F to 140 F (0 C to 60 C)

Ambient humidity

5% -- 95% relative humidity (non--condensing) **

Vibration resistance

MIL STD 810C, Method 514.2

Shock resistance

MIL STD 810C, Method 516.2

Noise immunity

NEMA (ICS3--304)

Atmosphere

No corrosive gases

*Storage temperature for the Handheld Programmer is 14 to 149F (--10 to 65 C)

**Ambient humidity for the Handheld Programmer is 20% to 90% non-condensing.

Power

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

The following table lists the environmental specifications that generally apply to the
DL405 system (CPU, Expansion Unit, Bases, I/O Modules). The ranges that vary for
the Handheld Programmer are noted at the bottom of this chart. I/O module
operation may fluctuate depending on the ambient temperature and your
application. Please refer to the appropriate I/O module chapters for the temperature
derating curves applying to specific modules.

The external power source must be capable of suppling voltage and current
complying with the PLC power supply specifications.
Specifications

DL405 Series CPUs

Voltage withstand
(dielectric strength)

1 min. @ 1500 VAC between primary,

secondary, field ground and run relay

Insulation resistance

> 10M at 500 VDC

Input voltage range

D4--430 / D4--440 / D4--450 / D4--EX

85--132 VAC (110 range) / 170--264 VAC (220

range)

Input voltage range D4--440DC--1 /

D4--EXDC

20--29 VDC (24VDC) less than 10% ripple

Input voltage range D4--440DC--2 /

D4--EXDC--2

90--146 VDC (125 VDC) less than 10% ripple

Maximum inrush current D4--430 /

D4--440 / D4--EX

20A

Maximum inrush current D440DC--1 /

D4--EXDC

10A

Maximum inrush current DL440DC--2 / 20A

D4--EXDC--2
Maximum power
DL430/DL440/DL450,
D4--EX

50VA

Maximum power DL440DC--1,

D4--EXDC

38W

Maximum power DL440DC--2,

D4--EXDC--2

30W

24VDC Auxiliary Power Supply

(D4--EX only)

20--28 VDC @ 0.4A maximum, ripple > 1V p-p

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

Component
Dimensions

2--9

Before installing your PLC system you will need to know the dimensions for the
components in your system. The diagram on this page provide the component
dimensions and should be used to define your enclosure specifications. Remember
to leave room for potential expansion. Appendix E provides the weights for each
component.
Handheld programmer
5.7
145mm

1.2
30mm

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

Memory
Cartridge
3.14
80mm

4.65
118mm

I/O modules
4.375
111mm
4
100mm

I/O module w/Ribbon connector

1.37
34.8mm

NOTE: Ribbon connector and

D shell extend out past module
and may affect depth of cabinet

5.9
150m

4.5 ft.(1.5m)
9.1 ft. (3m)

Base Expansion Cable

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

Handheld programmer cable

1.6ft. (.5m)
3.3 ft. (1m)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--10

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

Installing DL405 Bases

Three Sizes of
Bases

All I/O configurations of the DL405 (except for Slice I/O) will use a selection of either
4, 6 or 8 slot base(s). Local and expansion bases can be 4, 6, or 8-slot in size. Local
and expansion bases differ only in how they are wired in a system.
Expansion cable
input connection

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

Local Base
Expansion cable
output connection

Expansion
cable

8 slot base

Expansion Bases

Expansion
Power
Supplies

6 slot base

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

4 slot base

WARNING: To minimize the risk of electrical shock, personal injury, or

equipment damage, always disconnect the system power before installing or
removing any system component.
Mounting
the Base

The CPU/Expansion Unit/Remote Slave must always be installed in the left-most

slot in a base. This slot is marked on the base as P/S, CPU. The I/O modules can be
installed in any remaining slots. It is not necessary for all slots to be filled for your
system to work correctly. You may use filler modules to fill the empty slots in the base.
The base is secured to the equipment panel
or machine using four M4 screws in the
corner locations shown to the right. The
mounting cut-outs allow removal of the base
after installation, without completely
removing the mounting screws. Full
mounting template dimensions are given in
the previous section on Mounting
Guidelines.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Base mounting holes,

4 locations

Mounting hole
close-up

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

Choosing the
Base Type

Local
S R
M M

CPU

Expansion cable
Expansion
EXP

S
M

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

There are two types of bases to choose

from. The standard base type restricts the
placement of specialty modules (or
intelligent modules) to the local base with
the CPU. By using the DL450 CPU and the
new expanded bus base type, you can
also use specialty modules in expansion
bases as shown to the right. When all
bases in the local/expansion system are of
the new type, the DL450 can
communicate with specialty modules in
any base. In all other respects, the new
base is an exact replacement for the
standard bases.

2--11

The part numbers for standard bases and the new bases are listed below.
Standard Bases

D4--04B

D4--06B

D4--08B

Expanded Bus Bases

D4--04B--1

Allows selected
specialty modules
in expansion bases

D4--06B--1

D4--08B--1

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

The base expansion connectors on the new bases have new data signals used in
communicating with specialty I/O across bases. Accordingly, you must observe the
following restrictions and guidelines with the new bases:
Only the DL450 type CPU (in the local base) can communicate with a
specialty module in an expansion base.
In the above case, both local and expansion bases must be the new
(--1) type.
Of course, you can still have specialty modules in the local base.
The new bases can also be used with DL430 and DL440 CPUs
(however, these CPUs cannot communicate with specialty I/O in
expansion bases).
You can mix standard bases with new bases in a system, but no
specialty I/O modules may be used in expansion bases in this case (the
standard bases do not pass through the specialty I/O signals on their
expansion connectors).
NOTE: If you are designing a new DL450 CPU--based application, we recommend
using the new bases (--1 type) so you can add specialty modules in any base later.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--12

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

Installing Components in the Base

There is one bank of four configuration switches located on the back of DL430 and
DL440 CPUs. These switches affect battery low detection, station address override
and baud rate of the secondary port (25-pin D connector). The figure below indicates
the location of these DIP switches. Equivalent configuration of the DL450 CPU
requires selecting AUX functions on a programming device.
Switch 1
S ON = Battery low indicator disabled
S OFF= Battery low indicator enabled
Switch 2
S ON = Station address override is
enabled (address 1)
S OFF= Station address is set by
AUX function with programming
device

ON
1
2
3
4

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

Setting the CPU

DIP Switches
(DL430/440 Only)

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

NOTE: Setting Switch 2 on forces the station address to 1. It does not change the
address set by the programming device. When Switch 2 is turned off again the
address will revert back to the address stored in memory via the AUX function.
Port 1 Baud Rate

Switch 3

Switch 4

300

Off

Off

1200

Off

On

9600

On

Off

19200

On

On

NOTE: Parity, Mode and Station address for port 2 is selected by AUX functions
using a programming device.
1. Note the components have plastic tabs
at the bottom and a screw at the top.
2. With the device tilted slightly forward,
hook the plastic tabs into the notch on
the base.
3. Then gently push the top of the
component back toward the base until
it is firmly installed into the base.
4. Now tighten the screw at the top of the
device to secure it to the base.

Spring loaded
securing screw

WARNING: To minimize the risk of electrical shock, personal injury, or

equipment damage, always disconnect the system power before installing or
removing any system component.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

2--13

CPU and Expansion Unit Wiring Guidelines

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

The main power terminal connections are under the front covers of the DL405 CPUs
and Expansion Units. The list below describes the function of each of the terminal
screws. Most of the terminal screws are identical between the CPU and the
Expansion Unit. If the terminal screw only applies to one of the units it will be noted.
Run Relay -- (CPU only) indicates to an external device when the CPU
is in Run Mode by contact closure. Its normally-open contacts can also
remove power from critical I/O points if CPU comes out of Run mode.
24VDC Auxiliary Power -- can be used to power field devices or I/O
modules requiring external power. It supplies up to 400 mA of current at
20--28VDC, ripple less than 1 V P-P. (Not available on DC CPUs.)
Logic Ground -- internal ground to the system which can be tied to field
devices/communication ports to unite ground signals.
Chassis Ground -- where earth ground is connected to the unit.
AC Power --where the line (hot) and the neutral (common) connections
are made to the CPU/Expansion Unit. (This is also where the DC power
source is connected for the 24/125 VDC CPU. The positive connection
is tied to line and the negative connection is tied to ground.)
110/220 Voltage Select -- a shunt across two of the terminals
determines the voltage selection. Install the shunt to select 110VAC
input power, and remove the shunt to select 220VAC power input (the
shunt is not required for DC-powered CPUs or Expansion Units.)
WARNING: Damage will occur to the power supply if 220 VAC is connected to
the terminal connections with the 115 VAC shunt installed. Once the power
wiring is connected, install the protective cover to avoid risk of accidental
shock.
CPU Wiring

The following diagram details the appropriate connections for each terminal.
24VDC
Terminal
Strip

AC Terminal
Strip

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

125VDC
Terminal
Strip

24V Auxiliary
Power
Logic
Ground
Chassis
Ground
+ DC
-- DC

Logic
Ground
Chassis
Ground
+ DC
-- DC

Logic Ground
Chassis
Ground
AC Line
AC Neutral
110/220
Voltage Select

Install shunt between LG and G

Recommended screw torque: 10.6 lb--in (1.2Nm)

Install shunt for 110 VAC range,

leave off for 220 VAC range.

Install shunt between LG and G

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--14

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

The following diagram details the appropriate connections for each terminal.

Expansion
Unit Wiring
125VDC
Terminal Strip

24VDC
Terminal Strip

AC Terminal Strip

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

24V Auxiliary
Power
Logic
Ground
Chassis
Ground
+ DC

Logic
Ground
Chassis
Ground
+ DC

-- DC

-- DC

Chassis
Ground
AC Line
AC Neutral
110/220
Voltage Select

Install shunt between LG and G

Recommended screw torque: 10.6 lb--in (1.2Nm)

Connecting
Programming
Devices

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

Logic Ground

Install shunt for 110 VAC range,

leave off for 220 VAC range.

Install shunt between LG and G

You can mount the Handheld directly to Port 0 of any DL405 CPU (15-pin D-shell
connector), or you can use a 9 foot (3m) or 4.6 ft (1.5m) cable as shown below.
Cable Mount

Direct Mount

Use cable part no.

D4--HPCBL--1, or
D4--HPCBL--2

Retaining Screws

The standard port for use in DirectSOFT programming is the 15-pin port 0 on all
DL405 CPUs. The cable shown below is approximately 12 feet (3.66m) long.
All DL405 CPUs, port 0
15-pin Dshell male

9-pin D-shell
female

Use cable part no.

D4--DSCBL

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

2--15

On the DL450, you may use port 2 instead for DirectSOFT programming. The cable
shown below is approximately 12 feet (3.66m) long.
DL450 CPU, port 2

RJ12
phone style

9-pin D-shell
female

Use cable part no.

D2--DSCBL

Operator interfaces usually require data and power connections. However, the
popular DV-1000 Data Access Unit may receive data and power directly from any
DL405 CPU, using the 2 meter (6.56 ft.) long cable shown below.
All DL405 CPUs, port 0

15-pin D-shell
male

RJ12
phone style

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

Connecting
Operator Interface
Devices

DV-1000

Use cable part no.

D4--1000CBL

The DL450 can connect to a DV-1000 from port 2, using the 2 meter (6.56 ft.) long
cable shown below.
DL450 CPU, port 2
RJ12
phone style

RJ12
phone style

DV-1000

Use cable part no.

DV--1000CBL

All DL405 CPUs, port 0 or port 1

15-pin D-shell
male

15-pin D-shell male

Optimation Panel

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

Optimation operator interface panels require separate power and data connections.
Connect the CPU port 0, port 1, or port 2 (DL450) to an Optimation panel choosing
the appropriate 2 meter (6.56 ft.) long cable from the three shown below.

OP--4CBL--1
25-pin D-shell male

OP--4CBL--2

DL450 CPU, port 2

Optimation Panel
RJ12
phone style

15-pin D-shell
male

OP--2CBL

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--16

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

I/O Wiring Strategies

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

PLC Isolation
Boundaries

The DL405 PLC system is very flexible and will work in many different wiring
configurations. By studying this section before actual installation, you can probably
find the best wiring strategy for your application . This will help to lower system cost,
wiring errors, and avoid safety problems.
PLC circuitry is divided into three main regions separated by isolation boundaries,
shown in the drawing below. Electrical isolation provides safety, so that a fault in one
area does not damage another. A transformer in the power supply provides
magnetic isolation between the primary and secondary sides. Opto-couplers
provide optical isolation in Input and Output circuits. This isolates logic circuitry from
the field side, where factory machinery connects. Note that the discrete inputs are
isolated from the discrete outputs, because each is isolated from the logic side.
Isolation boundaries protect the operator interface (and the operator) from power
input faults or field wiring faults. When wiring a PLC, it is extremely important to avoid
making external connections that connect logic side circuits to any other.
Primary Side

Secondary or
Logic side

PLC
Main
Power
Supply

Power Input

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

Isolation
Boundary

CPU

Field Side

(backplane)

Input
Module

Inputs

(backplane)

Output
Module

Outputs

Programming Device,
Operator Interface, or Network

Isolation
Boundary

The next figure shows the physical layout of a DL405 PLC system, as viewed from
the front. In addition to the basic circuits covered above, AC-powered CPUs include
an auxiliary +24VDC power supply with its own isolation boundary. Since the supply
output is isolated from the other three circuits, it can power input and/or output
circuits!
Primary Side
Power Input

+24VDC Out

Main
Power
Supply

DL405
PLC

Secondary, or
Logic side
Internal

CPU

Auxiliary
+24VDC
Supply

Backplane

Comm.

Input Module

To Programming
Device, Operator
Interface, Network

Inputs Commons

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Field Side

Output Module

Outputs Commons
Supply for
Output Circuit

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

Powering I/O
Circuits with the
Auxiliary Supply

2--17

In some cases, using the built-in auxiliary +24VDC supply can result in a cost
savings for your control system. It can power combined loads up to 400 mA. Be
careful not to exceed the current rating of the supply. If you are the system designer
for your application, you may be able to select and design in field devices which can
use the +24VDC auxiliary supply.
All DL405 CPUs feature the internal auxiliary supply. If input devices AND output
loads need +24VDC power, the auxiliary supply may be able to power both circuits
as shown in the following diagram (400 mA limit).
AC Power

Auxiliary
+24VDC
Supply

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

Power Input

DL405 PLC
Input Module

Output Module

Inputs

Outputs Com.

Com.

-Loads

DC-powered DL405 CPUs are designed for application environments in which

low-voltage DC power is more readily available than AC. These include a wide range
of battery--powered applications, such as remotely-located control, in vehicles,
portable machines, etc. For this application type, all input devices and output loads
typically use the same DC power source. Typical wiring for DC-powered applications
is shown in the following diagram.
+

--

--

DC Power

DL405 PLC
Power Input

Input Module
Inputs

Com.

Output Module

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

Outputs Com.

Loads

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--18

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

Powering I/O
Circuits Using
Separate Supplies

In most applications it will be necessary to power the input devices from one power
source, and to power output loads from another source. Loads often require
high-energy AC power, while input sensors use low-energy DC. If a machine
operator is likely to come in close contact with input wiring, then safety reasons also
require isolation from high-energy output circuits. It is most convenient if the loads
can use the same power source as the PLC, and the input sensors can use the
auxiliary supply, as shown to the left in the figure below.
If the loads cannot be powered from the PLC supply, then a separate supply must be
used as shown to the right in the figure below.

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

AC Power
Power Input

Auxiliary
+24VDC
Supply

AC Power
Power Input

DL405 PLC
Input Module

Output Module

Inputs

Outputs Com.

Com.

--

Auxiliary
+24VDC
Supply

DL405 PLC
Input Module

Output Module

Inputs

Outputs Com.

Com.

--

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

Loads

Loads

Load
Supply

Some applications will use the PLC external power source to also power the input
circuit. This typically occurs on DC-powered PLCs, as shown in the drawing below to
the left. The inputs share the PLC power source supply, while the outputs have their
own separate supply.
A worst-case scenario, from a cost and complexity view-point, is an application
which requires separate power sources for the PLC, input devices, and output loads.
The example wiring diagram below on the right shows how this can work, but also
that the auxiliary supply output is an unused resource. For these reasons, youll
probably want to avoid this situation if possible.
+

--

--

DC Power
AC Power

DL405 PLC
Power Input

Input Module
Inputs

Com.

Power Input

Output Module

Auxiliary
+24VDC
Supply

Outputs Com.

+
Loads

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Load
Supply

DL405 PLC
Input Module

Output Module

Inputs

Com.

Outputs Com.

Input
Supply

Loads

-Load
Supply

2--19

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

Sinking/Sourcing
Concepts

Before going further in our study of wiring strategies, we must have a solid
understanding of sinking and sourcing concepts. Use of these terms occurs
frequently in input or output circuit discussions. It is the goal of this section to make
these concepts easy to understand, further ensuring your success in installation.
First we give the following short definitions, followed by practical applications.

Sinking = provides a path to supply ground (--)

Sourcing = provides a path to supply source (+)

For example, the figure to the right depicts

a sinking input. To properly connect the
external supply, we just have to connect it
so the input provides a path to ground (--).
So, we start at the PLC input terminal,
follow through the input sensing circuit,
exit at the common terminal, and connect
the supply (--) to the common terminal. By
adding the switch, between the supply (+)
and the input, we have completed the
circuit. Current flows in the direction of the
arrow when the switch is closed.

Input
(sinking)
+

PLC

Input
Sensing

-Common

Input
+
--

Common

PLC
Input
Sensing

Sourcing Input
Common
+
--

Input

Sinking Output
PLC

Output
Switch

Output

Load
+
--

Common

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

By applying the circuit principle above to the four possible combinations of

input/output sinking/sourcing types, we have the four circuits as shown below. The
I/O module specifications at the end of this chapter list the input or output type.
Sinking Input

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

First you will notice that these are only associated with DC circuits and not AC,
because of the reference to (+) and (--) polarities. Therefore, sinking and sourcing
terminology only applies to DC input and output circuits. Input and output points that
are sinking or sourcing only can conduct current in only one direction. This means it
is possible to connect the external supply and field device to the I/O point with current
trying to flow in the wrong direction, and the circuit will not operate. However, we can
successfully connect the supply and field device every time by understanding
sourcing and sinking.

Sourcing Output
PLC
Input
Sensing

PLC
Output
Switch

Common
+
Output

Load

--

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--20

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

I/O Common
In order for a PLC I/O circuit to operate,
Terminal Concepts current must enter at one terminal and exit
at another. This means at least two
terminals are associated with every I/O
point. In the figure to the right, the Input or
Output terminal is the main path for the
current. One additional terminal must
provide the return path to the power
supply.
If we had unlimited space and budget for
I/O terminals, then every I/O point could
have two dedicated terminals just as the
figure above shows. However, providing
this level of flexibility is not practical or
even necessary for most applications. So,
most Input or Output points on PLCs are in
groups which share the return path (called
commons). The figure to the right shows a
group (or bank) of 4 input points which
share a common return path. In this way,
the four inputs require only five terminals
instead of eight.

PLC

Main Path
(I/O Point)

Field
Device

I/O
Circuit

+
-Return Path

PLC
Input
Sensing

Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
+
--

Common

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

NOTE: In the circuit above, the current in the common path is 4 times any channels
input current when all inputs are energized. This is especially important in output
circuits, where heavier gauge wire is sometimes necessary on commons.
Most DL405 input and output modules
group their I/O points into banks that share
a common return path. The best indication
of I/O common grouping is on the wiring
label, such as the one shown to the right.
The miniature schematic shows two circuit
banks with eight input points in each. The
common terminal for each is labeled CA
and CB, respectively.
In the wiring label example, the positive
terminal of a DC supply connects to the
common terminals. Some symbols you
will see on the wiring labels, and their
meanings are:
AC supply

DC supply
--

Input Switch

AC or DC supply

Output Load
L

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

12--24VDC

INPUT

TB
A
0
1
2
3

B
4
5
6
7

0
1
2
3

D4--16ND2
10.2--26.4VDC
4--12mA

CA
0
4
1
5
2
6
3
7
CB
4
0
5
1
6
2
7
3

4
5
6
7

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

2--21

Connecting DC I/O In the previous section on Sourcing and Sinking concepts, we explained that DC I/O
circuits sometimes will only allow current to flow one way. This is also true for many of
to Solid State
the field devices which have solid-state (transistor) interfaces. In other words, field
Field Devices
devices can also be sourcing or sinking. When connecting two devices in a series
DC circuit, one must be wired as sourcing and the other as sinking.
Solid State
Several DL405 DC input modules are flexible in that they detect current flow in either
direction, so they can be wired as either sourcing or sinking. In the following circuit, a
Input Sensors
field device has an open-collector NPN transistor output. It sinks current from the
PLC input point, which sources current. The power supply can be the +24 auxiliary
supply or another supply (+12 VDC or +24VDC), as long as the input specifications
are met.
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

Field Device

PLC DC Input
Input
(sourcing)

Output
(sinking)
Supply
Ground

--

Common

In the next circuit, a field device has an open-emitter PNP transistor output. It
sources current to the PLC input point, which sinks the current back to ground. Since
the field device is sourcing current, no additional power supply is required.
Field Device
+V

PLC DC Input
Input
Output (sourcing)
Ground

Common

Sometimes an application requires connecting a PLC output point to a solid state

input on a device. This type of connection is usually made to carry a low-level control
signal, not to send DC power to an actuator.
Several of the DL405 DC output modules are the sinking type. This means that each
DC output provides a path to ground when it is energized. In the following circuit, the
PLC output point sinks current to the output common when energized. It is
connected to a sourcing input of a field device input.
PLC DC Sinking Output
Power
+DC pwr

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

Solid State
Output Loads

(sinking)

Field Device
+V

Output
(sinking)

Common

--

Input
(sourcing)
10--30 VDC
Ground

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--22

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

In the next example we connect a PLC sinking DC output point to the sinking input of
a field device. This is a bit tricky, because both the PLC output and field device input
are sinking type. Since the circuit must have one sourcing and one sinking device,
we add sourcing capability to the PLC output by using a pull-up resistor. In the circuit
below, we connect Rpull-up from the output to the DC output circuit power input.
PLC DC Output

Power

+DC pwr

Field Device

R pull-up

(sourcing)

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

(sinking)

Output
Supply
Common

Input
(sinking)

--

Ground

R input

NOTE 1: DO NOT attempt to drive a heavy load (>25 mA) with this pull-up method
NOTE 2: Using the pull-up resistor to implement a sourcing output has the effect of
inverting the output point logic. In other words, the field device input is energized
when the PLC output is OFF, from a ladder logic point-of-view. Your ladder program
must comprehend this and generate an inverted output. Or, you may choose to
cancel the effect of the inversion elsewhere, such as in the field device.
It is important to choose the correct value of R pull-up. In order to do so, we need to
know the nominal input current to the field device (I input) when the input is energized.
If this value is not known, it can be calculated as shown (a typical value is 15 mA).
Then use I input and the voltage of the external supply to compute R pull-up. Then
calculate the power Ppull-up (in watts), in order to size R pull-up properly.

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

input

R pull-up =

input (turn--on)

R input
V supply -- 0.7
I

input

-- R input

pull-up

2
V supply
R pullup

Of course, the easiest way to drive a sinking input field device as shown below is to
use a DC sourcing output module. The Darlington NPN stage will have about 1.5 V
ON-state saturation, but this is not a problem with low-current solid-state loads.
PLC DC Sourcing Output
+DC pwr

Common
Field Device
Output (sourcing)
Supply

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Input
(sinking)

--

Ground

R input

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

Relay Output
Guidelines

2--23

Four output modules in the DL405 I/O family feature relay outputs: D4--08TR,
F4--08TRS--1, F4--08TRS--2, D4--16TR. Relays are best for the following
applications:

Loads that require higher currents than the solid-state outputs can
deliver
Cost-sensitive applications
Some output channels need isolation from other outputs (such as when
some loads require different voltages than other loads)

Loads that require currents under 10 mA

Loads which must be switched at high speed or heavy duty cycle
Relay with Form A contacts

Relay with Form C contacts

The following pages are intended to give a quick overview of the negative effects of
transient voltages on a control system and provide some simple advice on how to
effectively minimize them. The need for transient suppression is often not apparent
to the newcomers in the automation world. Many mysterious errors that can afflict an
installation can be traced back to a lack of transient suppression.

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

Relay outputs in the DL405 output

modules are available in two contact
arrangements, shown to the right. The
Form A type, or SPST (single pole, single
throw) type is normally open and is the
simplest to use. The Form C type, or
SPDT (single pole, double throw) type has
a center contact which moves and a
stationary contact on either side. This
provides a normally closed contact and a
normally open contact.
Some relay output modules relays share
common terminals, which connect to the
wiper contact in each relay of the bank.
Other relay modules have relays which
are completely isolated from each other. In
all cases, the module drives the relay coil
when the corresponding output point is on.
Transient
Suppression for
Inductive Loads in
a Control System

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

Some applications in which NOT to use relays:

What is a Transient Voltage and Why is it Bad?

Inductive loads (devices with a coil) generate transient voltages as they transition
from being energized to being de--energized. If not suppressed, the transient can be
many times greater than the voltage applied to the coil. These transient voltages can
damage PLC outputs or other electronic devices connected to the circuit, and cause
unreliable operation of other electronics in the general area. Transients must be
managed with suppressors for long component life and reliable operation of the
control system.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--24

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

This example shows a simple circuit with a small 24V/125mA/3W relay. As you can
see, when the switch is opened, thereby de--energizing the coil, the transient voltage
generated across the switch contacts peaks at 140V.

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

Example: Circuit with no Suppression

In the same circuit, replacing the relay with a larger 24V/290mA/7W relay will
generate a transient voltage exceeding 800V (not shown). Transient voltages like
this can cause many problems, including:
Relay contacts driving the coil may experience arcing, which can pit the
contacts and reduce the relays lifespan.
Solid state (transistor) outputs driving the coil can be damaged if the
transient voltage exceeds the transistors ratings. In extreme cases,
complete failure of the output can occur the very first time a coil is
de--energized.
Input circuits, which might be connected to monitor the coil or the
output driver, can also be damaged by the transient voltage.
A very destructive side--effect of the arcing across relay contacts is the
electromagnetic interference (EMI) it can cause. This occurs because the arcing
causes a current surge, which releases RF energy. The entire length of wire
between the relay contacts, the coil, and the power source carries the current surge
and becomes an antenna that radiates the RF energy. It will readily couple into
parallel wiring and may disrupt the PLC and other electronics in the area. This EMI
can make an otherwise stable control system behave unpredictably at times.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

2--25

PLCs Integrated Transient Suppressors

Although the PLCs outputs typically have integrated suppressors to protect against
transients, they are not capable of handling them all. It is usually necessary to have
some additional transient suppression for an inductive load.

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

Here is another example using the same 24V/125mA/3W relay used earlier. This
example measures the PNP transistor output of a D0--06DD2 PLC, which
incorporates an integrated Zener diode for transient suppression. Instead of the
140V peak in the first example, the transient voltage here is limited to about 40V by
the Zener diode. While the PLC will probably tolerate repeated transients in this
range for some time, the 40V is still beyond the modules peak output voltage rating
of 30V.
Example: Small Inductive Load with Only Integrated Suppression

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

The next example uses the same circuit as above, but with a larger 24V/290mA/7W
relay, thereby creating a larger inductive load. As you can see, the transient voltage
generated is much worse, peaking at over 50V. Driving an inductive load of this size
without additional transient suppression is very likely to permanently damage the
PLC output.
Example: Larger Inductive Load with Only Integrated Suppression

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--26

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

Additional transient suppression should be used in both of the preceding examples.

If you are unable to measure the transients generated by the connected loads of
your control system, using additional transient suppression on all inductive loads
would be the safest practice.
Types of Additional Transient Protection
DC Coils:
The most effective protection against transients from a DC coil is a flyback diode. A
flyback diode can reduce the transient to roughly 1V over the supply voltage, as
shown in this example.

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

Many AutomationDirect socketed relays and motor starters have add--on flyback
diodes that plug or screw into the base, such as the AD--ASMD--250 protection diode
module and 784--4C--SKT--1 socket module shown below. If an add--on flyback
diode is not available for your inductive load, an easy way to add one is to use
AutomationDirects DN--D10DR--A diode terminal block, a 600 VDC power diode
mounted in a slim DIN rail housing.

Two more common options for DC coils are Metal Oxide Varistors (MOV) or TVS
diodes. These devices should be connected across the driver (PLC output) for best
protection as shown below. The optimum voltage rating for the suppressor is the
lowest rated voltage available that will NOT conduct at the supply voltage, while
allowing a safe margin.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

2--27

AutomationDirects ZL--TSD8--24 transorb module is a

good choice for 24 VDC circuits. It is a bank of 8 uni-directional 30 V TVS diodes. Since they are uni--directional, be sure to observe the polarity during installation. MOVs or bi--directional TVS diodes would
install at the same location, but have no polarity concerns.
ZL--TSD8--24
Transorb Module
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

AC Coils:
Two options for AC coils are MOVs or bi--directional TVS diodes. These devices are
most effective at protecting the driver from a transient voltage when connected
across the driver (PLC output) but are also commonly connected across the coil. The
optimum voltage rating for the suppressor is the lowest rated voltage available that
will NOT conduct at the supply voltage, while allowing a safe margin.
AutomatiojnDirects ZL--TSD8--120 transorb module is
a good choice for 120 VAC circuits. It is a bank of
eight bi--dirctional 180 V TVS diodes.

ZL--TSD8--120
Transorb Module

For example, a MOV or TVS diode rated for use on 24--48 VDC coils would need to
have a high enough voltage rating to NOT conduct at 48V. That suppressor might
typically start conducting at roughly 60VDC. If it were mounted across a 24V coil,
transients of roughly 84V (if sinking output) or --60V (if sourcing output) could reach
the PLC output. Many semiconductor PLC outputs cannot tolerate such levels.

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

NOTE: Manufacturers of devices with coils frequently offer MOV or TVS diode
suppressors as an add--on option which mount conveniently across the coil. Before
using them, carefully check the suppressors ratings. Just because the suppressor
is made specifically for that part does not mean it will reduce the transient voltages to
an acceptable level.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--28

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

Prolonging Relay
Contact Life

Relay contacts wear according to the amount of relay switching, amount of spark
created at the time of open or closure, and presence of airborne contaminants.
There are some steps you can take to help prolong the life of relay contacts, such as
switching the relay on or off only when it is necessary, and if possible, switching the
load on or off at a time when it will draw the least current. Also, take measures to
suppress inductive voltage spikes from inductive DC loads such as contactors and
solenoids.
For inductive loads in DC circuits we recommend using a suppression diode as
shown in the following diagram (DO NOT use this circuit with an AC power supply).
When the load is energized the diode is reverse-biased (high impedance). When the
load is turned off, energy stored in its coil is released in the form of a negative-going
voltage spike. At this moment the diode is forward-biased (low impedance) and
shunts the energy to ground. This protects the relay contacts from the high voltage
arc that would occur just as the contacts are opening.
Place the diode as close to the inductive field device as possible. Use a diode with a
peak inverse voltage rating (PIV) at least 100 PIV, 3A forward current or larger. Use a
fast-recovery type (such as Schottky type). DO NOT use a small-signal diode such
as 1N914, 1N941, etc. Be sure the diode is in the circuit correctly before operation. If
installed backwards, it short-circuits the supply when the relay energizes.
Inductive Field Device

PLC Relay Output

Input

Output
Supply

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

Common

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

--

Common

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

2--29

Another method of surge suppression is to use a resistor and capacitor (RC)

snubber network. The RC network must be located close to the relay module output
connector. To find the values for the RC snubber network, first determine the voltage
across the contacts when open, and the current through them when closed. If the
load supply is AC, then convert the current and voltage values to peak values:
Now we are ready to calculate values for R and C, according to the formulas:

C (F) =

R () =

10

V
10 x I

, where x= 1 +

50
V
Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

C minimum = 0.001 F, the voltage rating of C must be V, non-polarized

R minimum = 0.5 , 1/2 W, tolerance is 5%
For example, suppose a relay contact drives a load at 120VAC, 1/2 A. Since this
example has an AC power source, we first, we calculate the peak values:
Ipeak = Irms x 1.414, = 0.5 x 1.414 = 0.707 Amperes
Vpeak = Vrms x 1.414 = 120 x 1.414 = 169.7 Volts
Now, finding the values of R and C, we have:
C (F) =

R () =

10
V
10 x I
50
169.7

0.707
10

= 0.05 F, voltage rating 170 Volts

, where x= 1 +

= 1.29

R () =

50
V
169.7
10 x 0.707 1.29

= 16 , 1/2 W, 5%

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

x= 1 +

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--30

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

I/O Module Wiring and Specifications

Module Placement

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

S
I/O Module
Status Indicators

Before wiring the I/O modules in your

system to field devices, its very important
to make sure each I/O module is in the
right slot and base in the system. Costly
wiring errors may be avoided by doing the
following:

Do the power budget calculations for each base to verify the base power
supply can power all the modules in the base. Information on how to do
this is in Chapter 4, System Design and Configuration.
Some specialty I/O modules may only be installed in particular slots (will
not function properly, otherwise). Check the corresponding manuals
before installation and wiring.
Whenever possible, keep modules with high voltage and current wiring
away from sensitive analog modules.

The diagram below shows the status indicator location for common I/O modules.
Loose terminal
block indicator

Status indicators
Blown fuse
(non-replaceable)
indicator
(Output modules only)

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

Display status
(selects a group
of signals to
be displayed)

Wire tray

Color Coding
of I/O Modules

The DL405 family of I/O modules have a

color-coded stripe on the front bezel to
help identify whether the module type is
input, output, or special module. The color
code meaning is listed below:
Module Type
Discrete/Analog Output
Discrete/Analog Input
Other

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Color Code
Red
Blue
White

110VAV

INPUT

TB
A

Color Bar

D4--16NA

80--132VAC
80--20mA
50/60Hz
CA
0

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

Wiring a Module
with a Terminal
Block

2--31

You must first remove the front cover of the module prior to wiring. To remove the
cover depress the bottom tab of the cover and tilt the cover up to loosen from the
module.
All DL405 I/O module terminal blocks are removable for your convenience. To
remove the terminal block loosen the retaining screws and and lift the terminal block
away from the module. When you return the terminal block to the module make sure
the terminal block is tightly seated. Be sure to tighten the retaining screws. You
should also verify the loose terminal block LED is off when system power is applied.

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

WARNING: For some modules, field device power may still be present on the
terminal block even though the PLC system is turned off. To minimize the risk
of electrical shock, disconnect all field device power before you remove the
connector.
Loose terminal block
LED indicator

Retaining screw

Terminal screws
Retaining screw
Push tab and
lift to remove

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

I/O module
wiring tray

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--32

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

Wiring 32 and 64
Point I/O Modules

The 32 point and 64 point I/O modules use a different style of connector due to the
increased number of I/O points. There are several types of connection methods
available to choose from. A ZIPLink connection system is shown in the figure below.
Refer to the next section for complete information on ribbon and solder type
connectors and accessories. Another option is to use the D4--IOCBL--1, a 3m
prewired solder connector and cable with pigtail.

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

32 pt. Module

ZIPLINK Cable

ZIPLINK Connector Module

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

64pt. Module

The ZIPLink system offers plug and play capability, eliminating the need
for traditional wiring. Simply plug one end of the ZIPLink cable into a 32 or
64 point I/O module and the other end into a ZIPlink Connector Module.
Refer to the Connection Systems section in the catalog for a complete list
of cable and connector part numbers.
Part Numbers for
Module
Connectors

Both types of connectors are available from AutomationDirect.

AutomationDirect Part Numbers
S D4--IO3264R Ribbon cable connectors, 2 in a pack. Can be used on
either 32 point or 64 point modules.
S

D4--IO3264S Solder type connector, 2 in a pack. Can be used on

either 32 point or 64 point modules.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

Ribbon Cable

Description/Type

Vendor

Part Number

Gray / 26 AWG

3M

3801 / 40

Gray / 26 AWG

Belden

9L260 40

Gray / 28 AWG

Belden

9L280 40

Gray / 28 AWG

DuPont

76825--040

Gray / 28 AWG

AMP

499116--5

Color coded / 26 AWG

3M

3811 / 40

Color coded / 28 AWG

Belden

9R280 40

Color coded / 28 AWG

DuPont

76177--040

These ribbon cable connectors are for attaching the ribbon cable to the terminal
block. They are all .100 x .100 2 x20 female ribbon connectors with a center bump.
Description/Type

Vendor

Part Number

Connector
Strain Relief

3M
3M

3417--7640
3448--3040

Connector
Strain Relief

3M
3M

3417--7640
3448--3040

Connector (p
(pre-assembled))
Strain Relief

3M
3M

89140--0103--T0
3448--89140

Connector (with strain relief)

Thomas & Betts

622--4041

Connector (p
(pre-assembled))
Strain Relief

AMP
AMP

746286--9
499252--1

Connector (with strain relief)

DuPont

66902--240

Connector (with strain relief)

Molex

15--29--9940

Below are terminal blocks which can be used to transition a 40 conductor ribbon
cable to 40 discrete field wires. The terminal block features are: 2 x 20 .100 x .100
pin center (male) connector head terminals (.2 centers) accepting 22--12 AWG, no
fuses.
Description/Type

Vendor

Part Number

Panel Mount
Rail Mount

Weidmuller

RI--40A /914897
RI--40A /914908

Rail Mount

Phoenix Contacts

FLKM 40 / 2281076

Special Mount
(DIN rail compatible)
includes ribbon connector

Augat/RDI

2M40FC

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

Interface Terminal
Block

The chart below lists cables which can be used to connect the terminal block with a
32 I/O module. They have 40 conductors and .050 pitch PVC stranded ribbon cable.

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

Ribbon Cable
Connectors

2--33

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--34

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

I/O Wiring
Checklist

Use the following guidelines when wiring the I/O modules in your system.
1. Note the limits to the size of wire the modules can accept. The table below
lists the maximum AWG for each module type. Smaller AWG is acceptable
to use for each of the modules.
Module type

Suggested AWG Range

Suggested Torque

CPU

12 AWG

10.63 lb-inch (1.2 Nm)

8 point

12 AWG

7.97 lb-inch (0.9 Nm)

16 point

14 AWG

7.97 lb-inch (0.9 Nm)

32 point
64 point

ZipLink: ZL--4CBL4# cable / ZL--CM40 connector block

(connectors sold
separately)

D4--IOCBL--1 (3m pigtail cable with D4--IO3264S)

D4--IO3264R (ribbon type connector)
D4--IO3264S (solder type connector)

Note: 12 AWG Type TFFN or Type MTW can be used on 8pt. modules.
14 AWG Type TFFN or Type MTW can be used on 16pt. modules. Other
types of wire may be acceptable, but it really depends on the thickness of
the wire insulation. If the insulation is too thick and you use all the I/O points,
then the plastic terminal cover may not close properly.
2. Always use a continuous length of wire. Do not splice wires to attain a
needed length.
3. Use the shortest possible wire length.
4. Where possible use wire trays for routing .
5. Avoid running wires near high energy wiring.
6. Avoid running input wiring close to output wiring where possible.
7. To minimize voltage drops when wires must run a long distance, consider
using multiple wires for the return lines.
8. Where possible avoid running DC wiring in close proximity to AC wiring.
9. Avoid creating sharp bends in the wires.
10. IMPORTANT! To help avoid having a module with a blown fuse, we
suggest you add external fuses to your I/O wiring. A fast blow fuse, with a
lower current rating than the I/O module fuse can be added to each
common, or a fuse with a rating of slightly less than the maximum current
per output point can be added to each output.
External Fuses
(shown with DIN Rail,
fuse blocks)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--35

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

DL405 Input
Module Chart

The following table lists the available DL405 input modules. Specifications begin on
the following page.
DL405
Input Module Type

DC Current
Sink Input

DC Current
Source Input

AC Input

D4--16ND2

16

D4--16ND2F

16

D4--32ND3--1

32

D4--32ND3--2

32

D4--64ND2

64

D4--08NA

D4--16NA

16

D4--16NE3

16

F4--08NE3S

D4--08ND3S

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

DL405 Output
Module Chart

Number of
Input Points

The following table lists the available DL405 output modules. Specifications begin
after the input modules specifications.
DC Current
Sink Output

DC Current
Source
Output

AC Output

D4--08TD1

F4--08TD1S

D4--16TD1

16

D4--16TD2

16

D4--32TD1

32

D4--32TD1--1

32

D4--32TD2

32

D4--64TD1

64

D4--08TA

D4--16TA

16

D4--08TR

F4--08TRS--1

F4--08TRS--2

D4--16TR

16

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

Number of
Output Points

DL405
Output Module Type




DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--36

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

D4--08ND3S DC Input

D4--16ND2 DC Input

Inputs per module

8 (sink/source)

Inputs per module

16 (current sourcing)

Commons per module

8 (isolated)

Commons per module

2 (isolated)

Input voltage range

20--52.8VDC

Input voltage range

10.2--26.4VDC

Peak voltage

52.8VDC

Peak voltage

26.4VDC

ON voltage level

>18 V

ON voltage level

> 9.5VDC

OFF voltage level

< 7V

OFF voltage level

< 4.0 VDC

Input impedance

4.8 K

Input impedance

3.2 K @ 12VDC
2.9 K @24VDC

Input current @ 24 / 48 VDC

5 mA / 10 mA

Input current @ 12 / 24VDC

3.8 mA / 8.3 mA

Minimum ON current

3.5 mA

Minimum ON current

3.5 mA

Maximum OFF current

1.5 mA

Maximum OFF current

1.5 mA

Base power required 5V

100 mA max

Base power required 5V

150 mA max

OFF to ON response

3--10 ms

OFF to ON response

1--7 ms (2.3 typical)

ON to OFF response

3--12 ms

ON to OFF response

2--12 ms (4.6 typical)

Terminal type

Removable

Terminal type

Removable

Status indicators

Logic Side

Status indicators

Logic Side

Weight

8.8 oz. (250 g)

Weight

8.8 oz. (250 g)

Derating Chart

Points
8

24--48VDC
TB

6
0
1
2
3

4
2

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

4
5
6
7

--

--

20--52.8VDC
4--12mA
C0

--

--

--

--

--

6
7

C0

C1

C1

C2
C3

12--24VDC
TB
0
1
2
3

--

Derating Chart

Points
16
12

D4--08ND3S

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 140 F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)

INPUT

4
0

12--24VDC --

C2

3
12--24VDC --

CB

C5

C4

C6

C7

C5

C6
6
C7

To LED

+
-Optical
Isolator

Current sourcing configuration shown

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

10.2--26.4VDC
4--12mA
CA

6
7
4
5
6
7

2
6
3
7
CB
4
0
5
1

Current Flow

6
2

12--24VDC
-- +

7
Common

3
To LED

Input

0
1
2
3

CA

7
Common

B
4
5
6
7

C3

C4

D4--16ND2

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 140 F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)

Input

Optical
Isolator

INPUT

4
5
6
7

2--37

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

D4--16ND2F DC Input

D4--16SIM Input Simulator

16 (current sourcing)

Inputs per module

8 or 16, selectable

Commons per module

2 (isolated)

Base power required 5V

150 mA Max

Input voltage range

10.2--26.4VDC

Terminal type

None

Peak voltage

26.4VDC

Status indicators

Logic Side

ON voltage level

> 9.5VDC

Weight

8.8 oz. (250 g)

OFF voltage level

< 4.0VDC

Input impedance

3.2 K @ 12VDC
2.9 K @ 24VDC

Input current @ 12 / 24 VDC

3.8 mA / 8.3 mA

Minimum ON current

3.5 mA

Maximum OFF current

1.5 mA

Base power required 5V

150 mA max

OFF to ON response

1 ms

ON to OFF response

1 ms

Terminal type

Removable

Status indicators

Logic Side

Weight

8.8 oz. (250 g)

Derating Chart

Points
16

12--24VDC

12

TB

0
1
2
3

4
0

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

Inputs per module

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 140 F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)

INPUT SIMULATOR

INPUT

8
A

B
4
5
6
7

0
1
2
3

0
1
2
3

4
5
6
7

D4--16SIM

10.2--26.4VDC
4--12mA

OFF

CA

1
2
3
10.2--26.4
VDC

--

0
1
2
Current Flow

1
5

2
6
3

Switch position is indicated

by the LEDs above the input
switches

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6

CB

A7

B0

5
1
6
2

12--24VDC
-- +

8 or 16 input point selection

switch is located on the back
of the module

Common
To LED

4
5
6
7

ON

A0

CB

0
1
2
3

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

--

4
5
6
7

D4--16ND2F

CA
10.2--26.4
VDC

16
B

B1
B2
B3

B4

B5
B6
B7

Input

Optical
Isolator

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--38

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

D4--32ND3--1, 24VDC Input

Inputs per module

32 (sink/source)

Inputs per module

32 (sink/source)

Commons per module

4 (isolated)

Commons per module

4 (isolated)

Input voltage range

20--28VDC

Input voltage range

4.75--13.2VDC (TTL, CMOS)

Peak voltage

30VDC

Peak voltage

15VDC

ON voltage level

> 19V

ON voltage level

> 4 V (use pullup R for TTL in)

OFF voltage level

< 10 V

OFF voltage level

<2V

Input impedance

4.8 K

Input impedance

2 K @ 5V,1.6 K @ 12V

Input current

5 mA

Input current

3.1 mA @ 5V, 7.5 mA @ 12V

Minimum ON current

3.5 mA

Minimum ON current

1.8 mA

Maximum OFF current

1.6 mA

Maximum OFF current

0.8 mA

Base power required 5V

150 mA max

Base power required 5V

150 mA max

OFF to ON response

2--10 ms

OFF to ON response

1--4 ms

ON to OFF response

2--10 ms

ON to OFF response

1--4 ms

Terminal type

Removable, 40 pin conn.

Terminal type

Removable, 40 pin conn.

Status indicators

Logic Side

Status indicators

Logic Side

Weight

6.6 oz. (190 g)

Weight

6.6 oz. (190 g)

Derating Chart

Points
32
28
24
20
16
12
8
4
0

24VDC

INPUT
A-B C-D
B/D

A/C
0
1
2
3

4
5
6
7

0
1
2
3

4
5
6
7

D4--32ND3--1

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 140 F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)
Current Flow

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

D4--32ND3--2 5--12VDC Input

User
Supply --

Current Flow
--

User
Supply +
Current Flow

+
User
Supply -Current Flow

A0
A4
A1
A5
A2
A6
A3
A7
COM I
B0
B4
B1
B5
B2
B6
B3
B7
COM II
C0
C4
C1
C5
C2
C6
C3
C7
COM III
D0
D4
D1
D5
D2
D6
D3
D7
COM IV

24 VDC
Common
+ --

DISPLAY
SELECT

A-B

Derating Chart

Points
32
28
24
20
16
12
8
4
0

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 140 F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)

20--28VDC, CLASS2
4.2--5.8mA

0
1
2
3

4
5
6
7

Current Flow
+

User
Supply --

Current Flow
-User
Supply +
Current Flow

+
User
Supply -Current Flow

5--12 VDC
+ --

A0
A4
A1
A5
A2
A6
A3
A7
COM I

DISPLAY
SELECT

A-B
C-D

4.75--13.2VDC, CLASS2
3.1--8.2mA
A0 A4
A1 A5
A2 A6
A3 A7
CI CI
B0 B4
B1 B5
B2 B6
B3 B7
CII CII
C0 C4
C1 C5
C2 C6
C3 C7
CIII CIII
D0 D4
D1 D5
D2 D6
D3 D7
CIV CIV

B0
B4
B1
B5
B2
B6
B3
B7
COM II
C0
C4
C1
C5
C2
C6
C3
C7
COM III
D0
D4
D1
D5
D2
D6
D3
D7
COM IV

Common
To LED

Use Display Select switch to view

Optical(A0--A7, B0--B7) or (C0--C7, D0--D7)
Isolator

4
5
6
7

D4--32ND3--2

To LED

Input

INPUT
A-B C-D
B/D

A/C
0
1
2
3

C-D

A0 A4
A1 A5
A2 A6
A3 A7
CI CI
B0 B4
B1 B5
B2 B6
B3 B7
CII CII
C0 C4
C1 C5
C2 C6
C3 C7
CIII CIII
D0 D4
D1 D5
D2 D6
D3 D7
CIV CIV

5--12VDC

Current sinking config. shown

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Input

Use Display Select switch to view

B0--B7) or (C0--C7, D0--D7)
Current sinking config. shown

Optical(A0--A7,
Isolator

2--39

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

D4--64ND2, 24 VDC Input Module

CPU base only *

Base power required 5V 300 mA max

Inputs per module

64 (current sourcing)

External power required 24VDC 10%,

(optional)
320mA max

Commons per module

8 (isolated)

OFF to ON response

2.5 ms (typical)

Input voltage range

20 -- 28 VDC

ON to OFF response

5.0 ms (typical)

Peak voltage

30 VDC

Terminal type

ON voltage level

> 20 V

2, Removable
40 pin connectors
(sold separately)

OFF voltage level

< 13 V

Status indicators

Logic Side

Input impedance

4.8 K

Weight

7.8 oz. (220 g)

Input current

5.0 mA @ 24 VDC

Minimum ON current

3.6 mA

Maximum OFF current

2.6 mA

Points

Derating Chart

Since there are only 32 LEDs on the module, you

can only display the status for 32 points at one
time. In the A - B position the status of the first
group of 32 input points (A0--A17, B0--B17) are
displayed (connector 1). In the C - D position the
status of the second group of 32 input points
(C0--C17, D0--D17) are displayed (connector 2).

64

32

0
0
32

10
20
30
40
50
60 C
50
68
86
104
122
140F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)

Wiring per 32pts.

with 24V on Connector

Wiring per 32pts.

using EXT 24VDC Connector

Current Flow

Current Flow

Internally
Connected
0v

-24VDC +

Current Flow

COM

Current Flow

COM

Current Flow
Current Flow

0v

COM

+
24VDC --

Current Flow

COM

0v

INPUT

A/C
0
1
2
3

4
5
6
7

B/D
0
1
2
3

4
5
6
7

0
1
2
3

4
5
6
7

0
1
2
3

D4--64ND2

A4
A5
A6
A7
0V
A14
A15
A16
A17
0V
B4
B5
B6
B7
0V
B14
B15
B16
B17
0V

C0
C1
C2
C3
C5
C10
C11
C12
C13
C6
D0
D1
D2
D3
C7
D10
D11
D12
D13
C8

C4
C5
C6
C7
0V
C14
C15
C16
C17
0V
D4
D5
D6
D7
0V
D14
D15
D16
D17
0V

DISPLAY
SELECT

A-B

C-D
20--28VDC
4.2--5.8mA CLASS2
CN1
CN2

Input

Input

To LED

To LED

EXT
24VDC
Optical
Isolator
Common

+
--

Optical
Isolator

24VDC
-+
Common

0V

24VDC Ext
+
--

4
5
6
7

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

-24VDC

0v

24VDC

Connector Pins
A0
A1
A2
A3
C1
A10
A11
A12
A13
C2
B0
B1
B2
B3
C3
B10
B11
B12
B13
C4

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

Module Location

0V

--

--

* Module location -- this module placement is

restricted to the local base on DL430/DL440
systems. It may also be placed in expansion
bases in DL450 systems that are using the new
(--1) bases.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--40

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

D4--08NA 110--220VAC Input

Inputs per module

Inputs per module

16

Commons per module

2 (isolated)

Commons per module

2 (isolated)

Input voltage range

80--265VAC

Input voltage range

80--132VAC

Peak voltage

265VAC

Peak voltage

132VAC

AC frequency

47--63 Hz

AC frequency

47--63 Hz

ON voltage level

> 70V

ON voltage level

> 70V

OFF voltage level

< 30 V

OFF voltage level

< 20 V

Input impedance

12 K

Input impedance

8K

Input current

8.5 mA @100VAC
20 mA @ 230VAC

Input current

14.5 mA @120VAC

Minimum ON current

5 mA

Minimum ON current

7 mA

Maximum OFF current

2 mA

Maximum OFF current

2 mA

Base power required 5V

100 mA max

Base power required 5V

150 mA max

OFF to ON response

5--30 ms

OFF to ON response

5--30 ms

ON to OFF response

10--50 ms

ON to OFF response

10--50 ms

Terminal type

Removable

Terminal type

Removable

Status indicators

Logic Side

Status indicators

Logic Side

Weight

8.4 oz. (240 g)

Weight

9.5 oz. (270 g)

Derating Chart

Points
8

110--220VAC
TB

0
1
2
3

4
2
0

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

D4--16NA 110VAC Input

110--220 VAC

Derating Chart

Points
16

110VAC
TB

12

4
5
6
7

0
1
2
3

8
4

D4--08NA

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 140 F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)

INPUT

80--265VAC
10--30mA
50/60Hz
CA

CA

2
3

110 VAC

CB

CB

CB

CA

5
2

3
7

CB

5
1

6
2

6
110--220 VAC

110 VAC

Common

Common

7
To LED

To LED

Input

Optical
Isolator

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

0
1
2
3

110 VAC

2
110--220 VAC

B
4
5
6
7

80--132VAC
80--20mA
50/60Hz
CA

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 140 F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)

D4--16NA

INPUT

Input

Optical
Isolator

4
5
6
7

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

D4-16NE3 12--24VAC/DC Input

F4-08NE3S 90--150VAC/DC In

16 (sink/source)

Inputs per module

8 (sink/source)

Commons per module

2 (isolated)

Commons per module

8 (isolated)

Input voltage range

10.2--26.4VAC/VDC

Input voltage range

90--150 VAC/VDC

Peak voltage

37.5VAC/VDC

Peak voltage

350 peak < 1ms

AC frequency

47--63 Hz

AC frequency

47--63 Hz

ON voltage level

> 9.5V

ON voltage level

> 90 VDC / 75VAC

OFF voltage level

< 3.0V

OFF voltage level

< 60 VDC / 45VAC

Input impedance @ 12V/24V

3.2 K / 2.9 K

Input impedance

22 K

Input current @ 12V / 24V

3.8 mA / 8.3 mA

Input current

5.5 mA @ 120V

Minimum ON current

4 mA

Minimum ON current

4 mA

Maximum OFF current

1.5 mA

Maximum OFF current

2 mA

Base power required 5V

150 mA max

Base power required 5V

90 mA max

OFF to ON response

5--40 ms

OFF to ON response

8 ms

ON to OFF response

10--50 ms

ON to OFF response

15 ms

Terminal type

Removable

Terminal type

Removable

Status indicators

Logic Side

Status indicators

Logic Side

Weight

8.8 oz. (250 g)

Weight

9 oz. (256 g)

Derating Chart
12--24VAC/DC
TB

12
0
1
2
3

8
4
0

A
0
1
2
3

1
2
3
CB
0
1
2
3

Derating Chart
90--150VAC/DC

4
5
6
7

0
1
2
3

4
2
0

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 140 F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)
IN
1

IN
1

IN
3

IN
3

CB

IN
5

IN
5
IN
7

IN
7

90--150VDC
90--150VAC

IN
0

IN
1

IN
0

IN
1

Common

IN
2
IN
3

IN
4

IN
3

IN
4

IN
6

IN
5

To LED

+
-Input

IN
5

Common

Optical
Isolator

+
--

Optical
Isolator

Input

IN
0

IN
2
IN
2

IN
6

7
3

IN
0

IN
2

6
2

4
5
6
7

F4--08NE3S

CA

INPUT

TB

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

10.2--26.4V
AC/DC
4--18mA
50/60 Hz/DC
CA

Points
8
6

B
4
5
6
7

D4--16NE3

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 140 F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)

INPUT

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

Inputs per module

Points
16

2--41

IN
7
IN
7

IN
4
IN
4
IN
6
IN
6

To LED

Current sourcing configuration shown

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--42

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

D4--08TD1 12--24 VDC Output

F4-08TD1S 24--150 VDC Isolated Out

Outputs per module

8 (current sinking)

Outputs per module

8 (current sinking)

Commons per module

2 internally connected

Commons per module

4 (isolated)

Operating voltage

10.2--26.4VDC

Operating voltage

24--150VDC

Output type

NMOS FET (open drain)

Output type

MOS FET

Peak voltage

40VDC

Peak voltage

200 VDC, <1mS

ON voltage drop

0.5VDC @ 2A, 0.2 VDC @1A

ON voltage drop

1VDC @ 2A

Max current (resistive)

2A / point, 5A / common

Max current

2A / point, 4A / common

Max leakage current

0.1mA @ 40VDC

Max leakage current

5 A

Max inrush current

12A for 10 ms, 6A for 100 ms

Max inrush current

30A /1ms, 6A / 10ms, 3A / 100ms

Minimum load

0.2mA

Minimum load

N/A

Base power required 5V

150mA max

Base power required 5V

295 mA max

External DC required

24VDC 10%@35 mA

External DC required

None

OFF to ON response

1 ms

OFF to ON response

25 s

ON to OFF response

1 ms

ON to OFF response

25 s

Terminal type

Removable

Terminal type

Removable

Status indicators

Logic Side

Status indicators

Logic Side

Weight

8.4 oz. (240 g)

Weight

10 oz. (282 g)

Fuses (non-replaceable)

1 (7A) per common

Fuses (non-replaceable)

1 (3A) per output

Derating Chart

Points
8

12--24VDC

Output Current
1.25A/point

6
4
2

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

--

12--24 VDC +

--

Output Current
4.0A/point

+
--

3
C
Internally
connected
L

OUT
1

+
--

OUT
0

+
--

+24V

OUT
4

OUT
5

L
L

SUP
D
COM
6
COM
7

COM
0
COM
1
OUT
2
OUT
3
SUP
C
COM
4
COM
5
OUT
6
OUT
7

Supply

6
To LED

COM
3

5
-- +
24VDC

SUP
B
COM
2

SUP
A

+ --

7
C

Optical
Isolator

24VDC

Common

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Output

3A

OPEN FUSE
4
5
6
7

24--150VDC
2A

OUT
0
OUT
1
SUP
B
COM
2
COM
3
OUT
4
OUT
5

COM
6

Output

+ 12--24
-- VDC

0
1
2
3

SUP
D

Common

Optical
Isolator

To LED

OUTPUT

TB

F4--08TD1S

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 140 F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)

+
--

0
1

+ 24VDC

Output
Current
1.5A/point

Output Current
2.0A/point

10.2--26.4VDC
0.2mA--2A

24--150VDC

To
Commons

FU

D4--08TD1

Derating Chart

Points
8

4
5
6
7

--

0
1
2
3

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 140 F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)

12--24 VDC +

24V

TB

Output Current
2A/point
(5A/common)

OUTPUT

COM
7

SUP
A
COM
0
COM
1
OUT
2
OUT
3
SUP
C
COM
4
COM
5
OUT
6
OUT
7

0
1
2
3

4
5
6
7

2--43

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

D4-16TD1 5-24 VDC Output

D4-16TD2, 12--24 VDC Output

16 (current sinking)

Outputs per module

16 (current sourcing)

Commons per module

2 internally connected

Commons per module

2 (isolated)

Operating voltage / peak

4.5--26.4VDC, 40 VDC Peak

Operating voltage / peak

10.2--26.4 VDC, 40 VDC Peak

Output type

NPN Open collector

Output type

NPN Emitter Follower

ON voltage drop

0.5V @ 0.5A, 0.2V @ 0.1A

ON voltage drop

1.5 VDC @ 0.5A

Max current (resistive)

0.5A / point, 3A / common

Max current (resistive)

0.5A / point, 3A / common @

50 C, 2.5A /common @ 60C

Max leakage current

0.1mA @ 40VDC

Max leakage current

0.1mA @ 40 VDC

Max inrush current

2A for 10 ms, 1A for 100 ms

Max inrush current

2A for 10 ms, 1A for 100 ms

Minimum load

0.2mA

Minimum load

0.2mA

Base power required 5V

200mA max

Base power required 5V

400mA max

External DC required

24VDC 10% @125mA

External DC required

None

OFF to ON response

0.5 ms

OFF to ON response

1 ms

ON to OFF response

0.5 ms

ON to OFF response

1 ms

Terminal type

Removable

Terminal type

Removable

Status indicators

Logic Side

Status indicators

Logic Side

Weight

9.5 oz. (270 g)

Weight

9.8 oz. (280 g)

Fuses (non-replaceable)

1 (5A) per common

Fuses (non-replaceable)

1 (5A) per common

Points
16

Derating Chart
Output Current
0.35A/point

12

TB

A
4
5
6
7

0
1
2
3

Points
16

FU

12

4
5
6
7

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 140 F
Ambient Temperature (C/F) Internally
L
L
L
L
L
L
L

5--24 VDC +

--

CA

1
2
3
CB

L
L
L
L

L
L
L

24VDC

L
L

12--24 VDC -L

L
L
L
L
L

12--24 VDC

--

CB

L
L

1
2
3

CB

24VDC

-L

24V
-Output

+
5--24 VDC --

Common

4
1
5

2
6

5
6
7

Optical
Isolator

Common

CB
L
L

4
0
5

2
7
3

+
-+ -24VDC

To LED

4
5
6
7

7
Optical
Isolator

FU

0
1
2
3

CA
CA

--

B
4
5
6
7

10.2--26.4VDC
0.5A

1
+

OUTPUT

0
1
2
3

2.5A/common

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 140 F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)

TB

D4--16TD2

12--24VDC

Output Current
0.5A/point
(3A/common)

0.3A/point

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

CA

Output Current
0.35A/point

5V--26.4VDC
0.2mA--0.5A

connected

--

Derating Chart

D4--16TD1

5--24 VDC +

OUTPUT
24V

0
1
2
3

Output Current
0.5A/point
(3A/common)

5--24VDC

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

Outputs per module

12--24
VDC
To LED
L

Output

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--44

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

D4--32TD1, 5--24VDC Output D4--32TD1--1, 5--15VDC Output

Outputs per module

32 (current sinking)

Outputs per module

32 (current sinking)

Commons per module

4 (isolated)

Commons per module

4 (isolated)

Operating voltage

4.75--26.4 VDC

Operating voltage

5--15 VDC

Output type

NPN Open Collector

Output type

NPN Open Collector (w / pullup)

Peak voltage

36 VDC

Peak voltage

16.5 VDC

ON voltage drop

0.6 VDC @ 0.2A

ON voltage drop

0.4 VDC @ 0.1A

Max current (resistive)

0.2A / point, 1.6A / common

Max current (resistive)

0.09A/pt, 0.72A/com, 2.88A/ mod.

Max leakage current

0.1mA @ 36 VDC

Max leakage current

0.01mA @ 16.5 VDC

Max inrush current

1A for 10 ms, 0.5A for 100 ms

Max inrush current

0.5A for 10ms, 0.2A for 100ms

Minimum load

0.1mA

Minimum load

0.15mA

Base power required 5V

250mA max

Base power req., 5V

250mA max

External DC required

24VDC 10%, 140mA max

External DC required

5--15VDC 10%, 150mA max

OFF to ON response

0.1 ms

OFF to ON response

0.1 ms

ON to OFF response

0.1 ms

ON to OFF response

0.1 ms

Terminal type

Removable

Terminal type

Removable

Status indicators

Logic Side

Status indicators

Logic Side

Weight

6.7 oz. (190 g)

Weight

6.7 oz. (190 g)

Fuses

None

Fuses

None

Derating Chart

Points
32
28
24
20
16
12
8
4
0

Points

Output current
0.1A / point

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

L
L
L
L
L
L

--

+
L
L
L
L
L
L

24 VDC

--

+
L
L
L
L
L
L

24 VDC

--

L
L
L
L
L
L

24 VDC

--

A4
A1
A5
A2
A6
A3
A7
COM I
VI
B0
B4
B1
B5
B2
B6
B3
B7
COM II
V II
C0
C4
C1
C5
C2
C6
C3
C7
COM III
V III
D0
D4
D1
D5
D2
D6
D3
D7
COM IV
V IV

V+
L

Output

+
24 VDC -Common

A/C

A-B C-D
B/D

4
5
6
7

0
1
2
3

4
5
6
7

D4--32TD1

10
20
30
40
50
60C
50
68
86 104 122 140F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)
Current Flow
A0
L

24VDC

OUTPUT

0
1
2
3

Output current
0.2A / point

0
32

5--24VDC

DISPLAY
SELECT

A-B

32
28
24
20
16
12
8
4
0

Derating Chart
Output
current
0.06A /
point

Output current
0.015A / point
Output current
0.09A / point
0
32

Current Flow

A0
A1
A2
A3
CI
B0
B1
B2
B3
CII
C0
C1
C2
C3
CIII
D0
D1
D2
D3
CIV

A4
A5
A6
A7
VI
B4
B5
B6
B7
VII
C4
C5
C6
C7
VIII
D4
D5
D6
D7
VIV

To LED
Optical
Isolator

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

L
L

5--26VDC,CLASS 2
0.2A

L
L
L
L
L

--

5--15VDC

+
L
L
L
L
L
L
L

--

5--15VDC

+
L
L
L
L
L
L

5--15VDC

--

L
L
L
L
L
L

5--15VDC

--

5--15 +
VDC --

Out

1.5K

Common

A-B C-D
B/D

A/C
0
1
2
3

4
5
6
7

DISPLAY
SELECT

0
1
2
3

4
5
6
7

A-B
C-D

A0
A4
A1
A5
A2
A6
A3
A7
COM I
VI
B0
B4
B1
B5
B2
B6
B3
B7
COM II
V II
C0
C4
C1
C5
C2
C6
C3
C7
COM III
V III
D0
D4
D1
D5
D2
D6
D3
D7
COM IV
V IV

5--15VDC, CLASS 2
0.09A

V+

OUTPUT

D4--32TD1--1

10
20
30
40
50
60C
50
68
86 104 122 140F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)

C-D

5--15VDC

Optical
Isolator

To LED

A0
A1
A2
A3
CI
B0
B1
B2
B3
CII
C0
C1
C2
C3
CIII
D0
D1
D2
D3
CIV

A4
A5
A6
A7
VI
B4
B5
B6
B7
VII
C4
C5
C6
C7
VIII
D4
D5
D6
D7
VIV

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

2--45

D4--32TD2, 12--24 VDC Output Module

Outputs per module

32 (current sourcing)

Commons per module

4 (isolated)

10.8--26.4VDC
1A / common
including load

Operating voltage

10.8--26.4 VDC

Output type

PNP Open Collector

OFF to ON response

< 0.2 ms

Peak voltage

30 VDC

ON to OFF response

< 0.2 ms

ON voltage drop

0.6 VDC @ 0.2A

Terminal type

Removable

Max current (resistive)

0.2A / point
1 0A / common
1.0A
4.0A / module

Status indicators

Logic Side

Weight

6.7 oz. (190 g)

Max leakage current

0.01mA @ 26.4 VDC

Fuses

None

Max inrush current

500 mA for 10 ms

Minimum load

0.2mA

Base power required 5V

350mA max

Current Flow
L
L
L
L
L
L

--

L
L

12--24VDC
+
L
L
L
L
L
L

-12--24VDC

L
L

L
L
L
L
L
L

-12--24VDC

L
L

+
L
L
L
L
L
L

-12--24VDC
+

L
L

12--24VDC

4
5
6
7

Points

A-B C-D
B/D

A/C
0
1
2
3

Derating Chart for D4--32TD2

OUTPUT

0
1
2
3

32
28
24
20
16
12
8
4
0

4
5
6
7

D4--32TD2

DISPLAY
SELECT

A-B
C-D

11--26VDC, CLASS2
0.2A
A0
A1
A2
A3
CI
B0
B1
B2
B3
CII
C0
C1
C2
C3
CIII
D0
D1
D2
D3
CIV

A4
A5
A6
A7
VI
B4
B5
B6
B7
VII
C4
C5
C6
C7
VIII
D4
D5
D6
D7
VIV

Output current
0.2 A /pt
(1A /common)

0
32

10
20
30
40
50
60C
50
68
86 104 122 140F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)

V+

+
--

12--24
VDC

Optical
Isolator

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

A0
A4
A1
A5
A2
A6
A3
A7
COM I
VI
B0
B4
B1
B5
B2
B6
B3
B7
COM II
V II
C0
C4
C1
C5
C2
C6
C3
C7
COM III
V III
D0
D4
D1
D5
D2
D6
D3
D7
COM IV
V IV

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

External DC required

Output
To LED
Common

Only 16 status points can be displayed at one time on the front of the module.
In the A - B position the status of the first group of 16 output points (A0--A7, B0--B7) is displayed.
In the C - D position the status of the second group of 16 output points (C0--C7, D0--D7) is displayed.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--46

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

D4--64TD1, TTL/CMOS/5--24 VDC Output Module

Module Location
Outputs per module
Commons per module

CPU base only *

64 (current sinking)
8 (non--isolated)

Operating voltage
Output type

4.75--26.5 VDC
NPN Open Collector

Peak voltage
ON voltage drop

36 VDC
0.6 VDC @ 0.1A

Max current (resistive)

0.1A / point
1.0A / common
8.0A
A / module
d l

Max leakage current

Max inrush current

64
56
48
40
32
24
16
8
0

24VDC 10%,
(800mA + 50mA per
common)
7.0A total max
< 0.1 ms
< 0.2 ms
2, Removable 40-pin
connectors (sold sep.)
Logic Side
7.4 oz. (210 g)
None

OFF to ON response
ON to OFF response
Terminal type
Status indicators
Weight
Fuses

5--24VDC

10
20
30
40
50
50
68
86
104
122
Ambient Temperature (C/F)

60 C
140 F

Current Flow

L
L

Current Flow

L
L
L
L
L

Internally
Connected
+V

L
L

+
--

24VDC

+V

5--26VDC

Current Flow

L
L

COM

COM

Optical
Isolator
L

Output

24VDC Ext +
+
---

C16

C13

C17

C2

V2

C6

V6

B0

B4

D0

D4

B1

B5

D1

D5

B2

B6

D2

D6

B3
C3
B10

B7
V3
B14

D3
C7
D10

D7
V7
D14

B11

B15

D11

D15

B12

B16

D12

D16

B13

B17

D13

D17

C4

V4

COM

+V

COM

+V

L
L
L

L
L

C15

C12

A17

+V

C11

A16

A13

--

5--26VDC+

A15

A12

+V

A11

--

5--26VDC+

Common

Current Flow

L
L

+V

C7
V5
C14

COM

C6

C3
C5
C10

+V

+
5--26VDC--

L
L

C2

A7
V1
A14

A6

A3
C1
A10

Internally
Connected
+V

L
L

Current Flow

Current Flow

C5

A2

C4

C1

+
--

C0

A5

A4

A1

Current Flow

L
L

A0

+
5--26VDC --

L
L

Current Flow

COM

Internally
Connected
+V

COM

+V

Optical
Isolator

Output

+
To LED
-24VDC

To LED

-5--26VDC
Common
24VDC Ext +
+
---

C8

A- B
C-D

CLASS2
CN2

V8

Optical
Isolator

EXT
24VDC
To LED

24VDC Ext +

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

+V

Output

Common

--

COM

5--26V
0.1A
CN1

Current Flow

Current Flow

D4--64TD1

Connector Pins

L
L

B/D

DISPLAY
SELECT

Wiring per 32pts.

using EXT 24VDC
Connector and
5--26VDC Load
Supply

Wiring per
32pts.
with 24V on
Connector

OUTPUT

A/C

* Module location -- this module placement is restricted to the local

base on DL430/DL440 systems. It may also be placed in expansion
bases in DL450 systems that are using the new (--1) bases.

Wiring per 32pts.

using EXT 24VDC
Connector

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

External DC required

Only 32 status points can be displayed at one time on the front of the
module. In the A - B position the status of the first group of 32 output
points (A0--A17, B0--B17) are displayed (connector 1). In the C - D
position the status of the second group of 32 output points (C0--C17,
D0--D17) are displayed (connector 2).

Output current
0.1A / point

0
32

0.1mA

Base power
p
required
q
5V 800mA max

0.01mA @ 36 VDC
1A for 1 ms
700mA for 100 ms

Derating Chart

Points

Minimum load

+
--

2--47

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

D4--08TA, 18--220VAC Output D4--16TA, 18--220VAC Output

8

Outputs per module

16

Commons per module

2 (isolated)

Commons per module

2 (isolated)

Operating voltage

15--265VAC

Operating voltage

15--265VAC

Output type

SSR (triac)

Output type

SSR (triac)

Peak voltage

265VAC

Peak voltage

265VAC

AC frequency

47--63 Hz

AC frequency

47--63 Hz

ON voltage drop

1.5VAC @ 2A

ON voltage drop

1.5 VAC @ 0.5A

Max current

2A / point, 5A / com. @ 30C

2A / common @ 60 C

Max current

0.5A / pt, 3A / common @ 45 C

2A / common @ 60 C

Max leakage current

5mA @ 265VAC

Max leakage current

4mA @ 265VAC

Max inrush current

30A for 10 ms, 10A for 100 ms

Max inrush current

15A for 10 ms, 10A for 100 ms

Minimum load

10 mA

Minimum load

10 mA

Base power required 5V

250 mA max

Base power required 5V

450 mA max

OFF to ON response

1 ms

OFF to ON response

1 ms

ON to OFF response

1 ms +1/2 AC cycle

ON to OFF response

1 ms +1/2 AC cycle

Terminal type

Removable

Terminal type

Removable

Status indicators

Logic Side

Status indicators

Logic Side

Weight

11.6 oz. (330 g)

Weight

12.2 oz. (350 g)

Fuses (non-replaceable)

1 (8A) per common

Fuses (non-replaceable)

1 (5A) per common

Derating Chart

Points

18--220VAC

Output Current
1A/point

Output
Current
0.5A/point

Output Current
2A/point
(5A/common)

(2A/common)

0
1
2
3

4
5
6
7

Points

FU

16

Derating Chart
Output Current
0.35A/point
Output Current
0.5A/point

D4--08TA

CA

18--220VAC

Output
Current
0.25A/point
(2A/common)

CA
L

L
L

3A/common

L
L
L
L
L

18--220 VAC

CB

5
L

18--220 VAC

CB

18--220 VAC

2
3

Output

Common

Optical Isolator

To LED

CB

CA

0
1
2
3

0
4
1
5

3
7

4
5
6
7

FU
4
5
6
7

CB
L
L

4
0
5
1
6
2

18--220 VAC

B
4
5
6
7

15--265VAC
10mA--0.5A
50/60Hz
CA

10
20
30
40
50
60C
50
68
86 104 122 140F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)

0
1
2
3

18--220 VAC

OUTPUT

D4--16TA

0
0
32

TB

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

10
20
30
40
50
60C
50
68
86 104 122 140F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)

OUTPUT

12

15--265VAC
10mA--2A
50/60Hz

0
0
32

TB

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

Outputs per module

18--220 VAC

Output

Common

Optical
Isolator

7
3

To LED

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--48

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

D4--08TR, Relay Output

F4--08TRS--1, Relay Output

Outputs per module

8 relays

Outputs per module

8 relays

Commons per module

2 (isolated)

Commons per module

8 (isolated)

Operating voltage

5--30VDC / 5--250VAC

Operating voltage:12--30VDC, 12--125VAC, 125--250VAC*

Output type

Form A (SPST--NO)

Output type: 4, Form C (SPDT), 4, Form A (SPST--NO)

Peak voltage

30VDC / 256VAC

Peak voltage

30VDC / 250VAC @10A

AC frequency

47--63 Hz

AC frequency

47--63 Hz

Max current (resistive)

2A / point, 5A / common

Max current (resistive)

10A / point, 40A / module

Max leakage current

0.1mA @ 265VAC

Max leakage current

0.1mA @ 265VAC

Max inrush current

2A

Max inrush current

10A

Minimum load

5mA

Minimum load

100mA @12 VDC

Base power required 5V

550mA max

Base power required 5V

575mA max

External DC required

None

External DC required

None

OFF to ON response

12 ms

OFF to ON response

7 ms

ON to OFF response

12 ms

ON to OFF response

9 ms

Terminal type

Removable

Terminal type

Removable

Status indicators

Logic Side

Status indicators

Logic Side

Weight

9.1 oz. (260 g)

Weight

13.2 oz. (374 g)

Fuses (non-replaceable)

1 (8A) per common

Fuses (non-replaceable)

1 (10A/125V) per common

Typical Relay Life (Operations)

Maximum Resistive
Operating Voltage
or Inductive Inrush
Load Current
30VDC 125VAC 250VAC
2A resistive
2A inductive
0.5A resistive
0.5A inductive

100K
100K
800K
300K

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

Points
CA
L
L
L

--

200K
60K
800K
200K

Derating Chart
Output
Current
1.25A/point

0
1
2
3

FU
4
5
6
7

50K
200K
325K
>50M
Points
8

CA
-L

Output Current
2A/point
(5A/common)

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 140 F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)

3
CB

--

-+

0
NO

L
L

--

--

-L

0
1

1/4 HP
10.0A
5.0A
3.0A
0.5A

5--250VAC
2A 50/60Hz
5--30VDC
5mA--2A

Maximum Resistive
Operating Voltage
or Inductive Inrush
Load Current
30VDC 125VAC 250VAC

D4--08TR

OUTPUT

TB

CB

300K
80K
1M
300K

Typical Relay Life (Operations)

RELAY

1
C

L
L

1
NC
2
NO
3
C

L
L
L
L

+
-+
--

3
NC

4
NO

5
NO

6
NO
7
NO

0C
0
NC
1
NO
2
C
2
NC
3
NO

5
6

Common

To LED

NO
L

Output

RELAY

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5
C
6
C
7
C

50K

Derating Chart

Output Current
5A/point

8A/point

2
0

10A/point
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 140F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)

Maximum DC voltage
rating is 120 VDC @
0.5A, 30,000 cycles
typical. Motor starters
up to and including
NEMA size 3 can be
used with this module.
10A

NC

OUTPUT

TB
4
5
6
7

0
1
2
3

TB

F4--08TRS--1
12--250VAC
10A 50/60Hz
12--30VDC
10mA--10A

0
NO
1
C
1
NC
2
NO
3
C
3
NC
4
NO
5
NO
6
NO

Common

4
C

25K
50K
100K
125K

RELAY

7
NO

0
C
0
NC
1
N0
2
C
2
NC
3
NO
4
C
5
C
6
C
7
C

2--49

Installation , Wiring, and Specifications

F4--08TRS--2, Relay Output

D4--16TR, Relay Output

8 relays

Outputs per module

16 relays

Commons per module

8 (isolated)

Commons per module

2 (isolated)

Operating voltage

12--30VDC, 12--250VAC

Operating voltage

5--30VDC / 5--250VAC

Output type: 4 Form C (SPDT), 4 Form A (SPST--NO)

Output type

Form A (SPST--NO)

Peak voltage

30VDC / 250VAC @5A

Peak voltage

30VDC / 256VAC

AC frequency

47--63 Hz

AC frequency

47--63 Hz

Max current (resistive)

5A / point, 40A / module

Max current (resistive)

1A / point, 5A / common

Max inrush current

10A

Max leakage current

0.1mA @ 265VAC

Minimum load

100mA @12 VDC

Max inrush current

4A

Base power required 5V

575mA max

Minimum load

5mA

External DC required

None

Base power required 5V

1000mA max

OFF to ON response

7 ms

External DC required

None

ON to OFF response

9 ms

OFF to ON response

10 ms

Terminal type

Removable

ON to OFF response

10 ms

Status indicators

Logic Side

Terminal type

Removable

Weight

13.8 oz. (390 g)

Status indicators

Logic Side

Fuses, (user replaceable)

1 (10A, 250V) per common

Weight

10.9 oz. (310 g)

19379--K--10A Wickman

Fuses (non-replaceable)

1 (8A) per common

Typical Relay Life (Operations)

Typical Relay Life (Operations)

Maximum Resistive
Operating Voltage
or Inductive Inrush
Load Current
28VDC 120VAC 240VAC
5.0A
3.0A
.05A

200K
325K
>50M
Points
8

--

--

--

--

-+
--

--

1
C

L
L

1
NC
2
NO
3
C

L
L
L
L

+
--

0
NO

L
L

3
NC
4
NO

L
L

5
NO

6
NO
7
NO

0C

0
NC

1
NO

2
C
2
NC
3
NO
4
C
5
C
6
C
7
C

50K

Derating Chart
Output Current
5A/point
(40A/module)

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 140F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)

Maximum DC voltage
rating is 120 VDC @
0.5A, 30,000 cycles
typical. Motor starters up
to and including NEMA
size 3 can be used with
this module.

4
5
6
7

0
1
2
3

0
NO

1
NC
2
NO
3
C
3
NC

NC

5
NO

5A
NO
L

Sample Relay Output Circuit (1 of 4)

1A resistive
1A inductive
0.5A resistive
0.5A inductive

FU
TB

12--250VAC
5A 50/60Hz
12--30VDC
10mA--5A

4
NO

Common

Maximum Resistive
Operating Voltage
or Inductive Inrush
Load Current
30VDC 125VAC 250VAC

F4--08TRS--2

Common 5A
NO

Sample Relay Output Circuit (1 of 4)

OUTPUT

TB

1
C

L
L

RELAY

6
NO
7
NO

>1M
400K
>2M
>1M
Points
16

0
C

12

0
NC

1
NO

0
L

L
L

2
L

2
C
2
NC

--

CB

L
L

L
L

3
NO

CA
4
5
6
7

8
4
0

500K
200K
800K
300K

300K
100K
500K
200K

Derating Chart
Output Current
0.6A/point
Output Current
1A/point
(5A/common)

RELAY
TB

OUTPUT

0
1
2
3

4
5
6
7

0
1
2
3

FU
4
5
6
7

D4--16TR
5--250VAC
1A 50/60Hz
5--30VDC
5mA--1A
CA
L
L

0
4
1
5

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 C
32 50 68 86 104 122 140F
Ambient Temperature (C/F)

2
6
3

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

100K
125K

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

Outputs per module

CB

6
L

4
0

4
C

5
C

6
C

1
2
3

Common

To LED

7
C

Output

RELAY

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2--50

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

Installation and
Safety Guidelines

Installation, Wiring,
and Specifications

Glossary of Specification Terms

Inputs or Outputs Per
Module

Indicates number of electrical input or output points per module and designates
current sinking, current sourcing, or either.

Commons Per Module

Number of electrical commons per module. A common is a connection to an input

or output module which is shared by multiple I/O circuits. It is ususally in the return
path to the power supply of the I/O circuit.

Input Voltage Range

The operating voltage range of an input circuit, measured from an input point to its
common terminal, when the input is ON.

Output Voltage Range

The output voltage range of an output circuit, measured from an output point to its
common terminal, when the output is OFF.

Peak Voltage

Maximum voltage allowed for an input or output circuit for a short duration.

AC Frequency

AC modules are designed to operate within a specific frequency range.

ON Voltage Level

The minimum voltage level at which an input point will turn ON.

OFF Voltage Level

The maximum voltage level at which an input point will turn OFF.

Input Impedance

The electrical resistance measured between an input point and its common point.
Since this resistance is non-linear, it may be listed for various input currents.

Input Current

Typical operating current for an active (ON) input.

Minimum ON Current

The minimum current for the input circuit to operate reliably in the ON state.

Maximum OFF Current

The maximum current for the input circuit to operate reliably in the OFF state.

Minimum Load

The minimum load current required for an output circuit to operate properly.

External DC Required

Some output modules require external power for the output circuitry.

On Voltage Drop

Sometimes called saturation voltage, it is the voltage measured from an output

point to its common terminal when the output is ON, at max. load.

Maximum Leakage
Current

The maximum current a connected maximum load will receive when the output
point is OFF.

Maximum Inrush Current

The maximum current used by a load for a short duration upon an OFF to ON
transition of a output point. It is greater than the normal ON state current and is
characteristic of inductive loads in AC circuits.

Base Power Required

The +5VDC power from the base required to operate the module. Be sure to
observe the base power budget calculations.

OFF to ON Response

The time the module requires to process an OFF to ON state transition.

ON to OFF Response

The time the module requires to process an ON to OFF state transition.

Status Indicators

The LEDs that indicate the ON/OFF status of an input or output point. These LEDs
are electrically located on the logic (CPU) side of the I/O interface circuit.

Terminal Type

Indicates whether the modules connector is removable or non-removable.

Weight

Indicates the weight of the module. See Appendix E for a list of the weights for the
various DL405 components.

Fuses

Protective device for an output circuit, which stops current flow when current
exceeds the fuse rating current. It may be replaceable or non-replaceable, or
located externally or internally.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation
In This Chapter. . . .
Overview
CPU General Specifications
CPU Electrical Specifications
CPU Hardware Features
Using Battery Backup
Selecting the Program Storage Media
CPU Setup
CPU Operation
I/O Response Time
CPU Scan Time Considerations
PLC Numbering Systems
Memory Map
DL405 Aliases
X Input/Y Output Bit Map
Control Relay Bit Map
Timer and Counter Status Bit Maps
Remote I/O Bit Map
Staget Control / Status Bit Map

13

3--2

CPU Specifications and Operation

Overview

CPU Specifications
and Operation

The CPU is the heart of the control system. Almost all system operations are
controlled by the CPU, so it is very important to set up and install it correctly. This
chapter provides the information needed to understand:
S the differences between the various models of CPUs
S the steps required to setup and install the CPU
General CPU
Features

The DL430, DL440, and DL450 are all modular CPUs which are installed in either 4,
6, or 8 slot bases. All I/O modules in the DL405 family will work with either CPU. The
DL405 CPUs offer a wide range of processing power and program instructions. All
offer RLL and Stage program instructions (See Chapter 5 for instruction definitions).
All DL405 CPUs have extensive internal diagnostics that can be monitored from the
application program or from an operator interface.
The three standard CPU types accept either 110VAC or 220 VAC for power input.
The DL440 CPU is available in two additional DC versions: the DL440DC--1 uses 24
VDC, and the DL440DC--2 uses 125 VDC.

DL430 CPU
Features

The DL430 has 6.5K of program memory comprised of 3.5K of ladder memory and
3K of V-memory (data registers). It has 113 instructions available for program
development, and supports a maximum of 640 points of local and local expansion
I/O and 512 points of remote I/O.
Program storage is in the EEPROM which is built into the CPU. In addition to the
EEPROM there is also RAM on the CPU which will store system parameters,
V-memory and other data which is not in the application program.
The DL430 provides two built-in communications ports. The first has a RS232C
interface and the other has a RS232C/RS422 interface. This allows for a
point-to-point connection on the first port and the option of either a multidrop network
connection (such as DirectNET) or a point-to-point connection on the other port.

DL440 CPU
Features

The DL440 includes all the DL430 features, plus more I/O points, more program
instructions, and greater memory space with plug-in memory cartridges. It has a
maximum of 22.5K of program memory comprised of 15.5K of ladder memory and
7K of V-memory (data registers). It supports a maximum of 640 points of local and
local expansion I/O and 1024 points of remote I/O. Its two communications ports
operate identically to the DL430s ports.
The DL440 has 170 instructions. The additional 57 instructions to the DL430
instruction set allow for more sophisticated program development through the use of
subroutines, additional instructions that support double word manipulation,
enhanced stack operations, diagnostic messaging, and ASCII/Hex data formatting.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications and Operation

DL450 CPU
Features

3--3

The new DL450 offers all the DL440 features, plus more I/O points, program
instructions, and two additional (4 total) communications ports. It has a maximum of
30.8K of program memory comprised of 15.5K of ladder memory and 15.3K of
V-memory (data registers). It supports a maximum of 2048 points of local and local
expansion I/O, and 1536 points of remote I/O. It includes an additional internal
RISC--based microprocessor for greater processing power. The DL450 has 210
instructions. The additional 40 instructions to the DL440 instruction set include drum
timers, a print function, floating point math, trigonometric functions, and PID loop
control for 16 loops.
The DL450 has a total of four communications ports. The first two ports are identical
to those on the DL430 and DL440. The third port has a RS-232C interface and can
be configured for either N sequence or K sequence protocol. It uses a modular
connector for point-to-point communications to devices such as the DV-1000 Data
Access Unit. The fourth port has a RS-422 interface using either MODBUS
master/slave, N sequence, or K sequence protocol. These four ports utilize three
physical connectors (the bottom connector has two ports on the DL450).

CPU Specifications
and Operation
DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

3--4

CPU Specifications and Operation

CPU General Specifications

Features

DL430

DL440

DL450

Total Program memory (words)

6.5K

14.5K / 22.5K*

22.8K / 30.8K*

Ladder memory (words), built-in

3.5K

7.5K / 15.5K*

7.5K / 15.5K*

V--memory (words)

3.0K

7.0K

15.3K

Scan Time, typical (1 K boolean)

8 -- 10 mS

2 -- 3 mS

4 -- 5 mS

Run time edit

No

Yes

Yes

Supports Override

No

No

Yes

Programming

Yes

Yes

Yes

Handheld programmer with cassette tape interface

Yes

Yes

Yes

DirectSOFT programming for Windows

Yes

Yes

Yes

Built-in communication ports

2 ports

2 ports

4 ports

CMOS RAM

No

w/mem. cartridge

w/mem. cartridge

UVPROM

No

w/mem. cartridge

w/mem. cartridge

EEPROM

Standard on CPU

w/mem. cartridge

w/mem. cartridge

FLASH RAM

No

No

Standard on CPU

CoProcessor modules

Yes

Yes

Yes

Networking modules

Yes

Yes

Yes

RS232C/RS422 Data Comm. Module

Yes

Yes

Yes

1152

1664

3584

Local I/O / Local expansion I/O / Remote I/O

640

640

4096

Remote I/O

512 max.

1024 max.

2048 max.

Remote I/O Channels

Local discrete input points maximum

320

320

1024

Local discrete output points maximum

320

320

1024

Local analog input channels maximum

320**

320**

512**

Local analog output channels maximum

320**

320**

512**

Maximum number of channels / masters (remote

or slice) per local CPU base

Remote I/O Distance

3300 ft. (1000m)

3300 ft. (1000m)

3300 ft. (1000m)

Discrete I/O Module Point Density

8/16/32/64

8/16/32/64

8/16/32/64

Slots per Base

4/6/8

4/6/8

4/6/8

CPU Specifications
and Operation

RLL and

RLL PLUS

Compatible with:

Total I/O
Total I/O available as:

* The first values represent CPUs using the 7.5K memory cartridge and the second value is for using 15.5K
memory cartridges.
** Additional Discrete and Analog I/O can be supported (within the power budget) through the use of remote I/O.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications and Operation

Feature

DL450

Number of instructions available (see Chapter 5 for 113

a description of the available instructions)

170

210

Control relays

480

1024

2048

Special relays (system defined)

288

352

512

384

1024

1024

V-memory

3072 words

7168 words

15360 words

Timers

128

256

256

Counters

128

128

256

Immediate I/O

Yes

Yes

Yes

Interrupt input

8 points

16 points

16 points

Subroutines

No

Yes

Yes

For/Next Loops

No

Yes

Yes

Drum Timers

No

No

Yes

Math

Integer

Integer

Integer and
Floating Point

PID Loop Control, built-in

No

No

16 loops

Time of Day Clock/Calendar

No

Yes

Yes

Internal diagnostics

Yes

Yes

Yes

Password security

No

Yes

Yes, multi-level

System and user error log

No

Yes

Yes

Battery backup

Yes

Yes

Yes

RLL PLUS

CPU Electrical Specifications

Parameter

DL430/DL440/DL450

DL440/450DC--1

DL440/450DC--2

Input Voltage, Nominal

120 VAC

24 VDC

125 VDC

Input Voltage Range

100--120 VAC and

196--240 VAC
+10% --15%

20--29 VDC

100--132 VDC
+10% --15%

Input Voltage Ripple

N/A

less than 10%

less than 10%

Inrush Current, maximum

20 A

10 A

20 A

Power Consumption, maximum

50 VA

38W

30 W

Voltage withstand (dielectric strength)

1 min. at 1500 VAC between primary, secondary, field ground and run
relay

Insulation resistance

> 10M at 500 VDC

Output Voltage, auxiliary power supply 20--28 VDC (24 nominal), ripple more than 1V P-P
(N/A on DL440--DC--1 and DL440--2)
Output Current, auxiliary power supply 24 VDC @ 400 mA maximum

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation

DL440

Stages in

DL430

3--5

3--6

CPU Specifications and Operation

CPU Hardware Features

The following diagram shows the main external features of the DL405 CPUs.

DL430/DL440 CPUs
Status indicators
Keyswitch
(mode select)

Port 0
(programming, MMI)

CPU Specifications
and Operation

Wiring Terminals

CPU Battery

Slot for DL440

Memory Cartridge
(optional on DL450)

DL450 CPU

Status indicators

Wiring Terminals

Port 1
(programming, MMI)

DIP Switch Config.

(battery, station address, baud rate)

Keyswitch (mode select)

Port 2
(programming, MMI)

Port 0
(programming, MMI)

CPU Battery

Port 1
(programming, MMI)
Slot for optional
Memory Cartridge
Port 3
(remote I/O, network)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications and Operation

Keyswitch
Functions

3--7

The keyswitch on the DL405 CPUs provides positions for enabling and disabling
program changes in the CPU. Unless the keyswitch is in the TERM position, RUN
and STOP mode changes will not be allowed by any interface device, (handheld
programmer, DirectSOFT programing package or operator interface). Programs
may be viewed or monitored but no changes may be made. If the switch is in the
TERM position and no program password is in effect, all operating modes as well as
program access will be allowed through the connected programming or monitoring
device.
Keyswitch Position
(Run Program)

RUN

TERM (Terminal)
STOP

(Stop Program)

CPU Action
CPU is forced into the RUN mode if no errors are encountered. No
changes are allowed by the attached programming/monitoring device.
RUN, PROGRAM and the TEST modes are available. Mode and
program changes are allowed by the programming/monitoring device.
CPU is forced into the STOP mode. No changes are allowed by the
programming/monitoring device.

There are two ways to change the CPU mode.

Status Indicators

The status indicator LEDs on the CPU front panels have specific functions which can
help in programming and troubleshooting.
Indicator

Status

Meaning

PWR

ON

Power good

OFF

Power failure

ON

CPU is in Run Mode

OFF

CPU is in Stop Mode

FLASHING

CPU is in firmware upgrade mode

ON

CPU self diagnostics error

OFF

CPU self diagnostics good

BATT
Note: Refer to page 3
Note:.Refer
3--12
12

ON

CPU battery voltage is low

OFF

CPU battery voltage is good or disabled

(DL450)

ON

CPU self diagnostics or local bus error

OFF

CPU self diagnostics and local bus good

ON

I/O self diagnostics error

OFF

I/O self diagnostics good

ON

Commuications error has occurred

OFF

Communications OK

ON

Data is being transmitted by the CPU

OFF

No data is being transmitted by the CPU

ON

Data is being received by the CPU

OFF

No data is being received by the CPU

RUN

CPU

DIAG
I/O
COM
TXD
RXD

(DL430/DL440)
(DL450)
(DL450)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation

1. Use the CPU key switch to select the operating mode.

2. Place the CPU key switch in the TERM position and use a programming
device to change operating modes. In this position, you can change
between Run and Program modes.

3--8

CPU Specifications and Operation

125VDC
Terminal Strip

24VDC
Terminal Strip

AC Terminal Strip

24V Auxiliary
Power
Logic
Ground
Chassis
Ground
+ DC

Logic
Ground
Chassis
Ground
+ DC

-- DC

-- DC

Logic Ground
Chassis
Ground
AC Line
AC Neutral
110/220
Voltage Select

Setting the CPU

DIP Switches
  
430 440 450

Install shunt for 110 VAC range,

leave off for 220 VAC range.

Locate the bank of four configuration switches located on the back of DL430 and
DL440 CPUs as shown in the figure below. These switches affect battery low
detection, station address override and baud rate of port 1 (25 pin D connector). Use
Aux Functions on the DL450 for these selections, via a programming device.
Switch 1
S ON = Battery low indicator disabled
ON
S OFF= Battery low indicator enabled
Switch 2
S ON = Station address override is
enabled (address 1)
S OFF = Station address is set by
AUX function with programming
device
1
2

CPU Specifications
and Operation

Install shunt between LG and G

Recommended screw torque: 10.6 lb--in (1.2Nm)

3
4

NOTE: Setting Switch 2 on forces the station address to 1. It does not change the
address set by the programming device. When Switch 2 is turned off again the
address will revert back to the address stored in memory via the AUX function.
Port 1 Baud Rate

Switch 3

Switch 4

300

Off

Off

1200

Off

On

9600

On

Off

19200

On

On

NOTE: Parity, Mode and Station address for port 1 is selected by AUX functions
using a programming device.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications and Operation

Communication
Ports
Port 0
Specifications
  
430 440 450

DL405 CPUs provides up to four communication ports. The DL430/DL440 CPUs

have two ports, while the DL450 CPU has a total of four ports.
The first port (all CPUs) is located on the 15 pin D-shell conector. It is for general
programming such as DirectSOFT, or operator interface connections. The D4--HPP
handheld programmer can only be used on this port on the CPU. The operating
parameters for Port 0 are permanently set to the values shown.
S 15 Pin female D type connector
S Protocol: K sequence
S RS232C, non-isolated, distance within 15 m (approx. 50 feet)
S 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 start, 1 stop bit, odd parity
S Asynchronous, Half duplex, DTE
Port 0
9

15

430 440 450

Port 0 Pin Descriptions (All CPUs)

1
YOP Sense connection between HPP and CPU
2
TXD
Transmit Data (RS232C)
3
RXD
Receive Data (RS232C)
4 ONLINE Request Communication (TTL)
5 ABNO CPU Error (TTL)
6 PRDY CPU ready to communicate (TTL)
7
CTS
Clear to Send (RS232C)
8 YOM Sense connection between HPP and CPU
9
-Not Used
10 LCBL Sense cable connection (TTL)
11
5V2
5 VDC for HPP logic
12
5V2
5 VDC for LCD backlight
13
0V
Logic ground
14
0V
Logic ground
15
0V
Logic ground

Port 1 (all CPUs) is located on the 25-pin connector, and is called the secondary
comm port for the DL430/DL440 CPUs. The secondary comm port address is
stored in the memory cartridge along with the I/O configuration. It is for general
programming such as DirectSOFT, operator interfaces, and networking, but it
cannot connect to the handheld programmer. Port 1 provides additional features
such as programmable baud rate, parity, ASCII/Hex mode and network address. Its
RS422 signals support multidrop networking and programming applications.
The baud rate and station address override is selected by dip switches on the rear of
the DL430/DL440 CPUs. The DL450 uses Aux functions to set the same parameters
(it has no DIP switches). RS232C or RS422 is selected by cabling to the proper
signal pin sets on the connector. Parity, ASCII/Hex mode and station address are
selected by AUX (auxiliary) functions with a programming device.
S 25 Pin female D type connector
S Protocols: K-sequence, DirectNet. The DL450 additionally supports
Non-Sequence and MODBUS protocols. (Note: The DL430 cannot
support K--sequence on ports 0 and 1 simultaneously. Use DirectNet on
port 1 if port 0 is used for communications).
S RS232C / RS422, Selectable address 1--90 (use Aux function)
S 300/ 600/ 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/(38400 DL450 only) baud
S Hex / ASCII modes (use Aux function to configure)
S 8 data bits, 1 start, 1 stop bit, Odd, Even or No parity
S Asynchronous, Half duplex (use Aux function to configure), DTE

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation

15-pin Female
D Connector

Port 1
Specifications
  

3--9

3--10

CPU Specifications and Operation

Port 1 Pin Descriptions (All CPUs)

Port 1
1

14

13

25

CPU Specifications
and Operation

25-pin Female
D Connector

Port 2
Specifications
  
430 440 450

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

-TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
-SG
-RXD+
RXD-CTS+
--TXD+
-TXD--RTS-RTS+
---CTS----

Not used
Transmit Data (RS232C)
Receive Data (RS232C)
Request to Send (RS232C)
Clear to Send (RS2332C)
Not used
Signal ground (RS232C/RS422)
(port 3 on DL450)
Receive Data + (RS422)
Receive Data -- (RS422)
Clear to Send + (RS422)
(port 3 on DL450)
(port 3 on DL450)
Transmit Data + (RS422)
Not used
Transmit Data -- (RS422)
Not used
Request to Send -- (RS422)
Request to Send + (RS422)
Not used
Not used
Not used
Clear to Send -- (RS422)
(port 3 on DL450)
(port 3 on DL450)

The operating parameters for Port 2 on the DL450 CPU are configurable using Aux
functions on a programming device.
S 6 Pin female modular (RJ12 phone jack) type connector
S Protocols: DirectNet (slave only), K sequence, Non-procedure
S RS232C, 300 / 600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 baud
S 8 data bits, 1 start, 1 stop bit; odd, even, or no parity
S Nodes -- from 1 to 90

Port 2
Port 2 Pin Descriptions (DL450)
1
6

1
2
3
4
5
6

0V
5V
RXD
TXD
5V
0V

Power (--) connection (GND)

Power (+) conection
Receive Data (RS232C)
Transmit Data (RS232C
Power (+) conection
Power (--) connection (GND)

6-pin Female
Modular Connector

NOTE: The 5V pins are rated at 200mA maximum, primarilly for use with some
operator interfaces.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications and Operation

Port 3
Specifications
  
430 440 450

3--11

The operating parameters for Port 3 on the DL450 CPU are configurable using Aux
functions on a programming device.
S
S
S
S
S
S
S

25 Pin female D type connector

Protocols: DirectNet, K-sequence, Remote I/O, MODBUS master or
slave
RS422, non-isolated, distance within 1000m (3280 ft.)
300 / 600 / 1200 /2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 baud (DirectNet,
K-sequence, MODBUS protocols),19200 / 38400 (Remote I/0 protocol)
8 data bits, 1 start, 1 stop bit, odd/none/even parity
Hex / ASCII modes (use Aux function to configure)
Selectable address 1--90 (use Aux function to configure)
Port 3 Pin Descriptions (DL450)

Port 3
1

25

25-pin Female
D Connector

--

-SG

TXD+
TXD------RXD+
RXD--

A drawing summarizing the pin locations

and functions of ports 1 and 3 on the
25-pin connector is to the right. The two
logical ports share two ground pins, but
have separate communications data pins.
When using both logical ports, you will
probably have to make a custom
connector which divides the signals in two
for two separate cables.

Not used
(port 1)
(port 1)
(port 1)
(port 1)
Not used
Signal ground
Not used
(port 1)
(port 1)
(port 1)
Transmit Data (+), (RS422)
Transmit Data (--), (RS422)
(port 1)
Not used
(port 1)
Not used
(port 1)
(port 1)
Not used
Not used
Not used
(port 1)
Receive Data (+), (RS422)
Receive Data (--), (RS422)

CPU Specifications
and Operation

13

14

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Two Logical Ports on

the 25 Pin Connector
Port 3

Port 1
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
0V
RXD+
RXD-CTS+

TXD+
TXD-RTS-RTS+

0V

CTS-TXD+
TXD--

RXD+
RXD--

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

3--12

CPU Specifications and Operation

Using Battery Backup

The DL405 CPUs have a lithium battery to maintain system RAM retentive memory
when the system is without external power. Typical CPU battery life is five years,
which includes PLC runtime and normal shutdown periods. However, consider
installing a fresh battery if your battery has not been changed recently and the
system will be shutdown for a period of more than ten days.
Battery indicators will flash on and off when a battery needs changing.
S Flashing at 2 Hz means the CPU battery needs changing.
S Fashing at 0.5 Hz means the RAM cartridge battery needs changing.
NOTE: Be sure to back up your V-memory and system parameters before replacing
your CPU battery. Just save the V-memory and system parameters to either a
Memory Cartridge, cassette tape, or to a personal computer (use DirectSOFT).

CPU Specifications
and Operation

To prevent memory loss the CPU battery can be changed while the system is
powered up. If the CPU has been powered off you should power-up the CPU for at
least 5 seconds prior to changing the battery. This ensures the capacitor used to
maintain the proper voltage levels necessary to retain memory is fully charged.
To remove the CPU battery:
1. Pull the battery out from the battery retaining clip.
2. Lift the clip on the two wire battery connector.
3. Slide the battery connector apart.
WARNING: Do not attempt to recharge the battery or dispose of it by fire. The
battery may explode or release hazardous materials.
To install the CPU battery:
1. Join the (keyed) battery connector so that the red wires match.
2. Push gently till the connector snaps closed
3. Slide the battery all the way into the retaining clip (flush with the opening).
4. Note the date the battery was changed.
1) Pull battery from
retaining clip
2) Extend battery
cable connector
3) Slide Battery
connector apart

Replace battery with

part # D3--D4--BAT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications and Operation

3--13

Selecting the Program Storage Media

The DL430 CPU provides built-in EEPROM storage as a standard feature, so it
cannot use other types of program storage. The DL440 CPU requires a removable
memory cartridge for operation. The DL450 provides built-in FLASH memory as a
standard feature. It will still accept a memory cartridge for program storage. The
following paragraphs will help you choose the correct memory storage for your CPU
type and application.
NOTE: The source memory (either cartridge or internal) must be specified by using
either DirectSOFT or the handheld programmer (D4--HPP).
Volatile and
Non-volatile
Memory
Memory Storage
Types

NOTE: When you purchase the UVPROM memory cartridge it is recommended you have
either a RAM or an EEPROM memory cartridge for program development. Once
development is completed you should then use the handheld programmer (D4--HPP) to copy
your application program to the UVPROM. We recommend the UVPROM memory cartridge
option for applications which are mass produced and do not require frequent alterations.
S

EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory)

does not require a battery for memory retention, so it is classified as
non-volatile. Both erasure and programming are accomplished
electrically, eliminating ultraviolet light source requirement. So, the
EEPROM memory cartridge can be electrically reprogrammed (if not
write protected) without being removed from the CPU. This is the
memory type built into the DL430 CPU.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation

The two types of memory storage available are volatile and non--volatile. Volatile
memory retains your data only as long as proper voltage is maintained to the storage
media. Non-volatile memory does not require power to retain data. The DL405
CPUs maintain the proper voltage either through the power supply or the use of a
memory backup battery.
Memory cartridges are applicable to only the DL440 and DL450 CPUs. One
cartridge is required on the DL440, but is optional on the DL450.The removable
memory cartridge is available as either CMOS RAM, UVPROM or EEPROM. The
RAM and EEPROM types offer a write protect jumper selection internal to the
cartridge. When the cartridge is opened the jumper may be moved to the protect
position to prevent accidental erasure or alterations to the program.
S CMOS RAM (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor / Random
Access Memory) requires a battery for memory retention, which is
located inside the cartridge. The memory can be modified or changed
easily with a handheld programmer or PC programming software.
Battery life is typically 3 years. Refer to Chapter 9, Maintenance and
Troubleshooting for battery replacement.
S UVPROM (Ultraviolet Programmable Read Only Memory) does not
require a battery for memory retention, so it is classified as
non-volatile. However, erasure (clearing memory) requires exposing
the memory ICs to an ultraviolet light source. The CPU can reprogram
the UVPROM cartridge after erasure, but this requires a handheld
programmer.

3--14

CPU Specifications and Operation

Memory Cartridge

The diagram below displays a Memory Cartridge for the DL440 or DL450. It shows
how the memory cartridge fits in the CPU and in the handheld programmer. It also
shows how to open the memory cartridge for selecting write protect (for CMOS
RAM) or for erasing the UVPROM. Details about connecting the handheld
programmer to the CPU is covered in DL405 Handheld Programmer Manual.
WARNING: Do not insert or remove a CPU memory cartridge while the power
is connected. Your program or password may be corrupted if this occurs. A
corrupted program can cause unpredictable operation which may result in a
risk of injury to personnel or damage to equipment. If the password becomes
corrupted, you cannot access the CPU.
Pull lever to
extract cartridge

Jumper pins 2 & 3

to Write Protect.
Jumper pins 1 & 2
to Write Enable.

Memory
Cartridge
Battery

CMOS Memory
Cartridge
D4-EE-2

UVPROM Memory
Cartridge
(with cover removed)

Retaining
Screws

P
R
OT
V

CPU Specifications
and Operation

CPU Battery

UVPROM Erasing Instructions

1) Remove cartridge from CPU or HPP
2) Remove cartridge retaining screw
3) Remove cover
4) Place cartridge in UV erasing lamp typical
12,000 w/cm2 lamp @ 2.5cm for 15--20 minutes
5) Replace cover

Jumper pin V to the

center pin
to Write Protect.
Jumper the center pin
to the unmarked pin
to Write Enable.

Memory Cartridge
Capacity Table
D4- RAM- 1

D4- RAM- 2

D4- UV- 2

D4- EE- 2

Program Storage Capacity

7.5K

15.5K

15.5K

15.5K

Cartridge Battery Type

Lithium

Lithium

None

None

Writing Cycle Life

N/A

N/A

1000

>10,000

Write Inhibit

Internal jumper

Internal jumper

No

Internal jumper

Memory Clear Method

Electrical

Electrical

Ultraviolet light

Electrical

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications and Operation

3--15

CPU Setup
Setting the Clock
and Calendar
  
430 440 450

The DL440 and DL450 CPUs also have a Clock / Calendar that can be used for many
purposes. If you need to use this feature there are also AUX functions available that
allow you set the date and time. For example, you would use AUX 52,
Display/Change Calendar to set the time and date with the Handheld Programmer.
With DirectSOFT you would use the PLC Setup menu options.
There are also two instructions that allow you to change or modify the time and date
from within the application program. Chapter 5 provides information on the DATE
and TIME instructions that are used to establish the clock and calendar information.
The CPU uses the following format to
display the date and time.
S Date Year, Month, Date, Day of
week (0 -- 6, Sunday thru Saturday)
S Time 24 hour format, Hours,
Minutes, Seconds

Handheld Programmer Display

94/01/02 23:08:17

Variable/Fixed
The DL450 CPU offers three type of scan time configurations:
Scan Time Feature
S Variable -- this is the standard scan time setting, in which the PLC scan
  
is running as fast as the ladder program execution allows.
430 440 450

Fixed -- the scan time may be set to be constant, from 10 mS to

9999 mS. The operating system inserts a delay after each ladder scan
to accomplish the requested fixed scan.
S Limit -- the PLC operates with a variable scan, but generates a
watchdog timeout error if the scan time exceeds the specified amount.
You can use this to trap program execution errors, for example.
To select the desired DL450 scan time option, use DirectSOFT and go online with
the DL450. Then select the PLC Menu, then Diagnostics, then Scantime, then
Setup. The three choices of Variable, Fixed, or Limit then appear.

Password
Protection

The DL405 CPUs have a password protection feature which prevents unauthorized
access to CPU programs or data. Use AUX 81, 82, and 83 to either modify the
password, and unlock or lock the CPU respectively. The password must be an
eight-character numeric (0--9) code. Once youve entered a password, you can
remove it by entering all zeros (00000000). (This is the default from the factory.)
Multilevel Password (DL440/450 only) -- The DL440 and DL450 feature an
intermediate level of protection that you can choose by making the first character of
the password the character A. The remaining 7 characters must be numeric (0--9).
The intermediate password protection differs from the standard password in that it
does allow an operator interface device to access and change V-memory data such
as presets. It still does not allow a ladder program edit, however.
For more information on passwords, see Appendix A, Auxiliary Functions.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation

You can use the AUX function to change any component of the date or time.
However, the CPU will not automatically correct any discrepancy between the date
and the day of the week. For example, if you change the date to the 15th of the month
and the 15th is on a Thursday, you will also have to change the day of the week
(unless the CPU already shows the date as Thursday).

3--16

CPU Specifications and Operation

Auxiliary Functions Many CPU setup tasks involve the use of Auxiliary (AUX) Functions. The AUX
Functions perform many different operations, ranging from simple operating mode
changes to copying programs to memory cartridges. They are divided into
categories that affect different system parameters. See Appendix A for detailed
descriptions of the AUX functions.
You can access the AUX Functions with the DL405 Handheld Programmer, or with
DirectSOFTs pull-down menus. Manuals for those products provide step-by-step
instructions. Some AUX Functions are designed specifically for Handheld
Programmer setup, so they are not supported by DirectSOFT. The following table
lists the Auxiliary functions for the different CPUs and the Handheld Programmer.
AUX Function and Description

430

440

450

HPP

AUX 1* Operating Mode

430

440

450

HPP

AUX 5* CPU Configuration

11

Go to Run Mode

--

51

Modify Program Name

--

12

Go to Test Mode

--

52

Display / Change Calendar

--

13

Go to Program Mode

--

53

Display Scan Time

--

14

Run Time Edit

--

54

Initialize Scratchpad

--

55

Set Watchdog Timer

--

AUX 2* RLL Operations

CPU Specifications
and Operation

AUX Function and Description

21

Check Program

--

56

Configure Comm. Ports

--

22

Change Reference

--

57

Set Retentive Ranges

--

23

Clear Ladder Range

--

58

Test Operations

--

24

Clear Ladders

--

5C

Display Error History

--

25

Select MC or Flash Memory

--

5D

Select PLC Scan Mode

--

26

Copy MC Contents to Flash

--

27

Copy Flash contents to MC

--

61

Show Revision Numbers

28

Verify Flash contents = MC

--

62

Beeper On / Off

63

Backlight On / Off

64

Select Online / Offline

65

Run Self Diagnostics

AUX 3* V-Memory Operations

31

Clear V Memory

--

32

Clear V Range

--

33

Find V-memory Value

--

AUX 4* I/O Configuration

AUX 6* Handheld Programmer Configuration

AUX 7* Memory Cartridge Operations

71

CPU to Memory Cartridge

41

Show I/O Configuration

--

72

Memory Cartridge to CPU

42

I/O Diagnostics

--

73

Compare MC with CPU

44

Power up I/O Configuration

Check

--

74

Memory Cart. Blank Check

45

Select Configuration

Clear Memory Cartridge

--

75

46

Configure I/O

Display Memory Cart. Type

--

76

47

Intelligent I/O

Tape to Memory Cartridge

--

77
78

Memory Cartridge to Tape

79

Compare MC with Tape

supported

not supported
-- not applicable


DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

AUX 8* Password Operations

81

Modify Password

--

82

Unlock CPU

--

83

Lock CPU

--

CPU Specifications and Operation

3--17

Before entering a new program, its a good idea to always clear ladder memory. AUX
Function 24 clears the complete user program.
You can also use other AUX functions to clear other memory areas.

Clearing an
Existing Program

AUX 23 Clear Ladder Range

AUX 31 Clear V Memory
AUX 32 Clear V Range

S
S
S
Initializing System
Memory

The DL405 CPUs maintain system parameters in a memory area often referred to as
the scratchpad. In some cases, you may make changes to the system setup that
will be stored in system memory. For example, if you specify a range of Control
Relays (CRs) as retentive, these changes are stored.
AUX 54 resets the system memory to the default values.
WARNING: You may never have to use this feature unless you want to clear
any setup information that is stored in system memory. Usually, youll only
need to initialize the system memory if you are changing programs and the old
program required a special system setup. You can usually change from
program to program without ever initializing system memory.
Remember, this AUX function will reset all system memory. If you have set
special parameters such as retentive ranges, you will need to re-enter the
data.
Since the DL405 CPUs have built-in DirectNET ports, you can use the Handheld
Programmer to set the network address for the port and the port communication
parameters. The default settings are:
S Station address 1
S Hex mode
S Odd parity
The DirectNET Manual provides additional information about choosing the
communication settings for network operation. If youre using the bottom port for
programming, you can just use the default settings. For the extra two ports on the
DL450, see Chapter 4, System Design and Configuration.

Setting Retentive
Memory Ranges

Memory Area

Use AUX 56 to set the network address and communication parameters for the
secondary port(s).
The DL405 CPUs provide certain ranges of retentive memory by default. The default
ranges are suitable for many applications, but you can change them if your
application requires additional retentive ranges or no retentive ranges at all. The
default settings are:
DL430
Default Range

Avail. Range

DL440
Default Range

DL450

Avail. Range

Default Range

Avail. Range

Control Relays

C600 -- C737

C0 -- C737

C600 -- C737

C0 -- C1777

C1000 -- C3777

V--Memory

V2000 -- V7377

V0 -- V7377

V2000 -- V7777

V0 -- V17777

V1400 -- V37777 V0 -- V37777

Timers

None by default T0 -- T177

None by default T0 -- T377

None by default

T0 -- T377

Counters

CT0 -- CT177

CT0 -- CT177

CT0 -- CT377

CT0 -- CT377

Stages

None by default S0 -- S577

None by default

S0 -- S1777

CT0 -- CT177

CT0 -- CT177

None by default S0 -- S1777

C0 -- C3777

Use AUX 57 to set the retentive ranges.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation

Setting the CPU

Network Address

3--18

CPU Specifications and Operation

CPU Operation
Achieving the proper control for your equipment or process requires a good
understanding of how DL405 CPUs control all aspects of system operation. The flow
chart below shows the main tasks of the CPU operating system. In this section, we
will investigate four aspects of CPU operation:
S
S

CPU Specifications
and Operation

CPU Operating
System

CPU Operating System the CPU manages

all aspects of system control.
CPU Operating Modes The three primary
modes of operation are Program Mode, Run
Mode, and Test Mode.
CPU Timing The two important areas we
discuss are the I/O response time and the
CPU scan time.
CPU Memory Map The CPUs memory
map shows the CPU addresses of various
system resources, such as timers, counters,
inputs, and outputs.

At powerup, the CPU initializes the internal

electronic hardware. Memory initialization starts
with examining the retentive memory settings. In
general, the contents of retentive memory is
preserved, and non-retentive memory is initialized
to zero (unless otherwise specified).
After the one-time powerup tasks, the CPU begins
the cyclical scan activity. The flowchart to the right
shows how the tasks differ, based on the CPU mode
and the existence of any errors. The scan time is
defined as the average time around the task loop.
Note that the CPU is always reading the inputs,
even during program mode. This allows
programming tools to monitor input status at any
time.
The outputs are only updated in Run mode. In
program mode, they are in the off state.
In Run Mode, the CPU executes the user ladder
program. Immediately afterwards, any PID loops
which are configured are executed (DL450 only).
Then the CPU writes the output results of these two
tasks to the appropriate output points.
Error detection has two levels. Non-fatal errors are
reported, but the CPU remains in its current mode. If
a fatal error occurs, the CPU is forced into program
mode and the outputs go off.

Power up

Initialize hardware
Check I/O module
config. and verify
Initialize various memory
based on retentive
configuration

Update input
Read input data from
Specialty and Remote I/O
Service peripheral

CPU Bus Communication

Update Clock / Calendar

PGM

Mode?
RUN
Execute ladder program

PID Operations (DL450)

Update output
Write output data to
Specialty and Remote I/O

Do diagnostics

OK
OK?
NO
Report the error, set flag,
register, turn on LED

Fatal error
YES
Force CPU into
PGM mode

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

YES

NO

CPU Specifications and Operation

Program Mode
Operation

In Program Mode the CPU does not

execute the application program or update
the output modules. The primary use for
Program Mode is to enter or change an
application program. You also use the
program mode to set up CPU parameters,
such as the network address, retentive
memory areas, etc.

3--19

Download Program

You can use the key switch on the CPU to select Program Mode operation. Or, with
the keyswitch in TERM position, you can use a programming device such as the
Handheld Programmer to place the CPU in Program Mode.
Run Mode
Operation

Read Inputs
Read Inputs from Specialty I/O
Service Peripherals, Force I/O
CPU Bus Communication
Update Clock, Special Relays

Run Mode operation can be divided into

several key areas. It is very important you
understand how each of these areas of
execution can affect the results of your
application program solutions.
You can use the key switch to select Run
Mode operation. Or, with the keyswitch in
TERM position, you can use a
programming device, such as the
Handheld Programmer to place the CPU
in Run Mode.

Solve the Application Program

Solve PID Equatinos (DL450)
Write Outputs
Write Outputs to Specialty I/O
Diagnostics

With the DL440 or DL450, you can also edit the program during Run Mode. The Run
Mode Edits are not bumpless. Instead, the CPU maintains the outputs in their last
state while it accepts the new program information. If an error is found in the new
program, then the CPU will turn all the outputs off and enter the Program Mode.
WARNING: Only authorized personnel fully familiar with all aspects of the
application should make changes to the program. Changes during Run Mode
become effective immediately. Make sure you thoroughly consider the impact
of any changes to minimize the risk of personal injury or damage to
equipment.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation

In Run Mode, the CPU executes the

application
program,
does
PID
calculations for configured PID loops
(DL450) only, and updates the I/O system.
You can perform many operations during
Run Mode. Some of these include:
S Monitor and change I/O point status
S Update timer/counter preset values
S Update Variable memory locations

CPU Specifications
and Operation

3--20

CPU Specifications and Operation

Read Inputs

The CPU reads the status of all inputs, then stores it in the image register. Input
image register locations are designated with an X followed by a memory location.
Image register data is used by the CPU when it solves the application program.
Of course, an input may change after the CPU has just read the inputs. Generally,
the CPU scan time is measured in milliseconds. If you have an application that
cannot wait until the next I/O update, you can use Immediate Instructions. These do
not use the status of the input image register to solve the application program. The
Immediate instructions immediately read the input status directly from I/O modules.
However, this lengthens the program scan since the CPU has to read the I/O point
status again. A complete list of the Immediate instructions is included in Chapter 5.

Read Inputs from

Specialty and
Remote I/O

After the CPU reads the inputs from the input modules, it reads any input point data
from any Specialty modules that are installed, such as High Speed Counter
modules, etc.This is also the portion of the scan that reads the input status from
Remote I/O racks. The GX data type is used for both remote inputs and outputs. (The
DL405 Remote I/O Manual provides additional information on how to set up the
remote I/O link.)
NOTE: It may appear the Remote I/O point status is updated every scan. This is not
quite true. The CPU will receive information from the Remote I/O Master module
every scan, but the Remote Master may not have received an update from all the
Remote slaves. Remember, the Remote I/O link is managed by the Remote Master,
not the CPU.

Service Peripherals After the CPU reads the inputs from the input modules, it reads any attached
peripheral devices. This is primarily a communications service for any attached
and Force I/O
devices. For example, it would read a programming device to see if any input, output,
or other memory type status needs to be modified.
Forced I/O temporarily changes the status of a discrete bit. For example, you may
want to force an input on, even though it is really off. This allows you to change the
point status that was stored in the image register. This value will be valid until the
image register location is written to during the next scan. This is primarily useful
during testing situations when you just need to force a bit on to trigger another event.
Forced Inputs The CPU reads the status of X inputs during the Read Inputs
portion of the scan. When the CPU services the programming device, it logs any
request to force an X input on. If the input is used in the application program, the
ladder X contact is considered closed (on). Since an X input is a real-world input
point, the CPU will change the status when it reads the inputs on the next scan.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications and Operation

3--21

Forced Outputs Outputs which are not used in the program can be forced on and
off for troubleshooting and maintenance purposes. You can temporarily allow the
forcing of any output by inserting an END coil instruction at the beginning of the
ladder program. Then you can use DirectSOFT or a HPP to force outputs on and off.
The DL405 CPUs only retain the forced value for one scan, if the I/O point
corresponds to an actual point on a module in the system. However, if the point
address is greater than any actual I/O point address in the system or it is not used in
the ladder program, then the point will maintain the forced status.
WARNING: Only authorized personnel fully familiar with all aspects of the
application should make changes to the program. Make sure you thoroughly
consider the impact of any changes to minimize the risk of personal injury or
damage to equipment.
Update Special
There are certain V-memory locations that contain register information. This portion
Relays and Special of the execution cycle makes sure these locations get updated on every scan. Also,
there are several different Special Relays, such as diagnostic relays, etc., that are
Registers
also updated during this segment.
CPU Bus
Communication

DCM

DCM

Data

Update Clock,
Special Relays,
and Special
Registers

The DL440 and DL450 CPUs have an internal real-time clock and calendar timer
which is accessible to the application program. Special V-memory locations hold this
information. This portion of the execution cycle makes sure these locations get
updated on every scan. Also, there are several different Special Relays, such as
diagnostic relays, etc., that are also updated during this segment.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation

Many of the Specialty Modules, such as the Data Communications Module and the
FACTS CoProcessor modules, can transfer data to and from the CPU over the CPU
bus on the backplane. This data is more than just standard I/O point status. This type
of communications can only occur on the CPU (local) base. There is a portion of the
execution cycle used to communicate with these modules. The CPU performs both
read and write requests during this segment.

3--22

CPU Specifications and Operation

Solve Application
Program

The CPU evaluates each instruction in the

application program during this segment
of the scan cycle. The instructions define
the relationship between input conditions
and the system outputs.
The CPU begins with the first rung of the
ladder program, evaluating it from left to
right and from top to bottom. It continues,
rung by rung, until it encounters the END
coil instruction. At that point, a new image
for the outputs is complete.
X0

X1

Y0
OUT

C0

CPU Specifications
and Operation

Read Inputs from Specialty I/O

Service Peripherals, Force I/O
CPU Bus Communication
Update Clock, Special Relays
Solve the Application Program
Solve PID equations (DL450)

C100
X5

Read Inputs

LD
X10

K10

Write Outputs

Y3
OUT

Write Outputs to Specialty I/O

END

Diagnostics

The internal control relays (C), the stages (S), the global relays (GX), and the
variable memory (V) are also updated in this segment.
You may recall the CPU may have obtained and stored forcing information when it
serviced the peripheral devices. If any I/O points or memory data have been forced,
the output image register also contains this information.
NOTE: If an output point was used in the application program, the results of the
program solution will overwrite any forcing information that was stored. For example,
if Y0 was forced on by the programming device, and a rung containing Y0 was
evaluated such that Y0 should be turned off, then the output image register will show
that Y0 should be off. Of course, you can force output points that are not used in the
application program. In this case, the point remains forced because there is no
solution that results from the application program execution.
Solve PID
Loop Equations
  
430 440 450

Write Outputs

The DL450 CPU can process up to 16 PID loops. The loop calculations are run as a
separate task from the ladder program execution, immediately following it. Only
loops which have been configured are calculated, and then only according to a
built-in loop scheduler. The sample time (calculation interval) of each loop is
programmable. Please refer to Chapter 8, PID Loop Operation, for more on the
effects of PID loop calculation on the overall CPU scan time.
Once the application program has solved the instruction logic and constructed the
output image register, the CPU writes the contents of the output image register to the
corresponding output points located in the local CPU base or the local expansion
bases. Remember, the CPU also made sure any forcing operation changes were
stored in the output image register, so the forced points get updated with the status
specified earlier.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications and Operation

Write Outputs to
Specialty and
Remote I/O

3--23

After the CPU updates the outputs in the local and expansion bases, it sends the
output point information that is required by any Specialty modules which are
installed. For example, this is the portion of the scan that writes the output status
from the image register to the Remote I/O racks.
NOTE: It may appear the Remote I/O point status is updated every scan. This is not
quite true. The CPU will send the information to the Remote I/O Master module every
scan, but the Remote Master will update the actual remote modules during the next
communication sequence between the master and slave modules. Remember, the
Remote I/O link communication is managed by the Remote Master, not the CPU.

Diagnostics

Read Inputs
Read Inputs from Specialty I/O
Service Peripherals, Force I/O
CPU Bus Communication
Update Clock, Special Relays
Solve the Application Program
Solve PID Loop Equations
Write Outputs
Write Outputs to Specialty I/O
Diagnostics

You can use AUX 53 to view the minimum, maximum, and current scan time. Use
AUX 55 to increase or decrease the watchdog timer value. There is also an RSTWT
instruction that can be used in the application program to reset the watch dog timer
during the CPU scan.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation

During this part of the scan, the CPU

performs all system diagnostics and other
tasks, such as:
S calculating the scan time
S updating special relays
S resetting the watchdog timer
DL405 CPUs automatically detect and
report many different error conditions.
Appendix B contains a listing of the
various error codes available with the
DL405 system.
One of the more important diagnostic
tasks is the scan time calculation and
watchdog timer control. DL405 CPUs
have a watchdog timer that stores the
maximum time allowed for the CPU to
complete the solve application segment of
the scan cycle. The default value set from
the factory is 200 mS. If this time is
exceeded the CPU will enter the Program
Mode, turn off all outputs, and report the
error. For example, the Handheld
Programmer displays E003 S/W
TIMEOUT when the scan overrun occurs.

3--24

CPU Specifications and Operation

I/O Response Time

Is Timing Important I/O response time is the amount of time required for the control system to sense a
change in an input point and update a corresponding output point. In the majority of
for Your
applications, the CPU performs this task practically instantaneously. However,
Application?
some applications do require extremely fast update times. There are four things that
can affect the I/O response time:
S The point in the scan period when the field input changes states
S Input module Off to On delay time
S CPU scan time
S Output module Off to On delay time
Normal Minimum
I/O Response

The I/O response time is shortest when the module senses the input change just
before the Read Inputs portion of the execution cycle. In this case the input status is
read, the application program is solved, and the output point gets updated. The
following diagram shows an example of the timing for this situation.

CPU Specifications
and Operation

Scan
Scan

Solve
Program

Solve
Program

Read
Inputs

Solve
Program

Solve
Program

Write
Outputs

Field Input

Input Module
Off/On Delay

CPU Reads
Inputs

CPU Writes
Outputs

Output Module
Off/On Delay
I/O Response Time

In this case, you can calculate the response time by simply adding the following
items.
Input Delay + Scan Time + Output Delay = Response Time
Normal Maximum
I/O Response

The I/O response time is longest when the module senses the input change just after
the Read Inputs portion of the execution cycle. In this case the new input status does
not get read until the following scan. The following diagram shows an example of the
timing for this situation.
In this case, you can calculate the response time by simply adding the following
items.
Input Delay +(2 x Scan Time) + Output Delay = Response Time

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications and Operation

3--25

Scan
Scan

Solve
Program

Solve
Program
Read
Inputs

Solve
Program

Solve
Program

Write
Outputs

Field Input
CPU Reads
Inputs

Input Module
Off/On Delay

CPU Writes
Outputs

Output Module
Off/On Delay
I/O Response Time

Improving
Response Time

Scan
Scan

Solve
Program
Normal Read
Input

Solve
Program
Read
Input
Immediate

Solve
Program
Write
Output
Immediate

Solve
Program

Normal Write
Outputs

Field Input
Input Module
Off/On Delay
Output Module
Off/On Delay
I/O Response Time

In this case, you can calculate the response time by simply adding the following
items.
Input Delay + Instruction Execution Time + Output Delay = Response Time
The instruction execution time is calculated by adding the time for the immediate
input instruction, the immediate output instruction, and all instructions inbetween.
NOTE: When the immediate instruction reads the current status from a module, it
uses the results to solve that one instruction without updating the image register.
Therefore, any regular instructions that follow will still use image register values. Any
immediate instructions that follow will access the module again to update the status.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation

There are a few things you can do the help improve throughput.
S Choose instructions with faster execution times
S Use immediate I/O instructions (which update the I/O points during the
ladder program execution segment)
S Choose modules that have faster response times
Immediate I/O instructions are probably the most useful technique. The following
example shows immediate input and output instructions, and their effect.

3--26

CPU Specifications and Operation

CPU Specifications
and Operation

CPU Scan Time Considerations

The scan time covers all the cyclical
tasks that are performed by the operating
system. You can use DirectSOFT or the
Handheld Programmer to display the
minimum, maximum, and current scan
times that have occurred since the
previous Program Mode to Run Mode
transition. This information can be very
important
when
evaluating
the
performance of a system.
As weve shown previously there are
several segments that make up the scan
cycle. Each of these segments requires a
certain amount of time to complete. Of all
the segments, the only one you really
have the most control over is the amount
of time it takes to execute the application
program. This is because different
instructions take different amounts of
time to execute. So, if you think you need
a faster scan, then you can try to choose
faster instructions.
Your choice of I/O modules and system
configuration, such as expansion or
remote I/O, can also affect the scan time.
However, these things are usually
dictated by the application.
For example, if you have a need to count
pulses at high rates of speed, then youll
probably have to use a High-Speed
Counter module. Also, if you have I/O
points that need to be located several
hundred feet from the CPU, then you
need remote I/O because its much faster
and cheaper to install a single remote I/O
cable than it is to run all those signal
wires for each individual I/O point.
The following paragraphs provide some
general information on how much time
some of the segments can require.

Power up

Initialize hardware
Check I/O module
config. and verify
Initialize various memory
based on retentive
configuration

Update input
Read input data from
Specialty and Remote I/O
Service peripheral

CPU Bus Communication

Update Clock / Calendar

PGM

Mode?
RUN
Execute ladder program

PID Equations (DL450)

Update output
Write output data to
Specialty and Remote I/O

Do diagnostics

OK
OK?
NO
Report the error, set flag,
register, turn on LED

Fatal error
YES
Force CPU into
PGM mode

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

YES

NO

CPU Specifications and Operation

Initialization
Process

The CPU performs an initialization task once the system power is on. The required
time depends on system loading, such as the number of I/O modules installed, type
of memory cartridge being used etc. The initialization task is performed once at
power-up, so it does not affect the scan time for the application program.
Initialization

Reading Inputs

3--27

DL430

DL440

DL450

Minimum Time

1.2 Seconds

1.0 Seconds

1.9 Seconds

Maximum Time

3.2 Seconds

2.5 Seconds

3.3 Seconds

The time required to read the input status for the local and expansion input modules
depends on which CPU you are using, the number of input points in these bases,
and the number of input modules being used. The following table shows typical
update times required by the CPU.
Timing Factors

DL430

DL440

DL450

20.0 s

14.5 s

20.0 s

Per input module

48.0 s

22.6 s

13.0 s

Per input point

4.0 s

2.5 s

6.3 s

For example, the time required for a DL430 to read two 16-point input modules would
be calculated as follows. (Where NM is the number of modules and NI is the total
number of input points.)
Formula

Time = 20s + (48s x NM) + (4s x NI)

Example

Time = 20s + (48s x 2) + (4s x 16)

Time = 180 s

NOTE: This information provides the amount of time the CPU spends reading the
input status from the modules. Dont confuse this with the I/O response time that was
discussed earlier.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation

Overhead

3--28

CPU Specifications and Operation

Reading Inputs
from Specialty I/O

During this portion of the cycle the CPU reads any input points associated with the
following.
S Remote I/O
S Specialty Modules (such as High-Speed Counter, etc.)
The time required to read any input status from these modules depends on which
CPU you are using, the number of modules, and the number of input points.
Specialty Module

DL430

DL450

Overhead

32.0 s

20.0 s

20.0 s

Per module (with inputs)

100.0 s

67.0 s

13.0 s

Per input point

80.0 s

54.0 s

13.8 s

Remote Module

CPU Specifications
and Operation

DL440

DL430

DL440

DL450

Overhead

32.0 s

22.0 s

19.0 s

Per module (with inputs)

150.0 s

100.0 s

62.0 s

Per input point

25.0 s

17.0 s

11.2 s

For example, the time required for a DL430 to read two 32-point input modules
(located in a Remote base) and the input points associated with a single High-Speed
Counter module would be calculated as follows. (Where NM is the number of
modules and NI is the total number of input points.)
Remote I/O

High-Speed Counter

Formula
Time = 32s + (150s x NM) + (25s x NI)

Formula
Time = 32s + (100s x NM) + (80s x NI)

Example
Time = 32s + (150s x 2) + (25s x 32)

Example
Time = 32s + (100s x 1) + (80s x 16)

Time = 1832 s

Time = 1412 s

Total Time

Time = 3244 s

Service Peripherals Communication requests can occur at any time during the scan, but the CPU only
logs the requests for service until the Service Peripherals portion of the scan. (The
CPU does not spend any time on this if there are no peripherals connected.)
To Log Request (anytime)

DL430

DL440

DL450

Nothing
Connected

Min. & Max.

0 s

0 s

0 s

Port 0

Send Min. / Max.

52 / 62 s

40 / 48 s

38 / 38 s

Rec. Min. / Max.

60 / 78 s

52 / 63 s

45 /45 s

Send Min. / Max.

60 / 78 s

46 / 50 s

41 / 48 s

Rec. Min. / Max.

68 / 86 s

66 / 70 s

47 / 59 s

Send Min. / Max.

N/A

N/A

41 / 48 s

Rec. Min. / Max.

N/A

N/A

47 / 59 s

Send Min. / Max.

N/A

N/A

38 / 38 s

Rec. Min. / Max.

N/A

N/A

45 / 45 s

Port 1
Port 2
Port 3

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications and Operation

3--29

During the Service Peripherals portion of the scan, the CPU analyzes the
communications request and responds as appropriate. The amount of time required
to service the peripherals depends on the content of the request.
To Service Request

CPU Bus
Communication

DL430

DL440

DL450

Minimum

170 s

120 s

96 s

Run Mode Max.

18 ms

26 ms

160 ms

Program Mode Max.

3 Seconds

15 Seconds

11.2 Seconds

Some specialty modules can also communicate directly with the CPU via the CPU
bus. During this portion of the cycle the CPU completes any CPU bus
communications. The actual time required depends on the type of modules installed
and the type of request being processed.
NOTE: Some specialty modules can have a considerable impact on the CPU scan
time. If timing is critical in your application, consult the module documentation for any
information concerning the impact on the scan time.
The clock, calendar, and special relays are updated and loaded into special
V-memory locations during this time. This update is performed during both Run and
Program Modes.
Modes
Program Mode
Run Mode

Writing Outputs

DL430

DL440

DL450

Minimum

8.0 s fixed

35.0 s

12.0 s

Maximum

8.0 s fixed

48.0 s

12.0 s

Minimum

20.0 s

60.0 s

22.0 s

Maximum

26.0 s

85.0 s

29.0 s

The time required to write the output status for the local and expansion I/O modules
depends on which CPU you are using, the number of output points in these bases,
and the number of output modules being used. The following table shows typical
update times required by the CPU.
Timing Factors

DL430

DL440

DL450

Overhead

20.0 s

12.6 s

15.0 s

Per output module

45.0 s

21.0 s

13.0 s

Per output point

4.0 s

2.5 s

14.1 s

For example, the time required for a DL430 to write data for two 32-point output
modules would be calculated as follows (where NM is the number of modules and
NO is the total number of output points).
Formula

Time = 20s + (45s x NM) + (4s x NO)

Example

Time = 20s + (45s x 2) + (4s x 32)

Time = 238 s

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation

Update
Clock/Calendar,
Special Relays,
Special Registers

3--30

CPU Specifications and Operation

Writing Outputs to
Specialty I/O

During this portion of the cycle the CPU writes any output points associated with the
following.
S Remote I/O
S Specialty Modules (such as High-Speed Counter, etc.)
The time required to write any output image register data to these modules depends
on which CPU you are using, the number of modules, and the number of output
points.
Specialty Module

DL430

DL440

DL450

Overhead

32.0 s

20.0 s

18.0 s

Per module (with outputs)

100.0 s

67.0 s

13.0 s

Per output point

80.0 s

54.0 s

14.1 s

Remote Module

DL430

DL440

DL450

Overhead

32.0 s

22.0 s

15.0 s

Per module (with outputs)

150.0 s

100.0 s

54.0 s

Per output point

25.0 s

17.0 s

13.9 s

CPU Specifications
and Operation

For example, the time required for a DL430 to write two 32-point output modules
(located in a Remote base) and the output points associated with a single
High-Speed Counter module would be calculated as follows. (Where NM is the
number of modules and NO is the total number of output points.)
Remote I/O

High-Speed Counter

Formula
Time = 32s + (150s x NM) + (25s x NO)

Formula
Time = 32s + (100s x NM) + (80s x NO)

Example
Time = 32s + (150s x 2) + (25s x 32)

Example
Time = 32s + (100s x 1) + (80s x 4)

Time = 1832 s

Time = 452 s

Total Time

Time = 2284 s

NOTE: This total time is the actual time required for the CPU to update these
outputs. This does not include any additional time that is required for the CPU to
actually service the particular specialty modules.
Diagnostics

The DL405 CPUs perform many types of system diagnostics. The amount of time
required depends on many things, such as the number of I/O modules installed, etc.
The following table shows the minimum and maximum times that can be expected.
Diagnostic Time

DL430

DL440

DL450

Minimum

680.0 s

540.0 s

282.0 s

Maximum

880.0 s

920.0 s

398.0 s

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications and Operation

The CPU processes the program from the

Application
Program Execution top (address 0) to the END instruction.
The CPU executes the program left to
right and top to bottom. As each rung is
evaluated the appropriate image register
or memory location is updated.
The time required to solve the application
program depends on the type and number
of instructions used, and the amount of
execution overhead.
You can add the execution times for all the
instructions in your program to find the
total program execution time.
For example, the execution time for a
DL430 running the program shown would
be calculated as follows.
Time

STR X0
OR C0
ANDN X1
OUT Y0
STRN C100
LD K10
STRN C101
OUT V2002
STRN C102
LD K50
STRN C103
OUT V0006
STR X5
ANDN X10
OUT Y3
END

4.7s
3.1s
3.4s
8.3s

TOTAL

5.7s
8.3s
26.0s
8.3s
8.3s
26.0s

X1

Y0
OUT

C0

C100

LD

C101

OUT
V2002

C102

LD

C103

X5

K10

K50

OUT
V006
X10

Y3
OUT

END

112.0s

112.0s
4.7s
3.4s
8.3s
15.5s
358s

Appendix C provides a complete list of instruction execution times for DL405 CPUs.
Program Control Instructions the DL440 and DL450 CPUs offer additional
instructions that can change the way the program executes. These instructions
include FOR/NEXT loops, Subroutines, and Interrupt Routines. These instructions
can interrupt the normal program flow and effect the program execution time.
Chapter 5 provides detailed information on how these different types of instructions
operate.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation

Instruction

X0

3--31

3--32

CPU Specifications and Operation

CPU Specifications
and Operation

PLC Numbering Systems

PLC Resources

If you are a new PLC user or are using octal

49.832
binary
AutomationDirect PLCs for the first time,
?
1482 BCD
please take a moment to study how our
?
0402 ?
? 3
PLCs use numbers. Youll find that each
3A9
ASCII
PLC manufacturer has their own
--961428
7
conventions on the use of numbers in their
hexadecimal
PLCs. We want to take just a moment to 1001011011
1011
familiarize you with how numbers are
177
?
decimal
used in AutomationDirect PLCs. The
A
72B
information you learn here applies to all
?
--300124
our PLCs.
As any good computer does, PLCs store and manipulate numbers in binary form:
just ones and zeros. So why do we have to deal with numbers in so many different
forms? Numbers have meaning, and some representations are more convenient
than others for particular purposes. Sometimes we use numbers to represent a size
or amount of something. Other numbers refer to locations or addresses, or to time. In
science we attach engineering units to numbers to give a particular meaning. (see
Appendix H for numbering system details).
PLCs offer a fixed amount of resources, depending on the model and configuration.
We use the word resources to include variable memory (V-memory), I/O points,
timers, counters, etc. Most modular PLCs allow you to add I/O points in groups of
eight. In fact, all the resources of our PLCs are counted in octal. Its easier for
computers to count in groups of eight than ten, because eight is an even power of 2.
Octal means simply counting in groups of
eight things at a time. In the figure to the
right, there are eight circles. The quantity
in decimal is 8, but in octal it is 10 (8 and
9 are not valid in octal). In octal, 10
means 1 group of 8 plus 0 (no individuals).

Decimal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Octal

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10

In the figure below, we have two groups of eight circles. Counting in octal we have
20 items, meaning 2 groups of eight, plus 0 individuals Dont say twenty, say
two--zero octal. This makes a clear distinction between number systems.
Decimal 1 2 3 4

7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Octal

7 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20

2 3 4

After counting PLC resources, its time to access PLC resources (theres a
difference). The CPU instruction set accesses resources of the PLC using octal
addresses. Octal addresses are the same as octal quantities, except they start
counting at zero. The number zero is significant to a computer, so we dont skip it.
Our circles are in an array of square
containers to the right. To access a
resource, our PLC instruction will address
its location using the octal references
shown. If these were counters, CT14
would access the black circle location.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

X= 0
X
1X
2X

2 3

3--33

CPU Specifications and Operation

V--Memory

Variable memory (V-memory) stores data for the ladder program and for
configuration settings. V-memory locations and V-memory addresses are the same
thing, and are numbered in octal. For example, V2073 is a valid location, while
V1983 is not valid (9 and 8 are not valid octal digits).
Each V-memory location is one data word wide, meaning 16 bits. For configuration
registers, our manuals will show each bit of a V-memory word. The least significant
bit (LSB) will be on the right, and the most significant bit (MSB) on the left. We use the
word significant, referring to the relative binary weighting of the bits.
V-memory address
(octal)

MSB

LSB

0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1

V2017

V-memory data is 16-bit binary, but we rarely program the data registers one bit at a
time. We use instructions or viewing tools that let us work with binary, decimal, octal,
and hexadecimal numbers. All these are converted and stored as binary for us.
A frequently-asked question is How do I tell if a number is binary, octal, BCD, or
hex? The answer is that we usually cannot tell just by looking at the data... but it
does not really matter. What matters is: the source or mechanism which writes data
into a V-memory location and the thing which later reads it must both use the same
data type (i.e., octal, hex, binary, or whatever). The V-memory location is just a
storage box... thats all. It does not convert or move the data on its own.
Since humans naturally count in decimal (10 fingers, 10 toes), we prefer to enter and
view PLC data in decimal as well (via operator interfaces). However, computers are
more efficient in using pure binary numbers. A compromise solution between the two
is Binary-Coded Decimal (BCD) representation. A BCD digit ranges from 0 to 9, and
is stored as four binary bits (a nibble). This permits each V-memory location to store
four BCD digits, with a range of decimal numbers from 0000 to 9999.

BCD number
8

V--memory storage

9
2

0 1 0 0

3
2

1 0 0 1

6
2

0 0 1 1

0 1 1 0

In a pure binary sense, a 16-bit word represents numbers from 0 to 65535. In storing
BCD numbers, the range is reduced to 0 to 9999. Many math instructions use BCD
data, and DirectSOFT and the handheld programmer allow us to enter and view
data in BCD. Special RLL instructions convert from BCD to binary, or visa--versa.
Hexadecimal
Numbers

Hexadecimal numbers are similar to BCD numbers, except they utilize all possible
binary values in each 4-bit digit. They are base-16 numbers so we need 16 different
digits. To extend our decimal digits 0 through 9, we use A through F as shown.
Decimal
Hexadecimal

0 1 2 3
0 1 2 3

4 5
4 5

6
6

7
7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
8 9 A B C D E F

A 4-digit hexadecimal number can represent all 65536 values in a V-memory word.
The range is from 0000 to FFFF (hex). PLCs often need this full range for sensor
data, etc. Hexadecimal is just a convenient way for humans to view full binary data.
Hexadecimal number
V--memory storage

1 0 1 0

0 1 1 1

1 1 1 1

0 1 0 0

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation

Binary-Coded
Decimal Numbers

V-memory data
(binary)

3--34

CPU Specifications and Operation

Memory Map
With any PLC system, you generally have many different types of information to
process. This includes input device status, output device status, various timing
elements, parts counts, etc. It is important to understand how the system represents
and stores the various types of data. For example, you need to know how the system
identifies input points, output points, data words, etc. The following paragraphs
discuss the various memory types used in the DL405 CPUs. Memory maps for all
DL405 CPUs follow the memory descriptions.

CPU Specifications
and Operation

Octal Numbering
System

All memory locations or areas are

numbered in Octal (base 8). The diagram
shows how the octal numbering system
works for the discrete input points. Notice
the octal system does not contain any
numbers with the digits 8 or 9.
Refer to the previous section on PLC
Numbering Systems for more on octal
numbering.

X0

X1

X2

8pt
Input

16pt
Input

8pt
Input

8pt
Output

8pt
Output

16pt
Output

X0
-X07

X10
-X27

X30
-X37

Y0
-Y07

Y10
-Y17

Y20
-Y37

X3

X4

X5

X6

X7

X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17

Discrete and Word

Locations

V--Memory
Locations for
Discrete Memory
Areas

As you examine the different memory

types, youll notice two types of memory
in the DL405, discrete and word memory.
Discrete memory is one bit that can be
either a 1 or a 0. Word memory is referred
to as V--memory (variable) and is a 16-bit
location normally used to manipulate
data/numbers, store data/numbers, etc.
Some information is automatically stored
in V--memory. For example, the timer
current values are stored in V--memory.

Discrete -- On or Off, 1 bit

X0

Word Locations -- 16 bits

0 1 0 1 00 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

The discrete memory area is for inputs, outputs, control relays, special relays,
stages, global relays, timer status bits and counter status bits. However, you can
also access the bit data types as a V-memory word. Each V-memory location
contains 16 consecutive discrete locations. For example, the following diagram
shows how the X input points are mapped into V-memory locations.
16 Discrete (X) Input Points
X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10

Bit # 15

14

13

12

11

10

X7

X6

X5

X4

X3

X2

X1

X0

V40400

These discrete memory areas and the corresponding V--memory locations are listed
in the Memory Map tables for the DL430, DL440, and DL450 CPUs in this chapter.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

3--35

CPU Specifications and Operation

Input Points
(X Data Type)

Output Points
(Y Data Type)

Control Relays
(C Data Type)

The discrete input points are noted by an

X data type. Refer to the memory maps
for the number of discrete input points for
your CPU type. In this example, the
output point Y0 will energize when input
X0 turns on.
The discrete output points are noted by a
Y data type. Refer to the memory maps
for the number of discrete input points for
your CPU type. In this example, output
point Y1 will energize when input X1
turns on.

Y0
OUT

X1

Y1
OUT

X10

C5
OUT

C5

Y10
OUT
Y20
OUT

In this example, memory location C5 will energize when input X10 turns on. The
second rung shows a simple example of how to use a control relay as an input.
Timers and
Timer Status Bits
(T Data type)

The amount of timers available depends

on the model of CPU you are using. The
tables at the end of this section provide the
amount of timers in each DL405 CPU
type. Regardless of the number of timers,
you have access to timer status bits that
reflect the relationship between the
current value and the preset value of a
specified timer. The timer status bit will be
on when the current value is equal or
greater than the preset value of a
corresponding timer.

X0

T1

TMR

K30

T1

Y12
OUT

When input X0 turns on, timer T1 will start. When the timer reaches the preset of 3
seconds (K of 30) timer status contact T1 turns on. When T1 turns on, output Y12
energizes.
NOTE: Some timers and counters use one V-memory register, and other types
require two V-memory registers. See the instruction descriptions in Chapter 5.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation

Control relays are discrete bits normally

used to control the user program. The
control relays do not represent a real world
device, that is, they cannot be physically
tied to switches, output coils, etc. They are
internal to the CPU. Because of this,
control relays can be programmed as
discrete inputs or discrete outputs. These
locations are used in programming the
discrete memory locations (C) or the
corresponding word location which
contains
16
consecutive
discrete
locations.

X0

3--36

CPU Specifications and Operation

Timer Current
Values
(V Data Type)

CPU Specifications
and Operation

Counters and
Counter Status
Bits
(CT Data type)

Some information is automatically stored

in V--memory, such as the current values
associated with timers. For example, V0
holds the current value for Timer 0, V1
holds the current value for Timer 1, etc.
These are 4-digit BCD values.
The primary reason for this is
programming flexibility. The example
shows how you can use relational
contacts to monitor several time intervals
from a single timer.
You have access to counter status bits that
reflect the relationship between the
current value and the preset value of a
specified counter. The counter status bit
will be on when the current value is equal
or greater than the preset value of a
corresponding counter.

X0

TMR
T1
K1000

V1

K30

Y12
OUT

V1

K50

Y13
OUT

V1

K75

V1

X0

K100

CNT

Y14
OUT

CT3

K10

X1
CT3

Y12
OUT

Each time contact X0 transitions from off to on, the counter increments by one. (If X1
comes on, the counter is reset to zero.) When the counter reaches the preset of 10
counts (K of 10) counter status contact CT3 turns on. When CT3 turns on, output
Y12 turns on.
Counter Current
Values
(V Data Type)

Word Memory
(V Data Type)

Just like the timers, the counter current

values are also automatically stored in V-memory. For example, V1000 holds the
current value for Counter CT0, V1001
holds the current value for Counter CT1,
etc. These are 4-digit BCD values.
The primary reason for this is
programming flexibility. The example
shows how you can use relational
contacts to monitor the counter values.

Word memory is referred to as

V--memory (variable) and is a 16-bit
location normally used to manipulate
data/numbers, store data/numbers, etc.
Some information is automatically stored
in V--memory. For example, the timer
current values are stored in V--memory.
The example shows how a four-digit
BCD constant is loaded into the
accumulator and then stored in a
V-memory location.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

X0

CNT

CT3

K10

X1

V1003

K1

Y12
OUT

V1003

K3

Y13
OUT

V1003

K5

V1003

X0

K8

LD

Y14
OUT

K1345

OUT
V1400

Word Locations -- 16 bits

0 0 0 1 00 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1
1

3--37

CPU Specifications and Operation

Stages
(S Data type)

Remote I/O Points

(GX Data Type)

Special relays are discrete memory

locations with pre-defined functionality.
There are many different types of special
relays. For example, some aid in program
development, others provide system
operating status information, etc.
Appendix D provides a complete listing of
the special relays.
In this example, control relay C10 will
energize for 50 ms and de--energize for 50
ms because SP5 is a pre--defined relay
that will be on for 50 ms and off for 50 ms.
Remote I/O points are represented by
global relays. They are generally used
only to control remote I/O, but they can be
used as normal control relays when
remote I/O is not used in the system. You
should notice the same data type, GX, is
used for both the remote input and remote
output points. There are setup routines
that must be placed in your application
program to designate which locations are
inputs and which are outputs. (The DL405
Remote and Slice I/O Modules manual
provides the details.)
In this example, memory location GX0
represents an output point and memory
location GX10 represents an input point.

Ladder Representation
ISG
S0000

Wait forStart
Start

S1
JMP

X0
SG

S500
JMP

Check for a Part

S0001

Part
Present

S2
JMP

X1
Part
Present

S6
JMP

X1
SG

Clamp the part

S0002

Clamp
SET
S400
S3
JMP

Part
Locked
X2

SP5

C10
OUT

SP4: 1 second clock

SP5: 100 ms clock
SP6: 50 ms clock

X3

GX0
OUT

GX10

Y12
OUT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation

Special Relays
(SP Data Type)

Stages are used in RLL PLUS programs to

create a structured program, similar to a
flowchart. Each program stage denotes a
program segment. When the program
segment, or stage, is active, the logic
within that segment is executed. If the
stage is off, or inactive, the logic is not
executed and the CPU skips to the next
active stage. (See Chapter 7 for a more
detailed
description
of
RLL PLUS
programming.)
Each stage also has a discrete status bit
that can be used as an input to indicate
whether the stage is active or inactive. If
the stage is active, then the status bit is on.
If the stage is inactive, then the status bit is
off. This status bit can also be turned on or
off by other instructions, such as the SET
or RESET instructions. This allows you to
easily control stages throughout the
program.

3--38

CPU Specifications and Operation

System Parameters Many system parameters, such as error codes, are automatically stored in
pre--defined V-memory locations. These memory locations store clock / calendar
(V Data Type)
information, error codes and other types of system setup information.
  

CPU Specifications
and Operation

430 440 450

  
430 440 450

X X 
430 440 450

System
V-memory

Description of Contents

V700, V701

Contains a copy of the contents of the accumulator. V700 is the lower

16 bit word, V701 is the upper 16 bit word.

V702, V703

Contains a copy of the contents of the 1st data stack location. V702 is
the lower 16 bit word, V703 is the upper 16 bit word.

V704, V705

Contains a copy of the contents of the 2nd data stack location. V704 is
the lower 16 bit word, V705 is the upper 16 bit word.

V706, V707

Contains a copy of the contents of the 3rd data stack location. V705 is
the lower 16 bit word, V706 is the upper 16 bit word.

V710, V711

Contains a copy of the contents of the 4th data stack location. V710 is
the lower 16 bit word, V711 is the upper 16 bit word.

V712, V713

Contains a copy of the contents of the 5th data stack location. V712 is
the lower 16 bit word, V713 is the upper 16 bit word.

V714, V715

Contains a copy of the contents of the 6th data stack location. V714 is
the lower 16 bit word, V715 is the upper 16 bit word.

V716, V717

Contains a copy of the contents of the 7th data stack location. V716 is
the lower 16 bit word, V717 is the upper 16 bit word.

V720, V721

Contains a copy of the contents of the 8th data stack location. V720 is
the lower 16 bit word, V721 is the upper 16 bit word.

System
V-memory

Description of Contents

V737

Contains a BCD value (from 3 to 999) for Timed-interrupt 17 feature.

V7633

Bit 12 enables the low battery warning indicator.

V7747

Contains a 10 mS calendar timer used with the Clock / Calendar.

V7766

Contains the number of seconds on the clock. (00 to 59)

V7767

Contains the number of minutes on the clock. (00 to 59)

V7770

Contains the number of hours on the clock. (00 to 23)

V7771

Contains the day of the week. (0=Sun., 1=Mon, etc.)

V7772

Contains the day of the month (1st, 2nd, etc.)

V7773

Contains the month. (01 to 12)

V7774

Contains the year. (00 to 99)

System
V-memory

Description of Contents

V736

Contains a BCD value (from 3 to 999) for Timed-interrupt 16 feature.

V7746

450: Battery voltage in tenths of a volt, (e.g., V7746 = 0031 is 3.1 Volts).

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications and Operation

  
430 440 450

System
V-memory
(continued)

3--39

Description of Contents
Fault Message Error Code stores the 4-digit BCD code used with
the FAULT instruction when the instruction is executed. If youve used
ASCII messages (DL440/DL450 only) then the data label (DLBL)
reference number for that message is stored here.

V7752

I/O configuration Error stores the module ID code for the module
that does not match the current configuration.

V7753

I/O Configuration Error stores the correct module ID code.

V7754

I/O Configuration Error identifies the base and slot number.

V7755

Error code stores the fatal error code.

V7756

Error code stores the major error code.

V7757

Communications Error Code -- stores the minor error code.

V7760

Module Error identifies the base and slot number.

V7762

Module Error identifies the type of error.

V7763

Program Grammatical Error identifies the location of a syntax error

in a program.

V7764

Program Grammatical Error identifies the type of error.

V7765

Scan stores the total number of scan cycles that have occurred
since the last Program Mode to Run Mode transition.

V7775

Scan stores the current scan time.

V7776

Scan stores the minimum scan time that has occurred since the last
Program-to-Run Mode transition.

V7777

Scan stores the maximum scan time that has occurred since the last
Program-to-Run Mode transition.

The following system control relays are valid only for DL450 CPU remote I/O setup
on Communications Port 3.
  
430 440 450

System CRs

Description of Contents

C740

Completion of setups -- ladder logic must turn this relay on when it has
finished writing to the Remote I/O setup table

C741

ON -- the last state of inputs will be maintained.

OFF -- inputs will turn off when communication is lost.

C743

Re-start -- Turning on this relay will resume after a communications

hang-up on an error.

C750 to C757

Setup Error -- The corresponding relay will be ON if the setup table

contains an error (C750 = master, C751 = slave 1... C757=slave 7

C760 to C767

Communications Ready -- The corresponding relay will be ON if the

setup table data is valid (C760 = master, C761 = slave 1...
C767=slave 7

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation

V7751

3--40

CPU Specifications and Operation

DL430 Memory
Map

CPU Specifications
and Operation

Memory Type

Discrete Memory
Reference
(octal)

Word Memory
Reference
(octal)

Qty.
Decimal

Symbol

Input Points

X0 -- X477

V40400 -- V40423

320

X0

Output Points

Y0 -- Y477

V40500 -- V40523

320

Y0

Control Relays

C0 -- C737

V40600 -- V40635

512

Special Relays

SP0 -- SP137
SP320 -- SP617

V41200 -- V41205
V41215 -- V41230

288

Timers

T0 -- T177

None

128

Timer Current
Values

None

V00000 -- V00177

128

Timer Status Bits T0 -- T177

V41100 -- V41107

128

Counters

None

128

CT0 -- CT177

C0

C0

SP0

TMR
K100

V0

T0

K100

T0

CNT CT0
K10

Counter
Current Values

None

V01000 -- V01177

128

Counter Status
Bits

CT0 -- CT177

V41140 -- V41147

128

User Data Words None

V1400 -- V7377

3072

Stages

V41000 -- V41027

384

S0 -- S577

Remote In / Out

GX0 -- GX777

V40000 -- V40037

512

System
parameters

None

V7400 -- V7777

256

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

V1000

K100

CT0

None specific, used with many

instructions
SG

S0
S 001

GX0

GX0

None specific, used with many

instructions

CPU Specifications and Operation

3--41

DL440 Memory
Map
Memory Type

Discrete Memory
Reference
(octal)

Word Memory
Reference
(octal)

Qty.
Decimal

Symbol

Input Points

X0 -- X477

V40400 -- V40423

320

X0

Output Points

Y0 -- Y477

V40500--V40523

320

Y0

Control Relays

C0 -- C1777

V40600--V40677

1024

Special Relays

SP0 -- SP137
SP320 -- SP717

V41200--V41205
V41215--V41234

352

Timers

T0 -- T377

None

256

Timer Current
Values

None

V00000 -- V00377

256

Timer Status Bits T0 -- T377

V41100 -- V41117

256

Counters

None

128

C0

SP0

TMR
K100

V0

T0

CPU Specifications
and Operation

CT0 -- CT177

C0

K100

T0

CNT CT0
K10

Counter
Current Values

None

V01000 -- V01177

128

Counter Status
Bits

CT0 -- CT177

V41140 -- V41147

128

User Data Words None

V1400 -- V7377
V10000 -- V17777

3072
4096

Stages

V41000 -- V41077

1024

S0 -- S1777

Remote In / Out

GX0 -- GX1777

V40000 -- V40077

1024

System
parameters

None

V700 -- V737
V7400 -- V7777

288

V1000

K100

CT0

None specific, used with many

instructions
SG

S0
S 001

GX0

GX0

None specific, used with many

instructions

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

3--42

CPU Specifications and Operation

DL450 Memory
Map

CPU Specifications
and Operation

Memory Type

Discrete Memory
Reference
(octal)

Word Memory
Reference
(octal)

Qty.
Decimal

Symbol

Input Points

X0 -- X1777

V40400 -- V40477

1024

X0

Output Points

Y0 -- Y1777

V40500 -- V40577

1024

Y0

Control Relays

C0 -- C3777

V40600 -- V40777

2048

Special Relays

SP0 -- SP777

V41200 -- V41237

512

Timers

T0 -- T377

V41100 -- V41117

256

Timer Current
Values

None

V00000 -- V00377

256

Timer Status Bits T0 -- T377

V41100 -- V41117

256

Counters

V41140 -- V41157

256

CT0 -- CT377

C0

C0

SP0

TMR
K100

V0

T0

K100

T0

CNT CT0
K10

Counter
Current Values

None

V01000 -- V01377

256

Counter Status
Bits

CT0 -- CT377

V41140 -- V41157

256

User Data Words None

V1400 -- V7377
V10000 -- V36777

3072
11776

Stages

V41000 -- V41077

1024

Remote In / Out

System
parameters

S0 -- S1777

GX0 -- GX3777

V40000 -- V40177

2048

GY0 -- GY3777

V40200 -- V40377

2048

None

V700 -- V777
V7400 -- V7777
V37000 -- V37777

832

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

V1000

K100

CT0

None specific, used with many

instructions
SG

S0
S 001

GX0

GY0

None specific, used with many

instructions

CPU Specifications and Operation

3--43

DL405 Aliases
An alias is an alternate way of referring to certain memory types, such as
timer/counter current values, V--memory locations for I/O points, etc., which
simplifies understanding the memory address. The use of the alias is optional, but
some users may find the alias to be helpful when developing a program. The table
below shows how the aliases can be used to reference memory locations.
NOTE: Ranges depend on CPU type.
Address Start

Alias Start

V0

TA0

V1000

CTA0

V1000 is the counter accumulator value for counter 0,

therefore, its alias is CTA0. CTA1 is the alias for V1001, etc.

VGX

V40000 is the word memory reference for discrete bits GX0

through GX17, therefore, its alias is VGX0. V40001 is the word
memory reference for discrete bits GX20 through GX 37,
therefore, its alias is VGX20.

VGY

V40200 is the word memory reference for discrete bits GY0

through GY17, therefore, its alias is VGY0. V40201 is the word
memory reference for discrete bits GY20 through GY 37,
therefore, its alias is VGY20.

VX0

V40400 is the word memory reference for discrete bits X0

through X17, therefore, its alias is VX0. V40401 is the word
memory reference for discrete bits X20 through X37, therefore,
its alias is VX20.

VY0

V40500 is the word memory reference for discrete bits Y0

through Y17, therefore, its alias is VY0. V40501 is the word
memory reference for discrete bits Y20 through Y37, therefore,
its alias is VY20.

VC0

V40600 is the word memory reference for discrete bits C0

through C17, therefore, its alias is VC0. V40601 is the word
memory reference for discrete bits C20 through C37, therefore,
its alias is VC20.

VS0

V41000 is the word memory reference for discrete bits S0

through S17, therefore, its alias is VS0. V41001 is the word
memory reference for discrete bits S20 through S37, therefore,
its alias is VS20.

VT0

V41100 is the word memory reference for discrete bits T0

through T17, therefore, its alias is VT0. V41101 is the word
memory reference for discrete bits T20 through T37, therefore,
its alias is VT20.

VCT0

V41140 is the word memory reference for discrete bits CT0

through CT17, therefore, its alias is VCT0. V41141 is the word
memory reference for discrete bits CT20 through CT37,
therefore, its alias is VCT20.

VSP0

V41200 is the word memory reference for discrete bits SP0

through SP17, therefore, its alias is VSP0. V41201 is the word
memory reference for discrete bits SP20 through SP37,
therefore, its alias is VSP20.

V40000

V40400

V40500

V40600

V41000

V41100

V41140

V41200

V0 is the timer accumulator value for timer 0, therefore, its

alias is TA0. TA1 is the alias for V1, etc..

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation

V40200
(DL450 only)

Example

3--44

CPU Specifications and Operation

X Input/Y Output Bit Map

This table provides a listing of individual Input and Output points associated with each V-memory address
bit for the DL430, DL440, and DL450 CPUs.

CPU Specifications
and Operation

MSB

DL430/DL440/DL450 Input (X) and Output (Y) Points

LSB

X Input Y Output
Address Address

012

011

010

007

006

005

004

003

002

001

000

V40400

V40500

032

031

030

027

026

025

024

023

022

021

020

V40401

V40501

053

052

051

050

047

046

045

044

043

042

041

040

V40402

V40502

074

073

072

071

070

067

066

065

064

063

062

061

060

V40403

V40503

115

114

113

112

111

110

107

106

105

104

103

102

101

100

V40404

V40504

136

135

134

133

132

131

130

127

126

125

124

123

122

121

120

V40405

V40505

157

156

155

154

153

152

151

150

147

146

145

144

143

142

141

140

V40406

V40506

177

176

175

174

173

172

171

170

167

166

165

164

163

162

161

160

V40407

V40507

217

216

215

214

213

212

211

210

207

206

205

204

203

202

201

200

V40410

V40510

237

236

235

234

233

232

231

230

227

226

225

224

223

222

221

220

V40411

V40511

257

256

255

254

253

252

251

250

247

246

245

244

243

242

241

240

V40412

V40512

277

276

275

274

273

272

271

270

267

266

265

264

263

262

261

260

V40413

V40513

317

316

315

314

313

312

311

310

307

306

305

304

303

302

301

300

V40414

V40514

337

336

335

334

333

332

331

330

327

326

325

324

323

322

321

320

V40415

V40515

357

356

355

354

353

352

351

350

347

346

345

344

343

342

341

340

V40416

V40516

377

376

375

374

373

372

371

370

367

366

365

364

363

362

361

360

V40417

V40517

417

416

415

414

413

412

411

410

407

406

405

404

403

402

401

400

V40420

V40520

437

436

435

434

433

432

431

430

427

426

425

424

423

422

421

420

V40421

V40521

457

456

455

454

453

452

451

450

447

446

445

444

443

442

441

440

V40422

V40522

477

476

475

474

473

472

471

470

467

466

465

464

463

462

461

460

V40423

V40523

15

14

13

12

11

10

017

016

015

014

013

037

036

035

034

033

057

056

055

054

077

076

075

117

116

137

MSB

DL450 Additional Input (X) and Output (Y) Points

LSB

X Input Y Output
Address Address

15

14

13

12

11

10

517

516

515

514

513

512

511

510

507

506

505

504

503

502

501

500

V40424

V40524

537

536

535

534

533

532

531

530

527

526

525

524

523

522

521

520

V40425

V40525

557

556

555

554

553

552

551

550

547

546

545

544

543

542

541

540

V40426

V40526

577

576

575

574

573

572

571

570

567

566

565

564

563

562

561

560

V40427

V40527

617

616

615

614

613

612

611

610

607

606

605

604

603

602

601

600

V40430

V40530

637

636

635

634

633

632

631

630

627

626

625

624

623

622

621

620

V40431

V40531

657

656

655

654

653

652

651

650

647

646

645

644

643

642

641

640

V40432

V40532

677

676

675

674

673

672

671

670

667

666

665

664

663

662

661

660

V40433

V40533

717

716

715

714

713

712

711

710

707

706

705

704

703

702

701

700

V40434

V40534

737

736

735

734

733

732

731

730

727

726

725

724

723

722

721

720

V40435

V40535

757

756

755

754

753

752

751

750

747

746

745

744

743

742

741

740

V40436

V40536

777

776

775

774

773

772

771

770

767

766

765

764

763

762

761

760

V40437

V40537

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications and Operation

MSB

DL450 Additional Input (X) and Output (Y) Points (contd)

LSB

3--45

X Input Y Output
Address Address

15

14

13

12

11

10

1017

1016

1015

1014

1013

1012

1011

1010

1007

1006

1005

1004

1003

1002

1001

1000

V40440

V40540

1037

1036

1035

1034

1033

1032

1031

1030

1027

1026

1025

1024

1023

1022

1021

1020

V40441

V40541

1057

1056

1055

1054

1053

1052

1051

1050

1047

1046

1045

1044

1043

1042

1041

1040

V40442

V40542

1077

1076

1075

1074

1073

1072

1071

1070

1067

1066

1065

1064

1063

1062

1061

1060

V40443

V40543

1117

1116

1115

1114

1113

1112

1111

1110

1107

1106

1105

1104

1103

1102

1101

1100

V40444

V40544

1137

1136

1135

1134

1133

1132

1131

1130

1127

1126

1125

1124

1123

1122

1121

1120

V40445

V40545

1157

1156

1155

1154

1153

1152

1151

1150

1147

1146

1145

1144

1143

1142

1141

1140

V40446

V40546

1176

1175

1174

1173

1172

1171

1170

1167

1166

1165

1164

1163

1162

1161

1160

V40447

V40547

1216

1215

1214

1213

1212

1211

1210

1207

1206

1205

1204

1203

1202

1201

1200

V40450

V40550

1237

1236

1235

1234

1233

1232

1231

1230

1227

1226

1225

1224

1223

1222

1221

1220

V40451

V40551

1257

1256

1255

1254

1253

1252

1251

1250

1247

1246

1245

1244

1243

1242

1241

1240

V40452

V40552

1277

1276

1275

1274

1273

1272

1271

1270

1267

1266

1265

1264

1263

1262

1261

1260

V40453

V40553

1317

1316

1315

1314

1313

1312

1311

1310

1307

1306

1305

1304

1303

1302

1301

1300

V40454

V40554

1337

1336

1335

1334

1333

1332

1331

1330

1327

1326

1325

1324

1323

1322

1321

1320

V40455

V40555

1357

1356

1355

1354

1353

1352

1351

1350

1347

1346

1345

1344

1343

1342

1341

1340

V40456

V40556

1377

1376

1375

1374

1373

1372

1371

1370

1367

1366

1365

1364

1363

1362

1361

1360

V40457

V40557

1417

1416

1415

1414

1413

1412

1411

1410

1407

1406

1405

1404

1403

1402

1401

1400

V40460

V40560

1437

1436

1435

1434

1433

1432

1431

1430

1427

1426

1425

1424

1423

1422

1421

1420

V40461

V40561

1457

1456

1455

1454

1453

1452

1451

1450

1447

1446

1445

1444

1443

1442

1441

1440

V40462

V40562

1477

1476

1475

1474

1473

1472

1471

1470

1467

1466

1465

1464

1463

1462

1461

1460

V40463

V40563

1517

1516

1515

1514

1513

1512

1511

1510

1507

1506

1505

1504

1503

1502

1501

1500

V40464

V40564

1537

1536

1535

1534

1533

1532

1531

1530

1527

1526

1525

1524

1523

1522

1521

1520

V40465

V40565

1557

1556

1555

1554

1553

1552

1551

1550

1547

1546

1545

1544

1543

1542

1541

1540

V40466

V40566

1577

1576

1575

1574

1573

1572

1571

1570

1567

1566

1565

1564

1563

1562

1561

1560

V40467

V40567

1617

1616

1615

1614

1613

1612

1611

1610

1607

1606

1605

1604

1603

1602

1601

1600

V40470

V40570

1637

1636

1635

1634

1633

1632

1631

1630

1627

1626

1625

1624

1623

1622

1621

1620

V40471

V40571

1657

1656

1655

1654

1653

1652

1651

1650

1647

1646

1645

1644

1643

1642

1641

1640

V40472

V40572

1677

1676

1675

1674

1673

1672

1671

1670

1667

1666

1665

1664

1663

1662

1661

1660

V40473

V40573

1717

1716

1715

1714

1713

1712

1711

1710

1707

1706

1705

1704

1703

1702

1701

1700

V40474

V40574

1737

1736

1735

1734

1733

1732

1731

1730

1727

1726

1725

1724

1723

1722

1721

1720

V40475

V40575

1757

1756

1755

1754

1753

1752

1751

1750

1747

1746

1745

1744

1743

1742

1741

1740

V40476

V40576

1777

1776

1775

1774

1773

1772

1771

1770

1767

1766

1765

1764

1763

1762

1761

1760

V40477

V40577

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation

1177
1217

3--46

CPU Specifications and Operation

Control Relay Bit Map

This table provides a listing of the individual control relays associated with each V-memory address bit.

CPU Specifications
and Operation

MSB

DL430 / DL440 / DL450 Control Relays (C)

15

14

13

12

11

10

017

016

015

014

013

037

036

035

034

033

057

056

055

054

077

076

075

117

116

137

LSB

Address

012

011

010

007

006

005

004

003

002

001

000

V40600

032

031

030

027

026

025

024

023

022

021

020

V40601

053

052

051

050

047

046

045

044

043

042

041

040

V40602

074

073

072

071

070

067

066

065

064

063

062

061

060

V40603

115

114

113

112

111

110

107

106

105

104

103

102

101

100

V40604

136

135

134

133

132

131

130

127

126

125

124

123

122

121

120

V40605

157

156

155

154

153

152

151

150

147

146

145

144

143

142

141

140

V40606

177

176

175

174

173

172

171

170

167

166

165

164

163

162

161

160

V40607

217

216

215

214

213

212

211

210

207

206

205

204

203

202

201

200

V40610

237

236

235

234

233

232

231

230

227

226

225

224

223

222

221

220

V40611

257

256

255

254

253

252

251

250

247

246

245

244

243

242

241

240

V40612

277

276

275

274

273

272

271

270

267

266

265

264

263

262

261

260

V40613

317

316

315

314

313

312

311

310

307

306

305

304

303

302

301

300

V40614

337

336

335

334

333

332

331

330

327

326

325

324

323

322

321

320

V40615

357

356

355

354

353

352

351

350

347

346

345

344

343

342

341

340

V40616

377

376

375

374

373

372

371

370

367

366

365

364

363

362

361

360

V40617

417

416

415

414

413

412

411

410

407

406

405

404

403

402

401

400

V40620

437

436

435

434

433

432

431

430

427

426

425

424

423

422

421

420

V40621

457

456

455

454

453

452

451

450

447

446

445

444

443

442

441

440

V40622

477

476

475

474

473

472

471

470

467

466

465

464

463

462

461

460

V40623

517

516

515

514

513

512

511

510

507

506

505

504

503

502

501

500

V40624

537

536

535

534

533

532

531

530

527

526

525

524

523

522

521

520

V40625

557

556

555

554

553

552

551

550

547

546

545

544

543

542

541

540

V40626

577

576

575

574

573

572

571

570

567

566

565

564

563

562

561

560

V40627

617

616

615

614

613

612

611

610

607

606

605

604

603

602

601

600

V40630

637

636

635

634

633

632

631

630

627

626

625

624

623

622

621

620

V40631

657

656

655

654

653

652

651

650

647

646

645

644

643

642

641

640

V40632

677

676

675

674

673

672

671

670

667

666

665

664

663

662

661

660

V40633

717

716

715

714

713

712

711

710

707

706

705

704

703

702

701

700

V40634

737

736

735

734

733

732

731

730

727

726

725

724

723

722

721

720

V40635

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications and Operation

3--47

This portion of the table shows additional Control Relays points available with the DL440 and DL450.
MSB

DL440 / DL450 Additional Control Relays (C)

LSB

Address

15

14

13

12

11

10

757

756

755

754

753

752

751

750

747

746

745

744

743

742

741

740

V40636

777

776

775

774

773

772

771

770

767

766

765

764

763

762

761

760

V40637

1017 1016 1015 1014 1013 1012

1011

1010 1007 1006 1005

1004 1003

1002 1001 1000

V40640

1037 1036 1035 1034 1033 1032 1031 1030 1027 1026 1025

1024 1023

1022 1021 1020

V40641

1057 1056 1055 1054 1053 1052 1051 1050 1047 1046 1045

1044 1043

1042 1041 1040

V40642

1077 1076 1075 1074 1073 1072 1071 1070 1067 1066 1065

1064 1063

1062 1061 1060

V40643

1117

1116

1115

1114

1113

1112

1111

1110

1107

1106

1105

1104

1103

1102

1101

1100

V40644

1137

1136

1135

1134

1133

1132

1131

1130

1127

1126

1125

1124

1123

1122

1121

1120

V40645

1157

1156

1155

1154

1153

1152

1151

1150

1147

1146

1145

1144

1143

1142

1141

1140

V40646

1177

1176

1175

1174

1173

1172

1171

1170

1167

1166

1165

1164

1163

1162

1161

1160

V40647

1217 1216 1215 1214 1213 1212

1211

1204 1203

1202 1201 1200

V40650

1224 1223

1222 1221 1220

V40651

1257 1256 1255 1254 1253 1252 1251 1250 1247 1246 1245

1244 1243

1242 1241 1240

V40652

1277 1276 1275 1274 1273 1272 1271 1270 1267 1266 1265

1264 1263

1262 1261 1260

V40653

1317 1316 1315 1314 1313 1312

1310 1307 1306 1305

1304 1303

1302 1301 1300

V40654

1337 1336 1335 1334 1333 1332 1331 1330 1327 1326 1325

1324 1323

1322 1321 1320

V40655

1357 1356 1355 1354 1353 1352 1351 1350 1347 1346 1345

1344 1343

1342 1341 1340

V40656

1377 1376 1375 1374 1373 1372 1371 1370 1367 1366 1365

1364 1363

1362 1361 1360

V40657

1417 1416 1415 1414 1413 1412

1410 1407 1406 1405

1404 1403

1402 1401 1400

V40660

1437 1436 1435 1434 1433 1432 1431 1430 1427 1426 1425

1424 1423

1422 1421 1420

V40661

1457 1456 1455 1454 1453 1452 1451 1450 1447 1446 1445

1444 1443

1442 1441 1440

V40662

1477 1476 1475 1474 1473 1472 1471 1470 1467 1466 1465

1464 1463

1462 1461 1460

V40663

1517 1516 1515 1514 1513 1512

1311

1411

1510 1507 1506 1505

1504 1503

1502 1501 1500

V40664

1537 1536 1535 1534 1533 1532 1531 1530 1527 1526 1525

1511

1524 1523

1522 1521 1520

V40665

1557 1556 1555 1554 1553 1552 1551 1550 1547 1546 1545

1544 1543

1542 1541 1540

V40666

1577 1576 1575 1574 1573 1572 1571 1570 1567 1566 1565

1564 1563

1562 1561 1560

V40667

1617 1616 1615 1614 1613 1612

1610 1607 1606 1605

1604 1603

1602 1601 1600

V40670

1637 1636 1635 1634 1633 1632 1631 1630 1627 1626 1625

1624 1623

1622 1621 1620

V40671

1657 1656 1655 1654 1653 1652 1651 1650 1647 1646 1645

1644 1643

1642 1641 1640

V40672

1677 1676 1675 1674 1673 1672 1671 1670 1667 1666 1665

1664 1663

1662 1661 1660

V40673

1717 1716 1715 1714 1713 1712

1710 1707 1706 1705

1704 1703

1702 1701 1700

V40674

1737 1736 1735 1734 1733 1732 1731 1730 1727 1726 1725

1724 1723

1722 1721 1720

V40675

1757 1756 1755 1754 1753 1752 1751 1750 1747 1746 1745

1744 1743

1742 1741 1740

V40676

1777 1776 1775 1774 1773 1772 1771 1770 1767 1766 1765

1764 1763

1762 1761 1760

V40677

1611

1711

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation

1210 1207 1206 1205

1237 1236 1235 1234 1233 1232 1231 1230 1227 1226 1225

3--48

CPU Specifications and Operation

This portion of the table shows additional Control Relays points available with the DL450.
MSB
15

DL450 Additional Control Relays (C)

14

13

12

11

10

CPU Specifications
and Operation

2017 2016 2015 2014 2013 2012

Address

2010 2007 2006 2005

2004 2003

2002 2001 2000

V40700

2037 2036 2035 2034 2033 2032 2031 2030 2027 2026 2025

2024 2023

2022 2021 2020

V40701

2057 2056 2055 2054 2053 2052 2051 2050 2047 2046 2045

2044 2043

2042 2041 2040

V40702

2077 2076 2075 2074 2073 2072 2071 2070 2067 2066 2065

2064 2063

2062 2061 2060

V40703

2117

2116

2115

2114

2113

2112

2011

LSB

2107 2106 2105

2104 2103

2102 2101 2100

V40704

2137 2136 2135 2134 2133 2132 2131 2130 2127 2126 2125

2111

2124 2123

2122 2121 2120

V40705

2157 2156 2155 2154 2153 2152 2151 2150 2147 2146 2145

2144 2143

2142 2141 2140

V40706

2177 2176 2175 2174 2173 2172 2171 2170 2167 2166 2165

2164 2163

2162 2161 2160

V40707

2217 2216 2215 2214 2213 2212

2210 2207 2206 2205

2204 2203

2202 2201 2200

V40710

2237 2236 2235 2234 2233 2232 2231 2230 2227 2226 2225

2224 2223

2222 2221 2220

V40711

2257 2256 2255 2254 2253 2252 2251 2250 2247 2246 2245

2244 2243

2242 2241 2240

V40712

2277 2276 2275 2274 2273 2272 2271 2270 2267 2266 2265

2264 2263

2262 2261 2260

V40713

2317 2316 2315 2314 2313 2312

2310 2307 2306 2305

2304 2303

2302 2301 2300

V40714

2337 2336 2335 2334 2333 2332 2331 2330 2327 2326 2325

2324 2323

2322 2321 2320

V40715

2357 2356 2355 2354 2353 2352 2351 2350 2347 2346 2345

2344 2343

2342 2341 2340

V40716

2377 2376 2375 2374 2373 2372 2371 2370 2367 2366 2365

2364 2363

2362 2361 2360

V40717

2417 2416 2415 2414 2413 2412

2211

2311

2411

2110

2410 2407 2406 2405

2404 2403

2402 2401 2400

V40720

2437 2436 2435 2434 2433 2432 2431 2430 2427 2426 2425

2424 2423

2422 2421 2420

V40721

2457 2456 2455 2454 2453 2452 2451 2450 2447 2446 2445

2444 2443

2442 2441 2440

V40722

2477 2476 2475 2474 2473 2472 2471 2470 2467 2466 2465

2464 2463

2462 2461 2460

V40723

2517 2516 2515 2514 2513 2512

2510 2507 2506 2505

2504 2503

2502 2501 2500

V40724

2537 2536 2535 2534 2533 2532 2531 2530 2527 2526 2525

2524 2523

2522 2521 2520

V40725

2557 2556 2555 2554 2553 2552 2551 2550 2547 2546 2545

2544 2543

2542 2541 2540

V40726

2577 2576 2575 2574 2573 2572 2571 2570 2567 2566 2565

2564 2563

2562 2561 2560

V40727

2617 2616 2615 2614 2613 2612

2610 2607 2606 2605

2604 2603

2602 2601 2600

V40730

2637 2636 2635 2634 2633 2632 2631 2630 2627 2626 2625

2624 2623

2622 2621 2620

V40731

2657 2656 2655 2654 2653 2652 2651 2650 2647 2646 2645

2644 2643

2642 2641 2640

V40732

2677 2676 2675 2674 2673 2672 2671 2670 2667 2666 2665

2664 2663

2662 2661 2660

V40733

2717 2716 2715 2714 2713 2712

2710 2707 2706 2705

2704 2703

2702 2701 2700

V40734

2737 2736 2735 2734 2733 2732 2731 2730 2727 2726 2725

2724 2723

2722 2721 2720

V40735

2757 2756 2755 2754 2753 2752 2751 2750 2747 2746 2745

2744 2743

2742 2741 2740

V40736

2777 2776 2775 2774 2773 2772 2771 2770 2767 2766 2765

2764 2763

2762 2761 2760

V40737

2511

2611

2711

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications and Operation

MSB
15

DL450 Additional Control Relays (C)

14

13

12

11

10

3017 3016 3015 3014 3013 3012

LSB
3

Address

3010 3007 3006 3005

3004 3003

3002 3001 3000

V40740

3037 3036 3035 3034 3033 3032 3031 3030 3027 3026 3025

3024 3023

3022 3021 3020

V40741

3057 3056 3055 3054 3053 3052 3051 3050 3047 3046 3045

3044 3043

3042 3041 3040

V40742

3077 3076 3075 3074 3073 3072 3071 3070 3067 3066 3065

3064 3063

3062 3061 3060

V40743

3117

3116

3115

3114

3113

3112

3011

(contd)

3--49

3111

3104 3103

3102 3101 3100

V40744

3124 3123

3122 3121 3120

V40745

3157 3156 3155 3154 3153 3152 3151 3150 3147 3146 3145

3144 3143

3142 3141 3140

V40746

3177 3176 3175 3174 3173 3172 3171 3170 3167 3166 3165

3164 3163

3162 3161 3160

V40747

3217 3216 3215 3214 3213 3212

3210 3207 3206 3205

3204 3203

3202 3201 3200

V40750

3237 3236 3235 3234 3233 3232 3231 3230 3227 3226 3225

3224 3223

3222 3221 3220

V40751

3257 3256 3255 3254 3253 3252 3251 3250 3247 3246 3245

3244 3243

3242 3241 3240

V40752

3277 3276 3275 3274 3273 3272 3271 3270 3267 3266 3265

3264 3263

3262 3261 3260

V40753

3317 3316 3315 3314 3313 3312

3310 3307 3306 3305

3304 3303

3302 3301 3300

V40754

3337 3336 3335 3334 3333 3332 3331 3330 3327 3326 3325

3324 3323

3322 3321 3320

V40755

3357 3356 3355 3354 3353 3352 3351 3350 3347 3346 3345

3344 3343

3342 3341 3340

V40756

3377 3376 3375 3374 3373 3372 3371 3370 3367 3366 3365

3364 3363

3362 3361 3360

V40757

3417 3416 3415 3414 3413 3412

3410 3407 3406 3405

3404 3403

3402 3401 3400

V40760

3437 3436 3435 3434 3433 3432 3431 3430 3427 3426 3425

3424 3423

3422 3421 3420

V40761

3457 3456 3455 3454 3453 3452 3451 3450 3447 3446 3445

3444 3443

3442 3441 3440

V40762

3477 3476 3475 3474 3473 3472 3471 3470 3467 3466 3465

3464 3463

3462 3461 3460

V40763

3517 3516 3515 3514 3513 3512

3510 3507 3506 3505

3504 3503

3502 3501 3500

V40764

3537 3536 3535 3534 3533 3532 3531 3530 3527 3526 3525

3524 3523

3522 3521 3520

V40765

3557 3556 3555 3554 3553 3552 3551 3550 3547 3546 3545

3544 3543

3542 3541 3540

V40766

3577 3576 3575 3574 3573 3572 3571 3570 3567 3566 3565

3564 3563

3562 3561 3560

V40767

3617 3616 3615 3614 3613 3612

3610 3607 3606 3605

3604 3603

3602 3601 3600

V40770

3637 3636 3635 3634 3633 3632 3631 3630 3627 3626 3625

3624 3623

3622 3621 3620

V40771

3657 3656 3655 3654 3653 3652 3651 3650 3647 3646 3645

3644 3643

3642 3641 3640

V40772

3677 3676 3675 3674 3673 3672 3671 3670 3667 3666 3665

3664 3663

3662 3661 3660

V40773

3717 3716 3715 3714 3713 3712

3710 3707 3706 3705

3704 3703

3702 3701 3700

V40774

3737 3736 3735 3734 3733 3732 3731 3730 3727 3726 3725

3724 3723

3722 3721 3720

V40775

3757 3756 3755 3754 3753 3752 3751 3750 3747 3746 3745

3744 3743

3742 3741 3740

V40776

3777 3776 3775 3774 3773 3772 3771 3770 3767 3766 3765

3764 3763

3762 3761 3760

V40777

3211

3311

3411

3511

3611

3711

3110

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation

3107 3106 3105

3137 3136 3135 3134 3133 3132 3131 3130 3127 3126 3125

3--50

CPU Specifications and Operation

Timer and Counter Status Bit Maps

This table provides a listing of the individual timer and counter contacts associated with each V-memory
address bit.
MSB

DL430 / DL440 / DL450 Timer (T) and Counter (CT) Contacts

LSB

15

14

13

12

11

10

Timer
Address

Counter
Address

017

016

015

014

013

012

011

010

007

006

005

004

003

002

001

000

V41100

V41140

037

036

035

034

033

032

031

030

027

026

025

024

023

022

021

020

V41101

V41141

057

056

055

054

053

052

051

050

047

046

045

044

043

042

041

040

V41102

V41142

077

076

075

074

073

072

071

070

067

066

065

064

063

062

061

060

V41103

V41143

117

116

115

114

113

112

111

110

107

106

105

104

103

102

101

100

V41104

V41144

137

136

135

134

133

132

131

130

127

126

125

124

123

122

121

120

V41105

V41145

157

156

155

154

153

152

151

150

147

146

145

144

143

142

141

140

V41106

V41146

177

176

175

174

173

172

171

170

167

166

165

164

163

162

161

160

V41107

V41147

CPU Specifications
and Operation

This portion of the table shows additional Timer contacts available with the DL440 and DL450.
MSB

DL440 / DL450 Additional Timer (T) Contacts

LSB

15

14

13

12

11

10

Timer
Address

217

216

215

214

213

212

211

210

207

206

205

204

203

202

201

200

V41110

237

236

235

234

233

232

231

230

227

226

225

224

223

222

221

220

V41111

257

256

255

254

253

252

251

250

247

246

245

244

243

242

241

240

V41112

277

276

275

274

273

272

271

270

267

266

265

264

263

262

261

260

V41113

317

316

315

314

313

312

311

310

307

306

305

304

303

302

301

300

V41114

337

336

335

334

333

332

331

330

327

326

325

324

323

322

321

320

V41115

357

356

355

354

353

352

351

350

347

346

345

344

343

342

341

340

V41116

377

376

375

374

373

372

371

370

367

366

365

364

363

362

361

360

V41117

LSB

This portion of the table shows additional Counter contacts available with the DL450.
MSB

DL450 Additional Counter (CT) Contacts

15

14

13

12

11

10

Counter
Address

217

216

215

214

213

212

211

210

207

206

205

204

203

202

201

200

V41150

237

236

235

234

233

232

231

230

227

226

225

224

223

222

221

220

V41151

257

256

255

254

253

252

251

250

247

246

245

244

243

242

241

240

V41152

277

276

275

274

273

272

271

270

267

266

265

264

263

262

261

260

V41153

317

316

315

314

313

312

311

310

307

306

305

304

303

302

301

300

V41154

337

336

335

334

333

332

331

330

327

326

325

324

323

322

321

320

V41155

357

356

355

354

353

352

351

350

347

346

345

344

343

342

341

340

V41156

377

376

375

374

373

372

371

370

367

366

365

364

363

362

361

360

V41157

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications and Operation

3--51

Remote I/O Bit Map

This table provides a listing of the individual remote I/O points associated with each V-memory address bit.
The DL430 and DL440 CPUs use the GX point type for both remote input and output point types. The DL450
CPU has the additional GY point type for use as remote output point references.
MSBDL430 / DL440 / DL450 Remote I/O (GX) and (GY) Point

LSB

GX
Address

GY
Address
(DL450)

14

13

12

11

10

017

016

015

014

013

012

011

010

007

006

005

004

003

002

001

000

V40000

V40200

037

036

035

034

033

032

031

030

027

026

025

024

023

022

021

020

V40001

V40201

057

056

055

054

053

052

051

050

047

046

045

044

043

042

041

040

V40002

V40202

077

076

075

074

073

072

071

070

067

066

065

064

063

062

061

060

V40003

V40203

117

116

115

114

113

112

111

110

107

106

105

104

103

102

101

100

V40004

V40204

137

136

135

134

133

132

131

130

127

126

125

124

123

122

121

120

V40005

V40205

157

156

155

154

153

152

151

150

147

146

145

144

143

142

141

140

V40006

V40206

177

176

175

174

173

172

171

170

167

166

165

164

163

162

161

160

V40007

V40207

217

216

215

214

213

212

211

210

207

206

205

204

203

202

201

200

V40010

V40210

237

236

235

234

233

232

231

230

227

226

225

224

223

222

221

220

V40011

V40211

257

256

255

254

253

252

251

250

247

246

245

244

243

242

241

240

V40012

V40212

277

276

275

274

273

272

271

270

267

266

265

264

263

262

261

260

V40013

V40213

317

316

315

314

313

312

311

310

307

306

305

304

303

302

301

300

V40014

V40214

337

336

335

334

333

332

331

330

327

326

325

324

323

322

321

320

V40015

V40215

357

356

355

354

353

352

351

350

347

346

345

344

343

342

341

340

V40016

V40216

377

376

375

374

373

372

371

370

367

366

365

364

363

362

361

360

V40017

V40217

417

416

415

414

413

412

411

410

407

406

405

404

403

402

401

400

V40020

V40220

437

436

435

434

433

432

431

430

427

426

425

424

423

422

421

420

V40021

V40221

457

456

455

454

453

452

451

450

447

446

445

444

443

442

441

440

V40022

V40222

477

476

475

474

473

472

471

470

467

466

465

464

463

462

461

460

V40023

V40223

517

516

515

514

513

512

511

510

507

506

505

504

503

502

501

500

V40024

V40224

537

536

535

534

533

532

531

530

527

526

525

524

523

522

521

520

V40025

V40225

557

556

555

554

553

552

551

550

547

546

545

544

543

542

541

540

V40026

V40226

577

576

575

574

573

572

571

570

567

566

565

564

563

562

561

560

V40027

V40227

617

616

615

614

613

612

611

610

607

606

605

604

603

602

601

600

V40030

V40230

637

636

635

634

633

632

631

630

627

626

625

624

623

622

621

620

V40031

V40231

657

656

655

654

653

652

651

650

647

646

645

644

643

642

641

640

V40032

V40232

677

676

675

674

673

672

671

670

667

666

665

664

663

662

661

660

V40033

V40233

717

716

715

714

713

712

711

710

707

706

705

704

703

702

701

700

V40034

V40234

737

736

735

734

733

732

731

730

727

726

725

724

723

722

721

720

V40035

V40235

757

756

755

754

753

752

751

750

747

746

745

744

743

742

741

740

V40036

V40236

777

776

775

774

773

772

771

770

767

766

765

764

763

762

761

760

V40037

V40237

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation

15

3--52

CPU Specifications and Operation

This portion of the table shows additional Remote I/O (GX) points available with the DL440 and DL450. The
(GY) remote output point type is available only with the DL450 (the GX type points works as both input and
output point types for the DL440).
MSB

DL440 / DL450 Additional Remote I/O (GX) Points

GX
Address

GY
Address
(DL450)

1010 1007 1006 1005 1004 1003 1002 1001 1000

V40040

V40240

1037 1036 1035 1034 1033 1032 1031 1030 1027 1026 1025 1024 1023 1022 1021 1020

V40041

V40241

1057 1056 1055 1054 1053 1052 1051 1050 1047 1046 1045 1044 1043 1042 1041 1040

V40042

V40242

1077 1076 1075 1074 1073 1072 1071 1070 1067 1066 1065 1064 1063 1062 1061 1060

V40043

V40243

1117

1116

1115

1114

1113

1112

1111

1110

1107

1106

1105

1104

1103

1102

1101

1100

V40044

V40244

1137

1136

1135

1134

1133

1132

1131

1130

1127

1126

1125

1124

1123

1122

1121

1120

V40045

V40245

1157

1156

1155

1154

1153

1152

1151

1150

1147

1146

1145

1144

1143

1142

1141

1140

V40046

V40246

1177

1176

1175

1174

1173

1172

1171

1170

1167

1166

1165

1164

1163

1162

1161

1160

V40047

V40247

1217 1216 1215 1214 1213 1212

1211

1210 1207 1206 1205 1204 1203 1202 1201 1200

V40050

V40250

1237 1236 1235 1234 1233 1232 1231 1230 1227 1226 1225 1224 1223 1222 1221 1220

V40051

V40251

1257 1256 1255 1254 1253 1252 1251 1250 1247 1246 1245 1244 1243 1242 1241 1240

V40052

V40252

1277 1276 1275 1274 1273 1272 1271 1270 1267 1266 1265 1264 1263 1262 1261 1260

V40053

V40253

1317 1316 1315 1314 1313 1312

1310 1307 1306 1305 1304 1303 1302 1301 1300

V40054

V40254

1337 1336 1335 1334 1333 1332 1331 1330 1327 1326 1325 1324 1323 1322 1321 1320

V40055

V40255

1357 1356 1355 1354 1353 1352 1351 1350 1347 1346 1345 1344 1343 1342 1341 1340

V40056

V40256

1377 1376 1375 1374 1373 1372 1371 1370 1367 1366 1365 1364 1363 1362 1361 1360

V40057

V40257

1417 1416 1415 1414 1413 1412

1410 1407 1406 1405 1404 1403 1402 1401 1400

V40060

V40260

1437 1436 1435 1434 1433 1432 1431 1430 1427 1426 1425 1424 1423 1422 1421 1420

V40061

V40261

1457 1456 1455 1454 1453 1452 1451 1450 1447 1446 1445 1444 1443 1442 1441 1440

V40062

V40262

1477 1476 1475 1474 1473 1472 1471 1470 1467 1466 1465 1464 1463 1462 1461 1460

V40063

V40263

1517 1516 1515 1514 1513 1512

1510 1507 1506 1505 1504 1503 1502 1501 1500

V40064

V40264

1537 1536 1535 1534 1533 1532 1531 1530 1527 1526 1525 1524 1523 1522 1521 1520

V40065

V40265

1557 1556 1555 1554 1553 1552 1551 1550 1547 1546 1545 1544 1543 1542 1541 1540

V40066

V40266

1577 1576 1575 1574 1573 1572 1571 1570 1567 1566 1565 1564 1563 1562 1561 1560

V40067

V40267

1617 1616 1615 1614 1613 1612

15

14

13

12

11

10

1017 1016 1015 1014 1013 1012

CPU Specifications
and Operation

LSB

9
1011

1311

1411

1511

1611

1610 1607 1606 1605 1604 1603 1602 1601 1600

V40070

V40270

1637 1636 1635 1634 1633 1632 1631 1630 1627 1626 1625 1624 1623 1622 1621 1620

V40071

V40271

1657 1656 1655 1654 1653 1652 1651 1650 1647 1646 1645 1644 1643 1642 1641 1640

V40072

V40272

1677 1676 1675 1674 1673 1672 1671 1670 1667 1666 1665 1664 1663 1662 1661 1660

V40073

V40273

1717 1716 1715 1714 1713 1712

1710 1707 1706 1705 1704 1703 1702 1701 1700

V40074

V40274

1737 1736 1735 1734 1733 1732 1731 1730 1727 1726 1725 1724 1723 1722 1721 1720

V40075

V40275

1757 1756 1755 1754 1753 1752 1751 1750 1747 1746 1745 1744 1743 1742 1741 1740

V40076

V40276

1777 1776 1775 1774 1773 1772 1771 1770 1767 1766 1765 1764 1763 1762 1761 1760

V40077

V40277

1711

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

3--53

CPU Specifications and Operation

This portion of the table shows additional Remote I/O (GX and GY) points available with the DL450.
MSB

DL450 Additional Remote I/O (GX) and (GY) Points

LSB

GX
Address

GY
Address

2010 2007 2006 2005 2004 2003 2002 2001 2000

V40100

V40300

2037 2036 2035 2034 2033 2032 2031 2030 2027 2026 2025 2024 2023 2022 2021 2020

V40101

V40301

2057 2056 2055 2054 2053 2052 2051 2050 2047 2046 2045 2044 2043 2042 2041 2040

V40102

V40302

2077 2076 2075 2074 2073 2072 2071 2070 2067 2066 2065 2064 2063 2062 2061 2060

V40103

V40303

2117

15

14

13

12

11

10

2017 2016 2015 2014 2013 2012

2116

2115

2114

2113

2112

9
2011

2111

V40104

V40304

V40105

V40305

2157 2156 2155 2154 2153 2152 2151 2150 2147 2146 2145 2144 2143 2142 2141 2140

V40106

V40306

2177 2176 2175 2174 2173 2172 2171 2170 2167 2166 2165 2164 2163 2162 2161 2160

V40107

V40307

2217 2216 2215 2214 2213 2212

2210 2207 2206 2205 2204 2203 2202 2201 2200

V40110

V40310

2237 2236 2235 2234 2233 2232 2231 2230 2227 2226 2225 2224 2223 2222 2221 2220

V40111

V40311

2257 2256 2255 2254 2253 2252 2251 2250 2247 2246 2245 2244 2243 2242 2241 2240

V40112

V40312

2277 2276 2275 2274 2273 2272 2271 2270 2267 2266 2265 2264 2263 2262 2261 2260

V40113

V40313

2317 2316 2315 2314 2313 2312

2310 2307 2306 2305 2304 2303 2302 2301 2300

V40114

V40314

2337 2336 2335 2334 2333 2332 2331 2330 2327 2326 2325 2324 2323 2322 2321 2320

V40115

V40315

2357 2356 2355 2354 2353 2352 2351 2350 2347 2346 2345 2344 2343 2342 2341 2340

V40116

V40316

2377 2376 2375 2374 2373 2372 2371 2370 2367 2366 2365 2364 2363 2362 2361 2360

V40117

V40317

2417 2416 2415 2414 2413 2412

2311

2411

CPU Specifications
and Operation

2107 2106 2105 2104 2103 2102 2101 2100

2137 2136 2135 2134 2133 2132 2131 2130 2127 2126 2125 2124 2123 2122 2121 2120

2211

2110

2410 2407 2406 2405 2404 2403 2402 2401 2400

V40120

V40320

2437 2436 2435 2434 2433 2432 2431 2430 2427 2426 2425 2424 2423 2422 2421 2420

V40121

V40321

2457 2456 2455 2454 2453 2452 2451 2450 2447 2446 2445 2444 2443 2442 2441 2440

V40122

V40322

2477 2476 2475 2474 2473 2472 2471 2470 2467 2466 2465 2464 2463 2462 2461 2460

V40123

V40323

2517 2516 2515 2514 2513 2512

2510 2507 2506 2505 2504 2503 2502 2501 2500

V40124

V40324

2537 2536 2535 2534 2533 2532 2531 2530 2527 2526 2525 2524 2523 2522 2521 2520

V40125

V40325

2557 2556 2555 2554 2553 2552 2551 2550 2547 2546 2545 2544 2543 2542 2541 2540

V40126

V40326

2577 2576 2575 2574 2573 2572 2571 2570 2567 2566 2565 2564 2563 2562 2561 2560

V40127

V40327

2617 2616 2615 2614 2613 2612

2610 2607 2606 2605 2604 2603 2602 2601 2600

V40130

V40330

2637 2636 2635 2634 2633 2632 2631 2630 2627 2626 2625 2624 2623 2622 2621 2620

V40131

V40331

2657 2656 2655 2654 2653 2652 2651 2650 2647 2646 2645 2644 2643 2642 2641 2640

V40132

V40332

2677 2676 2675 2674 2673 2672 2671 2670 2667 2666 2665 2664 2663 2662 2661 2660

V40133

V40333

2717 2716 2715 2714 2713 2712

2710 2707 2706 2705 2704 2703 2702 2701 2700

V40134

V40334

2737 2736 2735 2734 2733 2732 2731 2730 2727 2726 2725 2724 2723 2722 2721 2720

V40135

V40335

2757 2756 2755 2754 2753 2752 2751 2750 2747 2746 2745 2744 2743 2742 2741 2740

V40136

V40336

2777 2776 2775 2774 2773 2772 2771 2770 2767 2766 2765 2764 2763 2762 2761 2760

V40137

V40337

2511

2611

2711

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

3--54

CPU Specifications and Operation

This table is continued from the previous page.

MSB

DL450 Additional Remote I/O (GX) and (GY) Points

GX
Address

GY
Address

3010 3007 3006 3005 3004 3003 3002 3001 3000

V40140

V40340

3037 3036 3035 3034 3033 3032 3031 3030 3027 3026 3025 3024 3023 3022 3021 3020

V40141

V40341

3057 3056 3055 3054 3053 3052 3051 3050 3047 3046 3045 3044 3043 3042 3041 3040

V40142

V40342

3077 3076 3075 3074 3073 3072 3071 3070 3067 3066 3065 3064 3063 3062 3061 3060

V40143

V40343

3117

15

14

13

12

11

10

3017 3016 3015 3014 3013 3012

CPU Specifications
and Operation

LSB

3116

3115

3114

3113

3112

9
3011

3111

3107 3106 3105 3104 3103 3102 3101 3100

V40144

V40344

3137 3136 3135 3134 3133 3132 3131 3130 3127 3126 3125 3124 3123 3122 3121 3120

V40145

V40345

3157 3156 3155 3154 3153 3152 3151 3150 3147 3146 3145 3144 3143 3142 3141 3140

V40146

V40346

3177 3176 3175 3174 3173 3172 3171 3170 3167 3166 3165 3164 3163 3162 3161 3160

V40147

V40347

3217 3216 3215 3214 3213 3212

3210 3207 3206 3205 3204 3203 3202 3201 3200

V40150

V40350

3237 3236 3235 3234 3233 3232 3231 3230 3227 3226 3225 3224 3223 3222 3221 3220

V40151

V40351

3257 3256 3255 3254 3253 3252 3251 3250 3247 3246 3245 3244 3243 3242 3241 3240

V40152

V40352

3277 3276 3275 3274 3273 3272 3271 3270 3267 3266 3265 3264 3263 3262 3261 3260

V40153

V40353

3317 3316 3315 3314 3313 3312

3310 3307 3306 3305 3304 3303 3302 3301 3300

V40154

V40354

3337 3336 3335 3334 3333 3332 3331 3330 3327 3326 3325 3324 3323 3322 3321 3320

V40155

V40355

3357 3356 3355 3354 3353 3352 3351 3350 3347 3346 3345 3344 3343 3342 3341 3340

V40156

V40356

3377 3376 3375 3374 3373 3372 3371 3370 3367 3366 3365 3364 3363 3362 3361 3360

V40157

V40357

3417 3416 3415 3414 3413 3412

3211

3311

3411

3110

3410 3407 3406 3405 3404 3403 3402 3401 3400

V40160

V40360

3437 3436 3435 3434 3433 3432 3431 3430 3427 3426 3425 3424 3423 3422 3421 3420

V40161

V40361

3457 3456 3455 3454 3453 3452 3451 3450 3447 3446 3445 3444 3443 3442 3441 3440

V40162

V40362

3477 3476 3475 3474 3473 3472 3471 3470 3467 3466 3465 3464 3463 3462 3461 3460

V40163

V40363

3517 3516 3515 3514 3513 3512

3510 3507 3506 3505 3504 3503 3502 3501 3500

V40164

V40364

3537 3536 3535 3534 3533 3532 3531 3530 3527 3526 3525 3524 3523 3522 3521 3520

V40165

V40365

3557 3556 3555 3554 3553 3552 3551 3550 3547 3546 3545 3544 3543 3542 3541 3540

V40166

V40366

3577 3576 3575 3574 3573 3572 3571 3570 3567 3566 3565 3564 3563 3562 3561 3560

V40167

V40367

3617 3616 3615 3614 3613 3612

3610 3607 3606 3605 3604 3603 3602 3601 3600

V40170

V40370

3637 3636 3635 3634 3633 3632 3631 3630 3627 3626 3625 3624 3623 3622 3621 3620

V40171

V40371

3657 3656 3655 3654 3653 3652 3651 3650 3647 3646 3645 3644 3643 3642 3641 3640

V40172

V40372

3677 3676 3675 3674 3673 3672 3671 3670 3667 3666 3665 3664 3663 3662 3661 3660

V40173

V40373

3717 3716 3715 3714 3713 3712

3710 3707 3706 3705 3704 3703 3702 3701 3700

V40174

V40374

3737 3736 3735 3734 3733 3732 3731 3730 3727 3726 3725 3724 3723 3722 3721 3720

V40175

V40375

3757 3756 3755 3754 3753 3752 3751 3750 3747 3746 3745 3744 3743 3742 3741 3740

V40176

V40376

3777 3776 3775 3774 3773 3772 3771 3770 3767 3766 3765 3764 3763 3762 3761 3760

V40177

V40377

3511

3611

3711

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications and Operation

3--55

Stage Control / Status Bit Map

This table provides a listing of the individual stage control bits associated with each V-memory address bit.
MSB

DL430 / DL440 / DL450 Stage (S) Control Bits

15

14

13

12

11

10

017

016

015

014

013

037

036

035

034

033

057

056

055

054

077

076

075

117

116

137

LSB

Address

012

011

010

007

006

005

004

003

002

001

000

V41000

032

031

030

027

026

025

024

023

022

021

020

V41001

053

052

051

050

047

046

045

044

043

042

041

040

V41002

074

073

072

071

070

067

066

065

064

063

062

061

060

V41003

115

114

113

112

111

110

107

106

105

104

103

102

101

100

V41004

136

135

134

133

132

131

130

127

126

125

124

123

122

121

120

V41005

157

156

155

154

153

152

151

150

147

146

145

144

143

142

141

140

V41006

177

176

175

174

173

172

171

170

167

166

165

164

163

162

161

160

V41007

217

216

215

214

213

212

211

210

207

206

205

204

203

202

201

200

V41010

237

236

235

234

233

232

231

230

227

226

225

224

223

222

221

220

V41011

257

256

255

254

253

252

251

250

247

246

245

244

243

242

241

240

V41012

277

276

275

274

273

272

271

270

267

266

265

264

263

262

261

260

V41013

317

316

315

314

313

312

311

310

307

306

305

304

303

302

301

300

V41014

337

336

335

334

333

332

331

330

327

326

325

324

323

322

321

320

V41015

357

356

355

354

353

352

351

350

347

346

345

344

343

342

341

340

V41016

377

376

375

374

373

372

371

370

367

366

365

364

363

362

361

360

V41017

417

416

415

414

413

412

411

410

407

406

405

404

403

402

401

400

V41020

437

436

435

434

433

432

431

430

427

426

425

424

423

422

421

420

V41021

457

456

455

454

453

452

451

450

447

446

445

444

443

442

441

440

V41022

477

476

475

474

473

472

471

470

467

466

465

464

463

462

461

460

V41023

517

516

515

514

513

512

511

510

507

506

505

504

503

502

501

500

V41024

537

536

535

534

533

532

531

530

527

526

525

524

523

522

521

520

V41025

557

556

555

554

553

552

551

550

547

546

545

544

543

542

541

540

V41026

577

576

575

574

573

572

571

570

567

566

565

564

563

562

561

560

V41027

MSB

DL440 / DL450 Additional Stage (S) Control Bits

LSB

Address

15

14

13

12

11

10

617

616

615

614

613

612

611

610

607

606

605

604

603

602

601

600

V41030

637

636

635

634

633

632

631

630

627

626

625

624

623

622

621

620

V41031

657

656

655

654

653

652

651

650

647

646

645

644

643

642

641

640

V41032

677

676

675

674

673

672

671

670

667

666

665

664

663

662

661

660

V41033

717

716

715

714

713

712

711

710

707

706

705

704

703

702

701

700

V41034

737

736

735

734

733

732

731

730

727

726

725

724

723

722

721

720

V41035

757

756

755

754

753

752

751

750

747

746

745

744

743

742

741

740

V41036

777

776

775

774

773

772

771

770

767

766

765

764

763

762

761

760

V41037

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CPU Specifications
and Operation

3--56

CPU Specifications and Operation

MSB
15

DL440 / DL450 Additional Stage (S) Control Bits (continued)

14

13

12

11

10

CPU Specifications
and Operation

1017 1016 1015 1014 1013 1012

9
1011

LSB
2

Address

1010 1007 1006 1005

1004 1003

1002 1001 1000

V41040

1037 1036 1035 1034 1033 1032 1031 1030 1027 1026 1025

1024 1023

1022 1021 1020

V41041

1057 1056 1055 1054 1053 1052 1051 1050 1047 1046 1045

1044 1043

1042 1041 1040

V41042

1077 1076 1075 1074 1073 1072 1071 1070 1067 1066 1065

1064 1063

1062 1061 1060

V41043

1117

1116

1115

1114

1113

1112

1111

1110

1107

1106

1105

1104

1103

1102

1101

1100

V41044

1137

1136

1135

1134

1133

1132

1131

1130

1127

1126

1125

1124

1123

1122

1121

1120

V41045

1157

1156

1155

1154

1153

1152

1151

1150

1147

1146

1145

1144

1143

1142

1141

1140

V41046

1177

1176

1175

1174

1173

1172

1171

1170

1167

1166

1165

1164

1163

1162

1161

1160

V41047

1217 1216 1215 1214 1213 1212

1211

1210 1207 1206 1205

1204 1203

1202 1201 1200

V41050

1237 1236 1235 1234 1233 1232 1231 1230 1227 1226 1225

1224 1223

1222 1221 1220

V41051

1257 1256 1255 1254 1253 1252 1251 1250 1247 1246 1245

1244 1243

1242 1241 1240

V41052

1277 1276 1275 1274 1273 1272 1271 1270 1267 1266 1265

1264 1263

1262 1261 1260

V41053

1317 1316 1315 1314 1313 1312

1310 1307 1306 1305

1304 1303

1302 1301 1300

V41054

1337 1336 1335 1334 1333 1332 1331 1330 1327 1326 1325

1324 1323

1322 1321 1320

V41055

1357 1356 1355 1354 1353 1352 1351 1350 1347 1346 1345

1344 1343

1342 1341 1340

V41056

1377 1376 1375 1374 1373 1372 1371 1370 1367 1366 1365

1364 1363

1362 1361 1360

V41057

1417 1416 1415 1414 1413 1412

1410 1407 1406 1405

1404 1403

1402 1401 1400

V41060

1437 1436 1435 1434 1433 1432 1431 1430 1427 1426 1425

1424 1423

1422 1421 1420

V41061

1457 1456 1455 1454 1453 1452 1451 1450 1447 1446 1445

1444 1443

1442 1441 1440

V41062

1477 1476 1475 1474 1473 1472 1471 1470 1467 1466 1465

1464 1463

1462 1461 1460

V41063

1517 1516 1515 1514 1513 1512

1510 1507 1506 1505

1504 1503

1502 1501 1500

V41064

1537 1536 1535 1534 1533 1532 1531 1530 1527 1526 1525

1524 1523

1522 1521 1520

V41065

1557 1556 1555 1554 1553 1552 1551 1550 1547 1546 1545

1544 1543

1542 1541 1540

V41066

1577 1576 1575 1574 1573 1572 1571 1570 1567 1566 1565

1564 1563

1562 1561 1560

V41067

1617 1616 1615 1614 1613 1612

1610 1607 1606 1605

1604 1603

1602 1601 1600

V41070

1637 1636 1635 1634 1633 1632 1631 1630 1627 1626 1625

1624 1623

1622 1621 1620

V41071

1657 1656 1655 1654 1653 1652 1651 1650 1647 1646 1645

1644 1643

1642 1641 1640

V41072

1677 1676 1675 1674 1673 1672 1671 1670 1667 1666 1665

1664 1663

1662 1661 1660

V41073

1717 1716 1715 1714 1713 1712

1710 1707 1706 1705

1704 1703

1702 1701 1700

V41074

1737 1736 1735 1734 1733 1732 1731 1730 1727 1726 1725

1724 1723

1722 1721 1720

V41075

1757 1756 1755 1754 1753 1752 1751 1750 1747 1746 1745

1744 1743

1742 1741 1740

V41076

1777 1776 1775 1774 1773 1772 1771 1770 1767 1766 1765

1764 1763

1762 1761 1760

V41077

1311

1411

1511

1611

1711

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

System Design and

Configuration

14

In This Chapter. . . .
DL405 System Design Strategies
Module Placement and Configuration
Calculating the Power Budget
Local I/O Expansion
Remote I/O Expansion
Network Connections to MODBUSR and DirectNET
Network Slave Operation
Network Master Operation

4--2

System Design and Configuration

DL405 System Design Strategies

I/O System
Configurations

The DL405 PLCs offer the following ways to add networking to the system:
S Local I/O -- consists of I/O modules located in the same base as the CPU.
S Expansion I/O -- consists of I/O modules in expansion bases located
close to the the local base. Expansion cables connect them to the local
CPU bases serial bus in daisy-chain fashion.
S Remote I/O -- consists of I/O modules located in bases which are serially
connected to the local CPU base through a Remote Master module, or
may connect directly to port 3 on a DL450 CPU.
A DL405 system can be developed using many different arrangements of these
configurations. All I/O configurations use the standard complement of DL405 I/O
modules and bases. Below is a brief description of each of these configurations.
Examples of each configuration are discussed in detail later in this chapter.

Local I/O

CPU
(RM)

3280 ft. (1000m) Total distance

7 Bases per channel

R
M

Remote I/O
channel (DL450)
RS

1 meter max. length, each cable

System Design
and Configuration

EXP

EXP

Expansion I/O
-- 3 Expansion racks
maximum
-- DL430/440 up to
320 input and 320
outputs (includes I/O
in the local CPU base)
-- DL450 up to 1024
input and 1024 outputs
(includes I/O in the
local CPU base)

EXP

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Remote I/O
DL440/430 supports a maximum of
2 channels. These channels can
be any combination of remote I/O.
DL450 supports a maximum of 3
channels. One remote channel
connects directly to the DL450
CPU. The other channel uses
Remote Masters in any
combination.

System Design and Configuration

Networking
Configurations

4--3

The DL405 PLCs offer the following four ways to add I/O modules to the system:
S Data Communications Module -- connects a DL405 system to devices
using the DirectNET protocol, or connects as a slave to a MODBUS
network.
S DL450 Communications Ports -- the DL450 CPU has two extra (total of
four) built-in comm ports. It allow two network connections directly from the
CPU. See Chapter 3, CPU Specifications and Operation, for individual port
specifications, and the sections at the end of this chapter for network
connections.
S MODBUS Master Module -- You can use MODBUS master modules in
any slot of a DL405 system for connecting it as a master to a MODBUS
network, using the RTU protocol.
S MODBUS Slave Module -- You can use MODBUS slave modules in any
slot of a DL405 system for connecting it as a slave to a MODBUS
network, using the RTU protocol.
S TIWAYR Network Interface Module -- Interface to Texas Instruments and
Siemens TIWAY networks by using this module as a slave.
S Shared Data Network Module -- The Shared Data Network Module lets
you make peer--to--peer connections between DL405 PLC systems.

PEER-TO-PEER and
MASTER/SLAVE
COMMUNICATIONS

305

System Migration
or Expansion

DirectNET/MODBUSr Communication
(max. 3300ft/1000m)

DirectNET/MODBUSr
Communication
(max. 3300ft/1000m)
DirectNET Communication (max. 3300ft/1000m)

405

DCM MB DCM
MSTR

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

System Design
and Configuration

405

4--4

System Design and Configuration

Module Placement and Configuration

Valid Module/Unit
Locations

The most commonly used I/O modules for the DL405 system (AC, DC, AC/DC,
Relay and Analog) can be used in any base in your system. The table below lists by
category the valid locations for all modules/units in a DL405 system. Remember that
the power budget can limit the number of modules in a base (discussed later).
Module/Unit
CPUs

Local CPU Base

Local Exp. Base

Remote Base

CPU Slot Only

Expansion Units

CPU Slot Only

8/16/32pt DC Input Modules

64pt DC Input Modules

n
n

Note 1

n
n

Note 1, 2

AC Input Modules

AC/DC Input Modules

8/16/32pt DC Output Modules

64pt DC Output Modules

Note 1

Note 1, 2

AC Output Modules

Relay Output Modules

Analog Modules

Remote I/O
Remote Master

Remote Slave Unit

CPU Slot Only

Communications and Networking

Modules

CoProcessor Modules

Note 2

Specialty Modules

System Design
and Configuration

Interrupt

DL430 -- Slot 0 Only

DL440 -- Slots 0 & 1
DL450 -- Slots 0 & 1

High Speed Counter

PID Module

SDS

4 Loop Temp. Controller

Input Simulator

Filler

Note 1: When using 64 pt modules, you cannot use any specialty modules in slots 5, 6, and 7 in the
same base.
Note 2: Specialty modules are allowed in expansion bases only if you are using the DL450 CPU and all
bases in the system are the D4--xxB--1 type bases.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

System Design and Configuration

I/O Configuration
Methods

Automatic
Configuration

4--5

There are two methods of I/O configuration for the DL405 CPUs:
S Auto configuration -- the CPU automatically configures the I/O. It
assigns the lowest I/O numbers to the module in slot 0 (the slot next to
the CPU), the next set of I/O numbers to the next module in the base,
etc. The numbers are assigned only to modules actually in the base, not
to empty slots in the base. This is the default mode of the CPU.
S Manual configuration -- (DL440/DL450 only) allows you assign I/O
numbers. Numbers can be assigned to empty slots or in any order as
long as the numbers are assigned in groups of 16 or 32.
The DL405 CPUs automatically detect any installed I/O modules (including specialty
modules)at powerup, and establish the correct I/O configuration and addresses. For
most applications, you will never have to change the configuration.
I/O addresses use octal numbering, starting at X0 and Y0 in the slot next to the CPU.
The addresses are assigned in groups of 8, 16, 32, or 64 depending on the number
of points for the I/O module. The discrete input and output modules can be mixed in
any order, but there may be restrictions placed on some specialty modules. The
following diagram shows the I/O numbering convention for an example system.

Slot 0
8pt. Input
X0--X7

Slot 1
32pt. Output
Y0--Y37

Slot 2
16pt. Input
X10--X27

Slot 3
8pt. Input
X30--X37

Manual
Configuration
  
430 440 450

It may never become necessary, but DL440 and DL450 CPUs allow manual I/O
address assignment for any I/O slot(s) in local or expansion bases. You can
manually modify an auto configuration to match arbitrary I/O numbering. For
example, two adjacent input modules can have starting addresses at X10 and X200.
In automatic configuration, the addresses are assigned on 8-point boundaries.
Manual configuration, however, assumes that all modules are at least 16 points, so
you can only assign addresses that are a multiple of 20 (octal). For example, X30
and Y50 are not valid addresses. You can still use 8 point modules, but 16 addresses
will be assigned and the upper eight addresses will be unused.
WARNING: If you manually configure an I/O slot, the I/O addressing for the
other modules may change. This is because the DL405 CPUs do not allow you
to assign duplicate I/O addresses. You must always correct any I/O
configuration errors before you place the CPU in RUN mode. Uncorrected
errors can cause unpredictable machine operation that can result in a risk of
personal injury or damage to equipment.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

System Design
and Configuration

Both the Handheld Programmer and DirectSOFT provide AUX functions that allow
you to automatically configure the I/O. For example, with the Handheld Programmer
AUX 46 executes an automatic configuration, which allows the CPU to examine the
installed modules and determine the I/O configuration and addressing. With
DirectSOFT, the PLC Configure I/O menu option would be used.

4--6

System Design and Configuration

Removing a
Manual
Configuration

After a manual configuration, the system will automatically retain the new I/O
addresses through a power cycle. You can remove (overwrite) any manual
configuration changes by simply performing an automatic configuration.
The following diagram shows how I/O addresses change after manually configuring
a slot.

Automatic

Manual

System Design
and Configuration

Power--On I/O
Configuration
Check

Slot 0
8pt. Input
X0--X7

Slot 1
32pt. Output
Y0--Y37

Slot 2
16pt. Input
X10--X27

Slot 3
8pt. Input
X30--X37

Slot 0
8pt. Input
X0--X7

Slot 1
32pt. Output
Y0--Y37

Slot 2
16pt. Input
X100--X117

Slot 3
8pt. Input
X20--X27

The DL405 CPUs can also be set to automatically check the I/O configuration on
power-up. By selecting this feature you can detect any changes that may have
occurred while the power was disconnected. For example, if someone places an
output module in a slot that previously held an input module, the configuration check
will detect the change and print a message on the Handheld Programmer or
DirectSOFT screen (use AUX 44 on the HPP to enable the configuration check).
If the system detects a change in the I/O configuration at power-up, an error code
E252 NEW I/O CONFIGURATION will be generated. You can use AUX 42 to
determine the exact base and slot location where the change occurred.
WARNING: You should always correct any I/O configuration errors before you
place the CPU into RUN mode. Uncorrected errors can cause unpredictable
machine operation that can result in a risk of personal injury or damage to
equipment.
When a configuration error is generated, you may actually want to use the new I/O
configuration. For example, you may have intentionally changed an I/O module to
use with a program change. You can use AUX 45 to select the new configuration, or,
keep the existing configuration stored in memory.
WARNING: Verify the I/O configuration being selected will work properly with
the CPU program. Always correct any I/O configuration errors before placing
the CPU in RUN mode. Uncorrected errors can cause unpredictable machine
operation that can result in a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

System Design and Configuration

4--7

Calculating the Power Budget

Managing your
Power Resource

As you have seen, the I/O configuration depends on your choice of I/O modules,
bases, and I/O location. When determining the types and quantity of I/O modules
you will be using in the DL405 system it is important to remember there is a limited
amount of power available from the power supply to the system. We have provided a
chart to help you easily see the amount of power you will have with your CPU,
Expansion Unit or Remote Slave selection. The following chart will help you
calculate the amount of power you need with your I/O selections. At the end of this
section you will also find an example of power budgeting and a worksheet for your
own calculations.
If the I/O you chose exceeds the maximum power available from the power supply
you can resolve the problem by shifting some of the modules to an expansion base
which contains another power supply.
WARNING: It is extremely important to calculate the power budget correctly. If
you exceed the power budget, the system may operate in an unpredictable
manner which may result in a risk of personal injury or equipment damage.

CPU Power
Specifications

The following chart shows the amount of current available for the two voltages
supplied on the DL405 CPU, Expansion unit or Remote Slave unit. Use these
currents when calculating the power budget for you system. The Auxiliary 24V
Power Source mentioned in the table is a connection at the base terminal strip
allowing you to connect to devices or DL405 modules that require 24VDC.
Auxiliary 24V
Power Source
Current
Supplied in
mA.

Remote and
Expansion Units

5V Current
Supplied in
mA.

Auxiliary 24V
Power Source
Current
Supplied in
mA.

D4--430

3700

400

D4--EX

4000

400

D4--440

3700

400

D4--EXDC

4000

None

D4--440DC--1

3700

None

D4--EXDC--2

3700

None

D4--440DC--2

3700

None

D4--RS

3700

400

D4--450

3100

400

D4--RSDC

3700

None

D4--450DC--1

3100

None

H4--EBC

3470

400

D4--450DC--2

3100

None

H4--EBC--F

3300

400

Module Power
Requirements

The chart on the next page shows the amount of maximum current required for each
of the DL405 modules. Use these currents when calculating the power budget for
your system. If external 24VDC is required, the external 24V from the CPU power
supply may be used as long as the power budget is not exceeded.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

System Design
and Configuration

CPUs

5V Current
Supplied in
mA.

4--8

System Design and Configuration

Device

5V Current
Required (mA)

External 24V
Current Req. (mA)

I/O Bases
80

None

D4--06B, D4--06BNX,
D4--06B--1

80

None

80

None

DC Input Modules

F4--04AD

85

100

F4--04ADS

270

120

F4--08AD

75

90

F4--04DA

120

180

F4--04DA--1

70

75 + 20 per channel

F4--04DA--2

90

75 + 20 per channel

D4--08ND3S

100

None

F4--04DAS--1

60

50 per channel

D4--16ND2

150

None

F4--04DAS--2

60

60 per channel

D4--16ND2F

150

None

F4--08DA--1

90

100 + 20 per channel

D4--32ND3--1

150

None

F4--16DA--1

90

100 + 20 per channel

D4--32ND3--2

150

None

F4--16DA--2

80

25 max.

D4--64ND2

300 (max)

None

F4--16AD--1

100

100

F4--16AD--2

75

100

D4--08NA

100

None

F4--08THM--n

120

50 + 20 per channel

D4--16NA

150

None

F4--08RTD

80

None

D4--16NA--1

150

None

Remote I/O
D4--ERM

320

None

D4--16NE3

150

None

D4--ERM--F

450

None

F4--08NES

90

None

D4--RM

300

None

D4--08TD1

150

35

D4--DCM

500

None

F4--08TD1S

295

None

H4--ECOM

530

None

D4--16TD1

200

125

H4--ECOM--F

670

None

D4--16TD2

400

None

H4--ECOM100

300

None

D4--32TD1

250

140

F4--MAS--MB

235

None

D4--32TD1--1

250

140 (5--15VDC)

CoProcessors

D4--32TD2

350

120 / (4A max

including loads)

F4--CP128

305

None

D4--64TD1

800 (max)

None

F4--CP512

235

None

F4--CP128--T

350

None

D4--16SIM

150

None

D4--HSC

300

None

F4--16PID

160

None

F4--8MPI

225

170

F4--4LTC

280

75

H4--CTRIO

400

None

AC Input Modules

AC/DC Input Modules

DC Output Modules

System Design
and Configuration

External 24V
Current Req. (mA)

Analog Modules

D4--04B, D4--04BNX,
D4--04B--1

D4--08B, D4--08BNX,
D4--08B--1

5V Current
Required (mA)

Device

Communications and Networking

AC Output Modules
D4--08TA

250

None

D4--16TA

450

None

Relay Output Modules

D4--08TR

550

None

F4--08TRS--1

575

None

F4--08TRS--2

575

None

D4--16TR

1000

None

D4--HPP

320

None

DV--1000

150

None

Programming

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Specialty Modules

4--9

System Design and Configuration

Power Budget
Calculation
Example

The following example shows how to calculate the power budget for the DL405
system.
Base #
0

Module Type

Auxiliary
Power Source
24 VDC Output (mA)

5 VDC (mA)

CPU/
D4--430
Expansion
Unit/
Remote Slave
Used
Slot 0
D4--16ND2

+ 150

Slot 1

D4--16ND2

+ 150

Slot 2

F4--04DA--1

+ 70

Slot 3

D4--08ND3S

+ 100

Slot 4

D4--08ND3S

+ 100

Slot 5

D4--16TD2

+ 400

Slot 6

D4--16TD2

+ 400

Slot 7

D4--16TR

+ 1000

+ 80

+ 320

3700

400

+ 155

Other
Base D4--08B--1
Handheld Prog D4--HPP
Maximum power required

3700--2950 =930 400 -- 300

155
= 100

1. Using the tables at the beginning of the Power Budgeting section of this
chapter fill in the information for the CPU/Expansion Unit/Remote Slave,
I/O modules, and any other devices that will use system power including
devices that use the 24 VDC output. Pay special attention to the current
supplied by either the CPU, Expansion Unit, and Remote Slave since they
do differ. Devices which fall into the Other category are devices such as
the Base and the Handheld programmer which also have power
requirements but do not directly plug into the base.
2. Add the current columns starting with Slot 0 and put the total in the row
labeled Maximum power required.
3. Subtract the row labeled Maximum power required from the row labeled
CPU/Expansion Unit/Remote Slave Used. Place the difference in the
row labeled Remaining Power Available.
4. If Maximum Power Required is greater than CPU/Expansion
Unit/Remote Slave Used in any of the three columns, the power budget
will be exceeded. It will be unsafe to used this configuration and you will
need to restructure your I/O configuration.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edtition, Rev. A

System Design
and Configuration

Remaining Power Available

2770

4--10

System Design and Configuration

Power Budget
Calculation
Worksheet

You may copy and use the following blank chart for your power budget calculations.
Base #
Module Type

5 VDC (mA)

Auxiliary
Power Source
24 VDC Output (mA)

CPU/
Expansion
Unit/
Remote Slave
Used
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 7
Other

Maximum Power Required

System Design
and Configuration

Remaining Power Available

1. Using the tables at the beginning of the Power Budgeting section of this
chapter fill in the information for the CPU/Expansion Unit/Remote Slave,
I/O modules, and any other devices that will use system power including
devices that use the 24 VDC output. Pay special attention to the current
supplied by either the CPU, Expansion Unit, and Remote Slave since they
do differ. Devices which fall into the Other category are devices such as
the Base and the Handheld programmer which also have power
requirements but do not directly plug into the base.
2. Add the current columns starting with Slot 0 and put the total in the row
labeled Maximum power required.
3. Subtract the row labeled Maximum power required from the row labeled
CPU/Expansion Unit/Remote Slave Used. Place the difference in the
row labeled Remaining Power Available.
4. If Maximum Power Required is greater than CPU/Expansion
Unit/Remote Slave Used in any of the three columns, the power budget
will be exceeded. It will be unsafe to used this configuration and you will
need to restructure your I/O configuration.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

System Design and Configuration

4--11

Local I/O Expansion

  
430 440 450

The following I/O base configurations will assist you in understanding the options
available in the DL405 series. Local and expanded bases are the most common and
cost effective way of installing I/O. With local and expanded I/O the CPU can
automatically configure the I/O for you. Use Remote I/O when it is necessary to
locate I/O at distances away from the CPU. Remote I/O will require additional ladder
programming to operate.

Local Base and I/O The local base is the base in which the
CPU resides. Local I/O modules reside in
the same base as the CPU. For example,
placing 32 point modules in all eight slots
in an 8-slot base will use 256 I/O points .
The status of each I/O point is updated
each I/O scan of the CPU.
Local Expansion
Base and I/O

16pt
Input

8pt
Input

32pt 16pt
8pt
16pt
Input Output Output Output

X0 X20 X30 Y0 Y20 Y30

------X17 X27 X67 Y17 Y27 Y47

CPU

Use local expansion when you need more I/O points or a greater power budget than
the local base provides. The expansion bases require a Local Expansion Unit (in the
place of a CPU), and a cable (either D4--EXCBL--1 or D4--EXCBL--2) to connect to
the local CPU base. The CPU base is always the first base in the expansion chain.
The following figure shows one CPU base, two expansion bases and examples of
I/O numbering.

DL430/440: supports a
maximum of 3 expansion bases,
and maximum of 320 input
points and 320 output points
(includes local base I/O)

8pt
Input

Expansion cable
output connection

CPU

16pt
Input

8pt
Input

8pt
8pt
Output Output

16pt
Output

X0 X10 X30 Y0 Y10 Y20

------X07 X27 X37 Y07 Y17 Y37

Maxi. 3.05 ft (1M)

Expansion Base
16pt
Input

Expansion cable
input connection
Expansion cable
output connection

Maxi. 3.05 ft (1M)

EXP

16pt
Input

8pt
Input

32pt
Input

16pt
8pt
Output Output

8pt
Output

8pt
Output

X40 X60 X100 X110 Y40 Y60 Y70 Y100

--------X57 X77 X107 X147 Y57 Y67 Y77 Y107

Expansion Base
8pt
Input

Expansion cable
input connection

EXP

8pt
Input

16pt
Input

16pt
Input

16pt
Input

16pt
Output

X150 X160 X170 X210 X230 Y110

------X157 X167 X207 X227 X247 Y127

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edtition, Rev. A

System Design
and Configuration

DL450: supports a maximum

of 3 expansion bases, and
maximum of 1024 input points
and 1024 output points
(includes local base I/O)

Local Base

4--12

System Design and Configuration

Remote I/O Expansion

How to Add
Remote I/O
Channels
  
430 440 450

Remote I/O is useful for a system that has a sufficient number of sensors and other
field devices located a relative long distance away (up to 1000 meters, or 3050 feet)
from the more central location of the CPU. The methods of adding remote I/O are:
S DL430 / DL440 CPUs: Remote I/O requires a remote master module
(D4--RM) to be installed in the local CPU base. The CPU updates the
remote master, then the remote master handles all communication to
and from the remote I/O base by communicating to the remote slave
module (D4--RS) installed in each remote base.
S DL450 CPU: The CPUs comm port 3 features a built-in Remote I/O
channel. You may also use one or two D4--RM remote masters in the
local base as described above (can use either or both methods).
DL430

DL440

DL450

CPU built-in Remote I/O channels

none

none

Maximum I/O points supported by each channel

512

512

512

Maximum Remote I/O points supported

512

1024

1536

Maximum number of Remote Masters supported in

the local CPU base (1 channel per Remote Master)

System Design
and Configuration

Maximum number of remote I/O bases per channel

The use of Remote I/O does not limit the use of local expansion I/O discussed in the
previous section. In fact, Remote I/O point numbering is assignable. Depending on
the CPU scan time, remote I/O updates may be slower than local and expansion I/O,
due to the serial communications involved.
Remote I/O points map into different CPU memory locations than local/local
expansion I/O. So, the addition of remote I/O does not reduce the number of local I/O
points. Refer to the DL405 Remote I/O manual for details on remote I/O
configuration and numbering.
The following figure shows 1 CPU base, and one remote I/O channel with seven
remote bases. If the CPU is a DL450, adding the first remote I/O channel does not
require installing a remote master module (we use the CPUs built-in remote I/O
channel on port 3).
Remote I/O
-- 7 Bases per channel
-- 3280 ft. (1000m) Total distance

Expansion I/O
also available
CPU Base
R
M

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

System Design and Configuration

Configuring the
CPUs Remote
I/O Channel
  
430 440 450

4--13

This section describes how to configure the DL450s built-in remote I/O channel.
Additional information is in the Remote I/O manual, D4--REMIO--M, which you will
need in configuring the Remote slave units on the network. You can use the
D4--REMIO--M manual exclusively when using regular Remote Masters and
Remote Slaves for remote I/O in any DL405 system.
The DL450 CPUs built-in remote I/O channel has the same capability as a Remote
Master module, the D4--RM. Specifically, it can communicate with up to seven
remote bases containing a maximum of 512 I/O points, at a maximum distance of
1000 meters. If required, you can still use Remote Master modules in the local CPU
base (512 I/O points on each channel), for a total of three channels providing 1536
total remote I/O points. First, well need to set up the Remote I/O communications.
You may recall from the CPU specifications in Chapter 3 that the DL450s Port 3 is
capable of several protocols. To configure the port using the Handheld Programmer,
use AUX 56 and follow the prompts, making the same choices as indicated below on
this page. To configure the port in DirectSOFT, choose the PLC menu, then Setup >
Setup Secondary Comm Port.
S
S

Port: From the port number list box at the top, choose Port 3.
Protocol: Click the box to the left of Remote I/O to select it (called
M--NET on the HPP). The dialog shown below will appear.
3

Station Number: Choose 0 as the station number, which makes the

DL450 the master. Station numbers 1--7 are reserved for remote slaves.
Baud Rate: The baud rates 19200 and 38400 baud are available.
Choose 38400 initially as the remote I/O baud rate, and revert to 19200
baud if you experience data errors or noise problems on the link.
Important: You must configure the baud rate on the Remote Slaves (via
DIP switches) to match the baud rate selection for the CPUs Port 3.
Memory Address: Choose a V-memory address to use as the starting
location of a Remote I/O configuration table (V37700 is the default). This
table is separate and independent from the table for any Remote
Master(s) in the system.
Then click the button indicated to send the Port 3 configuration
to the CPU, and click Close.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edtition, Rev. A

System Design
and Configuration

4--14

System Design and Configuration

The next step is to make the connections between all devices on the Remote I/O link.
The location of the Port 3 on the DL450 is
on the 25-pin connector , as pictured to the
right. Remember that ports 1 and 3 are
logical ports that share the 25-pin
connector. Port 3 is an RS--422 nonisolated port. The pin assignments are:
Signal GND
S Pin 7
S Pin 12
TXD+
S Pin 13
TXD-S Pin 24
RXD+
S Pin 25
RXD--

Port 3
1

14

0V

TXD+
TXD--

13

25

RXD+
RXD--

Now we are ready to discuss wiring the DL450 to the remote slaves on the remote
base(s). The remote I/O link is a 3-wire, half-duplex type. Since Port 3 of the DL450
CPU is a 5-wire full duplex--capable port, we must jumper its transmit and receive
lines together as shown below (converts it to 3-wire, half-duplex).
DL450 CPU Port 3
Remote I/O Master

0V 7

Termination
Resistor
RXD+
RXD--

TXD+
TXD--

13

25

Remote I/O Slave

(end of chain)

Jumper

TXD+ / RXD+

TXD-- / RXD--

Signal GND

Recommended cable: Belden 9842 or equivalent

System Design
and Configuration

Remote I/O Slave

Internal
330 ohm
resistor

The twisted/shielded pair connects to the DL450 Port 3 as shown. Be sure to

connect the cable shield wire to the signal ground connection. A termination resistor
must be added externally to the CPU, as close as possible to the connector pins. Its
purpose is to minimize electrical reflections that occur over long cables. Be sure to
add the jumper at the last slave to connect the required internal termination resistor.
Ideally, the two termination resistors at the
cables opposite ends and the cables rated
impedance should match. For cable
impedances greater than 330 ohms, add a
series resistor at the last slave as shown to the
right. If less than 330 ohms, just parallel a
matching resistance across the slaves pins 1
and 2 instead. For example, to match the
termination resistance to Belden 9842, use a
120 ohm resistor across terminals 1 and 2.
Remember to size the termination resistor at
Port 3 to match. The resistance values should
be between 100 and 500 ohms.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Add series
external
resistor

T
1
2
3
G

Internal
330 ohm
resistor

System Design and Configuration

Configure Remote
I/O Slaves

4--15

After configuring the DL450 CPUs Port 3 and wiring it to the remote slave(s), use the
following checklist to complete the configuration of the remote slaves. Full
instructions for these steps are in the Remote I/O manual.
S Set the baud rate DIP switches to match CPUs Port 3 setting.
S Select a station address for each slave, from 1 to 7. Each device on the
remote link must have a unique station address. There can be only one
master (address 0) on the remote link.
If youre familiar with configuring remote bases, then youll recall the fixed table
location in V-memory (V7404--V7477) to configure up to two remote I/O channels.
However, we use a separate table for configuring the DL450 CPUs built-in remote
I/O channel. You will still need the table at V7404 to configure any Remote Master
modules.

Configuring the
Remote I/O Table

The beginning of the configuration table

for the built-in remote I/O channel is the
memory address we selected in the Port 3
setup.
The table consists of blocks of four words
which correspond to each slave in the
system, as shown to the right. The first
four table locations are reserved.
The CPU reads data from the table just
after powerup, interpreting the four data
words in each block with these meanings:
1. Starting address of slaves input data
2. Number of slaves input points
3. Starting address of outputs in slave
4. Number of slaves output points

37700

Remote I/O data

Reserved V37700
V37701
V37702
V37703

xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx

Slave 1 V37704
(or last V37705
slave)
V37706
V37707

xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx

V37734
V37735
V37736
V37737

0000
0000
0000
0000

Slave 7
(or last
slave)

DirectSOFT
SP0

LDA
O40000
OUT
V37704
LD
K16
OUT
V37705

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edtition, Rev. A

System Design
and Configuration

The table is 32 words long. If your system

has fewer than seven remote slave bases,
then the remainder of the table must be
filled with zeros. For example, a 3--slave
system will have a remote configuration
table containing 4 reserved words,12
words of data and 16 words of 0000.
A portion of the ladder program must
configure this table (just once) at powerup.
Use the LDA instruction as shown to the
right, to load an address to place in the
table. Use the regular LD constant to load
the number of the slaves input or output
points.
The D4--REMIO--M manual contains
thorough examples for configuring the
table at V7404, which you can adapt for
this table as well. The following page give
a shorter program example for one slave.

Memory Addr. Pointer

4--16

System Design and Configuration

Consider the simple system featuring Remote I/O shown below. The DL450s built-in
Remote I/O channel connects to one slave base, which we will assign a station
address=1. The baud rates on the master and slave will be 38400 kB.
We can map the remote I/O points as any type of I/O point, simply by choosing the
appropriate range of V-memory. Remember that on the DL450, you have both GX
and GY data types available. Since we have plenty of standard I/O addresses
available (X and Y), we will have the remote I/O points start at the next X and Y
addresses after the main base points (X60 and Y40, respectively).
Main Base with CPU as Master

Remote Slave Worksheet

1

Remote Base Address_________(Choose 1--7)

DL450
CPU

16

16

Port 3

16

X0-X17
V40400

16

16

X20-X37 X40-X57 Y0-Y17

V40401 V40402 V40500

Y20-Y37
V40501

Remote Slave

INPUT
Module
Name Input Addr.
No. Inputs
08ND3S
X060
8

08ND3S

08TD1

Y040

08TD1

Y050

Slot
Number

X070

OUTPUT
Output Addr.

No. Outputs

4
5
6

D4--RS
Slave

7
X060
Input Bit Start Address:________V-Memory
Address:V_______
40403
16
Total Input Points_____
Y040
40502
Output Bit Start Address:________V-Memory
Address:V_______

X60-X67 X70-X77 Y40-Y47 Y50-Y57

V40403 V40404 V40502 V40503

System Design
and Configuration

Remote I/O
Setup Program

Using the Remote Slave Worksheet

shown above can help organize our
system data in preparation for writing our
ladder program (a blank full-page copy of
this worksheet is in Appendix A of the
D4--REMIO--M manual for your use and
duplication). The four key parameters we
need to place in our Remote I/O
configuration table is in the lower right
corner of the worksheet. You can
determine the address values by using the
memory map given at the end of Chapter
3, CPU Specifications and Operation.
The program segment required to transfer
our worksheet results to the Remote I/O
configuration table is shown to the right.
Remember to use the LDA or LD
instructions appropriately.
The next page covers the remainder of the
required program to get this remote I/O
link up and running.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

16
Total Output Points_____

DirectSOFT
SP0

LDA
O40403
OUT
V37704
LD
K16
OUT
V37705
LDA
O40502
OUT
V37706
LD
K16
OUT
V37707

System Design and Configuration

When configuring a Remote I/O channel

for fewer than 7 slaves, we must fill the
remainder of the table with zeros. This is
necessary because the CPU will try to
interpret any non-zero number as slave
information.
We continue our setup program from the
previous page by adding a segment which
fills the remainder of the table with zeros.
The easiest way is the use the fill
command as shown. The example to the
right fills zeros for slave numbers 2--7,
which do not exist in our example system
(6 bases x 4 = 24 locations, = 18 hex).

4--17

DirectSOFT
LD
K18
LDA
O37710
FILL
K0
C740
SET

On the last rung in the example program above, we set a special relay contact C740.
This particular contact indicates to the CPU that the ladder program has just finished
specifying a remote I/O system. At that moment the CPU begins remote I/O
communications. Be sure to include this contact after any Remote I/O setup
program.
Remote I/O
Test Program

Now we can verify the remote I/O link and

setup program operation. A simple quick
check can be done with just one rung of
ladder, shown to the right. It connects the
first input of the remote base with the first
output. After placing the PLC in RUN
mode, we can go to the remote base and
activate its first input. Then its first output
should turn on.

DirectSOFT
X60

Y40
OUT

System Design
and Configuration
DL405 User Manual, 4th Edtition, Rev. A

4--18

System Design and Configuration

Network Connections to MODBUSR and DirectNET

Configuring
the CPUs
Comm Ports
  
430 440 450

This section describes how to configure the CPUs built-in networking ports. for
either MODBUS or DirectNET. This will allow you to connect the DL405 PLC system
directly to MODBUS networks using the RTU protocol, or to other devices on a
DirectNET network. MODBUS hosts system on the network must be capable of
issuing the MODBUS commands to read or write the appropriate data. For details on
the MODBUS protocol, please refer to the Gould MODBUS Protocol reference
Guide (P1--MBUS--300 Rev. B). In the event a more recent version is available,
check with your MODBUS supplier before ordering the documentation. For more
details on DirectNET, order our DirectNET manual, part number DA--DNET--M.
NOTE: For information about the MODBUS protocol see the Group Schneider
website at: www.schneiderautomation.com. At the main menu, select
Support/Services, Modbus Technical Manuals, PI--MBUS--300 Modbus Protocol
Reference Guide or search for PIMBUS300. For more information about DirectNET
protocol, order our DirectNET user manual, part number DA--DNET--M, or
download it free from our website: www.automationdirect.com. Select
Manuals/Docs > Online User Manuals > Misc. > DA--DNET--M.
The DL430 and DL440 can be DirectNET slaves on port 1. Both the DL450s Port 1
and Port 3 can operate as master or slave for both MODBUS and DirectNET. Port 1
has RS--232 and RS--422 signal levels available on separate pins, and Port 3
(DL450) uses RS--422 signal levels.
Ports 1 and Port 3 on the DL450 share the
25-pin D-shell connector, as shown to the
right. Connect one or both ports as shown
below.
Note
that
you
cannot
simultaneously use Port 1s RS--232
signals and its RS--422 signals.

System Design
and Configuration

Port 1

Port 3

DL430
DirectNET,
N/A
and
slave only
DL440
DirectNET or DirectNET or
DL450 MODBUS,
MODBUS,
master/slave master/slave

Port 3

Port 1

1
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
0V
RXD+
RXD-CTS+

TXD+

14

TXD-RTS-RTS+

0V

CTS-TXD+
TXD--

13

25

RXD+
RXD--

NOTE: The recommended cable for RS--232 or RS--422 is Belden 8102 or

equivalent.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

4--19

System Design and Configuration

You will need to determine whether the network connection is a 3-wire RS--232 type,
or a 5-wire RS--422 type. Normally, we use RS--232 signals for shorter distances (15
meters max), for communications between just two devices. Use RS--422 signals for
longer distances (1000 meters max.), and for multi-drop networks (from 2 to 248
devices). Be sure to use termination resistors at the both ends of RS--422 network
wiring, matching the impedance rating of the cable (between 100 and 500 ohms).
NOTE: If your DL405 is to be used as a MODBUS Master and the distance will be
more than 1000 feet, you can use the MODBUS Network Master module,
F4--MAS--MB, and use the RS--485 port. See the module on our website,
www.automationdirect.com for more details.

RS--422
Network
Master

RXD+
RXD-TXD+
TXD-Signal GND

TXD
RXD

RS--232C
Point-to-point
Signal GND

PORT 1
RS--232C

PORT 1
RS--422

PORT 3
RS--422

2
3
4
5
7

14 TXD+
16 TXD-9 RXD+
10 RXD-18 RTS-19 RTS+
11 CTS+
23 CTS-7 0V

12
13
24
25
7

TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
0V

TXD+
TXD-RXD+
RXD-0V

RS--422
Network
Slaves

System Design
and Configuration
DL405 User Manual, 4th Edtition, Rev. A

4--20

System Design and Configuration

MODBUS Port
Configuration
  
430 440 450

In DirectSOFT, choose the PLC menu, then Setup > Secondary Comm Port.
S Port: From the port number list box at the top, choose Port 1 or 3.
S Protocol: Click the box to the left of MODBUS to select it (use AUX 56
on the HPP, and select MBUS). The dialog below will appear.

S
S

System Design
and Configuration

S
S

Timeout: amount of time the port will wait after it sends a message to
get a response before logging an error.
RTS on delay time: the amount of time the port waits to send a
message after its ready to send. For port 1, it activates the RTS line
before it begins transmitting (assuming CTS is already active). The port
will not transmit if the CTS input is false.
Station Number: For making the CPU port a MODBUSR master,
choose 1. The possible range for MODBUS slave numbers is from 1 to
247, but the DL450 network instructions will access only slaves 1 to 90.
Each slave must have a unique number. At powerup, the port is
automatically a slave, unless and until the DL450 executes ladder logic
network instructions which use the port as a master. Thereafter, the port
reverts back to slave mode until ladder logic uses the port again.
Baud Rate: The available baud rates include 300, 600, 900, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19200, and 38400 baud. Choose a higher baud rate initially,
reverting to lower baud rates if you experience data errors or noise
problems on the network. Important: You must configure the baud rates
of all devices on the network to the same value. Refer to the appropriate
product manual for details.
Stop Bits: Choose 1 or 2 stop bits for use in the protocol.
Parity: Choose none, even, or odd parity for error checking.
Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to
the CPU, and click Close.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

System Design and Configuration

DirectNET Port
Configuration
  
430 440 450

4--21

In DirectSOFT, choose the PLC menu, then Setup > Secondary Comm Port.
S Port: From the port number list box, choose Port 1 or 3 (DL450 only).
S Protocol: Click the box to the left of DirectNET to select it (use AUX 56
on the HPP, then select DNET). The dialog below will appear.

S
S

S
S
S

Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to

the CPU, and click Close.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edtition, Rev. A

System Design
and Configuration

Timeout: amount of time the port will wait after it sends a message to
get a response before logging an error.
RTS delay time: the amount of time the port waits to send a message
after its ready to send. For port 1, it activates the RTS line before it
begins transmitting (assuming CTS is already active). The port will not
transmit if the CTS input is false.
Station Number: For making the CPU port a DirectNET master,
choose 1. The allowable range for DIrectNET slaves is from 1 to 90
(each slave must have a unique number). At powerup, the port is
automatically a slave, unless and until the DL450 executes ladder logic
instructions which attempt to use the port as a master. Thereafter, the
port reverts back to slave mode until ladder logic uses the port again.
Baud Rate: The available baud rates include 300, 600, 900, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19200, and 38400 baud. Choose a higher baud rate initially,
reverting to lower baud rates if you experience data errors or noise
problems on the network. Important: You must configure the baud rates
of all devices on the network to the same value.
Stop Bits: Choose 1 or 2 stop bits for use in the protocol.
Parity: Choose none, even, or odd parity for error checking.
Format: Choose between hex or ASCII formats.

4--22

System Design and Configuration

Network Slave Operation

This section describes how other devices on a network can communicate with a CPU
port that you have configured as a DirectNETslave or MODBUS slave (DL450). A
MODBUS host must use the MODBUS RTU protocol to communicate with the DL450
as a slave. The host software must send a MODBUS function code and MODBUS
address to specify a PLC memory location the DL450 comprehends. The DirectNET
host just uses normal I/O addresses to access any DL405 CPU and system. No CPU
ladder logic is required to support either MODBUS slave or DirectNET slave operation.
MODBUS Function The MODBUS function code determines whether the access is a read or a write, and
Codes Supported whether to access a single data point or a group of them. The DL450 supports the
MODBUS function codes described below.
  
  

430 440 450

430 440 450

MODBUS
Function Code
01

Read a group of coils

Y, CR, T, CT, GY

02

Read a group of inputs

X, SP, GX

05 (slave only)

Set / Reset a single coil

Y, CR, T, CT

Set / Reset a group of coils

Y, CR, T, CT

15
03, 04

Read a value from one or more registers V

06 (slave only)
16

MODBUS Data
Types Supported

Write a value into a single register

Write a value into a group of registers

The memory types in a DL405 system include X input, Y output, C control relay, V
memory data registers, etc. MODBUS uses differently named data types. So, you
will need to determine which MODBUS data type corresponds to any desired PLC
memory location by using the cross-reference table below.

DL450 Memory Type

System Design
and Configuration

DL405 Data Types

Available

Function

Quantity
(Decimal)

PLC Range
(Octal)

Corresponding
MODBUS Data Type

Rx Function
Code

Inputs (X)

1024

X0 -- X1777

Input

02

Global Inputs (GX)

1536

GX0 -- GX2777

Input

02

Special Relays (SP)

512

SP0 -- SP137
SP320 -- SP717

Input

02

Outputs (Y)

1024

Y0 -- Y1777

Coil

01

Global Outputs (GY)

1536

GY0 -- GY2777

Coil

01

Control Relays (CR)

2048

C0 -- C3777

Coil

01

Timer Contacts (T)

256

T0 -- T377

Coil

01

Counter Contacts (CT)

256

CT0 -- CT377

Coil

01

Stage Status Bits (S)

1024

S0 -- S1777

Coil

01

Timer Current Values (V)

256

V0 -- V377

Input Register

03

Counter Current Value (V)

256

V1000 -- V1377

Input Register

03

V--Memory, user data (V)

3072
12288

V1400 -- V7377
V10000 -- V37777

Holding Register

03

V700 -- V777
V7400 -- V7777

Holding Register

03

V--Memory, system (V)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

320

System Design and Configuration

Determining the
MODBUS Address

4--23

There are typically two ways that most host software conventions allow you to
specify a PLC memory location. These are:
S By specifying the MODBUS data type and address
S By specifying a MODBUS address only.

If Your Host Software Many host software packages allow you to specify the MODBUS data type and the
Requires the Data
MODBUS address that corresponds to the PLC memory location. This is the easiest
Type and Address... method, but not all packages allow you to do it this way. The various MODBUS data

types were presented earlier, but they have been included again in the following
table.

The actual equation used to calculate the address depends on the type of PLC data
you are using. The PLC memory types are split into two categories for this purpose.
S Discrete -- X, SP, Y, CR, S, T, C (contacts)
S Word -- V, Timer current value, Counter current value
In either case, you basically just convert the PLC octal address to decimal and add
the appropriate MODBUS address (if required). The table below shows the exact
equation used for each group of data.

DL450 Memory Type

QTY
(Dec.)

For Discrete Data Types .... Convert PLC Addr. to Dec.

Inputs (X)

1024

Special Relays (SP)

512

Outputs (Y)

MODBUS
Address Range
(Decimal)

PLC Range
(Octal)
+

Start of Range

MODBUS
Data Type
+ Data Type

--

X1777

2048

--

3071

Input

SP0
SP320

---

SP137
SP717

3072
3280

---

3167
3535

Input

1024

Y0

--

Y1777

2048

--

3071

Coil

Control Relays (CR)

2048

C0

--

C3777

3072

--

5119

Coil

Timer Contacts (T)

256

T0

--

T377

6144

--

6399

Coil

Counter Contacts (CT)

256

CT0

--

CT377

6400

--

6655

Coil

Stage Status Bits (S)

1024

S0

--

S1777

5120

--

6143

Coil

Global Inputs (GX) *

1536

GX0

--

GX2777

--

1535

Input

Global Outputs (GY) *

1536

GY0

--

GY2777

--

1535

Coil

For Word Data Types ....

Timer Current Values (V)

Convert PLC Addr. to Dec.

256

V0

--

V377

Counter Current Values (V) 256

V1000

--

V--Memory, user data (V)

3072
12288

V--Memory, system (V)

320

Data Type

--

255

Input Register

V1377

512

--

767

Input Register

V1400 -V10000 --

V7377
V37777

768
4096

---

3839
16383

Holding Register

V700
V7400

V777
V7777

448
3480

---

768
3735

Holding Register

---

* Note: The total of GX and GY global I/O points cannot exceed 1536 points.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edtition, Rev. A

System Design
and Configuration

X0

4--24

System Design and Configuration

The following examples show how to generate the MODBUS address and data type
for hosts which require this format.

Example 1: V2100

Find the MODBUS address for User V

location V2100.
1. Find V--memory in the table.
2. Convert V2100 into decimal (1088).
3. Use the MODBUS data type from the table.
V--Memory, user data (V)

Example 2: Y20

System Design
and Configuration

V1400
-V7377
V10000--V37777

1024

Y0

--

Y1777

Find the MODBUS address to obtain the

current value from Timer T10.
1. Find Timer Current Values in the table.
2. Convert T10 into decimal (8).
3. Use the MODBUS data type from the table.
Timer Current Values (V)

Example 4: C54

V2100 = 1088 decimal

1088 + Hold. Reg. = Holding Reg. 1088

768
4096

---

3839
16383

Holding Register

Find the MODBUS address for output Y20.

PLC Addr. (Dec) + Start Addr. + Data Type
1. Find Y outputs in the table.
Y20 = 16 decimal
2. Convert Y20 into decimal (16).
16 + 2048 + Coil =
Coil 2064
3. Add the starting address for the range
(2048).
4. Use the MODBUS data type from the table.
Outputs (Y)

Example 3: T10
Current Value

3072
12288

PLC Address (Dec.) + Data Type

256

V0

--

2048

--

3071

Coil

PLC Address (Dec.) + Data Type

T10 = 8 decimal
8 + Input Reg. = Input Reg. 8

V377

--

255

Input Register

Find the MODBUS address for Control Relay PLC Addr. (Dec) + Start Addr. +Data Type
C54.
C54 = 44 decimal
1. Find Control Relays in the table.
44 + 3072 + Coil = Coil 3116
2. Convert C54 into decimal (44).
3. Add the starting address for the range
(3072).
4. Use the MODBUS data type from the table.
Control Relays (CR)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

2048

C0

--

C3777

3072

--

5119

Coil

System Design and Configuration

If Your MODBUS
Host Software
Requires an
Address ONLY

4--25

Some host software does not allow you to specify the MODBUS data type and
address. Instead, you specify an address only. This method requires another step to
determine the address, but its still fairly simple. Basically, MODBUS also separates
the data types by address ranges as well. So this means an address alone can
actually describe the type of data and location. This is often referred to as adding the
offset. One important thing to remember here is that two different addressing
modes may be available in your host software package. These are:
S 484 Mode
S 584/984 Mode
We recommend that you use the 584/984 addressing mode if your host
software allows you to choose. This is because the 584/984 mode allows access
to a higher number of memory locations within each data type. If your software only
supports 484 mode, then there may be some PLC memory locations that will be
unavailable. The actual equation used to calculate the address depends on the type
of PLC data you are using. The PLC memory types are split into two categories for
this purpose.
S Discrete -- X, GX, SP, Y, CR, S, T (contacts), C (contacts)
S Word -- V, Timer current value, Counter current value
In either case, you basically just convert the PLC octal address to decimal and add
the appropriate MODBUS addresses (as required). The table below shows the exact
equation used for each group of data.
DISCRETE DATA TYPES

Memory Type
Global Inputs (GX)
Inputs (X)

PLC Range
(Octal)
GX0

--

GX1746

GX1747 --

GX3777

Address
(484 Mode)
1001

--

1999

Address (584/984
Mode)

Data Type

10001

--

10999

Input

------

11000

--

12048

Input

--

X1777

------

12049

--

13072

Input

Special Relays (SP)

SP0

--

SP777

------

13073

--

13584

Input

Global Outputs (GY)

GY0

--

GY3777

Outputs (Y)

Y0

--

Control Relays (CR)

C0

Timer Contacts (T)

Counter Contacts (CT)
Stage Status Bits (S)

--

2048

--

2048

Output

Y1777

2049

--

3072

2049

--

3072

Output

--

C3777

3073

--

5120

3073

--

5120

Output

T0

--

T377

6145

--

6400

6145

--

6400

Output

CT0

--

CT377

6401

--

6656

6401

--

6656

Output

S0

--

S1777

5121

--

6144

5121

--

6144

Output

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edtition, Rev. A

System Design
and Configuration

X0

4--26

System Design and Configuration

WORD DATA TYPES

PLC Range
(Octal)

Registers
V--memory (Timers)

Input/Holding
(484 Mode)*

Input/Holding
(585/984 Mode)*

V0

--

V377

3001/4001

30001/40001

V--memory (Counters)

V1000

--

V1177

3513/4513

30513/40513

V--memory (Data Words)

V1200

-- V1377

3641/4641

30641/40641

V--memory (Data Words)

V1400

-- V1746

3769/4769

30769/40769

V--memory (Data Words)

V1747

-- V1777

------

31000/41000

V--memory (Data Words)

V2000

-- V7377

------

41025

V--memory (Data Words)

V10000 -- V17777

------

44097

*MODBUS: Function 04 (New feature)

The DL450 will support function 04 read input register (Address 30001). To use
function 04, put the number 4 into the most significant position (4xxx). Four digits
must be entered for the instruction to work properly with this mode.
LD
K101
LD
K4128
LDA
O4000

The Maximum constant possible is 4128.

This is due to the 128 maximum number of
Bytes that the RX/WX instruction can
allow. The value of 4 in the most significant
position of the word will cause the RX to
use function 04 (30001 range).

System Design
and Configuration

RX
Y0

1. Refer to the Memory Mapping section of this manual for the correct memory
mapping size. Some of the addresses shown above might not pertain to your CPU.
2. For an automated MODBUS/Koyo address conversion utility, download the file
modbus_conversion.xls from our website, www.automationdirect.com.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

System Design and Configuration

4--27

Example 1: V2100
584/984 Mode

Find the MODBUS address for User V

location V2100.
1. Find V--memory in the table.
2. Convert V2100 into decimal (1088).
3. Add the MODBUS starting address for the
mode (40001).

Example 2: Y20
584/984 Mode

Find the MODBUS address for output Y20.

PLC Addr. (Dec) + Start Address + Mode
1. Find Y outputs in the table.
Y20 = 16 decimal
2. Convert Y20 into decimal (16).
16 + 2048 + 1 = 2065
3. Add the starting address for the range
(2048).
4. Add the MODBUS address for the mode
(1).

Example 3: T10
Current Value
484 Mode

Find the MODBUS address to obtain the

current value from Timer T10.
1. Find Timer Current Values in the table.
2. Convert T10 into decimal (8).
3. Add the MODBUS starting address for the
mode (3001).

Example 4: C54
584/984 Mode

Find the MODBUS address for Control Relay PLC Addr. (Dec) + Start Address + Mode
C54.
C54 = 44 decimal
1. Find Control Relays in the table.
44 + 3072 + 1 = 3117
2. Convert C54 into decimal (44).
3. Add the starting address for the range
(3072).
4. Add the MODBUS address for the mode
(1).

PLC Address (Dec.) + Mode Address

V2100 = 1088 decimal
1088 + 40001 = 41089

PLC Address (Dec.) + Mode Address

TA10 = 8 decimal
8 + 3001 = 3009

System Design
and Configuration

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edtition, Rev. A

4--28

System Design and Configuration

Network Master Operation

  
430 440 450

This section describes how the DL450 can communicate on a MODBUS or DirectNET
network as a master. For MODBUS networks, it uses the MODBUS RTU protocol,
which must be interpreted by all the slaves on the network. Since MODBUS and
DirectNET are master / slave networks, the master station must initiate requests for
network data transfers. This section teaches you how to design the required ladder
logic for network master operation.
Master

Slave #1

Slave #2

Slave #3

System Design
and Configuration

MODBUS RTU Protocol, or DirectNET

When using the DL450 CPU as the master

station, you use simple RLL instructions to
initiate the requests. The WX instruction
initiates network write operations, and the
RX instruction initiates network read
operations. Before executing either the
WX or RX commands, we will need to load
data related to the read or write operation
onto the CPUs accumulator stack. When
the WX or RX instruction executes, it uses
the information on the stack combined
with data in the instruction box to
completely define the task, which goes to
the port.
Its possible to use both Port 1 and Port 3
for either MODBUS or DirectNET, and to
use either or both as masters. You must
tell the WX and RX instructions the
intended port for each communications
transaction.

Master

Slave
WX (write)
RX (read)
Network

Network 1
Network 2

To summarize, the RLL instructions identify the following items.

1. Port number on the master (Port 1 or 3), and the slave station address. (LD
instruction)
2. Amount of data (in bytes) you want to transfer. (LD instruction)
3. Area of memory to be used by the master. (LDA instruction)
4. Area of CPU V-memory to be used in communication with the slave, and
whether it is a write or read operation. (WX or RX instruction)
5. Interlocks for communication timing for multiple WX and RX routines.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

System Design and Configuration

Step 1:
Identify Master
Port # and Slave #

Step 2:
Load Number of
Bytes to Transfer

The first Load (LD) instruction identifies

the communications port number on the
network master (DL450) and the address
of the slave station. This instruction can
address up to 90 MODBUS slaves, or 90
DirectNET slaves. The format of the word
is shown to the right. The F in the upper
nibble tells the CPU the port is internal to
the CPU (and not in a slot in the base). The
second nibble indicates the port number, 1
or 3. The lower byte contains the slave
address number in BCD (01 to 90).
The second Load (LD) instruction
determines the number of bytes which will
be transferred between the master and
slave in the subsequent WX or RX
instruction. The value to be loaded is in
BCD format (decimal), from 1 to 128
bytes.

4--29

Slave address (BCD)

Port number (BCD)
Internal port (hex)
LD
KF101

(BCD)

# of bytes to transfer
LD
K128

The number of bytes specified also depends on the type of data you want to obtain.
For example, the DL405 Input points can be accessed by V-memory locations or as
X input locations. However, if you only want X0 -- X27, youll have to use the X input
data type because the V-memory locations can only be accessed in 2-byte
increments. The following table shows the byte ranges for the various types of
DirectLOGIC products.
DL 205 / 405 Memory

Bytes

V--memory
T / C current value

16
16

2
2

Inputs (X, GX, SP)

Outputs
(Y, C, Stage, T/C bits)

Scratch Pad Memory

Diagnostic Status

Bits per unit

Bytes

Data registers
T / C accumulator

8
16

1
2

I/O, internal relays, shift register

bits, T/C bits, stage bits

Scratch Pad Memory

Diagnostic Status(5 word R/W)

16

10

DL305 Memory

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edtition, Rev. A

System Design
and Configuration

Bits per unit

4--30

System Design and Configuration

The third instruction in the RX or WX

sequence is a Load Address (LDA)
instruction. Its purpose is to load the
starting address of the memory area to be
transferred. Entered as an octal number,
the LDA instruction converts it to hex and
places the result in the accumulator.
For a WX instruction, the DL450 CPU
sends the number of bytes previously
specified from its memory area beginning
at the LDA address specified.
For an RX instruction, the DL450 CPU
reads the number of bytes previously
specified from the slave, placing the
received data into its memory area
beginning at the LDA address specified.

Step 3:
Specify Master
Memory Area

(octal)

Starting address of
master transfer area
LDA
O40600

MSB

V40600

LSB

15

MSB

V40601

LSB

15

NOTE: Since V--memory words are always 16 bits, you may not always use the
whole word. For example, if you only specify 3 bytes and you are reading Y outputs
from the slave, you will only get 24 bits of data. In this case, only the 8 least significant
bits of the last word location will be modified. The remaining 8 bits are not affected.
The last instruction in our sequence is the
WX or RX instruction itself. Use WX to
write to the slave, and RX to read from the
slave. All four of our instructions are
shown to the right. In the last instruction,
you must specify the starting address and
a valid data type for the slave.
The RX instruction reads data from the
slave starting at the address specified.
The WX instruction writes data to the slave
starting at the address specified.

System Design
and Configuration

Step 4:
Specify Slave
Memory Area

S
S
S

SP112

LD
KF101
LD
K128
LDA
O40600
RX
Y0

DirectNET slaves -- specify the same address in the WX and RX

instruction as the slaves native I/O address
MODBUS DL405 or DL205 slaves -- specify the same address in the
WX and RX instruction as the slaves native I/O address
MODBUS 305 slaves -- use the following table to convert DL305
addresses to MODBUS addresses

DL305 Series CPU Memory Type--to--DL405 Series CPU Memory

PLC Memory type

305 base
address

405 base
addr.

PLC Memory Type

305 base
address

405 base
addr.

TMR/CNT Current Values

R600

V0

TMR/CNT Status Bits

CT600

GY600

I/O Points

IO 000

GY0

Control Relays

CR160

GY160

Data Registers

R401,
R400

V100

Shift Registers

SR400

GY400

Stage Status Bits (D3--330P only)

S0

GY200

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

4--31

System Design and Configuration

Communications
from a
Ladder Program

In some applications, the DL450 CPU as a

network master will communicate only
periodically to slaves(s) on the network.
However, most applications will probably
want to make a continuous update of
memory areas from a slave to the master.
This normally means starting the task on
each PLC SCAN. However, a single WX
or RX network communication will
probably last longer than one PLC scan
time. And we must wait before executing
another RX or WX until the port has
finished transmitting the previous WX or
RX data.

Port Communication Error

SP113

Y1
SET

SP112

LD
KF101
LD
K0003

Port Busy

LDA
O40600
RX
Y0

Each port which can be a master has two Special Relay contacts associated with it
(see Appendix D for comm port special relays).One indicates Port busy, and the
other indicates Port Communication Error. The example above shows the use of
these contacts for a network master that only reads a device (RX). The Port Busy
contact ensures one network transaction finishes before we begin another.
Use of the communication error SP relay is optional. If used, be sure to place it at the
beginning of the communication routines, because a comm error relay is always
reset (turned off) whenever an RX or WX instruction using the same port executes.
Multiple Read and
Write Interlocks

Interlocking Relay
SP112 C100

LD
KF101
LD
K0003
LDA
O40600

Interlocking
Relay
SP112 C100

RX
Y0
C100
SET
LD
KF101
LD
K0003
LDA
O40400
WX
Y0
C100
RST

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edtition, Rev. A

System Design
and Configuration

If youre using multiple reads and writes in

the RLL program, you have to interlock
the routines to make sure all the routines
are executed. If you dont use the
interlocks, then the CPU will only execute
the first routine. This is because each port
can only handle one transaction at a time.
In the example to the right, after the RX
instruction is executed, C0 is set. When
the port has finished the communication
task, the second routine is executed and
C0 is reset.
If youre using RLL PLUS Stage
Programing, you can just put each routine
in a separate program stage to ensure
proper execution. In most cases, RLL PLUS
is a much more efficient way to create an
automation program.
The DirectNET manual provides a
master/slave example with both RLL and
Stage program descriptions (they are
easily adapted for use with MODBUS).

Standard RLL
Instructions

15

In This Chapter. . . .
Introduction
Boolean Instructions
Comparative Boolean Instructions
Immediate Instructions
Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions
Accumulator / Data Stack and Output Instructions
Accumulator Logic Instructions
Math Instructions
Bit Operation Instructions
Number Conversion Instructions
Table Instructions
Clock / Calender Instructions
CPU Control Instructions
Program Control Instructions
Interrupt Instructions
Intelligent I/O Instructions
Network Instructions
Message Instructions

5--2

Standard RLL Instructions

Introduction
The DL405 instruction set can perform many different types of operations. This chapter
shows you how to use these individual instructions. The following table provides a quick
reference listing of the instruction mnemonic and the page(s) defining the instruction. Each
instruction definition will show in parentheses the HPP keystrokes used to enter the
instruction. There are two ways to locate instructions:

If you know the instruction category (Boolean, Comparative Boolean, etc.), just
use the header at the top of the page to find the pages that discuss the
instructions in that category.

If you know the individual instruction mnemonic, use the following table.

The DL450 provides all of the instructions in the table, the

DL440 provides a subset, and the DL430 a smaller
subset. The instruction definitions indicate which CPUs
feature the instruction. In Example 1, only the DL440 and
DL450 have the instruction. In Example 2, all CPUs have
the instruction.

Example 1

Example 2

  

  

430 440 450

430 440 450

If you are using a DL450 PLC (with firmware v3.30 or later) with DirectSOFT5 programming
software, you can also use the IBox instructions covered in the DL405--IBOX--S Supplement.

Standard
RLL Instructions

Instruction

Page

ACON

5--196

ACOSR

5--119

ADD

5--87

ADDB

5--99

ADDBD

5--100

ADDBS

5--113

ADDD

5--88

ADDF

5--105

ADDR

5--89

ADDS

5--109

AND

5--14, 5--31,
5--70

Instruction

Page

Instruction

Page

5--16, 5--118

DEGR

5--134

ASINR

5--118

DISI

5--186

ATANR

5--119

DIV

5--96

ATH

5--135

DIVB

5--104

ATT

5--159

DIVBS

5--116

BCALL

7--27

DIVD

5--97

BCD

5--129

DIVF

5--108

DIVR

5--98

DIVS

5--112

DLBL

5--196

DRUM

6--15

EDRUM

6--18

ENCO

5--126

END

5--177

ENI

5--186

FAULT

5--195

FDGT

5--144

FILL

5--142

FIND

5--143

ANDSTR

BCDCPL

5--131

BEND

7--27

BIN

5--128

BLK

7--27

ANDD

5--71

BREAK

5--178

ANDND

5--23

BTOR

5--132

ANDS

5--73

CMP

5--82

CMPD

5--83

CMPF

5--84

CMPR

5--86

CMPS

5--85

CNT

5--47

FINDB

5--173

COSR

5--118

FOR

5--180

CV

7--25

GOTO

5--179

5--15

CVJMP

7--25

GRAY

5--139

ANDNE

5--28

DATE

5--175

GTS

5--181

ANDNI

5--34

DEC

5--117

HISTRY

5--197

ANDPD

5--23

DECB

5--120

HTA

5--136

ANDS

5--73

DECO

5--127

INC

5--117

ANDSTR

5--16

ANDB

5--15

ANDD

5--71

ANDE

5--28

ANDF

5--72

ANDI

5--34

ANDMOV

5--171

ANDN

5--14, 5--31

ANDNB

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--3

Standard RLL Instructions

Instruction

Page

Instruction

Page

Instruction

Page

INCB

5--120

ORND

5--22

SGCNT

5--49

INT

5--185

ORNE

5--27

SHFL

5--122

INV

5--130

ORNI

5--33

SHFR

5--123

IRT

5--186

OROUT

5--19

SINR

5--118

IRTC

5--186

OROUTI

5--35

SQRTR

5--119

ISG

7--24

ORPD

5--22

SR

5--53

JMP

7--24

ORS

5--77

STOP

5--177

LBL

5--179

ORSTR

5--16

STR

5--10, 5--29

LD

5--59

5--17, 5--65

5--11

5--61

OUT

STRB

LDA

5--59

5--18

5--26

LDD

OUTB

STRE

5--65

5--32

5--60

OUTD

STRI

LDF

5--37

5--66

5--10, 5--29

LDI

OUTF

STRN

5--35, 5--39

5--11

5--38

OUTI

STRNB

LDIF

STRND

5--21

LDLBL

5--162

STRNE

5--26

LDR

5--64

STRNI

5--32

LDSX

5--63

STRPD

5--21

LDX

5--62

STT

5--153

MDRMD

6--21

SUB

5--90

MDRMW

6--24

SUBB

5--101

MLR

SUBBD

5--102

SUBBS

5--114

SUBD

5--91

SUBF

5--106

SUBR

5--92

SUBS

5--110

SUM

5--121

SWAP

5--174

TANR

5--118

TIME

5--176

TMR

5--42

5--40

OUTL

5--68

OUTM

5--68

OUTX

5--67

PAUSE

5--20

PD

5--20

5--183

POP

5--69

MLS

5--183

PRINT

5--201

MOV

5--146

RADR

5--134

MOVMC

5--162

RD

5--189

MUL

5--93

RFB

5--150

MULB

5--103

RFT

5--156

MULBS

5--115

ROTL

5--124

MULD

5--94

ROTR

5--125

MULF

5--107

RST

5--24

MULR

5--95

RSTB

5--25

MULS

5--111

RSTBIT

5--167

NCON

5--197

RSTI

5--36

NEXT

5--180

TMRA

5--44

RSTWT

5--178

NJMP

7--24

TMRAF

5--44

RT

5--181

NOP

5--177

TMRF

5--42

RTC

5--181

NOT

5--19

TSHFL

5--169

RTOB

5--133

OR

5--12, 5--30,
5--74

TSHFR

5--169

RX

5--191

TTD

5--147

5--13

SBR

5--181

UDC

5--51

5--75

SEG

5--138

WT

5--190

ORE

5--27

SET

5--24

WX

5--192

ORF

5--76

SETB

5--25

XOR

5--78

ORI

5--33

SETBIT

5--167

XORD

5--79

ORMOV

5--171

SETI

5--36

XORF

5--80

ORN

5--12, 5--30

SFLDGT

5--140

XORMOV

5--171

ORNB

5--13

SG

7--23

XORS

5--81

ORB
ORD

Standard
RLL Instructions

OUTIF

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--4

Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions

Using Boolean Instructions

Do you ever wonder why so many PLC manufacturers always quote the scan time
for a 1K boolean program? Most all programs utilize many Boolean instructions.
These are typically very simple instructions designed to join input and output
contacts in various series and parallel combinations. Our DirectSOFT software is a
similar program; therefore, you dont necessarily have to know the instruction
mnemonics in order to develop your program. However, knowledge of mnemonics
will be helpful whenever it becomes necessary to troubleshoot the program using a
handheld programmer (HPP).
Many of the instructions in this chapter are not program instructions used in
DirectSOFT, but are implied. In other words, they are not actually keyboard
commands, however, they can be seen in a Mnemonic View of the program once
the DirectSOFT program has been developed and accepted (compiled). Each
instruction listed in this chapter will have a box to indicate how the instruction is used
with DirectSOFT and the HPP. The box will either contain IMP for implied, a  for
used or an  for not used. The abbreviation, DS, or HPP will appear beneath the
appropriate box as shown below.
IMP
DS

END Statement


HPP


DS

DL405 programs require an END statement (coil) as the last instruction. This tells
the CPU this is the end of the program. Normally, any instructions placed after the
END statement will not be executed. There are exceptions to this such as interrupt
routines, etc. Chapter 5 discusses the instruction set in detail.
X0

Y0

All programs must have

and END statement

OUT
END

Simple Rungs

You use a contact to start rungs that contain both contacts and coils. The boolean
instruction that does this is called a Store or, STR instruction. The output point is
represented by the Output or, OUT instruction. The following example shows how to
enter a single contact and a single output coil.
DirectSOFT Example
X0

Handheld Mnemonics
Y0

Standard
RLL Instructions

OUT
END

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

STR X0
OUT Y0
END

Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions
Normally Closed
Contact

5--5

Normally closed contacts are also very common. This is accomplished with the
Store Not or, STRN instruction. The following example shows a simple rung with a
normally closed contact.
DirectSOFT Example

Handheld Mnemonics

X0

Y0
OUT

STRN X0
OUT Y0
END

END

Contacts in Series

Use the AND instruction to join two or more contacts in series. The following
example shows two contacts in series and a single output coil. The instructions used
would be STR X0, AND X1, followed by OUT Y0.
DirectSOFT Example
X0

Handheld Mnemonics

X1

Y0
OUT

STR X0
AND X1
OUT Y0
END

END

Midline Outputs

Sometimes it is necessary to use midline outputs to get additional outputs that are
conditional on other contacts. The following example shows how you can use the
AND instruction to continue a rung with more conditional outputs.
DirectSOFT Example
X0

Handheld Mnemonics

X1

Y0
OUT
X2

Y1
OUT
X3

Y2

STR X0
AND X1
OUT Y0
AND X2
OUT Y1
AND X3
OUT Y2
END

OUT

END

Standard
RLL Instructions
DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--6

Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions

Parallel Elements

You also have to join contacts in parallel. The OR instruction allows you to do this.
The following example shows two contacts in parallel and a single output coil. The
instructions would be STR X0, OR X1, followed by OUT Y0.
DirectSOFT Example

X0

Y0
OUT

X1

Handheld Mnemonics
STR X0
OR X1
OUT Y0
END

END

Joining Series
Branches in
Parallel

Quite often it is necessary to join several groups of series elements in parallel. The
Or Store (ORSTR) instruction allows this operation. The following example shows a
simple network consisting of series elements joined in parallel.
DirectSOFT Example
X0

X1

Handheld Mnemonics
Y0
OUT

X2

X3
END

STR X0
AND X1
STR X2
AND X3
ORSTR
OUT Y0
END

Quite often it is also necessary to join one or more parallel branches in series. The
Joining Parallel
Branches in Series And Store (ANDSTR) instruction allows this operation. The following example
shows a simple network with contact branches in series with parallel contacts.
DirectSOFT Example
X0

X1

Handheld Mnemonics
Y0
OUT

X2

Standard
RLL Instructions

END

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

STR X0
STR X1
OR X2
ANDSTR
OUT Y0
END

5--7

Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions
Combination
Networks

You can combine the various types of series and parallel branches to solve most any
application problem. The following example shows a simple combination network.
X0

X2

X5

Y0
OUT

X1

X3

X4

X6

END

Comparative
Boolean

Handheld Mnemonics
STR X0
OR X1
STR X2
STR X3
ANDN X4
ORSTR
AND X5
ORN X6
ANDSTR
OUT Y0

The Comparative Boolean evaluates two 4-digit BCD/hex values using boolean
contacts. The valid evaluations are: equal to, not equal to, equal to or greater than,
and less than.
In the following example when the value in
V-memory location V1400 is equal to the
constant BCD value 1234, Y3 will
energize.

V1400

K1234

Y3
OUT

Standard
RLL Instructions
DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--8

Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions

Boolean Stack

There are limits to how many elements you can include in a rung. This is because the
DL405 CPUs use an 8-level boolean stack to evaluate the various logic elements.
The boolean stack is a temporary storage area that solves the logic for the rung.
Each time you enter a STR instruction, the instruction is placed on the top of the
boolean stack. Any other STR instructions on the boolean stack are pushed down a
level. The ANDSTR, and ORSTR instructions combine levels of the boolean stack
when they are encountered. Since the boolean stack is only eight levels, an error will
occur if the CPU encounters a rung that uses more than the eight levels of the
boolean stack.
All of you software programmers may be saying, I use DirectSOFT, so I dont need
to know how the stack works. Not quite true. Even though you can build the network
with the graphic symbols, the limits of the CPU are still the same. If the stack limit is
exceeded when the program is compiled, an error will occur.
The following example shows how the boolean stack is used to solve boolean logic.
X0

STR

STR

STR

X1

AND X4

ORSTR

Y0
OUT

X2

X5

AND X3

Output

ANDSTR

OR

STR X0

STR X1

STR X1

STR X2

X2 AND X3

STR X0

STR X1

STR X1

STR X0

STR X0

STR X0

STR X2

AND X3

ORSTR

AND X4

OR X5

X1 OR (X2 AND X3)

X4 AND [X1 OR (X2 AND X3)]

NOT X5 OR X4 AND [X1 OR (X2 AND X3)]

STR X0

STR X0

STR X0

ANDSTR
1

X0 AND (NOT X5 OR X4) AND [X1 OR (X2 AND X3)]

Standard
RLL Instructions

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions

5--9

Immediate Boolean The DL405 CPUs usually can complete an operation cycle in a matter of
milliseconds. However, in some applications you may not be able to wait a few
milliseconds until the next I/O update occurs. The DL405 CPUs offer Immediate
input and outputs which are special boolean instructions that allow reading directly
from inputs and writing directly to outputs during the program execution portion of
the CPU cycle. You may recall this is normally done during the input or output update
portion of the CPU cycle. The immediate instructions take longer to execute
because the program execution is interrupted while the CPU reads or writes the
module. This function is not normally done until the read inputs or the write outputs
portion of the CPU cycle.
NOTE: Even though the immediate input instruction reads the most current status
from the module, it only uses the results to solve that one instruction. It does not use
the new status to update the image register. Therefore, any regular instructions that
follow will still use the image register values. Any immediate instructions that follow
will access the module again to update the status. The immediate output instruction
will write the status to the module and update the image register.
8pt
Input

16pt
Input

8pt
Input

X0
-X07

X10
-X27

X30
-X37

8pt
8pt
16pt
Output Output Output
Y0
-Y07

Y10
-Y17

Y20
-Y37

CPU Scan
Read Inputs
X320
OFF

...
X2
X1
X0
...
ON OFF OFF
Input Image Register

The CPU reads the inputs from the local

and expansion bases and stores the
status in an input image register.

OFF

X0

OFF

X1

Read Inputs from Specialty I/O

Solve the Application Program

X0
I

Y0

Write Outputs to Specialty I/O

Diagnostics

I/O Point X0 Changes

ON

X0

OFF

X1

Standard
RLL Instructions

Write Outputs

Immediate instruction does not use the

input image register, but instead reads
the status from the module immediately.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--10

Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions

Boolean Instructions
Store
(STR)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Store Not
(STRN)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Store instruction begins a new rung or

an additional branch in a rung with a
normally open contact. Status of the
contact will be the same state as the
associated image register point or
memory location.

Aaaa

The Store Not instruction begins a new

rung or an additional branch in a rung with
a normally closed contact. Status of the
contact will be opposite the state of the
associated image register point or
memory location.

Aaaa

Operand Data Type

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

0--477

0--477

0--1777

Outputs

0--477

0--477

0--1777

Control Relays

0--737

0--1777

0--3777

Stage

0--577

0--1777

0--1777

Timer

0--177

0--377

0--377

Inputs

DL450 Range

Counter

CT

0--177

0--177

0--377

Special Relay

SP

0--137, 320--617

0--137 320--717

0--137, 320--717

Global

GX

0--777

0--1777

0--2777

Global

GY

--

--

0--2777

In the following Store example, when input X1 is on, output Y2 will energize.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT
X1

Y2

STR

X(IN)

OUT

OUT

Y(OUT)

Standard
RLL Instructions

In the following Store Not example, when input X1 is off output Y2 will energize.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT
X1

Y2
OUT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

STR

NOT

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions

Store Bit-of-Word
(STRB)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Store Not
Bit-of-Word
(STRNB)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Store Bit-of-Word instruction begins a

new rung or an additional branch in a rung
with a normally open contact. Status of the
contact will be the same state as the bit
referenced in the associated memory
location.

Aaaa.bb

The Store Not instruction begins a new

rung or an additional branch in a rung with
a normally closed contact. Status of the
contact will be opposite the state of the bit
referenced in the associated memory
location.

Aaaa.bb

Operand Data Type

5--11

DL450 Range

V--memory
Pointer

aaa

bb

All (See p. 3--42)

BCD, 0 to 15

PB

All (See p. 3--42)

BCD, 0 to 15

In the following Store Bit-of-Word example, when bit 12 of V-memory location V1400
is on, output Y2 will energize.
DirectSOFT
B1400.12

Y2
OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT

K(con)

OUT

Y(OUT)

SHFT

In the following Store Not Bit-of-Word example, when bit 12 of V-memory location
V1400 is off, output Y2 will energize.
DirectSOFT
B1400.12

Y2
OUT

STR

STR

SHFT

K(con)

OUT

Y(OUT)

SHFT

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--12

Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions

Or
(OR)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP

Or Not
(ORN)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP

The Or instruction logically ors a normally

open contact in parallel with another
contact in a rung. The status of the contact
will be the same state as the associated
image register point or memory location.

Aaaa

The Or Not instruction logically ors a

normally closed contact in parallel with
another contact in a rung. The status of the
contact will be opposite the state of the
associated image register point or
memory location.

Operand Data Type

DL430 Range

Aaaa

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

0--477

0--477

0--1777

Outputs

0--477

0--477

0--1777

Control Relays

0--737

0--1777

0--3777

Stage

0--577

0--1777

0--1777

Timer

0--177

0--377

0--377

Counter

CT

0--177

0--177

0--377

Special Relay

SP

0--137, 320--617

0--137 320--717

0--137, 320--717

Global

GX

0--777

0--1777

0--1777

Global

GY

--

--

0--1777

Inputs

In the following Or example, when input X1 or X2 is on, output Y5 will energize.

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT
X1

Y5

STR

X(IN)

OUT

OR

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

X2

In the following Or Not example, when input X1 is on or X2 is off, output Y5 will

energize.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Standard
RLL Instructions

DirectSOFT
X1

Y5
OUT

X2

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

STR

X(IN)

OR

NOT

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions

Or Bit-of-Word
(ORB)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP

Or Not Bit-of-Word
(ORNB)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP

The Or Bit-of-Word instruction logically

ors a normally open contact in parallel
with another contact in a rung. Status of
the contact will be the same state as the
bit referenced in the associated memory
location.

Aaaa.bb

The Or Not Bit-of-Word instruction

logically ors a normally closed contact in
parallel with another contact in a rung.
Status of the contact will be opposite the
state of the bit referenced in the
associated memory location.

Operand Data Type

V--memory
Pointer

5--13

Aaaa.bb

DL450 Range
A

aaa

bb

All (See p. 3--42)

BCD, 0 to 15

PB

All (See p. 3--42)

BCD

In the following Or Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 or bit 7 of V1400 is on, output
Y5 will energize.
DirectSOFT
X1

Y7
OUT

B1400.7
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR

X(IN)

OR

SHFT

K(con)

OUT

Y(OUT)

SHFT

In the following Or Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 or bit 7 of V1400 is off, output
Y5 will energize.
DirectSOFT
X1

Y7
OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

1
N

OR

SHFT

K(con)

OUT

Y(OUT)

SHFT

Standard
RLL Instructions

B1400.7

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--14

Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions

And
(AND)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP

And Not
(ANDN)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP

The And instruction logically ands a

normally open contact in series with
another contact in a rung. The status of the
contact will be the same state as the
associated image register point or
memory location.

Aaaa

The And Not Bit-of-Word instruction

logically ands a normally closed contact in
series with another contact in a rung. The
status of the contact will be opposite the
state of the associated image register
point or memory location.
Operand Data Type

Aaaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

Inputs

0--477

0--477

0--1777

Outputs

0--477

0--477

0--1777

Control Relays

0--737

0--1777

0--3777

Stage

0--577

0--1777

0--1777

Timer

0--177

0--377

0--377

CT

0--177

0--177

0--377

Special Relay

SP

0--137, 320--617

0--137 320--717

0--137, 320--717

Global

GX

0--777

0--1777

0--1777

Global

GY

--

--

0--1777

Counter

DL450 Range

In the following And example, when inputs X1 and X2 are on output Y5 will energize.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT
X1

X2

Y5

STR

OUT

X(IN)

AND

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

In the following And Not example, when input X1 is on and X2 is off output Y5 will
energize.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT
X1

X2

Y5

Standard
RLL Instructions

OUT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

STR

X(IN)

AND

NOT

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions

And Bit-of-Word
(ANDB)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP

And Not
Bit-of-Word
(ANDNB)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP

The And Bit-of-Word instruction logically

ands a normally open contact in series
with another contact in a rung. The status
of the contact will be the same state as the
bit referenced in the associated memory
location.

Aaaa.bb

The And Not Bit-of-Word instruction

logically ands a normally closed contact in
series with another contact in a rung. The
status of the contact will be opposite the
state of the bit referenced in the
associated memory location.

Aaaa.bb

Operand Data Type

5--15

DL450 Range

V--memory
Pointer

aaa

bb

All (See p. 3--42)

BCD, 0 to 15

PB

All (See p. 3--42)

BCD

In the following And Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 and bit 4 of V1400 is on
output Y5 will energize.
DirectSOFT
X1

B1400.4

Y5
OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

1
B

AND

SHFT

K(con)

OUT

Y(OUT)

SHFT

In the following And Not Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 is on and bit 4 of V1400
is off output Y5 will energize.
DirectSOFT
X1

Y5

B1400.4

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

AND

SHFT

K(con)

OUT

Y(OUT)

SHFT

Standard
RLL Instructions

OUT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--16

Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions

And Store
(ANDSTR)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP

Or Store
(ORSTR)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP

The And Store instruction logically ands

two branches of a rung in series. Both
branches must begin with the Store
instruction.

OUT

The Or Store instruction logically ors two

branches of a rung in parallel. Both
branches must begin with the Store
instruction.

OUT

In the following And Store example, the branch consisting of contacts X2, X3, and X4
have been ANDed with the branch consisting of contact X1.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT
X1

X2

X3

Y5
OUT

X4

STR

X(IN)

STR

X(IN)

AND

X(IN)

OR

X(IN)

AND

STR

OUT

Y(OUT)

In the following Or Store example, the branch consisting of X1 and X2 have been
ORed with the branch consisting of X3 and X4.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT
X1

Standard
RLL Instructions

X3

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

X2

X4

Y5

STR

X(IN)

OUT

AND

X(IN)

STR

X(IN)

AND

X(IN)

OR

STR

OUT

Y(OUT)

Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions

Out
(OUT)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Out instruction reflects the status of

the rung (on/off) and outputs the discrete
(on/off) state to the specified image
register point or memory location. Multiple
Out instructions referencing the same
discrete location should not be used since
only the last Out instruction in the program
will control the physical output point.
Operand Data Type

DL430 Range

Aaaa
OUT

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

bb

bb

0--477

0--477

0--1777

Outputs

0--477

0--477

0--1777

Control Relays

0--737

0--1777

0--3777

GX

0--777

0--1777

0--2777 (GX + GY)

Inputs

Global I/O

5--17

In the following Out example, when input X1 is on, output Y2 and Y5 will energize.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT
X1

Y2
OUT
Y5

STR

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

OUT

Y(OUT)

OUT

In the following Out example the program contains two Out instructions using the
same location (Y10). The physical output of Y10 is ultimately controlled by the last
rung of logic referencing Y10. X1 will override the Y10 output being controlled by X0.
To avoid this situation, multiple outputs using the same location should not be used
in programming.
X0

Y10
OUT

X1

Y10
OUT

Standard
RLL Instructions
DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--18

Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions

Out Bit-of-Word
(OUTB)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Out Bit-of-Word instruction reflects

the status of the rung (on/off) and outputs
the discrete (on/off) state to the specified
bit in the referenced memory location.
Multiple Out Bit-of-Word instructions
referencing the same bit of the same word
generally should not be used since only
the last Out instruction in the program will
control the status of the bit.
Operand Data Type

Aaaa.bb
OUT

DL450 Range

V--memory
Pointer

aaa

bb

All (See p. 3--42)

BCD, 0 to 15

PB

All (See p. 3--42)

BCD

In the following Out Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 is on, bit 3 of V1400 and bit
6 of V1401 will turn on.
DirectSOFT
X1

B1400.3
OUT
B1401.6
OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

K(con)

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

K(con)

The following Out Bit-of-Word example contains two Out Bit-of-Word instructions
using the same bit in the same memory word. The final state bit 3 of V1400 is
ultimately controlled by the last rung of logic referencing it. X1 will override the logic
state controlled by X0. To avoid this situation, multiple outputs using the same
location must not be used in programming.
X0

V1400

K3

Standard
RLL Instructions

OUT

X1

V1400

K3
OUT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions

Or Out
(OROUT)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Or Out instruction has been designed

to use more than 1 rung of discrete logic to
control a single output. Multiple Or Out
instructions referencing the same output
coil may be used, since all contacts
controlling the output are ORed together.
If the status of any rung is on, the output
will also be on.
Operand Data Type

DL430 Range

A aaa
OROUT

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

0--477

0--477

0--1777

Outputs

0--477

0--477

0--1777

Control Relays

0--737

0--1777

0--3777

GX

0--777

0--1777

0--2777 (GX + GY)

Inputs

Global I/O

5--19

In the following example, when X1 or X4 is on, Y2 will energize.

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT
X1

Y2
OR OUT

X4

STR

X(IN)

OR

OUT

Y(OUT)

STR

X(IN)

OR

OUT

Y(OUT)

Y2
OR OUT

Not
(NOT)
  

The Not instruction inverts the status of

the rung at the point of the instruction.

430 440 450

DS

HPP

In the following example when X1 is off, Y2 will energize. This is because the Not
instruction inverts the status of the rung at the Not instruction.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT
X1

Y2
OUT

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

NOTE: DirectSOFT Release 1.1i and later supports the use of the NOT instruction.
The above example rung is merely intended to show the visual representation of the
NOT instruction. The rung cannot be created or displayed in DirectSOFT versions
earlier than 1.1i.

Standard
RLL Instructions

STR
SHFT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--20

Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions

Pause
(PAUSE)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Pause instruction disables the output

update on a range of outputs. The ladder
program will continue to run and update
the image register however the outputs in
the range specified in the Pause
instruction will be turned off at the output
module.
Operand Data Type

Outputs

Y aaa
aaa
PAUSE

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

0--477

0--477

0--1777

In the following example, when X1 is ON, Y10--Y17 will be turned OFF at the output
module. The execution of the ladder program will not be affected.
DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X1

Y10

Y17

PAUSE

Positive
Differential
(PD)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

STR

X(IN)

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

Y(OUT)

The Positive Differential instruction is

typically known as a one-shot. When the
input logic produces an Off-to-On
transition, the output will energize for one
CPU scan. Thereafter, it remains off until
its input makes another Off-to-On
transition.
Operand Data Type

DL430 Range

A aaa
PD

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

0--477

0--477

0--1777

Outputs

0--477

0--477

0--1777

Control Relays

0--737

0--1777

0--3777

Inputs

Standard
RLL Instructions

In the following example, every time X1 is makes an Off-to-On transition, C0 will

energize for one scan.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT
X1

C0
PD

STR

X(IN)

SHFT

SHFT

C(CR)

Note that you can place a NOT instruction immediately before the PD instruction to
generate a one-shot pulse on an on-to-off transition.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions

Store Positive
Differential
(STRPD)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Store Negative
Differential
(STRND)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Store Positive Differential instruction

begins a new rung or an additional branch
in a rung with a normally open contact.
The contact closes for one CPU scan
when the state of the associated image
register point makes an Off-to-On
transition. Thereafter, the contact remains
open until the next Off-to-On transition
(the symbol inside the contact represents
the transition). This function is sometimes
called a one-shot. This contact will also
close on a program--to--run transition if it is
within retentive range.

Aaaa

The Store Negative Differential instruction

begins a new rung or an additional branch
in a rung with a normally closed contact.
The contact closes for one CPU scan
when the state of the associated image
register point makes an On-to-Off
transition. Thereafter, the contact remains
open until the next On-to-Off transition
(the symbol inside the contact represents
the transition).
Operand Data Type

Aaaa

DL450 Range
A

aaa

Inputs

0--1777

Outputs

0--1777

Control Relays

0--3777

Stage

0--1777

0--377

Timer

5--21

Counter

CT

0--377

Global

GX

0--2777 (GX + GY)

In the following example, each time X1 is makes an Off-to-On transition, Y4 will

energize for one scan.
DirectSOFT
X1

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Y4
OUT

STR

SHFT

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

SHFT

DirectSOFT
X1

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Y4
OUT

STR

SHFT

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

SHFT

Standard
RLL Instructions

In the following example, each time X1 is makes an On-to-Off transition, Y4 will

energize for one scan.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--22

Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions

Or Positive
Differential
(ORPD)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP

Or Negative
Differential
(ORND)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP

The Or Positive Differential instruction

logically ors a normally open contact in
parallel with another contact in a rung. The
status of the contact will be open until the
associated image register point makes an
Off-to-On transition, closing it for one CPU
scan. Thereafter, it remains open until
another Off-to-On transition.

Aaaa

The Or Negative Differential instruction

logically ors a normally open contact in
parallel with another contact in a rung. The
status of the contact will be open until the
associated image register point makes an
On-to-Off transition, closing it for one CPU
scan. Thereafter, it remains open until
another On-to-Off transition.
Operand Data Type

DL450 Range
A

aaa

0--1777

Outputs

0--1777

Control Relays

0--3777

Stage

0--1777

Timer

0--377

Counter

CT

0--377

Global

GX

0--2777 (GX + GY)

Inputs

Aaaa

In the following example, Y 5 will energize whenever X1 is on, or for one CPU scan
when X2 transitions from Off to On.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT
X1

Y5

STR

X(IN)

OUT

OR

SHFT

X2

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

SHFT

In the following example, Y 5 will energize whenever X1 is on, or for one CPU scan
when X2 transitions from On to Off.
DirectSOFT

Standard
RLL Instructions

X1

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Y5
OUT

X2

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

STR

X(IN)

OR

SHFT

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

SHFT

5--23

Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions

And Positive
Differential
(ANDPD)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP

And Negative
Differential
(ANDND)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP

The And Positive Differential instruction

logically ands a normally open contact in
series with another contact in a rung. The
status of the contact will be open until the
associated image register point makes an
Off-to-On transition, closing it for one CPU
scan. Thereafter, it remains open until
another Off-to-On transition.

Aaaa

The And Negative Differential instruction

logically ands a normally open contact in
series with another contact in a rung. The
status of the contact will be open until the
associated image register point makes an
On-to-Off transition, closing it for one CPU
scan. Thereafter, it remains open until
another On-to-Off transition.
Operand Data Type

Aaaa

DL450 Range
A

aaa

0--1777

Outputs

0--1777

Control Relays

0--3777

Stage

0--1777

Timer

0--377

Counter

CT

0--377

Global

GX

0--2777 (GX + GY)

Inputs

In the following example, Y5 will energize for one CPU scan whenever X1 is on and
X2 transitions from Off to On.
DirectSOFT
X1

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X2

Y5
OUT

STR

X(IN)

AND

SHFT

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

SHFT

In the following example, Y5 will energize for one CPU scan whenever X1 is on and
X2 transitions from On to Off.
DirectSOFT
X1

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X2

Y5

STR

X(IN)

AND

SHFT

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

SHFT

Standard
RLL Instructions

OUT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--24

Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions

Set
(SET)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Reset
(RST)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Set instruction sets or turns on an

image register point/memory location or a
consecutive range of image register
points/memory locations. Once the
point/location is set it will remain on until it
is reset using the Reset instruction. It is not
necessary for the input controlling the Set
instruction to remain on.

Optional
memory range

A aaa
aaa
SET

The Reset instruction resets or turns off an

image register point/memory location or a
range of image registers points/memory
locations. Once the point/location is reset
it is not necessary for the input to remain
on.

Operand Data Type

Optional
memory range

A aaa
aaa
RST

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

Inputs

0--477

0--477

0--1777

Outputs

0--477

0--477

0--1777

Control Relays

0--737

0--1777

0--3777

Stages

0--577

0--1777

0--1777

Timers*

0--177

0--377

0--377

Counters*

CT

0--177

0--177

0--377

Global

GX

0--777

0--1777

0--2777 (GX + GY)

* Timer and counter operand data types are not valid using the Set instruction.

In the following example when X1 turns on, Y5 through Y22 will be set to the on state.
DirectSOFT
X1

Y5

Y22
SET

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

SET

Y(OUT)

Y(OUT)

In the following example when X1 turns on, Y5 through Y22 will be reset to the off
state.
DirectSOFT

Standard
RLL Instructions

X1

Y5

Y22
RST

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

STR

X(IN)

RST

Y(OUT)

Y(OUT)

Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions

Set Bit-of-Word
(SETB)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Reset Bit-of-Word
(RSTB)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Set Bit-of-Word instruction sets or

turns on a bit in a V--memory location.
Once the bit is set it will remain on until it is
reset using the Reset Bit-of-Word
instruction. It is not necessary for the input
controlling the Set Bit-of-Word instruction
to remain on.

Aaaa.bb
SET

The Reset Bit-of-Word instruction resets

or turns off a bit in a V--memory location.
Once the bit is reset it is not necessary for
the input to remain on.

Operand Data Type

5--25

A aaa.bb
RST

DL450 Range
A

aaa

bb

All (See p. 3--42)

0 to 15

PB

All (See p. 3--42)

0 to 15

V--memory
Pointer

In the following example when X1 turns on, bit 0 in V1400 is set to the on state.
DirectSOFT
X1

B1400.0
SET

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

SET

SHFT

K(con)

SHFT

In the following example when X1 turns on, bit 15 in V1400 is reset to the off state.
DirectSOFT
X1

V1400.15
RST

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X(IN)

RST

SHFT

K(con)

SHFT

Standard
RLL Instructions

STR

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--26

Standard RLL Instructions

Comparative Boolean Instructions

Comparative Boolean Instructions

The Store If Equal instruction begins a
new rung or additional branch in a rung
with a normally open comparative contact.
The contact will be on when
Aaaa = Bbbb.

Store If Equal
(STRE)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Store If Not Equal instruction begins a

new rung or additional branch in a rung
with a normally closed comparative
contact. The contact will be on when
Aaaa Bbbb.

Store If Not Equal

(STRNE)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

DL430 Range

A aaa

B bbb

A aaa

B bbb

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

A/B

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

----

----

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

----

0--FFFF

----

0--FFFF

----

0--FFFF

In the following example, when the value in V--memory location V1400 = 4933 , Y3
will energize.
DirectSOFT
V1400

Y3

K4933

OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

OUT

Y(OUT)

In the following example, when the value in V--memory location V1400 5060, Y3
will energize.
Standard
RLL Instructions

DirectSOFT
V1400

Y3

K5060

OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

NOT

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

OUT

Y(OUT)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--27

Standard RLL Instructions

Comparative Boolean Instructions

The Or If Equal instruction connects a

normally open comparative contact in
parallel with another contact. The contact
will be on when Aaaa = Bbbb.

Or If Equal
(ORE)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP

The Or If Not Equal instruction connects a

normally closed comparative contact in
parallel with another contact. The contact
will be on when Aaaa Bbbb.

Or If Not Equal
(ORNE)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP
Operand Data Type

DL430 Range

A aaa

B bbb

A aaa

B bbb

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

A/B

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

----

----

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

----

0--FFFF

----

0--FFFF

----

0--FFFF

In the following example, when the value in V--memory location V1400 = 4500 or
V1402 = 2345 , Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT
V1400

K4500

Y3
OUT

V1402

K2345

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

OR

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

OUT

Y(OUT)

In the following example, when the value in V--memory location V1400 = 3916 or
V1402 2500, Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT
V1400

K3916

Y3
OUT

V1402

K2500

STR

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

OR

NOT

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

OUT

Y(OUT)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

5--28

Standard RLL Instructions

Comparative Boolean Instructions

The And If Equal instruction connects a

normally open comparative contact in
series with another contact. The contact
will be on when Aaaa = Bbbb.

And If Equal
(ANDE)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP

The And If Not Equal instruction connects a

normally closed comparative contact in
series with another contact. The contact
will be on when Aaaa Bbbb

And If Not Equal

(ANDNE)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP
Operand Data Type

DL430 Range

A aaa

B bbb

A aaa

B bbb

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

A/B

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

----

----

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

----

0--FFFF

----

0--FFFF

----

0--FFFF

In the following example, when the value in V--memory location V1400 = 5000 and
V1402 = 2345, Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT
V1400

K5000

V1402

K2345

Y3
OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

AND

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

OUT

Y(OUT)

In the following example, when the value in V--memory location V1400 = 2550 and
V1402 2500, Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT
V1400

K2550

V1402

Y3

K2500

Standard
RLL Instructions

OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

AND

NOT

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

OUT

Y(OUT)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--29

Standard RLL Instructions

Comparative Boolean Instructions

Store
(STR)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Store Not
(STRN)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Comparative Store instruction begins

a new rung or additional branch in a rung
with a normally open comparative contact.
The contact will be on when
Aaaa Bbbb.

A aaa

B bbb

The Comparative Store Not instruction

begins a new rung or additional branch in
a rung with a normally closed comparative
contact. The contact will be on when Aaaa
< Bbbb.

A aaa

B bbb

Operand Data Type

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

A/B

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

----

----

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

----

0--FFFF

----

0--FFFF

----

0--FFFF

0--177

0--377

0--377

CT

0--177

0--177

0--377

Timer
Counter

In the following example, when the value in V--memory location V1400 1000, Y3
will energize.
DirectSOFT
V1400

Y3

K1000

OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

K(CON)

OUT

Y(OUT)

In the following example, when the value in V--memory location V1400 < 4050, Y3
will energize.
DirectSOFT
V1400

K4050

Y3

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

NOT

K(CON)

OUT

Y(OUT)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard
RLL Instructions

OUT

5--30

Standard RLL Instructions

Comparative Boolean Instructions

The Comparative Or instruction connects

a normally open comparative contact in
parallel with another contact. The contact
will be on when Aaaa Bbbb.

Or
(OR)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP

A aaa

The Comparative Or Not instruction

connects a normally open comparative
contact in parallel with another contact. The
contact will be on when Aaaa < Bbbb.

Or Not
(ORN)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP

B bbb

A aaa

Operand Data Type

DL430 Range

B bbb

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

A/B

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

----

----

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

----

0--FFFF

----

0--FFFF

----

0--FFFF

0--177

0--377

0--377

CT

0--177

0--177

0--377

Timer
Counter

In the following example, when the value in V--memory location V1400 = 6045 or
V1402 2345, Y3 will energize.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT
V1400

K6045

Y3
OUT

V1402

K2345

STR

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

OR

K(CON)

OUT

Y(OUT)

In the following example when the value in V--memory location V1400 = 1000 or
V1402 < 2500, Y3 will energize.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT
V1400

K1000

Y3

Standard
RLL Instructions

OUT

V1402

K2500

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

STR

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

OR

NOT

K(CON)

OUT

Y(OUT)

5--31

Standard RLL Instructions

Comparative Boolean Instructions

The Comparative And instruction

connects a normally open comparative
contact in series with another contact. The
contact will be on when Aaaa Bbbb.

And
(AND)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP

The Comparative And Not instruction

connects a normally open comparative
contact in series with another contact. The
contact will be on when Aaaa < Bbbb.

And Not
(ANDN)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP
Operand Data Type

DL430 Range

A aaa

B bbb

A aaa

B bbb

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

A/B

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

----

----

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

----

0--FFFF

----

0--FFFF

----

0--FFFF

Timer

0--177

0--377

0--377

CT

0--177

0--177

0--377

Counter

In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V1400 = 5000, and
V1402 2345, Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT
V1400

K5000

V1402

K2345

Y3
OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

AND

K(CON)

OUT

Y(OUT)

In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V1400 = 7000 and
V1402 < 2500, Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT
V1400

K7000

V1402

K2500

Y3

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

AND

NOT

K(CON)

OUT

Y(OUT)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard
RLL Instructions

OUT

5--32

Standard RLL Instructions

Immediate Instructions

Immediate Instructions
Store
Immediate
(STRI)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Store Not
Immediate
(STRNI)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Store Immediate instruction begins a

new rung or additional branch in a rung. The
status of the contact will be the same as the
status of the associated input point on the
module at the time the instruction is
executed. The image register is not
updated.

X aaa

The Store Not Immediate instruction begins

a new rung or additional branch in a rung.
The status of the contact will be opposite
the status of the associated input point on
the module at the time the instruction is
executed. The image register is not
updated.

X aaa

Operand Data Type

Inputs

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

0--477

0--477

0--1777

In the following example, when X1 is on, Y2 will energize.

DirectSOFT
Y2

X1

OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT

OUT

Y(OUT)

SHFT

X(IN)

In the following example when X1 is off, Y2 will energize.

DirectSOFT
Y2

X1

OUT

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

NOT

SHFT

OUT

Y(OUT)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

SHFT

X(IN)

Standard RLL Instructions

Immediate Instructions

Or Immediate
(ORI)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP

Or Not Immediate
(ORNI)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP

The Or Immediate connects two contacts in

parallel. The status of the contact will be the
same as the status of the associated input
point on the module at the time the
instruction is executed. The image register
is not updated.

X aaa

The Or Not Immediate connects two

contacts in parallel. The status of the
contact will be opposite the status of the
associated input point on the module at the
time the instruction is executed. The image
register is not updated.

Operand Data Type

Inputs

5--33

X aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

0--477

0--477

0--1777

In the following example, when X1 or X2 is on, Y5 will energize.

DirectSOFT
Y5

X1

OUT
X2

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

OR

SHFT

OUT

Y(OUT)

SHFT

X(IN)

In the following example, when X1 is on or X2 is off, Y5 will energize.

DirectSOFT
Y5

X1

OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

OR

NOT

SHFT

OUT

Y(OUT)

SHFT

X(IN)

Standard
RLL Instructions

X2

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--34

Standard RLL Instructions

Immediate Instructions

The And Immediate connects two contacts

in series. The status of the contact will be
the same as the status of the associated
input point on the module at the time the
instruction is executed. The image register
is not updated.

X aaa

And Not Immediate The And Not Immediate connects two

contacts in series. The status of the contact
(ANDNI)
will be opposite the status of the
  
associated input point on the module at the
430 440 450
time the instruction is executed. The image
IMP

register is not updated.
HPP

X aaa

And Immediate
(ANDI)
  
430 440 450
IMP

DS

HPP

DS

Operand Data Type

DL430 Range

Inputs

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

0--477

0--477

0--1777

In the following example, when X1 and X2 is on, Y5 will energize.

DirectSOFT
X1

Y5

X2

OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

AND

SHFT

OUT

Y(OUT)

SHFT

X(IN)

In the following example, when X1 is on and X2 is off, Y5 will energize.

DirectSOFT
X1

Y5

X2

OUT

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

AND

NOT

SHFT

OUT

Y(OUT)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

SHFT

X(IN)

Standard RLL Instructions

Immediate Instructions

Out Immediate
(OUTI)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Or Out Immediate
(OROUTI)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Out Immediate instruction reflects the

status of the rung (on/off) and outputs the
discrete (on/off) status to the specified
module output point and the image register
at the time the instruction is executed. If
multiple Out Immediate instructions
referencing the same discrete point are
used it is possible for the module output
status to change multiple times in a CPU
scan. See Or Out Immediate.

Y aaa
OUTI

The Or Out Immediate instruction has been

designed to use more than 1 rung of
discrete logic to control a single output.
Multiple Or Out Immediate instructions
referencing the same output coil may be
used, since all contacts controlling the
output are ored together. If the status of any
rung is on at the time the instruction is
executed, the output will also be on.
Operand Data Type

Outputs

5--35

Y aaa
OROUTI

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

0--477

0--477

0--1777

In the following example, when X1 is on, output point Y2 on the output module will
turn on.
DirectSOFT
Y2

X1

OUTI

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

In the following example, when X1 or X4 is on, Y2 will energize.

DirectSOFT
Y2

X1

OR OUTI

OR OUTI

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

OR

OUT

SHFT

STR

X(IN)

OR

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

SHFT

Y(OUT)

Standard
RLL Instructions

Y2

X4

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--36

Standard RLL Instructions

Immediate Instructions

Set Immediate
(SETI)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Reset
Immediate
(RSTI)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Set Immediate instruction immediately

sets or turns on an output or a range of
outputs and the corresponding output
module(s) at the time the instruction is
executed. The image register is not
updated. Once the outputs are set it is not
necessary for the input to remain on. The
Reset Immediate instruction can be used to
reset the outputs.

Y aaa
aaa
SETI

The
Reset
Immediate
instruction
immediately resets, or turns off an output or
a range of outputs and the output
module(s) at the time the instruction is
executed. The image register is not
updated. Once the outputs are reset it is not
necessary for the input to remain on.
Operand Data Type

Outputs

Y aaa
aaa
RSTI

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

0--477

0--477

0--1777

In the following example, when X1 is on, Y5 through Y22 will be set (on) for the
corresponding output module(s).
DirectSOFT
X1

Y5

Y22
SETI

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

SET

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

Y(OUT)

In the following example, when X1 is on, Y5 through Y22 will be reset (off) for the
corresponding output module(s).
DirectSOFT
X1

Y22

Y5

Standard
RLL Instructions

RSTI

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

RST

SHFT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

SHFT

Y(OUT)

Y(OUT)

5--37

Standard RLL Instructions

Immediate Instructions

The Load Immediate instruction loads a

16-bit V-memory value into the accumulator.
The valid address range includes all input
point addresses on the local base. The
value reflects the current status of the input
points at the time the instruction is executed.
This instruction may be used instead of the
LDIF instruction which requires you to
specify the number of input points.

Load Immediate
(LDI)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

LDI
V aaa

DL450 Range
aaaaa

Inputs

40400 -- 40477

In the following example, when C0 is on, the binary pattern of X10--X17 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Immediate instruction. The Out Immediate
instruction could be used to copy the 16 bits in the accumulator to output points, such
as Y40--Y57. This technique is useful to quickly copy an input pattern to output points
(without waiting on a full CPU scan to occur).
DirectSOFT
C0

Location

LDI

X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X7

V40400

V40400
Load the inputs from X0 to
X17 into the accumulator,
immediately.

X6

X5

X4

X3

X2

X1

X0

ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON

Unused accumulator bits

are set to zero
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.

6 5

4 3

OUTI
V40502
Output the value in the accumulator to output points Y40 to Y57.

Location

Y57 Y56 Y55 Y54 Y53 Y52 Y51 Y50 Y47 Y46 Y45 Y44 Y43 Y42 Y41 Y40

V40502

ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

C(CR)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

Standard
RLL Instructions
DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--38

Standard RLL Instructions

Immediate Instructions

The Load Immediate Formatted instruction

loads a 1--32 bit binary value into the
accumulator. The value reflects the current
status of the input module(s) at the time the
instruction is executed. Accumulator bits
that are not used by the instruction are set to
zero.

Load Immediate
Formatted
(LDIF)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

X aaa

LDIF
K bbb

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

Inputs

0--477

----

0--1777

----

Constant

----

1--32

----

1--32

In the following example, when C0 is on, the binary pattern of X10--X17 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Immediate Formatted instruction. The Out
Immediate Formatted instruction could be used to copy the specified number of bits
in the accumulator to the specified outputs on the output module, such as Y30--Y37.
This technique is useful to quickly copy an input pattern to outputs (without waiting
for the CPU scan).
DirectSOFT
C0

LDIF

X10
K8

Load the value of 8

consecutive location into the
accumulator starting with
X10

Constant
K8

X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10

ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON

Unused accumulator bits

are set to zero
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.

OUTIF

Location
X10

6 5

4 3

Y30
K8

Copy the value of the lower

8 bits of the accumulator to
Y30 --Y37

Location

Constant

Y37 Y36 Y35 Y34 Y33 Y32 Y31 Y30

Y30

K8

ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

C(CR)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

X(IN)

K(CON)

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

K(CON)

Standard
RLL Instructions

STR

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--39

Standard RLL Instructions

Immediate Instructions

The Out Immediate instruction outputs a

16-bit binary value from the accumulator to
a V-memory address at the time the
instruction is executed. The valid address
range includes all output point addresses on
the local base. This instruction may be used
instead of the OUTIF instruction which
requires you to specify the number of input
points.

Out Immediate
(OUTI)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

OUTI
V aaaaa

DL450 Range
aaaaa

Inputs

40400 -- 40477

In the following example, when C0 is on, the binary pattern of X10--X17 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Immediate instruction. The Out Immediate
instruction could be used to copy the 16 bits in the accumulator to output points, such
as Y40--Y57. This technique is useful to quickly copy an input pattern to outputs
(without waiting for the CPU scan).
DirectSOFT
C0

Location

LDI

X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X7

V40400

V40400
Load the inputs from X0 to
X17 into the accumulator,
immediately.

X6

X5

X4

X3

X2

X1

X0

ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON

Unused accumulator bits

are set to zero
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.

6 5

4 3

OUTI
V40542
Output the value in the accumulator to output points Y40 to Y57.

Location

Y57 Y56 Y55 Y54 Y53 Y52 Y51 Y50 Y47 Y46 Y45 Y44 Y43 Y42 Y41 Y40

V40542

ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

C(CR)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

Standard
RLL Instructions
DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--40

Standard RLL Instructions

Immediate Instructions

The Out Immediate Formatted instruction

outputs a 1--32 bit binary value from the
accumulator to specified output points at
the time the instruction is executed.
Accumulator bits that are not used by the
instruction are set to zero.

Out
Immediate
Formatted
(OUTIF)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

Y aaa
OUTIF
K bbb

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

Output

0--477

----

0--1777

----

Constant

----

1--32

----

1--32

In the following example when C0 is on,the binary pattern for X10 --X17 is loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Immediate Formatted instruction. The binary
pattern in the accumulator is written to Y30--Y37 using the Out Immediate Formatted
instruction. This technique is useful to quickly copy an input pattern to outputs
(without waiting for the CPU scan).
DirectSOFT
C0

LDIF

X10
K8

Load the value of 8

consecutive location into the
accumulator starting with
X10

Constant
K8

X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10

ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON

Unused accumulator bits

are set to zero
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.

OUTIF

Location
X10

6 5

4 3

Y30
K8

Copy the value in the lower

8 bits of the accumulator to
Y30 --Y37

Location

Constant

Y37 Y36 Y35 Y34 Y33 Y32 Y31 Y30

Y30

K8

ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

C(CR)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

X(IN)

K(CON)

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

K(CON)

Standard
RLL Instructions

STR

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--41

Standard RLL Instructions

Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions

Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions

Using Timers

Timers are used to time an event for a desired length of time. There are those
applications that need an accumulating timer, meaning it has the ability to time, stop,
and then resume from where it previously stopped.
The single input timer will time as long as the input is on. When the input changes
from on to off the timer current value is reset to 0. There is a tenth of a second and a
hundredth of a second timer available with a maximum time of 999.9 and 99.99
seconds respectively. There is discrete bit associated with each timer to indicate the
current value is equal to or greater than the preset value. The timing diagram below
shows the relationship between the timer input, associated discrete bit, current
value, and timer preset.
1

Seconds
4

X1

TMR

T1
K30

X1

Timer preset

T1
T1
0

Current
Value

10

20

30
40
1/10 Seconds

50

60

Y0
OUT

The accumulating timer works similarly to the regular timer, but two inputs are
required. The start/stop input starts and stops the timer. When the timer stops, the
elapsed time is maintained. When the timer starts again, the timing continues from
the elapsed time. When the reset input is turned on, the elapsed time is cleared and
the timer will start at 0 when it is restarted. There is a tenth of a second and a
hundredth of a second timer available with a maximum time of 9999999.9 and
999999.99 seconds respectively. The timing diagram below shows the relationship
between the timer input, timer reset, associated discrete bit, current value, and timer
preset.
0

Seconds
4

X1

Start/Stop

X1

TMRA

T0
K30

X2
X2

Reset Input
T0
Current
Value

10

10

40

50

Standard
RLL Instructions

20
30
1/10 Seconds

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev.A

5--42

Standard RLL Instructions

Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions

The Timer instruction is a 0.1 second

single input timer that times to a maximum
of 999.9 seconds. The Timer Fast
instruction is a 0.01 second single input
timer that times up to a maximum of 99.99
seconds. These timers will be enabled if
the input logic is true (on) and will be reset
to 0 if the input logic is false (off).

Timer (TMR) and

Timer Fast (TMRF)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

T aaa

TMR
B bbb

Preset

Timer #

Instruction Specifications
TMRF
Timer Reference (Taaa): Specifies the
T aaa
B bbb
timer number.
Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K)
or a V--memory location. (V locations are
Preset
Timer #
16-bit words.)
Current Value: Timer current values are
accessed by referencing the associated V
The timer discrete status bit and the
or T memory location*. For example, the
current value is not specified in the timer
timer current value for T3 physically
instruction.
resides in V-memory location V3. (V
locations are 16-bit words.)
Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the
associated T memory location. It will be on if the current value is equal to or greater
than the preset value. For example the discrete status bit for timer 2 would be T2.
Operand Data Type

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

Timers

0--177

----

0--377

----

0--377

----

V--memory for preset

values

----

1400--7377

----

1400--7377
10000--17777

----

1400--7377
10000--17777

Pointers (preset only)

----

----

----

1400--7377
10000--17777

----

1400--7377
10000--37777

Constants
(preset only)

----

0--9999

----

0--9999

----

0--9999

Timer discrete status

bits

0--177

0--377

0--377

Timer current values

V /T*

0--177

0--377

0--377

Standard
RLL Instructions

There are two methods of programming timers. You can perform functions when the
timer reaches the specified preset using the discrete status bit, or use the
comparative contacts to perform functions at different time intervals based on one
timer. The following examples show each method of using timers.
NOTE: * For the Handheld Programmer, both the Timer discrete status bits and
current value can be accessed with the same data type (example T2). The way the
data type is used determines if it is a status bit or a current value. Any comparative
instruction using T2 will access the current value, all other instructions using T2 will
access the status bit. Current values may also be accessed by the V-memory location.
For DirectSOFT, the use of T2 will refer to the timers discrete status bit. You should
use V2 (or the alias TA2) to refer to the current value.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--43

Standard RLL Instructions

Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions
Timer Example
Using Discrete
Status Bits

In the following example, a single input timer is used with a preset of 3 seconds. The
timer discrete status bit (T2) will turn on when the timer has timed for 3 seconds. The
timer is reset when X1 turns off after 7.5 seconds turning the discrete status bit off
and resetting the timer current value to 0.
Timing Diagram

DirectSOFT
X1

TMR

T2

K30

10

20

Seconds
4

30

40

50

60

X1
Y0

T2

T2

OUT
Y0
Current
Value

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

TMR

TMR

STR

TMR

OUT

Y(OUT)

K(CON)

1/10 Seconds

In the following example, a single input timer is used with a preset of 234.5 seconds.
Timer Example
Using Comparative Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3, Y4, and Y5 at one second intervals
respectively. When X1 is turned off the timer will be reset to 0 and the comparative
Contacts
contacts will turn off Y3, Y4, and Y5.
Timing Diagram

DirectSOFT (see Note)

X1

TA20

Seconds

TMR
T20
K2345

OUT

TA20

10

20

30

40

50

60

Y3

Y4

K20

X1

Y3

K10

Y4

OUT
Y5
TA20

Y5

K30

T2

OUT

Current
Value

1/10 Seconds

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X(IN)

TMR

TMR

K(CON)

STR

TMR

K(CON)

OUT

Y(OUT)

3
0

K(CON)

K(CON)

STR

TMR

Y(OUT)

STR

TMR

OUT

Y(OUT)

NOTE: Since this representation is showing a DirectSOFT example, you would use
the alias TA20 (or V20) instead of T20, which would be necessary for the equivalent
rung entered with the Handheld Programmer.

Standard
RLL Instructions

STR

OUT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev.A

5--44

Standard RLL Instructions

Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions

Accumulating
Timer (TMRA) and
Accumulating Fast
Timer (TMRAF)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Accumulating Timer is a 0.1 second

two input timer that times to a maximum of
9999999.9. The Accumulating Fast Timer
is a 0.01 second two input timer that times
to a maximum of 999999.99. These timers
have two inputs, an enable and a reset. The
timer will start timing when the enable is on
and stop timing when the enable is off
without resetting the current value to 0. The
reset will reset the timer when on and allow
the timer to time when off.
Instruction Specifications
Timer Reference (Taaa): Specifies the
timer number.
Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K)
or a V--memory location. (V locations are
32-bit double words.)
Current Value: Timer current value is a
double word accessed by referencing the
associated V or T memory location*. For
example, the timer current value for T0
resides in V-memory location V0 and V1.
(V locations are 16-bit words.)
Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status bit
is accessed by referencing the associated T
memory location. It will be on if the current
value is equal to or greater than the preset
value. For example the discrete status bit for
timer 2 would be T2.

Operand Data Type

Standard
RLL Instructions

Timers

DL430 Range

Enable

T aaa
TMRA
B bbb

Reset

Preset

Enable

Timer #

T aaa
TMRAF
B bbb

Reset

Preset

Timer #

The timer discrete status bit and the

current value is not specified in the timer
instruction.

Caution: The TMRA uses two

consecutive timer locations, since
the preset can now be 8 digits,
which requires two V--memory
locations. For example, if TMRA
T0 is used in the program, the
next available timer is T2. Or if T0
was a normal timer, and T1 was
an accumulating timer, then the
next available timer would be T3.

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

aaa

0--176

----

0--376

----

0--376

bbb
----

----

1400--7377
10000--17777

V--memory for preset

values

----

1400--7377

----

1400--7377
10000--17777

Pointers (preset only)

----

----

----

1400--7377
10000--17777

----

1400--7377
10000--37777

Constants
(preset only)

----

0--99999999

----

0--99999999

----

0--99999999

Timer discrete status

bits

0--177

0--377

0--377

Timer current values

V/T*

0--177

0--377

0--377

There are two methods of programming timers. You can perform functions when the
timer reaches the specified preset using the the discrete status bit, or use the
comparative contacts to perform functions at different time intervals based on one
timer. The following examples show each method of using timers.
NOTE:* For the Handheld Programmer, both the Timer discrete status bits and
current value can be accessed with the same data type (example T2). The way the
data type is used determines if it is a status bit or a current value. Any comparative
instruction using T2 will access the current value, all other instructions using T2 will
access the status bit. Current values may also be accessed by the V-memory location.
For DirectSOFT, the use of T2 will refer to the timers discrete status bit. You should
use V2 (or the alias TA2) to refer to the current value.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--45

Standard RLL Instructions

Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions

In the following example, a two input timer (accumulating timer) is used with a preset
of 3 seconds. The timer discrete status bit (T6) will turn on when the timer has timed
for 3 seconds. Notice in this example the timer times for 1 second , stops for one
second, then resumes timing. The timer will reset when C10 turn on after 5.5
seconds turning the discrete status bit off and resetting the timer current value to 0.

Accumulating
Timer Example
using Discrete
Status Bits

Timing Diagram

DirectSOFT
X1
TMRA

T6

10

10

Seconds
4

20

30

40

50

X1

K30

C10

C10

Y10

T6

OUT

Current
Value

T6

1/10 Seconds
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

STR

C(CR)

TMR

SHFT

SHFT

TMR

K(CON)

STR

TMR

OUT

Y(OUT)

Accumulator Timer In the following example, a single input timer is used with a preset of 23458.9 seconds.
Comparative contacts are used to energized Y3, Y4, and Y5 at one second intervals
Example Using
respectively. The comparative contacts will turn off when the timer is reset.
Comparative
Contacts
Contacts
Direct SOFT

Timing Diagram

X1
TMRA

T20

10

10

Seconds
4

20

30

40

50

X1

K45

C10

C10
TA20

K10 TA21

Y3

K0

Y3

OUT
Y4

TA21

K1

TA20

K20 TA21

TA21

K1

Y5
Y4

K0

T20

OUT
Current
Value

1/10 Seconds
TA20

K30 TA21

Y5

K1

OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$
$

STR

SHFT

GX
OUT

SHFT
SHFT

E
E
D

$
B
C

0
T
MLR

1
2
2

SHFT

SHFT

4
3

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont d)

ENT

ENT

A
A
A

T
MLR
T
MLR

C
C

2
2

B
B

4
1
1
1

F
A

5
0

SHFT

STR

V
AND

SHFT

ENT

Q
OR

SHFT

ENT

GX
OUT

ENT

A
B

0
1

ENT
ENT

GX
OUT

E
E

SHFT

E
F

T
MLR

4
4
4

SHFT

STR

V
AND

SHFT

T
MLR

SHFT

T
MLR

2
2

B
B

ENT
A

0
1

ENT
ENT

ENT
T
MLR

SHFT

4
5

T
MLR

3
1

ENT
B

ENT

ENT

NOTE: Since this representation is showing a DirectSOFT example, you would use
the alias TA20 (or V20) instead of T20, which would be necessary for the equivalent
rung entered with the Handheld Programmer.

Standard
RLL Instructions

Q
OR

SHFT

STR

V
AND

SHFT

STR

N
TMR
$

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev.A

5--46

Standard RLL Instructions

Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions
Counters are used to count events. The counters available are up counters,
up/down counters, and stage counters (used with RLL PLUS programming).
The up counter has two inputs, a count input and a reset input. The maximum count
value is 9999. The timing diagram below shows the relationship between the counter
input, counter reset, associated discrete bit, current value, and counter preset.

Using Counters

X1
X1

X2

CNT

CT1
K3

Up
Reset

X2

Counter preset
CT1
Current
Value

Counts

The up down counter has three inputs, a count up input, count down input and reset
input. The maximum count value is 99999999. The timing diagram below shows the
relationship between the counter input, counter reset, associated discrete bit,
current value, and counter preset.
X1

CT2
K3

Up

X1

X2

X2

X3

Down
Reset

X3

Counter preset

CT2
Current
Value

UDC

1
Counts

The stage counter has a count input and is reset by the RST instruction. This
instruction is useful when programming RLL PLUS, by allowing you to reference the
same counter from multiple stages. The maximum count value is 9999. The timing
diagram below shows the relationship between the counter input, associated
discrete bit, current value, counter preset and reset instruction.
X1

Standard
RLL Instructions

X1

Up

CT1
Current
Value
RST
CT

SGCNT
K3

Counter preset
1

Counts

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

CT2

5--47

Standard RLL Instructions

Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions

The Counter is a two input counter that

increments when the count input logic
transitions from off to on. When the counter
reset input is on the counter resets to 0.
When the current value equals the preset
value, the counter status bit comes on and
the counter continues to count up to a
maximum count of 9999. The maximum
value will be held until the counter is reset.

Counter
(CNT)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Counter #
Count

CNT

CT aaa
B bbb

Reset

Instruction Specifications
Counter Reference (CTaaa): Specifies
Preset
the counter number.
Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K)
or a V--memory location. (V locations are
16-bit words.)
Current Values: Counter current values
are accessed by referencing the
The counter discrete status bit and the
current value are not specified in the
associated V or CT memory locations*.
counter instruction.
The V-memory location is the counter
location + 1000. For example, the counter
current value for CT3 resides in V--memory
location V1003. (V locations are 16-bit
words.)
Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the
associated CT memory location. It will be on if the value is equal to or greater than the
preset value. For example the discrete status bit for counter 2 would be CT2.
Operand Data Type

Counters

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

aaa

CT

0--177

----

0--177

----

0--377

bbb
----

----

1400--7377
10000--37777

V--memory
(preset only)

----

1400--7377

----

1400--7377
10000--17777

Pointers (preset only)

----

----

----

1400--7377
10000--17777

----

1400--7377
10000--37777

Constants
(preset only)

----

0--9999

----

0--9999

----

0--9999

Counter discrete
status bits

CT

0--177

0--177

0--377

Counter current
values

V/CT*

1000--1177

1000--1177

1000--1377

Standard
RLL Instructions

NOTE:* For the Handheld Programmer, both the Counter discrete status bits and
current value can be accessed with the same data type (example CT2). The way the
data type is used determines if it is a status bit or a current value. Any comparative
instruction using CT2 will access the current value, all other instructions using CT2 will
access the status bit. Current values may also be accessed by the V-memory location.
For DirectSOFT, the use of CT2 will refer to the timers discrete status bit. You
should use V1002 (or the alias CTA2) to refer to the current value.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev.A

5--48

Standard RLL Instructions

Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions

Counter Example
Using Discrete
Status Bits

In the following example, when X1 makes an off to on transition, counter CT2 will
increment by one. When the current value reaches the preset value of 3, the counter
status bit CT2 will turn on and energize Y10. When the reset C10 turns on, the
counter status bit will turn off and the current value will be 0. The current value for
counter CT2 will be held in V--memory location V1002.
Counting diagram

DirectSOFT
X1
CNT

CT2
X1
K3

C10

C10

Y10

Y10

OUT

Current
Value

CT2

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

STR

C(CR)

CNT

CNT

K(CON)

STR

CNT

OUT

Y(OUT)

In the following example, when X1 is makes an off to on transition, counter CT2 will
Counter Example
Using Comparative increment by one. Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3, Y4, and Y5 at different
counts. The comparative contacts will turn off when the counter is reset. When the reset
Contacts
C10 turns on, the counter status bit will turn off and the counter current value will be 0.
Counting diagram

DirectSOFT (see Note)

X1
CNT

CT2
X1
K3

C10

C10

CTA2

Y3

K1

Y3

OUT
Y4
CTA2

Y4

K2

OUT

CTA2

Y5

K3

Y5
Current
Value

OUT

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)

STR

X(IN)

STR

C(CR)

CNT

CNT

K(CON)

STR

CNT

K(CON)

OUT

Y(OUT)

STR

CNT

OUT

Y(OUT)

STR

CNT

OUT

Y(OUT)

K(CON)

K(CON)

NOTE: Since this representation is showing a DirectSOFT example, you would use
the alias CTA2 (or V1002) instead of CT2, which would be necessary for the
equivalent rung entered with the Handheld.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--49

Standard RLL Instructions

Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions

The Stage Counter is a single input counter

that increments when the input logic
transitions from off to on. This counter differs
from other counters since it will hold its
current value until reset using the RST
instruction. The Stage Counter is designed
for use in RLL PLUS programs but can be
used in relay ladder logic programs. When
the current value equals the preset value,
the counter status bit turns on and the
counter continues to count up to a maximum
count of 9999. The maximum value will be
held until the counter is reset.

Stage Counter
(SGCNT)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Counter #
CT aaa
SGCNT
B bbb
Preset

The counter discrete status bit and the

current value are not specified in the
counter instruction.

Instruction Specifications
Counter Reference (CTaaa): Specifies the counter number.
Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K) or a V--memory location. (V locations are
16-bit words.)
Current Values: Counter current values are accessed by referencing the
associated V or CT memory locations*. The V-memory location is the counter
location + 1000. For example, the counter current value for CT3 resides in
V--memory location V1003. (V locations are 16-bit words.)
Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the
associated CT memory location. It will be on if the value is equal to or greater than the
preset value. For example the discrete status bit for counter 2 would be CT2.
Operand Data Type

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

CT

0--177

----

0--177

----

0--377

----

V--memory

----

1400--7377

----

1400--7377
10000--17777

----

1400--7377
10000--17777

Pointers (preset only)

----

----

----

1400--7377
10000--17777

----

1400--7377
10000--37777

Constants

----

0--9999

----

0--9999

----

0--9999

Counters

Counter discrete
status bits

CT

0--177

0--177

0--377

Counter current
values

V/CT*

1000--1177

1000--1177

1000--1377

Standard
RLL Instructions

NOTE:* For the Handheld Programmer, both the Stage Counter discrete status bits
and current value can be accessed with the same data type (example CT2). The way
the data type is used determines if it is a status bit or a current value. Any comparative
instruction using CT2 will access the current value, all other instructions using CT2 will
access the status bit. Current values may also be accessed by the V-memory location.
For DirectSOFT, the use of CT2 will refer to the timers discrete status bit. You
should use V1002 (or the alias CTA2) to refer to the current value.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev.A

5--50

Standard RLL Instructions

Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions

Stage Counter
Example Using
Discrete Status
Bits

In the following example, when X1 makes an off to on transition, stage counter CT7
will increment by one. When the current value reaches 3, the counter status bit CT7
will turn on and energize Y10. The counter status bit CT7 will remain on until the
counter is reset using the RST instruction. When the counter is reset, the counter
status bit will turn off and the counter current value will be 0. The current value for
counter CT7 will be held in V--memory location V1007.
Counting diagram

DirectSOFT
X1

SGCNT
K3

CT7

C5

CT7

X1

Y10

Y10

OUT

Current
Value

CT7

RST
C5

RST

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

SG

CNT

CNT

STR

CNT

OUT

Y(OUT)

STR

C(CR)

RST

CNT

Stage Counter
Example Using
Comparative
Contacts

K(CON)

In the following example, when X1 makes an off to on transition, counter CT2 will
increment by one. Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3, Y4, and Y5 at
different counts. Although this is not shown in the example, when the counter is reset
using the Reset instruction, the counter status bit will turn off and the current value
will be 0. The current value for counter CT2 will be held in V--memory location V1002.
Counting diagram

tSOFT (see Note)

X1

CTA2

SGCNT
CT2
K10

X1

Y3

K1

Y3

OUT

CTA2

Y4

Y4

K2

OUT

CTA2

Y5
Current
Value

Y5

K3

OUT

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)

STR

X(IN)

SG

CNT

CNT

K(CON)

STR

CNT

K(CON)

OUT

Y(OUT)

STR

CNT

OUT

Y(OUT)

STR

CNT

OUT

Y(OUT)

K(CON)

K(CON)

NOTE: Since this representation is showing a DirectSOFT example, you would use
the alias CTA2 (or V1002) instead of CT2, which would be necessary for the
equivalent rung entered with the Handheld.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard RLL Instructions

Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions

Up/Down Counter
(UDC)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

This Up/Down Counter counts up on each

off to on transition of the Up input and
counts down on each off to on transition of
the Down input. The counter is reset to 0
when the Reset input is on. The count
range is 0--99999999. The count input not
being used must be off in order for the
active count input to function.

Up

Counters

DL430 Range

CT aaa
B bbb

Down

Counter #

Reset

Instruction Specification
Counter Reference (CTaaa): Specifies
the counter number.
Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K)
or two consecutive V--memory locations.
(V locations are 16-bit words.)
Current Values: Current count is a double
word value accessed by referencing the
associated V or CT memory locations*.
The V-memory location is the counter
location + 1000. For example, the counter
current value for CT5 resides in V--memory
location V1005 and V1006. (V locations
are 16-bit words.)
Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status
bit is accessed by referencing the
associated CT memory location. It will be
on if value is equal to or greater than the
preset value. For example the discrete
status bit for counter 2 would be CT2.
Operand Data Type

UDC

5--51

Preset

The counter discrete status bit and the

current value is not specified in the
counter instruction.

Caution: The UDC uses two

consecutive counter locations,
since the preset can now be 8
digits, which requires two
V--memory locations. For
example, if UDC CT0 is used in
the program, the next available
counter is CT2. Or if CT0 was a
normal counter, and CT1 was an
up/down counter, then the next
available counter would be CT3.

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

aaa

CT

0--176

----

0--176

----

0--376

bbb
----

----

1400--7377
10000--37777

V--memory

----

1400--7377

----

1400--7377
10000--17777

Pointers
(preset only)

----

----

----

1400--7377
10000--17777

----

1400--7377
10000--37777

Constants

----

0--99999999

----

0--99999999

----

0--99999999

Counter discrete
status bits

CT

0--177

0--177

0--377

Counter current
values

V/
CT*

1000--1177

1000--1177

1000--1377

Standard
RLL Instructions

NOTE:* For the Handheld Programmer, both the Stage Counter discrete status bits
and current value can be accessed with the same data type (example CT2). The way
the data type is used determines if it is a status bit or a current value. Any comparative
instruction using CT2 will access the current value, all other instructions using CT2 will
access the status bit. Current values may also be accessed by the V-memory location.
For DirectSOFT, the use of CT2 will refer to the timers discrete status bit. You
should use V1002 (or the alias CTA2) to refer to the current value.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev.A

5--52

Standard RLL Instructions

Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions

Up/Down Counter
Example Using
Discrete Status
Bits

In the following example if X2 and X3 are off when X1 toggles from off to on the
counter will increment by one. If X1 and X3 are off the counter will decrement by one
when X2 toggles from off to on. When the count value reaches the preset value of 3,
the counter status bit will turn on. When the reset X3 turns on, the counter status bit
will turn off and the current value will be 0.
Counting Diagram

DirectSOFT
X1
UDC

CT2
X1

K3
X2

X2
X3
X3
Y10

Y10

CT2

Current
Value

OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)

STR

X(IN)

K(CON)

STR

X(IN)

STR

CNT

STR

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

SHFT

Up/Down Counter
Example Using
Comparative
Contacts

SHFT

CNT

In the following example, when X1 makes an off to on transition, counter CT2 will
increment by one. Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3 and Y4 at different
counts. The comparative contacts will turn off when the counter is reset. When the
reset X3 turns on, the counter status bit will turn off and the current value will be 0.
Counting Diagram

DirectSOFT (see Note)

X1
UDC

CT2
X1

V1400
X2

X2
X3
X3

CTA2

Y3

K1

Y3

OUT
Y4
CTA2

Y4

K2

Current
Value

OUT

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)

STR

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

STR

X(IN)

STR

CNT

STR

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

SHFT

SHFT

STR

CNT

K(CON)

CNT

K(CON)

NOTE: Since this representation is showing a DirectSOFT example, you would use
the alias CTA2 (or V1002) instead of CT2, which would be necessary for the
equivalent rung entered with the Handheld.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--53

Standard RLL Instructions

Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions

The Shift Register instruction shifts data

through a predefined number of control
relays. The control ranges in the shift
register block must start at the beginning
of an 8 bit boundary and end at the end of
an 8 bit boundary.
The Shift Register has three contacts.
S Data determines the value (1 or 0)
that will enter the register
S Clock shifts the bits one position
on each low to high transition
S Reset resets the Shift Register to
all zeros.

Shift Register
(SR)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

SR

DATA

From C aaa
CLOCK
To

C bbb

RESET

With each off to on transition of the clock input, the bits which make up the shift
register block are shifted by one bit position and the status of the data input is placed
into the starting bit position in the shift register. The direction of the shift depends on
the entry in the From and To fields. From C0 to C17 would define a block of sixteen
bits to be shifted from lower address to higher address. From C17 to C0 would define
a block of sixteen bits, to be shifted from higher address to lower address. The
maximum size of the shift register block depends on the number of available control
relays. The minimum block size is 8 control relays.
Operand Data Type

Control Relay

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

0--737

0--737

0--1777

0--1777

0--3777

0--3777

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT
X1

Data Input

From

X2

STR

X(IN)

STR

X(IN)

C0

STR

X(IN)

SR

C(CR)

C17

C(CR)

SR

Clock Input
To

X3

Reset Input

Inputs on Successive Scans

Data

Clock

Reset

--

--

C0

C17

Standard
RLL Instructions

Shift Register Bits

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev.A

5--54

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator/Data Stack, Load, and Output Instructions

Accumulator/Data Stack Load and Output Instructions

Using the
Accumulator

Copying Data to
the Accumulator

The accumulator in the DL405 series CPUs is a 32 bit register which is used as a
temporary storage location for data that is being copied or manipulated in some
manner. For example, you have to use the accumulator to perform math operations
such as add, subtract, multiply, etc. Since there are 32 bits, you can use up to an
8-digit BCD number, or a 32-bit 2s complement number. The accumulator is reset to
0 at the end of every CPU scan.
The Load and Out instructions and their variations are used to copy data from a
V--memory location to the accumulator, or, to copy data from the accumulator to
V--memory. The following example copies data from V-memory location V1400 to
V--memory location V1410.
X1

V1400

LD

V1400
Copy data from V1400 to the
lower 16 bits of the
accumulator

Unused accumulator bits

are set to zero
Acc. 0

OUT
V1410

V1410

Copy data from the lower 16 bits

of the accumulator to V1410

Since the accumulator is 32 bits and V--memory locations are 16 bits, the Load
Double and Out Double (or variations thereof) use two consecutive V--memory
locations or 8 digit BCD constants to copy data either to the accumulator from a
V--memory address or from a V--memory address to the accumulator. For example,
if you wanted to copy data from V--memory location V1400 and V1401 to V--memory
location V1410 and V1411, the most efficient way to perform this function would be
as follows:
X1

V1400

V1401

LDD
V1400

Acc. 6

Copy data from V1400 and

V1401 to the accumulator

OUTD
V1410

Standard
RLL Instructions

Copy data from the accumulator to

V1410 and V1411

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

V1411

V1410

5--55

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator/Data Stack Load and Output Instructions
Changing the
Accumulator Data

X1

Instructions that manipulate data also use the accumulator. The result of the
manipulated data resides in the accumulator. The data that was being manipulated
is cleared from the accumulator. The following example loads the constant BCD
value 4935 into the accumulator, shifts the data right 4 bits, and outputs the result to
V1410.
4

Constant

LD

6 5

4 3

K4935
Load the value 4935 into the
accumulator

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.

The upper 16 bits of the accumulator

will be set to 0
S S

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

SHFR
K4

Acc.

1
0

S S

Shifted out of
accumulator

6 5

4 3

Shift the data in the accumulator

4 bits (K4) to the right

OUT
V1410
0

Output the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator to V1410

V1410

Some of the data manipulation instructions use 32 bits. They use two consecutive
V--memory locations or 8 digit BCD constants to manipulate data in the accumulator.
The following example rotates the value 67053101 two bits to the right and outputs
the value to V1410 and V1411.
X1

Constant 6

LDD

K67053101
Load the value 67053101
into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.

6 5

4 3

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

6 5

4 3

S S

ROTR
K2
Rotate the data in the
accumulator 2 bits to the right

Acc.

0
1

0
1

0
1

1
0

S S

0
1

0
1

0
1

OUTD
V1410
Output the value in the
accumulator to V1410 and V1411

V1411

V1410

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard
RLL Instructions

0
1

5--56

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator/Data Stack, Load, and Output Instructions

The accumulator stack is used for instructions that require more than one parameter
Using the
Accumulator Stack to execute a function or for user defined functionality. The accumulator stack is used
when more than one Load type instruction is executed without the use of the Out
type instruction. The first load instruction in the scan places a value into the
accumulator. Every Load instruction thereafter without the use of an Out instruction
places a value into the accumulator and the value that was in the accumulator is
placed onto the accumulator stack. The Out instruction nullifies the previous load
instruction and does not place the value that was in the accumulator onto the
accumulator stack when the next load instruction is executed. Every time a value is
placed onto the accumulator stack the other values in the stack are pushed down
one location. The accumulator is eight levels deep (eight 32 bit registers). If there is a
value in the eighth location when a new value is placed onto the stack, the value in
the eighth location is pushed off the stack and cannot be recovered.
X1

Constant

LD
K3245
Load the value 3245 into the
accumulator

Acc. 0

Acc. 0

Accumulator Stack
Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

LD

Current Acc. value

Acc. 0

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

Bucket
Accumulator Stack

Previous Acc. value

Acc. 0

Bucket

Accumulator Stack

Previous Acc. value

Constant

Load the value 6363 into the

accumulator, pushing the value 5151
to the 1st stack location and the value
3245 to the 2nd stack location

Current Acc. value

Acc. 0

K6363

Previous Acc. value

LD

Standard
RLL Instructions

Constant

Load the value 5151 into the

accumulator, pushing the value 1234
onto the stack

Current Acc. value

Acc. X

K5151

Level 1

Level 2

1
5

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

X
Bucket

The POP instruction rotates values upward through the stack into the accumulator.
When a POP is executed the value which was in the accumulator is cleared and the
value that was on top of the stack is in the accumulator. The values in the stack are
shifted up one position in the stack.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator/Data Stack Load and Output Instructions

X1

5--57

Previous Acc. value

POP

Acc. X
POP the 1st value on the stack into the
accumulator and move stack values
up one location

X
Accumulator Stack

Current Acc. value

Acc. 0

OUT

V1400

V1400

Copy data from the accumulator to

V1400

Level 1

Level 2

2
0

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

Previous Acc. value

POP

Acc. 0
POP the 1st value on the stack into the
accumulator and move stack values
up one location

Accumulator Stack

Current Acc. value

Acc. 0

OUT

V1400

V1401

Copy data from the accumulator to

V1401
Previous Acc. value
POP

Acc. 0

Accumulator Stack

Current Acc. value

POP the 1st value on the stack into the
accumulator and move stack values
up one location

OUT
V1402

Acc. X

V1400

Copy data from the accumulator to

V1402

Accumulator and
Accumulator Stack
Memory Locations
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Accumulator
0

V701

V700

Accumulator Stack
Level 1

V703 -- V702

Level 2

V705 -- V704

Level 3

V707 -- V706

Level 4

V711 -- V710

Level 5

V713 -- V712

Level 6

V715 -- V714

Level 7

V717 -- V716

Level 8

V721 -- V720

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard
RLL Instructions

There may be times when you want to

read a value that has been placed onto the
accumulator stack without having to pop
the stack first. Both the accumulator and
the
accumulator
stack
have
corresponding V-memory locations that
can be accessed by the program.
You cannot write to these locations, but
you can read them or use them in
comparative boolean instructions, etc.

5--58

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator/Data Stack, Load, and Output Instructions

Using Pointers

Many of the DL405 series instructions will allow V--memory pointers as a operand.
Pointers can be useful in ladder logic programming, but can be difficult to understand
or implement in your application if you do not have prior experience with pointers
(commonly known as indirect addressing). Pointers allow instructions to obtain data
from V--memory locations referenced by the pointer value.
NOTE: In the DL405 V-memory addressing is in octal. However the value in the
pointer location which will reference a V-memory location is viewed as HEX. Use the
Load Address instruction to move a address into the pointer location. This instruction
performs the Octal to Hexadecimal conversion for you.
The following example uses a pointer operand in a Load instruction. V-memory
location 1400 is the pointer location. V1400 contains the value 340 which is the HEX
equivalent of the Octal address V-memory location V1500. The CPU copies the data
from V1500 (contains 2635) into the lower word of the accumulator.

X1

LD
P1400
V1400 (P1400) contains the value 340
Hex. 340 Hex. = 1500 Octal which
contains the value 2635.
V1400
0

V1476

V1477

V1500

V1501

V1502

V1503

V1504

V1505

OUT

Accumulator
2

S
S

V1600
Copy the data from the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator to V1600.

V1600

V1601

The following example is similar to the one above, except for the LDA (load address)
instruction which automatically converts the Octal address to the Hex equivalent.
X1

LDA
O 1500

OUT
V 1400

LD
P 1400

Load the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator with Hexadecimal
equivalent to Octal 1500 (340)

0
1500 Octal is converted to Hexadecimal
340 and loaded into the accumulator

Unused accumulator bits

are set to zero

Copy the data from the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator to V1400

Acc. 0

V1400 (P1400) contains the value 340

HEX 340 HEX. = 1500 Octal which
contains the value 2635

V1400
OUT

Standard
RLL Instructions

V 1600

Copy the data from the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator to V1600

S
S

V1400
0

V1476

V1477

V1500

V1501

V1502

V1503

V1504

V1505

S
S

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

V1600

V1601

Accumulator
0

5--59

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator/Data Stack Load and Output Instructions

The Load instruction is a 16 bit instruction

that loads the value (Aaaa) (either a
V-memory location or a 4 digit constant) into
the lower 16 accumulator bits. The upper 16
accumulator bits are set to 0.

Load
(LD)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

430 440 450

DS

HPP

A aaa

The Load Double instruction is a 32 bit

instruction that loads the value (Aaaa),
which is either two consecutive V--memory
locations or an 8 digit constant value, into
the accumulator.

Load Double
(LDD)
  


LD

Operand Data Type

LDD
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

A
V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All V mem (See p. 3--40)

All V mem (See p. 3--41)

All V mem (See p. 3--42)

Constant

0--FFFF

0--FFFF

0--FFFF

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP76

on when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.

NOTE: Two consecutive Load or Load Double instructions will place the value of the
first load instruction onto the accumulator stack.
In the following Load example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into
the accumulator and output to V1500.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT
X1

LD
V1400
Load the value in V1400 into the
lower 16 bits of the accumulator

V1400

STR

X(IN)

LD

OUT

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero
Acc. 0

OUT
V1500
Copy the value in the lower 16
bits of the accumulator to V1500

V1500

In the following example, when X1 is on, the 32 bit value in V1400 and V1401 will be
loaded into the accumulator and output to V1500 and V1501.
DirectSOFT
X1

V1500

Copy the value in the 32 bit

accumulator to V1500 and
V1501

OUTD

V1401

V1400

Acc. 6

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

V1501

V1500

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard
RLL Instructions

V1400

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 into the 32 bit
accumulator

LDD

5--60

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator/Data Stack, Load, and Output Instructions

The Load Formatted instruction loads 1--32

consecutive bits from discrete memory
locations into the accumulator. The
instruction requires a starting location
(Aaaa) and the number of bits (Kbbb) to be
loaded. Unused accumulator bit locations
are set to zero.

Load
Formatted
(LDF)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

LDF

A aaa
K bbb

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

Inputs

0--477

----

0--1777

----

Outputs

0--477

----

0--1777

----

Control Relays

0--1777

----

0--3777

----

Stage Bits

0--1777

----

0--1777

----

Timer Bits

0--377

----

0--377

----

Counter Bits

CT

0--177

----

0--377

----

Special Relays

SP

0--137 320--717

----

0--137 320--717

----

Global I/O

GX

0--1777

----

0--2777

----

Constant

----

1--32

----

1--32

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP76

on when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.

NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load
instruction onto the accumulator stack.
In the following example, when C0 is on, the binary pattern of C10--C16 (7 bits) will
be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The lower 6
bits of the accumulator are output to Y20--Y26 using the Out Formatted instruction.
DirectSOFT
C0

LDF

C10
K7

Load the status of 7

consecutive bits (C10--C16)
into the accumulator

Location

Constant

C10

K7

C16 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10

OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF

The unused accumulator bits are set to zero

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.

OUTF

6 5

4 3

Y20
K7

Standard
RLL Instructions

Copy the value from the

specified number of bits in
the accumulator to Y20--Y26

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

C(CR)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

C(CR)

K(CON)

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

K(CON)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Location

Constant

Y26 Y25 Y24 Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20

Y20

K7

OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF

5--61

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator/Data Stack Load and Output Instructions

Load Address
(LDA)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Load Address instruction is a 16 bit

instruction. It converts any octal value or
address to the HEX equivalent value and
loads the HEX value into the accumulator.
This instruction is useful when an address
parameter is required since all addresses
for the DL405 system are in octal.
Operand Data Type

Octal Address

LDA
O aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

0 -- 77777

0 -- 77777

0 -- 177777

DL450 Range

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP76

on when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.

NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load
instruction onto the accumulator stack.
In the following example when X1 is on, the octal number 40400 will be converted to
a HEX 4100 and loaded into the accumulator using the Load Address instruction.
The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator is copied to V1440 using the Out
instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1

Octal

LDA
4

O 40400
Load The HEX equivalent to
the octal number into the
lower 16 bits of the
accumulator

Hexadecimal
0

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero
Acc. 0

OUT
V1440

V1440

Copy the value in lower 16

bits of the accumulator to
V1440
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

OCT

OUT

Standard
RLL Instructions
DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--62

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator/Data Stack, Load, and Output Instructions

Load Accumulator Indexed is a 16 bit

instruction that specifies a source address
(V--memory) which will be offset by the value
in the first stack location. This instruction
interprets the value in the first stack location
as HEX. The value in the offset address
(source address + offset) is loaded into the
lower 16 bits of the accumulator. The upper
16 bits of the accumulator are set to 0.

Load Accumulator
Indexed
(LDX)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

LDX
A aaa

Helpful Hint: The Load Address instruction can be used to convert an octal
address to a HEX address and load the value into the accumulator.
Operand Data Type

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL440 Range
aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

----

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP76

on when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.

NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load
instruction onto the accumulator stack.
In the following example when X1 is on, the HEX equivalent for octal 25 will be
loaded into the accumulator (this value will be placed on the stack when the Load
Accumulator Indexed instruction is executed). V--memory location V1410 will be
added to the value in the 1st. level of the stack and the value in this location (V1435 =
2345) is loaded into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator using the Load Accumulator
Indexed instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator is output to
V1500 using the Out instruction.
X1

Octal

LDA

O 25
Load The HEX equivalent to
octal 25 into the lower 16
bits of the accumulator

Hexadecimal

V 1

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero
Acc. 0

LDX
V1410

HEX Value in 1st

stack location

Octal

Move the offset to the stack.

Load the accumulator with
the address to be offset

V 1

Accumulator Stack

Octal

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

OUT

Acc. 0

V1500

Standard
RLL Instructions

The value in V1435

is 2345

Copy the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator
to V1500

V1500

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

OCT

LD

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

5--63

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator/Data Stack Load and Output Instructions

Load Accumulator
Indexed from
Data Constants
(LDSX)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Load Accumulator Indexed from Data

Constants is a 16 bit instruction. The
instruction specifies a Data Label Area
(DLBL) where numerical or ASCII
constants are stored. This value will be
loaded into accumulators lower 16 bits.

LDSX
K aaa

The LDSX instruction uses the value in the first level of the accumulator stack as an
offset to determine which numerical or ASCII constant within the Data Label Area will
be loaded into the accumulator. The LDSX instruction interprets the value in the first
level of the accumulator stack as a HEX value.
Helpful Hint: The Load Address instruction can be used to convert octal to HEX
and load the value into the accumulator.
Operand Data Type

DL440 Range

Constant

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

1--FFFF

1--FFFF

NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load
instruction onto the accumulator stack.
In the following example when X1 is on, the Load instruction loads the offset of 1 into
the accumulator. When the LDSX instruction executes, this value is placed into the
first level of the accumulator stack. The LDSX instruction specifies the Data Label
(DLBL K2) where the numerical constant(s) are located in the program. It loads the
constant value according to the offset value into the accumulators lower 16 bits.
X1

Hexadecimal

LD

K1
Load the offset value of 1 (K1) into
the lower 16 bits of the accumulator.

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero
Acc. 0

Accumulator Stack

LDSX
K2
Constant

Move the offset to the stack.

Load the accumulator with the
data label number

Acc. 0

V1500

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

Copy the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator
to V1500

S
S
S

DLBL

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

OUT

Value in 1st. level of stack is

used as offset. The value is 1

END
K2

K3333

Offset 0

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero
Acc. 0

NCON
K2323

NCON
K4549

Offset 1

Offset 2

V1500

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard
RLL Instructions

NCON

5--64

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator/Data Stack, Load, and Output Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

K(CON)

LD

SHFT

K(CON)

OUT

END
D

K(CON)

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

Load Real Number The Load Real Number instruction loads a

real number contained in two consecutive
(LDR)
V-memory locations, or an 8-digit constant
  
into the accumulator.
430 440 450


DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

aaa

All V mem (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All V mem (See p. 3--42)

Real Constant

Full IEEE 32-bit range

DirectSOFT allows you to enter real

numbers directly, by using the leading R
to indicate a real number entry. You can
enter a constant such as Pi, shown in the
example to the right. To enter negative
numbers, use a minus (--) after the R.
For very large numbers or very small
numbers, you can use exponential
notation. The number to the right is 5.3
million. The OUTD instruction stores it in
V1400 and V1401.

Standard
RLL Instructions

A aaa

DL450 Range
A

V--memory

LDR

LDR
R3.14159

LDR
R5.3E6
OUTD
V1400

These real numbers are in the IEEE 32-bit floating point format, so they occupy two
V-memory locations, regardless of how big or small the number may be! If you view a
stored real number in hex, binary, or even BCD, the number shown will be very
difficult to decipher. Just like all other number types, you must keep track of real
number locations in memory, so they can be read with the proper instructions later.
The previous example above stored a real
number in V1400 and V1401. Suppose
that now we want to retrieve that number.
Just use the Load Real with the V data
type, as shown to the right. Next we could
perform real math on it, or convert it to a
binary number.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

LDR
V1400

5--65

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator/Data Stack Load and Output Instructions

The Out instruction is a 16 bit instruction

that copies the value in the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator to a specified V--memory
location (Aaaa).

Out
(OUT)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

DL430 Range

OUT
A aaa

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the
lower 16 bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the lower 16
bits of the accumulator is copied to V1500 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1

V1400

Load the value in V1400 into

the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator

V1500

Copy the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator to
V1500

LD

OUT

V1400
8

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero
Acc. 0

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

430 440 450

DS

HPP

X(IN)

LD

OUT

V1500

The Out Double instruction is a 32 bit

instruction that copies the value in the
accumulator to two consecutive V--memory
locations at a Specified starting location
(Aaaa).

Out DOUBLE
(OUTD)
  


STR

Operand Data Type

OUTD
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All V mem (See p. 3--40)

All V mem (See p. 3--41)

All V mem (See p. 3--42)

In the following example, when X1 is on, the 32 bit value in V1400 and V1401 will be
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the
accumulator is output to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT

V1401

X1

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 into the accumulator

LDD
V1400

V1500

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Acc. 6

V1501

STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

V1500

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard
RLL Instructions

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500 and
V1501

OUTD

V1400

5--66

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator/Data Stack, Load, and Output Instructions

The Out Formatted instruction outputs 1--32

bits from the accumulator to the specified
discrete memory locations. The instruction
requires a starting location (Aaaa) for the
destination and the number of bits (Kbbb) to
be output.

Out
Formatted
(OUTF)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

OUTF
A aaa
K bbb

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

Inputs

0--477

----

0--1777

----

Outputs

0--477

----

0--1777

-------

Control Relays

0--1777

----

0--3777

Global I/O

GX

0--1777

----

0--2777

----

Constant

----

1--32

----

1--32

In the following example, when C0 is on, the binary pattern of C10--C16 (7 bits) will
be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The lower 7
bits of the accumulator are output to Y20--Y26 using the Out Formatted instruction.
DirectSOFT
C0

LDF

C10
K7

Load the status of 7

consecutive bits (C10--C16)
into the accumulator

Location

Constant

C10

K7

C16 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10

OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF

The unused accumulator bits are set to zero

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0

6 5

4 3

Accumulator
OUTF

Y20
K7

Copy the value of the

specified number of bits
from the accumulator to
Y20--Y26
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
C(CR)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

C(CR)

K(CON)

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

K(CON)

Standard
RLL Instructions

STR

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Location

Constant

Y26 Y25 Y24 Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20

Y20

K7

OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF

5--67

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator/Data Stack Load and Output Instructions

The Out Indexed instruction is a 16 bit

instruction. It copies a 16 bit or 4 digit value
from the first level of the accumulator stack
to a source address offset by the value in
the accumulator(V--memory + offset).This
instruction interprets the offset value as a
HEX number. The upper 16 bits of the
accumulator are set to zero.

Out Indexed
(OUTX)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

OUTX
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value 3544 is loaded into the
accumulator. This is the value that will be output to the specified offset V--memory
location (V1525). The value 3544 will be placed onto the stack when the Load
Address instruction is executed. Remember, two consecutive Load instructions
places the value of the first load instruction onto the stack. The Load Address
instruction converts octal 25 to HEX 15 and places the value in the accumulator. The
Out Indexed instruction outputs the value 3544 which resides in the first level of the
accumulator stack to V1525.
DirectSOFT

Constant

X1

LD

V 1

K3544
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero

Load the accumulator with

the value 3544

Acc. 0

O 25
Load The HEX equivalent to
octal 25 into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator. This is the
offset for the Out Indexed
instruction, which determines
the final destination address

HEX

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero
Acc. 0

OUTX

V1500

Octal
5 0 0

LD

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

5 =

OCT

SHFT

Octal

2
4

V1525

5
4

Accumulator Stack
Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard
RLL Instructions

LD

Octal
+ 2

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

1

The hex 15 converts

to 25 octal, which is
added to the base
address of V1500 to yield
the final destination.

Copy the value in the first

level of the stack to the
offset address 1525
(V1500 + 25)

X(IN)

Octal

LDA

STR

5--68

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator/Data Stack, Load, and Output Instructions

Out Least
(OUTL)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Out Least instruction copies the value in

the lower eight bits of the accumulator to the
lower eight bits of the specified V-memory
location (i.e., it copies the low byte of the low
word of the accumulator).

OUTL
A aaa

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the
lower 16 bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the lower 8
bits of the accumulator are copied to V1500 using the Out Least instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1

V1400

Load the value in V1400 into

the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator

V1500

Copy the value in the lower

8 bits of the accumulator to
V1500.

LD

OUTL

V1400
8

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero
Acc. 0

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

OUT

Out Most
(OUTM)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

SHFT

SHFT

The Out Most instruction copies the value in

the upper eight bits of the lower sixteen bits
of the accumulator to the upper eight bits of
the specified V-memory location (i.e., it
copies the high byte of the low word of the
accumulator).
Operand Data Type

V1500

OUTM
A aaa

DL450 Range
A

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All (See p. 3--42)

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the
lower 16 bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the upper 8
bits of the lower 16 bits of the accumulator is copied to V1500 using the Out Most
instruction.
DirectSOFT

Standard
RLL Instructions

X1

V1400

Load the value in V1400 into

the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator

V1500

Copy the value in the upper

8 bits of the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator to V1500.

LD

OUTM

V1400
8

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero
Acc. 0

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

V1500

5--69

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator/Data Stack Load and Output Instructions

The Pop instruction moves the value from

the first level of the accumulator stack (32
bits) to the accumulator and shifts each
value in the stack up one level.

Pop
(POP)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

POP

In the example below, when C0 is on the Pop instruction moves the value 4545
currently on top of the stack into the accumulator. The value is output to V1400 using
the Out instruction. The next Pop moves the value 3792 into the accumulator and
outputs the value to V1401. The last Pop moves the value 7930 into the accumulator
and outputs it to V1402. Remember to use Out Double instructions if the value in the
stack uses more than 16 bits (4 digits). Each value will occupy two V-memory
locations.
Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

on when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

DirectSOFT

Accumulator Stack before POP

C0

POP

Pop the 1st. value on the stack into the

accumulator and move stack values
up one location
OUT
V1400

Previous Acc. value

Acc. X

Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator to V1400

Pop the 1st. value on the stack into the

accumulator and move stack values
up one location

V1400

OUT

Previous Acc. value

V1401

Acc. 0
Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator to V1401

Pop the 1st. value on the stack into the

accumulator and move stack values
up one location

Previous Acc. value

V1402

Acc. 0

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

Accumulator Stack
0

V1402

1
OUT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard
RLL Instructions

Acc. 0

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

OUT

Current Acc. value

Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator to V1402

V1401

OUT

Accumulator Stack

POP

SHFT

Current Acc. value

Acc. 0

Accumulator Stack

POP

C(CR)

Level 2

Current Acc. value

Acc. 0

STR

Level 1

5--70

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator Logic Instructions

Accumulator Logic Instructions

The And instruction is a 16 bit instruction
that logically ands the value in the lower 16
bits of the accumulator with a specified V-memory location (Aaaa). The result
resides in the in the accumulator. The
discrete status flag indicates if the result of
the And is zero.

And
(AND)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

AND
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

----

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero

DL450 Range

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is Anted
with the value in V1420 using the And instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator is output to V1500 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1

V1400

LD

V1400
Load the value in V1400 into the
lower 16 bits of the accumulator

The upper 16 bits of the accumulator

will be set to 0
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

6 5

4 3

Acc.

6A38
AND (V1420)

1
0

Acc.
AND
V1420
AND the value in the
accumulator with
the value in V1420

Acc.
OUT
V1500

Copy the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator to V1500

V1500

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

AND

OUT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--71

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator Logic Instructions

The And Double is a 32 bit instruction that

logically ands the value in the accumulator
with two consecutive V--memory locations
or an 8 digit (max.) constant value (Aaaa).
The result resides in the accumulator.
Discrete status flags indicate if the result
of the And Double is zero or a negative
number (the most significant bit is on).

And Double
(ANDD)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

ANDD
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

V--memory

----

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

----

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

0--FFFF

0--FFFF

0--FFFF

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero

SP70

Will be on is the result in the accumulator is negative

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the
accumulator is Anted with V1420 and V1421 using the And double instruction. The
value in the accumulator is output to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double
instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1

V1400

V1401

LDD

V1400

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.

6 5

4 3

0
1

0
1

0
1

0
1

ANDD
V1420

Acc.

36476A38
AND the value in the
AND (V1421 and V1420) 0
accumulator with
the value in
V1420 and V1421
Acc. 0
OUTD
V1500

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500 and
V1501
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

V1501

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

AND

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

V1500

Standard
RLL Instructions

STR

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--72

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator Logic Instructions

The And Formatted instruction logically

ANDs the binary value in the accumulator
and a specified range of discrete memory
bits (1--32). The instruction requires a
starting location (Aaaa) and number of bits
(Kbbb) to be ANDed. Discrete status flags
indicate if the result is zero or a negative
number (the most significant bit =1).

And
Formatted
(ANDF)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

ANDF
A aaa
K bbb

DL440 Range

Inputs

DL450 Range

A/B

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

0--477

----

0--1777

----

Outputs

0--477

----

0--1777

----

Control Relays

0--1777

----

0--3777

----

Stage Bits

0--1777

----

0--1777

----

Timer Bits

0--377

----

0--377

----

Counter Bits

CT

0--177

----

0--377

----

Special Relays

SP

0--137 320--717

----

0--137 320--717

----

Global I/O

GX

0--1777

----

0--2777

----

Constant

----

1--32

----

1--32

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero

SP70

Will be on is the result in the accumulator is negative

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on the Load Formatted instruction loads
C10--C13 (4 binary bits) into the accumulator. The accumulator contents is logically
ANDed with the bit pattern from Y20--Y23 using the And Formatted instruction. The
Out Formatted instruction outputs the accumulators lower four bits to C20--C23.
DirectSOFT
X1

LDF

C10
K4

Load the status of 4

consecutive bits (C10--C13)
into the accumulator

Location

Constant

C10

K4

ON ON ON OFF

The unused accumulator bits are set to zero

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

ANDF

Y20

K4
Acc.

6 5

4 3

Acc.

Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20

AND (Y20--Y23)

Standard
RLL Instructions

Accumulator

And the binary bit pattern

(Y20--Y23) with the value in
the accumulator
OUTF

C13 C12 C11 C10

ON OFF OFF OFF

C20
K4

Copy the value in the lower

4 bits in accumulator to
C20--C23
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

C(CR)

K(CON)

AND

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

K(CON)

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

C(CR)

K(CON)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Location

Constant

C23 C22 C21 C20

C20

K4

ON OFF OFF OFF

5--73

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator Logic Instructions

And with Stack

(ANDS)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The And with Stack instruction is a 32 bit

instruction that logically ands the value in
the accumulator with the first level of the
accumulator stack. The result resides in
the accumulator. The value in the first level
of the accumulator stack is removed from
the stack and all values are moved up one
level. Discrete status flags indicate if the
result of the And with Stack is zero or a
negative number (the most significant bit
is on).

ANDS

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero

SP70

Will be on is the result in the accumulator is negative

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example when X1 is on, the binary value in the accumulator will be
Anted with the binary value in the first level or the accumulator stack. The result
resides in the accumulator. The 32 bit value is then output to V1500 and V1501.
DirectSOFT
X1

V1401

LDD

V1400

V1400
E

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

6 5

4 3

Acc.

36476A38
AND (top of stack)

0
1

0
1

0
1

0
1

Acc.
ANDS

AND the value in the

accumulator with
the first level of the
accumulator stack

Acc.

OUTD
V1500
1

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500 and
V1501

V1501

V1500

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

AND

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

Standard
RLL Instructions
DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--74

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator Logic Instructions

The Or instruction is a 16 bit instruction

that logically ors the value in the lower 16
bits of the accumulator with a specified V-memory location (Aaaa). The result
resides in the in the accumulator. The
discrete status flag indicates if the result of
the Or is zero.

Or
(OR)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

OR
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

----

All V mem (See p. 3--41)

All V mem (See p. 3--42)

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is Hoped with
V1420 using the Or instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator is
output to V1500 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1

V1400

LD

V1400
Load the value in V1400 into
the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator

The upper 16 bits of the accumulator

will be set to 0
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

6 5

4 3

Acc.

6A38
OR (V1420)

1
0

Acc.
OR
V1420
Or the value in the
accumulator with
the value in V1420

Acc.
OUT
V1500

Standard
RLL Instructions

Copy the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator to
V1500
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR

X(IN)

V1500

LD

OR

OUT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--75

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator Logic Instructions

The OR Double is a 32 bit instruction that

ORs the value in the accumulator with the
value (Aaaa), which is either two
consecutive V--memory locations or an 8
digit (max.) constant value. The result
resides in the accumulator. Discrete
status flags indicate if the result of the Or
Double is zero or a negative number (the
most significant bit is on).

Or Double
(ORD)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

ORD
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

V--memory

----

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

----

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

0--FFFF

0--FFFF

0--FFFF

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero

SP70

Will be on is the result in the accumulator is negative

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the
accumulator is Hoped with V1420 and V1421 using the Or Double instruction. The
value in the accumulator is output to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double
instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1

V1401

LDD

V1400

V1400
E

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 into accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.

6 5

4 3

ORD
V1420

Acc.

36476A38
OR the value in the
OR (V1421 and V1420) 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1
accumulator with
the value in V1420 and
V1421
0 1
0 1
0 0 1 1
0 0 0 1
0 1
0 1
0 1
0 1
0 1
0 1
0
Acc. 0 1
OUTD
V1500
7

V1501

V1500

Standard
RLL Instructions

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500 and
V1501
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

OR

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--76

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator Logic Instructions

The Or Formatted instruction logically

ORs the binary value in the accumulator
and a specified range of discrete bits
(1--32). The instruction requires a starting
location (Aaaa) and the number of bits
(Kbbb) to be ORed. Discrete status flags
indicate if the result is zero or negative (the
most significant bit =1).

Or
Formatted
(ORF)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

ORF

A aaa
K bbb

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

A/B

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

0--477

----

0--1777

----

Inputs
Outputs

0--477

----

0--1777

----

Control Relays

0--1777

----

0--3777

----

Stage Bits

0--1777

----

0--1777

----

Timer Bits

0--377

----

0--377

----

Counter Bits

CT

0--177

----

0--377

----

Special Relays

SP

0--137 320--717

----

0--137 320--717

----

Global I/O

GX

0--1777

----

0--2777

----

Constant

----

1--32

----

1--32

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero

SP70

Will be on is the result in the accumulator is negative

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on the Load Formatted instruction loads
C10--C13 (4 binary bits) into the accumulator. The Or Formatted instruction logically
ORs the accumulator contents with Y20--Y23 bit pattern. The Out Formatted
instruction outputs the accumulators lower four bits to C20--C23.
DirectSOFT
X1

LDF

C10
K4

Load the status of 4

consecutive bits (C10--C13)
into the accumulator
ORF

K4

Or the binary bit pattern

(Y20--Y23) with the value in
the accumulator

6 5

4 3

Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20

OR (Y20--Y23)

C20

C13 C12 C11 C10

OFF ON ON OFF

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.

K4

Acc.

K4

Standard
RLL Instructions

Constant

The unused accumulator bits are set to zero

Y20

OUTF

Location
C10

ON OFF OFF OFF

0

Copy the specified number

of bits from the accumulator
to C20--C23
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

C(CR)

K(CON)

OR

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

K(CON)

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

C(CR)

K(CON)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Location

Constant

C23 C22 C21 C20

C20

K4

ON ON ON OFF

5--77

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator Logic Instructions

The Or with Stack instruction is a 32 bit

instruction that logically ors the value in
the accumulator with the first level of the
accumulator stack. The result resides in
the accumulator. The value in the first level
of the accumulator stack is removed from
the stack and all values are moved up one
level. Discrete status flags indicate if the
result of the Or with Stack is zero or a
negative number (the most significant bit
is on).

Or with Stack
(ORS)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

ORS

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero

SP70

Will be on is the result in the accumulator is negative

In the following example when X1 is on, the binary value in the accumulator will be
Hoped with the binary value in the first level of the stack. The result resides in the
accumulator.
DirectSOFT
X1

V1401

LDD

V1400

V1400
E

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

6 5

4 3

Acc.

36476A38
Or (Top of stack)

0
1

0
1

0
1

0
1

0
1

0
1

0
1

0
1

0
1

0
1

0
1

Acc.
ORS

OR the value in the

accumulator with the value
in the first level of the
accumulator stack

Acc.

OUTD
V1500
7

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500 and
V1501

V1501

V1500

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

OR

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

Standard
RLL Instructions
DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--78

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator Logic Instructions

The Exclusive Or instruction is a 16 bit

instruction that performs an exclusive or of
the value in the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator and a specified V--memory
location (Aaaa). The discrete status flag
indicates if the result of the Xor is zero.

Exclusive Or
(XOR)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

XOR
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

----

All V mem (See p. 3--41)

All V mem (See p. 3--42)

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is exclusive
Hoped with V1420 using the Exclusive Or instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator is output to V1500 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1

V1400

LD

V1400
Load the value in V1400 into
the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator

The upper 16 bits of the accumulator

will be set to 0
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

6 5

4 3

Acc.

6A38
XOR (V1420)

1
0

Acc.
XOR
V1420
XOR the value in the
accumulator with
the value in V1420

Acc.
OUT
V1500

Copy the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator to V1500

V1500

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

OR

OUT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--79

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator Logic Instructions

The Exclusive OR Double is a 32 bit

instruction that performs an exclusive or of
the value in the accumulator and the value
(Aaaa), which is either two consecutive V-memory locations or an 8 digit (max.)
constant. The result resides in the
accumulator. Discrete status flags
indicate if the result of the Exclusive Or
Double is zero or a negative number (the
most significant bit is on).

Exclusive Or
Double
(XORD)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

XORD
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

V--memory

----

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

----

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

0--FFFF

0--FFFF

0--FFFF

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero

SP70

Will be on is the result in the accumulator is negative

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the
accumulator is exclusively Hoped with V1420 and V1421 using the Exclusive Or
Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is output to V1500 and V1501 using
the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1

V1401

LDD

V1400

V1400
E

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.

6 5

4 3

XORD
V1420

36476A38
XORD (V1421 and V1420) 0

0
1

0
1

1
0

0
1

0
1

0
1

0
1

0
1

Acc.

XORD the value in the

accumulator with
the value in V1420
and V1421

Acc.

OUTD
V1500
6

STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

V1501

SHFT

SHFT

OR

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

V1500

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard
RLL Instructions

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500
and V1501
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

5--80

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator Logic Instructions

The Exclusive Or Formatted instruction

performs an exclusive OR of the binary
value in the accumulator and a specified
range of discrete memory bits (1--32).

Exclusive Or
Formatted
(XORF)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

XORF
A aaa
K bbb

The instruction requires a starting location (Aaaa) and the number of bits (Bbbb) to
be exclusive ORed. Discrete status flags indicate if the result of the Exclusive Or
Formatted is zero or negative (the most significant bit =1).
Operand Data Type

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

A/B

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

0--477

----

0--1777

----

Inputs
Outputs

0--477

----

0--1777

----

Control Relays

0--1777

----

0--3777

----

Stage Bits

0--1777

----

0--1777

----

Timer Bits

0--377

----

0--377

----

Counter Bits

CT

0--177

----

0--377

----

Special Relays

SP

0--137 320--717

----

0--137 320--717

----

Global I/O

GX

0--1777

----

0--2777

----

Constant

----

1--32

----

1--32

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero

SP70

Will be on is the result in the accumulator is negative

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the binary pattern of C10--C13 (4 bits) will be
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The value in the
accumulator will be logically Exclusive Hoped with the bit pattern from Y20--Y23
using the Exclusive Or Formatted instruction. The value in the lower 4 bits of the
accumulator is output to C20--C23 using the Out Formatted instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1

LDF

C10

Location

Constant

C10

K4

C13 C12 C11 C10

OFF ON ON OFF

K4
Load the status of 4
consecutive bits (C10--C13)
into the accumulator
XORF

The unused accumulator bits are set to zero

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

Y20

K4

6 5

4 3

Acc.

Accumulator

Exclusive Or the binary bit

pattern (Y20--Y23) with the
value in the accumulator.
OUTF

C20

Acc.

Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20

XORF (Y20--Y23)

ON OFF ON OFF

Standard
RLL Instructions

K4
Copy the specified number
of bits from the accumulator
to C20--C23
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

C(CR)

K(CON)

SHFT

SHFT

OR

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

C(CR)

K(CON)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

K(CON)

Location

Constant

C20

K4

C23 C22 C21 C20

ON ON OFF OFF

5--81

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator Logic Instructions

Exclusive Or with
Stack
(XORS)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Exclusive Or with Stack instruction is

a 32 bit instruction that performs an
exclusive or of the value in the
accumulator with the first level of the
accumulator stack. The result resides in
the accumulator. The value in the first level
of the accumulator stack is removed from
the stack and all values are moved up one
level. Discrete status flags indicate if the
result of the Exclusive Or with Stack is
zero or a negative number (the most
significant bit is on).

XORS

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero

SP70

Will be on is the result in the accumulator is negative

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example when X1 is on, the binary value in the accumulator will be
exclusive Hoped with the binary value in the first level of the accumulator stack. The
result will reside in the accumulator.
DirectSOFT
X1

V1400

V1401

LDD

V1400

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.

6 5

4 3

0
1

0
1

1
0

0
1

0
1

0
1

0
1

0
1

XORS
Acc.
36476A38
Exclusive OR the value
in the accumulator with XOR (1st level of stack)
the value in the first
level of the
Acc.
accumulator stack
OUTD
V1500
6

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500 and
V1501

V1501

V1500

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

OR

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

Standard
RLL Instructions

LD
SHFT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--82

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator Logic Instructions

Compare
(CMP)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The compare instruction is a 16 bit

instruction that compares the value in the
lower 16 bits of the accumulator with the
value in a specified V--memory location
(Aaaa). The corresponding status flag will
be turned on indicating the result of the
comparison. You can compare either
binary or BCD numbers, as long as both
numbers are of the same data type.
Operand Data Type

CMP
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

----

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP60

On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value.

SP61

On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value.

SP62

On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction

value.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example when X1 is on, the constant 4526 will be loaded into the
lower 16 bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the
accumulator is compared with the value in V1410 using the Compare instruction.
The corresponding discrete status flag will be turned on indicating the result of the
comparison. In this example, if the value in the accumulator is less than the value
specified in the Compare instruction, SP60 will turn on energizing C30.
DirectSOFT
X1

K4526

Load the constant value

4526 into the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator

V1410

Compare the value in the

accumulator with the value
in V1410

LD

CMP

SP60

Standard
RLL Instructions

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero
Acc. 0

C30
OUT

Compared
with
8

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

V1410

STR

X(IN)

LD

K(CON)

CMP

STR

SPCL

OUT

C(CR)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Constant
4

5--83

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator Logic Instructions

Compare Double
(CMPD)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Compare Double instruction is a

32--bit instruction that compares the value
in the accumulator with the value (Aaaa),
which is either two consecutive
V--memory locations or an 8--digit (max.)
constant. The corresponding status flag
will be turned on indicating the result of the
comparison. You can compare either
binary or BCD numbers, as long as both
numbers are of the same data type.
Operand Data Type

CMPD
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

V--memory

----

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

----

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

0--FFFFFFFF

0--FFFFFFFF

0--FFFFFFFF

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP60

On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value.

SP61

On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value.

SP62

On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction

value.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the
accumulator is compared with the value in V1410 and V1411 using the CMPD
instruction. The corresponding discrete status flag will be turned on indicating the
result of the comparison. In this example, if the value in the accumulator is less than
the value specified in the Compare instruction, SP60 will turn on energizing C30.
DirectSOFT
X1

V1400

Compare the value in the

accumulator with the value
in V1410 and V1411

CMPD
V1410

SP60

V1400

V1401

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 into the accumulator

LDD

Acc. 4

Compared
with

C30
OUT
6

V1411

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

CMP

SHFT

SHFT

STR

SPCL

OUT

C(CR)

V1410

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard
RLL Instructions

STR

5--84

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator Logic Instructions

The Compare Formatted compares the

value in the accumulator with a specified
number of discrete locations (1--32). The
instruction requires a starting location
(Aaaa) and the number of bits (Kbbb) to be
compared. The corresponding status flag
will be turned on indicating the result of the
comparison.

Compare
Formatted
(CMPF)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

CMPF
A aaa
K bbb

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

A/B

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

Inputs

0--477

----

0--1777

----

Outputs

0--477

----

0--1777

----

Control Relays

0--1777

----

0--3777

----

Stage Bits

0--1777

----

0--1777

----

Timer Bits

0--377

----

0--377

----

Counter Bits

CT

0--177

----

0--377

----

Special Relays

SP

0--137 320--717

----

0--137 320--717

----

Global I/O

GX

0--1777

----

0--2777

----

Constant

----

1--32

----

1--32

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP60

On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value.

SP61

On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value.

SP62

On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction

value.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on the Load Formatted instruction loads the
binary value (6) from C10--C13 into the accumulator. The CMPF instruction
compares the value in the accumulator to the value in Y20--Y23 (E hex). The
corresponding discrete status flag will be turned on indicating the result of the
comparison. In this example, if the value in the accumulator is less than the value
specified in the Compare instruction, SP60 will turn on energizing C30.
DirectSOFT
X1

LDF

C10
K4

CMPF

Y20
K4

Standard
RLL Instructions

SP60

Load the value of the

specified discrete locations
(C10--C13) into the
accumulator

Location

Constant

C10

K4

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

Compare the value in the

accumulator with the value
of the specified discrete
location (Y20--Y23)

Acc. 0

C30

Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20

OUT

Compared
with

ON ON ON OFF
E

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

CMP

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

K(CON)

STR

SPCL

OUT

C(CR)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

C13 C12 C11 C10

OFF ON ON OFF

5--85

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator Logic Instructions

Compare with
Stack
(CMPS)
  

The Compare with Stack instruction is a

32-bit instruction that compares the value
in the accumulator with the value in the
first level of the accumulator stack.

430 440 450

The corresponding status flag will be turned on indicating the result of the
comparison. This does not affect the value in the accumulator.

DS

HPP

CMPS

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP60

On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value.

SP61

On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value.

SP62

On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction value.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 is loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V1410 and V1411 is
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value that was
loaded into the accumulator from V1400 and V1401 is placed on top of the stack
when the second Load instruction is executed. The value in the accumulator is
compared with the value in the first level or the accumulator stack using the CMPS
instruction. The corresponding discrete status flag will be turned on indicating the
result of the comparison. In this example, if the value in the accumulator is less than
the value in the stack, SP60 will turn on, energizing C30.
DirectSOFT

V1401

X1

LDD
V1400
LDD
V1410

SP60

Load the value in V1410 and

V1411 into the accumulator

Acc. 6

Compare the value in the

accumulator with the value
in the first level of the
accumulator stack

CMPS

V1400

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 into the accumulator

V1411

C30
OUT

V1410

Acc. 5

Compared
with
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Top of
Stack

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

LD

SHFT

SHFT

CMP

SHFT

STR

SPCL

OUT

C(CR)

Standard
RLL Instructions

STR

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--86

Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator Logic Instructions

Compare Real
Number
(CMPR)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Compare Real Number instruction

compares a real number value in the
accumulator with two consecutive V-memory locations containing a real
number. The corresponding status flag will
be turned on indicating the result of the
comparison. Both numbers being
compared are 32 bits long.
Operand Data Type

CMPR
A aaa

DL450 Range
A

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

--3.402823E+038 to
+ --3.402823E+038

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP60

On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value.

SP61

On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value.

SP62

On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction

value.

SP71

On anytime the V-memory specified by a pointer (P) is not valid.

SP75

On when a real number instruction is executed and a non--real number

was encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example when X1 is on, the LDR instruction loads the real number
representation for 7 decimal into the accumulator. The CMPR instruction compares
the accumulator contents with the real representation for decimal 6. Since 7 > 6, the
corresponding discrete status flag is turned on (special relay SP62).
DirectSOFT
X1

R7.0

Load the real number

representation for decimal 7
into the accumulator.

R6.0

Compare the value with the

real number representation
for decimal 6.

LDR

CMPR

SP62

C1
OUT

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

CMP

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

STR

SPCL

OUT

C(CR)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Acc. 4

CMPR 4

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

5--87

Math Instructions
Add
(ADD)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Add is a 16 bit instruction that adds a BCD

value in the accumulator with a BCD value
in a V--memory location (Aaaa). The result
resides in the accumulator.

Operand Data Type

ADD
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP66

On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry.

SP67

On when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP75

On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON--BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator are added to the value in V1420 using the Add instruction. The value in
the accumulator is copied to V1500 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT

V1400

X1

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero
0 0 0 0
4

Load the value in V1400 into the

lower 16 bits of the accumulator

LD
V1400

Add the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator
with the value in V1420

ADD
V1420

+
Acc.

Copy the value in the lower 16

bits of the accumulator to V1500

OUT
V1500

(Accumulator)

(V1420)

V1500

STR

X(IN)

LD

ADD

OUT

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--88

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Add Double
(ADDD)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Add Double is a 32 bit instruction that adds

the BCD value in the accumulator with a
BCD value (Aaaa), which is either two
consecutive V--memory locations or an
8--digit (max.) BCD constant. The result
resides in the accumulator.

Operand Data Type

ADDD
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

0--99999999

0--99999999

0--99999999

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP66

On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry.

SP67

On when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP75

On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON--BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the
accumulator is added with the value in V1420 and V1421 using the Add Double
instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the
Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT

V1401

X1

LDD

V1400
9

V1400
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 into the accumulator
ADDD
V1420

(Accumulator)

+ 2

(V1421 and V1420)

Acc. 8

Add the value in the

accumulator with the value
in V1420 and V1421
OUTD

Standard
RLL Instructions

V1500

V1501

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500
and V1501

V1500

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

ADD

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--89

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions
Add Real is a 32--bit instruction that adds a
real number, which is either two
consecutive V--memory locations or a
32--bit constant, to a real number in the
accumulator. Both numbers must conform
to the IEEE floating point format. The
result is a 32--bit real number that resides
in the accumulator.

Add Real
(ADDR)
  
430 440 450


DS


HPP

Operand Data Type

ADDR
A aaa

DL450 Range
A

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All V mem (See p. 3--42)

Constant

--3.402823E+038 to
+3.402823E+038

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP71

On anytime the V-memory specified by a pointer (P) is not valid.

SP72

On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid floating point number.

SP73

on when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit.

SP74

On anytime a floating point math operation results in an underflow error.

SP75

On when a real number instruction is executed and a non-real number was

encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
DirectSOFT
X1

LDR

R7.0
Load the real number 7.0
into the accumulator

7
+

(Accumulator)

+ 4

(ADDR)

Acc. 4

(decimal)

ADDR
R15.0

V1401
4

Add the real number 15.0 to

the accumulator contents,
which is in real number
format.

OUTD
V1400
Copy the result in the accumulator
to V1400 and V1401.

V1400
0

(Hex number)

Real Value
8

Acc. 0

Sign Bit

Exponent (8 bits)

1.011 x 2 (exp 4) = 10110. binary= 22 decimal

NOTE: If the value being added to a real number is 16,777,216 times smaller
than the real number, the calculation will not work.
NOTE: The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic
conversion to the 32-bit IEEE format. You must use DirectSOFT for this feature.

Standard
RLL Instructions

128 + 2 + 1 = 131
131 -- 127 = 4

Mantissa (23 bits)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--90

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Subtract
(SUB)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Subtract is a 16 bit instruction that

subtracts the BCD value (Aaaa) in a
V--memory location from the BCD value in
the lower 16 bits of the accumulator The
result resides in the accumulator.

Operand Data Type

SUB
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP64

On when the 16 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow.

SP65

On when the 32 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP75

On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON--BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in V1420 is subtracted from the
value in the accumulator using the Subtract instruction. The value in the accumulator
is copied to V1500 using the Out instruction.
V1400

DirectSOFT
X1

(Accumulator)

(V1420)

LD
V1400
Load the value in V1400
into the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero
0 0 0 0

SUB

y
V1420
Acc.

Subtract the value in V1420

from the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator
OUT
V1500

V1500

Standard
RLL Instructions

Copy the value in the lower 16

bits of the accumulator to V1500
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR

X(IN)

LD

SUB

OUT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Subtract Double
(SUBD)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Subtract Double is a 32 bit instruction that

subtracts the BCD value (Aaaa), which is
either two consecutive V--memory
locations or an 8-digit (max.) constant,
from the BCD value in the accumulator.
The result resides in the accumulator.

Operand Data Type

5--91

SUBD
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

0--99999999

0--99999999

0--99999999

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP64

On when the 16 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow.

SP65

On when the 32 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP75

On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON--BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V1420 and
V1421 is subtracted from the value in the accumulator. The value in the accumulator
is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
V1401

DirectSOFT
X1

V1400
6

LDD
V1400
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 into the accumulator
y

SUBD
V1420

ACC.

(Accumulator)

(V1421 and V1420)

The value in V1420 and

V1421 is subtracted from the
value in the accumulator
OUTD
V1500

V1501

V1500

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500
and V1501

STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

SUB

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--92

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

The Subtract Real is a 32--bit instruction

that subtracts a real number, which is
either two consecutive V--memory
locations or a 32--bit constant, from a real
number in the accumulator. Both numbers
must conform to the IEEE floating point
format. The result is a 32--bit real number
that resides in the accumulator.

Subtract Real
(SUBR)
  
430 440 450


DS


HPP

Operand Data Type

SUBR
A aaa

DL450 Range
A

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All V mem (See p. 3--42)

Constant

--3.402823E+038 to
+3.402823E+038

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP71

On anytime the V-memory specified by a pointer (P) is not valid.

SP72

On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid floating point number.

SP73

on when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit.

SP74

On anytime a floating point math operation results in an underflow error.

SP75

On when a real number instruction is executed and a non-real number was

encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
DirectSOFT
X1

LDR

R22.0
Load the real number 22.0
into the accumulator.
--

(Accumulator)

+ 4

(SUBR)

Acc. 4

(decimal)

SUBR
R15.0

V1401
4

Subtract the real number

15.0 from the accumulator
contents, which is in real
number format.

OUTD

Standard
RLL Instructions

V1400
Copy the result in the accumulator
to V1400 and V1401.

V1400
0

(Hex number)

Real Value
8

Acc. 0

Sign Bit

Exponent (8 bits)
128 + 1 = 129
129 -- 127 = 2
Implies 2 (exp 2)

Mantissa (23 bits)

1.11 x 2 (exp 2) = 111. binary= 7 decimal

NOTE: The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic
conversion to the 32-bit IEEE format. You must use DirectSOFT for this feature.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Multiply
(MUL)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Multiply is a 16 bit instruction that

multiplies the BCD value (Aaaa), which is
either a V--memory location or a 4--digit
(max.) constant, by the BCD value in the
lower 16 bits of the accumulator The result
can be up to 8 digits and resides in the
accumulator.
Operand Data Type

5--93

MUL
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

0--9999

0--9999

0--9999

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP75

On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON--BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in V1420 is multiplied by the value
in the accumulator. The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501
using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT

V1400

X1

LD

V1400
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero

Load the value in V1400

into the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator

MUL

Acc.

V1420

(Accumulator)

(V1420)

The value in V1420 is

multiplied by the value in
the accumulator

OUTD

V1501

V1500

V1500

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500
and V1501

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

Standard
RLL Instructions

LD
MUL

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--94

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Multiply Double
(MULD)
  
430 440 450


DS


HPP

Multiply Double is a 32 bit instruction that

multiplies the 8-digit BCD value in the
accumulator by the 8-digit BCD value in
the two consecutive V-memory locations
specified in the instruction. The lower 8
digits of the results reside in the
accumulator. Upper digits of the result
reside in the accumulator stack.
Operand Data Type

MULD
A aaa

DL450 Range
A

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

----

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP75

On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON--BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant Kbc614e hex will be loaded
into the accumulator. When converted to BCD the number is 12345678. That
number is stored in V1400 and V1401. After loading the constant K2 into the
accumulator, we multiply it times 12345678, which is 24691356.
DirectSOFT

X1

LDD
Kbc614e

V1401

Convert the value to

BCD format. It will
occupy eight BCD digits
(32 bits).

BCD

Output the number to

V1400 and V1401 using
the OUTD instruction.

OUTD
V1400

K2

V1400

Multiply the accumulator

contents (2) by the
8-digit number in V1400
and V1401.

V1402

Move the result in the

accumulator to V1402
and V1403 using the
OUTD instruction.

MULD

OUTD

(Accumulator)

V1400

Acc.

V1403

V1500

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Standard
RLL Instructions

Load the constant K2

into the accumulator.

LD

STR

X(IN)

K(CON)

SHFT

B(H)

C(H)

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

LD

K(CON)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

E(H)
0

MUL

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Load the hex equivalent

of 12345678 decimal into
the accumulator.

BCD

(Accumulator)

5--95

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

The Multiply Real instruction multiplies a

real number in the accumulator with either
a real constant or a real number occupying
two consecutive V-memory locations. The
result resides in the accumulator. Both
numbers must conform to the IEEE
floating point format.

Multiply Real
(MULR)
  
430 440 450


DS


HPP

Operand Data Type

V--memory

MULR
A aaa

DL450 Range
A

aaa

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

--3.402823E+038 to
+3.402823E+038

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP71

On anytime the V-memory specified by a pointer (P) is not valid.

SP72

On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid floating point number.

SP73

on when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit.

SP74

On anytime a floating point math operation results in an underflow error.

SP75

On when a real number instruction is executed and a non-real number was

encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
DirectSOFT
X1

LDR

R7.0
Load the real number 7.0
into the accumulator.

(Accumulator)

+ 4

(MULR)

Acc. 4

(decimal)

MULR
R15.0

V1401
4

Multiply the accumulator

contents by the real number
15.0

V1400
0

(Hex number)

Real Value

OUTD
V1400
Copy the result in the accumulator
to V1400 and V1401.

Acc. 0

Sign Bit

Exponent (8 bits)

1.101001 x 2 (exp 6) = 1101001. binary= 105 decimal

NOTE: The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic
conversion to the 32-bit IEEE format. You must use DirectSOFT for this feature.

Standard
RLL Instructions

128 + 4 + 1 = 133
133 -- 127 = 6
Implies 2 (exp 6)

Mantissa (23 bits)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--96

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Divide
(DIV)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Divide is a 16 bit instruction that divides

the BCD value in the 32-bit accumulator
by a BCD value (Aaaa), which is either a
V--memory location or a 4-digit (max.)
constant. The first part of the quotient
resides in the accumulator and the
remainder resides in the first stack
location.
Operand Data Type

DIV
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All V mem (See p. 3--42)

Constant

0--9999

0--9999

0--9999

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP53

On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with.

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP75

On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON--BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator will be divided
by the value in V1420 using the Divide instruction. The value in the accumulator is
copied to V1500 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT

V1400

X1

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero
0 0 0 0
5

(Accumulator)

(V1420)

LD
V1400
Load the value in V1400 into the
lower 16 bits of the accumulator
DIV

V1420
Acc.

The value in the accumulator is

divided by the value in V1420

1
V1500

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X(IN)

V1500

Copy the value in the lower 16

bits of the accumulator to V1500

STR

First stack location contains

the remainder

OUT

LD

DIV

OUT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--97

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Divide Double
(DIVD)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Divide Double is a 32 bit instruction that

divides the BCD value in the accumulator
by a BCD value (Aaaa), which must be
obtained from two consecutive V--memory
locations. (You cannot use a constant as
the parameter in the box.) The first part of
the quotient resides in the accumulator
and the remainder resides in the first stack
location.
Operand Data Type

DIVD
A aaa

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP53

On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with.

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP75

On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON--BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the
accumulator is divided by the value in V1420 and V1421 using the Divide Double
instruction. The first part of the quotient resides in the accumulator and the
remainder resides in the first stack location. The value in the accumulator is copied
to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT

V1401

X1

LDD

V1400
0

V1400
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 into the accumulator
DIVD
V1420

(Accumulator)

(V1421 and V1420)

Acc.

The value in the accumulator

is divided by the value in
V1420 and V1421

First stack location contains

the remainder

OUTD
0

V1500

V1501

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500
and V1501

V1500

STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

DIV

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--98

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

The Divide Real instruction divides a real

number in the accumulator by either a real
constant or a real number occupying two
consecutive V-memory locations. The
result resides in the accumulator. Both
numbers must conform to the IEEE
floating point format.

Divide Real
(DIVR)
  
430 440 450


DS


HPP

Operand Data Type

V--memory

DIVR
A aaa

DL450 Range
A

aaa

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

--3.402823E+038 to
+3.402823E+038

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP71

On anytime the V-memory specified by a pointer (P) is not valid.

SP72

On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid floating point number.

SP73

on when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit.

SP74

On anytime a floating point math operation results in an underflow error.

SP75

On when a real number instruction is executed and a non-real number was

encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
DirectSOFT
X1

LDR

R15.0
Load the real number 15.0
into the accumulator.

(Accumulator)

(DIVR)

Acc. 3

(decimal)

1 . 5
DIVR
R10.0

V1401
3

Divide the accumulator contents

by the real number 10.0.

V1400
0

(Hex number)

Real Value

OUTD

Standard
RLL Instructions

V1400
Copy the result in the accumulator
to V1400 and V1401.

Acc. 0

Sign Bit

Exponent (8 bits)

64 + 32 + 16 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 127
127 -- 127 = 0
Implies 2 (exp 0)

Mantissa (23 bits)

1.1 x 2 (exp 0) = 1.1 binary= 1.5 decimal

NOTE: The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic
conversion to the 32-bit IEEE format. You must use DirectSOFT for this feature.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Add Binary
(ADDB)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Add Binary is a 16 bit instruction that adds

the binary value in the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator with a binary value (Aaaa),
which is either a V--memory location or a
16-bit constant. The result can be up to 32
bits and resides in the accumulator.

Operand Data Type

5--99

ADDB
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All (See p. 3--40)

All V mem (See p. 3--41)

All V mem (See p. 3--42)

Constant

0--FFFF

0--FFFF

0--FFFF

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP66

On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry.

SP67

On when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP73

On when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 (constant) will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load instruction. The binary value in the accumulator
will be added to the binary value in V1420 using the Add Binary instruction. The value
in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the OUTD instruction.
Use either
V--memory OR Constant

DirectSOFT
X1

LD

LD

K2565

V1400

V1400

Load the value in V1400 into the

lower 16 bits of the accumulator

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero
0
0 0 0 0

(Accumulator)

(V1420)

C C

C C

BIN

ADDB
V1420
The binary value in the
accumulator is added to the
binary value in V1420

+
Acc.

OUTD
V1500
Copy the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator to
V1500 and V1501

STR

X(IN)

LD

ADD

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

Standard
RLL Instructions

V1500

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--100

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Add Binary Double Add Binary Double is a 32 bit instruction

that adds the binary value in the
(ADDBD)
accumulator with the value (Aaaa), which
  
is either two consecutive V--memory
430 440 450
locations or an 8--digit (max.) binary


constant. The result resides in the
DS
HPP
accumulator.

Operand Data Type

DL440 Range

ADDBD
A aaa

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All (See p. 3--41)

All V mem (See p. 3--42)

Constant

0--FFFFFFFF

0--FFFFFFFF

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP66

On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry.

SP67

On when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP73

On when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 (constant)
will be loaded into the accumulator using the LDD instruction. The binary value in the
accumulator is added with the binary value in V1420 and V1421 using the ADDBD
instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the
OUTD instruction.
DirectSOFT

Use either
V--memory OR Constant

X1

LDD

LDD
V1400

K2561

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 into the accumulator

BIN
V1401
0

V1400
0

ADDBD
V1420
The binary value in the
accumulator is added with the
value in V1420 and V1421
OUTD

(Accumulator)

(V1421 and V1420)

Acc.

V1500

Standard
RLL Instructions

0
+ 1

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500
and V1501
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

ADD

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

V1501
SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

V1500

0
0

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Subtract Binary
(SUBB)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Subtract Binary is a 16 bit instruction that

subtracts the binary value (Aaaa), which is
either a V--memory location or a 4--digit
(max.) binary constant, from the binary
value in the accumulator. The result
resides in the accumulator.

Operand Data Type

5--101

SUBB
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

0--FFFF

0--FFFF

0--FFFF

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP64

On when the 16 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow.

SP65

On when the 32 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The binary value in V1420 is subtracted
from the binary value in the accumulator using the Subtract Binary instruction. The
value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT

Use either
V--memory OR Constant

X1

LD

LD
V1400

K1024

Load the value in V1400 into the

lower 16 bits of the accumulator

BIN
V1400
1

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero
0 0 0 0
1

(Accumulator)

(V1420)

SUBB
V1420
The binary value in V1420 is
subtracted from the value in
the accumulator

OUT
V1500

Acc.

Copy the value in the lower 16

bits of the accumulator to V1500

V1500

STR

X(IN)

LD

SUB

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--102

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Subtract Binary
Double
(SUBBD)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Subtract Binary Double is a 32 bit

instruction that subtracts the binary value
(Aaaa), which is either two consecutive V-memory locations or an 8--digit (max.)
binary constant, from the binary value in
the accumulator. The result resides in the
accumulator.
Operand Data Type

DL440 Range

SUBBD
A aaa

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All (See p. 3--42)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

0--FFFFFFFF

0--FFFFFFFF

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP64

On when the 16 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow.

SP65

On when the 32 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The binary value in V1420
and V1421 is subtracted from the binary value in the accumulator using the Subtract
Binary Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and
V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT

Use either
V--memory OR Constant

X1

LDD

LDD
V1400

K393471

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 into the accumulator

BIN

(Accumulator)

y 0

(V1421 and V1420)

The binary value in V1420 and

V1421 is subtracted from the
binary value in the accumulator
OUTD
V1500

Acc.

V1420

Standard
RLL Instructions

V1400

V1401

SUBBD

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500
and V1501
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

V1501

STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

SUB

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

V1500

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Multiply Binary
(MULB)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Multiply Binary is a 16 bit instruction that

multiplies the binary value (Aaaa), which
is either a V--memory location or a 4--digit
(max.) binary constant, by the binary value
in the accumulator. The result can be up to
32 bits and resides in the accumulator.

Operand Data Type

DL430 Range

5--103

MULB
A aaa

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

0--FFFF

0--FFFF

0--FFFF

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The binary value in V1420 is multiplied by
the binary value in the accumulator using the Multiply Binary instruction. The value in
the accumulator is copied to V1500 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT

Use either
V--memory OR Constant

X1

LD

LDD
V1400

K2561

Load the value in V1400 into the

lower 16 bits of the accumulator

BIN

V1400

MULB

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero
0 0 0 0
0

(Accumulator)
(V1420)

V1420
The binary value in V1420 is
multiplied by the binary
value in the accumulator

OUTD

V1500

Acc.

Copy the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator to
V1500 and V1501
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X(IN)

LD

MUL

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

V1501

V1500

Standard
RLL Instructions

STR

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--104

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Divide Binary
(DIVB)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Divide Binary is a 16 bit instruction that

divides the binary value in the
accumulator by a binary value (Aaaa),
which is either a V--memory location or a
16--bit (max.) binary constant. The first
part of the quotient resides in the
accumulator and the remainder resides in
the first stack location.

Operand Data Type

DIVB
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

0--FFFF

0--FFFF

0--FFFF

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP53

On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with.

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The binary value in the accumulator is
divided by the binary value in V1420 using the Divide Binary instruction. The value in
the accumulator is copied to V1500 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT
Use either
V--memory OR Constant
X1

LD

LDD
V1400

K64001

Load the value in V1400 into the

lower 16 bits of the accumulator

BIN
V1400

DIVB

V1420
The binary value in the
accumulator is divided by
the binary value in V1420

Standard
RLL Instructions

V1500

Acc.

Copy the value in the lower 16

bits of the accumulator to V1500

(Accumulator)

(V1420)

V1500

LD

DIV

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

First stack location contains

the remainder

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X(IN)

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

OUT

STR

5--105

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Add Formatted
(ADDF)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Add Formatted is a 32 bit instruction that

adds the BCD value in the accumulator
with the BCD value (Aaaa) which is a
range of discrete bits. The specified range
(Kbbb) can be 1 to 32 consecutive bits.
The result resides in the accumulator.

Operand Data Type

ADDF
A aaa
K bbb

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

Inputs

0--477

----

0--1777

----

Outputs

0--477

----

0--1777

----

Control Relays

0--1777

----

0--3777

----

Stage Bits

0--1777

----

0--1777

----

Timer Bits

0--377

----

0--377

----

Counter Bits

CT

0--177

----

0--377

----

Special Relays

SP

0--137 320--717

----

0--137 320--717

----

Global I/O

GX

0--1777

----

0--2777

----

Constant

----

1--32

----

1--32

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP66

On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry.

SP67

when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP75

On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON--BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X6 is on, the value formed by discrete locations
X0--X3 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The
value formed by discrete locations C0--C3 is added to the value in the accumulator
using the Add Formatted instruction. The value in the lower four bits of the
accumulator is copied to Y10--Y13 using the Out Formatted instruction.
DirectSOFT
X6

X3
LDF

X0
K4

Load the value represented

by discrete locations X0--X3
into the accumulator

X2

X1

X0

ON OFF OFF OFF

The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero

ADDF

C0
K4

Y10
K5

+
Acc.

(Accumulator)

C3

(C0--C3)

OFF OFF ON ON

Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10

STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

ADD

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

OFF OFF OFF ON

X(IN)

K(CON)

SHFT

C(CR)

K(CON)

SHFT

Y(OUT)

K(CON)

C1

C0

Copy the lower 4 bits of the

accumulator to discrete
locations Y10--Y14

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

C2

Standard
RLL Instructions

OUTF

Add the value in the

accumulator with the value
represented by discrete
location C0--C3

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--106

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Subtract Formatted Subtract Formatted is a 32 bit instruction

that subtracts the BCD value (Aaaa),
(SUBF)
which is a range of discrete bits, from the
  
BCD value in the accumulator. The
430 440 450
specified range (Kbbb) can be 1 to 32


consecutive bits. The result resides in the
DS
HPP
accumulator.
Operand Data Type

SUBF
A aaa
K bbb

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

Inputs

0--477

----

0--1777

----

Outputs

0--477

----

0--1777

----

Control Relays

0--1777

----

0--3777

----

Stage Bits

0--1777

----

0--1777

----

Timer Bits

0--377

----

0--377

----

Counter Bits

CT

0--177

----

0--377

----

Special Relays

SP

0--137 320--717

----

0--137 320--717

----

Global I/O

GX

0--1777

----

0--2777

----

Constant

----

1--32

----

1--32

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP64

On when the 16 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow.

SP65

On when the 32 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP75

On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON--BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X6 is on, the value formed by discrete locations
X0--X3 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The
value formed by discrete location C0--C3 is subtracted from the value in the
accumulator using the Subtract Formatted instruction. The value in the lower four
bits of the accumulator is copied to Y10--Y13 using the Out Formatted instruction.
DirectSOFT
X6

X3
LDF

X0
K4

SUBF

C0
K4

Standard
RLL Instructions

Y10
K4

Subtract the value

represented by C0--C3 from
the value in the accumulator

X(IN)

X0

(Accumulator)

C3

(C0--C3)

ON OFF OFF OFF

Copy the lower 4 bits of the

accumulator to discrete
locations Y10--Y13

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X1

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

ACC. 0
OUTF

X2

ON OFF OFF ON

Load the value represented

by discrete locations X0--X3
into the accumulator

Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10

OFF OFF OFF ON

LD

SHFT

SHFT

X(IN)

K(CON)

SUBF

SHFT

SHFT

C(CR)

K(CON)

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

K(CON)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

C2

C1

C0

5--107

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Multiply Formatted Multiply Formatted is a 16 bit instruction

that multiplies the BCD value in the
(MULF)
accumulator by the BCD value (Aaaa)
  
which is a range of discrete bits. The
430 440 450
specified range (Kbbb) can be 1 to 16


consecutive bits. The result resides in the
DS
HPP
accumulator.

Operand Data Type

MULF
A aaa
K bbb

DL440 Range

Inputs

DL450 Range

A/B

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

0--477

----

0--1777

----

Outputs

0--477

----

0--1777

----

Control Relays

0--1777

----

0--3777

----

Stage Bits

0--1777

----

0--1777

----

Timer Bits

0--377

----

0--377

----

Counter Bits

CT

0--177

----

0--377

----

Special Relays

SP

0--137 320--717

----

0--137 320--717

----

Global I/O

GX

0--1777

----

0--2777

----

Constant

----

1--16

----

1--16

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator
to be zero.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP75

On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON--BCD number was

encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X6 is on, the value formed by discrete locations
X0--X3 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The
value formed by discrete locations C0--C3 is multiplied by the value in the
accumulator using the Multiply Formatted instruction. The value in the lower four bits
of the accumulator is copied to Y10--Y13 using the Out Formatted instruction.
DirectSOFT
X6

X3
LDF

X0
K4

Load the value represented

by discrete locations X0--X3
into the accumulator

X2

X1

X0

OFF OFF ON ON
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero

MULF

C0
K4

Y10
K4

Acc. 0

(Accumulator)

(C0--C3)

Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10

STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

MUL

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

OFF ON ON OFF
X(IN)

K(CON)

SHFT

C(CR)

K(CON)

SHFT

Y(OUT)

K(CON)

C2

C1

C0

Copy the lower 4 bits of the

accumulator to discrete
locations Y10--Y13

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

C3

OFF OFF ON OFF

Standard
RLL Instructions

OUTF

Multiply the value in the

accumulator with the value
represented by discrete
locations C0--C3

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--108

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Divide Formatted is a 16 bit instruction that

divides the BCD value in the accumulator
by the BCD value (Aaaa), a range of
discrete bits. The specified range (Kbbb)
can be 1 to 16 consecutive bits. The first
part of the quotient resides in the
accumulator and the remainder resides in
the first stack location.

Divide Formatted
(DIVF)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

DIVF

A aaa
K bbb

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

A/B

aaa

bbb

aaa

bbb

Inputs

0--477

----

0--477

----

Outputs

0--477

----

0--477

----

Control Relays

0--1777

----

0--1777

----

Stage Bits

0--1777

----

0--1777

----

Timer Bits

0--377

----

0--377

----

Counter Bits

CT

0--177

----

0--177

----

Special Relays

SP

0--137 320--717

----

0--137 320--717

----

Global I/O

GX

0--1777

----

0--1777

----

Constant

----

1--16

----

1--16

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP53

On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with.

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP75

On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON--BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X6 is on, the value formed by discrete locations
X0--X3 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The
value in the accumulator is divided by the value formed by discrete location C0--C3
using the Divide Formatted instruction. The value in the lower four bits of the
accumulator is copied to Y10--Y13 using the Out Formatted instruction.
DirectSOFT
X6

X3
LDF

X0
K4

DIVF

C0

Standard
RLL Instructions

K4

OUTF

Y10
K4

X2

X1

X0

ON OFF OFF OFF

Load the value represented

by discrete locations X0--X3
into the accumulator

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

Divide the value in the

accumulator with the value
represented by discrete
location C0--C3

Acc. 0

(Accumulator)

(C0--C3)

Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

DIV

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

OFF ON OFF OFF

X(IN)

K(CON)

SHFT

C(CR)

K(CON)

SHFT

Y(OUT)

K(CON)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

C2

First stack location contains

the remainder

Copy the lower 4 bits of the

accumulator to discrete
locations Y10--Y13

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

C3

C1

C0

OFF OFF ON OFF

5--109

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Add Top of Stack is a 32 bit instruction that

adds the BCD value in the accumulator
with the BCD value in the first level of the
accumulator stack. The result resides in
the accumulator. The value in the first level
of the accumulator stack is removed and
all stack values are moved up one level.

Add Top
of Stack
(ADDS)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

ADDS

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP66

On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry.

SP67

On when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP75

On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON--BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V1420 and
V1421 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction, pushing the
value previously loaded in the accumulator onto the accumulator stack. The value in
the first level of the accumulator stack is added with the value in the accumulator
using the Add Stack instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and
V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1

Load the value in V1400

and V1401 into the
accumulator

LDD
V1400

Acc. 0

Load the value in V1420

and V1421 into the
accumulator

V1420

ADDS

Add the value in the

accumulator with the value
in the first level of the
accumulator stack

OUTD
V1500

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

D
D

SHFT
SHFT

ADD

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

V1420
2 0 5 6

Acc. 0

V1501

V1500

Accumulator
stack
after 1st LDD
Level 1

X X

X X

X X

Level 2

X X

X X

X X

Level 3

X X

X X

X X

Level 4

X X

X X

X X

Level 5

X X

X X

X X

Level 6

X X

X X

X X

Level 7

X X

X X

X X

Level 8

X X

X X

X X

Accumulator
stack
after 2nd LDD
Level 1

9 5

Level 2

X X

X X

X X

Level 3

X X

X X

X X

Level 4

X X

X X

X X

Level 5

X X

X X

X X

Level 6

X X

X X

X X

Level 7

X X

X X

X X

Level 8

X X

X X

X X

Standard
RLL Instructions

STR

V1400
0 2 6

Acc. 0

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500
and V1501

Handheld Programmer
Keystrokes

SHFT

V1421
0 0 1 7

LDD

LD

V1401
0 3 9

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--110

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Subtract Top of Stack is a 32 bit instruction

that subtracts the BCD value in the first
level of the accumulator stack from the
BCD value in the accumulator. The result
resides in the accumulator. The value in
the first level of the accumulator stack is
removed and all stack values are moved
up one level.

Subtract Top
of Stack
(SUBS)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

SUBS

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP64

On when the 16 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow.

SP65

On when the 32 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP75

On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON--BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V1420 and
V1421 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction, pushing the
value previously loaded into the accumulator onto the accumulator stack. The BCD
value in the first level of the accumulator stack is subtracted from the BCD value in
the accumulator using the Subtract Stack instruction. The value in the accumulator
is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1

V1401
LDD
V1400

Acc. 0

Load the value in V1420 and

V1421 into the accumulator

LDD
V1420

Subtract the value in the first

level of the accumulator
stack from the value in the
accumulator

SUBS

V1400

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 into the accumulator

V1420

V1421
0

Acc. 0

Acc. 0

Accumulator stack
after 1st LDD
Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

Accumulator stack
after 2nd LDD
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V1500
and V1501

OUTD
V1500

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

V1501

LD

SHFT

SHFT

LD

SHFT

SHFT

SUB

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

V1500

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

5--111

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Multiply Top of Stack is a 16 bit instruction

that multiplies a 4-digit BCD value in the
first level of the accumulator stack by a
4-digit BCD value in the accumulator. The
result resides in the accumulator. The
value in the first level of the accumulator
stack is is removed and all stack values
are moved up one level.

Multiply Top
of Stack
(MULS)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

MULS

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP75

On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON--BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in V1420 is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load Double instruction, pushing the value previously loaded
in the accumulator onto the accumulator stack. The BCD value in the first level of the
accumulator stack is multiplied by the BCD value in the accumulator using the
Multiply Stack instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and
V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT

V1400

X1

Load the value in V1400 into

the accumulator

LD
V1400

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero
Acc. 0

V1420
Load the value in V1420 into
the accumulator

LD
V1420

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

Multiply the value in the

accumulator with the value
in the first level of the
accumulator stack

MULS

Acc. 0

Acc. 0

Accumulator stack
after 1st LDD
Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

Accumulator stack
after 2nd LDD
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V1500
and V1501

OUTD
V1500

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X(IN)

LD

LD

MUL

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

V1500

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

Standard
RLL Instructions

STR

V1501

Level 1

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--112

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Divide Top of Stack is a 32 bit instruction

that divides the 8-digit BCD value in the
accumulator by a 4-digit BCD value in the
first level of the accumulator stack. The
result resides in the accumulator and the
remainder resides in the first level of the
accumulator stack.

Divide by Top
of Stack
(DIVS)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

DIVS

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP53

On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with.

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP75

On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON--BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the Load instruction loads the value in
V1400 into the accumulator. The value in V1420 is loaded into the accumulator using
the Load Double instruction, pushing the value previously loaded in the accumulator
onto the accumulator stack. The BCD value in the accumulator is divided by the BCD
value in the first level of the accumulator stack using the Divide Stack instruction.
The Out Double instruction copies the value in the accumulator to V1500 and V1501.
DirectSOFT

Accumulator stack
after 1st LDD

V1400

X1

Load the value in V1400 into

the accumulator

LD
V1400

V1421
0

Load the value in V1420 and

V1421 into the accumulator

V1420

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero
Acc. 0

LDD

Acc. 0

V1420
0

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

Accumulator stack
after 2nd LDD
Divide the value in the
accumulator by the value in
the first level of the
accumulator stack

DIVS

Acc. 0

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500
and V1501

OUTD
V1500

V1501

V1500

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

The remainder resides in the

first stack location
4

LD

SHFT

SHFT

DIV

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

0
V

0
1

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

5--113

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Add Binary Top of Stack instruction is a 32

bit instruction that adds the binary value in
the accumulator with the binary value in
the first level of the accumulator stack.
The result resides in the accumulator. The
value in the first level of the accumulator
stack is removed and all stack values are
moved up one level.

Add Binary
Top of Stack
(ADDBS)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

ADDBS

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP66

On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry.

SP67

On when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP73

on when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V1420 and
V1421 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction, pushing the
value previously loaded in the accumulator onto the accumulator stack. The binary
value in the first level of the accumulator stack is added with the binary value in the
accumulator using the Add Stack instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied
to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1

V1400

V1401
0

Acc. 0

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 into the accumulator

LDD
V1400

V1421
0

Load the value in V1420 and

V1421 into the accumulator

LDD
V1420

Add the binary value in the

accumulator with the binary
value in the first level of the
accumulator stack

ADDBS

V1500

LD

SHFT

SHFT

LD

SHFT

SHFT

ADD

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

Acc. 0

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

Accumulator stack
after 2nd LDD

V1500

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X(IN)

V1501

STR

Acc. 0

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500
and V1501

OUTD

V1420

Accumulator stack
after 1st LDD

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--114

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Subtract Binary Top of Stack is a 32 bit

instruction that subtracts the binary value
in the first level of the accumulator stack
from the binary value in the accumulator.
The result resides in the accumulator. The
value in the first level of the accumulator
stack is removed and all stack locations
are moved up one level.

Subtract Binary
Top of Stack
(SUBBS)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

SUBBS

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP64

On when the 16 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow.

SP65

On when the 32 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V1420 and
V1421 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction, pushing the
value previously loaded in the accumulator onto the accumulator stack. The binary
value in the first level of the accumulator stack is subtracted from the binary value in
the accumulator using the Subtract Stack instruction. The value in the accumulator
is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1

V1400

V1401
0

Acc. 0

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 into the accumulator

LDD
V1400

V1420

V1421
0

Load the value in V1420 and

V1421 into the accumulator

LDD
V1420

Subtract the binary value in

the first level of the
accumulator stack from the
binary value in the
accumulator

SUBBS

V1500

Acc. 0

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

Accumulator stack
after 2nd LDD

V1501

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Standard
RLL Instructions

Acc. 0

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500
and V1501

OUTD

Accumulator stack
after 1st LDD

V1500

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

Level 7

LD

SHFT

SHFT

Level 8

SUB

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--115

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Multiply Binary Top of Stack is a 16 bit

instruction that multiplies the 16 bit binary
value in the first level of the accumulator
stack by the 16 bit binary value in the
accumulator. The result resides in the
accumulator and can be 32 bits (8 digits
max.). The value in the first level of the
accumulator stack is removed and all
stack locations are moved up one level.

Multiply Binary
Top of Stack
(MULBS)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

MULBS

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the Load instruction moves the value in
V1400 into the accumulator. The value in V1420 is loaded into the accumulator using
the Load instruction, pushing the value previously loaded in the accumulator onto
the stack. The binary value in the accumulator stacks first level is multiplied by the
binary value in the accumulator using the Multiply Binary Stack instruction. The Out
Double instruction copies the value in the accumulator to V1500 and V1501.
DirectSOFT

V1400

X1

Load the value in V1400 into

the accumulator

LD
V1400

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero
Acc. 0

V1420
Load the value in V1420 into
the accumulator

LD
V1420

Multiply the binary value in

the accumulator with the
binary value in the first level
of the accumulator stack

MULBS

V1500

Acc. 0

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

LD

0
0

LD

MUL

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

V1500

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

Accumulator stack
after 2nd LDD
Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

Standard
RLL Instructions

X(IN)

Acc. 0

V1501

STR

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500
and V1501

OUTD

Accumulator stack
after 1st LDD

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--116

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Divide Binary by
Top
OF Stack
(DIVBS)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Divide Binary Top of Stack is a 32 bit

instruction that divides the 32 bit binary
value in the accumulator by the 16 bit
binary value in the first level of the
accumulator stack. The result resides in
the accumulator and the remainder
resides in the first level of the accumulator
stack.

DIVBS

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP53

On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with.

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in V1420 and V1421 is loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction also, pushing the value
previously loaded in the accumulator onto the accumulator stack. The binary value
in the accumulator is divided by the binary value in the first level of the accumulator
stack using the Divide Binary Stack instruction. The value in the accumulator is
copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT

Accumulator stack
after 1st LDD

V1400

X1

Load the value in V1400 into

the accumulator

LD
V1400

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero
Acc. 0

V1421
0

Load the value in V1420 and

V1421 into the accumulator

LDD
V1420

Acc. 0

V1420
0

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

Accumulator stack
after 2nd LDD
Divide the binary value in
the accumulator by the
binary value in the first level
of the accumulator stack

DIVBS

Acc. 0

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500
and V1501

OUTD
V1500

Standard
RLL Instructions

V1501

V1500

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

The remainder resides in the

first stack location

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

LD

SHFT

SHFT

DIV

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Increment
(INC)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Decrement
(DEC)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Increment instruction increments a

BCD value in a specified V--memory
location by 1 each time the instruction is
executed.

INC
A aaa

The Decrement instruction decrements a

BCD value in a specified V--memory
location by 1 each time the instruction is
executed.

Operand Data Type

5--117

DEC
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

on when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP75

on when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON--BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following increment example, when C5 is on the value in V1400 increases by
one.
DirectSOFT

V1400

C5

INC

V1400
Increment the value in
V1400 by 1.

V1400
3

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

C(CR)

SHFT

SHFT

In the following decrement example, when C5 is on the value in V1400 is decreased

by one.
DirectSOFT
C5

V1400
DEC

V1400
Decrement the value in
V1400 by 1.

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

C(CR)

SHFT

SHFT

Standard
RLL Instructions

V1400

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--118

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Transcendental Functions
The DL450 CPU features special numerical functions to complement its real number
capability. The transcendental functions include the trigonometric sine, cosine, and
tangent, and also their inverses (arc sine, arc cosine, and arc tangent). The square
root function is also grouped with these other functions.
The transcendental math instructions operate on a real number in the accumulator
(it cannot be BCD or binary). The real number result resides in the accumulator. The
square root function operates on the full range of positive real numbers. The sine,
cosine and tangent functions require numbers expressed in radians. You can work
with angles expressed in degrees by first converting them to radians with the Radian
(RAD) instruction, then performing the trig function. All transcendental functions
utilize the following flag bits.

Sine Real
(SINR)
  
430 440 450

DS

430 440 450

Standard
RLL Instructions

430 440 450

430 440 450

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP72

On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid floating point number.

SP73

on when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit.

SP75

On when a real number instruction is executed and a non-real number was

encountered.

Math Function

Range of Argument

SP53

On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with.

The Sine Real instruction takes the sine of

the real number stored in the accumulator.
The result resides in the accumulator. Both
the original number and the result are in
IEEE 32-bit format.

SINR

The Cosine Real instruction takes the

cosine of the real number stored in the
accumulator. The result resides in the
accumulator. Both the original number and
the result are in IEEE 32-bit format.

COSR

The Tangent Real instruction takes the

tangent of the real number stored in the
accumulator. The result resides in the
accumulator. Both the original number and
the result are in IEEE 32-bit format.

SINR

HPP

Arc Sine Real

(ASINR)
  
DS

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

HPP

Tangent Real
(TANR)
  
DS

Description

SP63

HPP

Cosine Real
(COSR)
  
DS

Discrete Bit Flags

The Arc Sine Real instruction takes the

inverse sine of the real number stored in the
accumulator. The result resides in the
accumulator. Both the original number and
the result are in IEEE 32-bit format.

HPP

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

ASINR

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Arc Cosine Real

(ACOSR)
  
430 440 450


DS

430 440 450

430 440 450

The Arc Tangent Real instruction takes the

inverse tangent of the real number stored in
the accumulator. The result resides in the
accumulator. Both the original number and
the result are in IEEE 32-bit format.

ATANR

HPP

Square Root Real

(SQRTR)
  
DS

ACOSR

HPP

Arc Tangent Real

(ATANR)
  
DS

The Arc Cosine Real instruction takes the

inverse cosine of the real number stored in
the accumulator. The result resides in the
accumulator. Both the original number and
the result are in IEEE 32-bit format.

5--119

The Square Root Real instruction takes the

square root of the real number stored in the
accumulator. The result resides in the
accumulator. Both the original number and
the result are in IEEE 32-bit format.

SQRTR

HPP

NOTE: The square root function can be useful in several situations. However, if you
are trying to do the square-root extract function for an orifice flow meter
measurement as the PV to a PID loop, note that the PID loop already has the
square-root extract function built in.
The following example takes the sine of 45 degrees. Since these transcendental
functions operate only on real numbers, we do a LDR (load real) 45. The trig
functions operate only in radians, so we must convert the degrees to radians by
using the RADR command. After using the SINR (Sine Real) instruction, we use an
OUTD (Out Double) instruction to move the result from the accumulator to
V-memory. The result is 32-bits wide, requiring the Out Double to move it.
Accumulator contents
(viewed as real number)

DirectSOFT
X1

LDR
R45

Load the real number 45 into

the accumulator.

45.000000

RADR

Convert the degrees into radians,

leaving the result in the
accumulator.

0.7358981

SINR

Take the sine of the number in

the accumulator, which is in
radians.

0.7071067

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V2000
and V2001.

0.7071067

OUTD
V2000

Standard
RLL Instructions

NOTE: The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic
conversion to the 32-bit IEEE format. You must use DirectSOFT for entering real
numbers, using the LDR (Load Real) instruction.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--120

Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Increment Binary
(INCB)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Decrement Binary
(DECB)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The
Increment
Binary
instruction
increments a binary value in a specified
V--memory location by 1 each time the
instruction is executed.

INCB
A aaa

The
Decrement
Binary
instruction
decrements a binary value in a specified
V--memory location by 1 each time the
instruction is executed.

Operand Data Type

DECB
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

on when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following increment binary example, when C5 is on the binary value in V1400
is increased by one.
DirectSOFT

V1400

C5

INCB

V1400
Increment the binary value
in V1400 by 1.

V1400
3

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

C(CR)

SHFT

SHFT

In the following decrement binary example, when C5 is on the value in V1400 is

decreased by one.
V1400

DirectSOFT
C5

DECB

V1400

Standard
RLL Instructions

Decrement the binary value

in V1400 by 1.

V1400
3

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

C(CR)

SHFT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

SHFT

5--121

Standard RLL Instructions

Bit Operation Instructions

Bit Operation Instructions

The Sum instruction counts number of bits
that are set to 1 in the accumulator. The
HEX result resides in the accumulator.

Sum
(SUM)
  

SUM

430 440 450

DS

HPP

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value formed by discrete locations
X10--X17 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The
number of bits in the accumulator set to 1 is counted using the Sum instruction. The
value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT

X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10

X1

LDF

ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON

X10
K8

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

Load the value represented by

discrete locations X10--X17
into the accumulator

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.

Acc. 0

SUM

6 5

4 3

Sum the number of bits in

the accumulator set to 1

OUT
V1500

V1500

Copy the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator
to V1500

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

X(IN)

SHFT

OUT

K(CON)

Standard
RLL Instructions
DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--122

Standard RLL Instructions

Bit Operation Instructions

Shift Left is a 32 bit instruction that shifts the

bits in the accumulator a specified number
(Aaaa) of places to the left. The vacant
positions are filled with zeros and the bits
shifted out of the accumulator are lost.

Shift Left
(SHFL)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

SHFL
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

1--32

1--32

1--32

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The bit pattern in the
accumulator is shifted 2 bits to the left using the Shift Left instruction. The value in the
accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT

V1401

X1

LDD

V1400
5

V1400
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
SHFL

Acc.

K2
The bit pattern in the
accumulator is shifted 2 bit
positions to the left

6 5

4 3

S S

Shifted out of the

accumulator

S S

OUTD
V1500

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500
and V1501

Acc.

0
1

0
1

0
1

Standard
RLL Instructions

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

SHFT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

0
1

0
1

V1501

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

6 5

4 3

V1500

5--123

Standard RLL Instructions

Bit Operation Instructions

Shift Right is a 32 bit instruction that shifts

the bits in the accumulator a specified
number (Aaaa) of places to the right. The
vacant positions are filled with zeros and
the bits shifted out of the accumulator are
lost.

Shift Right
(SHFR)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

SHFR
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

1--32

1--32

1--32

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The bit pattern in the
accumulator is shifted 2 bits to the right using the Shift Right instruction. The value in
the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT

V1401

X1

Constant 6

LDD

V1400
5

V1400
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
SHFR

Acc.

6 5

4 3

K2
The bit pattern in the
accumulator is shifted 2
bit positions to the right

S S

S S

Shifted out of the

accumulator

OUTD
V1500

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500
and V1501

0
1

0
1

1
0

0
1

0
1

0
1

V1501

0
1

6 5

4 3

V1500

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

SHFT

Standard
RLL Instructions

STR

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--124

Standard RLL Instructions

Bit Operation Instructions

Rotate Left is a 32 bit instruction that rotates

the bits in the accumulator a specified
number (Aaaa) of places to the left.

Rotate Left
(ROTL)
  

ROTL
A aaa

430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

1--32

1--32

1--32

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The bit pattern in the
accumulator is rotated 2 bit positions to the left using the Rotate Left instruction. The
value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double
instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1

V1401

LDD

V1400

V1400
5

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

ROTL
K2

Acc.

6 5

4 3

The bit pattern in the

accumulator is rotated 2
bit positions to the left

S S

S S

OUTD
V1500
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500
and V1501

Acc.

0
1

0
1

0
1

Standard
RLL Instructions

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

V1501

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

SHFT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

0
1

0
1

6 5

4 3

V1500

5--125

Standard RLL Instructions

Bit Operation Instructions

Rotate Right is a 32 bit instruction that

rotates the bits in the accumulator a
specified number (Aaaa) of places to the
right.

Rotate Right
(ROTR)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

ROTR
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

1--32

1--32

1--32

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The bit pattern in the
accumulator is rotated 2 bit positions to the right using the Rotate Right instruction.
The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double
instruction.
DirectSOFT

V1401

X1

LDD

V1400
5

V1400
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

ROTR

6 5

4 3

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

6 5

4 3

Acc.

K2

The bit pattern in the

accumulator is rotated 2
bit positions to the right

S S

S S

OUTD
V1500
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V1500
and V1501

Acc.

0
1

0
1

0
1

1
0

LD

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

0
1

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

SHFT

0
1

V1500

Standard
RLL Instructions

X(IN)

0
1

V1501

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

0
1

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--126

Standard RLL Instructions

Bit Operation Instructions

The Encode instruction encodes the bit

position in the accumulator having a value
of 1, and returns the appropriate binary
representation. If the most significant bit is
set to 1 (Bit 31), the Encode instruction
would place the value HEX 1F (decimal 31)
in the accumulator. If the value to be
encoded is 0000 or 0001, the instruction will
place a zero in the accumulator. If the value
to be encoded has more than one bit
position set to a 1, the least significant 1
will be encoded and SP53 will be set on.
SP53 will also be set on when the
accumulator is equal to zero.

Encode
(ENCO)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

ENCO

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP53

On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work
with. SP53 will also come on when the accumulator is zero.

NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same
flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, The value in V1400 is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The bit position set to a 1 in the
accumulator is encoded to the corresponding 5 bit binary value using the Encode
instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator is copied to V1500
using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT

V1400

X1

LD

V1400
Load the value in V1400 into the
lower 16 bits of the accumulator

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.

6 5

4 3

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

6 5

4 3

Bit postion 12 is
converted
to binary
ENCO

Encode the bit position set

to 1 in the accumulator to
a 5 bit binary value

Acc.

Standard
RLL Instructions

OUT
V1500
0

Copy the value in the lower 16

bits of the accumulator to V1500

X(IN)

V1500

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

LD

SHFT

OUT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

C
Binary value
for 12.

5--127

Standard RLL Instructions

Bit Operation Instructions

The Decode instruction decodes a 5 bit

binary value of 0--31 (0--1F HEX) in the
accumulator by setting the appropriate bit
position to a 1. If the accumulator contains
the value F (HEX), bit 15 will be set in the
accumulator. If the value to be decoded is
greater than 31, the number is divided by 32
until the value is less than 32 and then the
value is decoded.

Decode
(DECO)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

DECO

In the following example when X1 is on, the value formed by discrete locations
X10--X14 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The
five bit binary pattern in the accumulator is decoded by setting the corresponding bit
position to a 1 using the Decode instruction.
DirectSOFT

X14 X13 X12 X11 X10

X1

LDF

OFF ON OFF ON ON

X10
K5

Load the value in represented

by discrete locations X10--X14
into the accumulator

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.

6 5

4 3

The binary value

is converted to
bit position 11.

DECO
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Decode the five bit binary
pattern in the accumulator
and set the corresponding
bit position to a 1

Acc.

6 5

4 3

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

X(IN)

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

Standard
RLL Instructions
DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--128

Standard RLL Instructions

Number Conversion Instructions

Number Conversion Instructions

The Binary instruction converts a BCD
value in the accumulator to the equivalent
binary value. The result resides in the
accumulator.

Binary
(BIN)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

BIN

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 is loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The BCD value in the
accumulator is converted to the binary (HEX) equivalent using the BIN instruction.
The binary value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out
Double instruction. The handheld programmer would display the binary value in
V1500 and V1501 as a HEX value.
DirectSOFT

V1401

X1

LDD

V1400

V1400
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 into the accumulator
8

Acc. 0

BCD Value

28529 = 16384 + 8192 + 2048 + 1024 + 512 + 256 + 64 + 32 + 16 + 1

Binary Equivalent Value

BIN

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Convert the BCD value in
the accumulator to the
binary equivalent value

Acc.

6 5

4 3

2
1
4
7
4
4
8
3
6
4
8

1
0
7
3
7
4
1
8
2
4

5
3
6
8
7
0
9
1
2

2
6
8
4
3
5
4
5
6

1
3
4
2
1
7
7
2
8

6
7
1
0
8
8
6
4

3
3
5
5
4
4
3
2

1
6
7
7
7
2
1
6

8
3
8
8
6
0
8

4
1
9
4
3
0
4

2
0
9
7
1
5
2

1
0
4
8
5
7
6

5
2
4
2
8
8

2
6
2
1
4
4

1
3
1
0
7
2

6
5
5
3
6

3
2
7
6
8

1
6
3
8
4

8
1
9
2

4
0
9
6

2
0
4
8

1
0
2
4

5
1
2

2
5
6

1 6
2 4
8

3
2

1 8
6

OUTD
V1500
0

Standard
RLL Instructions

Copy the binary value in the

accumulator to V1500 and V1501

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

BIN
OUT

V1501

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

V1500

The binary (HEX) value

copied to V1500

5--129

Standard RLL Instructions

Number Conversion Instructions

The Binary Coded Decimal instruction

converts a binary value in the accumulator
to a BCD value. The result resides in the
accumulator.

Binary Coded
Decimal
(BCD)
  

BCD

430 440 450

DS

HPP

In the following example, when X1 is on, the binary (HEX) value in V1400 and V1401
is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The binary value in
the accumulator is converted to the BCD equivalent value using the BCD instruction.
The BCD value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out
Double instruction.
DirectSOFT

V1401

X1

LDD

V1400
0

Binary Value

V1400
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 into the accumulator

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

6 5

4 3

2
1
4
7
4
4
8
3
6
4
8

1
0
7
3
7
4
1
8
2
4

5
3
6
8
7
0
9
1
2

2
6
8
4
3
5
4
5
6

1
3
4
2
1
7
7
2
8

6
7
1
0
8
8
6
4

3
3
5
5
4
4
3
2

1
6
7
7
7
2
1
6

8
3
8
8
6
0
8

4
1
9
4
3
0
4

2
0
9
7
1
5
2

1
0
4
8
5
7
6

5
2
4
2
8
8

2
6
2
1
4
4

1
3
1
0
7
2

6
5
5
3
6

3
2
7
6
8

1
6
3
8
4

8
1
9
2

4
0
9
6

2
0
4
8

1
0
2
4

5
1
2

2
5
6

1 6
2 4
8

3
2

1 8
6

Acc.

BCD

16384 + 8192 + 2048 + 1024 + 512 + 256 + 64 + 32 + 16 + 1 = 28529

Convert the binary value in

the accumulator to the BCD
equivalent value

BCD Equivalent Value

8

Acc.

OUTD
V1500
Copy the BCD value in the
accumulator to V1500 and V1501

V1501

V1500

The BCD value

copied to
V1500 and V1501

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

BCD
OUT

Standard
RLL Instructions

STR

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--130

Standard RLL Instructions

Number Conversion Instructions

The Invert instruction inverts or takes the

ones complement of the 32 bit value in the
accumulator. The result resides in the
accumulator.

Invert
(INV)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

INV

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the
accumulator is inverted using the Invert instruction. The value in the accumulator is
copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT

V1401

X1

LDD

V1400
5

V1400
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.

INV
Acc.

6 5

4 3

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

6 5

4 3

Invert the binary bit pattern

in the accumulator

OUTD
V1500
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V1500
and V1501

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

V1501

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

Standard
RLL Instructions

LD
SHFT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

V1500

Standard RLL Instructions

Number Conversion Instructions

Tens Complement The Tens Complement instruction takes

the 10s complement (BCD) of the 8 digit
(BCDCPL)
accumulator. The result resides in the
  
accumulator. The calculation for this
430 440 450
instruction is :


100000000
HPP
DS
-- accumulator value
10s complement value

5--131

BCDCPL

In the following example when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 is loaded into
the accumulator. The 10s complement is taken for the 8 digit accumulator using the
Tens Complement instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and
V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT

V1400

V1401

X1

LDD

Acc. 0

Acc. 9

V1400
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 into the accumulator

BCDCPL

Takes a 10s complement of

the value in the accumulator
OUTD
V1500

V1501

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500
and V1501

V1500

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

BCD

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

NOTE: If your program has a subtraction calculation which results in a borrowed

digit (noted by the status flag), the BCDCPL instruction can be used to find the
absolute difference between the two values in the subtraction.

Standard
RLL Instructions
DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--132

Standard RLL Instructions

Number Conversion Instructions

Binary to Real
Conversion
(BTOR)
  

The Binary-to-Real instruction converts a binary

value in the accumulator to its equivalent real
number (floating point) format. The result
resides in the accumulator. Both the binary and
the real number may use all 32 bits of the
accumulator

430 440 450

DS

HPP

BTOR

NOTE: This instruction will not work for a signed decimal.

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The BTOR instruction converts the binary
value in the accumulator the equivalent real number format. The binary weight of the MSB is
converted to the real number exponent by adding it to 127 (decimal). Then the remaining bits
are copied to the mantissa as shown. The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and
V1501 using the Out Double instruction. The handheld programmer would display the binary
value in V1500 and V1501 as a HEX value.
DirectSOFT

V1401

X1

LDD

V1400

V1400
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 into the accumulator
8

Acc. 0

Binary Value

2 (exp 18)
127 + 18 = 145
145 = 128 + 16 + 1
BTOR

Convert the binary value in

the accumulator to the real
number equivalent format

Acc. 0

Sign Bit

Exponent (8 bits)

Mantissa (23 bits)

Real Number Format

OUTD

Standard
RLL Instructions

V1500
4

Copy the real value in the

accumulator to V1500 and V1501

V1501

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

V1500

The real number (HEX) value

copied to V1500

5--133

Standard RLL Instructions

Number Conversion Instructions

The Real-to-Binary instruction converts the

real number in the accumulator to a binary
value. If the real number is negative, it will
become a signed decimal. The result
resides in the accumulator. Both the binary
and the real number may use all 32 bits of
the accumulator. Any decimal portion will be
truncated.

Real to Binary
Conversion
(RTOB)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

RTOB

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP72

On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid floating point number.

SP73

on when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit.

SP75

On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON--BCD number was encountered.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 is loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The RTOB instruction converts
the real value in the accumulator to the equivalent binary number format. The value
in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
The handheld programmer would display the binary value in V1500 and V1501 as a
HEX value.
DirectSOFT
X1

LDD

V1401

V1400
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 into the accumulator

Sign Bit

Exponent (8 bits)

Acc. 0

Real Number Format

V1400

Mantissa (23 bits)

RTOB

Convert the real number in

the accumulator to binary
format.

128 + 16 + 1 = 145
127 + 18 = 145
Binary Value

2 (exp 18)
8

Acc. 0

OUTD
V1500
Copy the real value in the
accumulator to V1500 and V1501

V1501

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

V1500
2

The binary number copied to

V1400.

Standard
RLL Instructions

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--134

Standard RLL Instructions

Number Conversion Instructions

Radian Real
Conversion
(RADR)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Degree Real
Conversion
(DEGR)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Radian Real Conversion instruction

converts the real degree value stored in the
accumulator to the equivalent real number
in radians. The result resides in the
accumulator.

RADR

The Degree Real instruction converts the

degree real radian value stored inthe
accumulator to the equivalent real number
in degrees. The result resides in the
accumulator.

DEGR

The two instructions described above convert real numbers into the accumulator
from degree format to radian format, and visa-versa. In degree format, a circle
contains 360 degrees. In radian format, a circle contains 2 radians. These convert
between both positive and negative real numbers, and for angles greater than a full
circle. These functions are very useful when combined with the transcendantal
trigonometric functions (see the section on math instructions).
Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP63

On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP70

On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP71

On anytime the V-memory specified by a pointer (P) is not valid.

SP72

On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid floating point number.

SP74

On anytime a floating point math operation results in an underflow error.

SP75

On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON--BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic
conversion to the 32-bit IEEE format. You must use DirectSOFT for entering real
numbers, using the LDR (Load Real) instruction.
The following example takes the sine of 45 degrees. Since transcendental functions
operate only on real numbers, we do a LDR (load real) 45. The trig functions operate
only in radians, so we must convert the degrees to radians by using the RADR
command. After using the SINR (Sine Real) instruction, we use an OUTD (Out
Double) instruction to move the result from the accumulator to V-memory. The result
is 32-bits wide, requiring the Out Double to move it.
Accumulator contents
(viewed as real number)

DirectSOFT
X1

LDR

Standard
RLL Instructions

R45

Load the real number 45 into

the accumulator.

45.000000

RADR

Convert the degrees into radians,

leaving the result in the
accumulator.

0.7358981

SINR

Take the sine of the number in

the accumulator, which is in
radians.

0.7071067

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V2000
and V2001.

0.7071067

OUTD
V2000

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard RLL Instructions

Number Conversion Instructions

ASCII to HEX
(ATH)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

5--135

The ASCII TO HEX instruction converts a

ATH
table of ASCII values to a specified table of
V aaa
HEX values. ASCII values are two digits
and their HEX equivalents are one digit.
This means an ASCII table of four V--memory locations would only require two V-memory locations for the equivalent HEX table. The function parameters are loaded
into the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional instructions.
Listed below are the steps necessary to program an ASCII to HEX table function.
The example on the following page shows a program for the ASCII to HEX table
function.
Step 1: Load the number of V--memory locations for the ASCII table into the first
level of the accumulator stack.
Step 2: Load the starting V--memory location for the ASCII table into the
accumulator. This parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 3: Specify the starting V--memory location (Vaaa) for the HEX table in the
ATH instruction.
Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory
locations, the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX
equivalent and load the value into the accumulator.
Operand Data Type

V--memory

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

In the example on the following page, when X1 is ON the constant (K4) is loaded into
the accumulator using the Load instruction and will be placed in the first level of the
accumulator stack when the next Load instruction is executed. The starting location
for the ASCII table (V1400) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Address
instruction. The starting location for the HEX table (V1600) is specified in the ASCII
to HEX instruction. The table below lists valid ASCII values for ATH conversion.
ASCII Values Valid for ATH Conversion
Hex Value

ASCII Value

Hex Value

30

38

31

39

32

41

33

42

34

43

35

44

36

45

37

46

Standard
RLL Instructions

ASCII Value

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--136

Standard RLL Instructions

Number Conversion Instructions

DirectSOFT
X1

LD
K4

33 34

V1400

Convert octal 1400 to HEX

300 and load the value into
the accumulator

LDA
O 1400

V1401

31 32

V1402

37 38

V1600

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X(IN)

LD

K(CON)

LD

SHFT

OCT

SHFT

SHFT

DS

HPP

V1600

5678

V1601

35 36

V1403

STR

430 440 450

1234

V1600 is the starting

location for the HEX table

ATH

HEX to ASCII
(HTA)
  

Hexadecimal
Equivalents

ASCII TABLE

Load the constant value

into the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator. This value
defines the number of V
memory location in the
ASCII table

The HEX to ASCII instruction converts a

table of HEX values to a specified table of
ASCII values. HEX values are one digit and
their ASCII equivalents are two digits.

HTA
V aaa

This means a HEX table of two V--memory locations would require four V--memory
locations for the equivalent ASCII table. The function parameters are loaded into the
accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional instructions. Listed below
are the steps necessary to program a HEX to ASCII table function. The example on
the following page shows a program for the HEX to ASCII table function.
Step 1: Load the number of V--memory locations in the HEX table into the first
level of the accumulator stack.
Step 2: Load the starting V--memory location for the HEX table into the
accumulator. This parameter must be a HEX value.

Standard
RLL Instructions

Step 3: Specify the starting V--memory location (Vaaa) for the ASCII table in the
HTA instruction.
Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory
locations, the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX
equivalent and load the value into the accumulator.
Operand Data Type

V--memory

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

DL440 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Standard RLL Instructions

Number Conversion Instructions

5--137

In the following example, when X1 is ON the constant (K2) is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The starting location for the HEX table
(V1500) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Address instruction. The
starting location for the ASCII table (V1400) is specified in the HEX to ASCII
instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1

Hexadecimal
Equivalents

LD

ASCII TABLE

K2
Load the constant value into
the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator. This value
defines the number of V
locations in the HEX table.

33 34

V1400

31 32

V1401

37 38

V1402

35 36

V1403

1234

V1500
LDA
O 1500
Convert octal 1500 to HEX
340 and load the value into
the accumulator

HTA
V1400

5678

V1501

V1400 is the starting

location for the ASCII table.
The conversion is executed
by this instruction.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR

X(IN)

LD

K(CON)

LD

SHFT

OCT

SHFT

SHFT

The table below lists valid ASCII values for HTA conversion.
ASCII Values Valid for HTA Conversion
ASCII Value

Hex Value

ASCII Value

30

38

31

39

32

41

33

42

34

43

35

44

36

45

37

46

Standard
RLL Instructions

Hex Value

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--138

Standard RLL Instructions

Number Conversion Instructions

The BCD/Segment instruction converts a

four digit HEX value in the accumulator to
seven segment display format. The result
resides in the accumulator.

Segment
(SEG)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

SEG

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 is loaded into the lower
16 bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction. The binary (HEX) value in the
accumulator is converted to seven segment format using the Segment instruction.
The bit pattern in the accumulator is copied to Y20--Y57 using the Out Formatted
instruction.
DirectSOFT

V1400

X1

LD

V1400
Load the value in V1400 into the
lower 16 bits of the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.

6 5

4 3

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

SEG

Convert the binary (HEX)

value in the accumulator to
seven segment display
format

OUTF

Y20
K32

Copy the value in the

accumulator to Y20--Y57

Acc.

6 5

4 3

--

--

--

--

a Segment
Labels

a
f

Segment
Labels

Y57 Y56 Y55 Y54 Y53

g
e

OFF ON ON ON ON

S S

S S

S S

c
d

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

K(CON)

S S

Y24 Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20

OFF OFF ON ON OFF

5--139

Standard RLL Instructions

Number Conversion Instructions

The Gray code instruction converts a 16 bit

gray code value to a BCD value. The BCD
conversion requires 10 bits of the
accumulator. The upper 22 bits are set to
0. This instruction is designed for use with
devices (typically encoders) that use the
grey code numbering scheme. The Gray
Code instruction will directly convert a gray
code number to a BCD number for devices
having a resolution of 512 or 1024 counts
per revolution. If a device having a
resolution of 360 counts per revolution is to
be used you must subtract a BCD value of
76 from the converted value to obtain the
proper result. For a device having a
resolution of 720 counts per revolution you
must subtract a BCD value of 152.

Gray Code
(GRAY)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

GRAY

In the following example, when X1 is ON the binary value represented by X10--X27 is

loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The gray code
value in the accumulator is converted to BCD using the Gray Code instruction. The
value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator is copied to V1500.
DirectSOFT

X27 X26 X25

X1

LDF

S S

OFF OFF OFF

X10

X12 X11 X10

S S

ON OFF ON

K16
Load the value represented
by X10--X27 into the lower
16 bits of the accumulator

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.

GRAY
Acc.

6 5

4 3

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

6 5

4 3

Convert the 16 bit grey code

value in the accumulator to a
BCD value
OUT
V1500

V1500

Copy the value in the lower 16

bits of the accumulator to V1500
Gray Code
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

X(IN)

SHFT

OUT

K(CON)

0000000000

0000

0000000001

0001

0000000011

0002

0000000010

0003

0000000110

0004

0000000111

0005

0000000101

0006

0000000100

0007

S
S

S
S

1000000001

1022

1000000000

1023

Standard
RLL Instructions

SHFT

BCD

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--140

Standard RLL Instructions

Number Conversion Instructions

Shuffle Digits
(SFLDGT)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Shuffle Digits instruction shuffles a

maximum of 8 digits rearranging them in a
specified order. This function requires
parameters to be loaded into the first level
of the accumulator stack and the
accumulator
with
two
additional
instructions. Listed below are the steps
necessary to use the shuffle digit function.
The example on the following page shows a
program for the Shuffle Digits function.

SFLDGT

Step 1: Load the value (digits) to be shuffled into the first level of the accumulator
stack.
Step 2: Load the order the digits will be shuffled to into the accumulator, numbered
1 through 8 (1 being the least significant digit, and 8 being the most significant
digit.
Note: If the number used to specify the order contains a 0 or 9--F, the
corresponding position will be set to 0.
See example
Note:If the number used to specify the order contains duplicate numbers, the
most significant duplicate number is valid. The result resides in the accumulator.
See example
Step 3: Insert the SFLDGT instruction.
Shuffle Digits
Block Diagram

There are a maximum of 8 digits that can be

shuffled. The bit positions in the first level of
the accumulator stack defines the digits to
be shuffled. They correspond to the bit
positions in the accumulator that define the
order the digits will be shuffled. The digits
are shuffled and the result resides in the
accumulator.

Digits to be
shuffled (first stack location)
9

C D

Specified order (accumulator)

Bit Positions

Standard
RLL Instructions

Result (accumulator)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--141

Standard RLL Instructions

Number Conversion Instructions

In the following example when X1 is on, The value in the first level of the accumulator
stack will be reorganized in the order specified by the value in the accumulator.
Example A shows how the shuffle digits works when 0 or 9 --F is not used when
specifying the order the digits are to be shuffled. Also, there are no duplicate
numbers in the specified order.
Example B shows how the shuffle digits works when a 0 or 9--F is used when
specifying the order the digits are to be shuffled. Notice when the Shuffle Digits
instruction is executed, the bit positions in the first stack location that had a
corresponding 0 or 9--F in the accumulator (order specified) are set to 0.
Example C shows how the shuffle digits works when duplicate numbers are used
specifying the order the digits are to be shuffled. Notice when the Shuffle Digits
instruction is executed, the most significant duplicate number in the order specified
is used in the result.
DirectSOFT

X1

V1401

LDD
9

V1400
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 into the accumulator

Original
bit
Positions

6
B

V1402
Load the value in V1402 and
V1403 into the accumulator

Specified
order

New bit
Positions

SFLDGT

8
1

7
2

6
8

V1401
0

V1403

LDD

B
V1400
0

Acc.

5
7

8 7 6 5
0 F E D

4
C

3
B

2
A

1
9

V1403
4

V1401

V1402

C
V1400

7
0

6
4

Acc.

5
3

V1400
C

V1402
3

V1403

Acc.

Acc.

8 7 6 5
0 0 0 0

4
E

3 2
D A

1
9

Acc.

V1402

Acc.

Acc.

Acc.

Acc.

Shuffle the digits in the first

level of the accumulator
stack based on the pattern
in the accumulator. The
result is in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1500

V1501

V1501

V1500

V1500

V1501

V1500

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500
and V1501

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X(IN)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

LD

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

Standard
RLL Instructions

STR

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--142

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

Table Instructions
The Fill instruction fills a table of up to 255
V--memory locations with a value (Aaaa),
which is either a V--memory location or a
4-digit constant. The function parameters
are loaded into the first level of the
accumulator stack and the accumulator by
two additional instructions. Listed below are
the steps necessary to program the Fill
function.

Fill
(FILL)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

FILL
A aaa

Step 1: Load the number of V--memory locations to be filled into the first level of
the accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0--FF.
Step 2: Load the starting V--memory location for the table into the accumulator.
This parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 3: Insert the Fill instructions which specifies the value to fill the table with.
Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory
locations, the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX
equivalent and load the value into the accumulator.
Operand Data Type

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

0--FF

0--FF

0--FF

In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K4) is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table
and is placed on the first level of the accumulator stack when the Load Address
instruction is executed. The octal address 1600 (V1600) is the starting location for
the table and is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Address instruction. The
value to fill the table with (V1400) is specified in the Fill instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1

Load the constant value 4

(HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator

LD
K4

S
S

Convert the octal address

1600 to HEX 380 and load the
value into the accumulator

LDA
O 1600

V1400

Standard
RLL Instructions

Fill the table with the value

in V1400

FILL
V1400

X V1576

X V1577

0 V1600

0 V1601

0 V1602

0 V1603

X V1604

X V1605

S
S

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

K(CON)

LD

SHFT

OCT

SHFT

SHFT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

Find
(FIND)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Find instruction is used to search for a

specified value in a V--memory table of up to
255 locations. The function parameters are
loaded into the first and second levels of the
accumulator stack and the accumulator by
three additional instructions. Listed below
are the steps necessary to program the
Find function.

5--143

FIND
A aaa

Step 1: Load the length of the table (number of V--memory locations) into the
second level of the accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0--FF.
Step 2: Load the starting V--memory location for the table into the first level of the
accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 3: Load the offset from the starting location to begin the search. This
parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 4: Insert the Find instruction which specifies the first value to be found in the
table.
Results: The offset from the starting address to the first V--memory location which
contains the search value is returned to the accumulator. SP53 will be set on if an
address outside the table is specified in the offset or the value is not found. If the
value is not found 0 will be returned in the accumulator. The result will be a HEX
value.
Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory
locations, the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX
equivalent and load the value into the accumulator.
Operand Data Type

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

0--FFFF

0--FFFF

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP53

ON if there is no value in the table that is equal to the search value.

NOTE: Status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is
executed. The pointer for this instruction starts at 0 and resides in the accumulator.

Standard
RLL Instructions

In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table
and is placed in the second stack location when the following Load Address and
Load instruction is executed. The octal address 1400 (V1400) is the starting location
for the table and is loaded into the accumulator. This value is placed in the first level
of the accumulator stack when the following Load instruction is executed. The offset
(K2) is loaded into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction.
The value to be found in the table is specified in the Find instruction. If a value is
found equal to the search value, the offset (from the starting location of the table)
where the value is located will reside in the accumulator.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--144

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

DirectSOFT
X1

S
S

LD
K6
Load the constant value 6
(HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator

Offset
Begin here

LDA
O 1400
Convert octal 1400 to HEX
300 and load the value into
the accumulator.

3 V1400

0 V1401

9 V1402

4 V1403

9 V1404

0 V1405

X V1406

X V1407

Table length

Accumulator
0

V1404 contains the location

where the match was found.
The value 8989 was the 4th
location after the start of the
specified table.

S
S

LD
K2
Load the constant value
2 into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator


HPP

X(IN)

LD

K(CON)

LD

SHFT

LD

K(CON)

Find the location in the table

where the value 8989 resides

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

Find Greater Than

(FDGT)
  

DS

STR

K8989

FIND

430 440 450

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

OCT

The Find Greater Than instruction is used to

search for the first occurrence of a value in a
V--memory table that is greater than the
specified value (Aaaa), which can be either
a V--memory location or a 4-digit constant.
The function parameters are loaded into the
first level of the accumulator stack and the
accumulator by two additional instructions.
Listed below are the steps necessary to
program the Find Greater Than function.

FDGT
A aaa

Standard
RLL Instructions

NOTE: This instruction does not have an offset, such as the one required for the
FIND instruction.
Step 1: Load the length of the table (up to 255 locations) into the first level of the
accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0--FF.
Step 2: Load the starting V--memory location for the table into the accumulator.
This parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 3: Insert the FDGT instructions which specifies the greater than search
value.
Results: The offset from the starting address to the first V--memory location which
contains the greater than search value is returned to the accumulator. SP53 will be
set on if the value is not found and 0 will be returned in the accumulator. The result will
be a HEX value.
Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory
locations, the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX
equivalent and load the value into the accumulator.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--145

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

Operand Data Type

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

0--FFFF

0--FFFF

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP53

on if there is no value in the table that is greater than the search value.

NOTE: Status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is
executed.
The pointer for this instruction starts at 0 and resides in the accumulator.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table
and is placed in the first stack location after the Load Address instruction is
executed. The octal address 1400 (V1400) is the starting location for the table and is
loaded into the accumulator. The greater than search value is specified in the Find
Greater Than instruction. If a value is found greater than the search value, the offset
(from the starting location of the table) where the value is located will reside in the
accumulator. If there is no value in the table that is greater than the search value, a
zero is stored in the accumulator and SP53 will come ON.
DirectSOFT
X1

LD
K6
Load the constant value 6
(HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator

S
S
Begin here

LDA
O 1400
Convert octal 1400 to HEX
300 and load the value into
the accumulator.

FDGT
K8989

3 V1400

0 V1401

9 V1402

4 V1403

9 V1404

0 V1405

X V1406

X V1407

Table length
Accumulator
0

V1402 contains the location

where the first value greater
than the search value was
found. 9999 was the 2nd
location after the start of the
specified table.

S
S

Find the value in the table

greater than the specified value

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

K(CON)

LD

SHFT

OCT

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

Standard
RLL Instructions
DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--146

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

The Move instruction moves up to 4095

values from a V--memory table to another
V--memory table the same length. The
function parameters are loaded into the first
level of the accumulator stack and the
accumulator by two additional instructions.
Listed below are the steps necessary to
program the Move function.

Move
(MOV)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

MOV
A aaa

Step 1: Load the number of V--memory locations to be moved into the first level of
the accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0--FFF.
Step 2: Load the starting V--memory location for the locations to be moved into the
accumulator. This parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 3: Insert the MOVE instruction which specifies starting V--memory location
(Vaaa) for the destination table.
Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory
locations, the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX
equivalent and load the value into the accumulator.
Operand Data Type

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Pointer

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table
and is placed in the first stack location after the Load Address instruction is
executed. The octal address 1500 (V1500), the starting location for the source table
is loaded into the accumulator. The destination table location (V1400) is specified in
the Move instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1

K6

Convert octal 1500 to HEX

340 and load the value into
the accumulator

LDA
O 1500

Copy the specified table

locations to a table
beginning at location V1400

MOV
V1400

Standard
RLL Instructions

S
S

Load the constant value 6

(HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator

LD

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X V1476

X V1477

3 V1500

3 V1400

0 V1501

0 V1401

9 V1502

9 V1402

4 V1503

4 V1403

9 V1504

9 V1404

0 V1505

0 V1405

X V1506

X V1406

X V1507

X V1407

S
S

STR

X(IN)

LD

K(CON)

LD

SHFT

OCT

SHFT

SHFT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

S
S

S
S

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

Table to
Destination
(TTD)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Table To Destination instruction moves

a value from a V--memory table to a V-memory location and increments the table
pointer by 1. The first V--memory location in
the table contains the table pointer which
indicates the next location in the table to be
moved. The instruction will be executed
once per scan provided the input remains
on. The table pointer will reset to 1 when the
value equals the last location in the table.
The function parameters are loaded into the
first level of the accumulator stack and the
accumulator by two additional instructions.
Listed below are the steps necessary to
program the Table To Destination function.

5--147

TTD
Aaaa

Step 1: Load the length of the data table (number of V--memory locations) into the
first level of the accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
Step 2: Load the starting V--memory location for the table into the accumulator.
(Remember, the starting location of the table is used as the table pointer.) This
parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 3: Insert the TTD instruction which specifies destination V--memory location
(Vaaa).
Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory
locations, the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX
equivalent and load the value into the accumulator.
Helpful Hint: The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on. If
you do not want the instruction to execute for more than one scan, a one shot (PD)
should be used in the input logic.
Helpful Hint: The pointer location should be set to the value where the table
operation will begin. The special relay SP0 or a one shot (PD) should be used so the
value will only be set in one scan and will not affect the instruction operation.
Operand Data Type

V--memory

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP56

ON when the table pointer equals the table length.

The pointer for this instruction starts at 0 and resets when the table length is reached.
At first glance it may appear that the pointer should reset to 0. However, it resets to 1,
not 0.

Standard
RLL Instructions

NOTE: Status flags (SPs) are only valid until:

another instruction that uses the same flag is executed, or
the end of the scan.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--148

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions
In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table
and is placed in the first stack location after the Load Address instruction is
executed. The octal address 1400 (V1400) is the starting location for the source
table and is loaded into the accumulator. Remember, V1400 is used as the pointer
location, and is not actually part of the table data source. The destination location
(V1500) is specified in the Table to Destination instruction. The table pointer (V1400
in this case) will be increased by 1 after each execution of the TTD instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1

Load the constant value 6

(HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator

LD
K6

Convert octal 1400 to HEX

300 and load the value into
the accumulator. This is the
table pointer location.

LDA
O 1400

Copy the specified value from

the table to the specified
destination (V1500)

TTD
V1500

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

K(CON)

LD

SHFT

OCT

SHFT

SHFT

It is important to understand how the table

locations are numbered. If you examine
the example table, youll notice that the
first data location, V1401, will be used
when the pointer is equal to zero, and
again when the pointer is equal to six.
Why? Because the pointer is only equal to
zero before the very first execution. From
then on, it increments from one to six, and
then resets to one.
Also, our example uses a normal input
contact (X1) to control the execution. Since
the CPU scan is extremely fast, and the
pointer increments automatically, the table
would cycle through the locations very
quickly. If this is a problem, you have an
option of using SP56 in conjunction with a
one-shot (PD) and a latch (C1 for example)
to allow the table to cycle through all
locations one time and then stop. The logic
shown here is not required, its just an
optional method.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Table

Table Pointer

V1401

0 6

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

0 V1400

Destination
X

X V1500

S
S

DirectSOFT (optional latch example using SP56)

X1
C1

C0
PD
LD
K6
Load the constant value 6
(HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator

C0

C1
SET

SP56

C1
RST
Since Special Relays are
reset at the end of the scan,
this latch must follow the TTD
instruction in the program.

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

5--149

The following diagram shows the scan-by-scan results of the execution for our example program. Notice
how the pointer automatically cycles from 0 -- 6, and then starts over at 1 instead of 0. Also, notice how SP56
is only on until the end of the scan.
Example of Execution
Scan N

Before TTD Execution

Table

After TTD Execution

Table Pointer

V1401

0 6

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

Table

0 V1400

Destination
X

X V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

0 6

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

S
S

Scan N+1

Table Pointer (Automatically Incremented)

V1401

1 V1400

Destination
0

V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

S
S

Before TTD Execution

Table

After TTD Execution

Table Pointer

V1401

0 6

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

Table

1 V1400

Destination
0

0 V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

Table Pointer (Automatically Incremented)

V1401

0 6

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

S
S

2 V1400

Destination
9

9 V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

S
S
S
S
S

Scan N+5

After TTD Execution

Before TTD Execution

Table

Table Pointer

V1401

0 6

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

Destination
1

0 V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

V1401

0 6

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

S
S

Scan N+6

Table

SP56
SP56 = ON
until end of scan
or next instruction
that uses SP56

0 6

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

4
5

V1406

V1407

Destination
2

Table Pointer (Resets to 1, not 0)

Table

6 V1400

6 V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

V1401

0 6

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

4
5

V1406

V1407

S
S

1 V1400

Destination
0

0 V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

Standard
RLL Instructions

6 V1500

After TTD Execution

Table Pointer

V1401

6 V1400

Destination
2

S
S

Before TTD Execution

S
S

Table Pointer (Automatically Incremented)

Table

5 V1400

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--150

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

Remove from
Bottom
(RFB)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Remove From Bottom instruction

moves a value from the bottom of a
V--memory table to a V--memory location
RFB
and decrements a table pointer by 1. The
Aaaa
first V--memory location in the table
contains the table pointer which indicates
the next location in the table to be moved.
The instruction will be executed once per
scan provided the input remains on. The
instruction will stop operation when the
pointer equals 0. The function parameters
are loaded into the first level of the
accumulator stack and the accumulator by
two additional instructions. Listed below are
the steps necessary to program the
Remove From Bottom function.
Step 1: Load the length of the table (number of V--memory locations) into the first
level of the accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
Step 2: Load the starting V--memory location for the table into the accumulator.
(Remember, the starting location of the table blank is used as the table pointer.) This
parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 3: Insert the RFB instructions which specifies destination V--memory
location (Vaaa).
Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory
locations, the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX
equivalent and load the value into the accumulator.
Helpful Hint: The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on. If
you do not want the instruction to execute for more than one scan, a one shot (PD)
should be used in the input logic.
Helpful Hint: The pointer location should be set to the value where the table
operation will begin. The special relay SP0 or a one shot (PD) should be used so the
value will only be set in one scan and will not affect the instruction operation.
Operand Data Type

Standard
RLL Instructions

V--memory

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP56

on when the table pointer equals 0

NOTE: Status flags (SPs) are only valid until:

another instruction that uses the same flag is executed, or
the end of the scan.
The pointer for this instruction can be set to start anywhere in the table. It is not set
automatically. You have to load a value into the pointer somewhere in your program.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--151

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table
and is placed in the first stack location after the Load Address instruction is
executed. The octal address 1400 (V1400) is the starting location for the source
table and is loaded into the accumulator. Remember, V1400 is used as the pointer
location, and is not actually part of the table data source. The destination location
(V1500) is specified in the Remove From Bottom. The table pointer (V1400 in this
case) will be decremented by 1 after each execution of the RFB instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1

LD
K6
Load the constant value 6
(HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
LDA
O 1400
Convert octal 1400 to HEX
300 and load the value into
the accumulator. This is the
table pointer location.
RFB
V1500
Copy the specified value from
the table to the specified
destination (V1500)

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

K(CON)

LD

SHFT

OCT

SHFT

SHFT

It is important to understand how the table

locations are numbered. If you examine
the example table, youll notice that the
first data location, V1401, will be used
when the pointer is equal to one. The
second data location, V1402, will be used
when the pointer is equal to two, etc.

Table

Table Pointer

V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

0 V1400

Destination
X

X V1500

S
S

DirectSOFT (optional one-shot method)

X1
C0

C0
PD
LD
K6
Load the constant value 6
(HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
LDA
O 1400
Convert octal 1400 to HEX
300 and load the value into
the accumulator. This is the
table pointer location.

Standard
RLL Instructions

Also, our example uses a normal input

contact (X1) to control the execution.
Since the CPU scan is extremely fast, and
the pointer decrements automatically, the
table would cycle through the locations
very quickly. If this is a problem for your
application, you have an option of using a
one-shot (PD) to remove one value each
time the input contact transitions from low
to high.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--152

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

The following diagram shows the scan-by-scan results of the execution for our example program. Notice how
the pointer automatically decrements from 6 -- 0. Also, notice how SP56 is only on until the end of the scan.
Example of Execution
Scan N

Before RFB Execution

Table

After RFB Execution

Table Pointer

V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

Table

6 V1400

Destination
X

X V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

S
S

Scan N+1

Table Pointer (Automatically Decremented)

V1401

5 V1400

Destination
2

V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

S
S

Before RFB Execution

Table

After RFB Execution

Table Pointer

V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

Table

5 V1400

Destination
2

6 V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

Table Pointer (Automatically Decremented)

V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

S
S

4 V1400

Destination
1

0 V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

S
S
S
S
S

Scan N+4

Before RFB Execution

Table

After RFB Execution

Table Pointer

V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

Destination
3

4 V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

S
S

Scan N+5

1 V1400

Destination
9

9 V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

S
S

Before RFB Execution

Table

Standard
RLL Instructions

Table Pointer (Automatically Decremented)

Table

2 V1400

After RFB Execution

Table Pointer

V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

5
6

V1406

V1407

Destination
9

9 V1500

SP56

S
S

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Table Pointer

Table

1 V1400

SP56 = OFF

V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

5
6

V1406

V1407

S
S

0 V1400

Destination
0

0 V1500

SP56
SP56 = ON
until end of scan
or next instruction
that uses SP56

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

Source to Table
(STT)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

5--153

The Source To Table instruction moves a

value from a V--memory location into a
V--memory table and increments a table
STT
pointer by 1. When the table pointer
Vaaa
reaches the end of the table, it resets to 1.
The first V--memory location in the table
contains the table pointer which indicates
the next location in the table to store a
value. The instruction will be executed once
per scan provided the input remains on. The
function parameters are loaded into the first
level of the accumulator stack and the
accumulator
with
two
additional
instructions. Listed below are the steps
necessary to program the Source To Table
function.
Step 1: Load the length of the table (number of V--memory locations) into the first
level of the accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
Step 2: Load the starting V--memory location for the table into the accumulator.
(Remember, the starting location of the table is used as the table pointer.) This
parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 3: Insert the STT instruction which specifies the source V--memory location
(Vaaa). This is where the value will be moved from.
Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory
locations, the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX
equivalent and load the value into the accumulator.
Helpful Hint: The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on. If
you do not want the instruction to execute for more than one scan, a one shot (PD)
should be used in the input logic.
Helpful Hint: The table counter value should be set to indicate the starting point
for the operation. Also, it must be set to a value that is within the length of the table.
For example, if the table is 6 words long, then the allowable range of values that
could be in the pointer should be between 0 and 6. If the value is outside of this
range, the data will not be moved. Also, a one shot (PD) should be used so the value
will only be set in one scan and will not affect the instruction operation.
Operand Data Type

V--memory

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP56

on when the table pointer equals the table length

Standard
RLL Instructions

NOTE: Status flags (SPs) are only valid until:

another instruction that uses the same flag is executed, or
the end of the scan.
The pointer for this instruction starts at 0 and resets to 1 automatically when the table
length is reached.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--154

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions
In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table
and is placed in the first stack location after the Load Address instruction is
executed. The octal address 1400 (V1400), which is the starting location for the
destination table and table pointer, is loaded into the accumulator. The data source
location (V1500) is specified in the Source to Table instruction. The table pointer will
be increased by 1 after each time the instruction is executed.
DirectSOFT
X1

LD
K6
Load the constant value 6
(Hex.) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
LDA
O 1400
Convert octal 1400 to HEX
300 and load the value into
the accumulator

STT
V1500
Copy the specified value
from the source location
(V1500) to the table

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

K(CON)

LD

SHFT

OCT

SHFT

SHFT

It is important to understand how the table

locations are numbered. If you examine
the example table, youll notice that the
first data storage location, V1401, will be
used when the pointer is equal to zero,
and again when the pointer is equal to six.
Why? Because the pointer is only equal to
zero before the very first execution. From
then on, it increments from one to six, and
then resets to one.
Also, our example uses a normal input
contact (X1) to control the execution.
Since the CPU scan is extremely fast, and
the pointer increments automatically, the
source data would be moved into all the
table locations very quickly. If this is a
problem for your application, you have an
option of using a one-shot (PD) to move
one value each time the input contact
transitions from low to high.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Table

Table Pointer

V1401

0 6

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

0 V1400

Data Source
0

0 V1500

S
S

DirectSOFT (optional one-shot method)

X1
C0

C0
PD
LD
K6
Load the constant value 6
(HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
LDA
O 1400
Convert octal 1400 to HEX
300 and load the value into
the accumulator. This is the
starting table location.

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

5--155

The following diagram shows the scan-by-scan results of the execution for our example program. Notice how
the pointer automatically cycles from 0 -- 6, and then starts over at 1 instead of 0. Also, notice how SP56 is
affected by the execution. Although our example does not show it, we are assuming that there is another part
of the program that changes the value in V1500 (data source) prior to the execution of the STT instruction.
This is not required, but it makes it easier to see how the data source is copied into the table.
Example of Execution
Scan N

Before STT Execution

After STT Execution

Table Pointer

Table
V1401

0 6

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

Table

0 V1400

Source
0

0 V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

0 6

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

1 V1400

Source
0

V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

S
S

S
S

Scan N+1

Table Pointer (Automatically Incremented)

V1401

Before STT Execution

Table

After STT Execution

Table Pointer

V1401

0 6

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

Table

1 V1400

Source
9

9 V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

Table Pointer (Automatically Incremented)

V1401

0 6

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

S
S

2 V1400

Source
9

9 V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

S
S
S
S
S

Scan N+5

Before STT Execution

Table

After STT Execution

Table Pointer

V1401

0 6

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

Source
2

6 V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

V1401

0 6

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

4
5

V1406

V1407

S
S

Scan N+6

Table

SP56
SP56 = ON
until end of scan
or next instruction
that uses SP56

0 6

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

Source
1

Table Pointer (Resets to 1, not 0)

Table

6 V1400

4 V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

V1401

0 6

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

S
S

1 V1400

Source
1

4 V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

Standard
RLL Instructions

6 V1500

After STT Execution

Table Pointer

V1401

6 V1400

Source
2

S
S

Before STT Execution

S
S

Table Pointer (Automatically Incremented)

Table

5 V1400

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--156

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

Remove from Table The Remove From Table instruction pops a

value off a table and stores it in a
(RFT)
V--memory location. When a value is
  
RFT
removed from the table all other values are
430 440 450
Vaaa
shifted up 1 location. The first V--memory


location in the table contains the table
HPP
DS
length counter. The table counter
decrements by 1 each time the instruction is
executed. If the length counter is zero or
greater than the maximum table length
(specified in the first level of the
accumulator stack) the instruction will not
execute and SP56 will be on.
The instruction will be executed once per scan provided the input remains on. The
function parameters are loaded into the first level of the accumulator stack and the
accumulator by two additional instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to
program the Remove From Table function.
Step 1: Load the length of the table (number of V--memory locations) into the first
level of the accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
Step 2: Load the starting V--memory location for the table into the accumulator.
(Remember, the starting location of the table is used as the table length counter.)
This parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 3: Insert the RFT instruction which specifies destination V--memory location
(Vaaa). The value will be moved to this location.
Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory
locations, the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX
equivalent and load the value into the accumulator.
Helpful Hint: The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on. If
you do not want the instruction to execute for more than one scan, a one shot (PD)
should be used in the input logic.
Helpful Hint: The table counter value should be set to indicate the starting point
for the operation. Also, it must be set to a value that is within the length of the table.
For example, if the table is 6 words long, then the allowable range of values that
could be in the table counter should be between 1 and 6. If the value is outside this
range or zero, the data will not be moved from the table. Also, a one shot (PD) should
be used so the value will only be set in one scan and will not affect the instruction
operation.
Operand Data Type

Standard
RLL Instructions

V--memory

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP56

on when the table counter equals 0

NOTE: Status flags (SPs) are only valid until:

another instruction that uses the same flag is executed, or
the end of the scan.
The pointer for this instruction can be set to start anywhere in the table. It is not set
automatically. You have to load a value into the pointer somewhere in your program.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--157

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table
and is placed in the first stack location after the Load Address instruction is
executed. The octal address 1400 (V1400) is the starting location for the source
table and is loaded into the accumulator. The destination location (V1500) is
specified in the Remove from Table instruction. The table counter will be decreased
by 1 after the instruction is executed.
DirectSOFT
X1

Load the constant value 6

(Hex.) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator

LD
K6

Convert octal 1400 to HEX

300 and load the value into
the accumulator

LDA
O 1400

Copy the specified value

from the table to the
specified location (V1500)

RFT
V1500

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

K(CON)

LD

SHFT

OCT

SHFT

SHFT

Table

Table Counter

V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

6 V1400

Destination
X

X V1500

S
S

DirectSOFT (optional one-shot method)

X1
C0

C0
PD
LD
K6
Load the constant value 6
(HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
LDA
O 1400
Convert octal 1400 to HEX
300 and load the value into
the accumulator. This is the
table pointer location.

Standard
RLL Instructions

Since the table counter specifies the

range of data that will be removed from the
table, it is important to understand how the
table locations are numbered. If you
examine the example table, youll notice
that the data locations are numbered from
the top of the table. For example, if the
table counter started at 6, then all six of the
locations would be affected during the
instruction execution.
Also, our example uses a normal input
contact (X1) to control the execution.
Since the CPU scan is extremely fast, and
the pointer decrements automatically, the
data would be removed from the table very
quickly. If this is a problem for your
application, you have an option of using a
one-shot (PD) to remove one value each
time the input contact transitions from low
to high.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--158

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

The following diagram shows the scan-by-scan results of the execution for our example program. In our
example were showing the table counter set to 4 initially. (Remember, you can set the table counter to any
value that is within the range of the table.) The table counter automatically decrements from 4--0 as the
instruction is executed. Notice how the last two table positions, 5 and 6, are not moved up through the table.
Also, notice how SP56, which comes on when the table counter is zero, is only on until the end of the scan.
Example of Execution
Scan N

Before RFT Execution

Table

Table Counter
indicates that
these 4
positions will
be used

Scan N+1

After RFT Execution

Table Counter

V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

4 V1400

Destination
X

X V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

V1401

V1402

V1403

Start here V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

S
S

S
S

Before RFT Execution

After RFT Execution

Table Counter

Table
V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

0
0

3 V1400

0 V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

V1401

V1402

Start here V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

3 V1400

Destination
0

V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

Table Counter
(Automatically Decremented)

Table

Destination
0

Table Counter
(Automatically Decremented)

Table

0
9

2 V1400

Destination
9

9 V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

S
S

Scan N+2

Before RFT Execution

Table

Scan N+3

V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

2 V1400

Destination
9

9 V1500

SP56

V1401

Start here V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

S
S

Before RFT Execution

After RFT Execution

Table Counter

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

1 V1400

9 V1500

SP56

S
S

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

0
7

SP56 = OFF

Start here V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

5
6

V1406

V1407

S
S

1 V1400

Destination
4

9 V1500

SP56

Table Counter
(Automatically Decremented)

Table

Destination
4

SP56 = OFF

S
S

V1401

Table Counter
(Automatically Decremented)

Table

SP56 = OFF

Table

Standard
RLL Instructions

After RFT Execution

Table Counter

0
8

0 V1400

Destination
8

9 V1500

SP56
SP56 = ON
until end of scan
or next instruction
that uses SP56

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

Add to Top
(ATT)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Add To Top instruction pushes a value

on to a V--memory table from a V--memory
location. When the value is added to the
table all other values are pushed down 1
location.

5--159

ATT
Vaaa

The instruction will be executed once per scan provided the input remains on. The
function parameters are loaded into the first level of the accumulator stack and the
accumulator by two additional instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to
program the Add To Top function.
Step 1: Load the length of the table (number of V--memory locations) into the first
level of the accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
Step 2: Load the starting V--memory location for the table into the accumulator.
(Remember, the starting location of the table is used as the table length counter.)
This parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 3: Insert the ATT instructions which specifies source V--memory location
(Vaaa). The value will be moved from this location.
Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory
locations, the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX
equivalent and load the value into the accumulator.
Helpful Hint: The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on. If
you do not want the instruction to execute for more than one scan, a one shot (PD)
should be used in the input logic.
Helpful Hint: The table counter value should be set to indicate the starting point for
the operation. Also, it must be set to a value that is within the length of the table. For
example, if the table is 6 words long, then the allowable range of values that could be
in the table counter should be between 1 and 6. If the value is outside this range or
zero, the data will not be moved into the table. Also, a one shot (PD) should be used
so the value will only be set in one scan and will not affect the instruction operation.
Operand Data Type

V--memory

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP56

on when the table counter is equal to the table size

Standard
RLL Instructions

NOTE: Status flags (SPs) are only valid until:

another instruction that uses the same flag is executed, or
the end of the scan.
The pointer for this instruction can be set to start anywhere in the table. It is not set
automatically. You have to load a value into the pointer somewhere in your program.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--160

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions
In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table
and is placed in the first stack location after the Load Address instruction is
executed. The octal address 1400 (V1400), which is the starting location for the
destination table and table counter, is loaded into the accumulator. The source
location (V1500) is specified in the Add to Top instruction. The table counter will be
increased by 1 after the instruction is executed.
DirectSOFT
X1

LD
K6
Load the constant value 6
(Hex.) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
LDA
O 1400
Convert octal 1400 to HEX
300 and load the value into
the accumulator
ATT
V1500
Copy the specified value
from V1500 to the table

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

K(CON)

LD

SHFT

OCT

SHFT

SHFT

Standard
RLL Instructions

For the ATT instruction, the table counter

determines the number of additions that
V1401
can be made before the instruction will
V1402
V1403
stop executing. So, it is helpful to
V1404
understand how the system uses this
V1405
counter to control the execution.
V1406
For example, if the table counter was set
V1407
to 2, and the table length was 6 words,
then there could only be 4 additions of
data before the execution was stopped.
This can easily be calculated by:
Table length -- table counter = number of executions
Also, our example uses a normal input
contact (X1) to control the execution.
Since the CPU scan is extremely fast, and
the
table
counter
increments
automatically, the data would be moved
into the table very quickly. If this is a
problem for your application, you have an
option of using a one-shot (PD) to add one
value each time the input contact
transitions from low to high.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Table

Table Counter

S
S

2 V1400

Data Source
X

X V1500

(e.g., 6 -- 2 = 4).

DirectSOFT (optional one-shot method)

X1
C0

C0
PD
LD
K6
Load the constant value 6
(HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
LDA
O 1400
Convert octal 1400 to HEX
300 and load the value into
the accumulator. This is the
starting table location.

5--161

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

The following diagram shows the scan-by-scan results of the execution for our example program. The table
counter is set to 2 initially, and it will automatically increment from 2 -- 6 as the instruction is executed. Notice
how SP56 comes on when the table counter is 6, which is equal to the table length. Plus, although our
example does not show it, we are assuming that there is another part of the program that changes the value
in V1500 (data source) prior to the execution of the ATT instruction.
Example of Execution
Scan N
Before ATT Execution
Table

After ATT Execution

Table Counter

V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

2 V1400

Data Source
1

4 V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

S
S

Scan N+1

Before ATT Execution

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

3 V1400

Data Source
5

8 V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

Before ATT Execution

V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

Data Source
4

4 V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

Scan N+3

Table

V1401

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

S
S

Table Counter
(Automatically Incremented)
5

0
7

Data Source
7

7 V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

4 V1400

8 V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF

Table Counter
(Automatically Incremented)
4

0
4

5 V1400

Data Source
4

3 V1500

SP56
SP56 = OFF
Discard Bucket
8989

V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

V1407

S
S

Data Source
5

Table Counter
(Automatically Incremented)

Table

5 V1400

V1500

0
7

6 V1400

Data Source
7

7 V1500

SP56
Discard Bucket
3074

SP56 = ON
until end of scan
or next instruction
that uses SP56

Standard
RLL Instructions

V1401

SP56 = OFF

After ATT Execution

Table Counter

Discard Bucket

S
S

Before ATT Execution

1010

V1402

S
S

3 V1400

SP56

Table

4 V1400

Data Source
1

After ATT Execution

Table Counter

V1401

2046

S
S

Table

0
3

Table

S
S

Scan N+2

After ATT Execution

Table Counter

V1401

Discard Bucket

S
S

Table

Table Counter
(Automatically Incremented)

Table

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--162

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

Move Memory
Cartridge/
Load Label
(MOVMC/LDLBL)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Move Memory Cartridge instruction is

used to copy data between V--memory and
program ladder memory. The Load Label
instruction is only used with the MOVMC
instruction when copying data from
program ladder memory to V--memory.
To copy data between V--memory and
program ladder memory, the function
parameters are loaded into the first two
levels of the accumulator stack and the
accumulator by two additional instructions.
Listed below are the steps necessary to
program the Move Memory Cartridge and
Load Label functions.

MOVMC
A aaa

LDLBL
K aaa

Step 1: Load the number of words (255 maximum) to be copied into the second
level of the accumulator stack. This must be a hex value, 0 to FF.
Step 2: Load the offset for the data label area (in HEX) in the program ladder
memory and the beginning of the V--memory block into the first level of the
accumulator stack.
Step 3: Load the source data label (LDLBL Kaaa) into the accumulator when
copying data from ladder memory to V--memory. Load the source address into the
accumulator when copying data from V--memory to ladder memory. The value will
be copied from this location. If the source address is a V--memory location, the value
must be entered in HEX.
Step 4: Insert the MOVMC instruction which specifies destination (Aaaa). The
value will be copied to this location.
Operand Data Type

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

1--FFFF

1--FFFF

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP53

on if there is a table pointer error.

Standard
RLL Instructions

NOTE: Status flags are only valid until:

the end of the scan
or another instruction that uses the same flag is executed.

WARNING: The offset for this usage of the instruction starts at 0, but may be
any number that does not result in data outside of the source data area being
copied into the destination table. When an offset is outside of the source
information boundaries, unknown data values will be transferred into the
destination table.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

In the following example, data is copied from a Data Label Area to V--memory. When X1
is on, the constant value (K4) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction.
This value specifies the length of the destination table and is placed in the second stack
location after the next Load and Load Label (LDLBL) instructions are executed. The
constant value (K0) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. This value
specifies the offset for the source and the destination table, and is placed in the first stack
location after the LDLBL instruction is executed. The source address where data is
being copied from is loaded into the accumulator using the LDLBL instruction. The
MOVMC instruction specifies the destination table starting location and executes the
copying of data from the source Data Label Area to V--memory.

Copy Data From a

Data Label Area to
V--memory
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

5--163

DirectSOFT
X1

Load the value 4 into the

accumulator specifying the
number of locations to be copied.

LD
K4

K0

Load the value 0 into the

accumulator specifying the
offset for source and
destination locations

K1

Load the value 1 into the

accumulator specifying the
Data Label Area K1 as the
starting address of the data
to be copied.

LD

LDLBL

MOVMC
V1400

V1400 is the destination

starting address for the data
to be copied.

END

DLBL
K1
NCON
K 1234
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (for MOVMC portion only)
NCON
K 4532
NCON
K 6151
NCON
K 8845

STR

X(IN)

LD

K(CON)

LD

K(CON)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

NCON
K 7777

Standard
RLL Instructions

WARNING: The offset for this usage of the instruction starts at 0, but may be
any number that does not result in data outside of the source data area being
copied into the destination table. When an offset is outside of the source
information boundaries, then unknown data values will be transferred into the
destination table.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--164

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

The following diagram shows the result of our example. The offset is equal to zero and four words will be
copied into the Data Label area.
Example of Execution
Offset = 0, move 4 words
Before MOVMC Execution

After MOVMC Execution

Destination

Data Label Area

DLBL K1

V1400

V1401

C O N

V1402

V1403

C O N
4

Start here

V1404

V1405

C O N

V1406

S
S

3
5

C O N

C O N

Destination

4
2
1
5

V1400

V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

Start here

S
S

The example is fairly straightforward when an offset of zero is used. However, it is also helpful for you to
understand the results that would have been obtained if different offset values (1 and 2) were used. Notice
how the offset is used for both the data label (source) and the destination table. Also, notice how an
improper offset (two in this case) can result in unknown values being copied into the destination table.
Offset = 1, move 4 words
Before MOVMC Execution

After MOVMC Execution

Destination

Data Label Area

DLBL K1

V1400

V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

Offset

C O N

C O N

Start here

V1405

C O N

V1406

S
S

C O N

C O N

Destination

4
2
1
5

V1400

V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

Start here

S
S

Standard
RLL Instructions

Offset = 2, move 4 words

Before MOVMC Execution

After MOVMC Execution

Destination

Data Label Area

DLBL K1

V1400

V1401

V1402

V1403

C O N

V1404

V1405

V1406

Offset

Start here

S
S

Since there is no NCON, the CPU does

not know where to get the data. Unknown
values will be copied into V1405.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

C O N

2
5

3
3

C O N

C O N

1
8

5
4

Destination

4
2
1
5

C O N

V1400

V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1405

V1406

S
S

Start here

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

NOTE: You must use a RAM cartridge for this example to work.
In this example, data is copied from V -memory to a data label area. When X1 is on, the
constant value (K4) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. This value
specifies the length of the destination table and is placed in the second stack location
after the next Load and Load Address instructions are executed. The constant value
(K0) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. This value specifies the
offset for the source and destination table, and is placed in the first stack location after
the Load Address instruction is executed. The source address data is being copied from
is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Address instruction. The MOVMC
instruction specifies the destination starting location and executes the copying of data
from V--memory to the data label area.

Copy Data From

V--memory to a
Data Label Area
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

5--165

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (for MOVMC portion only)

DirectSOFT
X1

LD
K4
Load the value 4 into the
accumulator specifying the
number of locations to be copied.
LD

STR

X(IN)

LD

K(CON)

LD

K(CON)

LD

SHFT

OCT

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

K0
Load the value 0 into the
accumulator specifying the
offset for source and
destination locations.
LDA
O 1400
Convert octal 1400 to HEX 300 and
load the value into the accumulator.
This specifies the source location
where the data will be copied from
MOVMC

Note: This instruction works only with the RAM cartridge. It

does not work with the EEPROM.

K1
K1 is the data label
destination area where the
data will be copied to
END

DLBL
K1
NCON
K 1234
NCON
K 4532
NCON
K 6151
NCON
K 8845

K 7777

WARNING: The offset for this usage of the instruction starts at 0. If the offset
(or the specified data table range) is large enough to cause data to be copied
from V--memory to beyond the end of the DLBL area, then anything after the
specified DLBL area will be replaced with invalid instructions.

Standard
RLL Instructions

NCON

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--166

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

The following diagram shows the result of our example. The offset is equal to zero and four words will be
copied into the Data Label area.
Example of Execution
Offset = 0, move 4 words
Before MOVMC Execution

After MOVMC Execution

Data Label Area

DLBL K1
N

C O N

C O N

2
5

C O N
1

C O N
8

C O N

Data Label Area

DLBL K1

Destination
Start here

4
2
1

V1400

V1401

V1402

C O N

V1403

V1404

C O N

C O N
5
9

0
9

V1405

V1406

C O N

S
S

0
9

C O N

Start here

9
4
9

The example is fairly straightforward when an offset of zero is used. However, it is also helpful for you to
understand the results that would have been obtained if different offset values (1 and 2) were used. Notice
how the offset is used for both the V--memory data table (source) and the Data Label area. Also, notice how
an improper offset (two in this case) can result in invalid instructions being written over any instructions that
follow the Data Label.
Offset = 1, move 4 words
Before MOVMC Execution

After MOVMC Execution

Data Label Area

DLBL K1
N

C O N

C O N

C O N

C O N

2
5
1
8

3
3
5

C O N

Data Label Area

DLBL K1

Destination
Offset

V1400

C O N

Start here

V1401

V1402

C O N

V1403

V1404

C O N

V1405

V1406

C O N

2
1
5

S
S

2
9
0
9

3
9
7

C O N

4
9

Offset

Start here

4
9

Offset = 2, move 4 words

Before MOVMC Execution

After MOVMC Execution

Standard
RLL Instructions

Data Label Area

DLBL K1
N

C O N

C O N

2
5

C O N

C O N

C O N

1
8
7

3
5
4
7

Offset
Start here

2
1
5
7

Data Label Area

DLBL K1

Destination
0

V1400

V1401

V1402

C O N

V1403

V1404

C O N

V1405

V1406

C O N

S
S

C O N
2
5
0
9

3
3
7

C O N

8
1

4
2
4
9
0

Invalid Instruction

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Offset

Start here

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

Set Bit
(SETBIT)
  

The Set Bit instruction sets a single bit to one

within a range of V-memory locations.

5--167

SETBIT
A aaa

430 440 450

DS

HPP

Reset Bit
(RSTBIT)
  

The Reset Bit instruction resets a single bit

to zero within a range of V-memory
locations.

RSTBIT
A aaa

430 440 450

DS

HPP

The following description applies to both the Set Bit and Reset Bit table instructions.
Step 1: Load the length of the table (number of V--memory locations) into the first
level of the accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
Step 2: Load the starting V--memory location for the table into the accumulator.
This parameter must be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert an
octal address to hex.
Step 3: Insert the Set Bit or Reset Bit instruction. This specifies the reference for
the bit number of the bit you want to set or reset. The bit number is in octal, and the
first bit in the table is number 0.
Helpful hint: Remember that each V--memory location contains 16 bits. So, the
bits of the first word of the table are numbered from 0 to 17 octal. For example, if the
table length is six words, then 6 words = (6 x 16) bits, = 96 bits (decimal), or 140 octal.
The permissible range of bit reference numbers would be 0 to 137 octal. Flag 53 will
be set if the bit specified is outside the range of the table.
Operand Data Type

DL450 Range
aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--42)

Octal Address

0--7777

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP53

on when the bit number which is referenced in the Set Bit or Reset Bit
exceeds the range of the table

NOTE: Status flags are only valid until:

the end of the scan
or another instruction that uses the same flag is executed.

MSB

V3000

LSB

16 bits
MSB

V3001

LSB

1 1 1 1 11 1 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 32 1 0

Standard
RLL Instructions

For example, suppose we have a table

starting at V3000 that is two words long, as
shown to the right. Each word in the table
contains 16 bits, or 0 to 17 in octal. To set
bit 12 in the second word, we use its octal
reference (bit 14). Then we compute the
bits octal address from the start of the
table, so 17 + 14 = 34 octal. The following
program shows how to set the bit as
shown to a 1.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--168

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions
In this ladder example, we will use input X0 to trigger the Set Bit operation. First, we
will load the table length (2 words) into the accumulator stack. Next, we load the
starting address into the accumulator. Since V3000 is an octal number we have to
convert it to hex by using the LDA command. Finally, we use the Set Bit (or Reset Bit)
instruction and specify the octal address of the bit (bit 34), referenced from the table
beginning.
DirectSOFT
X0

Load the constant value 2

(Hex.) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator.

LD
K2

Convert octal 3000 to HEX

and load the value into the
accumulator. This is the
table beginning.

LDA
O 3000

Set bit 34 (octal) in the table

to a 1.

SETBIT
O 34

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

STR

X(IN)

LD

K(CON)

LD

SHFT

OCT

SET

SHFT

OCT

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

Table Shift Left

(TSHFL)
  

The Table Shift Left instruction shifts all the

bits in a V-memory table to the left, the
specified number of bit positions.

TSHFL
A aaa

The Table Shift Right instruction shifts all the

bits in a V-memory table to the right, a
specified number of bit positions.

TSHFR
A aaa

5--169

430 440 450

DS

HPP

Table Shift Right

(TSHFR)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The following description applies to both the Table Shift Left and Table Shift Right
instructions. A table is just a range of V-memory locations. The Table Shift Left and
Table Shift Right instructions shift bits serially throughout the entire table. Bits are
shifted out the end of one word and into the opposite end of an adjacent word. At the
ends of the table, bits are either discarded, or zeros are shifted into the table. The
example tables below are arbitrarily four words long.
Table Shift Left

Table Shift Right

Shift in zeros

V--xxxx

Discard bits

V--xxxx +1

V--xxxx +2
Discard bits

Shift in zeros

Operand Data Type

DL450 Range
aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--42)

Standard
RLL Instructions

Step 1: Load the length of the table (number of V--memory locations) into the first
level of the accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
Step 2: Load the starting V--memory location for the table into the accumulator.
This parameter must be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert an
octal address to hex.
Step 3: Insert the Table Shift Left or Table shift Right instruction. This specifies the
number of bit positions you wish to shift the entire table. The number of bit positions
must be in octal.
Helpful hint: Remember that each V--memory location contains 16 bits. So, the
bits of the first word of the table are numbered from 0 to 17 octal. If you want to shift
the entire table by 20 bits, that is 24 octal. Flag 53 will be set if the number of bits to be
shifted is larger than the total bits contained within the table. Flag 67 will be set if the
last bit shifted (just before it is discarded) is a 1.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--170

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP53

on when the number of bits to be shifted is larger than the total bits
contained within the table

SP67

on when the last bit shifted (just before it is discarded) is a 1

NOTE: Status flags are only valid until:

the end of the scan
or another instruction that uses the same flag is executed.
The example table to the right contains
BCD data as shown (for demonstration
purposes). Suppose we want to do a table
shift right by 3 BCD digits (12 bits).
Converting to octal, 12 bits is 14 octal.
Using the Table Shift Right instruction and
specifying a shift by octal 14, we have the
resulting table shown at the far right.
Notice that the 2--3--4 sequence has been
discarded, and the 0--0--0 sequence has
been shifted in at the bottom.

V3000

V3000

1 2 3 4

6 7 8 1

5 6 7 8

1 2 2 5

1 1 2 2

3 4 4 1

3 3 4 4

5 6 6 3

5 5 6 6

0 0 0 5

The following ladder example assumes the data at V3000 to V3004 already exists as
shown above. We will use input X0 to trigger the Table Shift Right operation. First, we
will load the table length (5 words) into the accumulator stack. Next, we load the
starting address into the accumulator. Since V3000 is an octal number we have to
convert it to hex by using the LDA command. Finally, we use the Table Shift Right
instruction and specify the number of bits to be shifted (12 decimal), which is 14
octal.
DirectSOFT
X0

Load the constant value 5

(Hex.) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator.

LD
K5

Convert octal 3000 to HEX

and load the value into the
accumulator. This is the
table beginning.

LDA
O 3000

Do a table shift right by 12

bits, which is 14 octal.

TSHFR
O 14

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

K(CON)

LD

SHFT

OCT

SHFT

OCT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

AND Move
(ANDMOV)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

OR Move
(ORMOV)
  

430 440 450

DS

HPP

The AND Move instruction copies data from

a table to the specified memory location,
ANDing each word with the accumulator
data as it is written.

5--171

ANDMOV
A aaa

The Or Move instruction copies data from a

table to the specified memory location,
ORing each word with the accumulator
contents as it is written.

LDR
A aaa

Exclusive OR Move The Exclusive OR Move instruction copies

XORMOV
data from a table to the specified memory
(XORMOV)
A aaa
location,
XORing
each
word
with
the

 
accumulator value as it is written.
430 440 450


The following description applies to the AND Move, OR Move, and Exclusive OR
HPP
DS
Move instructions. A table is just a range of V-memory locations. These instructions
copy the data of a table to another specified location, preforming a logical operation
on each word with the accumulator contents as the new table is written.
Step 1: Load the length of the table (number of V--memory locations) into the first
level of the accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
Step 2: Load the starting V--memory location for the table into the accumulator.
This parameter must be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert an
octal address to hex.
Step 3: Load the BCD/hex bit pattern into the accumulator which will be logically
combined with the table contents as they are copied.
Step 4: Insert the AND Move, OR Move, or XOR Move instruction. This specifies
the starting location of the copy of the original table. This new table will automatically
be the same length as the original table.
Operand Data Type

DL450 Range
aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--42)

V3000
3 3 3 3
F F F F

ANDMOV
K6666

V3100
2 2 2 2
6 6 6 6

The program on the next page performs the ANDMOV operation example above. It
assumes that the data in the table at V3000 -- V3001 already exists. First we load the
table length (two words) into the accumulator. Next we load the starting address of
the source table, using the LDA instruction. Then we load the data into the
accumulator to be ANDed with the table. In the ANDMOV command, we specify the
table destination, V3100.

Standard
RLL Instructions

The example table to the right contains

BCD data as shown (for demonstration
purposes). Suppose we want to move a
table of two words at V3000 and AND it
with K6666. The copy of the table at
V3100 shows the result of the AND
operation for each word.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--172

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X0

LD
K2

LDA
O 3000

Load the constant value 2

(Hex.) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator.

STR

X(IN)

LD

K(CON)

Convert octal 3000 to HEX

and load the value into the
accumulator. This is the
table beginning.

LD

SHFT

OCT

AND

SHFT

OCT

K6666

O 3100

The example to the right shows a table of

two words at V3000 and logically ORs it
with K8888. The copy of the table at
V3100 shows the result of the OR
operation for each word.
The program to the right performs the
ORMOV example above. It assumes that
the data in the table at V3000 -- V3001
already exists. First we load the table
length (two words) into the accumulator.
Next we load the starting address of the
source table, using the LDA instruction.
Then we load the data into the
accumulator to be ORed with the table. In
the ORMOV command, we specify the
table destination, V3100.

V3000
1 1 1 1

V3100
9 9 9 9
9 9 9 9

DirectSOFT
X0

LD
K2
Load the constant value 2
(Hex.) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator.
LDA
O 3000
Convert octal 3000 to HEX
and load the value into the
accumulator. This is the
table beginning.
LD
K8888
Load the constant value
8888 (Hex.) into the lower
16 bits of the accumulator.

STR

X(IN)

LD

K(CON)

LD

SHFT

OCT

OR

SHFT

ORMOV
K8888

1 1 1 1

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Standard
RLL Instructions

Copy the table to V3100,

ANDing its contents with the
accumulator as it is written.

ANDMOV

Load the constant value

6666 (Hex.) into the lower
16 bits of the accumulator.

LD

OCT

ORMOV

O 3100
Copy the table to V3100,
ORing its contents with the
accumulator as it is written.

The example to the right shows a table of

two words at V3000 and logical XORs it
with K3333. The copy of the table at
V3100 shows the result of the XOR
operation for each word.

V3000
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1

XORMOV
K3333

V3100
2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2

The ladder program example for the XORMOV is similar to the one above for the
ORMOV. Just use the XORMOV instruction. On the handheld programmer, you
must use the SHFT key and spell XORMOV explicitly.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

Find Block
(FINDB)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Find Block instruction searches for an

occurrence of a specified block of values in
a V--memory table. The function
parameters are loaded into the first and
second levels of the accumulator stack and
the accumulator by three additional
instructions. If the block is found, its starting
address will be stored in the accumulator. If
the block is not found, flag SP53 will be set.
Operand Data Type

5--173

FINDB
A aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--42)

V--memory

All (See p. 3--42)

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP53

on when the Find Block instruction was executed but did not find the block
of data in table specified

The steps listed below are the steps necessary to program the Find Block function.
Step 1: Load the number of bytes in the block to be located. This parameter must
be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
Step 2: Load the length of a table (number of words) to be searched. The Find
Block will search multiple tables that are adjacent in V--memory. This parameter
must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
Step 3: Load the ending location for all the tables into the accumulator. This
parameter must be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal
address to hex.
Step 4: Load the table starting location for all the tables into the accumulator. This
parameter must be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal
address to hex.
Step 5: Insert the Find Block instruction. This specifies the starting location of the
block of data you are trying to locate.
Start Addr.
Table 1
Table 2
Table 3

End Addr.

Start Addr.
Block

Number
of bytes

Standard
RLL Instructions

Table n

Number
of words

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--174

Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

Swap
(SWAP)
  

The Swap instruction exchanges the data in

two tables of equal length.

SWAP
A aaa

430 440 450

DS

HPP

The following description applies to both the Set Bit and Reset Bit table instructions.
Step 1: Load the length of the tables (number of V--memory locations) into the first
level of the accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
Remember that the tables must be of equal length.
Step 2: Load the starting V--memory location for the first table into the
accumulator. This parameter must be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction
to convert an octal address to hex.
Step 3: Insert the Swap instruction. This specifies the starting address of the
second table. This parameter must be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction
to convert an octal address to hex.
Helpful hint: The data swap occurs within a single scan. If the instruction executes
on multiple consecutive scans, it will be difficult to know the actual contents of either
table at any particular time. So, remember to swap just on a single scan.
Operand Data Type

DL450 Range
aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--42)

The example to the right shows a table of

two words at V3000. We will swap its
contents with another table of two words at
3100 by using the Swap instruction. The
required ladder program is given below.

V3000

V3100

1 2 3 4

SWAP

5 6 7 8

A B C D
0 0 0 0

The example program below uses a PD contact (triggers for one scan for off-to-on
transition). First, we load the length of the tables (two words) into the accumulator.
Then we load the address of the first table (V3000) into the accumulator using the
LDA instruction, converting the octal address to hex. Note that it does not matter
which table we declare first, because the swap results will be the same.
DirectSOFT
X0

Load the constant value 2

(Hex.) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator.

LD
K2

Convert octal 3000 to HEX

and load the value into the
accumulator. This is the
table beginning.

LDA
O 3000

Swap the contents of the

table in the previous
instruction with the one at
V3100.

SWAP

Standard
RLL Instructions

O 3100

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

SHFT

LD

K(CON)

LD

SHFT

OCT

SHFT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

SHFT

OCT

Standard RLLInstructions
Clock/Calendar Instructions

5--175

Clock/Calender Instructions
Date
(DATE)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Date instruction can be used to set the

date in the CPU. The instruction requires
two consecutive V--memory locations
(Vaaa) to set the date. If the values in the
specified locations are not valid, the date will
not be set. The current date can be read
from 4 consecutive V--memory locations
(V7771--V7774).

DATE
V aaa

Date

Range

V Memory Location (BCD)

(READ Only)

Year

0--99

V7774

Month

1--12

V7773

Day

1--31

V7772

Day of Week

0--06

V7771

The values entered for the day of week are:

0=Sunday, 1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, 3=Wednesday, 4=Thursday, 5=Friday, 6=Saturday
Operand Data Type

V--memory

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

In the following example, when C0 is on, the constant value (K94010301) is loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction (C0 should be a contact from
a one shot (PD) instruction). The value in the accumulator is output to V2000 using
the Out Double instruction. The Date instruction uses the value in V2000 to set the
date in the CPU.
DirectSOFT

Constant (K)

C0

Acc. 9

Acc. 9

LDD

In this example, the Date

instruction uses the value set in
V2000 and V2001 to set the date
in the appropriate V--memory
locations (V7771--V7774)

K94010301
Load the constant
value (K94010301)
into the accumulator
OUTD
V2000
Copy the value in
the accumulator to
V2000 and V2001

V2001

V2000

Format
V2001

DATE
V2000

Set the date in the CPU

using the value in V2000
and V2001

V2000
1

STR

C(CR)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

Year

Month

K(CON)

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

Day

Day of Week

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

5--176

Standard RLL Instructions

Clock/Calendar Instructions

Time
(TIME)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Time instruction can be used to set the

time (24 hour clock) in the CPU. The
instruction requires two consecutive V-memory locations (Vaaa) which are used to
set the time. If the values in the specified
locations are not valid, the time will not be
set. The current time can be read from
V--memory
locations
V7747
and
V7766--V7770.

TIME
V aaa

Date

Range

V Memory Location (BCD)

(READ Only)

1/100 seconds (10ms)

0--99

V7747

Seconds

0--59

V7766

Minutes

0--59

V7767

Hour

0--23

V7770

Operand Data Type

V--memory

DL440 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--41)

In the following example, when C0 is on, the constant value (K73000) is loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction (C0 should be a contact from a
one shot (PD) instruction). The value in the accumulator is output to V2000 using the
Out Double instruction. The TIME instruction uses the value in V2000 to set the time
in the CPU.
DirectSOFT

Constant (K)

C0

Acc. 0

Acc. 0

LDD

The Time instruction uses the

value set in V2000 and V2001 to
set the time in the appropriate
V--memory locations
(V7766--V7770)

K73000
Load the constant
value (K73000) into
the accumulator
OUTD
V2000
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V2000
and V2001

V2001

Format

V2000

V2001

TIME

V2000

V2000
7

Set the time in the CPU

using the value in V2000
and V2001

Not
Used

Standard
RLL Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

C(CR)

LD

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

SHFT

Hour Minutes

Seconds

Standard RLL Instructions

CPU Control Instructions

5--177

CPU Control Instructions

No Operation
(NOP)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The No Operation is an empty (not

programmed) memory location. These
instructions are just place-holders in the
program. So, you will not need to program
them, because they automatically appear
after the end of the program.

NOP

DirectSOFT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
NOP

End
(END)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

SHFT

The End instruction marks the termination

point of the normal program scan. An End
instruction is required at the end of the main
program body. If the End instruction is
omitted, an error will occur and the CPU will
not enter the Run Mode. Data labels,
subroutines and interrupt routines are
placed after the End instruction. The End
instruction is not conditional; therefore, no
input contact is allowed.

END

DirectSOFT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
END

END

Stop
(STOP)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Stop instruction changes the

operational mode of the CPU from Run to
Program (Stop) mode. This instruction is
typically used to stop PLC operation in a
shutdown condition such as a I/O module
failure.

STOP

In the following example, when SP45 comes on indicating a I/O module failure, the
CPU will stop operation and switch to the program mode.
DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STOP
SP45 will turn on
if there is an I/O
module falure

STR

SPCL

SHFT

Standard
RLL Instructions

SP45

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--178

Standard RLL Instructions

CPU Control Instructions

Break
(BREAK)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Break instruction changes the

operational mode of the CPU from Run to
the Test Program mode. This instruction is
typically used to aid in debugging an
application program. The Break instruction
allows V--memory and image register data
to be retained where it would be normally
cleared with the Stop instruction or a normal
Run to Program transition.

BREAK

In the following example when C10 turns on, the CPU will stop operation and switch
to the Test program mode.
DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

C10
BREAK

Reset Watch Dog

Timer
(RSTWT)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

STR

C(CR)

SHFT

The Reset Watch Dog Timer instruction

resets the CPU scan timer. The default
setting for the watch dog timer is 200ms.
Scan times very seldom exceed 200ms, but
it is possible. For/next loops, subroutines,
interrupt routines, and table instructions
can be programmed such that the scan
becomes longer than 200ms. When
instructions are used in a manner that could
exceed the watch dog timer setting, this
instruction can be used to reset the timer.

RSTWT

A software timeout error (E003) will occur and the CPU will enter the program mode
if the scan time exceeds the watch dog timer setting. Placement of the RSTWT
instruction in the program is very important. The instruction has to be executed
before the scan time exceeds the watch dog timers setting.

Standard
RLL Instructions

If the scan time is consistently longer than the watch dog timers setting, the timeout
value may be permanently increased from the default value of 200ms by AUX 55 on
the HPP or the appropriate auxiliary function in your programming package. This
eliminates the need for the RSTWT instruction.
In the following example the CPU scan timer will be reset to 0 when the RSTWT
instruction is executed. See the For/Next instruction for a detailed example.
DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

SHFT
RSTWT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard RLL Instructions

Program Control Instructions

5--179

Program Control Instructions

Goto/Label
(GOTO/LBL)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Goto/Label skips all instructions

between the Goto and the corresponding
LBL instruction. The operand value for the
Goto and the corresponding LBL instruction
are the same. The logic between Goto and
LBL instruction is not executed when the
Goto instruction is enabled. Up to 128 Goto
instructions and 64 LBL instructions can be
used in the program.

K aaa
GOTO

K aaa

LBL

Operand Data Type

Constant

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

1--FFFF

1--FFFF

In the following example, when C7 is on, all the program logic between the Goto and
the corresponding LBL instruction (designated with the same constant Kaaa value)
will be skipped. The instructions being skipped will not be executed by the CPU.
DirectSOFT
C7

K5
GOTO

X1

C2
OUT

S
S
S
LBL

K5

X5

Y2
OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT

STR

X(IN)

OUT

C(CR)

SHFT

STR

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

SHFT

K(CON)

SHFT

K(CON)

S
S

Standard
RLL Instructions

C(CR)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--180

Standard RLL Instructions

Program Control Instructions

The For and Next instructions are used to

execute a section of ladder logic between
the For and Next instructions a specified
numbers of times. When the For instruction
is enabled, the program will loop the
specified number of times. If the For
instruction is not energized the section of
ladder logic between the For and Next
instructions is not executed.

For/Next
(FOR/NEXT)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

A aaa
FOR

NEXT

For / Next instructions cannot be nested. Up to 64 For / Next loops may be used in a
program. If the maximum number of For / Next loops is exceeded, error E413 will
occur. The normal I/O update and CPU housekeeping is suspended while executing
the For / Next loop. The program scan can increase significantly, depending on the
amount of times the logic between the For and Next instruction is executed. With the
exception of immediate I/O instructions, I/O will not be updated until the program
execution is completed for that scan. Depending on the length of time required to
complete the program execution, it may be necessary to reset the watch dog timer
inside of the For / Next loop using the RSTWT instruction.
Operand Data Type

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

1--9999

1--9999

In the following example, when X1 is on, the application program inside the For /
Next loop will be executed three times. If X1 is off the program inside the loop will not
be executed. The immediate instructions may or may not be necessary depending
on your application. Also, The RSTWT instruction is not necessary if the For / Next
loop does not extend the scan time larger the Watch Dog Timer setting. For more
information on the Watch Dog Timer, refer to the RSTWT instruction.
DirectSOFT

X1

Standard
RLL Instructions

RSTWT

X20

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

K3
FOR

STR

X(IN)

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

SHFT

STR

SHFT

SHFT

X(IN)

Y5

Y(OUT)

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

OUTI

SHFT

NEXT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard RLL Instructions

Program Control Instructions

Goto Subroutine
(GTS)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Goto Subroutine instruction allows a

section of ladder logic to be placed outside
the main body of the program execute only
when needed. There can be a maximum of
192 (DL440) and an unlimited amount for
DL450 GTS instructions.

5--181

K aaa
GTS

Upon completion of executing the subroutine, program execution returns to the main
program immediately after the GTS instruction. GTS instructions can be nested up
to 8 levels. An error E412 will occur if the maximum limits are exceeded. Typically
this will be used in an application where a block of program logic may be slow to
execute and is not required to execute every scan.
Operand Data Type

Constant

Subroutine
(SBR)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

1--FFFF

1--FFFF

The subroutine label and all associated

logic is placed after the End statement in
the program. There can be a maximum of
64 (DL440) and 256 (DL450) SBR
instructions used in a program. When the
subroutine is called from the main program,
the CPU will execute the subroutine (SBR)
with the same constant number (K) as the
GTS instruction which called the
subroutine.

K aaa

SBR

By placing code in a subroutine it is only scanned and executed when needed since it
resides after the End instruction. Code which is not scanned does not impact the
overall scan time of the program.
Operand Data Type

Constant

Subroutine Return
(RT)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

430 440 450

DS

HPP

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

1--FFFF

1--FFFF

When a Subroutine Return is executed in

the subroutine the CPU will return to the
point in the main body of the program from
which it was called. The Subroutine Return
is used as termination of the subroutine
which must be the last instruction in the
subroutine and is a stand alone instruction
(no input contact on the rung).
The Subroutine Return Conditional
instruction is a optional instruction used
with a input contact to implement a
conditional return from the subroutine. The
Subroutine Return (RT) is still required for
termination of the Subroutine.

RT

RTC

Standard
RLL Instructions

Subroutine Return
Conditional
(RTC)
  

DL440 Range

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--182

Standard RLL Instructions

Program Control Instructions
In the following example, when X1 is on, Subroutine K3 will be called. The CPU will
jump to the Subroutine Label K3 and the ladder logic in the subroutine will be
executed. If X35 is on the CPU will return to the main program at the RTC instruction.
If X35 is not on Y0--Y17 will be reset to off and then the CPU will return to the main
body of the program.
DirectSOFT

X1

K3
GTS

C0
LD
K10

S
S
S
END

SBR

K3

X20

Y5
OUTI

X21

Y10
OUTI

X35
RTC

X35

Y0

Y17
RSTI

RT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

SHFT

SHFT

STR

SHFT

OUT

SHFT

K(CON)

SHFT

K(CON)
1

SHFT

X(IN)

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

S
S

Standard
RLL Instructions

END

STR

SHFT

SHFT

X(IN)

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

X(IN)

STR

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

STR

NOT

SHFT

SHFT

X(IN)

RST

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

Y(OUT)

SHFT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard RLL Instructions

Program Control Instructions

Master Line Set

(MLS)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Master Line Set instruction allows the

program to control sections of ladder logic
by forming a new power rail controlled by
the main left power rail. The main left rail is
always master line 0. When a MLS K1
instruction is used, a new power rail is
created at level 1. Master Line Sets and
Master Line Resets can be used to nest
power rails up to seven levels deep.
Operand Data Type

Constant

Master Line Reset

(MLR)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

K aaa
MLS

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

1--7

1--7

1--7

The Master Line Reset instruction marks

the end of control for the corresponding
MLS instruction. The MLR reference is one
less than the corresponding MLS.
Operand Data Type

Constant

Understanding
Master Control
Relays
  

5--183

K aaa
MLR

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

0--6

0--6

1--6

The Master Line Set (MLS) and Master Line Reset (MLR) instructions allow you to
quickly control the power flow for sections of the RLL program. This provides
program control flexibility. The following example shows how the MLS and MLR
instructions operate by creating a sub power rail for control logic.

430 440 450

DS

HPP

In the following MLS/MLR example, logic between the first MLS K1 (A) and MLR K0
(B) will only have power flow present at the power rail if input X0 is on. (Note, if X0 is
MLS/MLR Example off the logic will still be scanned, but there is no power flow.) The logic between the
MLS K2 (C) and MLR K1 (D) will only have power flow present at the power rail if
input X10 and X0 are on. The last rung is not controlled by either of the MLS coils and
always has power flow present at the beginning of the rung.
Remember, the MLS / MLR instructions control the power flow between the power
rails. It does not control the execution of the instructions. The instructions are still
executed, but since there is no power flow, the logic cannot turn on the output coils.
Consider the following case for our example.
Standard
RLL Instructions

1. X0 is off, which means that there is no power flow at the second rung.
2. You use a programming device to turn on C0.
Since there is no power flow at the second rung (STR X1, OUT C0), then you would
expect that C0 would remain on, since you turned it on with the programming device.
However, the MLS instruction does not mean that the instructions within the zone of
control are not executed. They are in fact executed, but with no power flow. So in our
case, C0 would be turned off when the rung was executed. This is because the CPU
sees that there is no power flow present at the rung. When it executes this rung, it will
turn off C0.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--184

Standard RLL Instructions

Program Control Instructions

DirectSOFT
X0

K1
MLS

X1

When contact X0 is on, logic under the first MLS

will be executed.

Y7
OUT
K2

X2

MLS
X3

When contact X0 and X2 are ON, logic

under the second MLS will be executed.

Y10
OUT
K1
MLR
The MLR instructions note the end of the Master
Control area.

K0
MLR
Y11

X10

OUT

DirectSOFT
X0

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

K1
MLS

X1

C0
OUT

X2

C1

X5

X4

X(IN)

C(CR)

STR

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

STR

X(IN)

MLS

MSL

K(CON)

Y1

STR

X(IN)

OUT

OUT

Y(OUT)

Y0

K2

Y2

C2

Y3
OUT

Standard
RLL Instructions

STR
OUT

OUT

K0
MLR
Y22
OUT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

MLR

X7

K(CON)

X(IN)

K1

X6

MLS

C(CR)

OUT

X5

STR

OUT
X10

X(IN)

OUT

OUT
X3

STR

STR

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

MLR

K(CON)

STR

X(IN)

OUT

C(CR)

STR

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

MLR

K(CON)

STR

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

5--185

Standard RLL Instructions

Interrupt Instructions

Interrupt Instructions
The Interrupt instruction allows a section of
ladder logic to be placed outside the main
body of the program and executed when
O aaa
INT
needed. Interrupts can be called from the
program or an interrupt module can be
installed in slot 0 to provide 8 interrupt
inputs.
One interrupt module can be installed in a DL430 system (X0--X7) and two interrupt
modules can be installed in a DL440 or DL450 System (X0--X7, and X20--X27).
Remember, the interrupt modules consume 16 points.
The two software interrupts use interrupt #16 and #17 which means the hardware
interrupts #16 and #17 and the software interrupt cannot be used together.
Typically, interrupts will be used in an application where a fast response to an input is
needed or a program section needs to execute faster than the normal CPU scan.
The interrupt label and all associated logic must be placed after the End statement in
the program. When the interrupt routine is called from the interrupt module or
software interrupt, the CPU will complete execution of the instruction it is currently
processing in ladder logic, then execute the designated interrupt routine. There are
two software interrupts and INT 16 and INT 17. Once the interrupt is serviced, the
program execution will continue from where it was before the interrupt occurred.
The software interrupts are setup by programming the interrupt times in V736 and
V737. The valid range is 3--999ms. The value must be a BCD value. The interrupt
will not execute if the value is out of range.
See the example program of a software interrupt.

Interrupt
(INT)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

Constant

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

0--7

0--17

0--17

O
Software

DL430

DL440/450

Interrupt Input

Interrupt Routine

Interrupt Input

Interrupt Routine

Interrupt Input

Interrupt Routine

----

----

X0

INT 0

X0

INT 0

----

----

X1

INT 1

X1

INT 1

----

----

X2

INT 2

X2

INT 2

----

----

X3

INT 3

X3

INT 3

----

----

X4

INT 4

X4

INT 4

----

----

X5

INT 5

X5

INT 5

----

----

X6

INT 6

X6

INT 6

----

----

X7

INT 7

X7

INT 7

----

----

----

----

X20

INT 10

----

----

----

----

X21

INT 11

----

----

----

----

X22

INT 12

----

----

----

----

X23

INT 13

----

----

----

----

X24

INT 14

----

----

----

----

X25

INT 15

V736 sets interrupt

time

INT 16

----

----

X26(cannot be used
along with s/w
interrupt)

INT 16

V737 sets interrupt

time

INT 17

----

----

X27 (cannot be used

along with s/w
interrupt)

INT 17

Standard
RLL Instructions

2nd Module

DL450 Range

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--186

Standard RLL Instructions

Interrupt Instructions

Interrupt Return
(IRT)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Interrupt Return
Conditional
(IRTC)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Enable Interrupts
(ENI)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

Disable Interrupts
(DISI)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The
Interrupt
Return
Conditional
instruction is a optional instruction used
with an input contact to implement a
conditional return from the interrupt
routine. The Interrupt Return is still required
to terminate the interrupt routine

IRT

IRTC

The Enable Interrupt instruction is

programmed in the main body of the
application program (before the End
instruction) to enable hardware or software
interrupts. Once the coil has been
energized interrupts will be enabled until
the interrupt is disabled by the Disable
Interrupt instruction.

ENI

The Disable Interrupt instruction is

programmed in the main body of the
application program (before the End
instruction) to disable both hardware or
software interrupts. Once the coil has
been energized interrupts will be disabled
until the interrupt is enabled by the Enable
Interrupt instruction.

DISI

Standard
RLL Instructions

When an Interrupt Return is executed in the

interrupt routine the CPU will return to the
point in the main body of the program from
which it was called. The Interrupt Return is
programmed as the last instruction in an
interrupt routine and is a stand alone
instruction (no input contact on the rung).

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard RLL Instructions

Interrupt Instructions
Interrupt Example
for Interrupt
Module

5--187

In the following example, when X40 is on, the interrupts will be enabled. When X40 is
off the interrupts will be disabled. When a interrupt signal X1 is received the CPU will
jump to the interrupt label INT O 1. The application ladder logic in the interrupt
routine will be performed. If X35 is on the CPU will return to the main program with
the IRTC instruction. If X35 is not on Y0--Y17 will be reset to off and then the CPU will
return to the main body of the program.

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X40
ENI

X40

X(IN)

SHFT

STR

NOT

X(IN)

SHFT

SHFT

OCT

STR

SHFT

SHFT

X(IN)

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

STR

SHFT

SHFT

X(IN)

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

STR

SHFT

SHFT

X(IN)

S
DISI

S
END

S
S
S
END
S
S
S
INT

O1

X20

Y5
OUTI

X21

SHFT

STR

NOT

SHFT

SHFT

X(IN)

RST

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

Y(OUT)

SHFT

Y10
OUTI

X35
IRTC

X35

Y0

Y17
RSTI

IRT

Standard
RLL Instructions
DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--188

Standard RLL Instructions

Interrupt Instructions
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value 10 is copied to V737. This value
sets the software interrupt to 10 ms. When X20 turns on, the interrupt will be
enabled. When X20 turns off, the interrupts will be disabled. Every 10 ms the CPU
will jump to the interrupt label INT O 17. The application ladder logic in the interrupt
routine will be performed. If X35 is on the CPU will return to the main program with
the IRTC instruction. If X35 is not on Y0--Y17 will be reset to off and then the CPU will
return to the main body of the program when the IRT instruction is executed. The
software interrupt is limited to the range 3 -- 999 milliseconds. Entering a 0, 1, or 2 will
yield an interrupt time of 3 milliseconds.

Interrupt Example
for Software
Interrupt

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X1

LD
K10
Load the constant value
(K10) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
OUT
V737
Copy the value in the lower 16
bits of the accumulator to V737

STR

X(IN)

LD

K(CON)

OUT

STR

X(IN)

SHFT

STR

NOT

X(IN)

SHFT

SHFT

OCT

STR

SHFT

SHFT

X(IN)

S
X20

S
END

ENI

X20
DISI

S
S

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

STR

SHFT

SHFT

X(IN)

OUT

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

STR

SHFT

SHFT

X(IN)

SHFT

STR

NOT

SHFT

SHFT

X(IN)

RST

SHFT

SHFT

Y(OUT)

Y(OUT)

SHFT

S
END

INT

O 17

X20

Y5
OUTI

X21

Y10
OUTI

X35

Standard
RLL Instructions

IRTC

X35

Y0

Y17
RSTI

IRT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard RLL Instructions

Intelligent I/O Instructions

5--189

Intelligent I/O Instructions

Read from
Intelligent Module
(RD)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Read from Intelligent Module

instruction reads a block of data (1--128
RD
bytes maximum) from an intelligent I/O
V aaa
module into the CPUs V--memory. It loads
the function parameters into the first and
second level of the accumulator stack, and
the accumulator by three additional
instructions.
Listed below are the steps to program the Read from Intelligent module function.
Step 1: Load the base number (0--3) into the first byte and the slot number (0--7)
into the second byte of the second level of the accumulator stack.
Step 2: Load the number of bytes to be transferred into the first level of the
accumulator stack. (maximum of 128 bytes)
Step 3: Load the address from which the data will be read into the accumulator.
This parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 4: Insert the RD instruction which specifies the starting V memory location
(Vaaa) where the data will be read into.
Helpful Hint: Use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to its HEX
equivalent and load it into the accumulator when the hex format is required.
Operand Data Type

V--memory

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP54

on when RX, WX, RD, WT instructions are executed with the wrong parameters.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example when X1 is on, the RD instruction will read six bytes of data
from a intelligent module in base 1, slot 2 starting at address 0 in the intelligent
module and copy the information into V-memory locations V1400--V1402.
CPU

DirectSOFT
X1

LD
K0102

LD
K6

The constant value K0

specifies the starting address
in the intelligent module

V1400

V1400 is the starting location

in the CPU where the
specified data will be stored

RD

V1400

V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

12

Address 0

34

Address 1

56

Address 2

78

Address 3

90

Address 4

01

Address 5

Standard
RLL Instructions

The constant value K6

specifies the number of
bytes to be read

K0

LD

Intelligent Module
Data

The constant value K0102

specifies the base number
(01) and the base slot
number (02)

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

K(CON)

LD

K(CON)

LD

K(CON)

SHFT

SHFT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--190

Standard RLL Instructions

Intelligent I/O Instructions

Write to Intelligent
Module
(WT)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Write to Intelligent Module instruction

writes a block of data (1--128 bytes
maximum) to an intelligent I/O module from
WT
a block of V--memory in the CPU. The
V aaa
function parameters are loaded into the first
and second level of the accumulator stack,
and the accumulator by three additional
instructions. Listed below are the steps
necessary to program the Read from
Intelligent module function.
Step 1: Load the base number (0--3) into the first byte and the slot number (0--7)
into the second byte of the second level of the accumulator stack.
Step 2: Load the number of bytes to be transferred into the first level of the
accumulator stack. (maximum of 128 bytes)
Step 3: Load the intelligent module address which will receive the data into the
accumulator. This parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 4: Insert the WT instruction which specifies the starting V memory location
(Vaaa) where the data will be written from in the CPU.
Helpful Hint: Use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to its HEX
equivalent and load it into the accumulator when the hex format is required.
Operand Data Type

V--memory

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Discrete Bit Flags

Description

SP54

on when RX, WX, RD, WT instructions are executed with the wrong parameters.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the WT instruction will write six bytes of data
to an intelligent module in base 1, slot 2 starting at address 0 in the intelligent module
and copy the information from Vmemory locations V1400--V1402.
DirectSOFT
X1

CPU
LD
K0102

LD

Standard
RLL Instructions

K6

LD
K0

WT
V1400

The constant value K0102

specifies the base number
(01) and the base slot
number (02)

Data

The constant value K6

specifies the number of
bytes to be written

The constant value K0

specifies the starting address
in the intelligent module

V1400 is the starting

location in the CPU where
the specified data will be
written from

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Intelligent Module

V1377

V1400

V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

12

Address 0

34

Address 1

56

Address 2

78

Address 3

90

Address 4

01

Address 5

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

LD

K(CON)

LD

K(CON)

LD

K(CON)

SHFT

SHFT

Standard RLL Instructions

Network Instructions

5--191

Network Instructions
Read from Network The Read from Network instruction is used
by the master device (CPU with a DCM) on
(RX)
a network to read a block of data from
  
another CPU. The function parameters are
430 440 450
loaded into the first and second level of the


accumulator stack and the accumulator by
HPP
DS
three additional instructions. Listed below
are the steps necessary to program the
Read from Intelligent module function.

RX
A aaa

Step 1: Load the slave address (1--90 BCD) into the first byte and the slot number
of the master DCM (0--7) into the second byte of the second level of the accumulator
stack. (Note: address 0 is only valid for peer stations.)
Step 2: Load the number of bytes (2--128 BCD, multiple of 2) to be transferred into
the first level of the accumulator stack.
Step 3: Load the address where you want to store the data in the master station.
The address must be specified in HEX.
Step 4: Insert the RX instruction and specify the starting V--memory location
(Aaaa) in the slave CPU where the data will be obtained.
Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values, the LDA instruction can be
used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the
accumulator.
Operand Data Type

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Inputs

0--477

0--477

0--1777

Outputs

0--477

0--477

0--1777

Control Relays

0--737

0--1777

0--3777

Stage

0--577

0--1777

0--1777

Timer

0--177

0--377

0--377

Counter

CT

0--177

0--177

0--377

Special Relay

SP

0--137, 320--617

0--137 320--717

0--137 320--717

Global I/O

GX

0--777

0--1777

0--2777

Program Memory

L$

0--3583

0--7679 (7.5K program mem.)

0--15871 (15.5K program mem.)

0--7679 (7.5K program mem.)

0--15871 (15.5K program mem.)

Scratchpad

0--FFFF

0--FFFF

0--FFFF

Standard
RLL Instructions

NOTE: If you are using a CoProcessor, Share Data Network, or DCM module,
please refer to their manuals for information on how to transfer data over the
DirectNET network.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--192

Standard RLL Instructions

Network Instructions
In the following example, when X1 is on and the module busy relay SP124 (see
special relays) is not on, the RX instruction will access a DCM operating as a master
in slot 2. Ten consecutive bytes of data (V1400 -- V1404) will be read from a CPU at
station address 5 and copied into V-memory locations V2500--V2504 in the CPU
with the master DCM.
Master
CPU

DirectSOFT
X1

SP124

LD
K 0205

S
S

The constant value K0205

specifies the slot number (2)
and the slave address (5)
LD
K 10
The constant value K10
specifies the number of
bytes to be read

V2500

V1401

V2502

V1402

V2503

V1403

V2504

V1404

V2505

V1405

S
S

O 2500

RX
V1400
V1400 is the starting
location in the DL405 slave
CPU where the specified
data will be obtained.

Write to Network
(WX)
  

Standard
RLL Instructions

430 440 450

DS

HPP

S
S

V2501

LDA

Octal address 2500 is

converted to 540 HEX and
loaded into the accumulator.
V2500 is the starting
location for the Master CPU
where the specified data will
be stored

Slave
CPU
V1400

S
S

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

AND

NOT

SPCL

LD

K(CON)

LD

K(CON)

LD

SHFT

OCT

SHFT

SHFT

The Write to Network instruction is used to

write a block of data from the master device
(CPU with a DCM) to a slave device on the
same network. The function parameters are
loaded into the first and second level of the
accumulator stack and the accumulator by
three additional instructions. Listed below
are the steps necessary to program the
Write to Network function.

WX
A aaa

Step 1: Load the slave address (1--90 BCD) into the first byte and the slot number
of the master DCM (0--7) into the second byte of the second level of the accumulator
stack. (Note: address 0 is only valid for peer stations.)
Step 2: Load the number of bytes (2--128 BCD, multiple of 2) to be transferred into
the first level of the accumulator stack.
Step 3: Load the address where you want to obtain the data in the master station.
The address must be specified in HEX.
Step 4: Insert the WX instruction and specify the starting V--memory location
(Aaaa) in the slave CPU where the data will be stored.
Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values, the LDA instruction can be
used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the
accumulator.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--193

Standard RLL Instructions

Network Instructions

Operand Data Type

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Inputs

0--477

0--477

0--1777

Outputs

0--477

0--477

0--1777

Control Relays

0--737

0--1777

0--3777

Stage

0--577

0--1777

0--1777
0--377

Timer

DL450 Range

0--177

0--377

Counter

CT

0--177

0--177

0--377

Special Relay

SP

0--137, 320--617

0--137 320--717

0--137 320--717

Global I/O

GX

0--777

0--1777

0--2777

Program Memory

0--3585

0--7679 (7.5K program mem.)

0--15873 (15.5K program mem.)

0--7679 (7.5K program mem.)

0--15873 (15.5K program mem.)

Scratchpad

0--FFFF

0--FFFF

0--FFFF

NOTE: If you are using a CoProcessor, Share Data Network, or DCM module,
please refer to their manuals for information on how to transfer data over the
DirectNET network.
In the following example when X1 is on and the module busy relay SP124 (see
special relays) is not on, the WX instruction will access a DCM operating as a master
in slot 2. 10 consecutive bytes of data is read from the CPU at station address 5 and
copied to V--memory locations V1400--V1404 in the slave CPU.
Master
CPU

DirectSOFT
X1

SP124

LD
K 0205

S
S

The constant value K0205

specifies the slot number (2)
and the slave address (5)
LD
K10
The constant value K10
specifies the number of
bytes to be read

V1400

V2501

V1401

V2502

V1402

V2503

V1403

V2504

V1404

V2505

V1405

S
S

O 2500

V1400
V1400 is the starting
location in the DL405 Slave
CPU where the data will be
stored.

S
S

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

X(IN)

AND

NOT

SPCL

LD

K(CON)

LD

K(CON)

LD

SHFT

OCT

SHFT

SHFT

Standard
RLL Instructions

WX

S
S

V2500

LDA

Octal address 2500 is

converted to 540 HEX and
loaded into the accumulator.
V2500 is the starting
location for the Master CPU
where the specified data will
be obtained.

Slave
CPU

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--194

Standard RLL Instructions

Message Instructions

Message Instructions
System Errors and The DL405 CPUs provide error logging capabilities. There are certain predefined
system error messages and codes, but you can also use the Fault instruction to
Fault Messages
create your own specific messages. The CPU logs the error, the date, and the time
the error occurred. There are two separate tables that store this information.
S System Error Table -- both the DL430 and DL440 have several
predefined system error codes. The DL430 can hold one error at a time.
The DL440 can show up to 32 errors in an error table. When an error
occurs, the error is loaded into the first available location. Therefore, the
most recent error may not appear in the top row of the table. If the table
is full when an error occurs, the oldest error is pushed (erased) from the
table and the new error is inserted in the row.
S Fault Message Table -- the DL430 and DL440 also allow you to build
your own error codes and messages. These are called Fault Messages.
With the DL430, you can only build numeric error codes. With the
DL440, you can build error codes, or up to 16 messages that can
contain up to 23-character alphanumeric characters. In either case, you
can have up to 16 messages or codes shown in the table. When a
message is triggered, it is put in the first available table location.
Therefore, the most recent error may not appear in the top row of the
table. If the table is full when an error occurs, the oldest error is pushed
(erased) from the table and the new error is inserted in the row.
The following diagram shows an example of a the Fault Message table as shown in
DirectSOFT. You cannot view the entire table at one time with the handheld
programmer. Instead, the messages automatically appear on the handheld
programmer display as they occur. The message will remain on the display as long as
the Fault instruction is being executed. You can also use an Auxiliary function (5C) to
view the messages one at a time. (More on the handheld programmer display later.)
DL440 Error Msg. Example
Most recent message
appears here, not at
the top of the table.

Standard
RLL Instructions

Next message will

show up in this row,
which is now the
oldest message.
There are several instructions that can be used in combination to create these error
codes and messages.
S FAULT -- Fault
S DLBL -- Data Label
S ACON -- ASCII Constant
S NCON -- Numeric Constant
The next few pages provide details on these instructions. Also, at the end of this
section, there are two examples that show how the instructions are used together.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard RLL Instructions

Message Instructions

Fault
(FAULT)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

In a DL440 or DL450, the Fault instruction is

used to display a message or numeric error
code on the handheld programmer,
FAULT
DirectSOFT screen, or DV--1000 Operator
A aaa
Interface display. The message has a
maximum of 23 characters and can be either
V--memory data, numerical constant data or
ASCII text.
To display a value in a V--memory location,
specify the V--memory location in the
instruction.
To display ASCII or numeric data, you must use the DLBL (Data Label) instruction,
and ACON (ASCII constant) or NCON (Numeric constant) instructions, in
conjunction with the Fault instruction. In this case, you should specify the constant
(K) value in the Fault instruction for the corresponding data label area that contains
the ACON and/or NCON instructions.
Operand Data Type

Fault
(FAULT)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

5--195

DL440 Range

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--41)

All (See p. 3--42)

Constant

1--FFFF

1--FFFF

In a DL430, the Fault instruction is used to

display a numeric error code on the handheld
programmer, DirectSOFT screen, or
FAULT
DV--1000 Operator Interface display.
A aaa
The error code may be obtained from a V-memory location, or may be constructed by
specifying a constant in the Fault
instruction.
To display the value in a V--memory location, specify the V--memory location in the
instruction. To display a numeric constant, specify the constant (K) value in the
instruction.
Operand Data Type

DL430 Range
A

aaa

V--memory

All (See p. 3--40)

Constant

1--FFFF

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard
RLL Instructions

NOTE: The DL430 does not support the necessary instructions to build
alphanumeric error messages. You can only build error codes by obtaining the code
from a V--memory location, or by specifying a constant in the Fault instruction.

5--196

Standard RLL Instructions

Message Instructions

Data Label
(DLBL)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Data Label instruction marks the

beginning of an ASCII/numeric data area
and is typically used with ACON and NCON
instructions. DLBLs are programmed after
the End statement. A maximum of 64 DLBL
instructions can be used in a program.
Multiple NCONs and ACONs can be used in
a DLBL area. Examples are shown later in
this section.
Operand Data Type

Constant

DLBL

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

----

1--FFFF

1--FFFF

ASCII Constant
(ACON)
  

The ASCII Constant instruction is used with the DLBL instruction to store ASCII text
for use with other instructions. The instruction is utilized differently between the
handheld programmer and our DirectSOFT programming software.

430 440 450

Handheld Programmer: With a handheld

programmer, two ASCII characters can be
stored in an ACON instruction. If only one
character is stored in an ACON, a leading
space will be printed in the Fault message.

DS

HPP

Operand Data Type

ASCII

ACON
A aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

----

0--9 A--Z

0--9 A--Z

DirectSOFT Programming Software:

If youre using DirectSOFT, you can store
up to 40 characters in an ACON. Also, you
have a much wider range of characters that
are supported. (See Appendix G for a
complete listing of ASCII characters
available.)
Operand Data Type

ASCII

Standard
RLL Instructions

K aaa

DL450 Range

ACON
A aaa
Note, even though it is shown here for
clarification, the A does not appear in the
parameter field on DirectSOFT 5screens.

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

----

(See DirectSOFT Manual)

(See DirectSOFT Manual)

At first glance you may wonder why the instructions work differently in the two
different programming tools. In reality, the instructions do not work differently. In
DirectSOFT, the 40--characters are actually broken down into multiple ACONs that
contain 2 characters each when it is downloaded to the CPU. So, if you create the
program with the software, and you examine the program mnemonics with a
handheld (or even with DirectSOFT), you would see multiple ACONs that contain 2
characters each. Examples are shown on the following pages.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard RLL Instructions

Message Instructions

Numeric Constant
(NCON)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Numeric Constant instruction is used

with the DLBL instruction to store the HEX
ASCII equivalent of numeric data for use
with other instructions. Two digits can be
stored in an NCON instruction.

Operand Data Type

Constant

Using the
Instructions to
Build the
Messages

DL440 Range

NCON
K aaa

DL450 Range

aaa

aaa

0--FFFF

0--FFFF

The Fault instruction actually copies the

messages into the appropriate Error table.
However, it is important to understand
how the DLBL, ACON, and NCON
instructions are combined to build the
message. The DLBL is placed after the
END instruction, which signifies the end of
the main program. The ACON and NCON
instructions are placed within the DLBL
area. The diagram shows an example.

5--197

DirectSOFTDisplay

END
DLBL
K1
ACON
CHECK CLAMP

History
(HISTRY)
  

The History instruction stores event history

information in memory of the PLC.

HISTRY
A aaa

430 440 450

DS

HPP

Standard
RLL Instructions
DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--198

Standard RLL Instructions

Message Instructions

Important
Information about
FAULT Execution

It is important to understand how the Error Message and Error Code tables work
when the Fault instruction is executed. Each time the instruction is executed, the
code or message is inserted into the table. Since the CPU scan is extremely fast,
then it is easily possible to completely fill up a table with a single message. In many
cases this is not desirable, since its nice to maintain a history of the errors. (Thats
why there are 32 positions in the Error Code table and 16 positions in the Error
Message table.)
For example, lets say you are examining a limit switch (X1). When the switch is
closed, you want an error message (CHECK CLAMP 10) to be logged into the Error
Message table. In the real world, the limit switch may be closed for several seconds
(or minutes, or hours...). During this time, the CPU will execute the Fault instruction a
number of times, so the entire Error Message table will be full of a single message.
How do you solve this problem? Simple.
Instead of using the limit switch to trigger
the Fault instruction, use the limit switch to
trigger a control relay used as a one-shot
(PD coil instruction). Then, use the control
relay as the input to the Fault instruction.
Since the Fault is now triggered by the PD,
which is only on for one scan, the
message will only be copied into the table
one time. This keeps the history of older
messages intact.

DirectSOFT
C0

X1

PD
When X1 is on, turn on C0 for one
scan.

C0

FAULT
K1
When C0 is on, the FAULT
instruction copies the message
built by the ACONs and NCONs
following DLBL K1 into the Error
tables.

END
DLBL
K1
ACON
CHECK CLAMP 10

Standard
RLL Instructions

NOTE: This method does not work

correctly with a handheld programmer.
The message will never appear on the
display. You must use the input contact
(X1 in this example) to trigger the Fault
instruction directly. The diagram shown
here provides an example.

DirectSOFT

X1

FAULT
K1
When X1 is on, the FAULT
instruction copies the message
built by the ACONs and NCONs
following DLBL K1 into the Error
tables.

END
DLBL
K1
ACON
CHECK CLAMP 10

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard RLL Instructions

Message Instructions

Obviously, you could combine other

instructions with the PD instruction usage
to develop logic that would work for both
the
handheld
programmer
and
DirectSOFT. For example, if its possible
in your application, you can have two input
contacts that can trigger the FAULT
instruction.
Consider the example shown to the right.
If X1 comes on, then the message will only
be copied into the table one time. You
could see the message with DirectSOFT,
but you would not automatically see it on
the handheld programmer display.
If X2 comes on, then the message would
probably fill the entire table. Also, it would
automatically appear on the handheld
programmer.

5--199

DirectSOFTDisplay
C0

X1

PD
When X1 is on, turn on C0 for one
scan.

C0

FAULT
K1

X2

When C0 is on, the FAULT

instruction copies the message
built by the ACONs and NCONs
following DLBL K1 into the Error
tables.

END
DLBL
K1
ACON
CHECK CLAMP 10

DirectSOFT
Example

Since you can enter more characters in an ACON instruction in DirectSOFT, it is

very easy to build the entire message in one ACON instruction.

DirectSOFT

PD C0 triggers one entry into the table

C0

X1

PD
When X1 is on, turn on C0 for one
scan.

C0

FAULT
K1
When C0 is on, the FAULT
instruction copies the message
built by the ACONs and NCONs
following DLBL K1 into the Error
tables.

END
DLBL
K1

Standard
RLL Instructions

ACON
CHECK CLAMP 10

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

5--200

Standard RLL Instructions

Message Instructions
Since you can only enter two characters per ACON with the handheld programmer, the
program appears to be longer to get the same results. Youll also notice that weve
organized the ACON contents slightly differently. For example, weve only included the
character C in the first ACON. We have to do it this way in order to get the message to
appear correctly. (Remember, a single character entered in an ACON with a handheld
will have a blank space preceding it. So if your messages do not contain an even
number of characters, you may have to play around with them to get the spacing just
right.) Also, we have to use X1 to directly trigger the FAULT instruction. Otherwise, the
message will never automatically appear on the handheld programmer display.

Handheld
Programmer
Example

Message appears on handheld display

X1

FAULT
K1
When X1 is on, the FAULT
instruction copies the message
built by the ACONs and NCONs
following DLBL K1 into the Error
tables.

Asterisk (*) is automatically

provided by the handheld
operating system. It does not have
to be entered with an ACON.

* CHECK CL AMP 1 0
I I I I I I I I 7 6 5 4 3 2 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 10

END
DLBL
K1
ACON
C
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

ACON
HE
ACON
CK

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

SHFT

SHFT

K(CON)

SHFT

ASC

SHFT

SHFT

ASC

SHFT

SHFT

ASC

SHFT

SHFT

ASC

SHFT

SHFT

ASC

SHFT

SHFT

ASC

SHFT

SHFT

ASC

END
C

ACON
LA
ACON
MP
ACON
10

Standard
RLL Instructions

X(IN)

S
S

ACON

Clearing the
Messages

STR

You use different methods to clear the System Errors vs. the Fault Messages.
S System Errors initialize the CPUs scratchpad memory
S Fault Message Table clear the CPU program memory
WARNING: If you initialize the scratchpad, you will also remove any retentive
memory ranges that you may have changed.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard RLL Instructions

Message Instructions
Print Message
(PRINT)
  
430 440 450

DS

HPP

The Print Message instruction prints the

embedded text or text/data variable message
to the specified communications port (1, 2, or
3 on the DL450 CPU), which must have the
communications port configured.
Data Type

Constant

PRINT

5--201

A aaa

Hello, this is a PLC message.

DL450 Range
A

aaa

1, 2, or 3

You may recall from the CPU specifications in Chapter 3 that the DL450s ports are
capable of several protocols. To configure a port using the Handheld Programmer,
use AUX 56 and follow the prompts, making the same choices as indicated below on
this page. To configure a port in DirectSOFT, choose PLC on the menu bar, then
Setup > Setup Secondary Comm Port, the dialog below will appear.
S Port: From the port number list box at the top, choose Port 1.
S Protocol: Click the check box to the left of Non-sequence.

S
S
S
S

Click the button indicated to send the Port 1 configuration to the CPU,
and click Close. See Chapter 3 for port wiring information, in order to
connect your printer to the DL450.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard
RLL Instructions

RTS Flow Control: Choose the appropriate Request-to-Send option

for your printer.
Data bits: Choose the data bits
Baud Rate: Choose the baud rate that matches your printer.
Stop Bits, Parity: Choose number of stop bits and parity setting to
match your printer.
Memory Address: Choose a V-memory address for DirectSOFT to use
to store the port setup information. You will need to reserve 66
contiguous words in V-memory for this purpose. Select Use for printing
only.

5--202

Standard RLL Instructions

Message Instructions
Ports 1 and 2 on the DL450 has standard RS232 levels, and should work with most
printer serial input connections. Port 3 has RS422 levels, and will not work with most
printers. You could use port 3 for long cables, converting the signals to RS232 at the
other end to drive the printer.
Text element -- this is used for printing character strings. The character strings are
defined as the character (more than 0) ranged by the double quotation marks. Two
hex numbers preceded by the dollar sign means an 8-bit ASCII character code. Also,
two characters preceded by the dollar sign is interpreted according to the following
table:
#

Character code

Description

$$

Dollar sign ($)

Double quotation ()

$L or $l

Line feed (LF)

$N or $n

Carriage return line feed (CRLF)

$P or $p

Form feed

$R or $r

Carriage return (CR)

$T or $t

Tab

The following examples show various syntax conventions and the length of the
output to the printer.
Example:

Length 0 without character

A
Length 1 with character A

Length 1 with blank
$
Length 1 with double quotation mark
$R$L
Length 2 with one CR and one LF
$0D$0A
Length 2 with one CR and one LF
$$
Length 1 with one $ mark

Standard
RLL Instructions

In printing an ordinary line of text, you will need to include double quotation marks
before and after the text string. Note that DirectSOFT does not give error indications
for syntax errors in the PRINT instruction. Therefore, it is important to test your
PRINT instruction data during the application development.
The following example prints the message to port 1. We use a PD contact, which
causes the message instruction to be active for just one scan. Note the $N at the end
of the message, which produces a carriage return / line feed on the printer. This
prepares the printer to print the next line, starting from the left margin.
X1

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PRINT
K1
Hello, this is a PLC message.$N

Print the message to Port 1 when

X1 makes an off-to-on transition.

Standard RLL Instructions

Message Instructions

5--203

V-memory element -- this is used for printing V-memory contents in the integer
format or real format. Use V-memory number or V-memory number with : and data
type. The data types are shown in the table below. The Character code must be in
capital letters.
#

Character code

none

:B

4 digit BCD

:D

32-bit binary (decimal number)

:DB

:R

Floating point number (real number)

:E

Floating point number (real number

with exponent)

Example:
V2000
V2000 : B
V2000 : D
V2000 : D B
V2000 : R
V2000 : E

Description
16-bit binary (decimal number)

8 digit BCD

Print binary data in V2000 for decimal number

Print BCD data in V2000
Print binary number in V2000 and V2001 for decimal number
Print BCD data in V2000 and V2001
Print floating point number in V2000/V2001 as real number
Print floating point number in V2000/V2001 as real number
with exponent

Example: The following example prints a message containing text and a variable.
The reactor temperature labels the data, which is at V2000. You can use the : B
qualifier after the V2000 if the data is in BCD format, for example. The final string
adds the units of degrees to the line of text, and the $N adds a carriage return / line
feed. You must include spaces between the text string and the variable.

X1

PRINT
K1
Reactor temperature = V2000 deg.$N

Print the message to Port 1

when X1 makes an off-to-on
transition.
represents a space

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Standard
RLL Instructions

V-memory text element -- this is used for printing text stored in V-memory. Use the
% followed by the number of characters after V-memory number for representing the
text. If you assign 0 as the number of characters, the print function will read the
character count from the first location. Then it will start at the next V-memory location
and read that number of ASCII codes for the text from memory.
Example:
V2000 % 16
16 characters in V2000 to V2007 are printed.
V2000 % 0
The characters in V2001 to Vxxxx (determined by the number
in V2000) will be printed.

5--204

Standard RLL Instructions

Message Instructions
Bit element -- this is used for printing the state of the designated bit in V-memory or a
relay bit. The bit element can be assigned by the designating point (.) and bit number
preceded by the V-memory number or relay number. The output type is described as
shown in the table below.
#

Data format

none

: BOOL

: ONOFF

Example:
V2000 . 15
C100
C100 : BOOL
C100 : ON:OFF
V2000.15 : BOOL

Description
Print 1 for an ON state, and 0 for an
OFF state
Print TRUE for an ON state, and
FALSE for an OFF state
Print ON for an ON state, and OFF
for an OFF state

Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000, in 1/0 format

Prints the status of C100 in 1/0 format
Prints the status of C100 in TRUE/FALSE format
Prints the status of C00 in ON/OFF format
Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000 in TRUE/FALSE format

The maximum numbers of characters you can print is 128. The number of characters
for each element is listed in the table below:

Standard
RLL Instructions

Element type

Maximum
Characters

Text, 1 character

16 bit binary

32 bit binary

11

4 digit BCD

8 digit BCD

Floating point (real number)

12

Floating point (real with exponent)

12

V-memory/text

Bit (1/0 format)

Bit (TRUE/FALSE format)

Bit (ON/OFF format)

The handheld programmers mnemonic is PRINT, followed by the DEF field.

Special relay flags SP112 through SP117 indicate the status of the DL450 CPU ports
(busy, or communications error). See the appendix on special relays for a
description.
NOTE: You must use the appropriate special relay in conjunction with the PRINT
command to ensure the ladder program does not try to PRINT to a port that is still
busy from a previous PRINT or WX or RX instruction.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Drum Instruction
Programming
(DL450 CPU only)
In This Chapter. . . .
Introduction
Step Transitions
Overview of Drum Operation
Drum Control Techniques
Drum Instructions

16

6--2

Drum Instruction Programming

Drum Instruction
Programming

Introduction
Purpose
X X 
430 440 450

Drum Terminology

The four drum instructions available in the DL450 CPU electronically simulate an
electro-mechanical drum sequencer. The instructions offer slight variations on the
basic principle, which we describe first.
Drum instructions are best suited for repetitive processes that consist of a finite
number of steps. They can do the work of many rungs of ladder logic with elegant
simplicity. Therefore, drums can save a lot of programming and debugging time.
We introduce some terminology associated with drum instructions by describing the
original electro-mechanical drum pictured below. The mechanical drum generally
has pegs on its curved surface. The pegs are populated in a particular pattern,
representing a set of desired actions for machine control. A motor or solenoid rotates
the drum a precise amount at specific times. During rotation, stationary wipers sense
the presence of pegs (present = on, absent = off). This interaction makes or breaks
electrical contact with the wipers, creating electrical outputs from the drum. The
outputs are wired to devices on a machine for On/Off control.
Drums usually have a finite number of positions within one rotation, called steps.
Each step represents some process step. At powerup, the drum resets to a
particular step. The drum rotates from one step to the next based on a timer, or on
some external event. During special conditions, a machine operator can manually
increment the drum step using a jog control on the drums drive mechanism. The
contact closure of each wiper generates a unique on/off pattern called a sequence,
designed for controlling a specific machine. Because the drum is circular, it
automatically repeats the sequence once per rotation. Applications vary greatly, and
a particular drum may rotate once per second, or as slowly as once per week.
Pegs

Wipers
Drum

Outputs

Electronic drums provide the benefits of mechanical drums and more. For example,
they have a preset feature that is impossible for mechanical drums: The preset
function lets you move from the present step directly to any other step on command!

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

6--3

Drum Instruction Programming

For editing purposes, the electronic drum is presented in chart form in DirectSOFT
and in this manual. Imagine slicing the surface of a hollow drum cylinder between
two rows of pegs, then pressing it flat. Now you can view the drum as a chart as
shown below. Each row represents a step, numbered 1 through 16. Each column
represents an output, numbered 0 through 15 (to match word bit numbering). The
solid circles in the chart represent pegs (On state) in the mechanical drum, and the
open circles are empty peg sites (Off state).
OUTPUTS
STEP 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1
f F f F f f F f f f F f f F f f
2
f F f F F f F f f f f F f f F f
3
f F F F F f F F f f f f f f f f
4
F F f F F f F f F f f f f f f F
5
f f f F f f F f F f F f F f f F
6
f f f F f f F f F f F f F F f F
7
F f f F f f F F F F f F F F f F
8
F f F f f F f F F f f f F f f F
9
f f f f f f f F F f f f F f f f
10
f f f f f f f F F F f f f f f f
11
F f f f F f f f f F f f f f F f
12
f F f f F F f f F f F F f F F f
13
f f F f f f f f f f f F F f F f
14
f f f f f f f F f f f F F f F F
15
F f f f f F f F f F f F f f F F
16
f f F f f f f F f F f F F f f F

Output Sequences The mechanical drum sequencer derives its name from sequences of control
changes on its electrical outputs. The following figure shows the sequence of On/Off
controls generated by the drum pattern above. Compare the two, and you will find
that they are equivalent! If you can see their equivalence, you are well on your way to
understanding drum instruction operation.
Step
Output
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Drum Instruction
Programming

Drum Chart
Representation

6--4

Drum Instruction Programming

Drum Instruction
Programming

Step Transitions
Drum Instruction
Types

Timer-Only
Transitions

Drum instructions in the DL450 CPU consist of four types:

S Timed Drum with Discrete Outputs (DRUM)
S Time and Event Drum with Discrete Outputs (EDRUM)
S Masked Event Drum with Discrete Outputs (MDRMD)
S Masked Event Drum with Word Output (MDRMW)
The four drum instructions include time-based step transitions, and three include
event-based transitions as well. Other options include outputs defined as a single
word or as individual bits, and an output mask (individual output disable/enable).
Each drum has 16 steps, and each step has 16 outputs. Refering to the figure below,
each output can be either an X, Y, or C coil, offering programming flexibility. Step 1
has been assigned an arbitrary, unique, output pattern (f= Off, F= On) as shown.
Drums move from one step to another based on time and/or an external event
(input). Each step has its own transition condition which you assign during the drum
instruction entry. The figure below shows how timer-only transitions work.
Step 1

Outputs:

F f f f F f F f f f f F F f f f

Outputs:

f f f F f f f f F F f F f f F F

Increment
count timer

No

Has counts per

step expired?
Yes

Step 2

Use next transition criteria

The drum remains in Step 1 for a specific duration (user-programmable). The

timebase of the timer is programmable, from 0.01 seconds to 99.99 seconds. This
establishes the resolution, or the duration of each tick of the clock. Each step uses
the same timebase, but has its own unique counts per step, which you program. The
drum spends a specific amount of time in each step, given by the formula:
Time in step = 0.01 seconds X Timebase x Counts per step

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Drum Instruction Programming

6--5

NOTE: When first choosing the timebase resolution, a good rule of thumb is to make
it about 1/10 the duration of the shortest step in your drum. Then you will be able to
optimize the duration of that step in 10% increments. Other steps with longer
durations allow optimizing by even smaller increments (percentage-wise). Also,
note that the drum instruction executes once per CPU scan. Therefore, it is pointless
to specify a drum timebase that is much faster than the CPU scan time.
Timer and Event
Transitions

Time and Event Drums move from step to step based on time and/or external events.
The figure below shows how step transitions work for these drums.
Step 1

No

Outputs:

F f f f F f F f f f f F F f f f

Is Step event
true?
Yes
Increment
count timer

No

Has step
counts expired?
Yes

Step 2

Outputs:

f f f F f f f f F F f F f f F F

Use next transition criteria

When the drum enters Step 1, it sets the output pattern as shown. Then it begins
polling the external input programmed for that step. You can define event inputs as
X, Y, or C discrete point types. Suppose we select X0 for the Step 1 event input. If X0
is off, then the drum remains in Step 1. When X0 is On, the event criteria is met and
the timer increments. The timer increments as long as the event remains true. When
the counts for Step 1 have expired, then the drum moves to Step 2. The outputs
change immediately to match the new pattern for Step 2.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Drum Instruction
Programming

For example, if you program a 5 second time base and 12 counts for Step 1, then the
drum will spend 60 seconds in Step 1. The maximum time for any step is given by the
formula:
Max Time per step = 0.01 seconds X 9999 X 9999
= 999,800 seconds = 277.7 hours = 11.6 days

Drum Instruction
Programming

6--6

Drum Instruction Programming

Event-Only
Transitions

Step transitions do not require both the event and the timer criteria to be
programmed for each step. You have the option of programming just one of the two,
and even mixing transition types among all the steps of the drum. For example, you
might want Step 1 to transition on an event, Step 2 to transition on time only, and Step
3 to transition on both time and an event. Furthermore, you may elect to use only part
of the 16 steps, and only part of the 16 outputs.
Step 1

No

Outputs:

F f f f F f F f f f f F F f f f

Outputs:

f f f F f f f f F F f F f f F F

Is Step event
true?
Yes

Step 2

Use next transition criteria

Counter
Assignments

Each drum instruction uses the resources of four counters in the CPU. When
programming the drum instruction, you select the first counter number. The drum
also uses the next three counters automatically. The counter bit associated with the
first counter turns on when the drum has completed its cycle, going off when the
drum is reset. These counter values and counter bit precisely indicate the progress
of the drum instruction, and can be monitored by your ladder program.
Suppose we program a timer drum to have
8 steps, and we select CT10 for the
counter number (remember, counter
numbering is in octal). Counter usage is
shown to the right. The right column holds
typical values, interpreted below.

Counter Assignments
CT10 Counts in step V1010

1528

CT11 Timer Value

V1011

0200

CT12 Preset Step

V1012

0001

CT13 Current Step

V1013

0004

CT10 shows that we are at the 1528th count in the current step, which is step 4
(shown in CT13). If we have programmed step 4 to have 3000 counts, then the step
is just over half completed. CT11 is the count timer, shown in units of 0.01 seconds.
So, each least-significant-digit change represents 0.01 seconds. The value of 200
means that we have been in the current count (1528) for 2 seconds (0.01 x 100).
Finally, CT12 holds the preset step value which was programmed into the drum
instruction. When the drums Reset input is active, it presets to step 1 in this case.
The value of CT12 does not change without a program edit. Counter bit CT10 turns
on when the drum cycle is complete, and turns off when the drum is reset.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Drum Instruction Programming

The last step in a drum sequence may be any step number, since partial drums are
valid. Refer to the following figure. When the transition conditions of the last step are
satisfied, the drum sets the counter bit corresponding to the counter named in the
drum instruction box (such as CT0). Then it moves to a final drum complete state.
The drum outputs remain in the pattern defined for the last step (including any output
mask logic). Having finished a drum cycle, the Start and Jog inputs have no effect at
this point. The drum leaves the drum complete state when the Reset input
becomes active (or on a program-to--run mode transition). It resets the drum
complete bit (such as CT0), and then goes directly to the appropriate step number
defined as the preset step.
Outputs:

Last step

No

Are transition
conditions met?

F F F f f f F f f F f F F F f F

(Timer and/or
Event criteria)

Yes
Set
CT0 = 1

Set Drum Complete bit

Outputs:

Complete

No

F F F f f f F f f F f F F F f F

Reset Input
Active?
Yes
Reset
CT0 = 0

Reset Drum Complete bit

Go to Preset Step

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Drum Instruction
Programming

Last Step
Completion

6--7

6--8

Drum Instruction Programming

Drum Instruction
Programming

Overview of Drum Operation

Drum Instruction
Block Diagram

The drum instruction utilizes various inputs and outputs in addition to the drum
pattern itself. Refer to the figure below.
Inputs

DRUM INSTRUCTION
Block Diagram

Outputs

Start
Real Time
Inputs
(from ladder)

Jog *
Reset

Drum

Preset Step
Counts/Step
Timebase
Programming
Selections

Step
Control

Step
Pointer

Events *

f
f
f
F
f
f
f
f

f
f
f
F
F
F
F
F

F
f
f
f
F
F
f
F

f
f
f
F
f
f
f
f

f f
f f
F f
F f
F f
F F
F F
f F

Outputs

Output
Mask *

Final Drum
Outputs

Counter #
Pattern
Output Mask *

Counter Assignments
* Asterisked inputs
are applicable only
to particular drum
instructions.

CT0

Counts in step

V1000

xxxx

CT1

Timer Value

V1001

xxxx

CT2

Preset Step

V1002

xxxx

CT3

Current Step

V1003

xxxx

The drum instruction accepts several inputs for step control, the main control of the
drum. The inputs and their functions are:
S

Start -- The Start input is effective only when Reset is off. When Start is
on, the drum timer runs if it is in a timed transition, and the drum looks
for the input event during event transitions. When Start is off, the drum
freezes in its current state (Reset must remain off), and the drum
outputs maintain their current on/off pattern.
Jog -- The jog input is only effective when Reset is off (Start may be
either on or off). The jog input increments the drum to the next step on
each off-to-on transition. Note that only the basic timer drum does not
have a jog input.
Reset -- The Reset input has priority over the Start input. When Reset is
on, the drum moves to its preset step. When Reset is off, then the Start
input operates normally.
Preset Step -- A step number from 1 to 16 that you define (typically is
step 1). The drum moves to this step whenever Reset is on, and
whenever the CPU first enters run mode.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Drum Instruction Programming

Counts/Step -- The number of timer counts the drum spends in each

step. Each step has its own counts parameter. However, programming
the counts/step is optional on Timer/Event drums.
Timer Value -- the current value of the counts/step timer.
Counter # -- The counter number specifies the first of four consecutive
counters which the drum uses for step control. You can monitor these to
determine the drums progress through its control cycle.
Events -- Either an X, Y, C, GX, GY, S, C, CT, or SP type discrete point
serves as step transition inputs. Each step has its own event. However,
programming the event is optional on Timer/Event drums.

WARNING: The outputs of a drum are enabled any time the CPU is in Run
Mode. The Start Input does not have to be on, and the Reset input does not
disable the outputs. Upon entering Run Mode, drum outputs automatically
turn on or off according to the pattern of the preset step. This includes any
effect of the output mask when applicable.
Powerup State of
Drum Registers

The choice of the starting step on powerup and program-to-run mode transitions are
important to consider for your application. Please refer to the following chart. If the
counter memory is configured as non-retentive, the drum is initialized the same way
on every powerup or program-to-run mode transition. However, if the counter
memory is configured to be retentive, the drum will stay in its previous state.

Counter Number

Function

CTA(n)

Initialization on Powerup
Non-Retentive Case

Retentive Case

Current Step
Count

Initialize = 0

Use Previous (no

change)

CTA(n + 1)

Counter Timer
Value

Initialize = 0

Use Previous (no

change)

CTA(n + 2)

Preset Step

Initialize = Preset Step #

Use Previous (no

change)

CTA(n + 3)

Current Step #

Initialize = Preset Step #

Use Previous (no

change)

Applications with relatively fast drum cycle times typically will need to be reset on
powerup, using the non-retentive option. Applications with relatively long drum cycle
times may need to resume at the previous point where operations stopped, using the
retentive case. The default option is the retentive case. This means that if you
initialize scratchpad V-memory, the memory will be retentive.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Drum Instruction
Programming

S
S

6--9

6--10

Drum Instruction Programming

Drum Instruction
Programming

Drum Control Techniques

Drum
Control Inputs

Now we are ready to put together the

concepts on the previous pages and
demonstrate general control of the drum
instruction box. The drawing to the right
shows a simplified generic drum
instruction. Inputs from ladder logic
control the Start, Jog, and Reset Inputs.
The first counter bit of the drum (CT0, for
example) indicates the drum cycle is
done.

X0

Start

X1

Jog

X2

Reset

Outputs

Setup
Info.
Steps

Mask
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
f

f
f
f
F
F
F
F
F

F
f
f
f
F
F
f
F

f
f
f
F
f
f
f
f

f f
f f
F f
F f
F f
F F
F F
f F

The timing diagram below shows an arbitrary timer drum input sequence and how
the drum responds. As the CPU enters run mode it initializes the step number to the
preset step number (typically is Step 1). When the Start input goes high the drum
begins running, looking for an event and/or running the count timer (depending on
the drum type and setup).
After the drum enters Step 2, Reset turns On while Start is still On. Since Reset has
priority over Start, the drum goes to the preset step (Step 1). Note that the drum is
held in the preset step during Reset, and that step does not run (respond to events or
run the timer) until Reset turns off.
After the drum has entered step 3, the Start input goes off momentarily, halting the
drums timer until Start turns on again.
Start
drum
Inputs
Start

1
0

Jog

1
0

Reset

1
0

Reset
drum

Hold
drum

Resume
drum

Drum
Reset
Complete drum

Drum Status
1

Step #
Drum
Complete (CT0)

Outputs (x 16)

1
0

...

15

16

16

16

When the drum completes the last step (Step 16 in this example), the Drum
Complete bit (CT0) turns on, and the step number remains at 16. When the Reset
input turns on, it turns off the Drum Complete bit (CT0), and forces the drum to enter
the preset step.
NOTE: The timing diagram shows all steps using equal time durations. Step times
can vary greatly, depending on the counts/step programmed.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

6--11

Drum Instruction Programming

Jog
drum
Inputs
Start

1
0

Jog

1
0

Reset

1
0

Reset
drum

Jog
drum

Jog
drum

Drum
Complete

Drum Status
1

Step #

Self-Resetting
Drum

Initializing Drum
Outputs

Using Complex
Event Step
Transitions

Drum
Complete (CT0)

Outputs (x 16)

1
0

6,7

...

14

15

16

16

16

Applications often require drums that

automatically start over once they
complete a cycle. This is easily
accomplished, using the drum complete
bit. In the figure to the right, the drum
instruction setup is for CT0, so we logically
OR the drum complete bit (CT0) with the
Reset input. When the last step is done,
the drum turns on CT0 which resets itself
to the preset step, also resetting CT0.
Contact X1 still works as a manual reset.

X0
X1
CT0

Start
Reset

Outputs

Setup
Info.
Steps

Mask
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
f

f
f
f
F
F
F
F
F

F
f
f
f
F
F
f
F

f
f
f
F
f
f
f
f

f f
f f
F f
F f
F f
F F
F F
f F

The outputs of a drum are enabled any time the CPU is in run mode. On
program-to-run mode transitions, the drum goes to the preset step, and the outputs
energize according to the pattern of that step. If your application requires all outputs
to be off at powerup make the preset step in the drum a reset step, with all outputs
off.
Each event--based transition accepts only one contact reference for the event.
However, this does not limit events to just one contact. Just use a control relay
contact such as C0 for the step transition event. Elsewhere in the ladder logic you
may use C0 as an output coil, making it dependent on many other events
(contacts).

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Drum Instruction
Programming

In the figure below, we focus on how the Jog input works on event drums. To the left
of the diagram, note that the off-to-on transitions of the Jog input increments the
step. Start may be either on or off (however, Reset must be off). Two jogs takes the
drum to step three. Next, the Start input turns on, and the drum begins running
normally. During step 6 another Jog input signal occurs. This increments the drum to
step 7, setting the timer to 0. The drum begins running immediately in step 7,
because Start is already on. The drum advances to step 8 normally.
As the drum enters step 14, the Start input turns off. Two more Jog signals moves the
drum to step 16. However, note that a third Jog signal is required to move the drum
through step 16 to drum complete. Finally, a Reset input signal arrives which forces
the drum into the preset step and turns off the drum complete bit.

6--12

Drum Instruction Programming

Drum Instruction
Programming

Drum Instructions

Timed Drum with

Discrete Outputs
(DRUM)
X X 

The DL450 drum instructions may be programmed DirectSOFT. The EDRUM is the
only drum instruction that can be programmed with a handheld programmer
(firmware version 5.5 or later). This section covers entry using DirectSOFT for all
instructions plus the handheld mnemonics for the EDRUM instructions.
The Timed Drum with Discrete Outputs is the most basic of the DL450s drum
instructions. It operates according to the principles covered on the previous pages.
Below is the instruction in chart form as displayed by DirectSOFT.
Counter Number

430 440 450

Step Preset
Timebase
Control
Inputs

Discrete Output Assignment

Start
Reset

Step Number
Counts per Step
Output Pattern
f= Off, F= On

The Timed Drum features 16 steps and 16 outputs. Step transitions occur only on a
timed basis, specified in counts per step. Unused steps must be programmed with
counts per step = 0 (this is the default entry). The discrete output points may be
individually assigned as X, Y, or C types, or may be left unused. The output pattern
may be edited graphically with DirectSOFT.
Whenever the Start input is energized, the drums timer is enabled. It stops when the
last step is complete, or when the Reset input is energized. The drum enters the
preset step chosen upon a CPU program-to-run mode transition, and whenever the
Reset input is energized.
Drum Parameters

Field

Data Types

Ranges

Counter Number

aaa

--

0 -- 377

Preset Step

bb

1 -- 16

Timer base

cc

0 -- 99.99 seconds

Counts per step

dddd

0 -- 9999

Discrete Outputs

Fffff

X, Y, C, GX, GY *

see page 3--42

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Drum Instruction Programming

6--13

Counter Number

Ranges of (n)

Function

Counter Bit Function

CTA(n)

0 -- 374

Counts in step

CTn = Drum Complete

CTA( n+1)

1 -- 375

Timer value

CT(n+1) = (not used)

CTA( n+2)

2 --376

Preset Step

CT(n+2) = (not used)

CTA( n+3)

3 --377

Current Step

CT(n+1) = (not used)

The following ladder program shows the DRUM instruction in a typical ladder
program, as shown by DirectSOFT. Steps 1 through 10 are used, and twelve of the
sixteen output points are used. The preset step is step 1. The timebase runs at (K10
x 0.01) = 0.1 per count. Therefore, the duration of step 1 is (25 x 0.1) = 2.5 seconds.
In the last rung, the Drum Complete bit (CT10) turns on output Y0 upon completion of
the last step (step 10). A drum reset also resets CT10.

Start
Reset

Drum Complete
DirectSOFT Display

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Drum Instruction
Programming

Drum instructions use four counters in the CPU. The ladder program can read the
counter values for the drums status. The ladder program may write a new preset
step number to CTA(n+2) at any time. However, the other counters are for
monitoring purposes only.

Drum Instruction
Programming

6--14

Drum Instruction Programming

The Event Drum features time--based and event--based step transitions. It operates
according to the general principles of drum operation covered in the beginning of this
section. Below is the instruction as displayed by DirectSOFT.

Event Drum
(EDRUM)
X X 
430 440 450

Counter Number

Step Preset
Timebase

Discrete Output Assignment

Start

Control
Inputs

Jog
Reset

Step Number
Counts per Step
Event per step
Output Pattern

f= Off, F= On

The Event Drum features 16 steps and 16 outputs. Step transitions occur on timed
and/or event basis. The jog input also advances the step on each off-to-on transition.
Time is specified in counts per step, and events are specified as discrete contacts.
Unused steps and events must be left blank. The discrete output points may be
individually asssigned.
Drum Parameters

Field

Data Types

Ranges

Counter Number

aaa

--

0 -- 377

Preset Step

bb

1 -- 16

Timer base

cc

0 -- 99.99 seconds

Counts per step

dddd

0 -- 9999

Event

eeee

X, Y, C, GX, GY, S, T, ST

see page 3--42

Discrete Outputs

Fffff

X, Y, C , GX, GY*

see page 3--42

Whenever the Start input is energized, the drums timer is enabled. As long as the
event is true for the current step, the timer runs during that step. When the step count
equals the counts per step, the drum transitions to the next step. This process stops
when the last step is complete, or when the Reset input is energized. The drum
enters the preset step chosen upon a CPU program-to-run mode transition, and
whenever the Reset input is energized.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Drum Instruction Programming

6--15

Counter Number

Ranges of (n)

Function

Counter Bit Function

CTA(n)

0 -- 374

Counts in step

CTn = Drum Complete

CTA( n+1)

1 -- 375

Timer value

CT(n+1) = (not used)

CTA( n+2)

2 --376

Preset Step

CT(n+2) = (not used)

CTA( n+3)

3 --377

Current Step

CT(n+1) = (not used)

The following ladder program shows the EDRUM instruction in a typical ladder
program, as shown by DirectSOFT. Steps 1 through 11 are used, and all sixteen
output points are used. The preset step is step 1. The timebase runs at (K10 x 0.01) =
0.1 second per count. Therefore, the duration of step 1 is (1 x 0.1) = 0.1 seconds.
Note that step 1 is time-based only (event is left blank). And, the output pattern for
step 1 programs all outputs off, which is a typically desirable powerup condition. In
the last rung, the Drum Complete bit (CT4) turns on output Y0 upon completion of the
last step (step 11). A drum reset also resets CT4.

NOTE: If all events are true in an event only drum (a drum with 0 counts per step in all
steps), the PLC completes one step of the drum per scan; thus, the drum will be
complete in 16 scans. However, as the outputs of the drum are enabled any time the
CPU is in RUN Mode, the drum discrete outputs will be energized as pulsed outputs
for each scan.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Drum Instruction
Programming

Drum instructions use four counters in the CPU. The ladder program can read the
counter values for the drums status. The ladder program may write a new preset
step number to CTA(n+2) at any time. However, the other counters are for
monitoring purposes only.

Drum Instruction
Programming

6--16

Drum Instruction Programming

The handheld programmer can also enter or edit drum instructions. The diagram
below lists the keystrokes for entering the drum example on the previous page.
NOTE: Drum editing requires Handheld Programmer firmware version 5.5 or later.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes contd

skip over unused event

Start

STR

X(IN)

1 ( DEF 0000 )

Jog

STR

X(IN)

( DEF 0000 )

Y(OUT)

Reset

STR

X(IN)

( DEF 0000 )

X(IN)

Drum Inst.

SHFT

( DEF 0000 )

X(IN)

SHFT

CNT

( DEF 0000 )

C(CR)

( DEF 0000 )

C(CR)

( DEF 0000 )

X(IN)

( DEF 0000 )

X(IN)

( DEF 0000 )

X(IN)

NXT

Preset Step

( DEF K0000 )

Time Base

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF 0000 )

C(CR)

( DEF 0000 )

C(CR)

( DEF 0000 )

Y(OUT)

( DEF 0000 )

Y(OUT)

( DEF 0000 )

YOUT)

( DEF 0000 )

C(CR)

( DEF 0000 )

Y(OUT)

( DEF 0000 )

NXT

( DEF 0000 )

Y(OUT)

( DEF 0000 )

NXT

( DEF 0000 )

C(CR)

( DEF 0000 )

NXT

( DEF 0000 )

C(CR)

( DEF 0000 )

NXT

( DEF 0000 )

Y(OUT)

16 ( DEF 0000 )

NXT

( DEF 0000 )

Y(OUT)

1 ( DEF K0000 )

NXT

( DEF 0000 )

C(CR)

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF 0000 )

C(CR)

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF 0000 )

Y(OUT)

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF 0000 )

Y(OUT)

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF 0000 )

C(CR)

( DEF K0000 )

15

( DEF 0000 )

Y(OUT)

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

SHFT

A(H)

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

NXT

( DEF K0000 )

NXT

( DEF K0000 )

NXT

( DEF K0000 )

NXT

( DEF K0000 )

NXT

( DEF K0000 )

NXT

Outputs

Counts/
Step

16

Events

Output
Pattern
0

skip over
unused steps

step 1 pattern = 0000

unused steps

( DEF K0000 )
0

16 ( DEF K0000 )

Last rung

STR

CNT

Y(OUT)

skip over
unused steps
NOTE: You may use the NXT and PREV keys
to skip past entries for unused outputs or steps.
(Go to next column)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Drum Instruction Programming

6--17

Counter Number

430 440 450

Step Preset
Timebase

Discrete Output Assignment

Output Mask Word

Start

Control
Inputs

Jog
Reset

Step Number
Counts per Step
Event per step
Output Pattern

f= Off, F= On

The Masked Event Drum with Discrete Outputs features sixteen steps and sixteen outputs.
Drum outputs are logically ANDed bit-by-bit with an output mask word for each step. The
Gggg field specifies the beginning location of the 16 mask words. Step transitions occur on
timed and/or event basis. The jog input also advances the step on each off-to-on transition.
Time is specified in counts per step, and events are specified as discrete contacts. Unused
steps and events can be left blank (this is the default entry).
Drum Parameters

Field

Data Types

Ranges

Counter Number

aaa

--

0 -- 177

Preset Step

bb

1 -- 16

Timer base

cc

0 -- 99.99 seconds

Counts per step

dddd

0 -- 9999

Event

eeee

X, Y, C, GX, GY, S, T, ST

see page 3--42

Discrete Outputs

Fffff

X, Y, C, GX, GY *

see page 3--42

Output Mask

Gggg

see page 3--42

Whenever the Start input is energized, the drums timer is enabled. As long as the event is
true for the current step, the timer runs during that step. When the step count equals the
counts per step, the drum transitions to the next step. This process stops when the last step is
complete, or when the Reset input is energized. The drum enters the preset step chosen
upon a CPU program-to-run mode transition, and whenever the Reset input is energized.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Drum Instruction
Programming

The Masked Event Drum with Discrete Outputs has all the features of the basic
Event Drum plus final output control for each step. It operates according to the
general principles of drum operation covered in the beginning of this section. Below
is the instruction in chart form as displayed by DirectSOFT.

Masked
Event Drum with
Discrete Outputs
(MDRMD)
X X 

Drum Instruction
Programming

6--18

Drum Instruction Programming

Drum instructions use four counters in the CPU. The ladder program can read the
counter values for the drums status. The ladder program may write a new preset
step number to CTA(n+2) at any time. However, the other counters are for
monitoring purposes only.
Counter Number

Ranges of (n)

Function

Counter Bit Function

CTA(n)

0 -- 374

Counts in step

CTn = Drum Complete

CTA( n+1)

1 -- 375

Timer value

CT(n+1) = (not used)

CTA( n+2)

2 --376

Preset Step

CT(n+2) = (not used)

CTA( n+3)

3 --377

Current Step

CT(n+1) = (not used)

The following ladder program shows the MDRMD instruction in a typical ladder
program, as shown by DirectSOFT. Steps 1 through 11 are used, and all 16 output
points are used. The output mask word is at V2000. The final drum outputs are
shown above the mask word as individual bits. The data bits in V2000 are logically
ANDed with the output pattern of the current step in the drum. If you want all drum
outputs to be off after powerup, just write zeros to V2000 on the first scan. Ladder
logic may update the output mask at any time to enable or disable the drum outputs.
The preset step is step 1. The timebase runs at (K10 x 0.01) = 0.1 second per count.
Therefore, the duration of step 1 is (5 x 0.1) = 0.5 seconds. Note that step 1 is
time-based only (event is left blank). In the last rung, the Drum Complete bit (CT10)
turns on output Y0 upon completion of the last step (step 10). A drum reset also
resets CT10.

NOTE: The ladder program must load constants in V2000 through

V2012 to cover all mask registers for the eleven steps used in this drum.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

6--19

Drum Instruction Programming

NOTE: Drum editing requires Handheld Programmer firmware version 5.5 or later.
skip over unused event

Start

STR

X(IN)

1 ( DEF 0000 )

Jog

STR

X(IN)

( DEF 0000 )

Y(OUT)

Reset

STR

X(IN)

( DEF 0000 )

X(IN)

Drum Inst.

SHFT

( DEF 0000 )

X(IN)

SHFT

( DEF 0000 )

C(CR)

( DEF 0000 )

C(CR)

( DEF 0000 )

X(IN)

( DEF 0000 )

X(IN)

( DEF 0000 )

X(IN)

CNT

Output Mask

( DEF V00000)

Preset Step

( DEF K0000 )

Time Base

( DEF K0000 )
0

Outputs

NXT

C(CR)

( DEF 0000 )

C(CR)

( DEF 0000 )

Y(OUT)

( DEF 0000 )

Y(OUT)

( DEF 0000 )

C(CR)

( DEF 0000 )

YOUT)

( DEF 0000 )

NXT

( DEF 0000 )

Y(OUT)

( DEF 0000 )

NXT

( DEF 0000 )

Y(OUT)

( DEF 0000 )

NXT

( DEF 0000 )

C(CR)

( DEF 0000 )

NXT

( DEF 0000 )

C(CR)

16 ( DEF 0000 )

NXT

( DEF 0000 )

Y(OUT)

1 ( DEF K0000 )

( DEF 0000 )

Y(OUT)

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF 0000 )

C(CR)

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF 0000 )

C(CR)

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF 0000 )

Y(OUT)

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF 0000 )

Y(OUT)

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

SHFT

A(H)

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF 0000 )

Events

skip over
unused steps

( DEF 0000 )

C(CR)

15

( DEF 0000 )

Y(OUT)

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

16 ( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

NXT

STR

SPCL

( DEF K0000 )

NXT

LD

K(CON)

SHFT

( DEF K0000 )

NXT

F(H)

F(H)

F(H)

F(H)

( DEF K0000 )

NXT

( DEF K0000 )

NXT

( DEF K0000 )

NXT

Counts/
Step

16

Output
Pattern

( DEF K0000 )

Last rungs
0

skip over
unused steps
OUT

(Go to next column)

unused steps

STR

CNT

Y(OUT)

NOTE: You may use the NXT and PREV keys

to skip past entries for unused outputs or steps.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Drum Instruction
Programming

The handheld programmer can also enter or edit drum instructions. The diagram
below lists the keystrokes for entering the drum example on the previous page.

Drum Instruction
Programming

6--20

Drum Instruction Programming

The Masked Event Drum with Word Output features outputs organized as bits of a
single word, rather than discrete points. It operates according to the general
principles of drum operation covered in the beginning of this section. Below is the
instruction in chart form as displayed by DirectSOFT.

Masked
Event Drum with
Word Output
(MDRMW)
X X 

Counter Number

430 440 450

Step Preset
Timebase

Word Output Assignment

Output Mask Word

Start

Control
Inputs

Jog
Reset

Step Number
Counts per Step
Event per step
Output Pattern

f= Off, F= On

The Masked Event Drum with Word Output features sixteen steps and sixteen outputs. Drum
outputs are logically ANDed bit-by-bit with an output mask word for each step. The Gggg field
specifies the beginning location of the 16 mask words, creating the final output (Ffff field).
Step transitions occur on timed and/or event basis. The jog input also advances the step on
each off-to-on transition. Time is specified in counts per step, and events are specified as
discrete contacts. Unused steps and events can be left blank (this is the default entry).
Drum Parameters

Field

Data Types

Ranges

Counter Number

aaa

--

0 -- 177

Preset Step

bb

1 -- 16

Timer base

cc

0 -- 99.99 seconds

Counts per step

dddd

0 -- 9999

Event

eeee

X, Y, C, GX, GY, S, T, ST

see page 3--42

Word Output

Fffff

see page 3--42

Output Mask

Gggg

see page 3--42

Whenever the Start input is energized, the drums timer is enabled. As long as the event is
true for the current step, the timer runs during that step. When the step count equals the
counts per step, the drum transitions to the next step. This process stops when the last step is
complete, or when the Reset input is energized. The drum enters the preset step chosen
upon a CPU program-to-run mode transition, and whenever the Reset input is energized.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Drum Instruction Programming

6--21

Counter Number

Ranges of (n)

Function

Counter Bit Function

CTA(n)

0 -- 374

Counts in step

CTn = Drum Complete

CTA( n+1)

1 -- 375

Timer value

CT(n+1) = (not used)

CTA( n+2)

2 --376

Preset Step

CT(n+2) = (not used)

CTA( n+3)

3 --377

Current Step

CT(n+1) = (not used)

The following ladder program shows the MDRMD instruction in a typical ladder
program, as shown by DirectSOFT. Steps 1 through 11 are used, and all sixteen
output points are used. The output mask word is at V2000. The final drum outputs
are shown above the mask word as a word at V2001. The data bits in V2000 are
logically ANDed with the output pattern of the current step in the drum, generating
the contents of V2001. If you want all drum outputs to be off after powerup, write
zeros to V2000 on the first scan. Ladder logic may update the output mask at any
time to enable or disable the drum outputs. The preset step is step 1. The timebase
runs at (K50 X 0.01) = 0.5 seconds per count. Therefore, the duration of step 1 is (5 x
0.5) = 2.5 seconds. Note that step 1 is time-based only (event is left blank). In the last
rung, the Drum Complete bit (CT14) turns on output Y0 upon completion of the last
step (step 10). A drum reset also resets CT14.

NOTE: The ladder program must load constants in V2000 through

V2012 to cover all mask registers for the eleven steps used in this drum.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Drum Instruction
Programming

Drum instructions use four counters in the CPU. The ladder program can read the
counter values for the drums status. The ladder program may write a new preset
step number to CTA(n+2) at any time. However, the other counters are for
monitoring purposes only.

Drum Instruction
Programming

6--22

Drum Instruction Programming

The handheld programmer can also enter or edit drum instructions. The diagram
below lists the keystrokes for entering the drum example on the previous page.
NOTE: Drum editing requires Handheld Programmer firmware version 5.5 or later.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes contd

skip over unused event

Start

STR

X(IN)

1 ( DEF 0000 )

Jog

STR

X(IN)

( DEF 0000 )

Y(OUT)

Reset

STR

X(IN)

( DEF 0000 )

X(IN)

Drum Inst.

SHFT

( DEF 0000 )

X(IN)

SHFT

( DEF 0000 )

C(CR)

( DEF 0000 )

C(CR)

( DEF 0000 )

X(IN)

( DEF 0000 )

X(IN)

( DEF 0000 )

X(IN)

( DEF 0000 )

Y(OUT)

( DEF 0000 )

C(CR)

( DEF 0000 )

NXT

( DEF 0000 )

NXT

( DEF 0000 )

NXT

NXT

CNT

Output Mask

( DEF V00000)

Preset Step

( DEF K0000 )

Time Base

( DEF K0000 )

Output Word

( DEF V00000)

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF 0000 )

NXT

( DEF K0000 )

16 ( DEF 0000 )

NXT

( DEF K0000 )

1 ( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

NXT

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

NXT

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

NXT

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

NXT

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

NXT

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

NXT

( DEF K0000 )

SHFT

A(H)

( DEF K0000 )

( DEF K0000 )

Counts/
Step

16

Events
0

skip over
unused steps

(Go to next column)

Output
Pattern

skip over
unused steps

( DEF K0000 )
( DEF K0000 )

unused steps

( DEF K0000 )
( DEF K0000 )
16 ( DEF K0000 )

Last rungs

NOTE: You may use the NXT and PREV keys

to skip past entries for unused outputs or steps.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

OUT

STR

CNT

Y(OUT)

STR

SPCL

LD

K(CON)

SHFT

F(H)

F(H)

F(H)

F(H)

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

17

In This Chapter. . . .
Introduction to Stage Programming
Learning to Draw State Transition Diagrams
Using the Stage Jump Instruction for State Transitions
Stage Program Example: Toggle On/Off Lamp Controller
Four Steps to Writing a Stage Program
Stage Program Example: a Garage Door Opener
Stage Program Design Considerations
Parallel Processing Concepts
Managing Large Programs
RLL PLUS Instructions
Questions and Answers About Stage Programming

7--2

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

Introduction to Stage Programming

  

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

430 440 450

Overcoming
Stage Fright

Stage Programming (available in all DL405 CPUs) provides a way to organize and
program complex applications with relative ease, when compared to purely relay
ladder logic (RLL) solutions. Stage programming does not replace or negate the use
of traditional boolean ladder programming. This is why Stage Programming is also
called RLL PLUS. You wont have to discard any training or experience you already
have. Stage programming simply allows you to divide and organize a RLL program
into groups of ladder instructions called stages. This allows quicker and more
intuitive ladder program development than traditional RLL alone provides.

Many PLC programmers in the industry

have become comfortable using RLL for
every PLC program they write... but often
remain skeptical or even fearful of learning
new techniques such as stage
programming. While RLL is great at
solving boolean logic relationships, it has
disadvantages as well:
S Large programs can become almost
unmanageable, because of a lack of
structure.
S In RLL, latches must be tediously
created from self-latching relays.
S When a process gets stuck, it is
difficult to find the rung where the
error occurred.
S Programs become difficult to modify
later, because they do not intuitively
resemble the application problem
they are solving.

X0

X4

C0
RST
C1

Y0
SET

STAGE!
X3

Y2
OUT

Its easy to see that these inefficiencies consume a lot of additional time, and time is
money. Stage programming overcomes these obstacles! We believe a few
moments of studying the stage concept is one of the greatest investments in
programming speed and efficiency a PLC programmer can make!
So, we encourage you to study stage programming and add it to your toolbox of
programming techniques. This chapter is designed as a self-paced tutorial on stage
programming. For best results:
S Start at the beginning and do not skip over any sections.
S Study each stage programing concept by working through each
example. The examples build progressively on each other.
S Read the Stage Questions and Answers at the end of the chapter for a
quick review.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

7--3

Learning to Draw State Transition Diagrams

Introduction to
Process States

Inputs

Ladder
Program

Outputs

PLC Scan
1) Read

Execute

Write

2) Read

Execute

Write

3) Read

(etc....)

Most manufacturing processes consist of a series of activities or conditions , each

lasting for several seconds, minutes, or even hours. We might call these process
states, which are either active or inactive at any particular time. A challenge for RLL
programs is that a particular input event may last for just a brief instant. We typically
create latching relays in RLL to preserve the input event in order to maintain a
process state for the required duration.
We can organize and divide ladder logic into sections called stages, representing
process states. But before we describe stages in detail, we will reveal the secret to
understanding stage programming: state transition diagrams.
The Need for State Sometimes we need to forget about the scan nature of PLCs, and focus our thinking
toward the states of the process we need to identify. Clear thinking and concise
Diagrams
analysis of an application gives us the best chance at writing efficient, bug-free
programs. State diagrams are just a tool to help us draw a picture of our process!
Youll discover that if we can get the picture right, our program will also be right!
Inputs
Outputs
A 2--State Process Consider the simple process shown to the
right, which controls an industrial motor.
On
We will use a green momentary SPST
X0
Motor
pushbutton to turn the motor on, and a red
Ladder Y0
one to turn it off. The machine operator will
Program
Off
X1
press the appropriate pushbutton for just a
second or so. The two states of our
process are ON and OFF.
Transition condition
The next step is to draw a state transition
State
diagram, as shown to the right. It shows
X0
the two states OFF and ON, with two
transition lines in-between. When the
OFF
ON
event X0 is true, we transition from OFF to
X1
ON. When X1 is true, we transition from
Output equation: Y0 = ON
ON to OFF.

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

Those familiar with ladder program

execution know that the CPU must scan
the ladder program repeatedly, over and
over. Its three basic steps are:
1. Read the inputs
2. Execute the ladder program
3. Write the outputs
The benefit is that a change at the inputs
can affect the outputs in just a few
milliseconds.

If youre following along, you are very close to grasping the concept and the
problem-solving power of state transition diagrams. The output of our controller is
Y0, which is true any time we are in the ON state. In a boolean sense, Y0=ON state.
Next, we will implement the state diagram first as RLL, then as a stage program. This
will help you see the relationship between the two methods in problem solving.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

7--4

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

The state transition diagram to the right is
a picture of the solution we need to create.
The beauty of it is this: it expresses the
problem
independently
of
the
programming language we may use to
realize it. In other words, by drawing the
diagram we have already solved the
control problem!

X0

OFF

ON
X1

Output equation: Y0 = ON

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

First, well translate the state diagram to traditional RLL. Then well show how easy it
is to translate the diagram into a stage programming solution.
RLL Equivalent

Stage Equivalent

The RLL solution is shown to the right.

Output Y0 has a dual purpose. When the
On momentary pushbutton, X0, is
pressed, output coil Y0 turns on and the
Y0 contact on the second row latches itself
on. So, X0 sets the latch Y0 on, and it
remains on after the X0 contact opens.
The output Y0 has power flow on a field
device.
When the Off pushbutton (X1) is pressed,
it opens the normally-closed X1 contact,
which resets the latch, and output Y0
turns off.
The stage program solution is shown to
the right. The two inline stage boxes S0
and S1 correspond to the two states OFF
and ON. The ladder rung(s) below each
stage box belong to each respective
stage. This means that the PLC only has
to scan those rungs when the
corresponding stage is active!
For now, lets assume we begin in the OFF
State, so stage S0 is active. When the On
pushbutton (X0) is pressed, a stage
transition occurs. The JMP S1 instruction
executes, which simply turns off the Stage
bit S0 and turns on Stage bit S1. So on the
next PLC scan, the CPU will not execute
Stage S0, but will execute stage S1!
In the On State (Stage S1), we want the
motor to always be on. The special relay
contact SP1 is defined as always on, so Y0
turns the motor on.

Set

Reset

X0

X1

Latch
Y0
OUT

Latch
Y0

SG
S0

OFF State
Transition
S1

X0

JMP
SG
S1

ON State
SP1 Always on

Output
Y0
OUT

Transition
X1

S0

JMP

When the Off pushbutton (X1) is pressed, a transition back to the Off State occurs.
The JMP S0 instruction executes, which simply turns off the Stage bit S1 and turns
on Stage bit S0. On the next PLC scan, the CPU will not execute Stage S1, so the
motor output Y0 will turn off. The Off state (Stage 0) will be ready for the next cycle.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

Lets Compare

7--5

Right now, you may be thinking I dont see the big advantage to Stage
Programming... in fact, the stage program is longer than the plain RLL program.
Well, now is the time to exercise a bit of faith. As control problems grow in complexity,
stage programming quickly out-performs RLL in simplicity, program size, etc.
For example, consider the diagram below.
Notice how easy it is to correlate the OFF and
SG
S0
ON states of the state transition diagram
OFF State
below to the stage program at the right. Now,
S1
X0
we challenge anyone to easily identify the
JMP
same states in the RLL program on the
previous page!
SG
SP1

X0

OFF

ON State

S0
JMP

X1

ON

Y0
OUT

X1

Initial Stages

At powerup and Program-to-Run Mode

transitions, the PLC always begins with all
normal stages (SG) off. So, the stage
programs shown so far have actually had no
way to get started (because rungs are not
scanned unless their stage is active).
Assume that we want to always begin in the Off
state (motor off), which is how the RLL program
works. The Initial Stage (ISG) is defined to be
active at powerup. In the modified program to
the right, we have changed stage S0 to the ISG
type. This ensures the PLC will scan contact X0
after powerup, because Stage S0 is active.
After powerup, an Initial Stage (ISG) works
just like any other stage!
We can change both programs so that the
motor is ON at powerup. In the RLL below, we
must add a first scan relay SP0, latching C0 on.
In the stage example to the right, we simply
make Stage S1 an initial stage (ISG) instead of
S0.

Powerup in OFF State

ISG
S0

Initial Stage
S1

X0

JMP
SG
S1
SP1

Y0
OUT
S0

X1

JMP

Powerup in ON State
SG
S0
S1

X0

JMP

Powerup in ON State
X0

X1

C0
SP0

C0
OUT
Y0
OUT

ISG
S1
SP1

X1

First Scan

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

S1

Initial Stage

Y0
OUT
S0
JMP

NOTE: If the ISG is within the retentive range for stages, the ISG will remain in the
state it was in before power down and will NOT turn itself on during the first scan.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

7--6

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

We can mark our desired powerup state
as shown to the right, which helps us
remember to use the appropriate Initial
Stages when creating a stage program. It
is permissible to have as many initial
stages as the process requires.

Powerup

X0

OFF

ON
X1

What Stage Bits Do You may recall that a stage is just a section of ladder program which is either active or
inactive at a given moment. All stage bits (S0 -- Sxxx) reside in the PLCs image
register as individual status bits. Each stage bit is either a boolean 0 or 1 at any time.
Program execution always reads ladder rungs from top to bottom, and from left to
right. The drawing below shows the effect of stage bit status. The ladder rungs below
the stage instruction continuing until the next stage instruction or the end of program
belong to stage 0. Its equivalent operation is shown on the right. When S0 is true, the
two rungs have power flow.
S If Stage bit S0 = 0, its ladder rungs are not scanned (executed).
S If Stage bit S0 = 1, its ladder rungs are scanned (executed).
Actual Program Appearance

SG
S0

Functionally Equivalent Ladder

S0

(includes all rungs in stage)

Stage Instruction
Characteristics

The inline stage boxes on the left power

rail divide the ladder program rungs into
stages. Some stage rules are:
S Execution -- Only logic in active
stages are executed on any scan.
S Transitions -- Stage transition
instructions take effect on the next
occurrence of the stages involved.
S Octal numbering -- Stages are
numbered in octal, like I/O points,
etc. So S8 is not valid.
S Total Stages -- The maximum
number of stages is CPU-dependent.
S No duplicates -- Each stage number
is unique and can be used just once.
S Any order -- You can skip numbers
and sequence the stage numbers in
any order.
S Last Stage -- the last stage in the
ladder program includes all rungs
from its stage box until the end coil.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

SG
S0

SG
S1

SG
S2

END

7--7

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

Using the Stage Jump Instruction for State Transitions

Stage Jump, Set,
and Reset
Instructions

The Stage JMP instruction we have used deactivates the stage in which the
instruction occurs, while activating the stage in the JMP instruction. Refer to the
state transition shown below. When contact X0 energizes, the state transition from
S0 to S1 occurs. The two stage examples shown below are equivalent. So, the
Stage Jump instruction is equal to a Stage Reset of the current stage, plus a Stage
Set instruction for the stage to which we want to transition.
X0

S1

SG
S0

SG
S0

Equivalent

S1

X0

S0

X0

JMP

RST
S1

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

S0

SET

Please Read Carefully -- The jump instruction is easily misunderstood. The jump
does not occur immediately like a GOTO or GOSUB program control instruction
when executed. Heres how it works:
S The jump instruction resets the stage bit of the stage in which it occurs.
All rungs in the stage still finish executing during the current scan, even
if there are other rungs in the stage below the jump instruction!
S The reset will be in effect on the following scan, so the stage that
executed the jump instruction previously will be inactive and bypassed.
S The stage bit of the stage named in the Jump instruction will be set
immediately, so the stage will be executed on its next occurrence. In the
left program shown below, stage S1 executes during the same scan as
the JMP S1 occurs in S0. In the example on the right, Stage S1
executes on the next scan after the JMP S1 executes, because stage
S1 is located above stage S0.
SG
S0

Executes on next
scan after Jmp

SG
S1
X0

S1

S1

JMP

Executes on same
scan as Jmp

SG
S1
S1

Y0
OUT

Y0
OUT

SG
S0
X0

S1
JMP

NOTE: Assume we start with Stage 0 active and Stage 1 inactive for both examples.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

7--8

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

Stage Program Example: Toggle On/Off Lamp Controller

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

A 4--State Process

In the process shown to the right, we use

an ordinary momentary pushbutton to
control a light bulb. The ladder program
will latch the switch input, so that we will
push and release to turn on the light, push
and release again to turn it off (sometimes
called toggle function). Sure, we could just
buy a mechanical switch with the alternate
on/off action built in... However, this
example is educational and also fun!
Next we draw the state transition diagram.
A typical first approach is to use X0 for
both transitions (like the example shown
to the right). However, this is incorrect
(please keep reading).

Inputs
Toggle

X0

Outputs
Ladder
Program

Powerup

Y0

X0

OFF

ON
X0

Output equation: Y0 = ON

Note that this example differs from the motor example, because now we have just
one pushbutton. When we press the pushbutton, both transition conditions are met.
We would just transition around the state diagram at top speed. If implemented in
Stage, this solution would flash the light on or off each scan (obviously undesirable)!
The solution is to make the push and the release of the pushbutton separate events.
Refer to the new state transition diagram below. At powerup we enter the OFF state.
When switch X0 is pressed, we enter the Press-ON state. When it is released, we
enter the ON state. Note that X0 with the bar above it denotes X0 NOT.
Powerup

X0

Push--ON

X0

OFF

ISG
S0

Push--OFF

X0

JMP
SG
S1

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Push--On State
S2

X0

Output equation: Y0 = ON

When in the ON state, another push and

release cycle similarly takes us back to the
OFF state. Now we have two unique states
(OFF and ON) used when the pushbutton is
released, which is what was required to solve
the control problem.
The equivalent stage program is shown to the
right. The desired powerup state is OFF, so
we make S0 an initial stage (ISG). In the ON
state, we add special relay contact SP1,
which is always on.
Note that even as our programs grow more
complex, it is still easy to correlate the state
transition diagram with the stage program!

S1

X0

ON

X0

OFF State

JMP
SG
S2

ON State
SP1

Output
Y0
OUT
S3

X0

JMP
SG
S3

Push--Off State
X0

S0
JMP

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

7--9

Four Steps to Writing a Stage Program

By now, youve probably noticed that we follow the same steps to solve each
example problem. The steps will probably come to you automatically if you work
through all the examples in this chapter. Its helpful to have a checklist to guide us
through the problem solving. The following steps summarize the stage program
design procedure:

1. Write a Word Description of the application.

2. Draw the Block Diagram.

Inputs represent all the information the process needs for decisions, and outputs
connect to all devices controlled by the process.
S Make lists of inputs and outputs for the process.
S Assign I/O point numbers (X and Y) to physical inputs and outputs.

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

Describe all functions of the process in your own words. Start by listing what
happens first, then next, etc. If you find there are too many things happening at once,
try dividing the problem into more than one process. Remember, you can still have
the processes communicate with each other to coordinate their overall activity.

3. Draw the State Transition Diagram.

The state transition diagram describes the central function of the block diagram,
reading inputs and generating outputs.
S Identify and name the states of the process.
S Identify the event(s) required for each transition between states.
S Ensure the process has a way to re-start itself, or is cyclical.
S Choose the powerup state for your process.
S Write the output equations.

4. Write the Stage Program.

Translate the state transition diagram into a stage program.
S Make each state a stage. Remember to number stages in octal. Up to
384 total stages are available in the DL430 CPU, numbered 0 to 577
octal. Up to 1024 total stages are available in the DL440/DL450 CPUs,
numbered 0 to 1777 in octal.
S Put transition logic inside the stage which originates each transition (the
stage each arrow points away from).
S Use an initial stage (ISG) for any states that must be active at powerup.
S Place the outputs or actions in the appropriate stages.
Youll notice that Steps 1 through 3 just prepare us to write the stage program in Step
4. However, the program virtually writes itself because of the preparation
beforehand. Soon youll be able to start with a word description of an application and
create a stage program in one easy session!

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

7--10

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

Stage Program Example: A Garage Door Opener

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

Garage Door
Opener Example

In this next stage programming example

well create a garage door opener
controller. Hopefully most readers are
familiar with this application, and we can
have fun besides!
The first step we must take is to describe
how the door opener works. We will start
by achieving the basic operation, waiting
to add extra features later (stage
programs are very easy to modify).
Our garage door controller has a motor
which raises or lowers the door on
command. The garage owner pushes and
releases a momentary pushbutton once to
raise the door. After the door is up, another
push-release cycle will lower the door.
In order to identify the inputs and outputs
of the system, its sometimes helpful to
sketch its main components, as shown in
the door side view to the right. The door
has an up limit and a down limit switch.
Each limit switch closes only when the
door has reached the end of travel in the
corresponding direction. In the middle of
travel, neither limit switch is closed.
The motor has two command inputs: raise
and lower. When neither input is active,
the motor is stopped.
The door command is just a simple
pushbutton. Whether wall-mounted as
shown, or a radio-remote control, all door
control commands logically OR together
as one pair of switch contacts.

Draw the Block

Diagram

Up limit switch

Door
Command
Down limit switch

The block diagram of the controller is Inputs

shown to the right. Input X0 is from the
pushbutton door control. Input X1 Toggle X0
energizes when the door reaches the full
up position. Input X2 energizes when the
Up limit
door reaches the full down position. When
X1
the door is positioned between fully up or
down, both limit switches are open.
Down limit
The controller has two outputs to drive the
X2
motor. Y1 is the up (raise the door)
command, and Y2 is the down (lower the
door) command.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Raise
Lower

Motor

Outputs

To motor:
Ladder
Program Y1

Raise

Y2

Lower

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

Draw the State
Diagram

Now we are ready to draw the state transition diagram. Like the previous light bulb
controller example, this application also has just one switch for the command input.
Refer to the figure below.
S When the door is down (DOWN state), nothing happens until X0
energizes. Its push and release brings us to the RAISE state, where
output Y1 turns on and causes the motor to raise the door.
S We transition to the UP state when the up limit switch (X1) energizes,
and turns off the motor.
S Then nothing happens until another X0 press-release cycle occurs. That
takes us to the LOWER state, turning on output Y2 to command the
motor to lower the door. We transition back to the DOWN state when the
down limit switch (X2) energizes.
X0

Push--UP

X0

RAISE

X1

ISG
S0

DOWN State
S1
JMP

X0

DOWN
X2

UP
LOWER
X0

Push-DOWN

SG
S1

X0

Push--UP State
S2
JMP

X0

SG
S2

Output equations: Y1 = RAISE Y2 = LOWER

The equivalent stage program is shown to the right.

For now, we will assume the door is down at
powerup, so the desired powerup state is DOWN.
We make S0 an initial stage (ISG). Stage S0
remains active until the door control pushbutton
activates. Then we transition (JMP) to Push-UP
stage, S1.
A push-release cycle of the pushbutton takes us
through stage S1 to the RAISE stage, S2. We use
the always-on contact SP1 to energize the motors
raise command, Y1. When the door reaches the
fully-raised position, the up limit switch X1 activates.
This takes us to the UP Stage S3, where we wait
until another door control command occurs.
In the UP Stage S3, a push-release cycle of the
pushbutton will take us to the LOWER Stage S5,
where we activate Y2 to command the motor to
lower the door. This continues until the door reaches
the down limit switch, X2. When X2 closes, we
transition from Stage S5 to the DOWN stage S0,
where we began.

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

Powerup

7--11

RAISE State
SP1

Y1
OUT

X1

S3
JMP

SG
S3

UP State
X0

SG
S4

S4
JMP

Push--DOWN State
X0

SG
S5

S5
JMP

LOWER State
SP1

Y2
OUT

X2

S0
JMP

NOTE: The initial stage (ISG) is automatically active at powerup, afterwards, is acts
like others.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

7--12

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

Add Safety
Light Feature

Next we will add a safety light feature to

the door opener system. Its best to get the
main function working first as we have
done, then adding the secondary features.
The safety light is standard on many
commercially-available garage door
openers. It is shown to the right, mounted
on the motor housing. The light turns on
upon any door activity, remaining on for
approximately 3 minutes afterwards.
This part of the exercise will demonstrate
the use of parallel states in our state
diagram. Instead of using the JMP
instruction, well use the set and reset
commands.

Safety light

To control the light bulb, we add an output Inputs

Modify the
Block Diagram and to our controller block diagram, shown to
Toggle
the right, Y3 is the light control output.
State Diagram
X0
In the diagram below, we add an additional
state called LIGHT. Whenever the
garage owner presses the door control Up limit
X1
switch and releases, the RAISE or
LOWER state is active and the LIGHT
state is simultaneously active. The line to
Down limit
the Light state is dashed, because it is not
X2
the primary path.

Outputs
Y1

Ladder
Program Y2

Y3

Raise

Lower

Light

We can think of the Light state as a parallel process to the raise and lower state. The
paths to the Light state are not a transition (Stage JMP), but a State Set command. In
the logic of the Light stage, we will place a three-minute timer. When it expires, timer
bit T0 turns on and resets the Light stage. The path out of the Light stage goes
nowhere, indicating the Light stage just becomes inactive, and the light goes out!
Output equations:
X0
X0

RAISE

Push--UP

X1

Y1 = RAISE
Y2 = LOWER
Y3 = LIGHT

X0

DOWN

LIGHT

UP

T0

X0
X2

LOWER

Push--DOWN

X0

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

X0

7--13

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

Using a Timer
Inside a Stage

K=1800 counts
The timer has power flow whenever stage
S6 is active. The corresponding timer bit
T0 is set when the timer expires. So three
minutes later, T0=1 and the instruction
Reset S6 causes the stage to be inactive.
While Stage S6 is active and the light is on,
stage transitions in the primary path
continue normally and independently of
Stage 6. That is, the door can go up, down,
or whatever, but the light will be on for
precisely 3 minutes.

ISG
S0

DOWN State
S1

X0

JMP
SG
S1

Push--UP State
S2

X0

JMP
S6
SET

SG
S2

RAISE State
SP1

Y1
OUT
S3

X1

JMP
SG
S3

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

The finished modified program is shown to

the right. The shaded areas indicate the
program additions.
In the Push-UP stage S1, we add the Set
Stage Bit S6 instruction. When contact X0
opens, we transition from S1 and go to two
new active states: S2 and S6. In the
Push-DOWN state S4, we make the same
additions. So, any time someone presses
the door control pushbutton, the light turns
on.
Most new stage programmers would be
concerned about where to place the Light
Stage in the ladder, and how to number it.
The good news is that it doesnt matter!
S Just choose an unused Stage
number, and use it for the new stage
and as the reference from other
stages.
S Placement in the program is not
critical, so we place it at the end.
You might think that each stage has to be
directly under the stage that transitions to
it. While it is good practice, it is not
required (thats good, because our two
locations for the Set S6 instruction make
that impossible). Stage numbers and how
they are used determines the transition
paths.
In stage S6, we turn on the safety light by
energizing Y3. Special relay contact SP1
is always on. Timer T0 times at 0.1 second
per count. To achieve 3 minutes time
period, we calculate:
3 min. x 60 sec/min
K=
0.1 sec/count

UP State
S4

X0

JMP
SG
S4

Push--DOWN State
S5

X0

JMP
S6
SET

SG
S5

LOWER State
SP1

Y2
OUT

X2

S0
JMP

SG
S6

LIGHT State
SP1

Y3
OUT
TMR T0
K1800

T0

S6
RST

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

7--14

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

Add Emergency
Stop Feature

Some garage door openers today will

detect an object under the door. This halts
further lowering of the door. Usually
implemented
with
a
photocell
(electric-eye), a door in the process of
being lowered will halt and begin raising.
We will define our safety feature to work in
this way, adding the input from the
photocell to the block diagram as shown to
the right. X3 will be on if an object is in the
path of the door.
Next, we make a simple addition to the
state transition diagram, shown in shaded
areas in the figure below. Note the new
transition path at the top of the LOWER
state. If we are lowering the door and
detect an obstruction (X3), we then jump
to the Push-UP State. We do this instead
of jumping directly to the RAISE state, to
give the Lower output Y2 one scan to turn
off, before the Raise output Y1 energizes.

Inputs
Toggle

Outputs
X0

Y1

X1

Ladder Y2
Program

Down limit
X2

Y3

Up limit

Raise
Lower
Light

Obstruction
X3

X0
X0

RAISE

Push--UP

X1

X0

DOWN

X2 and X3

X3

LIGHT

UP

T0

X0

LOWER

Push--DOWN

X0

X0

Exclusive
Transitions

It is theoretically possible that the down limit (X2) and the obstruction input (X3)
could energize at the same moment. In that case, we would jump to the Push-UP
and DOWN states simultaneously, which does not make sense.
Instead, we give priority to the obstruction
by changing the transition condition to the
SG
LOWER State
DOWN state to [X2 AND NOT X3]. This
S5
ensures the obstruction event has the
SP1
Y2
priority. The modifications we must make
OUT
to the LOWER Stage (S5) logic are shown
to the right. The first rung remains
X2
X3 to Push-UP S0
unchanged. The second and third rungs
JMP
implement the transitions we need. Note
S2
X3
to DOWN
the opposite relay contact usage for X3,
which ensures the stage will execute only
JMP
one of the JMP instructions.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

7--15

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

Stage Program Design Considerations

Stage Program
Organization

Main Process
XXX

= ISG

Idle

Powerup Initialization
Powerup

Fill

Agitate

Rinse

E-Stop and Alarm Monitoring

Spin

Operator Interface

Monitor

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

The examples so far in this chapter used one self-contained state diagram to
represent the main process. However, we can have multiple processes
implemented in stages, all in the same ladder program. New stage programmers
sometimes try to turn a stage on and off each scan, based on the false assumption
that only one stage can be on at a time. For ladder rungs that you want to execute
each scan, just put them in a stage that is always on.
The following figure shows a typical application. During operation, the primary
manufacturing activity Main Process, Powerup Initialization, E-Stop and Alarm
Monitoring, and Operator Interface are all running. At powerup, four initial stages
shown begin operation.

Recipe

Control

Status

In a typical application, the separate stage sequences above operate as follows:

S Powerup Initialization -- This stage contains ladder rung tasks done
just once at powerup. Its last rung resets the stage, so this stage is only
active for one scan (or only as many scans that are required).
S Main Process -- this stage sequence controls the heart of the process
or machine. One pass through the sequence represents one part cycle
of the machine, or one batch in the process.
S E-Stop and Alarm Monitoring -- This stage is always active because it
is watching for errors that could indicate an alarm condition or require an
emergency stop. It is common for this stage to reset stages in the main
process or elsewhere, in order to initialize them after an error condition.
S Operator Interface -- this is another task that must always be active
and ready to respond to an operator. It allows an operator interface to
change modes, etc. independently of the current main process step.
Although we have separate processes,
there can be coordination among them.
For example, in an error condition, the
Status Stage may want to automatically
switch the operator interface to the status
mode to show error information as shown
to the right. The monitor stage could set
the stage bit for Status and Reset the
stages Control and Recipe.

Operator Interface
Recipe

Control

Monitor

Set

Status

E-Stop and
Alarm Monitoring

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

7--16

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

We can think of states or stages as simply dividing up our ladder program as

How Instructions
Work Inside Stages depicted in the figure below. Each stage contains only the ladder rungs which are
needed for the corresponding state of the process. The logic for transitioning out of a
stage is contained within that stage. Its easy to choose which ladder rungs are active
at powerup by using an initial stage type (ISG).

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

Stage 0

Stage 1

Stage 2

Most all instructions work just like they do in standard RLL. You can think of a stage
just like a miniature RLL program which is either active or inactive.
Output Coils -- As expected, output coils in active stages will turn on or off outputs
according to power flow into the coil. However, note the following:
S Outputs work as usual, provided each output reference (such as Y3) is
used in only one stage.
S Output coils automatically turn off when leaving a stage. However, Set
and Reset instructions are not undone when leaving a stage.
S An output can be referenced from more than one stage, as long as only
one of the stages is active at a time.
S If an output coil is controlled by more than one stage simultaneously, the
active stage nearest the bottom of the program determines the final
output status during each scan. So, use the OROUT instruction instead
when you want multiple stages to have a logical OR control of an output.
One-Shot or PD coils -- Use care if you must use a Positive Differential coil in a
stage. Remember that the input to the coil must make a 0--1 transition. If the coil is
already energized on the first scan when the stage becomes active, the PD coil will
not work. This is because the 0--1 transition did not occur.
PD coil alternative: If there is a task which you want to do only once (on 1 scan), it can
be placed in a stage which transitions to the next stage on the same scan.
Counter -- In using a counter inside a stage, the stage must be active for one scan
before the input to the counter makes a 0--1 transition. Otherwise, there is no real
transition and the counter will not count. The ordinary Counter instruction does have
a restriction inside stages: it may not be reset from other stages using the RST
instruction for the counter bit. However, the special Stage Counter provides a
solution (see next paragraph).
Stage Counter -- The Stage Counter has the benefit that its count may be globally
reset from other stages by using the RST instruction. It has a count input, but no reset
input. This is the only difference from a standard counter instruction.
Drum -- Realize that the drum sequencer is its own process, and is a different
programming method than stage programming. If you need to use a drum and
stages, be sure to place the drum instruction in an ISG stage that is always active.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

7--17

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

Using a Stage as a You may recall the light bulb on-off
controller example from earlier in this
Supervisory
chapter. For the purpose of illustration, Toggle X0
Process
suppose we want to monitor the
productivity of the lamp process, by
counting the number of on-off cycles
which occurs. This application will require
the addition of a simple counter, but the
key decision is in where to put the counter.

Ladder
Program

Y0

Powerup
Supervisor

X0

OFF
State

S1
JMP

Powerup

X0

Push--ON

X0

Main Process

OFF
X0

Push--OFF

SG
S1
X0

ON
X0

New stage programming students will typically

try to place the counter inside one of the the
stages of the process they are trying to
monitor. The problem with this approach is that
the stage is active only part of the time. In order
for the counter to count, the count input must
transition from off to on at least one scan after
its stage activates. Ensuring this requires extra
logic that can be tricky.
In this case, we only need to add another
supervisory stage as shown above, to watch
the main process. The counter inside the
supervisor stage uses the stage bit S1 of the
main process as its count input. Stage bits
used as a contact let us monitor a process!

Push--On
State

S2
JMP

SG
S2

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

ISG
S0

Supervisor Process

ON State
SP1

Y0
OUT
S3

X0

JMP
SG
S3
X0

Push--Off
State

S0
JMP

ISG
S4
S1

Supervisor
State

SGCNT CT0
K5000

NOTE: Both the Supervisor stage and the OFF stage are initial stages. The
supervisor stage remains active indefinitely.
Stage Counter

The counter in the above example is a special Stage Counter. Note that it does not
have a reset input. The count is reset by executing a Reset instruction, naming the
counter bit (CT0 in this case). The Stage Counter has the benefit that its count may
be globally reset from other stages. The standard Counter instruction does not have
this global reset capability. You may still use a regular Counter instruction inside a
stage... however, the reset input to the counter is the only way to reset it.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

7--18

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

Unconditional
Outputs

As in most example programs in this chapter

and Stage 0 to the right, your application may
require a particular output to be ON
unconditionally when a particular stage is
active. Until now, the examples always use
the SP1 special relay contact (always on) in
series with the output coils.
Its possible to omit the contact, as long as you
place any unconditional outputs first (at the
top) of a stage section of ladder. The first rung
of Stage 1 does this.
WARNING: Unconditional outputs placed
elsewhere in a stage do not necessarily
remain on when the stage is active. In
Stage 2 to the right, Y0 is shown as an
unconditional output, but its power flow
comes from the rung above. So, Y0 status
will be the same as Y1 (is not correct).

Power Flow
Transition
Technique

SG
S0
SP1

Y0
OUT

Unconditional
Output

SG
S1

Y0
OUT

X0

Y1
OUT

X0

Y1
OUT

SG
S2

Y0
OUT

Our discussion of state transitions has shown how the Stage JMP instruction makes
the current stage inactive and the next stage (named in the JMP) active. As an
alternative way to enter this in DirectSOFT, you may use the power flow method for
stage transitions. The main requirement is that the current stage be located directly
above the next (jump-to) stage in the ladder program. This arrangement is shown in
the diagram below, by stages S0 and S1, respectively.
S0

X0

SG
S0

S1

SG
S0
X0

S1

All other rungs in stage...

JMP
SG
S1

X0

Equivalent

Power flow
transition
SG
S1

Recall that the Stage JMP instruction may occur anywhere in the current stage, and
the result is the same. However, power flow transitions (shown above) must occur as
the last rung in a stage. All other rungs in the stage will precede it. The power flow
transition method is also achievable on the handheld programmer, by simply
following the transition condition with the Stage instruction for the next stage.
The power flow transition method does eliminate one Stage JMP instruction, its only
advantage. However, it is not as easy to make program changes as using the Stage
JMP. Therefore, we advise using Stage JMP transitions for most programmers.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

7--19

Parallel Processing Concepts

Parallel Processes Previously in this chapter we discussed how a state may transition to either one state
or another, called an exclusive transition. In other cases, we may need to branch
simultaneously to two or more parallel processes, as shown below. It is acceptable
to use all JMP instructions as shown, or we could use one JMP and a Set Stage bit
instruction(s) (at least one must be a JMP, in order to leave S1). Remember that all
instructions in a stage execute, even when it transitions (the JMP is not a GOTO).
Process A

S1

SG
S1

S3

JMP

S4

S4

S5

JMP

Note that if we want Stages S2 and S4 to energize exactly on the same scan, both
stages must be located below or above Stage S1 in the ladder program (see the
explanation at the bottom of page 10--7). Overall, parallel branching is easy!
Now we consider the opposite case of parallel branching, which is converging
processes. This simply means we stop doing multiple things and continue doing one
thing at a time. In the figure below, processes A and B converge when stages S2 and
S4 transition to S5 at some point in time. So, S2 and S4 are Convergence Stages.

Converging
Processes

Process A

S1

S2

= Convergence Stage

S5
Process B

Convergence
Stages
(CV)
X  
430 440 450

S2

X0

X0

Process B

Push--On State

S3

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

S0

S2

S6

S4

While the converging principle is simple enough, it brings a new complication. As

parallel processing completes, the multiple processes almost never finish at the
same time. In other words, how can we know whether Stage S2 or S4 will finish last?
This is an important point, because we have to decide how to transition to Stage S5.
The solution is to coordinate the transition
condition out of convergence stages. We
accomplish this with a stage type
designed
for
this
purpose:
the
Convergence Stage (type CV). In the
example to the right, convergence stages
S2 and S4 are required to be grouped
together as shown. No logic is permitted
between CV stages! The transition
condition (X3 in this case) must be located
in the last convergence stage. The
transition condition only has power flow
when all convergence stages in the group
are active.

CV
S2

Convergence
Stages

CV
S4
X3

S5
CVJMP

SG
S5

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

7--20

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

Convergence Jump Recall that the last convergence stage

only has power flow when all CV stages in
(CVJMP)
the group are active. To complement the
X  
convergence stage, we need a new jump
430 440 450
instruction. The Convergence Jump
(CVJMP) shown to the right will transition
to Stage S5 when X3 is active (as one
might expect), but it also automatically
resets all convergence stages in the
group. This makes the CVJMP jump a
very powerful instruction. Note that this
instruction may only be used with
convergence stages.
Convergence
Stage Guidelines

CV
S2

Convergence
Jump

CV
S4
X3

S5
CVJMP

SG
S5

The following summarizes the requirements in the use of convergence stages,

including some tips for their effective application:
S

S
S

A convergence stage is to be used as the last stage of a process which

is running in parallel to another process or processes. A transition to the
convergence stage means that a particular process is through, and
represents a waiting point until all other parallel processes also finish.
The maximum number of convergence stages which make up one
group is 17. In other words, a maximum of 17 stages can converge into
one stage.
Convergence stages of the same group must be placed together in the
program, connected on the power rail without any other logic in
between.
Within a convergence group, the stages may occur in any order, top to
bottom. It does not matter which stage is last in the group, because all
convergence stages have to be active before the last stage has power
flow.
The last convergence stage of a group may have ladder logic within the
stage. However, this logic will not execute until all convergence stages
of the group are active.
The convergence jump (CVJMP) is the intended method to be used to
transition from the convergence group of stages to the next stage. The
CVJMP resets all convergence stages of the group, and energizes the
stage named in the jump.
The CVJMP instruction must only be used in a convergence stage, as it
is invalid in regular or initial stages.
Convergence Stages or CVJMP instructions may not be used in
subroutines or interrupt routines.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

7--21

Managing Large Programs

430 440 450

Block 0

Block 1

Block 2

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

Stage Blocks
(BLK, BEND)
X  

A stage may contain a lot of ladder rungs, or just one or two program rungs. For most
applications, good program design will ensure the average number of rungs per
stage will be small. However, large application programs will still create a large
number of stages. We introduce a new construct which will help us organize related
stages into groups called blocks. So, program organization is the main benefit of the
use of stage blocks.
A block is a section of ladder program which contains stages. In the figure below,
each block has its own reference number. Just like stages, a stage block may be
active or inactive. Stages inside a block are not limited in how they may transition
from one to another. Note that the use of stage blocks does not require each stage in
a program to reside inside a block, shown below by the stages outside blocks.

Stages outside blocks:

A program with 20 or more stages may be considered large enough to use block
grouping (however, their use is not mandatory). When used, the number of stage
blocks should probably be two or higher, because the use of one block provides a
negligible advantage.
A block of stages is separated from other
ladder logic with special beginning and
ending instructions. In the figure to the
BLK
Block Instruction
C0
right, the BLK instruction at the top marks
the start of the stage block. At the bottom,
the Block End (BEND) marks the end of
SG
the block. The stages in between these
S0
boundary markers (S0 and S1 in this case)
All other rungs in stage...
and their associated rungs make up the
block.
SG
Note that the block instruction has a
S1
reference value field (set to C0 in the
All other rungs in stage...
example). The block instruction borrows
or uses a control relay contact number, so
Block End
that other parts of the program can control
Instruction
BEND
the block. Any control relay number (such
as C0) used in a BLK instruction is not
available for use as a control relay.
Note that the stages within a block must be regular stages (SG) or convergence
stages (CV). So, they cannot be initial stages. The numbering of stages inside stage
blocks can be in any order, and is completely independent from the numbering of the
blocks.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

7--22

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

Block Call
(BCALL)
X  

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

430 440 450

The purpose of the Block Call instruction is to activate a stage block. At powerup or
upon Program-to-Run mode transitions, all stage blocks and the stages within them
are inactive. Shown in the figure below, the Block Call instruction is a type of output
coil. When the X0 contact is closed, the BCALL will cause the stage block referenced
in the instruction (C0) to become active. When the BCALL is turned off, the
corresponding stage block and the stages within it become inactive.
We must avoid confusing block call operation with how a subroutine call works.
After a BCALL coil executes, program execution continues with the next program
rung. Whenever program execution arrives at the ladder location of the stage block
named in the BCALL, then logic within the block executes because the block is now
active. Similarly, do not classify the BCALL as type of state transition (is not a JMP).
Block C0
X0

C0
BCALL

Activate

(next rung)

When a stage block becomes active, the first stage in the block automatically
becomes active on the same scan. The first stage in a block is the one located
immediately under the block (BLK) instruction in the ladder program. So, that stage
plays a similar role to the initial type stage we discussed earlier.
The Block Call instruction may be used in several contexts. Obviously, the first
execution of a BCALL must occur outside a stage block, since stage blocks are
initially inactive. Still, the BCALL may occur on an ordinary ladder rung, or it may
occur within an active stage as shown below. Note that either turning off the BCALL
or turning off the stage containing the BCALL will deactivate the corresponding
stage block. You may also control a stage block with a BCALL in another stage block.
Stage Block

SG
S0
X0

C0
BCALL

All other rungs in stage...

SG
S11

NOTE: Stage Block may come before or

after the location of the BCALL instruction
in the program.

BLK
C0
SG
S10

All rungs in stage...

SG
S11

All other rungs in stage...

BEND

The BCALL may be used in many ways or contexts, so it can be difficult to find the
best usage. Just remember that the purpose of stage blocks is to help you organize
the application problem by grouping related stages together. Remember that initial
stages must exist outside stage blocks.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

7--23

RLL PLUS Instructions

Stage
(SG)
  
430 440 450

The Stage instructions are used to create

structured RLL PLUS programs. Stages are
program segments which can be activated
by transitional logic, a jump or a set stage
that is executed from an active stage.
Stages are deactivated one scan after
transitional logic, a jump, or a reset stage
instruction is executed.

Stage

S aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

0--577

0--1777

0--1777

DL450 Range

The following example is a simple RLL PLUS program. This program utilizes the initial
stage, stage, and jump instruction to create a structured program.
DirectSOFT Display

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

ISG

ISG

S(SG)

STR

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

STR

X(IN)

SET

S(SG)

STR

X(IN)

S2

JMP

S(SG)

SET

SG

S(SG)

S0

X0

Y10
OUT

X1

X5

SG

S1

STR

X(IN)

JMP

OUT

Y(OUT)

SG

S(SG)

STR

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

S1

X2

Y11
OUT

SG

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

Operand Data Type

SG

STR

X(IN)

AND

S(SG)

JMP

S(SG)

S2

X6

Y12
OUT

X7

S1

S0
JMP

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

7--24

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

Initial Stage
(ISG)
  

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

430 440 450

The Initial Stage instruction is normally used

as the first segment of an RLL PLUS program.
Initial stages will be active when the CPU
enters the run mode allowing for a starting
point in the program. Initial Stages are also
activated by transitional logic, a jump or a
set stage executed from an active stage.
Initial Stages are deactivated one scan after
transitional logic, a jump, or a reset stage
instruction is executed. Multiple Initial
Stages are allowed in a program.
Operand Data Type

Stage

ISG

S aaa

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

0--577

0--1777

0--1777

NOTE: If the ISG is within the retentive range for stages, the ISG will remain in the
state it was in before power down and will NOT turn itself on during the first scan.
Jump
(JMP)
  
430 440 450

The Jump instruction allows the program to

transition from an active stage which
contains the jump instruction to another
which stage is specified in the instruction.
The jump will occur when the input logic is
true. The active stage that contains the
Jump will be deactivated 1 scan after the
Jump instruction is executed.
Operand Data Type

Stage

Not Jump
(NJMP)
  
430 440 450

S aaa
JMP

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

aaa

0--577

0--1777

0--1777

The Not Jump instruction allows the

program to transition from an active stage
which contains the jump instruction to
another which is specified in the instruction.
The jump will occur when the input logic is
off. The active stage that contains the Not
Jump will be deactivated 1 scan after the
Not Jump instruction is executed.
Operand Data Type

Stage

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

DL450 Range

S aaa
NJMP

DL430 Range

DL440 Range

aaa

aaa

DL450 Range
aaa

0--577

0--1777

0--1777

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

7--25

In the following example, when the CPU begins program execution only ISG 0 will be
active. When X1 is on, the program execution will jump from Initial Stage 0 to Stage 1. In
Stage 1, if X2 is on, output Y5 will be turned on. If X7 is on, program execution will jump
from Stage 1 to Stage 2. If X7 is off, program execution will jump from Stage 1 to Stage 3.
DirectSOFT Display

ISG

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

S(SG)

X(IN)

JMP

S(SG)

S1

SG

S(SG)

JMP

STR

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

STR

X(IN)

JMP

S(SG)

NOT

JMP

S(SG)

S0

X1

SG

S1

X2

X7

Y5

OUT
S2
JMP

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

ISG
STR

S3
NJMP

Converge Stage
(CV) and Converge
Jump (CVJMP)
X  
430 440 450

The Converge Stage instruction is used to

group certain stages together by defining
them as Converge Stages.
When all of the Converge Stages within a
group become active, the CVJMP
instruction (and any additional logic in the
final CV stage) will be executed. All
preceding CV stages must be active before
the final CV stage logic can be executed. All
Converge Stages are deactivated one scan
after the CVJMP instruction is executed.
Additional logic instructions are only
allowed following the last Converge Stage
instruction and before the CVJMP
instruction. Multiple CVJUMP instructions
are allowed.
Converge Stages must be programmed in
the main body of the application program.
This means they cannot be programmed in
Subroutines or Interrupt Routines.
Operand Data Type

CV
S aaa

S aaa
CVJMP

DL440 Range
aaa

Stage

0--1777

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

7--26

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

In the following example, when Converge Stages S10 and S11 are both active the
CVJMP instruction will be executed when X4 is on. The CVJMP will deactivate S10
and S11, and activate S20. Then, if X5 is on, the program execution will jump back to
the initial stage, S0.
DirectSOFT Display

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

ISG

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

ISG

S(SG)

STR

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

STR

X(IN)

Y0

JMP

S(SG)

OUT

JMP

S(SG)

SG

S(SG)

STR

X(IN)

JMP

S(SG)

SHFT

SHFT

S(SG)

SHFT

SHFT

S(SG)

STR

X(IN)

JMP

S(SG)

S0

X0

X1

S1
JMP
S10
JMP

SG

S1

X2

CV

CV

Y(OUT)

STR

X(IN)

JMP

SHFT

SHFT

SG

S(SG)

STR

X(IN)

JMP

S(SG)

S11

X4

SG

OUT

S11

S10

X3

Y3
OUT
S20
CVJMP

S20

X5

S0
JMP

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

7--27

The stage block instructions are used to activate a block of stages. The Block Call,
Block, and Block End instructions must be used together.
Block Call
(BCALL)
X  
430 440 450

C aaa
BCALL

Must Remain Active The BCALL instruction actually controls all the stages
between the BLK and the BEND instructions even after the stages inside the block
have started executing. The BCALL must remain active or all the stages in the block
will automatically be turned off. If either the BCALL instruction, or the stage that
contains the BCALL instruction goes off, then the stages in the defined block will be
turned off automatically.
Activates First Block Stage When the BCALL is executed it automatically
activates the first stage following the BLK instructions.
Operand Data Type

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

The BCALL instruction is used to activate

a stage block. There are several things
you need to know about the BCALL
instruction.
Uses CR Numbers The BCALL appears
as an output coil, but does not actually
refer to a Stage number as you might think.
Instead, the block is identified with a
Control Relay (Caaa). This control relay
cannot be used as an output anywhere
else in the program.

DL440 Range
aaa

Control Relay

Block (BLK)
X  
430 440 450

0--1777

The Block instruction is a label which

marks the beginning of a block of stages
that can be activated as a group. A Stage
instruction must immediately follow the
Start Block instruction. Initial Stage
instructions are not allowed in a block.
The control relay (Caaa) specified in
Block instruction must not be used as an
output any where else in the program.
Operand Data Type

BLK
C aaa

DL440 Range
aaa

Control Relay

Block End (BEND)

X  
430 440 450

0--1777

The Block End instruction is a label used

with the Block instruction. It marks the
end of a block of stages. There is no
operand with this instruction.

BEND

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

7--28

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

In this example, the Block Call is executed

when stage 1 is active and X6 is on. The
Block Call then automatically activates
stage S10, which immediately follows the
Block instruction.
This allows the stages between S10 and
the Block End instruction to operate as
programmed. If the BCALL instruction is
turned off, or if the stage containing the
BCALL instruction is turned off, then all
stages between the BLK and BEND
instructions are automatically turned off.
If you examine S15, youll notice that X7
could reset Stage S1, which would
disable the BCALL, thus resetting all
stages within the block.

DirectSOFT Display

SG

SG

Y5

X2

OUT
C0

X6

BLK
SG

BCALL

C0
S10
Y6

X3

OUT
BEND

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Stage View in
DirectSOFT

S1

SG

SG

S(SG)

STR

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

STR

X(IN)

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

SHFT

C(CR)

S15
S1

X7

SG

S(SG)

STR

X(IN)

OUT

Y(OUT)

SHFT

SG

S(SG)

STR

X(IN)

RST

S(SG)

C(CR)

RST

The Stage View option in DirectSOFT will let you view the ladder program as a flow
chart. The figure below shows the symbol convention used in the diagrams. You may
find the stage view useful as a tool to verify that your stage program has faithfully
reproduced the logic of the state transition diagram you intend to realize.
Stage

Transition
Logic

Reference to
a Stage

Jump

Output

Set Stage

Reset Stage

The following diagram is a typical stage view of a ladder program containing stages.
Note the left-to-right direction of the flow chart.
ISG
S0

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

SG
S1

SG
S2

SG
S4

SG
S3

SG
S5

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

7--29

Questions and Answers about Stage Programming

We include the following commonly-asked questions about Stage Programming as
an aid to new students. All question topics are covered in more detail in this chapter.

Q. Isnt a stage really just like a software subroutine?

A. No, it is very different. A subroutine is called by a main program when needed, and
executes just once before returning to the point from which it was called. A stage,
however, is part of the main program. It represents a state of the process, so an
active stage executes on every scan of the CPU until it becomes inactive.

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

Q. What does stage programming do that I cant do with standard RLL programs?
A. Stages allow you to identify all the states of your process before you begin
programming. This approach is more organized, because you divide a ladder
program into sections. As stages, these program sections are active only when they
are actually needed by the process. Most processes can be organized into a
sequence of stages, connected by event-based transitions.

Q. What are Stage Bits?

A. A stage bit is just a single bit in the CPUs image register, representing the
active/inactive status of the stage in real time. For example, the bit for Stage 0 is
referenced as S0. If S0 = 0, then the ladder rungs in Stage 0 are bypassed (not
executed) on each CPU scan. If S0 = 1, then the ladder rungs in Stage 0 are
executed on each CPU scan. Stage bits, when used as contacts, allow one part of
your program to monitor another part by detecting stage active/inactive status.
Q. How does a stage become active?
A. There are three ways:
S If the Stage is an initial stage (ISG), it is automatically active at powerup.
S Another stage can execute a Stage JMP instruction naming this stage,
which makes it active upon its next occurrence in the program.
S A program rung can execute a Set Stage Bit instruction (such as SET
S0).
Q. How does a stage become inactive?
A. There are three ways:
S Standard Stages (SG) are automatically inactive at powerup.
S A stage can execute a Stage JMP instruction, resetting its Stage Bit to
0.
S Any rung in the program can execute a Reset Stage Bit instruction (such
as RST S0).
Q. What about the power flow technique of stage transitions?
A. The power flow method of connecting adjacent stages (directly above or below in
the program) actually is the same as the Stage Jump instruction executed in the
stage above, naming the stage below. Power flow transitions are more difficult to edit
in DirectSOFT, we list them separately from two preceding questions.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

7--30

RLL PLUS Stage Programming

RLL PLUS
Stage Programming

Q. Can I have a stage which is active for only one scan?

A. Yes, but this is not the intended use for a stage. Instead, just make a ladder rung
active for 1 scan by including a stage Jump instruction at the bottom of the rung.
Then the ladder will execute on the last scan before its stage jumps to a new one.
Q. Isnt a Stage JMP just like a regular GOTO instruction used in software?
A. No, it is very different. A GOTO instruction sends the program execution
immediately to the code location named by the GOTO. A Stage JMP simply resets
the Stage Bit of the current stage, while setting the Stage Bit of the stage named in
the JMP instruction. Stage bits are 0 or 1, determining the inactive/active status of
the corresponding stages. A stage JMP has the following results:
S When the JMP is executed, the remainder of the current stages rungs
are executed, even if they reside past(under) the JMP instruction. On
the following scan, that stage is not executed, because it is inactive.
S The Stage named in the Stage JMP instruction will be executed upon its
next occurrence. If located past (under) the current stage, it will be
executed on the same scan. If located before (above) the current stage,
it will be executed on the following scan.
Q. How can I know when to use stage JMP, versus a Set Stage Bit or Reset Stage Bit?
A. These instructions are used according to the state diagram topology you have
derived:
S Use a Stage JMP instruction for a state transition... moving from one
state to another.
S Use a Set Stage Bit instruction when the current state is spawning a
new parallel state or stage sequence, or when a supervisory state is
starting a state sequence under its command.
S Use a Reset Stage Bit instruction when the current state is the last state
in a sequence and its task is complete, or when a supervisory state is
ending a state sequence under its command.
Q. What is an initial stage, and when do I use it?
A. An initial stage (ISG) is automatically active at powerup. Afterwards, it works just
like any other stage. You can have multiple initial stages, if required. Use an initial
stage for ladder that must always be active, or as a starting point.
Q. Can I place program ladder rungs outside of the stages, so they are always on?
A. It is possible, but its not good software design practice. Place ladder that must
always be active in an initial stage, and do not reset that stage or use a Stage JMP
instruction inside it. It can start other stage sequences at the proper time by setting
the appropriate Stage Bit(s).
Q. Can I have more than one active stage at a time?
A. Yes, and this is a normal occurrence for many programs. However, it is important
to organize your application into separate processes, each made up of stages. And a
good process design will be mostly sequential, with only one stage on at a time.
However, all the processes in the program may be active simultaneously.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 only)

In This Chapter. . . .
DL450 PID Loop Features
Introduction to PID Control
Introducing DL450 PID Control
PID Loop Operation
Ten Steps to Successful Process Control
PID Loop Setup
PID Loop Tuning
Using the Special PID Features
Ramp/Soak Generator
DirectSOFT Ramp/Soak Example
Cascade Control
Time Proportioning Control
Feedforward Control
PID Example Program
Troubleshooting Tips
Glossary of PID Loop Terminology
Bibliography

18

8--2

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

DL450 PID Control

DL450 PID Control
Features

Along with control functions discussed in this manual, the DL450 CPU features PID
process control. The primary features are:
S Up to 16 loops, individual programmable sample rates
S The use of 16--bit analog inputs and outputs
S Manual/Automatic/Cascaded loop capability available
S Two types of bumpless transfer available
S Full-featured alarms
S Ramp/soak generator with up to 16 segments
S Auto Tuning

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

NOTE : The D4--450 CPU requires at least DirectSOFT32, version 3.0c, build 58 or
later and CPU firmware version 1.9 (HB) and 2.446 (SH) or later to implement these
features. DirectSOFT 5 is the latest programming software. See our website for
more information www.automationdirect.com.
The DL450 CPU has process control loop capability in addition to ladder program
execution. You can select and configure up to sixteen loops. All sensor and actuator
wiring connects directly to DL405 analog modules and digital output modules. All
process variables, gain values, alarm levels, etc., associated with each loop reside
in a Loop Variable Table in the CPU. The DL450 CPU reads process variable (PV)
inputs during each scan. Then it makes PID loop calculations during a dedicated
time slice on each CPU scan, updating the control output value. The control loops
use the Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) algorithm to generate the control
output command. This chapter describes how the loops operate, and what you must
do to configure and tune the loops.
Analog or Digital Output

DL450 CPU
PID Loop Calculations

Manufacturing Process

Analog Input

As with DirectSOFT32, DirectSOFT 5 programming software, version 5.0 or later, is

used for configuring analog control loops in the DL450. DirectSOFT uses dialog
boxes to help you set up the individual loops. After completing the setup, you can use
DirectSOFTs PID View to tune each loop. The configuration and tuning selections
you make are stored in the DL450s V--memory, which can be set as retentive. The
loop parameters also may be saved to disk for recall later.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Number of loops

Selectable, 16 maximum

CPU V-memory needed

32 words (V locations) per loop selected, 64 words if using ramp/soak

PID algorithm

Position or Velocity form of the PID equation

Control Output polarity

Selectable direct-acting or reverse-acting

Error term curves

Selectable as linear, square root of error, and error squared

Loop update rate (time

between PID calculation)

0.05 to 99.99 seconds, user programmable

Minimum loop update rate

0.05 seconds for 1 to 4 loops, 0.1 seconds for 5 to 8 loops , and

0.2 seconds for 9 to 16 loops

Loop modes

Automatic, Manual (operator control), or Cascade control

Ramp/Soak Generator

Up to 8 ramp/soak steps (16 segments) per loop with indication of

ramp/soak step number

PV curves

Select standard linear, or square-root extract (for flow meter input)

Set Point Limits

Specify minimum and maximum setpoint values

Process Variable Limits

Specify minimum and maximum Process Variable values

Proportional Gain

Specify gains of 0.0 to 99.99

Integrator (Reset)

Specify reset time of 0.0 to 99.99 in units of seconds or minutes

Derivative (Rate)

Specify the derivative time from 0.00 to 99.99 seconds

Rate Limits

Specify derivative gain limiting from 1 to 20

Bumpless Transfer I

Automatically initialized bias and setpoint when control switches from

manual to automatic

Bumpless Transfer II

Automatically set the bias equal to the control output when control switches
from manual to automatic

Step Bias

Provides proportional bias adjustment for large setpoint changes

Anti-windup (Freeze Bias)

For position form of PID, this inhibits integrator action when the control
output reaches 0% or 100 % (speeds up loop recovery when output
recovers from saturation)

Error Deadband

Specify a tolerance (plus and minus) for the error term (SP--PV), so that no
change in control output value is made

Alarm Feature

Specifications

PV Alarm Hysteresis

Specify 1 to 200 (word/binary), does not affect all alarms, such as PV

Rate--of--Change Alarm

PV Alarm Points

Select PV alarm settings for Low--low, Low, High, and High-high conditions

PV Deviation

Specify alarms for two ranges of PV deviation from the setpoint value

Rate of Change

Detect when PV exceeds a rate of change limit you specify

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance

Specifications

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

PID Loop Feature

8--3

8--4

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Introduction to PID Control

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

What is PID
Control?

In this discussion, we will explain why PID control is used in process control instead
of trying to provide control by simply using an analog input and a discrete output.
There are many types of analog controllers available, and the proper selection will
depend upon the particular application. There are two types of analog controllers
that are used throughout industry:
S 1. The ON--OFF controller, sometimes referred to as an open loop
controller.
S 2. The PID controller, sometimes called a closed loop controller.
Regardless of type, analog controllers require input signals from electronic sensors
such as pressure, differential pressure, level, flow meter or thermocouples. As an
example, one of the most common analog control applications is located in your
house for controlling either heat or air conditioning, the thermostat.
You wish for your house to be at a comfortable temperature so you set a thermostat
to a desired temperature (setpoint). You then select the comfort mode, either heat
or A/C. A temperature sensing device, normally a thermistor, is located within the
thermostat. If the thermostat is set for heat and the setpoint is set for 69_, the furnace
will be turned on to provide heat at, normally, 2_ below the setpoint. In this case, it
would turn on at 67_. When the temperature reaches 71_, 2_ above setpoint, the
furnace will turn off. In the opposite example, if the thermostat is set for A/C (cooling),
the thermostat will turn the A/C unit on/off opposite the heat setting. For instance, if
the thermostat is set to cool at 76_, the A/C unit will turn on when the sensed
temperature reaches 2_ above the setpoint or 78_, and turn off when the
temperature reaches 74_. This would be considered to be an ON--OFF controller.
The waveform below shows the action of the heating cycle. Note that there is a slight
overshoot at the turn--off point, also a slight undershoot at the turn--on point.

71_

OFF

OFF

69_

67_

SETPOINT

ON

ON

ON
TIME

The ON--OFF controller is used in some industrial control applications, but is not
practical in the majority of industrial control processes.
The most common process controller that is used in industry is the PID controller.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--5

Maintenance

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

The PID controller controls a continuous feedback loop that keeps the process
output (control variable) flowing normally by taking corrective action whenever there
is a deviation from the desired value (setpoint) of the process variable (PV) such as,
rate of flow, temperature, voltage, etc. An error occurs when an operator manually
changes the setpoint or when an event (valve opened, closed, etc.) or a disturbance
(cold water, wind, etc.) changes the load, thus causing a change in the process
variable.
The PID controller receives signals from sensors and computes corrective action to
the actuator from a computation based on the error (Proportional), the sum of all
previous errors (Integral) and the rate of change of the error (Derivative).
We can look at the PID controller in more simple terms. Take the cruise control on an
automobile as an example. Lets say that we are cruising on an interstate highway in
a car equipped with cruise control. The driver decides to engage the cruise control by
turning it ON, then he manually brings the car to the desired cruising speed, say 70
miles per hour. Once the cruise speed is reached, the SET button is pushed fixing
the speed at 70 mph, the setpoint. Now, the car is cruising at a steady 70 mph until it
comes to a hill to go up. As the car goes up the hill, it tends to slow down. The speed
sensor senses this and causes the throttle to increase the fuel to the engine. The
vehicle speeds up to maintain 70 mph without jerking the car and it reaches the top at
the set speed. When the car levels out after reaching the top of the hill it will speed up.
The speed sensor senses this and signals the throttle to provide less fuel to the
engine, thus, the engine slows down allowing the car to maintain the 70 mph speed.
How does this application apply to PID control? Lets look at the function of P, I and D
terms:
S Proportional -- is commonly referred to as Proportional Gain. The
proportional term is the corrective action which is proportional to the
error, that is, the change of the manipulated variable is equal to the
proportional gain multiplied by the error (the activating signal). In
mathematical terms:
Proportional action = proportional gain X error
Error = Setpoint (SP) -- Process Variable (PV)
Applying this to the cruise control, the speed was set at 70 mph which is
the Setpoint. The speed sensor senses the actual speed of the car and
sends this signal to the cruise controller as the Process Variable (PV).
When the car is on a level highway, the speed is maintained at 70 mph,
thus, no error since the error would be SP -- PV = 0. When the car goes
up the hill, the speed sensor detected a slow down of the car, SP--PV =
error. The proportional gain would cause the output of the speed
controller to bring the car back to the setpoint of 70 mph. This would be
the Controlled Output.
S Integral -- this term is often referred to as Reset action. It provides
additional compensation to the control output, which causes a change in
proportion to the value of the error over a period of time. In other words,
the reset term is the integral sum of the error values over a period of
time.
S Derivative -- this term is referred to as rate. The Rate action adds
compensation to the control output, which causes a change in
proportion to the rate of change of error. Its job is to anticipate the
probable growth of the error and generate a contribution to the output in
advance.

8--6

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Introducing DL450 PID Control

The DL450 is capable of controlling a process variable such as those already
mentioned. As previously mentioned, the control of a variable, such as temperature,
at a given level (setpoint) as long as there are no disturbances (cold water) in the
process.
The DL450 CPU has the ability to directly accept signals from electronic sensors,
such as thermocouples, pressure, VFDs, etc. These signals may be used in
mathematically derived control systems.
In addition, the DL450 has built--in PID control algorithms that can be implemented.
The basic function of PID closed loop process control is to maintain certain process
characteristics at desired setpoints. As a rule, the process deviates from the desired
setpoint reference as a result of load material changes and interaction with other
processes. During this control, the actual condition of the process characteristics
(liquid level, temperature, motor control, etc.) is measured as a process variable
(PV) and compared with the target setpoint (SP). When deviations occur, an error is
generated by the difference between the process variable (actual value) and the
setpoint (desired value). Once an error is detected, the function of the control loop is
to modify the control output in order to force the error to zero.
The DL450 PID control provides feedback loops using the PID algorithm. The
control output is computed from the measured process variable as follows:
Let:
Kc = proportional gain
Ti = Reset or integral time
Td = Derivative time or rate
SP = Setpoint
PV(t) = Process Variable at time t
e(t) = SP--PV(t) = PV deviation from setpoint at time t or PV error.
Then:
M(t) = Control output at time t
t

M(t) = Kc [ e(t) + 1/Ti 0 e(x) dx + Td d/dt e(t) ] + M0

The analog input module receives the process variable in analog form along with an
operator entered setpoint; the CPU computes the error. The error is used in the
algorithm computation to provide corrective action at the control output. The function
of the control action is based on an output control, which is proportional to the
instantaneous error value. The integral control action (reset action) provides
additional compensation to the control output, which causes a change in proportion
to the value of the change of error over a period of time. The derivative control action
(rate change) adds compensation to the control output, which causes a change in
proportion to the rate of change of error. These three modes are used to provide the
desired control action in Proportional (P), Proportional--Integral (PI), or
Proportional--Integral--Derivative (PID) control fashion.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--7

Standard DL405 analog input modules are used to interface to field transmitters to
obtain the PV. These transmitters normally provide a 4--20mA current or an analog
voltage of various ranges for the control loop.
For temperature control, thermocouple or RTD can be connected directly to the
appropriate module. The PID control algorithm, residing in the CPU memory,
receives information from the user program, primarily control parameters and
setpoints. Once the CPU makes the PID calculation, the result may be used to
directly control an actuator connected to a 4--20mA current output module to control
a valve.
With DirectSOFT, additional ladder logic programming, both time proportioning (eg.
heaters for temperature control) and position actuator (eg. reversible motor on a
valve) type of control schemes can be easily implemented. This chapter will explain
how to set up the PID control loop, how to implement the software and how to tune
the loop.
The following block diagram shows the key parts of a PID control loop. The path from
the PLC to the manufacturing process and back to the PLC is the closed loop control.
Loop Configuring
and Monitoring

External
Disturbances

PLC System

Error Term

--

Loop
Calculation

Control Output

Manufacturing
Process

Process Variable

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Setpoint Value

Maintenance

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

8--8

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Process Control
Definitions

Manufacturing Process -- the set of actions that adds value to raw materials. The
process can involve physical changes and/or chemical changes to the material. The
changes render the material more useful for a particular purpose, ultimately used in
a final product.
Process Variable -- a measurement of some physical property of the raw materials.
Measurements are made using some type of sensor. For example, if the
manufacturing process uses an oven, we will have a strong interest in controlling
temperature. Therefore, temperature is a process variable.
Setpoint Value -- the theoretically perfect quantity of the process variable, or the
desired amount which yields the best product. The machine operator knows this
value, and either sets it manually or programs it into the PLC for later automated use.
External Disturbances -- the unpredictable sources of error which the control
system attempts to cancel by offsetting their effects. For example, if the fuel input is
constant an oven will run hotter during warm weather than it does during cold
weather. An oven control system must counter-act this effect to maintain a constant
oven temperature during any season. Thus, the weather (which is not very
predictable), is one source of disturbance to this process.
Error Term -- the algebraic difference between the process variable and the
setpoint. This is the control loop error, and is equal to zero when the process variable
is equal to the setpoint (desired) value. A well-behaved control loop is able to
maintain a small error term magnitude.
Loop Calculation -- the real-time application of a mathematical algorithm to the
error term, generating a control output command appropriate for minimizing the
error magnitude. Various control algorithms are available, and the DL450 uses the
Proportional-Derivative-Integral (PID) algorithm (more on this later).
Control Output -- the result of the loop calculation, which becomes a command for
the process (such as the heater level in an oven).
Loop Configuring -- operator-initiated selections which set up and optimize the
performance of a control loop. The loop calculation function uses the configuration
parameters in real time to adjust gains, offsets, etc.
Loop Monitoring -- the function which allows an operator to observe the status and
performance of a control loop. This is used in conjunction with the loop configuring to
optimize the performance of a loop (minimize the error term).

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--9

PID Loop Operation

PID Position
Algorithm

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

The Proportional--Integral--Derivative (PID) algorithm is widely used in process

control. The PID method of control adapts well to electronic solutions, whether
implemented in analog or digital (CPU) components. The DL450 CPU implements
the PID equations digitally by solving the basic equations in software. I/O modules
serve only to convert electronic signals into digital form (or vice versa).
The DL450 uses two types of PID controls: position and velocity. These terms
usually refer to motion control situations, but here we use them in a different sense:
S PID Position Algorithm -- The control output is calculated so it responds
to the displacement (position) of the PV from the SP (error term).
S PID Velocity Algorithm -- The control output is calculated to represent
the rate of change (velocity) for the PV to become equal to the SP.
Referring to the control output equation on page 8--6, the DL450 CPU approximates
the output M(t) using a discrete position form of the PID equation.
Let:
Ts = Sample rate
Kc = Proportional gain
Ki = Kc * (Ts/Ti) = Coefficient of integral term
Kr = Kc * (Td/Ts) = Coefficient of derivative term
Ti = Reset or integral time
Td = Derivative time or rate
SP = Setpoint
PVn = Process variable at nth sample
en = SP -- PVn = Error at nth sample
Mo = Value to which the controller output has been initialized
Then:
Mn = Control output at nth sample
n

Mn = Kc en + Ki ei + Kr (en -- en--1) + Mo
This form of the PID equation is referred to as the position form since the actual
actuator position is computed. The velocity form of the PID equation computes the
change in actuator position. The CPU modifies the standard equation slightly to use
the derivative of the process variable instead of the error as follows:

Mn = Kc en + Ki

ei + Kr (PVn -- PVn--1) + Mo

i=1

These two forms are equivalent unless the setpoint is changed. In the original
equation, a large step change in the setpoint will cause a correspondingly large
change in the error resulting in a bump to the process due to derivative action. This
bump is not present in the second form of the equation.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance

i=1

8--10

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

The DL450 also combines the integral sum and the initial output into a single term
called the bias (Mx). This results in the following set of equations:
Mxo = Mo
Mx = Ki * en + Mxn--1
Mn = Kc * en -- Kr(PVn -- PVn--1) + Mxn
The DL450 by default will keep the normalized output M in the range of 0.0 to 1.0.
This is done by clamping M to the nearer of 0.0 or 1.0 whenever the calculated output
falls outside this range. The DL450 also allows you to specify the minimum and
maximum output limit values (within the range 0 to 4095 in binary if using 12 bit
unipolar).
NOTE: The equations and algorithms, or parts of, in this chapter are only for
references. Analysis of these equations can be found in most good text books about
process control.

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Reset Windup
Protection

Reset windup can occur if reset action (integral term) is specified and the
computation of the bias term Mx is:
Mx = Ki * en + Mxn--1
For example, assume the output is controlling a valve and the PV remains at some
value greater than the setpoint. The negative error (en) will cause the bias term (Mx)
to constantly decrease until the output M goes to 0 closing the valve. However, since
the error term is still negative, the bias will continue to decrease becoming ever more
negative. When the PV finally does come back down below the SP, the valve will stay
closed until the error is positive for long enough to cause the bias to become positive
again. This will cause the process variable to undershoot.
One way to solve the problem is to simply clamp the normalized bias between 0.0
and 1.0. The DL450 CPU does this. However, if this is the only thing that is done, then
the output will not move off 0.0 (thus opening the valve) until the PV has become less
than the SP. This will also cause the process variable to undershoot.
The DL450 CPU is programmed to solve the overshoot problem by either freezing
the bias term, or by adjusting the bias term.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Freeze Bias

Adjusting the Bias

8--11

Maintenance

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

If the Freeze Bias option is selected when setting up the PID loop (discussed later)
then the CPU simply stops changing the bias (Mx) whenever the computed
normalized output (M) goes outside the interval 0.0 to 1.0.
Mx = Ki * en + Mxn--1
M = Kc * en -- Kr(PVn -- PVn--1) + Mx
Mn = 0
if M < 0
if 0 < M > 1
Mn = M
if M > 1
Mn = 1
Mxn = Mx
if 0 < M > 1
otherwise
Mxn = Mxn--1
Thus in this example, the bias will probably not go all the way to zero so that, when
the PV does begin to come down, the loop will begin to open the valve sooner than it
would have if the bias had been allowed to go all the way to zero. This action has the
effect of reducing the amount of overshoot.
The normal action of the CPU is to adjust the bias term when the output goes out of
range as shown below.
Mx = Ki * en + Mxn--1
M = Kc * en -- Kr(PVn -- PVn--1) + Mx
Mn = 0
if M < 0
if 0 < M > 1
Mn = M
if M > 1
Mn = 1
Mxn = Mx
if 0 < M > 1
Mxn = Mn -- Kc * en -- Kr(PVn -- PVn--1) otherwise
By adjusting the bias, the valve will begin to open as soon as the PV begins to come
down. If the loop is properly tuned, overshoot can be eliminated entirely. If the output
went out of range due to a setpoint change, then the loop probably will oscillate
because we must wait for the bias term to stabilize again.
The choice of whether to use the default loop action or to freeze the bias is
dependent on the application. If large step changes to the setpoint are
anticipated, then it is probably better to select the freeze bias option (see page
8--34).

8--12

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Step Bias
Proportional to
Step Change SP

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Eliminating
Proportional,
Integral or
Derivative Action

Velocity Form of
the PID Equation

This feature reduces oscillation caused by a step change in setpoint when the
adjusting bias feature is used.
Mx = Mx * SPn / SPn--1 if the loop is direct acting
Mx = Mx * SPn--1 / SPn if the loop is reverse acting
Mxn = 0
if Mx < 0
Mxn = Mx if 0 < Mx > 1
if M > 1
Mxn = 1
It is not always necessary to run a full three mode PID control loop. Most loops
require only the PI terms or just the P term. Parts of the PID equation may be
eliminated by choosing appropriate values for the gain (Kc), reset (Ti) and rate (Td)
yielding a P, PI, PD, I and even an ID and a D loop.
Eliminating Integral Action
The effect of integral action on the output may be
eliminated by setting Ti = 9999 or 0000. When
this is done, the user may then manually control
the bias term (Mx) to eliminate any steady--state
offset.
Eliminating Derivative Action The effect of derivative action on the output may
be eliminated by setting Td = 0 (most loops do
not require a D parameter; it may make the loop
unstable).
Eliminating Proportional Action Although rarely done, the effect of proportional
term on the output may be eliminated by setting
Kc = 0. Since Kc is also normally a multiplier of
the integral coefficient (Ki) and the derivative
coefficient (Kr), the CPU makes the computation
of these values conditional on the value of \Kc as
follows:
Ki = Kc * (Ts / Ti)
if Kc 0
Ki = Ts / Ti
if Kc = 0 (I or ID only)
Kr = Kc * (Td / Ts)
if Kc 0
Kr = Td / Ts
if Kc = 0 (ID or D only)
The standard position form of the PID equation computes the actual actuator
position. An alternative form of the PID equation computes the change in actuator
position. This form of the equation is referred to as the velocity PID equation and is
obtained by subtracting the equation at time n from the equation at time n--1.
The velocity equation is given by:
nMn = M -- Mn--1

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--13

Maintenance

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Bumpless Transfer The DL450 loop controller provides for bumpless mode changes. A bumpless
transfer from manual mode to automatic mode is achieved by preventing the control
output from changing immediately after the mode change.
When a loop is switched from Manual mode to Automatic mode, the setpoint and
Bias are initialized as follows:
Position PID Algorithm
Velocity PID Algorithm
SP = PV
SP = PV
Mx = Control Ouput
The bumpless transfer feature of the DL450 is available in two types: Bumpless I and
Bumpless II (see page 8--27). The transfer type is selected when the loop is set up.
The DL450 allows the user to specify alarm conditions that are to be monitored for
Loop Alarms
each loop. Alarm conditions are reported to the CPU by setting up the alarms in
DirectSOFT using the PID setup alarm dialog when the loop is setup. The alarm
features for each loop are:
S PV Limit y Specify up to four PV alarm points.
High--High PV rises above the programmed High--High
Alarm Limit.
High
PV rises above the programmed High Alarm
Limit.
Low
PV fails below the Low Alarm Limit.
Low--Low PV fails below the Low--Low Limit.
S PV Deviation Alarm y Specify an alarm for High and Low PV deviation
from the setpoint (Yellow Deviation). An alarm for High High and Low
Low PV deviation from the setpoint (Orange Deviation) may also be
specified. When the PV is further from the setpoint than the
programmed Yellow or Orange Deviation Limit the corresponding alarm
bit is activated.
S Rate--of--Change y This alarm is set when the PV changes faster than
a specified rate--of--change limit.
S PV Alarm Hysteresis y The PV Limit Alarms and PV Deviation Alarms
are programmed using threshold values. When the absolute value or
deviation exceeds the threshold, the alarm status becomes true.
Real--world PV signals have some noise on them, which can cause
some fluctuation in the PV value in the CPU. As the PV value crosses
an alarm threshold, its fluctuations will cause the alarm to be intermittent
and annoy process operators. The solution is to use the PV Alarm
Hysteresis feature.

8--14

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Loop Operating
Modes

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Special Loop
Calculations

The DL450 loop controller operates in one of two modes, either Manual or
Automatic.
Manual
In manual mode, the control output is determined by the operator, not the loop
controller. While in manual mode, the loop controller will still monitor all of the alarms
including High--High, High, Low, Low--Low, Yellow deviation, Orange deviation and
Rate--of--Change.
Automatic
In automatic mode, the loop controller computes the control output based on the
programmed parameters stored in V--memory. All alarms are monitored while in
automatic.
Cascade
Cascade mode is an option with the DL450 PLC and is used in special control
applications. If the cascade feature is used, the loop will operate as it would if in
automatic mode except for the fact that a cascaded loop has a setpoint which is the
control output from another loop.
Reverse Acting Loop
Although the PID algorithm is used in a direct, or forward, acting loop controller, there
are times when a reverse acting control output is needed. The DL450 loop controller
allows a loop to operate as reverse acting. With a reverse acting loop, the output is
driven in the opposite direction of the error. For example, if SP > PV, then a reverse
acting controller will decrease the output to increase the PV.
Mx = --Ki * en + Mxn--1
M = --Kc * en + Kr(PVn --PVn--1) + Mxn
Square Root of the Process Variable
Square root is selected whenever the PV is from a device such as an orifice meter
which requires this calculation.
Error Squared Control
Whenever error squared control is selected, the error is calculated as:
en = (SP -- PVn) * ABS(SP -- PVn)
A loop using the error squared is less responsive than a loop using just the error,
however, it will respond faster with a large error. The smaller the error, the less
responsive the loop. Error squared control would typically be used in a pH control
application.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--15

Error Deadband Control

With error deadband control, no control action is taken if the PV is within the specified
deadband area around the setpoint. The error deadband is the same above and
below the setpoint.
Once the PV is outside of the error deadband around the setpoint, the entire error is
used in the loop calculation.
SP -- Deadband__Below_SP < PV < SP -- Deadband_Above_SP
en = 0
otherwise
en = P -- PVn
The error will be squared first if both Error Squared and Error Deadband is selected.
Derivative Gain Limiting
When the coefficient of the derivative term, Kr, is a large value, noise introduced into
the PV can result in erratic loop output. This problem is corrected by specifying a
derivative gain limiting coefficient, Kd. Derivative gain limiting is a first order filter
applied to the derivative term computation, Yn, as shown below.
Yn = Yn--1 +

__________
Ts
Ts + ( Td )

* (PVn

= Yn--1 )

Kd

nM = Kc * (en -- en--1) + Ki * en -- Kr * (Yn -- 2 * Yn--1 + Yn--2)

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Position Algorithm
Mx = Ki * en + Mxn--1
M = Kc * en -- Kr * (Yn --Yn--1) + Mx
Velocity Algorithm

Maintenance

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

8--16

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Ten Steps to Successful Process Control

Modern electronic controllers such as the DL450 CPU provide sophisticated
process control features. Automated control systems can be very difficult to debug,
because a given symptom can have many possible causes. We recommend a
careful, step-by-step approach to bringing new control loops online:
The most important knowledge is -- how to produce your product. This knowledge is
Step 1:
the foundation for designing an effective control system. A good process recipe will
Know the Recipe
do the following:
S Identify all relevant Process Variables, such as temperature, pressure,
or flow rates, etc. which need precise control.
S Plot the desired Setpoint values for each of the process variables for the
duration of one process cycle.
Step 2:
This simply means choosing the method the machine will use to maintain control
over the Process Variables to follow their Setpoints. This involves many issues and
Plan Loop
trade-offs, such as, energy efficiency, equipment costs, ability to service the
Control Strategy
machine during production, and more. You must also determine how to generate the
Setpoint value during the process, and whether a machine operator can change the
SP.
Step 3:
Assuming the control strategy is sound, it is still crucial to properly size the actuators
and properly scale the sensors.
Size and Scale
Loop Components
S Choose an actuator (heater, pump. etc.) which matches the size of the
load. An oversized actuator will have an overwhelming effect on your
process after a SP change. However, an undersized actuator will allow
the PV to lag or drift away from the SP after a SP change or process
disturbance.
S Choose a PV sensor which matches the range of interest (and control)
for our process. Decide the resolution of control you need for the PV
(such as within 2C), and make sure the sensor input value provides the
loop with at least 5 times that resolution (at LSB level). However, an
over-sensitive sensor can cause control oscillations, etc. The DL450
provides 12-bit and 15-bit, unipolar and bipolar data format options, and
a 16--bit unipolar option. This selection affects SP, PV, Control Output,
and Integrator sum.
Step 4:
After deciding the number of loops, PV variables to measure, and SP values, you
Select I/O Modules can choose the appropriate I/O modules. Refer to the figure on the next page. In
many cases, you will be able to share input or output modules among several control
loops. The example shown sends the PV and Control Output signals for two loops
through the same set of modules. Up to four loops could be handled by the modules
shown.
AutomationDirect offers DL405 analog modules with 4, 8, and 16 channels per
module in various signal types and ranges. Also available are thermocouple and
RTD modules which can be used to maintain temperatures to within a 10th of a
degree. Refer to our sales catalog for further information on these modules, or find
the modules on our website, www.automationdirect.com.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

DL450 CPU
V-memory

Input
Module

Loop 1 Data

Channel 1

PV

Channel 2

PV

SP

OUT

Loop 2 Data
SP

OUT

8--17

Output
Module
Channel 1
Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 3

Channel 4

Channel 4

Process 1
Process 2

After selection and procurement of all loop components and I/O modules, we can
perform the wiring and installation. Refer to the wiring guidelines in Chapter 2 of this
Manual, and to the DL405 Analog I/O Module manual as needed. The most
commonly overlooked wiring details when installing PID loop controls are:
S Reversing the polarity of sensor or actuator wiring connections.
S Incorrect signal ground connections between loop components.

Step 6:
Loop Parameters

After wiring and installation, choose the loop setup parameters. The easiest method
for programming the loop tables is by using DirectSOFT. This software provides PID
Setup using dialog boxes to simplify the task. Note: It is important to understand
the meaning of all loop parameters mentioned in this chapter before choosing
values to enter.
With the sensor and actuator wiring completed, and loop parameters entered, the
Manual mode must be used to manually and carefully check out the new control
system.
S Verify that the PV value from the sensor is correct.
S If it is safe to do so, gradually increase the control output up above 0%,
and see if the PV responds (and moves in the correct direction!).

Step 7:
Check Open Loop
Performance

If the open loop test (page 8--40) shows the PV reading is good and the control output
has the proper effect on the process; follow the closed--loop auto tuning procedure
(see page 8--45). In this step, the loop is tuned so the PV automatically follows the
SP.
Step 9:
If the closed loop test shows PV will follow small changes in the SP, consider running
Run Process Cycle an actual process cycle. The programming which will generate the desired SP in real
time must be completed. In this step, it may desirable to run a small test batch of
product through the machine, while watching the SP change according to the recipe.
WARNING: Be sure the Emergency Stop and power-down provision is readily
accessible, in case the process goes out of control. Damage to equipment
and/or serious injury to personnel can result from loss of control of some
processes.
Step 10:
Save Loop
Parameters

When the loop tests and tuning sessions are complete, be sure to save all loop setup
parameters to disk.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance

Step 8:
Loop Tuning

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Step 5:
Wiring and
Installation

8--18

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

PID Loop Setup

Some Things to Do Have your analog module installed and operational before beginning the loop setup
(refer to the DL405 Analog I/O Modules Manual, D4--ANLG--M). The DL450 CPU
and Know Before
gets its PID loop processing instructions from V--memory tables. There isnt a PID
Starting
instruction that can be used in RLL, such as a block, to setup the PID loop control.
Instead, the CPU reads the setup parameters from system V--memory locations.
These locations are shown in the table below for reference only; they can be used in
a RLL program if needed.
Address

Setup Parameter

Data type

Ranges

Read/Write

V7640

Loop Parameter
Table Pointer

Octal

V1400 -- V7340,
V10000 -- V37740

write

V7641

Number of Loops

BCD

0 -- 16

write

V7642

Loop Error Flags

Binary

0 or 1

read

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

If the number of loops is 0, the loop controller task is turned off during the ladder
program scan. The loop controller will allow use of loops in ascending order,
beginning with 1. For example, you cannot use loop 1 and 4 while skipping 2 and 3.
The loop controller attempts to control the full number of loops specified in V7641.
NOTE: The V--memory data is stored in RAM memory. If power is removed from the
CPU for an extended period of time, the PID Setup Parameters will be lost. It is
recommended to use the optional D3--D4--BAT for memory backup.
PID Error Flags

The CPU reports any programming errors of

the setup parameters in V7640 and V7641. It
does this by setting the appropriate bits in
V7642 on program-to-run mode transitions.

PID Error Flags, V7642

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

If you use the DirectSOFT loop setup dialog box, its automatic range checking
prohibits possible setup errors. However, the setup parameters may be written using
other methods such as RLL, so the error flag register may be helpful in those cases.
The following table lists the errors reported in V7642.
Bit

Error Description (0 = no error, 1 = error)

The starting address (in V7640) is out of the lower V-memory range.

The starting address (in V7640) is out of the upper V-memory range.

The number of loops selected (in V7641) is greater than 16.

The loop table extends past (straddles) the boundary at V7377. Use an
address closer to V1400.

The loop table extends past (straddles) the boundary at V37777. Use
an address closer to V10000.

As a quick check, if the CPU is in Run mode and V7642=0000, then we know there
are no programming errors.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Establishing the
Loop Table Size
and Location

8--19

On a PROGRAM-to-RUN mode transition, the CPU reads the loop setup

parameters as pictured below. At that moment, the CPU learns the location of the
loop table and the number of loops it configures. Then during the ladder program
scan, the PID Loop task uses the loop data to perform calculations, generate alarms,
and so on. There are some loop table parameters the CPU will read or write on every
loop calculation.
CPU Tasks

Ladder
Program

V--Memory Space

READ/
WRITE

User Data

LOOP
DATA
CONFIGURE/
MONITOR

PID Loop
Task
READ
(at powerup)

Setup Parameters
V7640, V7641
DirectSOFT 5 Programming Software

NOTE: Whether one or more loops are being setup, this block of V--memory will only
be used for the PID loop parameters, do not use this block of memory for
anything else in your program.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance

The Loop Table contains data for only the

V--Memory Space
number of loops selected. The address for
User Data
the table is stored in V7641. Each loop
V2000
LOOP #1
configuration occupies 32 words (0 to 37
V2037
32 words
octal) in the loop table.
LOOP #2
V2040
For example, consider an application with
32 words
V2077
4 loops, and V2000 has been chosen as
LOOP #3
the starting location. The Loop Parameter
32 words
will occupy V2000 -- V2037 for loop 1,
LOOP #4
V2040 -- V2077 for loop 2 and so on. Loop
32 words
4 occupies V2140 -- V2177.
Determine the block of V--memory to be used for each PID loop. Besides being the
beginning of the PID parameter memory block, the first address will be the start of
loop 1 parameters. Remember, there are 32 words (0 to 37 octal) needed for each
loop. Once you have determined the beginning V--memory address to be used, you
can setup and store the PID parameters either directly in your RLL program or by the
using PID Setup in DirectSOFT.

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

NOTE: The DL450 CPUs PID algorithm requires at least DirectSOFT32, version
3.0c, Build 58 (or later) and CPU firmware version 1.9 (H8) and 2.446 (SH) (or later),
or DirectSOFT 5, version 5.0 (or later). See our website for more information:
www.automationdirect.com.

8--20

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

First type the beginning address in the PID Table Address dialog. After the address
has been entered, the memory range will appear. Also, entering the number of PID
loops (1 to 16) will set the total V--memory range for the number of loops entered.
After the V--memory address has been entered, the necessary PID parameters for a
basic loop operation for each loop can be setup with the dialogs made available.

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Using DirectSOFT is the simplest way to setup the parameters. The DL450 PID
parameters can be setup either offline or online while developing the user program.
The parameters will be loaded to V--memory as the program is loaded into the PLC.
If the PID parameters are setup or changed while the PLC is connected to the
programming computer, this can only be done in Program Mode.
To begin the PID setup, open an edited program with DirectSOFT, then click on PLC
> Setup > PID to access the Setup PID dialog which is pictured below.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

8--21

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Loop Table
Word Definitions

Word #

The parameters associated with each loop are listed in the following table. The
address offset is in octal, to help you locate specific parameters in a loop table. For
example, if a table begins at V2000, then the location of the reset (integral) term is
Addr+11, or V2011. Do not use the word# to calculate addresses.

Address+Offset Description

Format

Read onthe-fly***

PID Loop Mode Setting 1

bits

Yes

Addr + 1

PID Loop Mode Setting 2

bits

Yes

Addr + 2

Setpoint Value (SP)

word/binary

Yes

Addr + 3

Process Variable (PV)

word/binary

Yes

Addr + 4

Bias (Integrator) Value

word/binary

Yes

Addr + 5

Control Output Value

word/binary

Yes

Addr + 6

Loop Mode and Alarm Status

bits

--

Addr + 7

Sample Rate Setting

word/BCD

Yes

Addr + 10

Gain (Proportional) Setting

word/BCD

Yes

10

Addr + 11

Reset (Integral) Time Setting

word/BCD

Yes

11

Addr + 12

Rate (Derivative) Time Setting

word/BCD

Yes

12

Addr + 13

PV Value, Low-low Alarm

word/binary

No*

13

Addr + 14

PV Value, Low Alarm

word/binary

No*

14

Addr + 15

PV Value, High Alarm

word/binary

No*

15

Addr + 16

PV Value, High-high Alarm

word/binary

No*

16

Addr + 17

PV Value, deviation alarm (YELLOW)

word/binary

No*

17

Addr + 20

PV Value, deviation alarm (RED)

word/binary

No*

18

Addr + 21

PV Value, rate-of-change alarm

word/binary

No*

19

Addr + 22

PV Value, alarm hysteresis setting

word/binary

No*

20

Addr + 23

PV Value, error deadband setting

word/binary

Yes

21

Addr + 24

reserved for future use

--

--

22

Addr + 25

Loop derivative gain limiting factor setting

word/BCD

No**

23

Addr + 26

SP value lower limit setting

word/binary

Yes

24

Addr + 27

SP value upper limit setting

word/binary

Yes

25

Addr + 30

Control output value lower limit setting

word/binary

No**

26

Addr + 31

Control output value upper limit setting

word/binary

No**

27

Addr + 32

Remote SP Value V-Memory Address Pointer

word/hex

Yes

28

Addr + 33

Ramp/Soak Setting Flag

bit

Yes

29

Addr + 34

Ramp/Soak Programming Table Starting Address

word/hex

No**

30

Addr + 35

Ramp/Soak Programming Table Error Flags

bits

No**

31

Addr + 36

reserved for future use

--

--

32

Addr + 37

reserved for future use

--

--

* Read data only when alarm enable bit transitions 0 to1,

** Read data only on PLC Mode change,

*** Read on--the--fly means that the content of V--memory can be changed while the PID loop is in operation.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance

Addr + 0

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

8--22

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

PID Mode Setting 1 The individual bit definitions of PID Mode Setting 1 word (Addr+00) are listed in the
following table.
Bit Descriptions
(Addr + 00)
PID Mode Setting 1 Description

Read/Write

Bit=0

Bit=1

Manual Mode Loop Operation request

write

--

01
request

Automatic Mode Loop Operation request

write

--

01
request

Cascade Mode Loop Operation request

write

--

01
request

Bumpless Transfer select

write

Mode I

Mode II

Direct or Reverse-Acting Loop select

write

Direct

Reverse

Position/Velocity Algorithm select

write

Position

Velocity

PV Linear/Square Root Extract select

write

Linear

Sq. root

Error Term Linear/Squared select

write

Linear

Squared

Error Deadband enable

write

Disable

Enable

Derivative Gain Limit select

write

Off

On

10

Bias (Integrator) Freeze select

write

Off

On

11

Ramp/Soak Operation select

write

Off

On

12

PV Alarm Monitor select

write

Off

On

13

PV Deviation alarm select

write

Off

On

14

PV rate-of-change alarm select

write

Off

On

15

reserved for future use

--

--

--

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Bit

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

8--23

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

PID Mode Setting 2 The bit definitions for PID Mode Setting 2 word (Addr+01) are listed in the following
table. More information about the use of this word is available later in this chapter.
Descriptions
(Addr + 01)
Bit

PID Mode Setting 2 Description

Read/Write

Bit=0

Bit=1

write

unipolar

bipolar

Input/Output Data Format select

(See Notes 1 and 2)

write

12 bit

15 bit

reserved for future use

--

--

--

SP Input limit enable

write

disable

enable

Integral Gain (Reset) units select

write

seconds

minutes

Select Autotune PID algorithm

write

closed loop

open loop

Autotune selection

write

PID

PI only
(rate = 0)

Autotune start (Note: Bit 7 can be used to

cancel Autotune mode by setting it to 0.)

read/write

autotune
done

force start

PID Scan Clock (internal use)

read

--

--

Input/Output Data Format 16-bit select

(See Notes 1 and 2)

write

not
16 bit

select
16 bit

10

Select separate data format for input and

output (See Notes 2 and 3)

write

same
format

separate
formats

11

Control Output Range

Unipolar/Bipolar select
(See Notes 2 and 3)

write

unipolar

bipolar

12

Output Data Format select

(See Notes 2 and 3)

write

12 bit

15 bit

13

Output data format 16-bit select

(See Notes 2 and 3)

write

not
16 bit

select
16 bit

--

--

--

14--15

Reserved for future use

NOTE 1: If the value in bit 9 is 0, then the values in bits 0 and 1 are read. If the value in
bit 9 is 1, then the values in bits 0 and 1 are not read, and bit 9 defines the data format
(the range is automatically unipolar).
NOTE 2: If the value in bit 10 is 0, then the values in bits 0, 1, and 9 define the input
and output ranges and data formats (the values in bits 11, 12, and 13 are not read). If
the value in bit 10 is 1, then the values in bits 0, 1, and 9 define only the input range
and data format, and bits 11, 12, and 13 are read and define the output range and
data format..
NOTE 3: If bit 10 has a value of 1 and bit 13 has a value of 0, then bits 11 and 12 are
read and define the output range and data format. If bit 10 and bit 13 each have a
value of 1, then bits 11 and 12 are not read, and bit 13 defines the data format, (the
output range is automatically unipolar).

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance

Input (PV) and Control Output Range

Unipolar/Bipolar select
(See Notes 1 and 2)

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

8--24

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Mode/Alarm
Monitoring Word
(Addr + 06)

The individual bit definitions of the Mode/Alarm monitoring word (Addr+06) are listed
in the following table.

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Bit

Read/Write

Bit=0

Bit=1

Manual Mode Indication

read

--

Manual

Automatic Mode Indication

read

--

Auto

Cascade Mode Indication

read

--

Cascade

PV Input LOW--LOW Alarm

read

Off

On

PV Input LOW Alarm

read

Off

On

PV Input HIGH Alarm

read

Off

On

PV Input HIGH--HIGH Alarm

read

Off

On

PV Input YELLOW Deviation Alarm

read

Off

On

PV Input RED Deviation Alarm

read

Off

On

PV Input Rate-of-Change Alarm

read

Off

On

10

Alarm Value Programming Error

read

--

Error

11

Loop Calculation Overflow/Underflow

read

--

Error

--

--

--

12--15

Ramp/Soak Table
Flags
(Addr + 33)

Mode / Alarm Bit Description

Reserved for Future Use

The individual bit definitions of the Ramp/Soak Table Flag word (Addr+33) are listed
in the following table.
Bit

Ramp/Soak Flag Bit Description

Read/Write

Bit=0

Bit=1

Start Ramp/Soak Profile

write

--

01 Start

Hold Ramp/Soak Profile

write

--

01 Hold

Resume Ramp/soak Profile

write

--

01
Resume

Jog Ramp/Soak Profile

write

--

01 Jog

Ramp/Soak Profile Complete

read

--

Complete

PV Input Ramp/Soak Deviation

read

Off

On

Ramp/Soak Profile in Hold

read

Off

On

Reserved

read

Off

On

Current Step in R/S Profile

read

8--15

decode as byte (hex)

Bits 8--15 must be read as a byte to indicate the current segment number of the
Ramp/Soak generator in the profile. This byte will have the values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, A, B, C, D, E, F, and 10. which represent segments 1 to 16 respectively. If the
byte=0. then the Ramp/Soak table is not active.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

8--25

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Ramp/Soak
Table Location
(Addr + 34)

V2000
V2037

Each loop that you configure has the option of using a built-in Ramp/Soak generator
dedicated to that loop. This feature generates SP values in a continuous stream,
called a profile. To use the Ramp/Soak feature, you must program a separate table
of 32 words with appropriate values. A DirectSOFT dialog box makes this easy to
do.
In the basic loop table, the Ramp/Soak Table Pointer at Addr + 34 must point to the
start of the ramp/soak data for that loop. This may be anywhere in user memory, and
does not have to be adjoining to the Loop Parameter table, as shown to the left. Each
R/S table requires 32 words, regardless of the number of segments programmed.
The ramp/soak table parameters are defined in the table below. Further details are in
the section on Ramp/Soak Generator section in this chapter.

V--Memory Space

Addr
Offset

Step

User Data

+ 00

+ 01

32 words

LOOP #2

LOOP #1

32 words

Ramp/Soak #1
32 words

V2034 = 3000 octal

Pointer to R/S table

Step

Ramp End SP Value

+ 20

Ramp End SP Value

Ramp Slope

+ 21

Ramp Slope

+ 02

Soak Duration

+ 22

10

Soak Duration

+ 03

Soak PV Deviation

+ 23

10

Soak PV Deviation

+ 04

Ramp End SP Value

+ 24

11

Ramp End SP Value

+ 05

Ramp Slope

+ 25

11

Ramp Slope

+ 06

Soak Duration

+ 26

12

Soak Duration

+ 07

Soak PV Deviation

+ 27

12

Soak PV Deviation

+ 10

Ramp End SP Value

+ 30

13

Ramp End SP Value

+ 11

Ramp Slope

+ 31

13

Ramp Slope

+ 12

Soak Duration

+ 32

14

Soak Duration

+ 13

Soak PV Deviation

+ 33

14

Soak PV Deviation

+ 14

Ramp End SP Value

+ 34

15

Ramp End SP Value

+ 15

Ramp Slope

+ 35

15

Ramp Slope

+ 16

Soak Duration

+ 36

16

Soak Duration

+ 17

Soak PV Deviation

+ 37

16

Soak PV Deviation

Description

Write

Starting Addr out of lower V-memory range

read

--

Error

Starting Addr out of upper V-memory range

read

--

Error

--

--

--

2--3
4
5--15

Reserved for future Use

Starting Addr out of System Parameter
V-memory Range
Reserved for future Use

read
--

---

Error
--

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance

Ramp/Soak Table
The individual bit definitions of the Ramp/Soak Table Programming Error Flags
Programming Error (Addr + 35) word are listed in the following table.
Flags
Read/
(Addr + 35)
Bit
R/S Error Flag Bit Description
Bit=0
Bit=1

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

V3000

Addr
Offset

Description

8--26

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Configure the PID

Loop

Once the PID table is established in V--memory, configuring the PID loop continues
with the DirectSOFT PID setup configuration dialog. You will need to check and fill in
the data required to control the PID loop. Select Configure and the following dialog
will appear for this process.

Select the Algorithm Type

Chose either Position or Velocity. The default algorithm is Position. This is the choice
for most applications which include heating and cooling loops as well as most
position and level control loops. A typical velocity control will consist of a process
variable such as a flow totalizer in a flow control loop.
Enter the Sample Rate
The main tasks of the CPU fall into
categories as shown to the right. The list
represents the tasks done when the CPU
is in Run Mode, on each PLC scan. Note
that PID loop calculations occur after the
ladder logic task.
The sample rate of a control loop is simply
the frequency of the PID calculation. Each
calculation generates a new control output
value. With the DL450 CPU, you can set
the sample rate of a loop from 50 mS to
99.99 seconds. Most loops do not require
a fresh PID calculation on every PLC
scan. Some loops may need calculating
only once in 1000 scans.
Enter 0.05 sec., or the sample rate of your
choice, for each loop, and the CPU
automatically schedules and executes
PID calculations on the appropriate scans.

Read
Inputs
Service
Peripherals

PLC
Scan

Ladder
Program

Calculate
PID Loops
Internal
Diagnostics

Write
Outputs

NOTE: If more than 4 loops are programmed, enter a minimum of 0.1 second.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--27

Select Forward/Reverse
It is important to know which direction the control output will respond to the error
(SP--PV), either forward or reverse. A forward (direct) acting control loop means that
whenever the control output increases, the process variable will also increase. The
control output of most PID loops are forward acting, such as a heating control loop.
An increase in heat applied will increase the PV (temperature).
A reverse acting control loop is one where an increase in the control output results in
a decrease in the PV. A common example of this would be a refrigeration system,
where an increase in the cooling input causes a decrease in the PV (temperature).
The Transfer Mode
Choose either Bumpless I or Bumpless II to provide a smooth transition of the control
output from Manual Mode to Auto Mode. Choosing Bumpless I will set the SP equal
to the PV when the control output is switched from Manual to Auto. If this is not
desired, choose Bumpless II.
The characteristics of Bumpless I and II transfer types are listed in the chart below.
Note that their operation also depends on which PID algorithm you are using, the
position or velocity form of the PID equation. Note that you must use Bumpless
Transfer type I when using the velocity form of the PID algorithm.
Transfer
Select Bit

Bumpless
Transfer I

Bumpless
Transfer II

PID Algorithm

Manual-to-Auto
Transfer Action

Auto-to-Cascade
Transfer Action

Position

Forces Bias = Control Output

Forces SP = PV

Forces Major Loop Output =

Minor Loop PV

Velocity

Forces SP = PV

Forces Major Loop Output =

Minor Loop PV

Position

Forces Bias = Control Output

none

Velocity

none

none

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Transfer
Type

The transfer type can also be selected in a RLL program by setting bit 3 of PID Mode
1, V+00 setting as shown.
Bumpless Transfer I / II select

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

SP/PV & Output Format

This block allows you to select either Common format or Independent format.
Common format is the default and is most commonly used. With this format both
SP/PV and Output will have the same data structure. Both will have the same
number of bits and either bipolar or unipolar. If Independent format is selected, the
data structure selections will be grayed out. The reason for this is that they become
independently selectable in the SP/PV and the Output dialogs.
Common Data Format
Select either Unipolar data format (which is positive data only) in 12 bit (0 to 4095),
15 bit (0 to 32767), or 16 bit (0 to 65535) format, or Bipolar data format, which ranges
from negative to positive (--4095 to 4095 or --32767 to 32767) and requires a sign bit.
Bipolar selection displays input/output as magnitude plus sign, not twos
complement. The bipolar selection is not available when 16--bit data format is
selected.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance

PID Mode 1 Setting V+00

8--28

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Setpoint V+02
+

--

Control Output V+05

Loop
Calculation

Process Variable V+03

PID Mode 2 Setting V+01

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Data formats
00
Select data
format using
bits 0 and 1.

LSB

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

12 bit unipolar

0 to 0FFF (0 to 4095)

01

12 bit bipolar

0 to 0FFF, 8FFF to 8001

(0 to 4095, --4095 to --1)

10

15 bit unipolar

0 to 32767

11

15 bit bipolar

0 to 7FFF, FFF to 8001

(0 to 32767, --32767 to --1)

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

= sign bit

The data format determines the numerical interface between the PID loop and the
PV sensor and the control output device. This selects the data format for both the SP
and the PV.
Loop Mode
The feature called Independent of CPU mode in the dialog is not available in the
DL450. However, the DL450 does provide the three standard control modes:
Manual, Automatic, and Cascade. The sources of the three basic variables SP, PV
and control output are different for each mode.
In Manual Mode, the loop is not executing PID calculations (however, loop alarms
are still active). With regard to the loop table, the CPU stops writing values to location
V+05 (control output) for that loop. It is expected that an operator or other intelligent
source is manually controlling the output by observing the PV and writing data to the
control output as necessary to keep the process under control. The drawing below
shows the equivalent schematic diagram of manual mode operation.
Input from Operator

Manual
Control Output V+05

Loop
Calculation

Auto

In Automatic Mode, the loop operates normally and generates new control output
values. It calculates the PID equation and writes the result in location V+05 every
sample period of that loop. The equivalent schematic diagram is shown below.
Input from Operator

Manual
Control Output V+05

Loop
Calculation

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Auto

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--29

In Cascade Mode, the loop operates just as in Automatic Mode, with one important
change. The data source for the SP changes from its normal location at V+02, using
the control output value from another loop (the purpose of cascading loops is
covered later in this chapter). So in Auto or Manual modes, the loop calculation uses
the data at V+02. In Cascade Mode, the loop calculation reads the control output
from another loops parameter table.
Another loop

Cascaded loop

Control Output V+05

Loop
Calculation

Cascade
Setpoint
+

Normal SP V+02
Auto/Manual

--

Loop
Calculation

Control Output

Process Variable

As pictured below, a loop can change from one mode to another, but cannot go from
Manual Mode to Cascade. This mode change is prohibited because a loop would be
changing two data sources at the same time, and could cause a loss of control.
Manual

Automatic

Cascade

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

When the CPU is operating in the Run Mode, the normal operation of the PID loop
controller is to read the loop data and perform calculations on each scan of the RLL
program. When the CPU is placed in the Program Mode, the RLL program halts
operation and all PID loops are automatically put into the Manual Mode. The PID
parameters can then be changed if desired. Similarly, by placing the CPU in the Run
mode, the PID loops are returned to the operational mode which they were
previously in, i.e., Manual, Automatic and Cascade. With this selection you
automatically affect the modes by changing the CPU mode.

Maintenance

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

8--30

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

SP/PV Addresses
An SP/PV dialog will be made available to setup how the setpoint (SP) and the
process variable (PV) will be used in the loop. If this loop is the minor loop of a
cascaded pair, enter that control output address in the Remote SP from Cascaded
Loop Output area. It is sometimes desirable to limit the range of setpoint values
allowed to be entered. To activate this feature, check the box next to Enable Limiting.
This will activate the Upper and Lower fields for the values to be entered. Set the
limits around the SP value to prevent an operator from entering a setpoint value
outside of a safe range. The Square root box is only checked for certain PID loops,
such as a flow control loop. The Auto Transfer From I/O module will be grayed out
and not available for use by the DL450.

NOTE: Auto Transfer From I/O module is not available in the DL450 PLC at this
time, but will be available in the future.
If the Auto Transfer From I/O module is selected, an error message (shown below)
will appear.

NOTE: The SP/PV dialog can be left as it first appears for basic PID operations.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--31

Set Control Output Limits

Another dialog that will be available in the PID setup will be the Output dialog. The
control output address, V+05, (determined by the PID loop table beginning address)
will be in view. Enter the output range limits, Upper Limit and Lower Limit, that will
meet the requirement of the process and which will agree with the data format that
has been selected. For a basic PID operation using a 12 bit output module, set the
Upper Limit to 4095 and leave the Lower Limit set to 0. The Auto transfer to I/O
module is not available for use by the DL450.The Output Data format area is not
available and is grayed out if Common format has been chosen (see page 8--26).

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

WARNING: If the Upper Limit is set to zero, the output will never get above
zero. In effect, there will be no control output.

Maintenance

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

8--32

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Enter PID Tuning Parameters

Another PID setup dialog, Tuning, is for entering the PID parameters shown as: Gain
(Proportional Gain), Reset (Integral Gain) and Rate (Derivative Gain)

Recall the position and velocity forms of the PID loop equations which were
introduced earlier. The equations basically show the three components of the PID
calculation: Proportional Gain (P), Integral Gain (I) and Derivative Gain (D). The
following diagram shows a form of the PID calculation in which the control output is
the sum of the proportional gain, integral gain and derivative gain. With each
calculation of the loop, each term receives the same error signal value.

Setpoint
+

Error Term

--

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

Process Variable

Loop Calculation
P
I
D

+
+

Control Output

The P, I and D gains are 4--digit BCD numbers with values from 0000 to 9999. They
contain an implied decimal point in the middle, so the values are actually 00.00 to
99.99. Some gain values have units y Proportional gain has no unit, Integral gain
may be selected in seconds or in minutes, and Derivative gain is in seconds.
Gain (Proportional Gain) y This is the most basic gain of the three. Values range
from 0000 to 9999, but they are used internally as xx.xx. An entry of 0000
effectively removes the proportional term from the PID equation. This
accommodates applications which need integral--only loops.
Reset (Integral Gain) y Values range from 0001 to 9998, but they are used
internally as xx.xx. An entry of 0000 or 9999 causes the integral gain to be ,
effectively removing the integrator term from the PID equation. This accommodates
applications which need proportional--only loops. The units of integral gain may be
either seconds or minutes, as shown in the above dialog.
Rate (Derivative Gain) y Values which can be entered range from 0001 to 9999,
but they are used internally as xx.xx. An entry of 0000 allows removal of the
derivative term from the PID equation (a common practice). This accommodates
applications which require only proportional and/or integral loops. Most control
loops will operate as a PI loop.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--33

NOTE: You may elect to leave the tuning dialog blank and enter the tuning
parameters in the DirectSOFT PID View.
Derivative Gain Limiting
The derivative gain (rate) has an optional gain--limiting feature. This is provided
because the derivative gain reacts badly to PV signal noise or other causes of
sudden PV fluctuations. The function of the gain--limiting is shown in the diagram
below.
Loop Calculation
P
Setpoint

Error Term

--

Process Variable

Loop Table
00XX

Integral

+
+

Derivative

Control
Output

0
Derivative,
gain-limited

PID Mode 1 Setting V+00

Derivative Gain Limit

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Derivative gain limit select

The gain limit can be particularly useful during loop tuning. Most loops can tolerate
only a little derivative gain without going into uncontrolled oscillations.
If Derivative Gain Limiting is selected, a unit of 0--20 for Limit must also be entered.
NOTE: When first configuring a loop, its best to use the standard error term until
after the loop is tuned. Once the loop is tuned, you will be able to tell if these functions
will enhance control. The Error Squared and/or Enable Deadband can be selected
later in the PID setup. Also, values are not required to be entered in the Tuning
dialog, but they can set later in the DirectSOFT PID View.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance

Error Term Selection

The error term is internal to the CPUs PID loop controller, and is generated again in
each PID calculation. Although its data is not directly accessible, you can easily
calculate it by subtracting: Error = (SP -- PV). The PID calculation operates on this
value linearly to give the result. However, a few applications can benefit from
non--linear control. The Error--squared method of non--linear control exaggerates
large errors and diminishes small error
Error Squared y When selected, the squared error function simply squares the
error term (but preserves the original algebraic sign), which is used in the
calculation. This affects the Control Output by diminishing its response to smaller
error values, but maintaining its response to larger errors. Some situations in which
the error squared term might be useful:
S Noisy PV signal -- using a squared error term can reduce the effect of
low--frequency electrical noise on the PV, which will make the control
system jittery. A squared error maintains the response to larger errors.
S Non--linear process -- some processes (such as chemical pH control)
require non--linear controllers for best results. Another application is
surge tank control, where the Control Output signal must be smooth.

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

V+25

Proportional

8--34

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Enable Deadband y When selected, the enable deadband function takes a range
of small error values near zero, and simply substitutes zero as the value of the error.
If the error is larger than the deadband range, then the error value is used normally.
Freeze Bias
The term reset windup refers to an undesirable characteristic of integrator behavior
which occurs naturally under certain conditions. Refer to the figure below. Suppose
the PV signal becomes disconnected, and the PV value goes to zero. While this is a
serious loop fault, it is made worse by reset windup. Notice the bias (reset) term
keeps integrating normally during the PV disconnect, until its upper limit is reached.
When the PV signal returns, the bias value is saturated (windup) and takes a long
time to return to normal. The loop output consequently has an extended recovery
time. Until recovery, the output level is wrong and causes further problems.
PV

PV loss

Reset windup

PV loss
Freeze bias enabled

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Bias

Output
Recovery time

Recovery time

In the second PV signal loss episode in the figure, the freeze bias feature is enabled.
It causes the bias value to freeze when the control output goes to its range limits.
Much of the reset windup is thus avoided, and the output recovery time is much less.
For most applications, the freeze bias feature will work with the loop as described
above. It is suggested to enable this feature by selecting it in the dialog. Bit 10 of PID
Mode 1 Setting (V+00) word can also be set in RLL.
NOTE: The freeze bias feature stops the bias term from changing when the control
output reaches the end of the data range. If you have set limits on the control output
other than the range (i.e, 0--4095 for a unipolar/12 bit loop), the bias term still uses
the end of range for the stopping point and bias freeze will not work.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--35

Setup the PID Alarms

Although the setup of the PID alarms is optional, you surely would not want to
operate a process without monitoring it. The performance of a process control loop
may generally be measured by how closely the process variable matches the
setpoint. Most process control loops in industry operate continuously, and will
eventually lose control of the PV due to an error condition. Process alarms are vital in
early discovery of a loop error condition and can alert plant personnel to manually
control a loop or take other measures until the error condition has been repaired.
The alarm thresholds are fully programmable, and each type of alarm may be
independently enabled and monitored. The following diagram shows the Alarm
dialog in the PID setup which simplifies the alarm setup.

High Alarm
PV
Low Alarm
Low--low Alarm

Loop Table
V+16

XXXX

High-high Alarm

V+15

XXXX

High Alarm

V+14

XXXX

Low Alarm

V+13

XXXX

Low-low Alarm

NOTE: The Alarm dialog can be left as it first appears, without alarm entries. The
alarms can then be setup in the DirectSOFT PID View.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance

High--high Alarm

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Monitor Limit Alarms

Checking this box will allow all of the PV limit alarms to be monitored once the limits
are entered. The PV absolute value alarms are organized as two upper and two
lower alarms. The alarm status is false as long as the PV value remains in the region
between the upper and lower alarms, as shown below. The alarms nearest the safe
zone are named High Alarm and Low Alarm. If the loop loses control, the PV will
cross one of these thresholds first. Therefore, you can program the appropriate
alarm threshold values in the loop table locations shown below to the right. The data
format is the same as the PV and SP (12--bit or 15--bit). The threshold values for
these alarms should be set to give an operator an early warning if the process loses
control.

8--36

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

If the process remains out of control for some time, the PV will eventually cross one
of the outer alarm thresholds, named High-high alarm and Low-low alarm. Their
threshold values are programmed using the loop table registers listed above. A
High-high or Low-low alarm indicates a serious condition exists, and needs the
immediate attention of the operator.
The PV Absolute Value Alarms are
reported in the four bits in the PID Mode
and Alarm Status word in the loop table, as
shown to the right. We highly recommend
using ladder logic to monitor these bits.
The bit-of-word instructions make this
easy to do. Additionally, you can monitor
PID alarms using DirectSOFT.
Red Deviation Alarm
Yellow Deviation Alarm

Yellow Deviation Alarm

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Red Deviation Alarm

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

High-high Alarm
High Alarm
Low Alarm
Low-low Alarm

Red
Yellow
Green

SP

PID Mode and Alarm Status V+06

Yellow

Loop Table
V+17

XXXX

Yellow Deviation Alarm

V+20

XXXX

Red Deviation Alarm

Red

The thresholds define zones, which fluctuate with the SP value. The green zone
which surrounds the SP value represents a safe (no alarm) condition. The yellow
zones lie just outside the green zone, and the red zones are just beyond those.
The PV Deviation Alarms are reported in
the two bits in the PID Mode and Alarm
Status word in the loop table, as shown to
the right. We highly recommend using
ladder logic to monitor these bits. The
bit-of-word instructions make this easy to
do. Additionally, you can monitor PID
alarms using DirectSOFT.

PID Mode and Alarm Status V+06

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Red Deviation
Yellow Deviation

The PV Deviation Alarm can be independently enabled and disabled from the other
PV alarms, using bit 13 of the PID Mode 1 Setting V+00 word.
Remember, the alarm hysteresis feature works in conjunction with both the deviation
and absolute value alarms, and is discussed at the end of this section.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--37

PV Rate--of--Change Alarm
An excellent way to get an early warning of a process fault is to monitor the
rate-of-change of the PV. Most batch processes have large masses and
slowly-changing PV values. A relatively fast-changing PV will result from a broken
signal wire for either the PV or control output, a SP value error, or other causes. If the
operator responds to a PV Rate-of-Change Alarm quickly and effectively, the PV
absolute value will not reach the point where the material in process would be ruined.
The DL450 loop controller provides a programmable PV Rate-of-Change Alarm, as
shown below. The rate-of-change is specified in PV units change per loop sample
time. This value is programmed into the loop table location V+21.
Loop Table
PV slope OK

PV slope excessive

V+21

XXXX

PV Rate-of-Change Alarm

PV
PID Mode and Alarm Status V+06

rate-of-change alarm
Sample time

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Sample time

As an example, suppose the PV is temperature for our process, and we want an

alarm when the temperature changes faster than 15 degrees/minute. We must know
PV counts per degree and the loop sample rate. Then, suppose the PV value (in
V+03 location) represents 10 counts per degree, and the loop sample rate is 2
seconds. We will use the formula below to convert our engineering units to
counts/sample period:
Alarm Rate-of-Change =

15 degrees
1 minute

10 counts / degree
30 loop samples / min.

150
30

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

PV Rate of
Change Alarm

5 counts / sample period

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance

From the calculation result, we would program the value 5 in the loop table for the
rate-of-change. The PV Rate-of-Change Alarm can be independently enabled and
disabled from the other PV alarms, using bit 14 of the PID Mode 1 Setting V+00 word.
The alarm hysteresis feature (discussed next) does not affect the Rate-of-Change
Alarm.

8--38

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

PV Alarm Hysteresis
The PV Absolute Value Alarm and PV Deviation Alarm are programmed using
threshold values. When the absolute value or deviation exceeds the threshold, the
alarm status becomes true. Real-world PV signals have some noise on them, which
can cause some fluctuation in the PV value in the CPU. As the PV value crosses an
alarm threshold, its fluctuations cause the alarm to be intermittent and annoy
process operators. The solution is to use the PV Alarm Hysteresis feature.
The PV Alarm Hysteresis amount is programmable from 1 to 200 (binary/decimal).
When using the PV Deviation Alarm, the programmed hysteresis amount must be
less than the programmed deviation amount. The figure below shows how the
hysteresis is applied when the PV value goes past a threshold and descends back
through it.
Alarm threshold
Hysteresis
Loop Table

PV

V+22

XXXX

PV Alarm Hysteresis

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Alarm 1
0

The hysteresis amount is applied after the threshold is crossed, and toward the safe
zone. In this way, the alarm activates immediately above the programmed threshold
value. It delays turning off until the PV value has returned through the threshold by
the hysteresis amount.
Alarm Programming Error
The PV Alarm threshold values must have
certain mathematical relationships to be
valid. The requirements are listed below. If
not met, the Alarm Programming Error bit
will be set, as indicated to the right.

PID Mode and Alarm Status V+06

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Alarm Programming Error

PV Absolute Alarm value requirements:

Low-low < Low < High < High-high
S PV Deviation Alarm requirements:
Yellow < Red
Loop Calculation Overflow/Underflow Error
S

This error occurs whenever the output

reaches its upper or lower limit and the PV
does not reach the setpoint. A typical
example might be when a valve is stuck,
the output is at its limit, but the PV has not
reached setpoint.

PID Mode and Alarm Status V+06

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Loop Calculation
Overflow/Underflow Error

NOTE: Overflow/underflow can be alarmed in PID View. The optional C--more

operator interface panel (see the automationdirect.com website) can also be setup
to read these error bits using the PID Faceplate templates.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--39

Ramp/Soak
R/S (Ramp/Soak) is the last dialog available in the PID setup. The basic PID does
not require any entries to be made in order to operate the PID loop. Ramp/Soak will
be discussed in another section in this chapter.

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Complete the PID Setup

Once you have filled in the necessary information for the basic PID setup, the
configuration should be saved. The icons on the Setup PID dialog will allow you to
save the configuration to the PLC and to disk. The save to icons have the arrow
pointing to the PLC and disk. The read from icons have the arrows pointing away
from the PLC and disk.
An optional feature is available with the Doc tab in the Setup PID window. You enter a
name and description for the loop. This is useful if there are more than one PID loop
in your application.

Maintenance

NOTE: It is good practice to save your project after setting up the PID loop by
selecting File from the menu toolbar, then Save project > to disk. In addition to
saving your entire project, all the PID parameters are also saved.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

8--40

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

PID Loop Tuning

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Once you have set up a PID loop, it must be tuned in order for it to work. The goal of
loop tuning is to adjust the loop gains so the loop has optimal performance in
dynamic conditions. The quality of a loops performance may generally be judged by
how well the PV follows the SP after a SP step change. It is important to keep in mind
that understanding the process is fundamental to getting a well designed control
loop. Sensors must be in appropriate locations and valves must be sized correctly
with appropriate trim. PID control does not have typical values. There isnt one
control process that is identical to another.
Manual Tuning vs. Auto Tuning
You may enter the PID gain values to tune your loops (manual tuning), or you can
rely on the PID processing engine in the CPU to automatically calculate the gain
values (auto tuning). Most experienced process engineers will have a favorite
method; the DL450 will accommodate either preference. The use of auto tuning can
eliminate much of the trial--and--error of the manual tuning approach, especially if
you do not have a lot of loop tuning experience. However, performing the auto tuning
procedure will get the gains close to optimal values, but additional manual tuning can
get the gain values to their optimal values.
WARNING: Only authorized personnel fully familiar with all aspects of the
process should make changes that affect the loop tuning constants. Using the
loop auto tune procedures will affect the process, including inducing large
changes in the control output value. Make sure you thoroughly consider the
impact of any changes to minimize the risk of injury to personnel or damage to
equipment. The auto tune in the DL450 is not intended to be used as a
replacement for your process knowledge.
Open--Loop Test

Whether you use manual or auto tuning, it is very important to verify basic
characteristics of a newly--installed process before attempting to tune it. With the
loop in Manual Mode, verify the following items for each new loop.
S Setpoint y verify that the SP source can generate a setpoint. Put the
PLC in Run Mode and leave the loop in Manual Mode, then monitor the
loop table location V+02 to see the SP value(s). (If you are using the
ramp/soak generator, test it now).
S Process Variable y verify that the PV value is an accurate
measurement, and the PV data arriving in the loop table location V+03
is correct. If the PV signal is very noisy, consider filtering the input either
through hardware (RC low--pass filter), or using the filter in this chapter.
S Control Output y if it is safe to do so, manually change the output a
small amount (perhaps 10%) and observe its affect on the process
variable. Verify the process is direct--acting or reverse acting, and check
the setting for the control output (inverted or non--inverted). Make sure
the control output upper and lower limits are not equal to each other.
S Sample Rate y while operating open--loop, this is a good time to find
the ideal sample rate (see Configure the PID Loop beginning on page
8--25). However, if you are going to use auto tuning, the auto tuning
procedure will automatically calculate the sample rate in addition to the
PID gains.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Manual Tuning
Procedure

8--41

It is not necessary to try to obtain the best values for the P, I and D parameters in the
PID loop by trial and error. Following is a typical procedure for tuning a temperature
control loop which you may use to tune your loop.
Monitor the values of SP, PV and CV with a loop trending instrument or use the PID
View feature in DirectSOFT (see page 8--49).
NOTE: We recommend using the PID View to select manual for the vertical scale
feature, for both SP/PV area and Bias/Control Output areas. The auto scaling
feature would otherwise change the vertical scale on the process parameters and
add confusion to the loop tuning process.
S

S
S
S

Increase the Proportional gain in small increments, such as 4, 6, 7, etc.

until the control output response begins to oscillate. This is the
Proportional gain that should be recorded.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance

The response may take awhile, but you will see that there isnt any oscillation. This
response is not desirable since it takes a long time to correct the error; also, there is a
difference between the SP and the PV.
S Increase the Proportional gain, for example to 2.0. The control output
will be greater and the response time will be quicker. The trend should
resemble the figure below.

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Adjust the gains so the Proportional Gain = 0.5 or 1.0 (1.0 is a good
value based on experience), Integral Gain = 9999 (this basically
eliminates reset) and Derivative Gain = 0000. This disables the
integrator and derivative terms, and provides some proportional gain.
Check the bias value in the PID View and set it to zero.
Set the SP to a value equal to 50% of the full range.
Now, select Auto Mode. If the loop will not stay in Auto Mode, check the
troubleshooting tips at the end of this chapter. Allow the PV to stabilize
around the 50% point of the range.
Change the SP to the 60% point of the range.

8--42

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

S
S

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

Now, return the Proportional gain to the stable response, for example,
9.7. The error, SP--PV, should be small, but not at zero.
Next, add a small amount of Integral gain (reset) in order for the error to
reach zero. Begin by using 80 seconds (adjust in minutes if necessary).
The error should get smaller.
Set the Integral gain to a lower value, such as 50 for a different
response. If there is no response, continue to decrease the reset value
until the response becomes unstable. See the figure below.

For discussion, let us say that a reset value of 35 made the control
output unstable. Return the reset value to the stable value, such as 38.
Be careful with this adjustment since the oscillation can destroy the
process.
The control output response should be optimal now, without a Derivative
gain. The example recorded values are: Proportional gain = 9.7 and
Integral gain = 38 seconds. Note that the error has been minimized.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--43

The foregone method is the most common method used to tune a PID loop.
Derivative gain is almost never used in a temperature control loop. This method can
also be used for other control loops, but other parameters may need to be added for
a stable control output.
Test your loop for a high PV of 80% and again for a low PV of 20%, and correct the
values if necessary. Small adjustments of the parameters can make the control
output more precise or more unstable. It is sometimes acceptable to have a small
overshoot to make the control output react quicker.
The derivative gain can be helpful for those control loops which are not controlling
temperature. For these loops, try adding a value of 0.5 for the derivative gain and see
if this improves the control output. If there is little or no response, increase the
derivative by increments of 0.5 until there is an improvement to the output trend.
Recall that the derivative gain reacts with a rate of change of the error.

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)
Maintenance

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

8--44

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Auto Tuning
Procedure

The auto tuning feature for the DL450 loop controller will only run once each time it is
enabled in the PID table. Therefore, auto tuning does not run continuously during
operation (this would be adaptive control). Whenever there is a substantial change
in loop dynamics, such as mass of process, size of actuator, etc., the tuning process
will need to be repeated in order to derive new gains required for optimal control.

Once the physical loop components are connected to the PLC, auto tuning can be
initiated within DirectSOFT (see the DirectSOFT Programming Software Manual),
and it can be used to establish initial PID parameter values. Auto tuning is the best
guess the CPU can do after some trial tests.
The loop controller offers both closed--loop and open--loop methods. The following
sections describe how to use the auto tuning feature, and what occurs in open and
closed--loop auto tuning.
The controls for the auto tuning function use three bits in the PID Mode 2 word V+01,
as shown below. DirectSOFT will manipulate these bits automatically when you use
the auto tune feature within DirectSOFT. Or, you may have your ladder logic access
these bits directly for allowing control from another source such as a dedicated
operator interface. The individual control bits allow you to start the auto tune
procedure, select PID or PI tuning and select closed--loop or open--loop tuning. If
you select PI tuning, the auto tune procedure leaves the derivative gain at 0. The
Loop Mode and Alarm Status word V+06 reports the auto tune status as shown. Bit
12 will be on (1) during the auto tune cycle, automatically returning to off (0) when
done.

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

WARNING: Only authorized personnel fully familiar with all aspects of the
process should make changes that affect the loop tuning constants. Using the
loop auto tuning procedures will affect the process, including inducing large
changes in the control output value. Make sure you thoroughly consider the
impact of any changes to minimize the risk of injury to personnel or damage to
equipment. The auto tune in the DL450 is not intended to be used as a
replacement for your process knowledge.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--45

Open--Loop Auto Tuning

During an open--loop auto tuning cycle, the loop controller operates as shown in the
diagram below. Before starting this procedure, place the loop in Manual Mode and
ensure the PV and control output values are in the middle of their ranges (away from
the end points).

NOTE: In theory, the SP value does not matter in this case, because the loop is not
closed. However, the requirement of the firmware is that the SP value must be more
than 5% of the PV range from the actual PV before starting the auto tune cycle (for
the DL450, 12 bit PV should be 205 counts or more below the SP for forward--acting
loops, or 205 counts or more above the SP for reverse--acting loops).

Maintenance

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

When auto tuning, the loop controller induces a step change on the output and
simply observes the response of the PV. From the PV response, the auto tune
function calculates the gains and the sample time. It automatically places the results
in the corresponding registers in the loop table.
The following timing diagram shows the events which occur in the open--loop auto
tuning cycle. The auto tune function takes control of the control output and induces a
10%--of--span step change. If the PV change which the loop controller observes is
less than 2%, then the step change on the output is increased to 20%--of--span.
S
When Auto Tune starts, step change output m = 10%
S
During Auto Tune, the controller output reached the full scale positive
limit. Auto Tune stopped and the Auto Tune Error bit in the Alarm word
bit turned on.
S
When PV change is under 2%, output is changed at 20%. Open Loop
Auto Tune Cycle Wave: Step Response Method.

8--46

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

When the loop tuning observations are complete, the loop controller computes Rr
(maximum slope in %/sec.) and Lr (dead time in sec). The auto tune function
computes the gains according to the Zeigler--Nichols equations, shown below:
PID Tuning

SP Range

P = 1.2* nm/LrRr

P = 0.9* nm/LrRr

I = 2.0* Lr

I = 3.33* Lr

D = 0.5* Lr

D=0

Sample Rate = 0.056* Lr

Sample Rate = 0.12* Lr

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

nm = Output step change (10% = 0.1, 20% = 0.2)

We highly recommend using DirectSOFT for the auto tuning interface. The duration
of each auto tuning cycle will depend on the mass of the process. A slowly--changing
PV will result in a longer auto tune cycle time. When the auto tuning is complete, the
proportional, integral, and derivative gain values are automatically updated in loop
table locations V+10, V+11, and V+12 respectively. The sample time in V+07 is also
updated automatically. You can test the validity of the values the auto tuning
procedure yields by measuring the closed--loop response of the PV to a step change
in the output. The instructions on how to do this are in the section on the manual
tuning procedure (located prior to this auto tuning section).
Closed--Loop Auto Tuning
During a closed--loop auto tuning cycle the loop controller operates as shown in the
diagram below.

When auto tuning, the loop controller imposes a square wave on the output. Each
transition of the output occurs when the PV value crosses over/under the SP value.
Therefore, the frequency of the limit cycle is roughly proportional to the mass of the
process. From the PV response, the auto tune function calculates the gains and the
sample time. It automatically places the results in the corresponding registers in the
loop table.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--47

The following timing diagram shows the events which occur in the closed--loop auto
tuning cycle. The auto tune function examines the direction of the offset of the PV
from the SP. The auto tune function then takes control of the control output and
induces a full--span step change in the opposite direction. Each time the sign of the
error (SP y PV) changes, the output changes full--span in the opposite direction.
This proceeds through three full cycles.

Kpc = 4M / ( X0)

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

*Mmax = Output Value upper limit setting. Mmin = Output Value lower limit setting.
* This example is direct--acting.
When set to reverse--acting, the output will be inverted. When the loop tuning
observations are complete, the loop controller computes To (bump period) and Xo
(amplitude of the PV). Then it uses these values to compute Kpc (sensitive limit) and
Tpc (period limit). From these values, the loop controller auto tune function
computes the PID gains and the sample rate according to the Zeigler--Nichols
equations shown below:
Tpc = 0

M = Amplitude of output
PI Tuning

P = 0.45 Kpc

P = 0.30 Kpc

I = 0.60 Tpc

I = 1.00 Tpc

D = 0.10 Tpc

D=0

Sample Rate = 0.014 Tpc

Sample Rate = 0.03 Tpc

Auto Tuning Error

In open--loop tuning, if the auto tune error bit (bit 13 of loop Mode/Alarm status word
V+06) is on, please verify the PV and SP values are at least 5% of full scale
difference, as required by the auto tune function.
NOTE: If your PV fluctuates rapidly, you probably need to create a filter in ladder
logic (see example on page 8--54).

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance

PID Tuning

8--48

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Use DirectSOFT 5
Data View with PID
View
Open a New Data
View Window

Open PID View

The Data View window is a very useful tool which can be used to help tune your PID
loop. You can compare the variables in the PID View with the actual values in the
V--memory location with Data View.
A new Data View window can be opened in any one of three ways; the menu bar
Debug > Data View > New, the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + Shift + F3 or the Data
button on the Status toolbar. By default, the Data View window is assigned Data1 as
the default name. This name can be changed for the current view using the Options
dialog. The following diagram is an example of a newly opened Data View. The
window will open next to the Ladder View by default.

The Data View window can be used just as it is shown above for troubleshooting your
PID logic, and it can be most useful when tuning the PID loop.
The PID View can only be opened after a loop has been setup in your ladder program
and the programming computer is connected to the PLC (online). PID View is
opened by selecting it from the View submenu on the Menu bar, View > PID View.
The PID View can also be opened by clicking on the PID View button from the PLC
Setup toolbar if it is in view.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--49

The PID View will open and appear over the Ladder View which can be brought into
view by clicking on its tab. When using the Data View and the PID View together,
each view can be sized for better use as shown on the facing page.

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

The two views are now ready to be used to tune your loop. You will be able to see
where the PID values have been set and see the process that it is controlling.

Maintenance

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

8--50

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

The diagram below illustrates how the to use the views to see the current SP, PV and
Output values, along with the other PID addresses. Refer to the Loop Table
Definitions page 8--21 for details of each word in the table. This is also a good data
type reference for each word in the table.
Scale the time axis of the viewing

The trend can be cleared and

window by using this input box.

restarted from the left at anytime.

Process Variable and
Setpoint trends are
color coded.

The loop name area

turns red whenever there is an

P
I
D

With both windows positioned in this manner, you are able to see where the PID
values have been set and see the process that it is controlling.

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

overflow error.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--51

Using Other PID Features

How to Change
Loop Modes

The first three bits of the PID Mode 1 word

V+00 requests the operating mode of the
corresponding loop. Note: These bits are
mode change requests, not commands
(certain conditions can prohibit a
particular mode change -- see next page).

PID Mode 1 Setting V+00

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Manual
Cascade
Automatic

The normal state of these mode request bits is 000. To request a mode change, you
must SET the corresponding bit to a 1, for one scan. The PID loop controller
automatically resets the bits back to 000 after it reads the mode change request.
Methods of requesting mode changes are:
S DirectSOFTs PID View -- this is the easiest method. Use the drop--down
menu, or click on one of the radio buttons if using older DirectSOFT versions,
and the appropriate bit will be set.

Ladder program-- ladder logic can request any loop mode when the PLC is in
Run Mode. This will be necessary after application startup.

X0

Go to Auto Mode
B2000.1
SET

Operator panel -- interface the operators panel to ladder logic using standard
methods, then use the technique above to set the mode bit.

Since we can only request mode changes, the PID loop controller decides when to
permit mode changes and provides the loop mode status. It reports the current mode
on bits 0, 1, and 2 of the Loop Mode and Alarm Status word, location V+06 in the loop
table. The parallel request / monitoring functions are shown in the figure below. The
figure also shows the mode-dependent two possible SP sources, and the two
possible Control Output sources.
Input from Operator

Manual

Cascade

Control Output
Setpoint
+

Normal Source
Auto/Manual

Error Term

--

Loop
Calculation

Auto/Cascade

Process Variable
Mode Select
PID Mode
Control

PID Mode 1 Setting V+00

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Mode Request

Cascade

Manual
Automatic

Loop Mode and Alarm Status V+06

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Mode Monitoring

Cascade

Manual
Automatic

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance

Control Output
from another loop

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Use the rung shown to the right to SET the

mode bit on (do not use an out coil). On a
0--1 transition of X0, the rung sets the Auto
bit = 1. The loop controller resets it.

8--52

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Operator Panel
Control of
PID Modes

Since the modes Manual, Auto, and Cascade are the most fundamental and
important PID loop controls, you may want to hard-wire mode control switches to
an operators panel. Most applications will need only Manual and Auto selections
(Cascade is used in a few advanced applications). Remember that mode controls
are really mode request bits, and the actual loop mode is indicated elsewhere.
The following figure shows an operators panel using momentary push-buttons to
request PID mode changes. The panels mode indicators do not connect to the
switches, but interface to the corresponding data locations.
Operators Panel
Manual
Auto

Mode Request
PID Mode 1 Setting V+00

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Cascade

Mode Monitoring

Loop Mode and Alarm Status V+06

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

PLC Modes Effect

on Loop Modes

The modes of the PLC (Program, Run) interact with the loops as a group. The
following summarizes this interaction:
S When the PLC is in Program Mode, all loops are placed in Manual Mode
and no loop calculations occur. However, note that output modules
(including analog outputs) turn off in PLC Program Mode. So, actual
manual control is not possible when the PLC is in Program Mode.
S The only time the CPU will allow a loop mode change is during PLC run
Mode operation. As such, the CPU records the modes of all 16 loops as
the desired mode of operation. If power failure and restoration occurs
during PLC run Mode, the CPU returns all loops to their prior mode
(which could be Manual, Auto, or Cascade).
S On a Program-to-Run mode transition, the CPU forces each loop to
return to its prior mode recorded during the last PLC Run Mode.
S You can add and configure new loops only when the PLC is in Program
Mode. New loops automatically begin in Manual Mode.

Loop Mode
Override

In normal conditions and during PLC Run Mode operation, the mode of a loop is
determined by the request to V+00, bits 0, 1, and 2. However, a condition exists
which will prevent a requested mode change from occurring:
S A major loop of a cascaded pair of loops cannot go from Manual to Auto
until its minor loop is in Cascade mode.
In other situations, the PID loop controller will automatically change the mode of the
loop to ensure safe operation:
S A loop which develops an error condition automatically goes to Manual.
S If the minor loop of a cascaded pair of loops leaves Cascade Mode for
any reason, its major loop automatically goes to Manual Mode.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--53

Creating an Analog The DL450 does not support a built in filter, however, your analog inputs can be
filtered effectively using the following RLL program example. Be sure to change the
Filter in Ladder
example memory locations to those that fit your application.
Logic
Filtering can induce a 1 part in 1000 error in your output because of rounding.
Because of the rounding error, you should not use zero or full scale as alarm points.
Additionally, the smaller the filter constant the greater the smoothing effect, but the
slower the response time. Be certain that a slower response is acceptable in
controlling your process.
SP1

LD
V2000

BIN

BTOR

SUBR
V1400

Loads the analog signal, which is a BCD value

and has been loaded from V-memory location
V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is
always on.
Converts the BCD value in the accumulator
to binary. This instruction is not needed if the
analog value is originally brought in as a
binary number.
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.

MULR
R0.2

Multiplies the real number in the

accumulator by 0.2 (the filter factor),
and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value.

ADDR
V1400

Adds the real number stored in

location V1400 to the real number
filtered value in the accumulator, and
stores the result in the accumulator.

OUTD
V1400

BCD

OUT
V1402

Copies the value in the accumulator

to location V1400.

Converts the real number in the

accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a BCD number. Note: the BCD instruction
is not needed for PID loop PV (loop PV is a
binary number).
Loads the BCD number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V1402 to use
in your application or PID loop.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance

RTOB

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Subtracts the real number stored in location

V1400 from the real number in the
accumulator, and stores the result in the
accumulator. V1400 is the designated
workspace in this example.

8--54

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Use the
DirectSOFT 5 Filter
Intelligent Box
Instruction

For those who are using DirectSOFT 5, you have the opportunity to use the Analog
Helper Intelligent Boxes (IBox) instructions. Following is one example which is
available. IBox instruction IB--402, Filter Over Time in Binary (decimal) will perform a
first--order filter on the Raw Data on a defined time interval. The equation is,

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

New = Old + [(Raw -- Old)/FDC] where,

New = New Filtered Value
Old = Old Filtered Value
FDC = Filter Divisor Constant
Raw = Raw Data
The Filter Divisor Constant is an integer in the range K1 to K100, such that
if it equaled K1, then no filtering is performed.

FilterB Example

The rate at which the calculation is performed is specified by time in hundredths of a

second (0.01 seconds) as the Filter Freq Time parameter. Note that this Timer
instruction is embedded in the IBox and must NOT be used any other place in your
program. Power flow controls whether the calculation is enabled. If it is disabled, the
Filter Value is not updated. On the first scan from Program to Run mode, the Filter
Value is initialized to 0 to give the calculation a consistent starting point.
Since the following binary filter example does not write directly to the PID PV
location, the BCD filter could be used with BCD values and then converted to BIN.
Following is an example of how the FilterB IBox is used in a ladder program. The
instruction is used to filter a binary value that is in V2000. Timer (T1) is set to 0.5
seconds, the rate at which the filter calculation will be performed. The filter constant
is set to 3.0. A larger value will increase the smoothing effect of the filter. A value of 1
results with no filtering. The filtered value will be placed in V2100.

See DL405 IBox Instructions PLC User Manual Supplement for more detailed
information.
NOTE: In order to use the IBox instructions found in DirectSOFT 5, the D4--450
CPU must have firmware version 3.30 or higher installed.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--55

Ramp/Soak Generator
Introduction

Our discussion of basic loop operation noted the setpoint for a loop will be generated
in various ways, depending on the loop operating mode and programming
preferences. In the figure below, the ramp/soak generator is one of the ways the SP
may be generated. It is the responsibility of your ladder program to ensure only one
source attempts to write the SP value at V+02 at any particular time.

If the SP for your process rarely changes or can tolerate step changes, you probably
will not need to use the ramp/soak generator. However, some processes require
precisely--controlled SP value changes. The ramp/soak generator can greatly
reduce the amount of programming required for these applications.

Maintenance

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

The terms ramp and soak have special

meanings in the process control industry,
and refer to desired setpoint (SP) values in
temperature control applications. In the figure to the right, the setpoint increases during
the ramp segment. It remains steady at one
value during the soak segment.
Complex SP profiles can be generated by specifying a series of ramp/soak
segments. The ramp segments are specified in SP units per second. The soak time
is also programmable in minutes.
It is instructive to view the ramp/soak generator as a dedicated function to generate
SP values, as shown below. It has two categories of inputs which determine the SP
values generated. The ramp/soak table must be programmed in advance,
containing the values that will define the ramp/soak profile. The loop reads from the
table during each PID calculation as necessary. The ramp/soak controls are bits in a
special loop table word that control the real--time start/stop functionality of the
ramp/soak generator. The ladder program can monitor the status of the ramp soak
profile (current ramp/segment number).

8--56

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Now that we have described the general ramp/soak generator operation, we list its
specific features:
S
Each loop has its own ramp/soak generator (use is optional).
S
You may specify up to eight ramp/soak steps (16 segments).
S
The ramp soak generator can run anytime the PLC is in Run mode. Its
operation is independent of the loop mode (Manual or Auto).
S
Ramp/soak real--time controls include Start, Hold, Resume, and Jog.
S
Ramp/soak monitoring includes Profile Complete, Soak Deviation (SP
minus PV), and current ramp/soak step number.
The following figure shows a SP profile consisting of ramp/soak segment pairs. The
segments are individually numbered as steps from 1 to 16. The slope of each of the
ramp may be either increasing or decreasing. The ramp/soak generator
automatically knows whether to increase or decrease the SP based on the relative
values of a ramps end points. These values come from the ramp/soak table.

Ramp/Soak Table

The parameters which define the ramp/soak

profile for a loop are in a ramp/soak table.
Each loop may have its own ramp/soak table,
but it is optional. Recall the Loop Parameter
table consists a 32--word block of memory for
each loop, and together they occupy one contiguous memory area. However, the ramp/soak
table for a loop is individually located, because
it is optional for each loop. An address pointer
in location V+34 in loop table specifies the
starting location of the ramp/soak table.
In the example to the right, the loop parameter
tables for Loop #1 and #2 occupy contiguous
32--word blocks as shown. Each has a pointer
to its ramp/soak table, independently located
elsewhere in user V--memory. Of course, you
may locate all the tables in one group, as long
as they do not overlap.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--57

The parameters in the ramp/soak table must be user--defined. the most convenient
way is to use DirectSOFT, which features a special editor for this table. Four
parameters are required to define a ramp and soak segment pair, as pictured below.
S Ramp End Value y specifies the destination SP value for the end of
the ramp. Use the same data format for this number as you use for the
SP. It may be above or below the beginning SP value, so the slope
could be up or down (we dont have to know the starting SP value for
ramp #1).
S Ramp Slope y specifies the SP increase in counts (units) per second.
It is a BCD number from 00.00 to 99.99 (uses implied decimal point).
S Soak Duration y specifies the time for the soak segment in minutes,
ranging from 000.1 to 999.9 minutes in BCD (implied decimal point).
S Soak PV Deviation y (optional) specifies an allowable PV deviation
above and below the SP value during the soak period. A PV deviation
alarm status bit is generated by the ramp/soak generator.
Ramp End
SP Value

Soak
duration

segment becomes active

Ramp/Soak Table
V+00

XXXX

Ramp End SP Value

V+01

XXXX

Ramp Slope

V+02

XXXX

Soak Duration

V+03

XXXX

Soak PV Deviation

The ramp segment becomes active when the previous soak segment ends. If the
ramp is the first segment, it becomes active when the ramp/soak generator is
started, and automatically assumes the present SP as the starting SP.
Step

Addr
Offset

Step

+ 00
+ 01

1
1

Ramp End SP Value

Ramp Slope

+ 20
+ 21

9
9

Ramp End SP Value

Ramp Slope

+ 02

Soak Duration

+ 22

10

Soak Duration

+ 03

Soak PV Deviation

+ 23

10

Soak PV Deviation

+ 04

Ramp End SP Value

+ 24

11

Ramp End SP Value

+ 05

Ramp Slope

+ 25

11

Ramp Slope

+ 06

Soak Duration

+ 26

12

Soak Duration

+ 07

Soak PV Deviation

+ 27

12

Soak PV Deviation

+ 10

Ramp End SP Value

+ 30

13

Ramp End SP Value

+ 11

Ramp Slope

+ 31

13

Ramp Slope

+ 12

Soak Duration

+ 32

14

Soak Duration

+ 13

Soak PV Deviation

+ 33

14

Soak PV Deviation

+ 14

Ramp End SP Value

+ 34

15

Ramp End SP Value

+ 15

Ramp Slope

+ 35

15

Ramp Slope

+ 16

Soak Duration

+ 36

16

Soak Duration

+ 17

Soak PV Deviation

+ 37

16

Soak PV Deviation

Description

Description

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance

Addr
Offset

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

SP

Slope

Soak PV
deviation

8--58

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Ramp/Soak Table
Flags

Many applications do not require all 16 R/S steps. Use all zeros in the table for
unused steps. The R/S generator ends the profile when it finds ramp slope = 0.
The individual bit definitions of the Ramp/Soak Table Flag (Addr+33) word is listed in
the following table.
Bit

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

Ramp/Soak
Controls

Read/Write

Bit=0

Bit=1

0
1

Start Ramp/Soak Profile

Hold Ramp/Soak Profile

write
write

---

01 Start
01 Hold

Resume Ramp/soak Profile

write

--

Jog Ramp/Soak Profile

write

--

01
Resume
01 Jog

Ramp/Soak Profile Complete

read

--

Complete

PV Input Ramp/Soak Deviation

read

Off

On

Ramp/Soak Profile in Hold

read

Off

On

Reserved

read

Off

On

Current Step in R/S Profile

read

8--15

Ramp/Soak
Generator Enable

Ramp/Soak Flag Bit Description

decode as byte (hex)

The main enable control to permit ramp/soak

generation of the SP value is accomplished with
bits 11 in the PID Mode 1 Setting V+00 word, as
shown to the right. The other ramp/soak controls
in V+33 shown in the table above will not operate unless this bit=1 during the entire ramp/soak
process.
The four main controls for the ramp/soak generator
are in bits 0 to 3 of the ramp/soak settings word in
the loop parameter table. DirectSOFT controls
these bits directly from the ramp/soak settings dialog. However, you must use ladder logic to control
these bits during program execution. We recommend using the bit--of--word instructions.
Ladder logic must set a control bit to a 1 to command the corresponding function.
When the loop controller reads the ramp/soak value, it automatically turns off the bit
for you. Therefore, a reset of the bit is not required when the CPU is in Run Mode.
The example program rung to the right shows
how an external switch X0 can turn on and the
PD contact uses the leading edge to set the
proper control bit to start the ramp soak profile.
This uses the Set Bit--of--Word instruction.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--59

The normal state for the ramp/soak control bits is all zeros. Ladder logic must set
only one control bit at a time.
S Start y a 0 to 1 transition will start the ramp soak profile. The CPU
must be in Run Mode, and the loop can be in Manual or Auto Mode. If
the profile is not interrupted by a Hold or Jog command, it finishes
normally.
S Hold y a 0 to 1 transition will stop the ramp/soak profile in its current
state, and the SP value will be frozen.
S Resume y a 0 to 1 transition cause the ramp/soak generator to resume
operation if it is in the hold state. The SP values will resume from their
previous value.
S Jog y a 0 to 1 transition will cause the ramp/soak generator to truncate
the current segment (step), and go to the next segment.
Ramp/Soak Profile
Monitoring

You can monitor the Ramp/Soak profile status

using other bits in the Ramp/Soak Settings
V+33 word, shown to the right.
R/S Profile Complete y =1 when the
last programmed step is done.
S Soak PV Deviation y =1 when the error
(SP--PV) exceeds the specified deviation
in the R/S table.
S R/S Profile in Hold y =1 when the pro
file was active but is now in hold. Ramp/
Soak Settings V+33.
S

The starting address for the ramp/soak table

must be a valid location. If the address points
outside the range of user V--memory, one of
the bits to the right will turn on when the
ramp/soak generator is started. We recommend using DirectSOFT to configure the
ramp/soak table. It automatically range
checks the addresses for you.

Testing Your
Its a good idea to test your ramp/soak profile before using it to control the process.
Ramp/Soak Profile This is easy to do, because the ramp/soak generator will run even when the loop is in
Manual Mode. Using DirectSOFTs PID View will be a real time--saver, because it
will draw the profile on--screen for you. Be sure to set the trending timebase slow
enough to display completed ramp--soak segment pairs in the waveform window.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance

Ramp/Soak
Programming
Errors

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

The number of the current step is available in

the upper 8 bits of the Ramp/Soak Settings
V+33 word. The bits represent a 2--digit hex
number, ranging from 1 to 10. Ladder logic
can monitor these to synchronize other parts
of the program with the ramp/soak profile.
Load this word to the accumulator and shift
right 8 bits, and you have the step number.

8--60

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

DirectSOFT Ramp/Soak Example

The following example will step you through the Ramp/Soak setup.

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Setup the Profile in The first step is to use Setup in DirectSOFT PID to set the profile of your process.
Open the Setup PID window and select the R/S tab, and then enter the Ramp/Soak
PID Setup
data. Note the V--memory location for the beginning of this profile is V5000, and
V5037 is the end of the range of the profile.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--61

Program the
Refer to the Ramp/Soak Flag Bit Description table on page 8--59 when adding the
Ramp/Soak Control control rungs to your program similar to the ladder rungs below. For the example
below, the PID parameters begin at V7000. The Ramp/Soak bit flags are located at
in Relay Ladder
V7033.

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)
Maintenance

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

8--62

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

After the Ramp/Soak program has been developed in RLL, test the program. Check
your profile by using PID View. If there are any changes to be made in the profile,
they are made in the PID Setup R/S profile. Make the changes in Program mode
then start the Ramp/Soak process again.

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Test the Profile

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--63

Cascade Control
Introduction

Cascaded loops are an advanced control technique that is superior to individual loop
control in certain situations. As the name implies, cascade means that one loop is
connected to another loop. In addition to Manual (open loop) and Auto (closed loop)
Modes, the DL450 also provides Cascaded Mode.
NOTE: Cascaded loops are an advanced process control technique. Therefore, we
recommend their use only for experienced process control engineers.
When a manufacturing process is complex and contains a lag time from control input
to process variable output, even the most perfectly tuned single loop around the
process may yield slow and inaccurate control. It may be that the actuator operates
on one physical property, which eventually affects the process variable, measured
by a different physical property. Identifying the intermediate variable allows us to
divide the process into two parts as shown in the following figure.
PROCESS
Control input

Process A

Intermediate
Variable

Process B

Process
Variable (PV)

Setpoint
+

Loop B
Calculation

--

Major
Loop

Output B/
Setpoint A
+

Loop A
Calculation

Output A

Process A
(secondary)

External
Disturbances
Process B
(primary)

-Minor
Loop
PV, Process A
PV, Process B

One of the benefits to cascade control can be seen by examining its response to
external disturbances. Remember that the minor loop is faster acting than the major
loop. Therefore, if a disturbance affects process A in the minor loop, the Loop A PID
calculation can correct the resulting error before the major loop sees the effect.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance

External
Disturbances

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

The principle of cascaded loops is simply that we add another process loop to more
precisely control the intermediate variable! This separates the source of the control
lag into two parts, as well.
The diagram below shows a cascade control system, showing that it is simply one
loop nested inside another. The inside loop is called the minor loop, and the outside
loop is called the major loop. For overall stability, the minor loop must be the fastest
responding loop of the two. We do have to add the additional sensor to measure the
intermediate variable (PV for process A). Notice that the setpoint for the minor loop is
automatically generated for us, by using the output of the major loop. Once the
cascaded control is programmed and debugged, we only need to deal with the
original setpoint and process variable at the system level. The cascaded loops
behave as one loop, but with improved performance over the previous single-loop
solution.

8--64

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Cascaded Loops in In the use of the term cascaded loops, we must make an important distinction. Only
the minor loop will actually be in the Cascade Mode. In normal operation, the major
the DL450 CPU
loop must be in Auto Mode. If you have more than two loops cascaded together, the
outer-most (major) loop must be in Auto Mode during normal operation, and all inner
loops in Cascade Mode.
NOTE: Technically, both major and minor loops are cascaded in strict process
control terminology. Unfortunately, we are unable to retain this convention when
controlling loop modes. Just remember that all minor loops will be in Cascade Mode,
and only the outer-most (major) loop will be in Auto Mode.
You can cascade together as many loops as necessary on the DL450, and you may
have multiple groups of cascaded loops. For proper operation on cascaded loops
you must use the same data range (12/15 bit) and polar/bipolar settings on the major
and minor loop.
To prepare a loop for Cascade Mode operation as a minor loop, you must program its
remote Setpoint Pointer in its loop parameter table location V+32, as shown below.
The pointer must be the address of the V+05 location (control output) of the major
loop. In Cascade Mode, the minor loop will ignore the its local SP register (V+02),
and read the major loops control output as its SP instead.
Major Loop (Auto mode)
Loop Table

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

Minor Loop (Cascade Mode)

Loop Table

V+02

XXXX

SP

V+02

XXXX

SP

V+03

XXXX

PV

V+03

XXXX

PV

V+05

XXXX

Control Output

V+05

XXXX

Control Output

V+32

XXXX

Remote SP Pointer

When using DirectSOFTs PID View to watch the SP value of the minor loop,
DirectSOFT automatically reads the major loops control output and displays it for
the minor loops SP. The minor loops normal SP location, V+02, remains
unchanged.
Now, we use the loop parameter arrangement above and draw its equivalent loop
schematic, shown below.
Major loop

Minor Cascaded loop

Cascade

Control Output V+05

Loop
Calculation
Remote SP

Setpoint
+

Local SP
V+02

Auto/Manual

--

Loop
Calculation

Control
Output

Process Variable

Remember that a major loop goes to Manual Mode automatically if its minor loop is
taken out of Cascade Mode.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Tuning Cascaded
Loops

8--65

When tuning cascaded loops, you will need to de--couple the cascade relationship
and tune the minor loop, using one of the loop tuning procedures previously covered.
Once this has been done, have the minor loop in cascade mode and auto tune the
major loop (see Step 4).
1. If you are not using auto tuning, then find the loop sample rate for the minor
loop, using the method discussed earlier in this chapter. Then set the sample
rate of the major loop slower than the minor loop by a factor of 10. Use this as a
starting point.
2. Tune the minor loop first. Leave the major loop in Manual Mode, and you will
need to generate SP changes for the minor loop manually as described in the
loop tuning procedure.
3. Verify the minor loop gives a critically--damped response to a 10% SP change
while in Auto Mode. Then we are finished tuning the minor loop.
4. In this step, you will need to get the minor loop in Cascade Mode, and then the
Major loop in Auto Mode. We will be tuning the major loop with the minor loop
treated as a series component its overall process. Therefore, do not go back and
tune the minor loop again while tuning the major loop.
5. Tune the major loop, following the standard loop tuning procedure in this
section. The response of the major loop PV is actually the overall response of the
cascaded loops together.
PID Loop Operation
(DL450 Only)
Maintenance

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

8--66

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Time-Proportioning Control

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

The PID loop controller in the DL450 CPU generates a smooth control output signal
across a numerical range. The control output value is suitable to drive an analog
output module, which connects to the process. In the process control field, this is
called continuous control, because the output is on (at some level) continuously.
While continuous control can be smooth and robust, the cost of the loop components
(such as actuators, heater amplifiers) can be expensive. A simpler form of control is
called time-proportioning control. This method uses actuators which are either on or
off (no in-between). Loop components for on/off-based control systems are lower
cost than their continuous control counterparts.
In this section, we will show you how to convert the control output of a loop to
time-proportioning control for the applications that need it. Lets take a moment to
review how alternately turning a load on and off can control a process. The diagram
below shows a hot-air balloon following a path across some mountains. The desired
path is the setpoint. The balloon pilot turns the burner on and off alternately, which is
his control output. The large mass of air in the balloon effectively averages the effect
of the burner, converting the bursts of heat into a continuous effect, slowly changing
balloon temperature and ultimately the altitude, which is the process variable.

Time-proportioning control approximates continuous control by virtue of its

duty-cycle -- the ratio of ON time to OFF time. The following figure shows an example
of how duty cycle approximates a continuous level when it is averaged by a large
process mass.
period
Desired
Effect
On/Off
Control

On
Off

If we were to plot the on/off times of the burner in the hot-air balloon, we would
probably see a very similar relationship to its effect on balloon temperature and
altitude.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--67

The following ladder segment provides a time proportioned on/off control output. It
converts the continuous output in V2005 to on/off control, using the ouptut coil, Y0.

On/Off Control
Program Example
SP
+

Loop
Calculation

--

Time
Proportioning

V2005
continuous

PV

Y0

Process

P
V

on/off

The example program uses two timers to generate on/off control. It makes the
following assumptions, which you can alter to fit your application:
S The loop table starts at V2000, so the control output is at V2005.
S The data format of the control output is 12-bit, unipolar (0 -- FFF or
0 -- 4095).
S The on/off control output is Y0.
The control program must match the resolution of the PID output to the resolution
of the time interval. The time interval for one full cycle of the on/off waveform is 10
seconds.
NOTE: Some processes change too fast for time proportioning control. Consider the
speed of your process when you choose this control method. Use continuous control
for processes that change too fast for time proportioning control.
TMRF
T0
K1000

T0

At the end of the 10 second period, T0 turns on, and

loads the control output value (binary) from the loop table
V+05 location (V2005).

BTOR

The BTOR instruction changes the number in the

accumulator to a real number.

DIVR
R4.095

Dividing the control output by 4.095, converts the

0 -- 4095 range to 0 -- 1000, which matchs the preset
time for TMRF T0.

RTOB

This instruction converts the real number back to

binary. This step prepares the number for conversion
to BCD. There is no real-to-BCD instruction.

BCD

Convert the number in the accumulator to BCD format.

This satisfies the timer preset format requirement.

T1

TMRF
T1
V1400
TA1

K0

Output the result to V1400. In our example, this is the

location of the timer preset for TMRF T1.
The second fast timer also counts in increments of .01
seconds, so its range is variable from 0 to a maximum
of 1000 ticks, or 10 seconds. This timers output, T1,
turns off the output coil, Y0, when the preset is reached.

Y0
OUT

The N.C. T1 contact, inverts the T1 timer output. The

control output is on at the beginning of the 10-second time
interval. Y0 turns off when T1 times out. The STRNE
contact prevents Y0 from energizing during the one scan
when T0 resets T1. Y0 is the actual control output.

END

END coil marks the end of the main program.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance

LD
V2005

OUT
V1400
T0

A fast timer (0.01 sec. timebase) establishes the primary

time interval. The constant, K1000, sets the preset at 10
seconds (1,000 ticks). The N.C. enabling contact, T0,
makes the timer self-resetting. T0 is on for one scan
each 10 seconds, when it resets itself and T1.

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

T0

8--68

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Feedforward Control
Feedforward control is an enhancement to standard closed-loop control. It is most
useful for diminishing the effects of a quantifiable and predictable loop disturbance
or sudden change in setpoint. Use of this feature is an option available to you on the
DL450. However, its best to implement and tune a loop without feedforward, and
adding it only if better loop performance is still needed. The term feed-forward
refers to the control technique involved, shown in the diagram below. The incoming
setpoint value is fed forward around the PID equation, and summed with the output.
Feedforward path

Setpoint
+

kf

Loop
Calculation

--

+
+

Control Output

Process Variable

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

In the previous section on the bias term, we said that the bias term value establishes
a working region or operating point for the control output. When the error fluctuates
around its zero point, the output fluctuates around the bias value. Now, when there
is a change in setpoint, an error is generated and the output must change to a new
operating point. This also happens if a disturbance introduces a new offset in the
loop. The loop does not really know its way to the new operating point... the
integrator (bias) must increment/decrement until the error disappears, and then the
bias has found the new operating point.
Suppose that we are able to know a sudden setpoint change is about to occur
(common in some applications). We can avoid much of the resulting error in the first
place, if we can quickly change the output to the new operating point. If we know
(from previous testing) what the operating point (bias value) will be after the setpoint
change, we can artificially change the output directly (which is feedforward). The
benefits from using feedforward are:
S The SP--PV error is reduced during predictable setpoint changes or loop
offset disturbances.
S Proper use of feedforward will allow us to reduce the integrator gain.
Reducing integrator gain gives us an even more stable control system.
Feedforward is very easy to use in the DL450 loop controller, as shown below. The
bias term has been made available to the user in a special read/write location, at PID
Parameter Table location V+04.

kp
Setpoint
+

Error Term

ki

Loop Calculation
P
I

--

Process Variable

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

kd

V+04
XXXX Bias Term

+
+

Control Output

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--69

To change the bias (operating point), ladder logic only has to write the desired value
to V+04. The PID loop calculation first reads the bias value from V+04 and modifies
the value based on the current integrator calculation. Then it writes the result back to
location V+04. This arrangement creates a sort of transparent bias term. All you
have to do to implement feed forward control is write the correct value to the bias
term at the right time (the example below shows you how).
NOTE: When writing the bias term, one must be careful to design ladder logic to
write the value just once, at the moment when the new bias operating point is to
occur. If ladder logic writes the bias value on every scan, the loops integrator is
effectively disabled.
Feedforward
Example

How do we know when to write to the bias term, and what value to write? Suppose we
have an oven temperature control loop, and we have already tuned the loop for
optimal performance. Refer to the figure below. We notice that when the operator
opens the oven door, the temperature sags a bit while the loop bias adjusts to the
heat loss. Then when the door closes, the temperature rises above the SP until the
loop adjusts again. Feedforward control can help diminish this effect.

Open

PV

PV sags

Closed

PV excess

Bias

Oven Closed
door

Open

Closed

PV
Feed-forward

Feed-forward

Bias

The step changes in the bias are the result of our two feed-forward writes to the bias
term. We can see that the PV variations are greatly reduced. The same technique
may be applied for changes in setpoint.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance

First, we record the amount of bias change the loop controller generates when the
door opens or closes. Then, we write a ladder program to monitor the position of an
oven door limit switch. When the door opens, our ladder program reads the current
bias value from V+04, adds the desired change amount, and writes it back to V+04.
When the door closes, we duplicate the procedure, but subtracting desired change
amount instead. The following figure shows the results.

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Oven Closed
door

8--70

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

PID Example Program

After the PID loop(s) has been setup with DirectSOFT, you will need to edit your RLL
program to include the rungs needed to setup the analog I/O module to be used by
the PID loop(s).

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Program Setup for

the PID Loop

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--71

The example program shows how an analog input module, F4--08AD is used to
setup a PID loop. This example assumes that the PID table for loop 1 has a
beginning address of V3000.
All of the analog I/O modules used with the DL450 is setup in a similar manner. Refer
to the DL405 Analog I/O Manual for the setup information for the particular module
that you will be using.
Note that the modules used in the PID loop example program were set up for binary
format. They could have been set up for BCD format. In the later case, the BCD data
would have to be converted to binary format before being stored to the setpoint and
process variable, and the control output would have to be converted from binary to
BCD before being stored to the analog output.
By following the steps outlined in this chapter, you should be able to setup workable
PID control loops. The DirectSOFT Programming Software Manual provides more
information for the use of PID View.

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)
Maintenance

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

8--72

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Troubleshooting Tips
Q. The loop will not go into Automatic Mode.
A. Check the following for possible causes:
S The PLC is in Program Mode. It must be in Run Mode for loops to run.
S A PV alarm exists, or a PV alarm programming error exists.
S The loop is the major loop of a cascaded pair, and the minor loop is not
in Cascade Mode.

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Q. The Control Output just stays at zero constantly when the loop is in Automatic Mode.
A. Check the following for possible causes:
S The Control Output upper limit in loop table location V+31 is zero.
S The loop is driven into saturation, because the error never goes to zero
value and changes (algebraic) sign.
Q. The Control Output value is not zero, but it is incorrect.
A. Check the following for possible cause:
S The gain values are entered improperly. Remember, gains are entered
in the loop table in BCD, while the SP and PV are in binary. If you are
using DirectSOFT 5, PID View displays the SP, PV, Bias and Control
output in decimal, converting it to binary before updating the loop table.
Q. The Ramp/Soak Generator does not operate when I activate the Start bit.
A. Check the following for possible causes:
S The Ramp/Soak enable bit is off. Check the status of bit 11 of loop
parameter table location V+00. It must be set =1.
S The hold bit or other bits in the Ramp/Soak control are on.
S The beginning SP value and the first ramp ending SP value are the
same, so first ramp segment has no slope and consequently has no
duration. The ramp/soak generator moves quickly to the soak segment,
giving the illusion that the first ramp is not working.
S The loop is in Cascade Mode, and is trying to get the SP remotely.
S The SP upper limit value in the loop table location V+27 is too low.
S Check your ladder program to verify it is not writing to the SP location
(V+02 in the loop table). A quick way to do this is to temporarily place an
end coil at the beginning of your program, then go to PLC Run Mode,
and manually start the ramp/soak generator.
Q. The PV value in the table is constant, even though the analog module receives the PV signal.
A. Your ladder program must read the analog value from the module successfully
and write it into the loop table V+03 location. Verify that the analog module is
generating the value, and that the ladder is working.
Q. The Derivative gain doesnt seem to have any affect on the output.
A. The derivative limit is probably enabled (see section on derivative gain limiting).

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--73

Maintenance

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Q. The loop Setpoint appears to be changing by itself.

A. Check the following for possible causes:
S The Ramp/Soak generator is enabled, and is generating setpoints.
S If this symptom occurs on loop Manual-to-Auto Mode changes, the loop
is in Bumpless Transfer Mode 1.
S Check your ladder program to verify it is not writing to the SP location
(V+02 in the loop table). A quick way to do this is to temporarily place an
end coil at the beginning of your program, then go to PLC Run Mode.
Q. The SP and PV values I enter with DirectSOFT work okay, but these values do not work
properly when the ladder program writes the data.
A. The PID View in DirectSOFT lets you enter SP, PV, and Bias values in decimal,
and displays them in decimal for your convenience. For example, when the data
format is 12 bit unipolar, the values range from 0 to 4095. However, the loop table
actually requires these in hex, so DirectSOFT converts them for you. The values in
the table range from 0 to FFF, for 12-bit unipolar format. Your ladder program must
convert constant values from their BCD format (when entered as Kxxxx) to binary
with the BIN instruction or you must enter them in the constant field (Kxxxx) as the
hex equivalent of the decimal value.
Q. The loop seems unstable and impossible to tune, no matter what gains I use.
A. Check the following for possible causes:
S The loop sample time is set too long. Refer to the section near the front
of this chapter on selecting the loop update time.
S The gains are too high. Start out by reducing the derivative gain to zero.
Then reduce the integral gain by increasing the integral time value, and
the proportional gain if necessary.
S There is too much transfer lag in your process. This means the PV
reacts sluggishly to control output changes. There may be too much
distance between actuator and PV sensor, or the actuator may be
weak in its ability to transfer energy into the process.
S There may be a process disturbance that is over-powering the loop.
Make sure the PV is relatively steady when the SP is not changing.

8--74

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Glossary of PID Loop Terminology

Automatic Mode

An operational mode of a loop, in which it makes PID calculations and updates the
loops control output.

Bias Freeze

A method of preserving the bias value (operating point) for a control output, by inhibiting
the integrator when the output goes out-of-range. The benefit is a faster loop recovery.

Bias Term

In the position form of the PID equation, it is the sum of the integrator and the initial
control output value.

Bumpless Transfer

A method of changing the operation mode of a loop while avoiding the usual sudden
change in control output level. This consequence is avoided by artificially making the SP
and PV equal, or the bias term and control output equal at the moment of mode change.

Cascaded Loops

A cascaded loop receives its setpoint from the output of another loop. Cascaded loops
have a major/minor relationship, and work together to ultimately control one PV.

Cascade Mode

An operational mode of a loop, in which it receives its SP from another loops output.

Continuous Control

Control of a process done by delivering a smooth (analog) signal as the control output.

Direct-Acting Loop

A loop in which the PV increases in response to a control output increase. In other

words, the process has a positive gain.

Error

The difference in value between the SP and PV,

Error Deadband

An optional feature which makes the loop insensitive to errors when they are small. You
can specify the size of the deadband.

Error Squared

An optional feature which multiplies the error by itself, but retains the original algebraic
sign. It reduces the effect of small errors, while magnifying the effect of large errors.

Feedforward

A method of optimizing the control response of a loop when a change in setpoint or

disturbance offset is known and has a quantifiable effect on the bias term.

Control Output

The numerical result of a PID equation which is sent by the loop with the intention of
nulling out the current error.

Derivative Gain

A constant that determines the magnitude of the PID derivative term in response to the
current error.

Integral Gain

A constant that determines the magnitude of the PID integral term in response to the
current error.

Major Loop

In cascade control, it is the loop that generates a setpoint for the cascaded loop.

Manual Mode

An operational mode of a loop, in which the PID calculations are stopped. The operator
must manually control the loop by writing to the control output value directly.

Minor Loop

In cascade control, the minor loop is the subordinate loop that receives its SP from the
major loop.

On / Off Control

A simple method of controlling a process, through on/off application of energy into the
system. The mass of the process averages the on/off effect for a relatively smooth PV. A
simple ladder program can convert the DL450s continuous loop output to on/off control.

PID Loop

A mathematical method of closed-loop control involving the sum of three terms based
on proportional, integral, and derivative error values. The three terms have independent
gain constants, allowing one to optimize (tune) the loop for a particular physical system.

Position Algorithm

The control output is calculated so it responds to the displacement (position) of the PV

from the SP (error term)

Process

A manufacturing procedure which adds value to raw materials. Process control

particularly refers to inducing chemical changes to the material in process.

Process Variable (PV)

A quantitative measurement of a physical property of the material in process, which

affects final product quality and is important to monitor and control.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Error=SP -- PV

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

8--75

PV Absolute Alarm

A programmable alarm that compares the PV value to alarm threshold values.

PV Deviation Alarm

A programmable alarm that compares the difference between the SP and PV values to
a deviation threshold value.

Ramp / Soak Profile

A set of SP values called a profile, which is generated in real time upon each loop
calculation. The profile consists of a series of ramp and soak segment pairs, greatly
simplifying the task of programming the PLC to generate such SP sequences.

Rate

Also called differentiator, the rate term responds to the changes in the error term.

Remote Setpoint

The location where a loop reads its setpoint when it is configured as the minor loop in a
cascaded loop topology.

Reset

Also called integrator, the reset term adds each sampled error to the previous,
maintaining a running total called the bias.

Reset Windup

A condition created when the loop is unable to find equilibrium, and the persistent error
causes the integrator (reset) sum to grow excessively (windup). Reset windup causes
an extra recovery delay when the original loop fault is remedied.

Reverse-Acting Loop

A loop in which the PV increases in response to a control output decrease. In other

words, the process has a negative gain.

Sampling time

The time between PID calculations. The CPU method of process control is called a
sampling controller, because it samples the SP and PV only periodically.

Setpoint (SP)

The desired value for the process variable. The setpoint (SP) is the input command to
the loop controller during closed loop operation.

Soak Deviation

The soak deviation is a measure of the difference between the SP and PV during a soak
segment of the Ramp/Soak profile, when the Ramp / Soak generator is active.

Step Response

The behavior of the process variable in response to a step change in the SP (in closed
loop operation), or a step change in the control output (in open loop operation)

Transfer

To change from one loop operational mode to another ( between Manual, Auto, or
Cascade). The word transfer probably refers to the transfer of control of the control
output or the SP, depending on the particular mode change.

Velocity Algorithm

The control output is calculated to represent the rate of change (velocity) for the PV to
become equal to the SP.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance

A constant that determines the magnitude of the PID proportional term in response to
the current error.

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Proportional Gain

8--76

PID Loop Operation (DL450 only)

Fundamentals of Process Control Theory, Second Edition

Author: Paul W. Murrill
Publisher: Instrument Society of America
ISBN 1--55617--297--4

Application Concepts of Process Control

Author: Paul W. Murrill
Publisher: Instrument Society of America
ISBN 1--55617--080--7

PID Controllers: Theory, Design, and Tuning, 2nd Edition

Author: K. Astrom and T Hagglund
Publisher: Instrument Society of America
ISBN 1--55617--516--7

Fundamentals of Temperature, Pressure, and Flow

Measurements, Third edition
Author: Robert P. Benedict
Publisher: John Wiley and Sons
ISBN 0--471--89383--8

Process / Industrial Instruments & Controls Handbook,

Fourth Edition
Author (Editor-in-Chief): Douglas M. Considine
Publisher: McGraw-Hill, Inc.
ISBN 0--07--012445--0

pH Measurement and Control, Second Edition

Author: Gregory K. McMillan
Publisher: Instrument Society of America
ISBN 1--55617--483--7

Programmable Controllers Concepts and Applications,

First Edition,
Authors: C.T. Jones and L.A. Bryant
Publisher: International Programmable Controls
ISBN 0--915425--00--9

Fundamentals of Programmable Logic Controllers, Sensors, and Communications

Author: Jon Stenerson
Publisher: Prentice Hall
ISBN 0--13--726860--2

Process Control, Third Edition

Instrument Engineers Handbook
Author (Editor-in-Chief): Bela G. Liptak
Publisher: Chilton
ISBN 0--8019--8242--1

Process Measurement and Analysis, Third Edition

Instrument Engineers Handbook
Author (Editor-in-Chief): Bela G. Liptak
Publisher: Chilton
ISBN 0--8019--8197--2

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

PID Loop Operation

(DL450 Only)

Bibliography

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance and
Troubleshooting

19

In This Chapter. . . .
Hardware Maintenance
Diagnostics
CPU Indicators
I/O Module Troubleshooting
Noise Troubleshooting
Machine Startup and Program Troubleshooting

9--2

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Hardware Maintenance
Standard
Maintenance

A routine maintenance check (about every one or two months) or your PLC and
control system is good practice, an should include the following items:
S Air Temperature -- Check the ambient air temperature in the control
cabinet, so the operating temperature range of any component is not
exceeded.
S Air Filter -- If the control cabinet has an air filter, clean or replace it
periodically as required.
S Memory Backup Battery -- Make sure the CPU memory backup battery
does not become completely discharged. The CPU uses the same
battery indicator to signal a low CPU battery and if applicable a low
memory cartridge battery. Make sure you have correctly diagnosed
which battery is requiring replacement.
S Fuses or breakers -- verify that all fuses and breakers are intact.
S DL405 Module Air Vents -- verify that all air vents of the CPU and all
I/O modules are clear, allowing air to circulate for cooling.

CPU Battery
Replacement

The CPU battery is used to retain program V-memory and the system parameters.
The life expectancy of this battery is five years.

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

NOTE: Before replacing your CPU battery you should back-up your V-memory and
system parameters. This can be done by saving the V-memory and system
parameters to either a Memory Cartridge or to cassette tape or by using
DirectSOFT to save the program to hard/floppy disk on a personal computer.
To prevent memory loss the CPU battery can be changed while the system is
powered up. If the CPU has been powered off you should power-up the CPU for at
least 5 seconds prior to changing the battery. This is done to ensure the capacitor
used to maintain the proper voltage levels necessary to retain memory is fully
charged.

Replace battery with

part #D3--D4--BAT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

To replace the CPU battery:

S Pull the battery out from the battery retaining clip.
S Lift the clip on the two wire battery connector.
S Slide the battery connector apart.
To install the CPU battery:
S Join the (keyed) battery connector so the red wires
match.
S Push gently till the connector snaps closed
S Slide the battery into the battery retaining clip till the
battery lies flush in the opening.
S Note the date the battery was changed.
WARNING: Do not attempt to recharge the battery or
dispose of it by fire. The battery may explode or
release hazardous materials.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

CMOS RAM
Memory Cartridge
Battery
Replacement

9--3

The CMOS RAM Memory Cartridge battery is used to maintain the contents of the
Memory Cartridge RAM when the power is turned off. The life expectancy of this
battery is three years.
NOTE: For added security you will want to save the contents of the memory
cartridge to either another memory cartridge, cassette tape, or computer disk,to
avoid losing the contents of the memory cartridge when the battery is removed. The
memory cartridge does however have a built in capacitor to retain the memory for
several minutes while the battery is being replaced. If the system has been powered
off, you should power-up the CPU with the memory cartridge installed for at least 5
seconds prior to changing the battery. This is done to ensure the capacitor used to
maintain the proper voltage levels necessary to retain memory is fully charged.
WARNING: Never remove the Memory Cartridge from the CPU when the CPU
is powered-up. If the memory cartridge is removed while under power the
memory cartridge may become unreliable. Do not attempt to recharge the
battery or dispose of it by fire. The battery may explode or release hazardous
materials.

Replace battery with

part # D4--MC--BAT

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

To remove the CMOS RAM Memory Cartridge battery:

1. Power down the CPU.
2. Remove the memory cartridge from the CPU by gently pulling the lever
down till the cartridge is loosened, then pull the lever straight out .
3. Remove the cover retaining screw.
4. Lift top cover off ( lifting at a slight tilt to avoid breaking the guides beside the
connector).
5. Grasp battery and lift straight up.
To install the CMOS RAM Memory Cartridge battery:
1. Align the battery leads to the (keyed) holes in the circuit board.
2. Press the battery flush with the circuit board.
3. Place cover back on module (using a slight tilt to catch the guides beside
the connector).
4. Install the cover retaining screw.
5. Note the date the battery was changed.

9--4

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

Diagnostics
Diagnostics

DL405 performs over 90 pre-defined diagnostic routines with every CPU scan. The
diagnostics have been designed to detect failures for the CPU local base and local
expansion bases. These detected errors cover the following: CPUs, expansion
units, I/O, bases, communication modules, memory cartridges and batteries. There
are two primary error classes: fatal and non-fatal.

Fatal Errors

Fatal errors are errors the CPU has detected that offer a risk of the system not
functioning safely or properly. They will either cause the CPU to change from RUN
mode to PROGRAM or will disallow changing from PROGRAM mode to RUN mode.
If the fatal error is detected while in PROGRAM mode the CPU will not enter the RUN
mode until the error has been corrected.
Examples of fatal errors:
S Power supply failure on the CPU base
S Parity error or CPU malfunction
S Certain programming errors

Non-fatal Errors

Non-fatal errors are errors that are flagged by the CPU as requiring attention. They
can neither cause the CPU to change from RUN mode to PROGRAM nor do they
prevent entering RUN mode. There are special relays the application program can
use to detect if a non-fatal error has occurred. The application program can then be
used to take the system to an orderly shutdown or switch the PLC out of RUN mode if
needed.
Example of non-fatal errors are:
S Battery backup battery voltage low
S All I/O module errors
S Certain programming errors

Finding Diagnostic Diagnostic information can be found in several places with varying levels of
message detail.
Information
S The CPU automatically logs error codes and any FAULT messages into
two separate tables which can be viewed with the Handheld or
DirectSOFT.
S The handheld programmer displays error numbers and short
descriptions of the error.
S DirectSOFT provides the error number and an error message.
S Appendix B in this manual has a complete list of error messages sorted
by error number.
Many of these messages point to supplemental memory locations which can be
referenced for additional related information. These memory references are in the
form of V-memory and SPs (special relays).
The following two tables name the specific memory locations that correspond to
certain types of error messages. The special relay table also includes status
indicators which can be used in programming. For a more detailed description of
each of these special relays refer to Appendix D.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

V-memory Error
Code Locations

9--5

The following table names the specific memory locations that correspond to certain
types of error messages.
Error Class

Error Category

Diagnostic
V-memory

Minor

Battery Voltage (DL450)

V7746

System

10ms calender timer (DL440/450)

V7747

User-defined

Fault message error code

V7751

I/O configuration

Current module ID code

V7752

I/O configuration

Correct module ID code

V7753

I/O configuration

Base number/Slot number

V7754

Fatal

Error code

V7755

Major

Error code

V7756

Minor

Communications Error code

V7757

Module

Base number/Slot number

V7760

Module

Error code

V7762

Grammatical

Address

V7763

Grammatical

Error Code

V7764

Special Relays (SP) The special relay table also includes status indicators which can indicate errors. For
Corresponding to a more detailed description of each of these special relays refer to Appendix D.
Error Codes
Startup and
Real-time Relays

CPU Status Relays

System Monitoring
Relays

Accumulator
Status Relays

Communication
Monitoring Relays

First scan relay

SP11

Forced run mode

relay

SP40

Critical error relay

SP60

Value less than relay

SP120

Module busy relay

Slot 0

SP1

Always ON relay

SP12

Terminal run mode

relay

SP41

Warning relay

SP61

Value equal to relay

SP121

Communication error
relay Slot 0

SP3

1 minute relay

SP13

Test run mode relay

SP43

Battery low relay

SP62

Value greater than

relay

SP122

Module busy relay

Slot 1

SP4

1 second relay

SP14

Break relay 1

SP44

Program memory
error relay

SP63

Zero relay

SP123

Communication error
relay Slot 1

SP5

100 millisecond relay

SP15

Test program mode

relay

SP45

I/O error relay

SP64

Half borrow relay

SP124

Module busy relay

Slot 2

SP6

50 millisecond relay

SP16

Terminal program
mode relay

SP46

Communications error
relay

SP65

Borrow relay

SP125

Communication error
relay Slot 2

SP7

Alternate scan relay

SP17

Forced stop mode

relay

SP47

I/O configuration error

relay

SP66

Half carry relay

SP126

Module busy relay

Slot 3

SP21

Break relay 2

SP50

FAULT instruction
relay

SP67

Carry relay

SP127

Communication error
relay Slot 3

SP22

Interrupt enabled
relay

SP51

Math timeout relay

SP70

Sign relay

SP130

Module busy relay

Slot 4

SP25

CPU battery disabled

relay

SP52

Grammatical error
relay

SP71

Pointer reference
error

SP131

Communication error
relay Slot 4

SP26

I/O update disable

relay (DL440)

SP53

Math/Table pointer
error

SP73

Overflow relay

SP132

Module busy relay

Slot 5

SP27

Selective I/O update

disable relay (DL440)

SP54

Communication error

SP75

Data error relay

SP133

Communication error
relay Slot 5

SP30

Dipswitch 1 status
relay

SP56

Table instruction
overrun relay

SP76

Load zero relay

SP134

Module busy relay

Slot 6

SP31

Dipswitch 2 status
relay

SP135

Communication error
relay Slot 6

SP32

Dipswitch 3 status
relay

SP136

Module busy relay

Slot 7

SP33

Dipswitch 4 status
relay

SP137

Communication error
relay
Slot 7

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

SP0

9--6

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

I/O Module Codes

Each system component has a code identifier. This code identifier is used in some of
the error messages related to the I/O modules. The following table list these codes.
Code
(Hex)

Component Type

Code
(Hex)

Component Type

01

CPU

21

8 pt. Input

02

Expansion Unit

28

16 pt. Output,
FL series Analog Output

03

I/O Base

2B

16 pt. Input,
FL series Analog Input,
Interrupt

11

DCM, All CoProcessor

Modules

30

32 pt. Output,
DL series Analog Output

12

Remote Master,
Slice Master

3F

32 pt. Input,
DL series Analog Input

18

High Speed Counter,

Magnetic Pulse Input

7F

Abnormal

20

8 pt. Output

FF

No module detected

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

The following diagram shows an example of how the I/O module codes are used:

Incorrect module

Program Control Information

V7752 0028 Current module ID code
V7753 0026 Current module ID code
V7754 0002 Location of conflict
V7756 0252 Module Error Code
SP45

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

I/O abnormality

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Error Message
Tables
X  
430 440 450

9--7

The DL440 and DL450 CPUs will automatically log any system error codes and any
custom messages you have created in your application program with the Fault
instructions. (See Chapter 11 for details on the Fault instruction.) The CPU logs the
error code, the date, and the time the error occurred. There are two separate tables
that store this information.
S System Error Table -- stores up to 32 errors in the table.
S Fault Message Table -- stores up to 16 messages in the table.
When an error or message is triggered, it is put into the first available table location.
Therefore, the most recent error message may not appear in the first row of the table.
If the table is full when an error occurs, the oldest error is pushed (erased) from the
table and the new error is inserted in the row.
The following diagram shows an example of a the Fault Message table as shown in
DirectSOFT. You can access the error code table and the message table through
DirectSOFTs PLC Diagnostic sub-menus. Details on how to access these logs are
provided in the DirectSOFT manual.
Error Msg. Example
Most recent message
appears here, not at
the top of the table.

Next message will

show up in this row,
which is now the
oldest message.

Use AUX 5C to view the tables

CLR

AUX

SHFT

ENT

AUX 5C SHOW ERR/MSG

ERR OR MSG

Arrow key selects Errors or Messages

SHFT

ENT

Example of a message display

AUX 5C SHOW ERR/MSG

ERR OR MSG

PUMP 3 FAILED
04/22/93 17:30:00

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

You cannot view the entire table at one time with the handheld programmer. Instead,
the messages automatically appear on the handheld programmer display as they
occur. The message will remain on the display as long as the Fault instruction is being
executed. The following examples show you how to use the Handheld and AUX
Function 5C to show the error codes. The most recent error or message is always
displayed. You can use the PREV and NXT keys to scroll through the messages.

9--8

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

System Error
Codes
X  
430 440 450

The System error log contains 32 of the most recent errors that have been detected.
The errors that are trapped in the error log are a subset of all the error messages
which the DL405 systems generate.
The following errors are captured in the System error log upon first detection or
reoccurrence.
Error
Code

Description

Error
Code

Description

E003

Software time-out

E155

RAM failure

E004

Invalid instruction
(RAM parity error in the CPU)

E201

Terminal block missing

E041

CPU battery low

E202

Missing I/O module

E043

Memory cartridge battery low

E203

Blown fuse

E099

Program memory exceeded

E206

User 24V power supply failure

E101

CPU memory cartridge missing

E250

Communication failure in the I/O

chain

E104

Write fail

E251

I/O parity error

E151

Invalid Command

E252

New I/O configuration

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

These errors are captured in the System error log if they exist when the CPU
attempts to transition to RUN mode.
Error
Code

Description

Error
Code

Description

E401

Missing END statement

E431

Invalid ISG/SG address

E402

Missing LBL

E432

Invalid jump (GOTO) address

E403

Missing RET

E433

Invalid SBR address

E404

Missing FOR

E434

Invalid RTC address

E405

Missing NEXT

E435

Invalid RT address

E406

Missing IRT

E436

Invalid INT address

E412

SBR/LBL > 64

E437

Invalid IRTC address

E413

FOR/NEXT > 64

E438

Invalid IRT address

E421

Duplicate stage reference

E440

Invalid Data Address

E422

Duplicate SBR/LBL reference

E441

ACON/NCON

E423

Nested loops

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

9--9

CPU Status Indicators

The DL405 CPUs have indicators on the
front to help you diagnose problems with
the system. The table below gives a quick
reference
of
potential
problems
associated with each status indicator.
Following the table is a detailed
description of each indicator.

Status

Potential Causes

PWR

OFF

1. Power input voltage is incorrect for selected operating mode, 110/220

VAC select jumper incorrect on CPU terminal strip
2. External power is off or disconnected (check fuses, breakers)
3. Power supply/CPU is faulty
4. Other component such an I/O module has power supply shorted
5. Power budget exceeded for the CPU being used

RUN

OFF

1. CPU programming error

2. Key switch in STOP position

Flashing

CPU is in firmware upgrade mode

CPU

ON

1. Electrical noise interference

2. CPU defective

BATT

ON, or
flashing

1. Flashing at 2 Hz: CPU battery low

2. Flashing at 0.5 Hz: Memory cartridge battery low (DL440/DL450 only)
3. On constantly: Both the CPU and MC batteries are low
4. CPU or Memory cartridge battery missing, or disconnected

DIAG
(DL450)

ON

1. The CPU internal diagnostics has failed

2. The local bus on the backplane has had a communications error

I/O

ON

1. I/O module failure

2. External power supply failure
3. Configuration error
4. Base expansion unit failure

COM
(DL430/
DL440)

ON

1. Device port setup incorrect

2. Cabling error
3. Grounding problem
4. Electrical noise
5. Device port faulty

TXD
(DL450)

OFF

1. The CPU is not transmitting data on the secondary ports (ports 1, 2,

and 3), due to programming error
2. The CPU is not in Run mode

RXD
(DL450)

OFF

1. External device is not transmitting to CPU secondary ports

(ports 1, 2, and 3)
2. Communications cable is defective, or not connected

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

Indicator

9--10

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

PWR Indicator
  
430 440 450

In general there are four reasons for the CPU or expansion unit power status LED
(PWR) to be OFF:
1. Power to the CPU is an improper voltage, or the power range jumper
(110/220 select) does not match the power input voltage.
2. CPU power supply is faulty.
3. Other component(s) have the power supply shut down. An I/O module in
the base which has shorted is a possibility.
4. Power budget (+5V)for the CPU has been exceeded.
If the voltage to the power supply is not correct, the PLC may not operate properly or
may not operate at all. Use the following guidelines to correct the problem.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of electrical shock, always disconnect the
system power before inspecting the physical wiring.

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

1. First, disconnect the external power.

2. Verify that all external circuit breakers or fuses are still intact.
3. Check all incoming wiring for loose connections. If youre using a separate
termination block, check those connections for accuracy and integrity.
4. If the connections are acceptable, reconnect the system power and verify
the voltage at the CPU power input is within specification. If the voltage is
not correct, shut down the system and correct the problem.
5. If all wiring is connected correctly and the incoming power is within the
specifications, the PLC internal supply may be faulty.
If the voltage to the power supply is not correct, the CPU may not operate properly, if
at all. For a new installation on AC-powered CPU versions, first check the 110/220
VAC select jumper on the terminal strip of the CPU. If the 110 VAC selection shunt is
not installed while using 110 VAC, you will see the following symptoms:
S The communication ports will not function
S The CPU will only operate when no modules are installed.
If the 110 VAC selection shunt is installed while using 220 VAC, the power supply in
the CPU will be damaged. If this has happened, you will need to replace the CPU.
The best way to check for a faulty CPU power supply is to substitute a known good
one to see if this corrects the problem.
If the jumper is correctly installed for the AC or DC version you are using, then
measure the voltage at the terminal strip to ensure it is within the CPU input specs.
It is possible a faulty module or external device using the system 5V can shut down
the power supply. This 5V can be coming from the base or from the top port on the
CPU. To test for a device causing this problem:
S Turn off power to the CPU.
S Disconnect all external devices (example communication cables) from
the CPU.
S Reapply power to the system.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

9--11

If the power supply operates normally, you probably have either a shorted device or
a shorted cable. If the power supply does not operate normally, then test for a module
causing the problem by following the steps below:
S Turn off power to the CPU.
S Remove the CPU from the base, leaving its power cord attached.
S Reapply power to the CPU.
If the PWR LED operates normally, the problem is most likely in one of the modules in
the local CPU base. To isolate which module is causing the problem, remove one
module at a time until the PWR LED operates normally. Put the CPU back in the base
prior to testing for a bad module. Follow the procedure below:
S Turn off power to the CPU.
S Remove a module from the base.
S Reapply power to the CPU.
Bent base connector pins on the module can cause this problem, so check the
connector. Remember that exceeding the power budget is a common error that will
cause the PWR indicator to not come on or to come on intermittently.
Power budgeting problems usually appear during system start-up, rather than after
a long period of operation. If there is any doubt, its a good idea to recheck this.
WARNING: The PLC may reset if the power budget is exceeded. If there is any
doubt about the system power budget please check it at this time. Exceeding
the power budget can cause unpredictable results which can cause damage
and injury. Verify the modules in the base operate within the power budget for
the chosen base. You can find these tables in Chapter 4, System Design and
Configuration.

430 440 450

If the CPU will not enter the run mode (the RUN indicator is off), the problem is
usually in the application program unless the CPU has a fatal error, in which case the
CPU LED should be on.
S If you are attempting to enter the run mode by a programming device
and the CPU will not enter the run mode, first make sure the key switch
is in the TERM position and then try to enter the run mode.
S If you are using the keyswitch to change to RUN mode and the CPU
does not respond, attach a programming device to diagnose what error
is being returned.
S If the indicator is flashing, the CPU is in firmware upgrade mode.
Both of the programming devices, handheld programmer and DirectSOFT, will
return a error message and depending on the error may also recommend an AUX
function to run that will aid in further diagnosing the problem. The most common
programming error is Missing END Statement. All application programs require an
END statement for proper termination. Appendix B lists all the error codes.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

Run Indicator
  

9--12

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

CPU Indicator
  
430 440 450

BATT Indicator
  
430 440 450

If the CPU indicator is on, a fatal error has occurred in the CPU. Generally, this is not
a programming problem but an actual hardware failure. You can power cycle the
system to clear the error. If the error clears, the system should be closely monitored
and every effort should be made to try to determine the cause of the problem. You will
find this problem is sometimes caused by high frequency electrical noise introduced
into the CPU from a outside source. Check your system grounding and install
electrical noise filters if the grounding is suspected. If power cycling the system does
not reset the error or if the problem returns, replace the CPU.
If the BATT indicator is on or flashing, either or both the CPU/Memory Cartridge
batteries are low (2.5V or less). The DL430 does not have a memory cartridge. The
battery voltage is continuously monitored while the system voltage is being supplied.
BATT LED Status

Error Condition

Flashing at 2Hz
Flashing at 0.5
0 5 Hz

CPU battery is low

Memory Cartridge battery is low

ON constantly

Both the CPU and Memory Cartridge batteries are low

Procedures for how to replace either of the batteries can be found in the Hardware
Maintenance section earlier in this chapter.
DIAG Indicator
X X 
430 440 450

I/O Indicator
  

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

430 440 450

The diagnostics indicator is normally off. It turns on if the CPU detects a failure of its
run-time diagnostics. Extreme electrical noise may cause a diagnostics failure, so
power cycle the CPU first. If the DIAG indicator still turns on, the CPU is probably
faulty. Replace it with a known good one to be sure.
If this indicator is on, a problem in the local, expansion, or remote I/O chain has been
detected. Any of the problems listed below could be the cause of the I/O LED being
on:
S A blown fuse inside an I/O module
S A loose terminal block
S The 24 VDC supply has failed
S The module or Expansion unit has failed
S The I/O configuration check detects a change in the I/O configuration
I/O error detection for remote I/O will be covered in the DL405 Remote and Slice I/O
manual.
To aid you in further diagnosing where the I/O error is, each I/O module has LEDs to
indicate if an error is present. The discrete I/O modules covered in this manual may
have a combination of the following I/O indicators:
Indicator

Error condition

TB

Loose or missing terminal block

24V

External 24V power supply not providing the correct voltage

FU

Module fuse has blown, (check the I/O modules specification sheets to
see if the fuse is replaceable)

Many other specialty modules also have indicators. The manuals for those products
contain information on the indicators and status LEDs.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

9--13

If the modules are not providing any clues to the problem, run AUX 42 from the
handheld programmer or I/O diagnostics in DirectSOFT. Both options will provide
the base number, the slot number and the problem with the module. Once the
problem is corrected the indicators will reset.
An I/O error will not cause the CPU to switch from the run to program mode, however
there are special relays (SPs) available in the CPU which will allow this error to be
read in ladder logic. The application program can then take the required action such
as entering the program mode or initiating an orderly shutdown. The following figure
shows a example of the failure indicators.
Loose terminal block
LED indicator
Internal diagnostics
V7756 0201 Major Error Code
V7760 0003 Error Location
(Base 00, Slot 03)
V7762 0201 Module Error Code
SP45
I/O Error

Loose terminal block

COM Indicator
  X
430 440 450

The COM indicator on DL430 and DL440 CPU turns ON when the CPU has detected
a communication error on one of the two communication ports built into the CPU.
The most common causes for this error are:

TXD and RXD

Indicators
X X 
430 440 450

The TXD and RXD indications on the DL450 CPU work like the identically-named
LED indicators found on modem devices. The TXD and/or RXD indicators turn ON
whenever the CPU either transmits or receives data, respectively. If the indicator(s)
remain off when you are expecting communications, there is a problem.
The TXD and RXD indicators turn on when data is transmitted on any of the four
ports on the DL450. Therefore, when DirectSOFT, or a HPP, or an operator interface
such as the DV-1000 is connected, the TXD and RXD are on constantly. If you are
trying to detect communications originated by the ladder program itself, it may be
useful to disconnect the programing device or operator interface. In this way, only
the cable for the communications you are debugging is connected.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

The cable is disconnected.

The cable has a broken wire or has been wired incorrectly.
The cable is improperly terminated or grounded.
The device connected to the port is sending data incorrectly.
A grounding difference exists between the two devices.
Electrical noise is causing intermittent errors
The CPU has a bad communication port and the CPU should be
replaced
If an error occurs the indicator will come on and stay on until a successful
communication has been completed. If the cable and its connections are OK, try
doing a power cycle on the devices at both ends of the communications cable.
S
S
S
S
S
S
S

9--14

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

I/O Module Troubleshooting

Possible Causes

If you suspect an I/O error, there are several things that could be causing the
problem.
S I/O configuration error on modules such as analog I/O, high-speed
counting, specialized communications, and so on
S A blown fuse in your machine or panel (the DL105 does not have
internal I/O fuses)
S A loose terminal block
S The auxiliary 24 VDC supply has failed
S An Input or Output point has failed

Some Quick Steps

When troubleshooting the DL series I/O modules there are a few facts you should be
aware of. These facts may assist you in quickly correcting an I/O problem.
S The output modules cannot detect shorted or open output points. If you
suspect one or more points on a output module to be faulty, measure
the voltage drop from the common to the suspect point. Remember
when using a Digital Volt Meter, leakage current from an output device
such as a triac or a transistor must be considered. A point which is off
may appear to be on if no load is connected to the point.
S The I/O point status indicators on the modules are logic side indicators.
This means the LED which indicates the on or off status reflects the
status of the point with respect to the CPU. On a output module the
status indicators could be operating normally while the actual output
device (transistor, triac etc.) could be damaged. With an input module if
the indicator LED is on, the input circuitry should be operating properly.
Verify the LED goes off when the input signal is removed.
S Leakage current can be a problem when connecting field devices to I/O
modules. False input signals can be generated when the leakage
current of an output device is great enough to turn on the connected
input device. To correct this install a resistor in parallel with the input or
output of the circuit. The value of this resistor will depend on the amount
of leakage current and the voltage applied but usually a 10K to 20K ohm
resistor will work. Verify the wattage rating of the resistor is correct for
your application.
S The fuse blown indicator on a output module will indicate a problem only
if an output point is connected to a load and the point is turned on. This
indicator works by sensing a voltage drop across the fuse so there must
be a voltage applied to the fuse and a load applied to the output to
create the voltage drop before it can be reported by the module.
S The easiest method to determine if a module has failed is to replace it if
you have a spare. However, if you suspect another device to have
caused the failure in the module, that device may cause the same
failure in the replacement module as well. As a point of caution, you
may want to check devices or power supplies connected to the failed
module before replacing it with a spare module.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Testing Output
Points

9--15

Output points can be set on or off in the DL405 series CPUs but they cannot be
forced in such a way to override ladder logic. If you want to do an I/O check out
independent of the application program, follow the procedure below:
Step

Action

Change the CPU keyswitch to TERM.

Use a handheld programmer or DirectSOFT to communicate online to

the PLC.

Change to Program mode.

Go to address 0.

Insert an END statement at address 0. (This will cause program execution to occur only at address 0 and prevent the application program from
running and turning I/O points on or off).

Change to Run mode using the handheld programmer or DirectSOFT.

We must do this to enable the outputs.

Use the programming device to set (turn) on or off the points you wish to
test.

When you finish testing I/O points delete the END statement at address
0.

WARNING: Depending on your application, forcing I/O points may cause

unpredictable machine operation that can result in a risk of personal injury or
equipment damage. Make sure you have taken all appropriate safety
precautions prior to testing any I/O points.
Handheld
Programmer
Keystrokes Used
to Test an Output
Point

END

X0

X2

X1

X3

X5

X7

X4
Y1

X10

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

Insert an END statement

at the beginning of the
Program. This disables
the remainder of the
program.

Y0

END

From a clear display, use the following keystrokes

Y(OUT)

BIT ST

10

16P MON
Turn the output on (or off)
Y(OUT)

SHFT

Y0 is now on

ON

10

16P MON

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

9--16

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

Noise Troubleshooting
Electrical Noise
Problems

Noise is one of the most difficult problems to diagnose. Electrical noise can enter a
system in many ways, which are divided into two categories, conducted or radiated:
S Conducted noise is when the electrical interference is introduced into
the system by way of an attached wire, panel connection, etc. It may
enter through an I/O module, a power supply connection, the
communication ground connection, or the chassis ground connection.
S Radiated noise is electrical interference introduced into the system
through the air as radio waves, without a direct electrical connection.

Reducing
Electrical Noise

The following tips can help reduce electrical noise enough for normal operation.
S Most noise problems result from improper grounding of the system. A
good earth ground can be the single most effective way to correct noise
problems. If a ground is not available, install a ground rod as close to
the system as possible. Ensure all ground wires are single point
grounds and are not daisy chained from one device to another. Ground
metal enclosures around the system. A loose wire is no more than a
large antenna waiting to introduce noise into the system; therefore, you
should tighten all connections in your system. Loose ground wires are
more susceptible to noise than the other wires in your system. Review
Chapter 2 Installation and Safety Guidelines if you have questions
regarding how to ground your system.
S Electrical noise can enter the system through the power source for the
CPU and I/O. Installing an isolation transformer for all AC sources can
correct this problem. DC sources should be well grounded, good quality
supplies. Switching DC power supplies commonly generate more noise
than linear supplies.
S Separate input wiring from output wiring. Never run analog I/O wiring or
low voltage discrete I/O wiring close to high voltage wiring.
S

To improve noise immunity, you may optionally install the factory

provided shunt between logic ground (LG) and chassis ground (G) on
the CPU terminal strip shown to the left.
In rare instances you may want to isolate logic ground from chassis
ground. There is a single jumper on the 4 slot base and two jumpers on
the 6 and 8 slot bases for this purpose. Isolation can be obtained by
removing these jumper(s), shown below.
Spring loaded
securing screw

Optional CPU jumper connects logic

ground and chassis ground

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Base jumper(s) connect logic

ground and chasis ground
on CPU terminal strip

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

9--17

Machine Startup and Program Troubleshooting

The DL405 CPUs provide several features that can help you debug your program
before and during machine startup. This section discusses the following topics
which can be very helpful.
S Program Syntax Check
S Duplicate Reference Check
S Test Modes
S Run Time Edits
S Special Instructions
Syntax Check

Even though the Handheld Programmer and DirectSOFT provide error checking
during program entry, you may want to check a program that has been modified.
Both programming devices offer a way to check the program syntax. For example,
you can use AUX 21, CHECK PROGRAM to check the program syntax from a
Handheld Programmer, or you can use the PLC Diagnostics menu option within
DirectSOFT. This check will find a wide variety of programming errors. The following
example shows how to use the syntax check with a Handheld Programmer.
Use AUX 21 to perform syntax check
CLR

AUX

ENT

ENT

Select syntax check

1
ENT (This may take a minute or so.)

AUX 21 CHECK PROGRAM

1:SYN 2:DUP REF

BUSY

Error Display (example)

$ 8 E401 MISSING END

TMRA
T 002
K00050
(shows location in question)

Syntax OK display

NO SYNTAX ERROR
?

If you get an error, see the Error Codes Section for a complete listing of programming
error codes. Correct the problem and continue running the Syntax check until the
NO SYNTAX ERROR message appears.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

One of two displays will appear

9--18

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Duplicate
Reference Check

You can also check for multiple uses of the same output coil. Both programming
devices offer a way to check for this condition. For example, you can AUX 21,
CHECK PROGRAM to check for duplicate references from a Handheld
Programmer, or you can use the PLC Diagnostics menu option within DirectSOFT.
The following example shows how to perform the duplicate reference check with a
Handheld Programmer.
Use AUX 21 to perform syntax check
AUX

ENT

ENT

Select Duplicate Reference check

2
ENT (This may take a minute or so.)

AUX 21 CHECK PROGRAM

1:SYN 2:DUP REF

BUSY

One of two displays will appear

Error Display (example)

$ 12 E471 DUP COIL REF

OUT
Y 0000
(shows location in question)

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

Syntax OK display

NO DUP REFS
?

If you get a Duplicate Reference error, correct the problem and continue running the
Duplicate Reference check until no duplicate references are found.
NOTE: You can use the same coil in more than one location, especially in programs
that use the Stage instructions and / or the OROUT instructions. The Duplicate
Reference check will find these outputs even though they may be used in an
acceptable fashion.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

TEST-PGM and
TEST-RUN Modes

9--19

Test Mode allows the CPU to start in TEST-PGM mode, enter TEST-RUN mode, run
a fixed number of scans, and then return to TEST-PGM mode. You can select from 1
to 65,535 scans. You can select this operation from either the Handheld
Programmer (AUX 12) or DirectSOFT via a PLC Modes menu option.
With the Handheld, the actual mode entered when you first select Test Mode
depends on the mode of operation at the time you make the request. If the CPU is in
RUN mode, then TEST-RUN is entered. If the mode is PGM, then TEST-PGM is
entered. DirectSOFT provides more flexibility in selecting the various modes with
different menu options. The following example shows how you can use the
Handheld to select the Test Modes
Use AUX 12 to enter Test Mode
AUX

ENT

ENT

MODE = TEST-PGM

To specify the number of scans. . .

CLR

SHFT TEST

NO. OF SCANS?

(CPU runs scans and returns to Test-PGM )

To switch to TEST-PGM mode . . .

CLR
ENT

SHFT TEST

STOP SCAN?

(to confirm the return to TEST-PGM)

To switch to TEST-RUN mode . . .

ENT

SHFT TEST

START SCAN?

(to confirm the entry of TEST-RUN)

With the Handheld Programmer you gain some advantages by using Test Mode.
S The Handheld Programmer status displays are more detailed.
S You can enable the CPU to hold output states.
Test Mode Displays: For some instructions, the TEST-RUN mode display is more
detailed than the status displays shown in RUN mode. The following diagram shows
an example of a Timer instruction display during TEST-RUN mode.
RUN Mode

$
TMR

TEST-RUN Mode

3
T 000

K0500

$
TMR

T=510
T 000
K0500
Current Value

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

CLR

9--20

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Holding Output States: In normal RUN mode, the outputs are turned off when you
return to PGM mode. In TEST-RUN mode you can set each individual output to
either turn off or hold its last output state on the transition to TEST-PGM mode. The
ability to hold the output states is especially useful, since It allows you to maintain key
system I/O points for examination. The following diagram shows the differences
between RUN and TEST-RUN modes.
RUN Mode to PGM Mode
X0

X2

X1

X3

Y0
X4

X10

Outputs are
OFF
Y1

Status on final scan

X0

X2

X1

X3

X10

END

Y0
X4
Y1

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

END

TEST-RUN to TEST-PGM
X0

X2

X1

X3

Y0
X4

Hold Y0 ON
Y1

X10
Let Y1 turn
OFF

END

You can use AUX 58 on the Handheld Programmer to select the action for each
individual output.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Run Time Edits
X  
430 440 450

9--21

The DL440 and DL450 CPUs allow you to make changes to the application program
during Run Mode. These edits are not bumpless. Instead, CPU scan is
momentarily interrupted (and the outputs are maintained in their current state) until
the program change is complete. This means if the output is off, it will remain off until
the program change is complete. If the output was on, it will remain on.
WARNING: Only authorized personnel fully familiar with all aspects of the
application should make changes to the program. Changes during Run Mode
become effective immediately. Make sure you thoroughly consider the impact
of any changes to minimize the risk of personal injury or damage to
equipment. There are some important operations sequence changes during
Run Time Edits.
1. If there is a syntax error in the new instruction, the CPU will not enter the
Run Mode.
2. If you delete an output coil reference and the output was on at the time, the
output will remain on until it is forced off with a programming device.
3. Input point changes are not acknowledged during Run Time Edits. So, if
youre using a high-speed operation and a critical input comes on, the CPU
may not see the change.
You can use either the Handheld Programmer or DirectSOFT to edit the program
during Run Mode. The following pages show a brief example of how to do this with
the Handheld Programmer. You use AUX 14 to edit the program during Run Mode.
Weve already shown you how to select the various AUX functions, but a few things
are different with AUX 14.
S Once you select AUX 14 the Handheld RUN LED starts blinking. This
indicates the a Run Mode edit is in progress.
S If you had displayed an address just before selecting AUX 14, that
address will automatically appear. So, you can search for an address or
instruction before you select AUX 14 or after you select AUX 14.
Select AUX 14, Run Time Edit
1

ENT

AUX 1* OPERATING MODE

AUX 14 RUN TIME EDIT

Press ENT to select AUX 14 and display the address

ENT

$xxxxx
STR
X 0001

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

AUX

9--22

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Changing an
Instruction During
Run Mode

Once youve found the instruction you can change it very easily. The following
example shows you how to change the X5 contact to X10.
Ladder Representation
X0

X2

X5

Y0
OUT

X1

X3

X4

Change X5
X6
END

Identify the Instruction

ADDRESS

INSTRUCTION

0
1

10

STR X0
OR X1

AND X5

END

DESCRIPTION
Starts branch 1 with X0
Joins X1 in parallel with X0

Starts branch 4 with X5

Ends the program

FIND the Address

AND

X(IN)

FIND

SEARCHING

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

AND X5

$
AND

6
X 0005

Change the Instruction

AND

X(IN)

10

ENT

$
6
WANT TO ALTER?

Press CLR to abort the edit or ENT to accept

ENT

(If you press ENT, the change is accepted

and the next address is displayed. If you
pressed CLR, the current address is
displayed.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

$
ORN

7
X 0006

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Inserting an
Instruction During
Run Mode

9--23

Inserting an instruction during Run Mode works almost exactly the same as it does
during Program Mode. Remember, INSERT adds an instruction before the
instruction that is being displayed and the remaining addresses increment.
Ladder Representation
X0

X2

X5

X7

Y0
OUT

X1

X3

X4

Add X7
X6
END

Identify the Instruction

ADDRESS

INSTRUCTION

0
1

STR X0
OR X1

AND X5
AND X7
ORN X6

END

Insert before

10

DESCRIPTION
Starts branch 1 with X0
Joins X1 in parallel with X0

Starts branch 4 with X5

Adds X7 in series with X5
Joins X6 (NOT) in parallel

Ends the program

FIND the Address

OR

NOT

X(IN)

FIND

SEARCHING
ORN X6
7
X 0006

Insert the New Instruction

AND

X(IN)

SHFT

INS

$
7
WANT TO INSERT?

Press CLR to abort the edit or ENT to accept

ENT

(If you press ENT, the change is accepted

and the next address is displayed. If you
pressed CLR, the current address is
displayed.

$
ORN

8
X 0006

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

$
ORN

9--24

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Deleting an
Instruction During
Run Mode

Deleting an instruction during Run Mode works almost exactly the same as it does
during Program Mode. Remember, this operation deletes the instruction that is
currently being displayed and the remaining addresses decrement.
Ladder Representation
X0

X2

X5

X7

Y0
OUT

X1

X3

X4

Delete X7
X6
END

Identify the Instruction

ADDRESS

INSTRUCTION

0
1

6
7

11

STR X0
OR X1

AND X5
AND X7

END

Delete

DESCRIPTION
Starts branch 1 with X0
Joins X1 in parallel with X0

Starts branch 4 with X5

Adds X7 in series with X5

Ends the program

FIND the Address

AND

X(IN)

FIND

SEARCHING

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

AND X7
$
AND

7
X 0007

Delete the Instruction

SHFT

DEL

$
7
WANT TO DELETE?

Press CLR to abort the edit or ENT to accept

ENT

(If you press ENT, the change is accepted

and the next address is displayed. If you
pressed CLR, the current address is
displayed.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

$
ORN

7
X 0006

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Special Debug
Instructions

9--25

There are several instructions that can be used to help you debug your program
during machine startup operations: END, PAUSE, STOP, and BREAK.
END Instruction: You can quickly disable part of the program by inserting an END
statement prior to the portion that should be disabled. The CPU assumes that is the
end of the program. The following diagram shows an example.
New END disables X10 and Y1

Normal Program
X0

X2

X1

X3

Y0
X4

X0

X2

X1

X3

Y0
X4

Y1

X10

END

END

Y1

X10

END

PAUSE Instruction: This instruction provides a quick way to allow the inputs (or
other logic) to operate while disabling selected outputs. The output image register is
still updated, but the output status is not written to the modules. For example, you
could make this conditional by adding an input contact or CR to control the
instruction with a switch or a programming device. Or, you could just add the
instruction without any conditions so the selected outputs are always disabled.
PAUSE disables Y0 and Y1

Normal Program
X0

X2

X1

X3

Y0

Y0 -- Y1
PAUSE

X4
Y1

X10

X2

X1

X3

Y0
X4
Y1

X10

END

STOP Instruction: Sometimes during machine startup you need a quick way to turn
off all the outputs and return to Program Mode. In addition to the Test Modes, you can
also use the STOP instruction. When executed, a STOP causes the CPU to exit Run
Mode and enter Program Mode. The following program does this. Remember, all
outputs are turned off during Program Mode.
STOP puts CPU in Program Mode

Normal Program
X0

X2

X1

X3

Y0

X20
STOP

X10

X4
Y1

END

X0

X2

X1

X3

X10

Y0
X4
Y1

END

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

END

X0

9--26

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

BREAK Instruction: If you have a DL440 CPU you can also use the BREAK
instruction to stop the program scan. As long as the BREAK instruction is active the
scan is stopped and the CPU enters a special mode, TEST-HALT. You have to use
either the Handheld Programmer or DirectSOFT to restart the scan by placing the
CPU back in Run Mode. When the CPU returns to Run Mode the scan resumes at
the point of the break. For example, if you are using several data instructions it may
be helpful to stop the scan and examine the accumulator and accumulator stack.
The following diagram shows an example.
X1

Constant

LD
K3245

Current Acc. value

Acc. 0

Load the value 3245

into the accumulator

V701

V700

Previous Acc. value

Acc. X

LD
K5151

Constant

Current Acc. value

Load the value 5151 into the

accumulator, pushing the value
1234 onto the stack

Acc. 0

V701

V700

Previous Acc. value

Acc. 0

X10

BREAK

V703 -- V702

Level 2

V705 -- V704

Level 3

V707 -- V706

Level 4

V711 -- V710

Level 5

V713 -- V712

Level 6

V715 -- V714

Level 7

V717 -- V716

Level 8

V721 -- V720

Stops Scan Here

Y0

X2

Maintenance
and Troubleshooting

Y0

X2

Accumulator Stack
Level 1

Restarts Scan Here

In the example, input X10 triggers the BREAK instruction. The CPU will stop
scanning the program at this point. Now you could easily see how the program
instructions have affected the accumulator or accumulator stack. The following
diagram shows how you could use the Handheld to examine the accumulator stack.
Select the location to monitor
CLR

WD ST

V MON

V 0703
xxxx

V 0702
3245

Value is displayed
When you use the Handheld to return to Run Mode, the CPU starts scanning the
program at the rung following the BREAK.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Auxiliary Functions

1A

In This Appendix. . . .
Introduction
AUX 1* Operating Modes
AUX 2* RLL Operations
AUX 3* V-memory Operations
AUX 4* I/O Configuration
AUX 5* CPU Configuration
AUX 6* Handheld Programmer Configuration
AUX 7* Memory Cartridge Operations
AUX 8* Password Operations

Appendix A
Auxiliary Functions

A--2

Auxiliary Functions

Introduction
What are Auxiliary
Functions?

Many CPU setup tasks involve the use of Auxiliary (AUX) Functions. The AUX
Functions perform various operations, ranging from simple operating mode
changes to copying programs to memory cartridges. They are divided into
categories that affect different system resources. You can access AUX Functions
from DirectSOFT or from the Handheld Programmer. Some AUX Functions are
designed specifically for the Handheld Programmer setup, so they will not be
available with the DirectSOFT package. You may need to supplement this Appendix
with information from the documentation for your choice of programming device.

AUX Function and Description

430

440

450

HPP

AUX 1* Operating Mode

AUX Function and Description

430

440

450

HPP

AUX 5* CPU Configuration

11

Go to Run Mode

51

Modify Program Name

12

Go to Test Mode

52

Display / Change Calendar

13

Go to Program Mode

53

Display Scan Time

14

Run Time Edit

54

Initialize Scratchpad

55

Set Watchdog Timer

AUX 2* RLL Operations

21

Check Program

56

Configure Comm. Ports

22

Change Reference

57

Set Retentive Ranges

23

Clear Ladder Range

58

Test Operations

24

Clear Ladders

5C

Display Error History

25

Select MC or Flash Memory

5D

Select PLC Scan Mode

26

Copy MC Contents to Flash

27

Copy Flash contents to MC

61

Show Revision Numbers

28

Verify Flash contents = MC

62

Beeper On / Off

63

Backlight On / Off

AUX 3* V-Memory Operations

AUX 6* Handheld Programmer Configuration

31

Clear V Memory

64

Select Online / Offline

32

Clear V Range

65

Run Self Diagnostics

33

Find V-memory Value

AUX 4* I/O Configuration

AUX 7* Memory Cartridge Operations

71

CPU to Memory Cartridge

41

Show I/O Configuration

72

Memory Cartridge to CPU

42

I/O Diagnostics

73

Compare MC with CPU

44

Power up I/O Configuration

Check

74

Memory Cart. Blank Check

45

Select Configuration

75

Clear Memory Cartridge

46

Configure I/O

76

Display Memory Cart. Type

47

Intelligent I/O

77

Tape to Memory Cartridge

78

Memory Cartridge to Tape

79

Compare MC with Tape

supported
 not supported or not applicable


DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

AUX 8* Password Operations

81

Modify Password

82

Unlock CPU

83

Lock CPU

Auxilliary Functions

DirectSOFT provides various menu options during both online and offline
programming. Some of the AUX functions are only available during online
programming, some only during offline programming, and some during both online
and offline programming. The following diagram shows an example of the PLC
operations menu available within DirectSOFT.

Menu Options

Accessing AUX
Functions via the
Handheld
Programmer

You can also access the AUX functions by using a Handheld Programmer. Plus,
remember some of the AUX functions are only available from the Handheld. The
following diagram shows how you could quickly access the AUX function from the
Handheld.
CLR

AUX

AUX FUNCTION SELECTION

AUX 1* OPERATING MODE

Use NXT or PREV to cycle through the menus

NXT

AUX FUNCTION SELECTION

AUX 2* RLL OPERATIONS

Press ENT to select sub-menus

ENT

AUX 2* RLL OPERATIONS

AUX 21 CHECK PROGRAM

You can also enter the exact AUX number to go straight to the sub-menu.
Enter the AUX number directly
AUX

ENT

AUX 2* RLL OPERATIONS

AUX 21 CHECK PROGRAM

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix A
Auxiliary Functions

Accessing AUX
Functions via
DirectSOFT

A--3

Appendix A
Auxiliary Functions

A--4

Auxiliary Functions

AUX 1* Operating Modes

AUX 11
Go to Run Mode

You can use AUX 11 to place the CPU in Run Mode. In Run Mode the CPU executes
the program and updates the I/O modules. You can also change the PLC mode from
within DirectSOFT by using the PLC/PLC Modes sub-menu.

AUX 12
Go to Test Mode

Test Mode allows the CPU to start in TEST-PGM mode, enter TEST-RUN mode, run
a fixed number of scans (from 1 to 65,535), and then return to TEST-PGM mode. You
can also change enter TEST Mode from within DirectSOFT by using the PLC > PLC
Modes sub-menu. You gain some advantages by using Test Mode.
S The status displays are more detailed with the Handheld Programmer.
S You can enable the CPU to hold output states.
For some instructions, the Handheld Programmer TEST-RUN mode display is more
detailed than the status displays shown in RUN mode. The following diagram shows
an example of a Timer instruction display during TEST-RUN mode.
RUN Mode

$
TMR

TEST-RUN Mode

3
T 000

K0500

$
TMR

T=510
T 000
K0500
Current Value

AUX 13
Go to Program
Mode
AUX 14
Run Time Edit

Use AUX 13 to place the CPU in Program Mode. In PGM mode, you can enter or
change the program. The CPU does not execute the program or update the output
modules. All output points are turned off. You can also change enter Program Mode
from within DirectSOFT by using the PLC > PLC Modes sub-menu.
With the DL440 or DL450 CPU you can edit programs during Run Mode and
Test-Run Mode with AUX14, or from within DirectSOFT by using the PLC > PLC
Modes sub-menu.
Most of the things you can do in Program Mode also apply. For example, you can use
the same techniques to search for a specific instruction or a specific address.
However, you cannot use Search and Replace functions during Run Mode.
The Run Mode Edits are not bumpless. Instead, the CPU maintains the outputs in
their last state while it accepts the new program information. If an error is found in the
new program, then the CPU will turn all the outputs off and enter the Program Mode.
WARNING: Only authorized personnel fully familiar with all aspects of the
application should make changes to the program. Changes during Run Mode
become effective immediately. Make sure you thoroughly consider the impact
of any changes to minimize the risk of personal injury or damage to
equipment. Edits during Run Mode are ideally suited to small changes.
For major program changes, we strongly recommended switching the system
to program mode, taking the same precautions as if it were the initial machine
startup.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Auxilliary Functions

A--5

AUX 21
Check Program

Both the Handheld and DirectSOFT automatically check for errors during program
entry. However, there may be occasions when you want to check a program that has
already been in the CPU. There are two types of checks available.
S Syntax
S Duplicate References
The Syntax check will find a wide variety of programming errors, such as missing
END statements, incomplete FOR/NEXT loops, etc. If you perform this check and
get an error, see Appendix B for a complete listing of programming error codes.
Correct the problem and then continue running the Syntax check until the message
NO SYNTAX ERROR appears.
Use the Duplicate Reference check to verify you have not used the same output coil
reference more than once. Note, this AUX function will also find the same outputs
even if they have been used with the OROUT instruction, which is perfectly
acceptable.
This AUX function is available on the PLC > Diagnostics sub-menu from within
DirectSOFT.

AUX 22
Change Reference

There will probably be times when you need to change an I/O address reference or
control relay reference. AUX 22 allows you to quickly and easily change all
occurrences of a specific instruction. For example, you can replace every instance of
X5 with X10.

AUX 23
Clear Ladder
Range

There have been many times when weve taken existing programs and added or
removed certain portions to solve new application problems. By using AUX 23 you
can select and delete a portion of the program. DirectSOFT does not have a menu
option for this AUX function, but you can just select the appropriate portion of the
program and cut it with the editing tools.

AUX 24
Clear Ladders

AUX 24 clears the entire program from CPU memory. Before you enter a new
program, you should always clear ladder memory. This AUX function is available on
the PLC > Clear PLC Memory sub-menu within DirectSOFT.

AUX 25
Select MC or
Flash Memory

AUX 25 lets you select either the (optional) Memory Cartridge or the CPUs built-in
flash memory as the current working memory. NOTE: operations such as Clear
Ladder Range and Clear Ladders operate on the current selected memory device.

AUX 26
Copy MC
Contents to Flash

AUX 26 copies the entire Memory Cartridge contents to the CPUs built-in flash
memory. Any data in the flash memory will be over-written.

AUX 27
Copy Flash
Contents to MC

AUX 27 copies the entire CPUs built-in flash memory contents to the Memory
Cartridge memory. Any data in the Memory Cartridge will be over-written.

AUX 28
Verify Flash
Contents = MC

AUX 28 verifies that the data in the CPUs internal flash memory is the same as the
Memory Cartridge contents. This is useful when verifying ladder program updates,
and generally managing the ladder program during program development.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix A
Auxiliary Functions

AUX 2* RLL Operations

Appendix A
Auxiliary Functions

A--6

Auxiliary Functions

AUX 3* V-memory Operations

AUX 31
Clear V--Memory

AUX 31 clears all the information from the V-memory locations available for general
use. This AUX function is available on the PLC > Clear PLC Memory sub-menu
within DirectSOFT.

AUX 32
Clear V-memory
Range

Just as you can use AUX 23 to delete a portion of the control program, you can also
use AUX 32 to clear a portion of V--memory. DirectSOFT provides access to this
AUX function on the Tools > Memory Editor sub-menu.

AUX 33
Find V-memory
Value

AUX 33 allows you to search through a range of V-memory locations to find a specific
value. For example, you may want to search a value of 1234 through the range of
V1400 -- V2000. This feature is also available within DirectSOFT via the Tools >
Memory Editor sub-menu.

AUX 4* I/O Configuration

AUX 41
Show I/O
Configuration

This AUX function allows you to display the current I/O configuration. With the
Handheld Programmer, you can scroll through each base and I/O slot to view the
complete configuration. The configuration shows the type of module installed in
each slot. DirectSOFT provides the same information, but it is much easier to view
because you can view a complete base on one screen.

AUX 42
I/O Diagnostics

This is probably one of the most useful AUX function available in the DL405 system.
This AUX function will show you the exact base and slot location of any I/O module
error that has occurred. This feature is also available within DirectSOFT under the
PLC > Diagnostics sub-menu.

AUX 44
Power-up
Configuration
Check

By selecting this feature you can quickly detect any changes that may have occurred
while the power was disconnected. For example, if someone placed an output
module in a slot that previously held an input module, the configuration check would
detect the change.
If the system detects a change in the I/O configuration at power-up, an error code
E252 NEW I/O CONFIGURATION will be generated. You can use AUX 42 to
determine the exact base and slot location where the change occurred.
WARNING: You should always correct any I/O configuration errors before you
place the CPU into RUN mode. Uncorrected errors can cause unpredictable
machine operation that can result in a risk of personal injury or damage to
equipment.
This feature is also available within DirectSOFT under the PLC > Setup sub-menu.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Auxilliary Functions

Even though the CPU can automatically detect configuration changes, you may
actually want the new I/O configuration to be used. For example, you may have
intentionally changed a module to use with a new program. You can use AUX 45 to
select the new configuration, or, keep the existing configuration that is stored in
memory. This feature is also available within DirectSOFT from the PLC > Setup
sub-menu.
WARNING: Make sure the I/O configuration being selected will work properly
with the CPU program. You should always correct any I/O configuration errors
before you place the CPU into RUN mode. Uncorrected errors can cause
unpredictable machine operation that can result in a risk of personal injury or
damage to equipment.

AUX 46
I/O Configuration

You will probably never need to use this feature, but the DL440 CPU allows you to
use AUX 46 to manually assign I/O addresses for any or all I/O slots on the local or
expansion bases. It is generally much easier to do the I/O configuration operations
from within DirectSOFT. The software package provides a really nice screen that is
available from the PLC > Configure I/O sub-menu.
This feature is useful if you have a standard configuration you must sometimes
change slightly to accommodate special requests. For example, you may require
two adjacent input modules to have addresses starting at X10 and X200
respectively.
In automatic configuration, the addresses were assigned on 8-point boundaries.
Manual configuration assumes that all modules are at least 16 points, so you can
only assign addresses that are a multiple of 20 (octal). For example, X30 and Y50
would not be valid starting addresses for a module. X20 and Y40 are valid examples
of starting addresses in a manual configuration. This does not mean you can only
use 16 or 32 point modules with manual configuration. You can use 8 point modules,
but 16 addresses will be assigned and 8 of them are unused.
WARNING: If you manually configure an I/O slot, the I/O addressing for the
other modules will change. This is because the DL405 products do not allow
you to assign duplicate I/O addresses. You should always correct any I/O
configuration errors before you place the CPU into RUN mode. Uncorrected
errors can cause unpredictable machine operation that can result in a risk of
personal injury or damage to equipment.
Once you have manually configured the addresses for an I/O slot, the system will
automatically retain these values even after a power cycle. You can remove any
manual configuration changes by simply performing an automatic configuration.

AUX 47
Intelligent I/O
Monitor

This AUX function allows you to monitor the shared RAM data that is associated with
many specialty I/O modules. For example, you could use this AUX function to
monitor the data accessed by shared RAM in the High Speed Counter. DirectSOFT
provides this capability through the PLC > Setup Global I/O sub-menu.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix A
Auxiliary Functions

AUX 45
Select
Configuration

A--7

Appendix A
Auxiliary Functions

A--8

Auxiliary Functions

AUX 5* CPU Configuration

AUX 51
Modify Program
Name

The DL405 products can use program names for memory cartridges or cassette
tapes. Program names are especially useful with cassette tapes since they can store
multiple programs. The program name can be up to eight characters in length and
can use any of the available characters (A--Z, 0--9). AUX 51 allows you to enter a
program name. You can also perform this operation from within DirectSOFT by
using the PLC > Setup sub-menu.

AUX 52
Display / Change
Calendar

The DL440 CPU has a clock and calendar feature. If you are using this, you can use
the Handheld and AUX 52 to set the time and date. The following format is used.
S Date Year, Month, Date, Day of week (0 -- 6, Sunday thru Saturday)
S Time 24 hour format, Hours, Minutes, Seconds
You can use the AUX function to change any component of the date or time.
However, the CPU will not automatically correct any discrepancy between the date
and the day of the week. For example, if you change the date to the 15th of the month
and the 15th is on a Thursday, you will also have to change the day of the week
(unless the CPU already shows the date as Thursday).
You can also perform this operation from within DirectSOFT by using the PLC >
Setup sub-menu.

AUX 53
Display Scan Time
AUX 54
Initialize
Scratchpad

AUX 53 displays the current, minimum, and maximum scan times. The minimum
and maximum times are the ones that have occurred since the last Program Mode to
Run Mode transition. You can also perform this operation from within DirectSOFT
by using the PLC > Diagnostics sub-menu.
The DL405 CPUs maintain system parameters in a memory area often referred to as
the scratchpad. In some cases, you may make changes to the system setup that
will be stored in system memory. For example, if you specify a range of Control
Relays (CRs) as retentive, these changes are stored.
NOTE: You may never have to use this feature unless you have made changes that
affect system memory. Usually, youll only need to initialize the system memory if
you are changing programs and the old program required a special system setup.
You can usually change from program to program without ever initializing system
memory.
AUX 54 resets the system memory to the default values. You can also perform this
operation from within DirectSOFT by using the PLC > Setup sub-menu.

AUX 55
Set Watchdog
Timer

The DL405 CPUs have a watchdog timer that is used to monitor the scan time. The
default value set from the factory is 200 ms. If the scan time exceeds the watchdog
time limit, the CPU automatically leaves RUN mode and enters PGM mode. The
Handheld displays the following message E003 S/W TIMEOUT when the scan
overrun occurs.
Use AUX 55 to increase or decrease the watchdog timer value. You can also perform
this operation from within DirectSOFT by using the PLC > Setup sub-menu.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Auxilliary Functions

Since the DL405 CPUs have built-in DirectNET ports, you can use the Handheld to
set the network address for the port and the port communication parameters. The
default settings are:
S Station address 1
S Hex mode
S Odd parity
The DirectNET Manual provides additional information about communication
settings required for network operation.
NOTE: You will only need to use this procedure if you have the bottom port
connected to a network. Otherwise, the default settings will work just fine.
Use AUX 56 to set the network address and communication parameters. You can
also perform this operation with DirectSOFT by using the PLC > Setup sub-menu.

AUX 57
Set Retentive
Ranges

Memory Area

The DL405 CPUs provide certain ranges of retentive memory by default. The default
ranges are suitable for many applications, but you can change them if your
application requires additional retentive ranges or no retentive ranges at all. The
default settings are:
DL430
Default Range

Avail. Range

DL440
Default Range

DL450

Avail. Range

Default Range

Avail. Range

Control Relays

C600 -- C737

C0 -- C737

C600 -- C737

C0 -- C1777

C1000 -- C3777

V--Memory

V2000 -- V7377

V0 -- V7377

V2000 -- V7777

V0 -- V17777

V1400 -- V37777 V0 -- V37777

Timers

None by default T0 -- T177

None by default T0 -- T377

None by default

T0 -- T377

Counters

CT0 -- CT177

CT0 -- CT177

CT0 -- CT377

CT0 -- CT377

Stages

None by default S0 -- S577

None by default

S0 -- S1777

CT0 -- CT177

CT0 -- CT177

None by default S0 -- S1777

C0 -- C3777

Use AUX 57 to change the retentive ranges. You can also perform this operation
from within DirectSOFT by using the PLC > Setup sub-menu.
AUX 58
Test Operations

In normal RUN mode, the outputs are turned off when you return to PGM mode. In
TEST-RUN mode you can set each individual output to either turn off or hold its last
output state on the transition to TEST-PGM mode. The ability to hold the output
states is especially useful, since It allows you to maintain key system I/O points for
examination. The following diagram shows the differences between RUN and
TEST-RUN modes.
You can use AUX 58 to configure each individual output. You can also perform this
operation from within DirectSOFT by using the PLC > Setup sub-menu.

AUX 5C
Display Error
History

The DL440 and DL450 CPUs will automatically log any system error codes and
custom messages created with the FAULT instructions. The CPU logs the error
code, date, and time the error occurred in two separate tables:
S Error Code Table -- the system logs up to 32 errors in the table. When
an error occurs, the errors already on the table are pushed down and
the most recent error is loaded into the top slot. If the table is full when
an error occurs, the oldest error is pushed out (erased) of the table.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix A
Auxiliary Functions

AUX 56
CPU Network
Address

A--9

A--10

Auxiliary Functions

Appendix A
Auxiliary Functions

Message Table -- the system logs up to 16 messages in this table.

When a message is triggered, the messages already stored in the table
are pushed down and the most recent message is loaded into the top
slot. If the table is full when an error occurs, the oldest message is
pushed out (erased) of the table. Example messages below.
Date

Time

Message

1993--05--26

08:41:51:11

* Conveyor--2 stopped

1993--04--30

17:01:11:56

* Conveyor--1 stopped

1993--04--30

17:01:11:12

* Limit SW1 failed

1993--04--28

03:25:14:31

* Saw Jam Detect

You can use AUX Function 5C to show the error codes or messages You can also
view the errors and messages from within DirectSOFT by using the PLC >
Diagnostics sub-menu.
AUX 5D
Select PLC
Scan Mode

The DL450 CPU has two program scan modes: fixed and variable. In fixed mode, the
scan time is lengthened to the time you specify (in milliseconds). In variable scan
mode, the CPU begins each scan as soon as the previous scans activities complete.

AUX 6* Handheld Programmer Configuration

AUX 61
Show Revision
Numbers

Over the years there have been several additions and enhancements made to the
products that are compatible with the DL405 family. Sometimes these new features
only work with certain releases of firmware. By using AUX 61 you can quickly view
the CPU, Gate Array, and Handheld Programmer firmware revision numbers. This
information is also available from within DirectSOFT from the PLC > Diagnostics
sub-menu.

AUX 62
Beeper On / Off

The Handheld has a beeper that provides confirmation of keystrokes. This can be
quite annoying in an office environment. You can use Auxiliary (AUX) Function 62 to
turn off the beeper.

AUX 63
Turning Off the
Backlight

If necessary, you can use AUX 63 to turn off the display backlight. However, in most
cases it seems to be easier to read if you just leave the display backlight enabled.

AUX 64
Select Online /
Offline

You can use AUX 64 to take the Handheld Programmer offline. That is, the Handheld
will not communicate with the CPU until it is returned to online operation. For
example, if you have selected offline you cannot access the CPU.

AUX 65
Run Self
Diagnostics

If you think the Handheld Programmer is not operating correctly, you can use AUX 65
to run a self diagnostics program. You can check the following items.
S Keypad
S Display
S LEDs and Backlight
S Tape Port (requires adapter)
S Memory Cartridge

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Auxilliary Functions

A--11

Transferrable
Memory Areas

Many of these AUX functions allow you to copy different areas of memory to and
from the CPU, memory cartridge, and cassette tapes. The following table shows the
areas that may be mentioned.
Option and Memory Type

DL440 Range

DL430 Range

1:PGM Program

$00000 -- $07679
(7.5K program memory)
$00000 -- $015871
(15.5K program memory)

$00000 -- $03583

2:V V--memory

$00000 -- $37777

$00000 -- $07777

3:SYS System memory

Non-selectable copies all system parameters

AUX 71
CPU to Memory
Cartridge

AUX 71 copies information from a CPU to a memory cartridge that is installed in the
Handheld Programmer. If a memory cartridge is not present in the Handheld, you
can just remove the memory cartridge from the CPU and place it in the Handheld, but
if you want to keep the CPU that is already installed up and running you should use
this AUX function to copy the CPU memory.
You can copy different portions of CPU memory to the memory cartridge as shown in
the previous table.A single memory cartridge cannot hold an entire system. You may
have to use more than one cartridge. If so, put V memory on a cartridge by itself.

AUX 72
Memory Cartridge
to CPU

AUX 72 copies information from a memory cartridge installed in the Handheld

Programmer to the CPU. If a memory cartridge is not present in the CPU, you can
just remove the memory cartridge from the Handheld and place it in the CPU.You
can copy different information types from the memory cartridge as shown in the
previous table.

AUX 73
Compare Memory
Cartridge to CPU

AUX 73 compares the Handheld memory cartridge program with the CPU
program.You can compare different types of information as shown previously.

AUX 74
Memory Cartridge
Blank Check
AUX 75
Clear Memory
Cartridge

AUX 74 allows you to check the memory cartridge to make sure it is blank. Its a good
idea to use this function anytime you start to copy information to a memory cartridge.

AUX 76
Display Memory
Cartridge Type

You can use AUX 76 to quickly display the type of memory cartridge that is installed
in both the CPU and the Handheld Programmer. Remember, there are three types of
memory cartridges, CMOS RAM, EEPROM, and UVPROM.

AUX 77
Tape to Memory
Cartridge

Use AUX 77 to read a program from a cassette tape. Before you begin the procedure
make sure you review the procedures identified in the DL405 Handheld Programmer
manual. These procedures are important to help ensure a successful transfer of
information.

AUX 75 allows you to clear all data from a memory cartridge. This is true for the RAM
and EEPROM memory cartridges. The UVPROM cartridges must be erased with a
UV light source.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix A
Auxiliary Functions

AUX 7* Memory Cartridge Operations

Appendix A
Auxiliary Functions

A--12

Auxiliary Functions

AUX 78
Memory Cartridge
to Tape

Since it is very easy to store multiple programs on a single cassette it is very

important idea to name each program. You already know you can enter a name for
the CPU program. The cassette program name does not have to be the same. For
example, the CPU name may be PRESS1 and the tape name may be STATION1.
Since there are three areas of CPU memory that can be transferred, it is a good idea
to give each of these a separate program name. For example, you could use three
programs, STAT1PGM, STAT1V, and STAT1SYS, for Station 1.
NOTE: Remember tape programs are stored sequentially. It is very easy to overwrite
existing programs if you do not position the tape correctly. Make sure you review the
procedures identified in the DL405 Handheld Programmer manual before beginning
this procedure.

AUX 79
Compare Memory
Cartridge to Tape

Use AUX 79 to compare a cassette program to a program stored in the CPU. Make
sure you review the procedures identified in the DL405 Handheld Programmer
manual before beginning this procedure.

AUX 8* Password Operations

AUX 81
Modify Password

You can use AUX 81 with the DL440 or DL450 CPU to provide an extra measure of
protection by entering a password that prevents unauthorized machine operations.
The password must be an eight-character numeric (0--9) code. Once youve entered
a password, you can remove it by entering all zeros (00000000). (This is the default
from the factory.)
NOTE: The 440 and 450 CPUs support multi-level passwords. This allows password
protection of the ladder program while not locking the communication port to
operator interfaces. The multi-level password can be invoked by making a password
with an upper case A followed by 7 numeric characters (e.g. A12345678).
The password is stored in the memory cartridge. If you install the memory cartridge
in another CPU or Handheld, the password protection remains in effect.
Once youve entered a password, you can lock the CPU against access. There are
two ways to lock the CPU with the Handheld Programmer.
S The CPU is always locked after a power cycle (if a password is present).
S You can use AUX 83 and AUX 84 to lock and unlock the CPU.
You can also enter or modify a password from within DirectSOFT by using the PLC >
Password sub-menu. This feature works slightly differently in DirectSOFT. Once
youve entered a password, the CPU is automatically locked when you exit the
software package. It will also be locked if the CPU is power cycled.
WARNING: Make sure you remember the password before you lock the CPU.
Once the CPU is locked you cannot view, change, or erase the password. You
also cannot erase the memory cartridge and start over. You can have the
password removed by returning the CPU or memory cartridge to the factory
for password removal. It is the policy of AutomationDirect to clear the PLC
memory along with the password, so be sure to have a copy of the program to
reload into the CPU memory once the CPU or memory cartridge has been
returned.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Auxilliary Functions
AUX 82
Unlock CPU
AUX 83
Lock CPU

A--13

AUX 82 can be used to unlock a CPU that has been password protected.
DirectSOFT will automatically ask you to enter the password if you attempt to
communicate with a CPU that contains a password.
AUX 83 can be used to lock a CPU that contains a password. Once the CPU is
locked, you will have to enter a password to gain access. Remember, this is not
necessary with DirectSOFT since the CPU is automatically locked whenever you
exit the software package.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

DL405 Error Codes

In This Appendix. . . .
Error Code Table

1B

Appendix
Appendix B
B
DL405
Error
Codes
Error
Codes

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

B--2

DL405 Error Codes

Error
Code

Name

Description

E001

CPU FATAL
ERROR

You may possibly clear the error by power cycling the CPU. If the error returns,
replace the CPU.

E003

SOFTWARE
TIME-OUT

This error will occur if the program scan time exceeds the time allotted to the
watchdog timer. SP51 will be on and the error code will be stored in V7755. To
correct this problem, add RSTWT instructions in FOR NEXT loops and subroutines
or using AUX 55 extend the time allotted to the watchdog timer.

E004

INVALID
INSTRUCTION
(DL440)

The application program has changed for some reason. SP44 will be on and the
error code will be stored in V7755. This problem may possibly be due to electrical
noise. Use AUX21 to check the program syntax and correct where necessary or
clear the memory and re-download the program. Correct any grounding problems. If
the error returns replace the CPU.

E041

CPU BATTERY
LOW

The CPU battery is low and should be replaced. SP43 will be on and the error code
will be stored in V7757.

E042

NO CPU
BATTERY
(DL450)

The CPU battery is not installed. SP43 will be on and the error code will be stored in
V7757.

E043

MEMORY
CARTRIDGE
BATTERY LOW
(DL440/DL450)

The Memory Cartridge battery is low and should be replaced. SP43 will be on and
the error code will be stored in V7757.

E044

NO MEMORY
CARTRIDGE
BATTERY
(DL450)

The Memory Cartridge battery is not installed. SP43 will be on and the error code
will be stored in V7757.

E099

PROGRAM
MEMORY
EXCEEDED

If the compiled program length exceeds the amount of available CPU RAM this error
will occur. SP52 will be on and the error code will be stored in V7755. Reduce the
size of the application program.

E101

CPU MC
MISSING
(DL440/DL450)

The CPU Memory Cartridge has failed or is missing. SP44 will be on and the error
code will be stored in V7755. Install or replace the Memory Cartridge.

E104

WRITE FAILED
(DL440/DL450)

A write to the CPU Memory Cartridge was not successful. The Memory Cartridge
may be write protected. Disassemble and check the jumper. If the error still occurs
replace the Memory Cartridge.

E151

INVALID
COMMAND

A parity error has occurred in the application program. SP44 will be on and the error
code will be stored in V7755. This problem may be due to electrical noise (correct
any grounding problems). Clear the memory and re-download the program. If the
error returns replace the Memory Cartridge or CPU.

E155

RAM FAILURE

A checksum error has occurred in the system RAM. SP44 will be on and the error
code will be stored in V7755. This problem may possibly be due to a low battery,
electrical noise or a CPU RAM failure. Clear the memory and re-download the
program. Correct any grounding problems. If the error returns replace the CPU.

E2**

I/O MODULE
FAILURE

An I/O module has failed. Run AUX42 to determine the actual error.

E201

TERMINAL
A terminal block is loose or missing from an I/O module. SP45 will be on and the
BLOCK MISSING error code will be stored in V7756.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

DL405 Error Codes

B--3

Description

E202

MISSING I/O
MODULE

An I/O module has failed to communicate with the CPU or is missing from the base.
SP45 will be on and the error code will be stored in V7756. Run AUX42 to determine
the slot and base location of the module reporting the error.

E203

BLOWN FUSE

A fuse has blown in an I/O module. SP45 will be on and the error code will be stored
in V7756. Run AUX42 to determine the slot and base location of the module
reporting the error.

E206

USER 24V
POWER
SUPPLY
FAILURE.

The 24VDC power supply being used to power output modules has failed. SP45 will
be on and the error code will be stored in V7756. Run AUX42 to determine the slot
and base location of the module reporting the error.

E210

POWER FAULT
(DL440)

A short duration power drop-out occurred on the main power line supplying power to
the base.

E250

COMM.
A failure has occurred in the local I/O system. The problem could be in the base,
FAILURE IN THE expansion cable or I/O Expansion Unit power supply. Check all cabling between
I/O CHAIN
bases and replace faulty hardware, if necessary. SP45 will be on and the error code
will be stored in V7755. Run AUX42 to determine the base location reporting the
error.

E251

I/O PARITY
ERROR

A communication parity error has occurred in the I/O communication chain.

E252

NEW I/O CFG

This error occurs when the auto configuration check is turned on in the CPU and the
actual I/O configuration has changed, either by moving modules in a base or
changing types of modules in a base. You can return the modules to the original
position/types or run AUX45 to accept the new configuration. SP47 will be on and
the error code will be stored in V7755.

E261

I/O ADDRESS
CONFLICT
(DL440/DL450)

Overlapping addresses have been assigned while manually configuring the I/O.
Correct the address assignments using AUX46. SP45 will be on and the error code
will be stored in V7755.

E262

I/O OUT OF
RANGE

An out of range I/O address has been encountered in the application program.
Correct the invalid address in the program. SP45 will be on and the error code will
be stored in V7755.

E263

CONFIGURED
I/O ADDRESS
OUT OF RANGE
(DL440/DL450)

Out of range addresses have been assigned while manually configuring the I/O.
Correct the address assignments using AUX46. SP45 will be on and the error code
will be stored in V7755.

E264

DUPLICATE I/O
REFERENCE
(DL440/DL450)

Duplicate addresses have been assigned while manually configuring the I/O.
Correct the address assignments using AUX46.

E311

HP COMM
ERROR 1

A request from the handheld programmer could not be processed by the CPU. Clear
the error and retry the request. If the error continues, replace the CPU. SP46 will be
on and the error code will be stored in V7756.

E312

HP COMM
ERROR 2

A data error was encountered during communications with the CPU. Clear the error
and retry the request. If the error continues, check the cabling between the two
devices, replace the handheld programmer; then if necessary replace the CPU.
SP46 will be on and the error code will be stored in V7756.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix
Appendix B
B
DL405
Error
Codes
Error
Codes

Name

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

Error
Code

Appendix
Appendix B
B
DL405
Error
Codes
Error
Codes

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

B--4

DL405 Error Codes

Error
Code

Name

Description

E313

HP COMM
ERROR 3

An address error was encountered during communications with the CPU. Clear the
error and retry the request. If the error continues, check the cabling between the two
devices, replace the handheld programmer; then if necessary replace the CPU.
SP46 will be on and the error code will be stored in V7756.

E316

HP COMM
ERROR 6

A mode error was encountered during communications with the CPU. Clear the
error and retry the request. If the error continues, replace the handheld programmer;
then if necessary replace the CPU. SP46 will be on and the error code will be stored
in V7756.

E320

HP COMM
TIME-OUT

The CPU did not respond to the handheld programmer communication request.
Check to ensure cabling is correct and not defective. Power cycle the system. If the
error continues, replace the CPU first and then the handheld programmer if
necessary.

E321

COMM ERROR

A data error was encountered during communication with the CPU. Check to ensure
cabling is correct and not defective. Power cycle the system. If the error continues,
replace the CPU first and then the handheld programmer if necessary.

E352

BACKGROUND
COMM ERROR

Communications error between CPU and intelligent module. Incorrect slot reference
while attempting to use the READ/WRITE commands, such as from DCM interface.
The slot number of the module which has the I/O error is stored in V7660--V7764.
You must power cycle the PLC to clear this error.

E360

HP
The device connected to the peripheral port did not respond to the handheld
PERIPHERAL
programmer communication request. Check to ensure cabling is correct and not
PORT TIME-OUT defective. The peripheral device or handheld programmer could be defective.

E4**

NO PROGRAM

A syntax error exist in the application program. The most common is a missing END
statement. Run AUX21 to determine which one of the E4** series of errors is being
flagged. SP52 will be on and the error code will be stored in V7755.

E401

MISSING END
STATEMENT

All application programs must terminate with an END statement. Enter the END
statement in appropriate location in your program. SP52 will be on and the error
code will be stored in V7755.

E402

MISSING LBL
(DL440/DL450)

A GOTO, GTS, MOV MC or LD LBL instruction was used without the appropriate
label. Refer to the programming section for details on these instructions. SP52 will
be on and the error code will be stored in V7755.

E403

MISSING RET
(DL440/DL450)

A subroutine in the program does not end with the RET instruction. SP52 will be on
and the error code will be stored in V7755.

E404

MISSING FOR
(DL440/DL450)

A NEXT instruction does not have the corresponding FOR instruction. SP52 will be
on and the error code will be stored in V7755.

E405

MISSING NEXT
(DL440/DL450)

A FOR instruction does not have the corresponding NEXT instruction. SP52 will be
on and the error code will be stored in V7755.

E406

MISSING IRT

An interrupt routine in the program does not end with the IRT instruction. SP52 will
be on and the error code will be stored in V7755.

E412

SBR/LBL>64
(DL440/DL450)

There is greater than 64 SBR, LBL or DLBL instructions in the program. This error is
also returned if there is greater than 128 GTS or GOTO instructions used in the
program. SP52 will be on and the error code will be stored in V7755.

E413

FOR/NEXT>64
(DL440)

There is greater than 64 FOR/Next loops in the application program. SP52 will be on
and the error code will be stored in V7755. (The DL450 allows unlimited FOR--NEXT
usage).

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

DL405 Error Codes

B--5

Description

E421

DUPLICATE
STAGE
REFERENCE

Two or more SG or ISG labels exist in the application program with the same
number. A unique number must be allowed for each Stage and Initial Stage. SP52
will be on and the error code will be stored in V7755.

E422

DUPLICATE
SBR/LBL
REFERENCE
(DL440/DL450)

Two or more SBR or LBL instructions exist in the application program with the same
number. A unique number must be allowed for each Subroutine and Label. SP52 will
be on and the error code will be stored in V7755.

E423

NESTED LOOPS Nested loops (programming one FOR/NEXT loop inside of another) is not allowed in
(DL440/DL450)
the DL440 series. SP52 will be on and the error code will be stored in V7755.

E431

INVALID ISG/SG
ADDRESS

An ISG or SG must not be programmed after the end statement such as in a

subroutine. SP52 will be on and the error code will be stored in V7755.

E432

INVALID JUMP
(GOTO)
ADDRESS
(DL440/DL450)

A LBL that corresponds to a GOTO instruction must not be programmed after the
end statement such as in a subroutine. SP52 will be on and the error code will be
stored in V7755.

E433

INVALID SBR
ADDRESS
(DL440/DL450)

An SBR must be programmed after the end statement, not in the main body of the
program or in an interrupt routine. SP52 will be on and the error code will be stored
in V7755.

E434

INVALID RTC
ADDRESS
(DL440/DL450)

An RTC must be programmed after the end statement, not in the main body of the
program or in an interrupt routine. SP52 will be on and the error code will be stored
in V7755.

E435

INVALID RT
ADDRESS
(DL440/DL450)

An RT must be programmed after the end statement, not in the main body of the
program or in an interrupt routine. SP52 will be on and the error code will be stored
in V7755.

E436

INVALID INT
ADDRESS

An INT must be programmed after the end statement, not in the main body of the
program. SP52 will be on and the error code will be stored in V7755.

E437

INVALID IRTC
ADDRESS

An IRTC must be programmed after the end statement, not in the main body of the
program. SP52 will be on and the error code will be stored in V7755.

E438

INVALID IRT
ADDRESS

An IRT must be programmed after the end statement, not in the main body of the
program. SP52 will be on and the error code will be stored in V7755.

E440

INVALID DATA
ADDRESS
(DL440/DL450)

Either the DLBL instruction has been programmed in the main program area (not
after the END statement), or the DLBL instruction is on a rung containing input
contact(s).

E441

ACON/NCON
(DL440/DL450)

An ACON or NCON must be programmed after the end statement, not in the main
body of the program. SP52 will be on and the error code will be stored in V7755.

E451

BAD MLS/MLR

MLS instructions must be numbered in ascending order from top to bottom.

E452

X AS COIL

An X data type is being used as a coil output.

E453

MISSING T/C

A timer or counter contact is being used where the associated timer or counter does
not exist.

E454

BAD TMRA

One of the contacts is missing from a TMRA instruction.

E455

BAD CNT

One of the contacts is missing from a CNT or UDC instruction.

E456

BAD SR

One of the contacts is missing from the SR instruction.

E461

STACK
OVERFLOW

More than nine levels of logic have been stored on the stack. Check the use of OR
STR and AND STR instructions.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix
Appendix B
B
DL405
Error
Codes
Error
Codes

Name

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

Error
Code

Appendix
Appendix B
B
DL405
Error
Codes
Error
Codes

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

B--6

DL405 Error Codes

Error
Code

Name

Description

E462

STACK
UNDERFLOW

An unmatched number of logic levels have been stored on the stack. Insure the
number of AND STR and OR STR instructions match the number of STR
instructions.

E463

LOGIC ERROR

A STR instruction was not used to begin a rung of ladder logic.

E464

MISSING CKT

A rung of ladder logic is not terminated properly.

E471

DUPLICATE
COIL
REFERENCE

Two or more OUT instructions reference the same I/O point.

E472

DUPLICATE
TMR
REFERENCE

Two or more TMR instructions reference the same number.

E473

DUPLICATE CNT Two or more CNT instructions reference the same number.
REFERENCE

E480

INVALID CV
ADDRESS
(DL440/DL450)

The CV instruction is used in a subroutine or program interrupt routine. The CV

instruction may only be used in the main program area (before the END statement).

E481

CONFLICTING
INSTRUCTIONS
(DL440/DL450)

An instruction exists between convergence stages.

E482

MAX. CV
INSTRUCTIONS
EXCEEDED
(DL440/DL450)

Number of CV instructions exceeds 17.

E483

INVALID CV
CV JMP has been used in a subroutine or a program interrupt routine.
JUMP ADDRESS
(DL440/DL450)

E484

MISSING CV
INSTRUCTION
(DL440/DL450)

CV JMP is not preceded by the CV instruction. A CV JMP must immediately follow

the CV instruction.

E485

MISSING
REQUIRED
INSTRUCTION
(DL440/DL450)

A CV JMP instruction is not placed between the CV and the [SG, ISG, ST BLK, END
BLK, END] instruction.

E486

INVALID CALL
BLK ADDRESS
(DL440/DL450)

CALL BLK is used in a subroutine or a program interrupt routine. The

CALL BLK instruction may only be used in the main program area (before the END
statement).

E487

MISSING ST
BLK
INSTRUCTION
(DL440/DL450)

The CALL BLK instruction is not followed by a ST BLK instruction.

E488

INVALID ST BLK
ADDRESS
(DL440/DL450)

The ST BLK instruction is used in a subroutine or a program interrupt. Another ST

BLK instruction is used between the CALL BLK and the END BLK instructions.

E489

DUPLICATE CR
REFERENCE
(DL440/DL450)

The control relay used for the ST BLK instruction is being used as an output
elsewhere.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

DL405 Error Codes

B--7

Description

E490

MISSING SG
INSTRUCTION
(DL440/DL450)

The ST BLK instruction is not immediately followed by the SG instruction.

E491

INVALID ISG
INSTRUCTION
ADDRESS
(DL440/DL450)

There is an ISG instruction between the ST BLK and END BLK instructions.

E492

INVALID END BLK

ADDRESS
(DL440/DL450)

The END BLK instruction is used in a subroutine or a program interrupt routine. The
END BLK instruction is not followed by a ST BLK instruction.

E493

MISSING
REQUIRED
INSTRUCTION
(DL440/DL450)

A [CV, SG, ISG, ST BLK, END] instruction must immediately follow the END BLK
instruction.

E494

MISSING END BLK The ST BLK instruction is not followed by a END BLK instruction.
INSTRUCTION
(DL440/DL450)

E499

INVALID PRINT
INSTRUCTION

Invalid PRINT instruction usage. Quotation marks and/or spaces were not entered
or were entered incorrectly.

E501

BAD ENTRY

An invalid keystroke or series of keystrokes was entered into the handheld

programmer.

E502

BAD ADDRESS

An invalid or out of range address was entered into the handheld programmer.

E503

BAD COMMAND

An invalid instruction was entered into the handheld programmer.

E504

BAD REF/VAL

An invalid value or reference number was entered with an instruction.

E505

INVALID
INSTRUCTION

An invalid instruction was entered into the handheld programmer.

E506

INVALID
OPERATION

An invalid operation was attempted by the handheld programmer.

E520

BAD OP--RUN

An operation which is invalid in the RUN mode was attempted by the handheld
programmer.

E521

BAD OP--TRUN

An operation which is invalid in the TEST RUN mode was attempted by the
handheld programmer.

E523

BAD OP--TPGM

An operation which is invalid in the TEST PROGRAM mode was attempted by the
handheld programmer.

E524

BAD OP--PGM

An operation which is invalid in the PROGRAM mode was attempted by the

handheld programmer.

E525

KEYSWITCH

An operation was attempted by the handheld programmer while the CPU keyswitch
was in a position other than the TERM position.

E526

OFF LINE

The handheld programmer is in the OFFLINE mode. To change to the ONLINE

mode use AUX64.

E540

CPU LOCKED
(DL440/DL450)

The CPU has been password locked. To unlock the CPU use AUX82 with the
password.

E541

WRONG
PASSWORD
(DL440/DL450)

The password used to unlock the CPU with AUX82 was incorrect.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix
Appendix B
B
DL405
Error
Codes
Error
Codes

Name

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

Error
Code

Appendix
Appendix B
B
DL405
Error
Codes
Error
Codes

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

B--8

DL405 Error Codes

Error
Code

Name

Description

E542

PASSWORD
RESET
(DL440/DL450)

The CPU powered up with an invalid password and reset the password to
00000000. A password may be re-entered using AUX81.

E601

MEMORY FULL

Attempted to enter an instruction which required more memory than is available in

the CPU.

E602

INSTRUCTION
MISSING

A search function was performed and the instruction was not found.

E603

DATA MISSING
(DL440/DL450)

A search function was performed and the data was not found.

E604

REFERENCE
MISSING

A search function was performed and the reference was not found.

E610

BAD I/O TYPE

The application program referenced an I/O module as the incorrect type of module.

E620

OUT OF
MEMORY

An attempt to transfer more data between the CPU and handheld programmer than
the receiving device can hold.

E621

MC NOT BLANK

An attempt to write to a non-blank Memory Cartridge was made. Erase the cartridge
and then retry the write.

E622

NO HP MC

A data transfer was attempted with no Memory Cartridge or possibly a faulty

Memory Cartridge in the handheld programmer.

E623

SYSTEM MC

A function was requested with a Memory Cartridge which contains system

information only.

E624

V-MEMORY
ONLY

A function was requested with a Memory Cartridge which contains V-memory data
only.

E625

PROGRAM
ONLY

A function was requested with a Memory Cartridge which contains program data
only.

E626

PROM MC

An attempt to transfer data from a tape to a UVPROM Memory Cartridge. This

transfer must be made using a CMOS RAM Cartridge.

E627

BAD WRITE

An attempt to write to a write--protected or faulty Memory Cartridge was made.

Check the write--protect jumper inside the cartridge, then replace if necessary.

E640

COMPARE
ERROR

A compare between the Memory cartridge and the source data was found to be in
error. Erase the Memory Cartridge and retry the operation, replace the Memory
Cartridge if necessary.

E641

VOLUME LEVEL

The volume level of the cassette player is not set properly. Adjust the volume and
retry the operation.

E642

CHECKSUM
ERROR

An error was detected while data was being transferred to the handheld
programmers Memory Cartridge. Check cabling and retry the operation.

E650

HP SYSTEM
ERROR

A system error has occurred in the handheld programmer. Power cycle the handheld
programmer. If the error returns, replace the handheld programmer.

E651

HP ROM ERROR A ROM error has occurred in the handheld programmer. Power cycle the handheld
programmer. If the error returns, replace the handheld programmer.

E652

HP RAM ERROR A RAM error has occurred in the handheld programmer. Power cycle the handheld
programmer. If the error returns, replace the handheld programmer.

E653

MC BATTERY
LOW

The battery in the CMOS RAM cartridge is low and should be replaced.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Instruction
Execution Times

1C

In This Appendix. . . .
Introduction
Boolean Instructions
Comparative Boolean Instructions
Immediate Instructions
Clock/Calendar Instructions
Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions
Accumulator/Data Stack Load and Output Instructions
Accumulator Logic Instructions
Bit Operation Instructions
Math Instructions
Number Conversion Instructions
Table Instructions
CPU Control Instructions
Program Control Instructions
Interrupt Instructions
RLL PLUS Instructions
Intelligent I/O Instructions
Network Instructions
Message Instructions
Drum Instructions

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

C--2

Instruction Execution Times

Introduction

Appendix C
Inst. Execution Times

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

V-Memory Data
Registers

This appendix contains several tables that provide the instruction execution times
for the DL430, DL440, and DL450 CPUs. Many execution times depend on the type
of data used with the instruction. Registers are classified into the following types:
S Data (word) Registers
S Bit Registers
Some V-memory locations are considered data registers, such as timer or counter
current values. Standard User V-memory is classified as a V-memory data register.
Note that can load a bit pattern into these types of registers, even though their
primary use is for data registers. The following locations are data registers:
Data Registers

V-Memory Bit
Registers

DL440

DL450

Timer Current Values

V00000 -- V 00177

V00000 -- V00377

V00000 -- V00377

Counter Current Values

V01000 -- V01177

V01000 -- V01177

V01000 -- V01377

User Data Words

V1400 -- V7377

V1400 -- V7377
V10000 -- V17777

V1400 -- V7377
V10000 -- V37777

You may recall some of the discrete points such as X, Y, C, etc. are automatically
mapped into V--memory. The following bit registers contain this data:
Bit Registers

How to Read
the Tables

DL430

DL430

DL440

DL450

Input Points (X)

V40400 -- V 40423

V40400 -- V 40423

V40400 -- V 40477

Output Points (Y)

V40500 -- V40523

V40500 -- V40523

V40500 -- V40577

Control Relays (C)

V40600 -- V40635

V40600 -- V40677

V40600 -- V40777

Timer Status Bits

V41100 -- V41107

V41100 -- V41117

V41100 -- V41117

Counter Status Bits

V41140 -- V41147

V41140 -- V41147

V41140 -- V41157

Stages

V41000 -- V41027

V41000 -- V41077

V41000 -- V41077

Remote I/O, (Global GX)

(Global GY)

V40000 -- V40037

V40000 -- V40077

V40000 -- V40177
V40200 -- V40377

Some instructions can have more than

one parameter. For example, the SET
instruction shown in the ladder program to
the right can set a single point or a range of
points.

Range Available
X0

X1

Y0 -- Y7
SET

C0

In these cases, execution times depend on the amount and type of parameters. The
execution time tables list execution times for various situations, as shown below:
SET
RST

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

1st #:

X, Y, C, S, GX, GY

2nd #:

X, Y, C, S, GX, GY (N pt) 13.0s+7.8sxN

1st #:

X, Y, C, S, GX, GY

2nd #:

X, Y, C, S, GX, GY (N pt) 11.7s+7.8sxN

20.8 s
19.5 s

Execution depends
on numbers of
locations and types
of data used

C--3

Instruction Execution Times

Boolean Instructions
Boolean Instructions
Instruction

STRN
STRB
STRNB

ORN
ORB
ORNB
AND
ANDN
ANDB
ANDNB

DL450

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

X, Y, C, T, CT

4.7 s

4.7 s

0.33 s

0.33 s

0.96 s

0.96 s

S, SP, GX, GY

4.7 s

4.7 s

8.0 s

8.0 s

1.0 s

1.0 s

X, Y, C, T, CT

5.7 s

5.7 s

0.33 s

0.33 s

1.0 s

1.0 s

S, SP, GX, GY

5.7 s

5.7 s

8.0 s

8.0 s

1.0 s

1.0 s

V:Register (Bit)

5.0 s

??? s

P:Indirect (Bit)

15.3 s

??? s

V:Register (Bit)

4.9 s

??? s

P:Indirect (Bit)

15.1 s

??? s

X, Y, C, T, CT

3.1 s

3.1 s

0.33 s

0.33 s

0.9 s

0.9 s

S, SP, GX, GY

3.1 s

3.1 s

4.24 s

4.24 s

0.9 s

0.9 s

X, Y, C, CT

4.1 s

4.1 s

0.33 s

0.33 s

0.96 s

0.96 s

S, SP, GX, GY

4.1 s

4.1 s

4.67 s

4.67 s

0.96 s

0.96 s

V:Register (Bit)

4.7 s

??? s

P:Indirect (Bit)

15.0 s

??? s

V:Register (Bit)

4.6 s

??? s

P:Indirect (Bit)

14.8 s

??? s

X, Y, C, T, CT

2.4 s

2.4 s

0.33 s

0.33 s

0.8 s

0.8 s

S, SP, GX, GY

2.4 s

2.4 s

2.72 s

2.72 s

0.8 s

0.8 s

X, Y, C, T, CT

3.4 s

3.4 s

0.33 s

0.33 s

0.9 s

0.9 s

S, SP, GX, GY

3.4 s

3.4 s

3.14 s

3.14 s

0.9 s

0.9 s

V:Register (Bit)

4.6 s

??? s

P:Indirect (Bit)

14.8 s

??? s

V:Register (Bit)

4.4 s

??? s

P:Indirect (Bit)

14.7 s

??? s

ANDSTR

None

1.8 s

1.8 s

0.33 s

0.33 s

0.5 s

0.5 s

ORSTR

None

1.8 s

1.8 s

0.33 s

0.33 s

0.5 s

0.5 s

OUT

X, Y, C

6.7 s

6.7 s

0.33 s

0.33 s

2.9 s

2.9 s

GX, GY

6.7 s

6.7 s

2.06 s

2.06 s

2.9 s

2.9 s

V:Register (Bit)

5.6 s

??? s

P:Indirect (Bit)

16.4 s

??? s

8.3 s

8.3 s

6.1 s

6.1 s

3.4 s

3.4 s

3.2 s

??? s

OUTB
OROUT

X, Y, C, GX, GY

NOT

None

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix C
Inst. Execution Codes

OR

DL440

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

STR

Legal Data Types

DL430

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

NOTE: The GY data type listed for some instructions throughout this appendices is valid only for
the DL450 CPU, which uses both GX and GY data types for Remote I/O points. The DL430 and
DL440 CPUs use the GX data type for any Remote I/O points.

Appendix C
Inst. Execution Times

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

C--4

Instruction Execution Times

Boolean Instructions
Instruction

Legal Data Types

DL430

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

15.1 s

15.1 s

8.5 s

8.5 s

10.0 s

10.0 s

PD

X, Y, C

STRPD

X, Y, C, T, CT, S, SP, GX, GY

3.7 s

3.7 s

STRND

X, Y, C, T, CT, S, SP, GX, GY

2.8 s

2.8 s

ANDPD

X, Y, C, T, CT, S, SP, GX, GY

3.6 s

3.6 s

ANDND

X, Y, C, T, CT, S, SP, GX, GY

2.7 s

2.7 s

ORPD

X, Y, C, T, CT, S, SP, GX, GY

3.6 s

3.6 s

ORND

X, Y, C, T, CT, S, SP, GX, GY

2.7 s

2.7 s

SET

1st #:

X, Y, C

20.8 s

5.2 s

0.33 s

0.33 s

5.6 s

1.0 s

S, GX, GY

20.8 s

5.2 s

14.6 s

5.4 s

5.6 s

1.0 s

X, Y, C, S, GX (N pt)

13.0 s+
7.8sxN

5.2 s

8.9 s+
5.7sxN

5.4 s

7.6 s+
0.6sxN

1.2 s

V:Register (Bit)

10.5 s

2.3 s

P:Indirect (Bit)

22.2 s

13.8 s

2nd #:
SETB
RST

RSTB
PAUSE

1st #:

X, Y, C

19.5 s

5.2 s

0.33 s

0.33 s

5.6 s

1.0 s

S, GX, GY

19.5 s

5.2 s

13.7 s

4.5 s

5.6 s

5.6 s

2nd #:
(N pt)

X, Y, C, S, GX, GY

11.7 s+
7.8sxN

5.2 s

8.0 s+
5.7sxN

4.5 s

7.6 s+
0.6sxN

1.2 s

1st #:

T, CT

28.2 s

5.2 s

15.2 s

3.8 s

10.2 s

0.9 s

2nd #:

T, CT (N pt)

23.3 s+
5.8sxN

5.2 s

10.7 s+
4.6sxN

3.8 s

6.1 s+
1.9sxN

1.2 s

V:Register (Bit)

10.5 s

2.3 s

P:Indirect (Bit)

22.2 s

13.8 s

1wd: Y

24.0 s

24.0 s

14.7 s

14.7 s

7.4 s

7.5 s

2wd: Y (N points)

18 s+
6s x N

18s+
6s x N

11s+
4s x N

11s+
4s x N

14.6s+
0.32s xN

14.6s+
0.3s x N

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

C--5

Instruction Execution Times

Comparative Boolean (cont.)

Instruction
STRE

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

2nd

V: Data Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

61 s
182 s
75 s

13.5 s
13.5 s
13.5 s

56 s
130 s
69 s
178 s
270 s

12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s

4.9 s
4.9 s
3.5 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.9
4.9
3.5
9.9
9.9

V: Bit Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

182 s
300 s
193 s

13.5 s
13.5 s
13.5 s

130 s
206 s
206 s
252 s
347 s

12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s

4.9 s
4.9 s
3.5 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.9
4.9
3.5
9.9
9.9

P:Indir. (Data)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

174 s
248 s
182 s
296 s
387 s

12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s

3.4 s
3.4 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9
9.9
8.3
14.3
14.3

P:Indir. (Bit)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

265 s
341 s
276 s
387 s
480 s

12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s

3.4 s
3.4 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9
9.9
8.3
14.3
14.3

1st

2nd

V: Data Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

63 s
180 s
77 s

13.5 s
13.5 s
13.5 s

56 s
130 s
69 s
178 s
270 s

12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s

4.9 s
4.9 s
3.5 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.9
4.9
3.5
9.9
9.9

V: Bit Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

180 s
298 s
195 s

13.5 s
13.5 s
13.5 s

130 s
206 s
206 s
252 s
347 s

12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s

4.9 s
4.9 s
3.5 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.9
4.9
3.5
9.9
9.9

P:Indir. (Data)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

174 s
248 s
182 s
296 s
387 s

12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s

3.4 s
3.4 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9
9.9
8.3
14.3
14.3

P:Indir. (Bit)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

265 s
341 s
276 s
387 s
480 s

12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s

3.4 s
3.4 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9
9.9
8.3
14.3
14.3

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix C
Inst. Execution Codes

1st

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

STRNE

Legal Data Types

DL430

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

Comparative Boolean Instructions

Instruction Execution Times

Comparative Boolean (cont.)

Instruction
ORE

Appendix C
Inst. Execution Times

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

C--6

ORNE

Legal Data Types

DL430

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

1st

2nd

V: Data Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

62 s
180 s
73 s

11.0 s
11.0 s
11.0 s

48 s
122 s
55 s
170 s
262 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

4.9 s
4.9 s
3.5 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.9 s
4.9 s
3.5 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

V: Bit Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

180 s
297 s
191 s

11.0 s
11.0 s
11.0 s

122 s
198 s
131 s
244 s
340 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

4.9 s
4.9 s
3.5 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.9 s
4.9 s
3.5 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

P:Indir. (Data)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

166 s
240 s
175 s
288 s
379 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

P:Indir. (Bit)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

257 s
333 s
268 s
380 s
473 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

1st

2nd

V: Data Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

62 s
178 s
75 s

11.0 s
11.0 s
11.0 s

48 s
122 s
55 s
170 s
262 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

4.9 s
4.9 s
3.5 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.9 s
4.9 s
3.5 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

V: Bit Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

178 s
296 s
192 s

11.0 s
11.0 s
11.0 s

122 s
198 s
131 s
244 s
340 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

4.9 s
4.9 s
3.5 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.9 s
4.9 s
3.5 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

P:Indir. (Data)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

166 s
240 s
175 s
288 s
379 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

P:Indir. (Bit)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

257 s
333 s
268 s
380 s
473 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

C--7

Instruction Execution Times

Instruction
ANDE

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

2nd

V: Data Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

60 s
178 s
74 s

11.0 s
11.0 s
11.0 s

48 s
122 s
55 s
170 s
262 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

4.9 s
4.9 s
3.5 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.9 s
4.9 s
3.5 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

V: Bit Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

178 s
296 s
192 s

11.0 s
11.0 s
11.0 s

122 s
198 s
131 s
244 s
340 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

4.9 s
4.9 s
3.5 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.9 s
4.9 s
3.5 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

P:Indir. (Data)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

166 s
240 s
175 s
288 s
379 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

P:Indir. (Bit)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

257 s
333 s
268 s
380 s
473 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

1st

2nd

V: Data Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

62 s
179 s
73 s

11.0 s
11.0 s
11.0 s

48 s
122 s
55 s
170 s
262 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

4.9 s
4.9 s
3.5 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.9 s
4.9 s
3.5 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

V: Bit Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

179 s
297 s
191 s

11.0 s
11.0 s
11.0 s

122 s
198 s
131 s
244 s
340 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

4.9 s
4.9 s
3.5 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.9 s
4.9 s
3.5 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

P:Indir. (Data)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

166 s
240 s
175 s
288 s
379 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

P:Indir. (Bit)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

257 s
333 s
268 s
380 s
473 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix C
Inst. Execution Codes

1st

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

ANDNE

Legal Data Types

DL430

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

Comparative Boolean (cont.)

Instruction Execution Times

Comparative Boolean (cont.)

Instruction
STR

Appendix C
Inst. Execution Times

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

C--8

STRN

Legal Data Types

DL430

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

65 s
182 s
75 s

13.5 s
13.5 s
13.5 s

56 s
130 s
63 s
178 s
270 s

12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

1st

2nd

T, CT

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

1st

2nd

V: Data Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

66 s
184 s
79 s

13.5 s
13.5 s
13.5 s

56 s
130 s
63 s
178 s
270 s

12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

V: Bit Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

184 s
800 s
193 s

13.5 s
13.5 s
13.5 s

130 s
206 s
139 s
252 s
347 s

12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

P:Indir. (Data)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

174 s
248 s
182 s
296 s
387 s

12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

P:Indir. (Bit)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

265 s
341 s
276 s
387 s
480 s

12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

1st

2nd

T, CT

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

65 s
180 s
75 s

13.5 s
13.5 s
13.5 s

56 s
130 s
63 s
178 s
270 s

12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

1st

2nd

V: Data Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

65 s
180 s
77 s

13.5 s
13.5 s
13.5 s

56 s
130 s
63 s
178 s
270 s

12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

V: Bit Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

180 s
298 s
195 s

13.5 s
13.5 s
13.5 s

130 s
206 s
139 s
252 s
347 s

12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

P:Indir. (Data)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

174 s
248 s
182 s
296 s
387 s

12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

P:Indir. (Bit)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

265 s
341 s
276 s
387 s
480 s

12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s
12.2 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

C--9

Instruction Execution Times

Instruction
OR

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

64 s
180 s
74 s

11.0 s
11.0 s
11.0 s

46 s
124 s
57 s
168 s
264 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

2nd

T, CT

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

1st

2nd

V: Data Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

63 s
180 s
77 s

13.5 s
13.5 s
13.5 s

48 s
122 s
55 s
170 s
262 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

V: Bit Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

180 s
298 s
195 s

13.5 s
13.5 s
13.5 s

122 s
198 s
131 s
244 s
340 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

P:Indir. (Data)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

165 s
240 s
175 s
288 s
379 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

P:Indir. (Bit)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

257 s
333 s
268 s
380 s
473 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

1st

2nd

T, CT

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

64 s
178 s
74 s

11.0 s
11.0 s
11.0 s

46 s
124 s
57 s
168 s
264 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

1st

2nd

V: Data Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

63 s
180 s
77 s

13.5 s
13.5 s
13.5 s

48 s
122 s
55 s
170 s
262 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

V: Bit Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

180 s
298 s
195 s

13.5 s
13.5 s
13.5 s

122 s
198 s
131 s
244 s
340 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

P:Indir. (Data)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

165 s
240 s
175 s
288 s
379 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

P:Indir. (Bit)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

257 s
333 s
268 s
380 s
473 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix C
Inst. Execution Codes

1st

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

ORN

Legal Data Types

DL430

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

Comparative Boolean (cont.)

Appendix C
Inst. Execution Times

Instruction Execution Times

Comparative Boolean (cont.)

Instruction
AND

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

C--10

ANDN

Legal Data Types

DL430

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

62 s
178 s
73 s

11.0 s
11.0 s
11.0 s

46 s
124 s
57 s
168 s
264 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

1st

2nd

T, CT

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

1st

2nd

V: Data Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

62 s
178 s
75 s

11.0 s
11.0 s
11.0 s

48 s
122 s
55 s
170 s
262 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

V: Bit Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

178 s
296 s
192 s

11.0 s
11.0 s
11.0 s

122 s
198 s
131 s
244 s
340 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

P:Indir. (Data)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

165 s
240 s
175 s
288 s
379 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

P:Indir. (Bit)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

257 s
333 s
268 s
380 s
473 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

1st

2nd

T, CT

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

62 s
179 s
73 s

11.0 s
11.0 s
11.0 s

46 s
124 s
57 s
168 s
264 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

1st

2nd

V: Data Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

63 s
180 s
77 s

13.5 s
13.5 s
13.5 s

48 s
122 s
55 s
170 s
262 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

V: Bit Reg.

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

180 s
298 s
195 s

13.5 s
13.5 s
13.5 s

122 s
198 s
131 s
244 s
340 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

4.8 s
4.8 s
3.4 s
9.9 s
9.9 s

P:Indir. (Data)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

165 s
240 s
175 s
288 s
379 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

P:Indir. (Bit)

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

257 s
333 s
268 s
380 s
473 s

10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s
10.8 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

9.9 s
9.9 s
8.3 s
14.3 s
14.3 s

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

C--11

Instruction Execution Times

Immediate Instructions
Instruction

Legal Data Types

DL430

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

22.0 s

7.5 s

15.6 s

4.5 s

128.0 s

15.1 s

STRNI

21.3 s

7.5 s

15.6 s

4.5 s

128.0 s

15.3 s

ORI

21.5 s

5.2 s

9.7 s

4.8 s

128.0 s

14.8 s

ORNI

20.8 s

5.2 s

9.7 s

4.8 s

128.0 s

15.0 s

ANDI

18.1 s

5.2 s

9.4 s

2.1 s

128.0 s

14.8 s

ANDNI

20.7 s

5.2 s

9.4 s

2.1 s

9.4 s

2.1 s

LDI

406.3 s

1.8 s

OUTI

27.3 s

27.3 s

18.0 s

18.0 s

135.0 s

135.0 s

OROUTI

27.0 s

27.0 s

20.0 s

20.0 s

135.0 s

23.5 s

SETI

1st #:

48.3 s

5.2 s

16.0 s

3.8 s

12.2 s

1.8 s

2nd #:

Y (N pt)

24.6s+
23.7 xN

5.2 s

18.0s+
15.9 xN

3.8 s

139.7s+
0.6 xN

2.2 s

1st #:

47.1 s

5.2 s

15.1 s

3.8 s

12.2 s

1.8 s

2nd #:

Y (N pt)

23.3s+
23.7 xN

5.2 s

17.1s+
15.9 xN

3.8 s

140.3s+
0.7 xN

2.3 s

252s+
16s xN

3.8 s

9.5 s

2.3 s

598s+
12s xN

4.0 s

12.5 S

2.3 s

RSTI

LDIF

OUTIF

1st

2nd

1st

2nd

Clock/Calendar Instructions
Clock/Calendar Instructions
Instruction

Legal Data Types

DL430

DL440

Execute

Not
Execute

DL450

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

DATE

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.

135.0 s
385.0 s

4.0 s
4.0 s

21.3 s
21.3 s

1.9 s
1.9 s

TIME

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.

121.0 s
373.0 s

4.0 s
4.0 s

13.2 s
13.2 s

1.9 s
1.9 s

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix C
Inst. Execution Codes

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

STRI

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

Immediate Instructions

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

C--12

Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions

Timer, Counter, and Shift Register
Instructions
Instruction
TMR

TMRF

TMRA

Appendix C
Inst. Execution Times

Instruction Execution Times

TMRAF

CNT

SGCNT

UDC

SR

Legal Data Types

1st

2nd

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

1st

2nd

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

1st

2nd

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

1st

2nd

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

1st

2nd

CT

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

1st

2nd

CT

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

1st

2nd

CT

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

C (N points to shift)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

DL430

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

63.9 s
179.5 s
76.3 s

29.1 s
29.1 s
29.1 s

45.0 s
119.0 s
52.4 s
200.7 s
273.4 s

21.0 s
21.0 s
21.0 s
21.0 s
21.0 s

40.0 s
40.0 s
35.7 s
51.8 s
51.8 s

23.0 s
23.0 s
19.5 s
33.9 s
33.9 s

63.9 s
179.5 s
76.3 s

29.1 s
29.1 s
29.1 s

45.0 s
119.0 s
52.4 s
200.7 s
273.4 s

21.0 s
21.0 s
21.0 s
21.0 s
21.0 s

77.8 s
77.8 s
69.8 s
83.4 s
83.4 s

22.6 s
22.6 s
19.2 s
37.5 s
37.5 s

74.0 s
298.7 s
85.0 s

50.3 s
275.0 s
61.2 s

50.6 s
199.5 s
58.3 s
228.0 s
376.7 s

33.8 s
182.7 s
42.1 s
205.4 s
354.0 s

66.0 s
66.0 s
61.8 s
76.8 s
76.8 s

26.1 s
26.1 s
21.7 s
37.3 s
37.3 s

74.0 s
298.7 s
74.0 s

50.3 s
275.0 s
74.0 s

50.6 s
199.5 s
58.3 s
228.0 s
376.7 s

33.8 s
182.7 s
42.1 s
205.4 s
354.0 s

74.8 s
74.8 s
71.0 s
85.7 s
85.7 s

26.1 s
26.1 s
21.7 s
37.3 s
37.3 s

46.2 s
161.4 s
58.6 s

38.2 s
159.4 s
50.6 s

33.6 s
107.6 s
41.0 s
191.4 s
264.7 s

29.8 s
103.8 s
37.2 s
186.7 s
260.0 s

37.9 s
37.9 s
35.7 s
40.8 s
40.8 s

24.6 s
24.6 s
21.6 s
35.7 s
35.7 s

57.3 s
172.5 s
69.3 s

44.2 s
159.4 s
56.2 s

41.3 s
119.5 s
46.5 s
164.7 s
263.4 s

32.9 s
105.7 s
40.4 s
156.7 s
247.4 s

39.3 s
39.3 s
33.7 s
47.1 s
47.1 s

23.8 s
23.8 s
20.3 s
34.7 s
34.7 s

90.0 s
314.7 s
102.2 s

60.6 s
285.3 s
72.8 s

60.0 s
209.0 s
58.6 s
210.7 s
358.7 s

41.9 s
190.8 s
50.5 s
198.7 s
340.0 s

45.1 s
45.1 s
41.4 s
56.4 s
56.4 s

34.8 s
34.8 s
30.9 s
45.9 s
45.9 s

36.8s+
2.3sxN

17.9 s

25.6s+
1.6sxN

17.7 s

8.9 s+
0.5 sxN

7.7 s

C--13

Instruction Execution Times

Accumulator/Data Stack Load

and Output Instructions
Instruction

Legal Data Types

DL430

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

102.0 s
206.0 s
112.0 s
278.0 s
391.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s
5.0 s
5.0 s
5.0 s

97.0 s
166.0 s
110.0 s
213.0 s
272.0 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

6.4 s
6.4 s
12.7 s
4.9 s
4.9 s

0.8 s
0.8 s
1.7 s
0.8 s
0.8 s

LDD

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

106.0 s
488.0 s
112.0 s
282.0 s
670.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s
5.0 s
5.0 s
5.0 s

101.0 s
354.0 s
112.0 s
216.0 s
460.0 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

7.2 s
7.2 s
13.5 s
5.1 s
5.1 s

0.8 s
0.8 s
1.7 s
0.8 s
0.8 s

LDF

1st

87s+
16s x N

4.0 s

10.5s+
3.45s xN

2.3 s

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

LD

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

Accumulator/Data Stack Load and Output Instructions

2nd

LDA

O: (Octal constant for address)

95.0 s

5.0 s

90.0 s

4.0 s

4.9 s

0.8 s

LDX

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

517.0 s
816.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s

433.0 s
583.0 s

4.0 s
4.0 s

10.0 s
10.0 s
19.9 s
19.9 s

1.7 s
1.7 s
1.7 s
1.7 s

LDSX

K: Constant

90.0s

4.0 s

19.0 s

2.3 s

LDR

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

30.3 s
30.3 s
26.6 s
39.9 s
39.9 s

1.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

OUT

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

26.0 s
181.0 s
286.0 s
538.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s
5.0 s
5.0 s

15.4 s
96.7 s
189.4 s
334.6 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

4.7 s
4.7 s
11.1 s
11.1 s

0.8 s
0.8 s
1.7 s
1.7 s

OUTD

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

35.0 s
419.0 s
296.0 s
777.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s
5.0 s
5.0 s

21.4 s
232.5 s
196.0 s
471.4 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

5.4 s
5.4 s
11.7 s
11.7 s

0.8 s
0.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

OUTF

1st

52s+
12s x N

4.0 s

43.8 s+
6.2s x N

2.3 s

2nd

X, Y, C, S
K:Constant
T, CT, SP, GX, GY
OUTX

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

551.0 s
950.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s

356.0 s
574.0 s
471.0 s
734.0 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

14.1 s
14.1 s
23.8 s
23.8 s

1.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

POP

None

82.0 s

5.0 s

88.0 s

4.0 s

3.7 s

4.0 s

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix C
Inst. Execution Codes

X, Y, C, S
K:Constant
T, CT, SP, GX, GY

Appendix C
Inst. Execution Times

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

C--14

Instruction Execution Times

Accumulator Logic Instructions

Accumulator Logic Instructions
Instruction

Legal Data Types

DL430

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

AND

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

101.0 s
206.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s

66.0 s
136.0 s
183.4 s
272.0 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

4.9 s
4.9 s
11.1 s
11.1 s

0.8 s
0.8 s
1.7 s
1.7 s

ANDD

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

115.0 s

5.0 s

66.7 s
323.4 s
78.7 s
186.0 s
459.4 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

7.4 s
7.4 s
12.1 s
3.6 s
3.6 s

1.7 s
1.7 s
1.7 s
0.8 s
0.8 s

ANDF

1st

X, Y, C, S
K:Constant
T, CT, SP, GX, GY

87s+16
sxN

4.0 s

3.9s+
3.4s x N

2.3 s

ANDS

None

77.4 s

4.0 s

5.0 s

0.7 s

OR

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

101.0 s
206.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s

66.0 s
136.0 s
183.4 s
272.0 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

4.9 s
4.9 s
11.1 s
11.1 s

0.8 s
0.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

ORD

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

115.0 s

5.0 s

69.4 s
328.4 s
78.7 s
186.0 s
459.4 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

7.5 s
7.5 s
7.5 s
3.7 s
3.7 s

1.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s
0.8 s
0.8 s

ORF

1st

X, Y, C, S
K:Constant
T, CT, SP, GX, GY

87s+16
sxN

4.0 s

8.8s+
3.5s x N

2.3 s

ORS

None

77.4 s

4.0 s

5.0 s

0.7 s

XOR

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

101.0 s
206.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s

33.0 s
136.0 s
183.4 s
272.0 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s
11.2 s
11.2 s

0.8 s
0.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

XORD

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

115.0 s

5.0 s

69.4 s
328.4 s
78.7 s
186.0 s
459.4 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

7.5 s
7.5 s
12.1 s
3.7 s
3.7 s

1.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s
0.8 s
0.8 s

XORF

1st

X, Y, C, S
K:Constant
T, CT, SP, GX, GY

87s+
16s x N

4.0 s

8.8 s+
3.5s x N

2.3 s

XORS

None

77.3 s

4.0 s

5.0 s

0.7 s

CMP

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

56.0 s
162.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s

36.0 s
106.7 s
158.7 s
248.7 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

6.1 s
6.1 s
12.4 s
12.4 s

0.8 s
0.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

2nd

2nd

2nd

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

C--15

Instruction Execution Times

DL430

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

48.7 s
312.7 s
67.4 s
181.4 s
455.4 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

8.4 s
8.4 s
4.6 s
13.0 s
13.0 s

1.8 s
1.8 s
0.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

X, Y, C, S
K:Constant
T, CT, SP, GX, GY

248s+
16s x N

4.0 s

12.4s+
3.5s x N

2.3 s

CMPR

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

39.6 s
39.6 s
29.7 s
49.2 s
49.2 s

1.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

CMPS

None

100.0 s

5.0 s

99.0 s

4.0 s

5.8 s

0.7 s

Instruction

Legal Data Types

CMPD

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

CMPF

1st

2nd

Legal Data Types

DL430

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

SUM

None

280.0 s

5.0 s

183.3 s

4.0 s

12.1 s

1.6 s

SHFL

V:Data Reg. (N bits)

52s+
21s x N
157s+
21s x N
63s+
21s x N

5.0 s

33s+
14s x N
103s+
14s x N
43s+
14s x N

4.0 s

9.8 s+
.16s x N
9.8 s+
.16s x N
7.9 s+
.16s x N

1.8 s

57s+
21s x N
163s+
21s x N
69s+
21s x N

5.0 s

36s+
14s x N
107s+
14s x N
43s+
14s x N

4.0 s

9.8 s+
.16s x N
9.8 s+
.16s x N
7.9 s+
.16s x N

1.8 s

66s+
25s x N
171s+
25s x N
78s+
25s x N

5.0 s

42s+
17s x N
112s+
17s x N
51s+
17s x N

4.0 s

5.3 s

1.9 s

4.0 s

5.3 s

1.9 s

4.0 s

7.1 s

1.9 s

69s+
25s x N
174s+
25s x N
81s+
25s x N

5.0 s

44s+
17s x N
114s+
17s x N
54s+
17s x N

4.0 s

5.2 s

1.9 s

4.0 s

5.2 s

1.9 s

4.0 s

7.1 s

1.9 s

V:Bit Reg. (N bits)

K:Constant (N bits)
SHFR

V:Data Reg. (N bits)

V:Bit Reg. (N bits)
K:Constant (N bits)

ROTL

V:Data Reg. (N bits)

V:Bit Reg. (N bits)
K:Constant (N bits)

ROTR

V:Data Reg. (N bits)

V:Bit Reg. (N bits)
K:Constant (N bits)

5.0 s
5.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s

4.0 s
4.0 s

4.0 s
4.0 s

1.8 s
1.8 s

1.8 s
1.8 s

ENCO

None

107.0 s

5.0 s

69.4 s

4.0 s

23.5 s

1.6 s

DECO

None

61.0 s

5.0 s

39.4 s

4.0 s

6.5 s

1.6 s

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix C
Inst. Execution Codes

Bit Operation Instructions

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

Bit Operation Instructions

Instruction

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

Accumulator Logic Instructions

(cont.)

Appendix C
Inst. Execution Times

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

C--16

Instruction Execution Times

Math Instructions
Math Instructions
Instruction

Legal Data Types

DL430

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

ADD

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

308.0 s
413.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s

203.4 s
273.4 s
318.0 s
406.7 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

43.8 s
43.8 s
50.2 s
50.2 s

0.8 s
0.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

ADDD

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

313.0 s
694.0 s
347.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s
5.0 s

206.0 s
460.7 s
250.0 s
374.0 s
594.0 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

48.9 s
48.9 s
37.7 s
53.6 s
53.6 s

1.8 s
1.8 s
0.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

SUB

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

308.0 s
413.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s

203.4 s
273.4 s
317.4 s
405.4 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

43.0 s
43.0 s
49.4 s
49.4 s

0.8 s
0.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

SUBD

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

313.0 s
694.0 s
347.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s
5.0 s

206.7 s
460.7 s
250.7 s
320.0 s
592.7 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

48.2 s
48.2 s
36.7 s
52.8 s
52.8 s

1.8 s
1.8 s
0.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

MUL

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

458.0 s
558.0 s
469.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s
5.0 s

300.0 s
370.7 s
342.7 s
1020.7 s
1108.7 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

159.0 s
159.0 s
153.0 s
165.0 s
165.0 s

1.8 s
1.8 s
0.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

MULD

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

480.1 s
480.1 s
484.0 s
484.0 s

1.9 s
1.9 s
1.9 s
1.9 s

DIV

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

6446.0 s
6553.0 s
6457.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s
5.0 s

4358.0 s
4446.7 s
4361.4 s
4490.7 s
4578.0 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

217.0 s
217.0 s
211.0 s
224.0 s
224.0 s

0.8 s
0.8 s
0.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

DIVD

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

4428.0 s
4682.0 s
4543.0 s
4806.0 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

222.0 s
222.0 s
224.0 s
224.0 s

1.9 s
1.9 s
1.9 s
1.9 s

ADDB

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

143.0 s
248.0 s
145.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s
5.0 s

94.0 s
164.0 s
100.0 s
210.7 s
298.7 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

11.6 s
11.6.0 s
17.8 s
10.4 s
10.4 s

0.8 s
0.8 s
0.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

C--17

Instruction Execution Times

Instruction

Legal Data Types

DL430

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

90.0 s
344.7 s
99.4 s
206.7 s
479.4 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

14.2 s
14.2 s
10.4 s
18.8 s
18.8 s

0.8 s
0.8 s
0.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

SUBB

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

143.0 s
248.0 s
145.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s
5.0 s

94.0 s
164.0 s
100.0 s
210.0 s
298.0 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

11.8 s
11.8 s
10.3 s
18.1 s
18.1 s

0.8 s
0.8 s
0.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

SUBBD

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

90.0 s
344.7 s
99.4 s
205.4 s
478.7 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

14.1 s
14.1 s
10.2 s
18.8 s
18.8 s

0.8 s
0.8 s
0.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

MULB

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

123.0 s
228.0 s
134.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s
5.0 s

80.7 s
150.7 s
92.7 s
198.0 s
286.0 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

5.2 s
5.2 s
3.8 s
11.4 s
11.4 s

0.8 s
0.8 s
0.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

DIVB

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

4889.0 s
4995.0 s
4902.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s
5.0 s

3261.4 s
3331.4 s
3273.4 s
3380.0 s
3468.0 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

22.8 s
22.8 s
21.3 s
29.1 s
29.1 s

0.8 s
0.8 s
0.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

ADDR

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

46.8 s
46.8 s
33.8 s
56.5 s
56.5 s

1.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

SUBR

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

46.8 s
46.8 s
33.8 s
56.5 s
56.5 s

1.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

MULR

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

44.4 s
44.4 s
33.8 s
54.1 s
54.1 s

1.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

DIVR

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

49.0 s
49.0 s
38.4 s
58.3 s
58.3 s

1.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s
1.8 s

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix C
Inst. Execution Codes

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

ADDBD

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

Math Instructions (cont.)

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

C--18

Math Instructions (cont.)

Instruction

Legal Data Types

DL430

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

ADDBS

None

97.4 s

4.0 s

11.4 s

0.7 s

SUBBS

None

96.7 s

4.0 s

11.7 s

0.7 s

MULBS

None

92.7 s

4.0 s

5.1 s

0.7 s

DIVBS

None

3072.0 s

4.0 s

12.2 s

0.7 s

ADDF

1st

224s+
16s x N

4.0 s

50.1 s+
3.5 s x N

2.3 s

224s+
16s x N

4.0 s

49.2 s+
3.5 s x N

2.3 s

325s+
8s x N

4.0 s

163.1 s+
3.4 s x N

2.3 s

4472s+
8s x N

4.0 s

20.9 s+
3.4 s x N

2.3 s

2nd

X, Y, C, S
K:Constant
T, CT, SP, GX, GY
SUBF

1st

2nd

X, Y, C, S
K:Constant
T, CT, SP, GX, GY
MULF

Appendix C
Inst. Execution Times

Instruction Execution Times

1st

2nd

X, Y, C, S
K:Constant
T, CT, SP, GX, GY
DIVF

1st

2nd

X, Y, C, S
K:Constant
T, CT, SP, GX, GY
ADDS

None

321.0 s

5.0 s

265.0 s

4.0 s

46.5 s

0.6 s

SUBS

None

324.0 s

5.0 s

265.0 s

4.0 s

45.6 s

0.7 s

MULS

None

475.0 s

5.0 s

392.0 s

4.0 s

362.5 s

0.7 s

DIVS

None

6463.0 s

5.0 s

4061.0 s

4.0 s

501.8 s

0.7 s

INC

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

119.0 s
381.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s

78.0 s
230.0 s
196.0 s
372.0 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

22.6 s
22.6 s
29.0 s
29.0 s

0.8 s
0.8 s
1.9 s
1.9 s

DEC

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

119.0 s
381.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s

78.0 s
230.0 s
210.7 s
298.7 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

22.3 s
22.3 s
28.6 s
28.6 s

0.8 s
0.8 s
1.9 s
1.9 s

INCB

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

41.0 s
303.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s

26.0 s
178.0 s
143.4 s
329.0 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

7.3 s
7.3 s
13.5 s
13.5 s

0.8 s
0.8 s
1.9 s
1.9 s

DECB

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
P:Indir. (Data)
P:Indir. (Bit)

41.0 s
303.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s

26.0 s
178.0 s
142.0 s
330.7 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

7.3 s
7.3 s
13.5 s
13.5 s

0.8 s
0.8 s
1.9 s
1.9 s

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

C--19

Instruction Execution Times

Instruction

Legal Data Types

DL430

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

None

197.6 s

1.6 s

SQRTR

None

61.96 s

1.6 s

SIN

None

274.7 s

1.6 s

SINR

None

110.96 s

1.6 s

COS

None

280.4 s

1.6 s

COSR

None

116.0 s

1.6 s

TAN

None

294.1 s

1.6 s

TANR

None

145.2 s

1.6 s

ASIN

None

349.6 s

1.6 s

ASINR

None

230.5 s

1.6 s

ACOS

None

355.5 s

1.6 s

ACOSR

None

237.8 s

1.6 s

ATAN

None

274.9 s

1.6 s

ATANR

None

155.5 s

1.6 s

Number Conversion Instructions

Instruction

Legal Data Types

DL430

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

Execute

Not
Execute

BIN

None

409.0 s

5.0 s

107.4 s

4.0 s

127.3 s

1.6 s

BCD

None

409.0 s

5.0 s

152.0 s

4.0 s

125.3 s

1.6 s

INV

None

46.0 s

5.0 s

15.0 s

4.0 s

2.9 s

1.6 s

BCDCPL

None

232.7s

4.0 s

35.3s

1.6 s

ATH

V:Data Reg. (1 word)

V:Bit Reg. (1 word)

1494.7s
1910.0s

4.0 s
4.0 s

14.3 s
14.3 s

1.9 s
1.9 s

HTA

V:Data Reg. (1 word)

V:Bit Reg. (1 word)

1489.4s
1960.7s

4.0 s
4.0 s

14.3 s
14.3 s

1.9 s
1.9 s

SEG

None

101.0 s

5.0 s

64.0 s

4.0 s

6.9 s

1.6 s

GRAY

None

176.0 s

4.0 s

69.1 s

1.6 s

SFLDGT

None

224.0 s

4.0 s

21.6 s

1.6 s

RAD

None

175.0 s

1.6 s

RADR

None

42.5 s

1.6 s

DEG

None

176.2 s

1.6 s

DEGR

None

42.4 s

1.6 s

BTOR

None

11.1 s

1.6 s

RTOB

None

34.2 s

1.6 s

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix C
Inst. Execution Codes

Number Conversion Instructions

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

SQRT

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

Math Instructions (cont.)

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

C--20

Instruction Execution Times

Table Instructions
Table Instructions
Instruction
FILL

Legal Data Types

DL430

DL440

Execute

Not
Execute

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.

Appendix C
Inst. Execution Times

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

K:Constant
FIND

V:Data Reg.

V:Bit Reg.

K:Constant

Execute

DL450

Not
Execute

596s+
74s x N
904s+
74s x N
608s+
74s x N

4.0s

372s+
85s x N
442s+
85s x N
384s+
85s x N

4.0s

4.0s
4.0s

4.0s
4.0s

Execute

Not
Execute

13.6 s+
4.4s x N
13.6s+
1.4s x N
17.3s+
4.2s x N

1.9 s

23.0s+
3.1s x N
23.0s+
3.1s x N
20.2s+
3.1s x N

1.9 s

1.9 s
1.9 s

1.9 s
1.9 s

FDGT

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant

1028.6s
1098.7s
1066.7s

4.0s
4.0s
4.0s

25.9 s
25.9 s
26.2 s

1.9 s
1.9 s
1.9 s

MOV

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.

1767.0s
3188.0s

4.0s
4.0s

24.1 s
24.1 s

1.9 s
1.9 s

TTD

748.7s

4.0s

29.8 s

1.9 s

RFB

747.4s

4.0s

21.0 s

1.9 s

STT

V
K

722.7 s
784.0 s

4.0s
4.0s

27.7 s
24.9 s

1.9 s
1.9 s

RFT

1548.0s

4.0s

22.1 s

1.9 s

ATT

V
K

2725.4s
2734.4s

4.0s
4.0s

25.0 s
22.1 s

1.9 s
1.9 s

MOVMC

Move V:Data Reg. to MC

Move V:Bit Reg. to MC
Move from MC to V:Data Reg.
Move from MC to V:Bit Reg.

1332.7s
2215.4s
818.0s
1394.0s

4.0s
4.0s
4.0s
4.0s

6.0 s
6.0 s
22.7 s
22.7 s

1.9 s
1.9 s
1.9 s
1.9 s

LDLBL

62.0 s

4.0 s

7.6 s

1.9 s

CPU Control Instructions

CPU Control Instructions
Instruction

Legal Data Types

DL430

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

NOP

None

1 s

1 s

END

None

15.5 s

15.5 s

11.6 s

11.6 s

8.5 s

8.5 s

STOP

None

26.0 s

5.0 s

17.4 s

4.0 s

6.7 s

1.6 s

BREAK

None

717.0 s

4.0 s

15.3 s

1.6 s

RSTWT

None

22.0 s

5.0 s

14.7 s

4.0 s

4.0 s

1.6 s

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

C--21

Instruction Execution Times

Program Control Instructions

Instruction

Legal Data Types

DL430

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

18.7 s

4.0 s

5.1 s

4.6 s

LBL

0 s

0 s

0 s

0 s

FOR

V, K

32.7 s

4.0 s

59.6 s

7.1 s

NEXT

None

57.4 s

4.0 s

80.0 s

0 s

GTS

38.7 s

4.0 s

20.3 s

5.2 s

SBR

0 s

0 s

0.8 s

0 s

RTC

None

37.4 s

4.0 s

6.1 s

6.1 s

RT

None

35.4 s

4.0 s

5.1 s

0 s

MLS

K (1--7)

16.3 s

16.3 s

16.6 s

16.6 s

2.1 s

2.1 s

MLR

K (0--7)

20.0 s

20.0 s

13.4 s

13.4 s

2.0 s

2.0 s

Interrupt Instructions
Instruction

Legal Data Types

DL430

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

ENI

None

12.0 s

5.0 s

8.0 s

4.0 s

9.0 s

1.6 s

DISI

None

12.0 s

5.0 s

8.0 s

4.0 s

11.7 s

1.6 s

INT

0 (0--17)

0 s

0 s

0 s

0 s

0 s

0 s

IRTC

None

180.0 s

5.0 s

121.4 s

4.0 s

0.7 s

0.7 s

IRT

None

180.0 s

120.0 s

1.4 s

RLL PLUS Instructions

RLL PLUS Instructions
Instruction

Legal Data Types

DL430

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

ISG

44.0 s

42.0 s

22.0 s

20.0 s

22.2 s

21.0 s

SG

44.0 s

42.0 s

22.0 s

20.0 s

22.2 s

21.2 s

JMP

14.0 s

5.0 s

10.7 s

4.0 s

20.7 s

4.1 s

NJMP

15.0 s

5.0 s

12.7 s

4.0 s

21.3 s

4.5 s

CV

30.0 s

7.0 s

13.8 s

13.8 s

CVJMP

S (N stages)

20 s + 6
s x N

7.0 s

12.3 s

12.3 s

BCALL

12.0 s

10.0 s

19.4 s

19.4 s

BLK

21.0 s

14.0 s

18.3 s

15.6 s

BEND

None

6.0 s

0 s

7.8 s

0 s

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix C
Inst. Execution Codes

Interrupt Instructions

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

GOTO

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

Program Control Instructions

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

C--22

Instruction Execution Times

Intelligent I/O Instructions

Intelligent Module Instructions
Instruction
RD

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

WT

Appendix C
Inst. Execution Times

Legal Data Types

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.

DL430

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

1130+
123xN s
1150+
172xN s

5.0 s

754+
82xN s
766+
105xN s

4.0 s

109.6 s

1.9 s

4.0 s

109.6 s

1.9 s

1840+
150xN s
1875+
180xN s

5.0 s

896+
110xN s
917+
120xN s

4.0 s

109.8 s

1.9 s

4.0 s

109.8 s

1.9 s

5.0 s

5.0 s

Network Instructions
Network Instructions
Instruction

Legal Data Types

DL430

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

RX

X, Y, C, T, CT, GX,, GY SP, S

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.

760.0 s
760.0 s
780.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s
5.0 s

488.0 s
488.0 s
488.0 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

111.8 s
111.8 s
111.8 s

2.3 s
2.3 s
2.3 s

WX

X, Y, C, T, CT, GX,, GY SP, S

V:Data Reg.

Source
755+
12xN s

5.0 s
5.0 s

Source
503+
8xN s

4.0 s
4.0 s

111.8 s
111.8 s

2.3 s
2.3 s

4.0 s

111.8 s

2.3 s

104.0 s

2.2 s

V:Bit Reg.
PRINT

ASCII

5.0 s

Message Instructions
Message Instructions
Instruction

Legal Data Types

DL430

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

164.0 s
266.0 s
158.0 s

5.0 s
5.0 s
5.0 s

107.0 s
178.0 s
158.7 s

4.0 s
4.0 s
4.0 s

107.3 s
107.3 s
98.1 s

2.3 s
2.3 s
2.3 s

FAULT

V:Data Reg.
V:Bit Reg.
K:Constant

DLBL

0 s

0 s

0 s

0 s

NCON

0 s

0 s

0 s

0 s

ACON

0 s

0 s

0 s

0 s

Drum Instructions
Drum Instructions
Instruction

Legal Data Types

DL430

DL440

DL450

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

Execute

Not Exe.

DRUM

CT

340.0 s

62.6 s

EDRUM

CT

243.0 s

100.0 s

MDRMD

CT

206.0 s

142.00 s

MDRMW

CT

150.0 s

94.00 s

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Special Relays

In This Appendix. . . .
Startup and Real-time Special Relays
CPU Status Relays
System Monitoring Relays
Accumulator Status Relays
Communication Monitoring Relays

1D

AppendixDD
Appendix
DL405
Special
Relays
Special
Relays

Appendix C
Special Relays

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

D--2

Special Relays

Startup and Real-time Special Relays

First scan

on for the first scan after a power cycle or program to run transition, and is reset to off on
the second scan. It is useful when a function needs to be performed only at startup.

SP1

Always ON

provides a contact to insure a instruction is executed every scan.

SP2

Always OFF

provides a contact that is always off.

SP3

1 minute

on for 30 seconds and off for 30 seconds.

SP4

1 second

on for 0.5 second and off for 0.5 second.

SP5

100 millisecond

on for 50 ms. and off for 50 ms.

SP6

50 millisecond

on for 25 ms. and off for 25 ms.

SP7

Alternate scan

on every other scan.

SP0

CPU Status Relays

SP11

Forced run mode

on anytime the CPU keyswitch is in the RUN position.

SP12

Terminal run mode

on when the CPU keyswitch is in the TERM position and the CPU is in the run mode.

SP13

Test run mode

on when the CPU is in the test run mode.

SP14

Break relay 1

on when the BREAK instruction is executed. It is off when the CPU is in any other mode.

SP15

Test program mode

on when the CPU is in the test program mode.

SP16

Terminal PGM mode

on when the CPU keyswitch is in the TERM position and the CPU is in program mode.

SP17

Forced stop mode

on anytime the CPU keyswitch is in the STOP position.

Break relay 2

on when the BREAK instruction is executed. It is off only when the CPU mode is changed
to RUN.

SP22

Interrupt enabled

on when hardware interrupts are enabled using the ENI instruction.

SP25

CPU battery disabled

on when the CPU battery is disabled by dipswitch 1 on the rear of the CPU.

SP26

I/O update disable

(DL440/DL450) turned on by the application program, thus freezing the state of the I/O.

SP27

Selective I/O update

disable

(DL440/DL450) relay can be turned on by the application program. If turned on the I/O
update is frozen at last state, for I/O modules sensing a missing terminal block .

SP30

Dipswitch 1 status

(DL430/DL440) follows the On/Off status of dipswitch 1 on the rear of the CPU.

SP31

Dipswitch 2 status

(DL430/DL440) follows the On/Off status of dipswitch 2 on the rear of the CPU.

SP32

Dipswitch 3 status

(DL430/DL440) follows the On/Off status of dipswitch 3 on the rear of the CPU.

SP33

Dipswitch 4 status

(DL430/DL440) follows the On/Off status of dipswitch 4 on the rear of the CPU.

Scan control error

(DL450) this relay will be on if the actual scan time is in excess of the scan time set in
fixed or limit scan modes. The relay contact may be useful in program error recovery.

SP21

SP37

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Special Relays

D--3

on when a critical error such as I/O communication loss has occurred.

SP41

Warning

on when a non critical error such as a low battery has occurred.

SP43

Battery low
(440/450)

on when either the memory cartridge battery or the CPU battery is low. Once detected,
check V7757 for the exact error code.

SP44

Program memory
error

on when a memory error such as a memory parity error or a failed memory cartridge has
occurred.

SP45

I/O error

on when a I/O error such as blown fuse or 24V bad has occurred.

SP46

Communications error

on when a communications error has occurred on any of the CPU ports.

I/O configuration error

on if a I/O configuration error has occurred. The I/O configuration check must be set on in
the CPU before this relay will be functional.

SP50

FAULT instruction

on when a FAULT Instruction is executed.

SP51

Math timeout relay

on if the CPU time out on a math function.

Grammatical error

on if a grammatical error has occurred either while the CPU is running or if the syntax
check is run. Once detected check V7755 for a exact error code.

SP53

Math/Table pointer

on if there is math execution error or a table pointer error.

SP54

Communication error

on when RX, WX, RD, WT instructions are executed with the wrong parameters.

SP56

Table instruction
overrun

on if a table instruction with a pointer is executed and the pointer value is outside the
table boundary.

SP47

SP52

Accumulator Status Relays

Math/Table pointer
error

on if there is math execution error or a table pointer error.

SP60

Value less than

on when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value.

SP61

Value equal to

on when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value.

SP62

Value greater than

on when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction value.

SP63

Zero

on when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP64

Half borrow

on when the 16 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow.

SP65

Borrow

on when the 32 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow.

SP66

Half carry

on when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry.

SP67

Carry

when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry.

SP70

Sign (negative)

on anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP71

Pointer reference
error

on when the V-memory specified by a pointer (P) is not valid.

SP72

Floating point

(DL450) on when the numerical value in the accumulator is a floating point number.

SP73

Overflow

on when a signed addition or subtraction results in an incorrect sign bit.

SP74

Under flow

(DL450) on when a floating point math operation results in an underflow error.

SP75

Data error

on when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON--BCD number was encountered.

SP76

Load zero

on when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix
AppendixDD
DL405
Special
Relays
Special
Relays

SP53

Appendix C
Special Relays

Critical error

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

SP40

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

System Monitoring Relays

AppendixDD
Appendix
DL405
Special
Relays
Special
Relays

Appendix C
Special Relays

Appendix B
DL405 Error Codes

Appendix A
DL405 Error Codes

D--4

Special Relays

Communication Monitoring Relays

The Communications Monitoring Relays are numbered in pairs corresponding to
CPU port numbers or slot positions in a base. The two relay types are:
S Module/port busy -- on when the port or the communication module in
the referenced slot and base is busy transmitting or receiving. You must
use this relay with RX and WX instructions to prevent attempting to
execute a RX or WX while the module is busy.
S Communication error -- on when a communications error occurs. This
error automatically clears when another RX or WX instruction executes.
DL450 CPU only
All DL405 CPUs

Local Base

SP112

CPU port busy

Port 1

SP114

CPU port busy

Port 2

SP116

CPU port busy

Port 3

SP113

Comm error
Port 1

SP115

Comm error
Port 2

SP117

Comm error
Port 3

Expansion Base #1

Expansion Base #2

Expansion Base #3

SP120

Module busy
Slot 0

SP140

Module busy
Slot 0

SP160

Module busy
Slot 0

SP200

Module busy
Slot 0

SP121

Comm error
Slot 0

SP141

Comm error
Slot 0

SP161

Comm error
Slot 0

SP201

Comm error
Slot 0

SP122

Module busy
Slot 1

SP142

Module busy
Slot 1

SP162

Module busy
Slot 1

SP202

Module busy
Slot 1

SP123

Comm error
Slot 1

SP143

Comm error
Slot 1

SP163

Comm error
Slot 1

SP203

Comm error
Slot 1

SP124

Module busy
Slot 2

SP144

Module busy
Slot 2

SP164

Module busy
Slot 2

SP204

Module busy
Slot 2

SP125

Comm error
Slot 2

SP145

Comm error
Slot 2

SP165

Comm error
Slot 2

SP205

Comm error
Slot 2

SP126

Module busy
Slot 3

SP146

Module busy
Slot 3

SP166

Module busy
Slot 3

SP206

Module busy
Slot 3

SP127

Comm error
Slot 3

SP147

Comm error
Slot 3

SP167

Comm error
Slot 3

SP207

Comm error
Slot 3

SP130

Module busy
Slot 4

SP150

Module busy
Slot 4

SP170

Module busy
Slot 4

SP210

Module busy
Slot 4

SP131

Comm error
Slot 4

SP151

Comm error
Slot 4

SP171

Comm error
Slot 4

SP211

Comm error
Slot 4

SP132

Module busy
Slot 5

SP152

Module busy
Slot 5

SP172

Module busy
Slot 5

SP212

Module busy
Slot 5

SP133

Comm error
Slot 5

SP153

Comm error
Slot 5

SP173

Comm error
Slot 5

SP213

Comm error
Slot 5

SP134

Module busy
Slot 6

SP154

Module busy
Slot 6

SP174

Module busy
Slot 6

SP214

Module busy
Slot 6

SP135

Comm error
Slot 6

SP155

Comm error
Slot 6

SP175

Comm error
Slot 6

SP215

Comm error
Slot 6

SP136
SP137

Module busy
Slot 7
Comm error
Slot 7

SP156
SP157

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Module busy
Slot 7
Comm error
Slot 7

SP176
SP177

Module busy
Slot 7
Comm error
Slot 7

SP216
SP217

Module busy
Slot 7
Comm error
Slot 7

DL405
Product Weights
In This Appendix. . . .
Product Weight Table

1E

E--2

DL405 Product Weights

Product Weight Table

CPUs

Weight

D4--430

28.2 oz. (800g)

D4--440

31 oz. (878g)

D4--450

29.8 oz. (844g)

D4--440DC--1

Appendix C
DL405 Product Weights
Appendix D
DL405 Product Weights

Remote I/O
D4--RM

8.0 oz. (228g)

D4--RS

27.1 oz. (767g)

D4--RSDC

26.8 oz. (760g)

Weight

D4--DCM

8.2 oz. (233g)

D4--08TD1

8.5 oz. (240g)

F4--MAS--MB

8.9 oz (252g)

28.2 oz. (800g)

F4--08TD1S

9.9 oz. (282g)

F4--SLV--MB

8.9 oz (252g)

28.2 oz. (800g)

D4--16TD1

9.5 oz. (270g)

F4--SLV--TW

9.3oz (264g)

D4--16TD2

9.5 oz. (270g)

F4--SDN

9.1 oz (258g)

D4--32TD1

6.7 oz. (190g)

CoProcessors

D4--32TD2

6.7 oz. (190g)

F4--CP128--1

8.9 oz (252g)

D4--64TD1

7.4 oz. (210g)

F4--CP128--2

8.9 oz (252g)

F4--CP512

9.1 oz (258g)

F4--CP128--T

9.9 oz (281g)

F4--CP128--R

9.8 oz (278g)

D4--16NE3

8.8 oz. (250g)

F4--08NE3S

9 oz. (256g)

31.4 oz. (890g)

DC Output
Modules

D4--440DC--2

31.4 oz. (890g)

D4--450DC--1
D4--450DC--2
Memory
Cartridges

Appendix E
Product Weights

AC/DC Input
Modules

D4--RAM--1

1.5 oz. (42g)

D4--RAM--2

1.3 oz. (38g)

D4--RNB

1.3 oz (38g)

D4--UV--1

2.1 oz. (60g)

AC Output
Modules

D4--UV--2

2.1 oz. (60g)

D4--08TA

11.6 oz. (330g)

D4--EE--2

1.4 oz. (40g)

D4--16TA

12.3 oz. (350g)

D4--EX

22.7 oz (644g)

Relay Output
Modules

D4--EXDC

23.3 oz. (660g)

D4--08TR

9.2 oz. (260g)

D4--EXDC--2

23.3 oz. (660g)

F4--08TRS--1

13.2 oz. (374g)

F4--08TRS--2

13.8 oz. (390g)

D4--16TR

10.9 oz. (310g)

Expansion Units

I/O Bases
D4--04B--1,
--04BNX

23.3 oz. (660g)

D4--06B--1
--06BNX

29.3 oz. (830g)

D4--08B--1,
--08BNX

34.9 oz (990g)

Analog Modules

DC Input Modules

7.3 oz (207g)

F4--8MPI

12.3 oz (350g)

D4--16SIM

8.8 oz. (250g)

F4--4LTC

12.7 oz. (361g)

10.6 oz. (300g)

D4--FILL

4.0 oz. (112g)

F4--04ADS

11.5 oz (326g)

Programming

F4--08AD

11.0 oz (312g)

8.8 oz. (250g)

F4--04DA--2

9.3 oz. (264g)

D4--16ND2F

8.8 oz. (250g)

D4--32ND3--1

6.7 oz. (190g)

D4--32ND3--2

6.7 oz. (190g)

D4--64ND2

7.8 oz. (220g)

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

F4--16PID

F4--04AD

D4--16ND2

9.5 oz. (270g)

12.3 oz. (350g)

7.4 oz. (211g)

9.2 oz. (262g)

D4--16NA

D4--HSC

F4--SDS

F4--04DA--1

8.5 oz. (240g)

8.8 oz. (250g)

9.5 oz. (270g)

8.8 oz. (250g)

D4--08NA

D4--INT

D4--04AD

D4--08ND3S

AC Input Modules

Specialty
Modules

D4--HPP

12.6 oz. (357g)

PLC Memory

In This Appendix. . . .
DL405 PLC Memory

1F

F--2

PLC Memory

Appendix F
PLC Memeory

DL405 PLC Memory

When designing a PLC application, it is important for the PLC user to understand the
different types of memory in the PLC. Two types of memory are used by the DL205
CPU, RAM and EEPROM. This memory can be configured by the PLC user as either
retentive or non--retentive.
Retentive memory is memory that is configured by the user to maintain values
through a power cycle or a PROGRAM to RUN transition. Non--retentive memory is
memory that is configured by the PLC user to clear data after a power cycle or a
PROGRAM to RUN transition. The retentive ranges can be configured with the
handheld programmer using AUX 57 or DirectSOFT (PLC Setup).
The contents of RAM memory can be written to and read from for an infinite number
of times, but RAM requires a power source to maintain the contents of memory. The
contents of RAM are maintained by the internal power supply (5VDC) only while the
PLC is powered by an external source, normally 120VAC. When power to the PLC is
turned off, the contents of RAM can be maintained by an optional battery (See page
3--12). The contents of RAM will be lost when external power is lost without battery
backup.
The contents of EEPROM memory can be read from for an infinite number of times
but there is a limit to the number of times it can be written to (typical specification is
100,000 writes). EEPROM does not require a power source to maintain the memory
contents. It will retain the contents of memory indefinitely.
PLC user V--memory is stored in both volatile RAM and non--volatile EEPROM
memory. See the memory map pertaining to the Data Word range for your particular
CPU (page 3--40 to 3--42).
Data values that must be retained for long periods of time, when the PLC is powered
off, should be stored in EEPROM based V--memory. Since EEPROM is limited to the
number of times it can be written to, it is suggested that transitional logic, such as a
one--shot, be used to write the data one time instead of on each CPU scan.
Data values that are continually changing or which can be initialized with program
logic should be stored in RAM based V--memory.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

ASCII Table

In This Appendix. . . .
ASCII Conversion Table

1G

Appendix G
ASCII Table

G--2

ASCII Table

DECIMAL TO HEX TO ASCII CONVERTER

DEC

HEX

ASCII

DEC

HEX

ASCII

DEC

HEX

ASCII

DEC

HEX

ASCII

00

NUL

32

20

space

64

40

96

60

01

SOH

33

21

65

41

97

61

02

STX

34

22

66

42

98

62

03

ETX

35

23

67

43

99

63

04

EOT

36

24

68

44

100

64

05

ENQ

37

25

69

45

101

65

06

ACK

38

26

&

70

46

102

66

07

BEL

39

27

71

47

103

67

08

BS

40

28

72

48

104

68

09

TAB

41

29

73

49

105

69

10

0A

LF

42

2A

74

4A

106

6A

11

0B

VT

43

2B

75

4B

107

6B

12

0C

FF

44

2C

76

4C

108

6C

13

0D

CR

45

2D

--

77

4D

109

6D

14

0E

SO

46

2E

78

4E

110

6E

15

0F

SI

47

2F

79

4F

111

6F

16

10

DLE

48

30

80

50

112

70

17

11

DC1

49

31

81

51

113

71

18

12

DC2

50

32

82

52

114

72

19

13

DC3

51

33

83

53

115

73

20

14

DC4

52

34

84

54

116

74

21

15

NAK

53

35

85

55

117

75

22

16

SYN

54

36

86

56

118

76

23

17

ETB

55

37

87

57

119

77

24

18

CAN

56

38

88

58

120

78

25

19

EM

57

39

89

59

121

79

26

1A

SUB

58

3A

90

5A

122

7A

27

1B

ESC

59

3B

91

5B

123

7B

28

1C

FS

60

3C

<

92

5C

124

7C

29

1D

GS

61

3D

93

5D

125

7D

30

1E

RS

62

3E

>

94

5E

126

7E

31

1F

US

63

3F

95

5F

127

7F

DEL

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Numbering Systems

1H

In This Appendix. . . .
Introduction
Binary Numbering System
Hexadecimal Numbering System
Octal Numbering System
Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) Numbering System
Real (Floating Point) Numbering System
BCD/Binary/Decimal/Hex/Octal -- What is the Difference?
Data Type Mismatch
Signed vs. Unsigned Integers
AutomationDirect.com Products and Data Types

H--2

Numbering Systems

Appendix H
Numbering Systems

Introduction
As almost anyone who uses a computer is somewhat aware, the actual operations of
a computer are done with a binary number system. Traditionally, the two possible
states for a binary system are represented by the digits for zero (0) and one (1)
although off and on or sometimes no and yes are closer to what is actually
involved. Most of the time a typical PC user has no need to think about this aspect of
computers, but every now and then one gets confronted with the underlying nature
of the binary system.
A PLC user should be more aware of the binary system specifically the PLC
programmer. This appendix will provide an explanation of the numbering systems
most commonly used by a PLC.

Binary Numbering System

Computers, including PLCs, use the Base 2 numbering system, which is called
Binary or Boolean. Like in a computer there are only two valid digits in Base 2 a PLC
relies on, zero and one, or off and on respectively. You would think that it would be
hard to have a numbering system built on Base 2 with only two possible values, but
the secret is by encoding using several digits.
Each digit in the base 2 system when referenced by a computer is called a bit. When
four bits are grouped together, they form what is known as a nibble. Eight bits or two
nibbles would be a byte. Sixteen bits or two bytes would be a word as in. Thirty--two
bits or two words is a double word as in Table 1.
Double Word
Word
Byte
Nibble

Nibble

Word
Byte

Nibble

Byte

Nibble

Nibble

Nibble

Byte
Nibble

Nibble

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 1
Binary is not natural for us to use since we have grown up using the base 10
system. Base 10 uses the numbers 0--9, as we are all well aware. From now on, the
different bases will be shown as a subscripted number following the number.
Example: 10 decimal would be 1010.
Table 2 shows how base 2 numbers relate to their decimal equivalents.
A nibble of 10012 would be equal to a decimal number 9 (1*23 + 1*20 or 810 + 110). A
byte of 110101012 would be equal to 213 (1*27 + 1*26 +1*24 + 1*22 +1*20 or 12810 +
6410 + 1610 + 410 + 110).

Table 2

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Numbering Systems

H--3

Hexadecimal Numbering System

The binary numbering system can be difficult and cumbersome to interpret for some
users. Therefore, the hexadecimal numbering system was developed as a
convenience for humans since the PLC (computer) only understands pure binary.
The hexadecimal system is useful because it can represent every byte (8 bits) as two
consecutive hexadecimal digits. It is easier for us to read hexadecimal numbers than
binary numbers.

Decimal Hex

Decimal Hex

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

10

17

11

Table 3
Note that 10 and 11 in hex are not the same as 10 and 11 in decimal. Only the
first ten numbers 0--9 are the same in the two representations. For example,
consider the hex number D8AF. To evaluate this hex number use the same method
used to write decimal numbers. Each digit in a decimal number represents a multiple
of a power of ten (base 10). Powers of ten increase from right to left. For example, the
decimal number 365 means 3x102 + 6x10 + 5. In hex each digit represents a multiple
of a power of sixteen (base 16). Therefore, the hex number D8AF translated to
decimal means 13x163 + 8x162 + 10x16 + 15 = 55471. However, going through the
arithmetic for hex numbers in order to evaluate them is not really necessary. The
easier way is to use the calculator that comes as an accessory in Windows. It can
convert between decimal and hex when in Scientific view.
Note that a hex number such as 365 is not the same as the decimal number 365.
Its actual value in decimal terms is 3x162 6x16 + 5 = 869. To avoid confusion, hex
numbers are often labeled or tagged so that their meaning is clear. One method of
tagging hex numbers is to append a lower case h at the end. Another method of
labeling is to precede the number with 0x. Thus, the hex number D8AF can also be
written D8AFh, where the lower case h at the end is just a label to make sure we
know that it is a hex number. Also, D8AF can be written with a labeling prefix as
0xD8AF.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix H
Numbering Systems

The hexadecimal numbering system uses 16 characters (base 16) to represent

values. The first ten characters are the same as our decimal system, 0--9, and the
first six letters of the alphabet, A--F. Table 3 lists the first eighteen decimal numbers;
0--17 in the left column and the equivalent hexadecimal numbers are shown in the
right column.

H--4

Numbering Systems

Octal Numbering System

Appendix H
Numbering Systems

Many of the early computers used the octal numbering system for compiled
printouts. Today, the PLC is about the only device that uses the Octal numbering
system. The octal numbering system uses 8 values to represent numbers. The
values are 0--7 being Base 8. Table 4 shows the first 32 decimal digits in octal. Note
that the octal values are 0--7, 10--17, 20--27, and 30--37.
Octal

Decimal

Octal

Decimal

20

16

21

17

22

18

23

19

24

20

25

21

26

22

27

23

10

30

24

11

31

25

12

10

32

26

13

11

33

27

14

12

34

28

15

13

35

29

16

14

36

30

17

15

37

31

Table 4
This follows the DirectLOGIC PLCs. Refer to the bit maps in Chapter 3 and notice
that the memory addresses are numbered in octal, as well as each bit. The octal
system is much like counting in the decimal system without the digits 8 and 9 being
available.
The general format for four digits of the octal number is:
(d x 80) + (d x 81) + (d x 82) + (d x 83)
where d means digit. This is the same format used in the binary, decimal, or
hexadecimal systems except that the base number for octal is 8.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

H--5

Numbering Systems

Using the powers of expansion, the example below shows octal 4730 converted to
decimal.

Appendix H
Numbering Systems

Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) Numbering System

BCD is a numbering system where four bits are used to represent each decimal digit.
The binary codes corresponding to the hexadecimal digits A--F are not used in the
BCD system. For this reason numbers cannot be coded as efficiently using the BCD
system. For example, a byte can represent a maximum of 256 different numbers (i.e.
0--255) using normal binary, whereas only 100 distinct numbers (i.e. 0--99) could be
coded using BCD. Also, note that BCD is a subset of hexadecimal and neither one
does negative numbers.
BCD Bit Pattern
Bit #

15 14 13 12 11 10
103

Power
Bit Value
Max Value

2
9

102
1

2
9

101
1

2
9

100
1

Table 5
One plus for BCD is that it reads like a decimal number, whereas 867 in BCD would
mean 867 decimal. No conversion is needed.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

H--6

Numbering Systems

Real (Floating Point) Numbering System

The terms Real and floating--point both describe IEEE--754 floating point arithmetic.
This standard specifies how single precision (32 bit) and double precision (64 bit)
floating point numbers are to be represented as well as how arithmetic should be
carried out on them. Most PLCs use the 32--bit format for floating point (or Real)
numbers which will be discussed here.
Appendix H
Numbering Systems

Real (Floating Point 32) Bit Pattern

Bit #

31

30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Sign
Bit #

15

Exponent
14 13 12 11 10

Mantissa
9

Mantissa (continues from above)

Table 6
Floating point numbers, which DirectLOGIC PLCs use, have three basic
components: sign, exponent and mantissa. The 32 bit word required for the IEEE
standard floating point numbers is shown in Table 6. It is represented as a number
bits from 0 to 31, left to right. The first bit (31) is the sign bit, the next eight bits (30--23)
are the exponent bits and the final 23 bits (22--0) are the fraction bits. In summary:
The sign bit is either 0 for positive or 1 for negative;
The exponent uses base 2;
The first bit of the mantissa is typically assumed to be 1.fff, where f is the field of
fraction bits.
The Internet can provide a more in--depth explanation of the floating point
numbering system. One website to look at is:
http://www.psc.edu/general/software/packages/ieee/ieee.php

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

H--7

Numbering Systems

BCD/Binary/Decimal/Hex/Octal -- What is the Difference?

Sometimes there is confusion about the differences between the data types used in
DirectLOGIC PLCs. The PLCs native data format is BCD, while the I/O numbering
system is octal. Other numbering formats used are binary, decimal and Real.
Although data is stored in the same manner (0s and 1s), there are differences in the
way that the PLC interprets it.
While all of the formats rely in the base 2 numbering system and bit--coded data, the
format of the data is dissimilar. The formats discussed are shown in Table 7 below.
Bit #
Decimal

Bit Value

15

14

13

12

11

10

3
2
6
7
8

1
6
3
8
4

8
1
9
2

4
0
9
6

2
0
4
8

1
0
2
4

5
1
2

2
5
6

Max Value

2
8

6
4

3
2

1
6

65535

Hexidecimal Bit Pattern

Bit #

15

14

13

12

11

10

Decimal
Bit Value

Max Value

BCD Bit Pattern

Bit #

15

14

13

12

11

10

Decimal
Bit Value

Max Value

Octal Bit Pattern

Bit #

15

14

13

12

11

10

Bit Value

Max Value

Octal Bit Pattern

Bit #

31

30

29

28

15

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

Exponent

Sign
Bit #

27

14

13

12

11

10

19

18

17

16

Mantissa
9

Mantissa (continued from above)

Table 7
As seen in Table 7, the BCD and hexadecimal formats are similar, although the
maximum number for each grouping is different (9 for BCD and F for hexadecimal).
This allows both formats to use the same display method. The unfortunate side
effect is that unless the data type is documented, its difficult to know what the data
type is unless it contains the letters A--F.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix H
Numbering Systems

Binary/Decimal Bit Pattern

H--8

Numbering Systems

Data Type Mismatch

Data type mismatching is a common problem when using an operator interface.
Diagnosing it can be a challenge until you identify the symptoms. Since the PLC
uses BCD as the native format, many people tend to think it is interchangeable with
binary (unsigned integer) format. This is true to some extent, but not in this case.
Table 8 shows how BCD and binary numbers differ.
Appendix H
Numbering Systems

Data Type Mismatch

Decimal

10

11

BCD

0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 0001 0000 0001 0001

Binary

0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 0000 1010 0000 1011
Table 8
As the table shows, BCD and binary share the same bit pattern up until you get to the
decimal number 10. Once you get past 10, the bit pattern changes. The BCD bit
pattern for the decimal 10 is actually equal to a value of 16 in binary, causing the
number to jump six digits by when viewing it as the BCD. With larger numbers, the
error multiplies. Binary values from 10 to 15 Decimal are actually invalid for the BCD
data type.
Looking at a larger number, such as the value shown in Table 9, both the BCD bit
pattern and the decimal bit pattern correspond to a base 10 value of 409510. If bit
patterns are read, or interpreted, in a different format than what is used to write them,
the data will not be correct. For instance, if the BCD bit pattern is interpreted as a
decimal (binary) bit pattern, the result is a base 10 value of 1653310. Similarly, if you
try to view the decimal (binary) bit pattern as a BCD value, it is not a valid BCD value
at all, but could be represented in hexadecimal as 0xFFF.

Base 10 Value

BCD Bit Pattern

Binary Bit Pattern

4095

0100 0000 1001 0101

1111 1111 1111

Table 9
Look at the following examples and note the same value represented by the different
numbering systems. The decimal values of 67 and 4660 are used.
6
7
0110 0111
0100 0011
4
3
1
0 3

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Decimal
BCD
Binary
Hex
Octal

4
6
6
0
0100 0110 0110 0000
0001 0010 0011 0100
1
2
3
4
1
1
0
6
4

Decimal
BCD
Binary
Hex
Octal

H--9

Numbering Systems

Signed vs. Unsigned Integers

Bit # 15 14 13 12 11 10

Table 10
There are two ways to encode a negative number: twos complement and Magnitude
Plus sign. The two methods are not compatible.
The simplest method to represent a negative number is to use one bit of the PLC
word as the sign of a number while the remainder of the word gives its magnitude. It
is general convention to use the most significant bit (MSB) as the sign bit: a 1 will
indicate a negative, and a 0 a positive number. Thus, a 16 bit word allows numbers in
the range 32767. The following tables show a representation of 100 and a
representation of --100 in this format.
Magnitude Plus Sign
Decimal

Binary

100

0000 0000 0110 0100

--100

1000 0000 0110 0100

Table 11
Twos complement is a bit more complicated. Without getting involved with a full
explanation, a simple formula for twos complement is to invert the binary and add
one (see Table 12). Basically, 1s are being changed to 0s and all 0s are being
changed to 1, then a 1 is added.
Twos Compliment
Decimal

Binary

100

0000 0000 0110 0100

--100

1111 1111 1001 1100

Table 12
More information about 2s complement can be found on the Internet, however most
of the websites deal with 8--bit examples. Two fairly good websites are listed below,
you can also do a search and checkout more websites.
http://www.evergreen.edu/biophysics/technotes/program/2s_comp.htm
http://www.website.masmforum.com/tutorials/fptute/fpuchap2.htm

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix H
Numbering Systems

So far, we have dealt with unsigned data types only. Now we will deal with signed
data types (negative numbers). The BCD and hexadecimal numbering systems do
not use signed data types.
In order to signify that a number is negative or positive, we must assign a bit to it.
Usually, this is the Most Significant Bit (MSB) as shown in Table 10. For a 16--bit
number, this is bit 15. This means that for 16--bit numbers we have a range of --32767
to 32767.

H--10

Numbering Systems

AutomationDirect.com Products and Data Types

Appendix H
Numbering Systems

DirectLOGIC PLCs

The DirectLOGIC PLC family uses the octal numbering system for all addressing
which includes: inputs, outputs, internal V--memory locations, timers, counters,
internal control relays (bits), etc. Most data in the PLC, including timer and counter
current values, is in BCD format by default. User data in V--memory locations may be
stored in other data types if it is changed by the programmer, or comes from some
external source, such as an operator interface. Any manipulation of data must use
instructions appropriate for that data type which includes: Load instructions, Math
instructions, Out box instructions, comparison instructions, etc. In many cases, the
data can be changed from one data type to another, but be aware of the limitations of
the various data types when doing so. For example, to change a value from BCD to
decimal (binary), use a BIN instruction box. To change from BCD to a real number,
use a BIN and a BTOR instruction box. When using Math instructions, the data
types must match. For example, a BCD or decimal (binary) number cannot be
added to a real number, and a BCD number cannot be added to a decimal (binary)
number. If the data types are mismatched, the results of any math operation will be
meaningless.
To simplify making, number conversions Intelligent Box (IBox) Instructions are
available with DirectSOFT 5. These instruction descriptions are located in the
DL405 IBox Instructions PLC User Manual Supplement, page 30, in the Math IBox
group.
Most DirectLOGIC analog modules can be setup to give the raw data in decimal
(binary) format or in BCD format, so it is necessary to know how the module is being
used. DirectLOGIC PID is another area where not all values are in BCD. In fact,
nearly all of the PID parameters are stored in the PLC memory as decimal (binary)
numbers.
NOTE: The PID algorithm uses magnitude plus sign for negative decimal (binary)
numbers, whereas the standard math functions use twos complement. This can
cause confusion while debugging a PID loop.

C--more/C--more
Micro--Graphic
Panels

When using the Data View in DirectSOFT, be certain that the proper format is
selected for the element to be viewed. The data type and length is selected using the
drop--down boxes at the top of the Data View window. Also notice that BCD is called
BCD/Hex. Remember that BCD is a subset of hexadecimal so they share a display
format even though the values may be different. This is where good documentation
of the data type stored in memory is crucial.
In the C--more and C--more Micro--Graphic HMI operator panels, the 16--bit BCD
format is listed as BCD int 16. Binary format is either Unsigned int 16 or Signed
int 16 depending on whether or not the value can be negative. Real number format
is Floating PT 32.
More available formats are, BCD int 32, Unsigned int 32 and Signed int 32.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

European Union
Directives (CE)
In This Appendix. . . .
European Union (EU) Directives
Basic EMC Installation Guidelines

1I

I--2

European Union Directives

European Union (EU) Directives

NOTE: The information contained in this section is intended as a guideline and is
based on our interpretation of the various standards and requirements. Since the
actual standards are issued by other parties and in some cases Governmental
agencies, the requirements can change over time without advance warning or notice.
Changes or additions to the standards can possibly invalidate any part of the
information provided in this section.

EU Directives

Appendix I

This area of certification and approval is absolutely vital to anyone who wants to do
business in Europe. One of the key tasks that faced the EU member countries and
the European Economic Area (EEA) was the requirement to harmonize several
similar yet distinct standards together into one common standard for all members.
The primary purpose of a harmonized standard was to make it easier to sell and
transport goods between the various countries and to maintain a safe working and
living environment. The Directives that resulted from this merging of standards are
now legal requirements for doing business in Europe. Products that meet these
Directives are required to have a CE mark to signify compliance.
Member Countries

As of January 1, 2007, the members of the EU are Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech
Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Ireland, Italy,
Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Romania,
Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, and the United Kingdom. Iceland,
Liechtenstein, and Norway together with the EU members make up the European
Economic Area (EEA) and all are covered by the Directives.

Applicable
Directives

There are several Directives that apply to our products. Directives may be amended,
or added, as required.
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMC) this Directive attempts
to ensure that devices, equipment, and systems have the ability to
function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without
introducing intolerable electromagnetic disturbance to anything in that
environment.
Machinery Safety Directive this Directive covers the safety aspects of
the equipment, installation, etc. There are several areas involved,
including testing standards covering both electrical noise immunity and
noise generation.
Low Voltage Directive this Directive is also safety related and covers
electrical equipment that has voltage ranges of 50--1000VAC and/or
75--1500VDC.
Battery Directive this Directive covers the production, recycling, and
disposal of batteries.

Compliance

Certain standards within each Directive already require mandatory compliance. The
EMC Directive, which has gained the most attention, became mandatory as of
January 1, 1996. The Low Voltage Directive became mandatory as of January 1,
1997.
Ultimately, we are all responsible for our various pieces of the puzzle. As
manufacturers, we must test our products and document any test results and/or

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

European Union Directives

I--3

installation procedures that are necessary to comply with the Directives. As a

machine builder, you are responsible for installing the products in a manner which
will ensure compliance is maintained. You are also responsible for testing any
combinations of products that may (or may not) comply with the Directives when
used together. The end user of the products must comply with any Directives that
may cover maintenance, disposal, etc. of equipment or various components.
Although we strive to provide the best assistance available, it is impossible for us to
test all possible configurations of our products with respect to any specific Directive.
Because of this, it is ultimately your responsibility to ensure that your machinery (as
a whole) complies with these Directives and to keep up with applicable Directives
and/or practices that are required for compliance.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix I
EU Directives

As of January 1, 1999, the DL05, DL06 DL205, DL305, and DL405 PLC systems
manufactured by either Koyo Electronics Industries, FACTS Engineering or Host
Engineering, when properly installed and used, conform to the Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) and Low Voltage Directive requirements of the following
standards.
EMC Directive Standards Relevant to PLCs
EN50081--1 Generic immunity standard for residential, commercial,
and light industry
EN50081--2 Generic emission standard for industrial environment.
EN50082--1 Generic immunity standard for residential, commercial,
and light industry
EN50082--2 Generic immunity standard for industrial environment.
Low Voltage Directive Standards Applicable to PLCs
EN61010--1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use.
Product Specific Standard for PLCs
EN61131--2 Programmable controllers, equipment requirements and
tests. This standard replaces the above generic standards for immunity
and safety. However, the generic emissions standards must still be used
in conjunction with the following standards:
EN 61000-3-2 Harmonics
EN 61000-3-2 Fluctuations
Warning on Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
We recommend that all personnel take necessary precautions to avoid
the risk of transferring static charges to the inside of the control cabinet,
and clear warnings and instructions should be provided on the cabinet
exterior. Such precautions may include the use of earth straps, similar
devices or the powering down of the equipment inside the enclosure
before the door is opened.
Warning on Radio Interference (RFI)
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take
adequate measures.

I--4

European Union Directives

External switches, circuit breakers or external fusing, are required for these
devices.
The switch or circuit breaker should be mounted near the PLC equipment.
AutomationDirect is currently in the process of changing their testing procedures
from the generic standards to the product specific standards.
Special Installation The installation requirements to comply with the requirements of the Machinery
Directive, EMC Directive and Low Voltage Directive are slightly more complex than
Manual
the normal installation requirements found in the United States. To help with this, we
have published a special manual which you can order:
DA--EU--M -- This is an EU Installation Manual that covers special
installation requirements to meet the EU Directive requirements. Order
this manual to obtain the most up-to-date information.
Although the EMC Directive gets the most attention, other basic Directives, such as
Other Sources of
the Machinery Directive and the Low Voltage Directive, also place restrictions on the
Information
control panel builder. Because of these additional requirements it is recommended
that the following publications be purchased and used as guidelines:
BSI publication TH 42073: February 1996 -- covers the safety and electrical
aspects of the Machinery Directive
EN 60204--1:1992 -- General electrical requirements for machinery, including
Low Voltage and EMC considerations
IEC 1000--5--2: EMC earthing and cabling requirements
IEC 1000--5--1: EMC general considerations
It may be possible for you to obtain this information locally; however, the official
source of applicable Directives and related standards is:
The Office for Official Publications of the European Communities L--2985
Luxembourg; quickest contact is via the World Wide Web at
http://euro--op.eu.int/indexn.htm
Another source is:
British Standards Institution -- Sales Department
Linford Wood
Milton Keynes
MK14 6LE
United Kingdom: the quickest contact is via the internet at
http://www.bsi.org.uk

EU Directives

Appendix I

General Safety

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

European Union Directives

I--5

Basic EMC Installation Guidelines

Enclosures

The simplest way to meet the safety requirements of the Machinery and Low Voltage
Directives is to house all control equipment in an industry standard lockable steel
enclosure. This normally has an added benefit because it will also help ensure that
the EMC characteristics are well within the requirements of the EMC Directive.
Although the RF emissions from the PLC equipment, when measured in the open
air, are below the EMC Directive limits, certain configurations can increase emission
levels. Holes in the enclosure, for the passage of cables or to mount operator
interfaces, will often increase emissions.
*may be required for CE compliance
(see Declaration of Conformity for
specific product requirements).

DL205 system shown, but enclosure concepts

are the same for a DL405 system.

Mains fused
isolation transformer

Communications

*Ferrite choke on
communications cables

keyed lockout
switch

Appendix I
EU Directives
Metallic conduit for
communications
and I/O wiring
*Mains filter

Transient voltage
suppressor

Earth
Mains

ground

disconnect switch

I/O common
earthed

Ground Braid
Copper Lugs

Panel or
Single Point
Ground

*Ferrite choke
on I/O wiring

Illustrations are not to scale

Star Washers

Lock Nut

Panel
Lock Nut

Star Washers

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

European Union Directives

Electrostatic
Discharge (ESD)

We specify in all declarations of conformity that our products are installed inside an
industrial enclosure using metallic conduit for external wire runs; therefore, we test
the products in a typical enclosure. However, we would like to point out that although
our products operate normally in the presence of ESD, this is only the case when
mounted within an enclosed industrial control cabinet. When the cabinet is open
during installation or maintenance, the equipment and or programs may be at risk of
damage from ESD carried by personnel.
We therefore recommend that all personnel take necessary precautions to avoid the
risk of transferring static electricity to components inside the control cabinet. If
necessary, clear warnings and instructions should be provided on the cabinet
exterior, such as recommending the use of earth straps or similar devices, or the
powering off of equipment inside the enclosure.

AC Mains Filters

The DL205 and DL305 AC

powered base power supplies
require extra mains filtering to
comply with the EMC Directive
on conducted RF emissions.
All PLC equipment has been
tested with filters from
Schaffner,
which
reduce
emissions levels if the filters
are properly grounded (earth
ground). A filter with a current
rating suitable to supply all
PLC power supplies and AC
input modules should be
selected. We suggest the
FN2010 for the DL205
systems and the FN2080 for
DL305 systems. The DL05,
DL06 and DL405 systems do
not require extra filtering.

EU Directives

Appendix I

I--6

Filter

Schaffner
FN2010

Transient
Suppressor

To AC
Input
Circuitry

Fused
Terminals

Earth
Terminal
L N

NOTE: Very few mains filters can reduce problem emissions to negligible levels. In
some cases, filters may increase conducted emissions if not properly matched to the
problem emissions.
Suppression and
Fusing

In order to comply with the fire risk requirements of the Low Voltage and Machinery

Directive electrical standards EN 61010--1, and EN 60204--1, by limiting the power

into unlimited mains circuits with power leads reversed, it is necessary to fuse both
AC and DC supply inputs. You should also install a transient voltage suppressor
across the power input connections of the PLC. Choose a suppressor such as a metal
oxide varistor, with a rating of 275VAC working voltage for 230V nominal supplies
(150VAC working voltage for 115V supplies) and high energy capacity (eg. 140
joules).
Transient suppressors must be protected by fuses and the capacity of the transient
suppressor must be greater than the blow characteristics of the fuses or circuit
breakers to avoid a fire risk. A recommended AC supply input arrangement for Koyo
PLCs is to use twin 3 amp TT fused terminals with fuse blown indication, such as
DINnectors DN--F10L terminals, or twin circuit breakers, wired to a Schaffner FN2010
filter or equivalent, with high energy transient suppressor soldered directly across the

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

European Union Directives

Internal Enclosure
Grounding

I--7

output terminals of the filter. PLC system inputs should also be protected from voltage
impulses by deriving their power from the same fused, filtered, and surge-suppressed
supply.
A heavy-duty star earth terminal block should be provided in every cubicle for the
connection of all earth ground straps, protective earth ground connections, mains
filter earth ground wires, and mechanical assembly earth ground connections. This
should be installed to comply with safety and EMC requirements, local standards, and
the requirements found in IEC 1000--5--2.The Machinery Directive also requires that
the common terminals of PLC input modules, and common supply side of loads driven
from PLC output modules should be connected to the protective earth ground
terminal.

Equi--potential
Grounding

Serial Communication Cable

Equi-potential Bond

Adequate site earth grounding must be provided for equipment containing modern
electronic circuitry. The use of isolated earth electrodes for electronic systems is
forbidden in some countries. Make sure you check any requirements for your
particular destination. IEC 1000--5--2 covers equi-potential bonding of earth grids
adequately, but special attention should be given to apparatus and control cubicles
that contain I/O devices, remote I/O racks, or have inter-system communications with
the primary PLC system enclosure. An equi-potential bond wire must be provided
alongside all serial communications cables, and to any separate items of the plant
which contain I/O devices connected to the PLC. The diagram shows an example
of four physical locations connected by a communications cable.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix I
EU Directives

Key

I--8

European Union Directives

Communications
and Shielded
Cables

Screened
Cable

Conductive
Adapter
Serial
I/O

To Earth
Block
Equi-potential
Bond

Good quality 24 AWG minimum twisted-pair shielded cables, with overall foil and
braid shields are recommended for analog cabling and communications cabling
outside of the PLC enclosure. To date, it has been a common practice to only provide
an earth ground for one end of the cable shield in order to minimize the risk of noise
caused by earth ground loop currents between apparatus. The procedure of only
grounding one end, which primarily originated as a result of trying to reduce hum in
audio systems, is no longer applicable to the complex industrial environment.
Shielded cables are also efficient emitters of RF noise from the PLC system, and can
interact in a parasitic manner in networks and between multiple sources of
interference.
The recommendation is to use shielded cables as electrostatic pipes between
apparatus and systems, and to run heavy gauge equi-potential bond wires
alongside all shielded cables. When a shielded cable runs through the metallic wall
of an enclosure or machine, it is recommended in IEC 1000--5--2 that the shield
should be connected over its full perimeter to the wall, preferably using a conducting
adapter, and not via a pigtail wire connection to an earth ground bolt. Shields must be
connected to every enclosure wall or machine cover that they pass through.

EU Directives

Appendix I

Control Cubicle

NOTE: Cables, whether shielded or not, connecting to the following modules MUST
be enclosed within earthed metal conduit or other metallic trunking when outside the
PLC enclosure: H4--EBC, H4--ECOM, F4--CPxxx--x and F4--SDS.
Analog and RS232
Cables

Providing an earth ground for both ends of the shield for analog circuits provides the
perfect electrical environment for the twisted pair cable as the loop consists of signal
and return, in a perfectly balanced circuit arrangement, with connection to the
common of the input circuitry made at the module terminals. RS232 cables are
handled in the same way.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

European Union Directives

Multidrop Cables

I--9

RS422 twin twisted pair, and RS485 single twisted pair cables also require a 0V link,
which has often been provided in the past by the cable shield. It is now
recommended that you use triple twisted pair cabling for RS422 links, and twin
twisted pair cable for RS485 links. This is because the extra pair can be used as the
0V inter-system link. With loop DC power supplies earth grounded in both systems,
earth loops are created in this manner via the inter-system 0v link. The installation
guides encourage earth loops, which are maintained at a low impedance by using
heavy equi-potential bond wires. To account for non--European installations
using single-end earth grounds, and sites with far from ideal earth ground
characteristics, we recommend the addition of 100 ohm resistors at each 0V
link connection in network and communications cables.
Last Slave

100

Master

Slave n

TXD 0V RXD
+ -+ --

TXD 0V RXD
+ -+ --

RXD 0V TXD
+ -+ --

100
100
Termination

When you run cables between PLC items within an enclosure which also contains
susceptible electronic equipment from other manufacturers, remember that these cables
may be a source of RF emissions. There are ways to minimize this risk. Standard data
cables connecting PLCs and/or operator interfaces should be routed well away from
other equipment and their associated cabling. You can make special serial cables where
the cable shield is connected to the enclosures earth ground at both ends, the same way
as external cables are connected.

Additional Caution
about RF
Interference to
Analog Modules

The readings from all analog modules can be affected by the use of devices that
exhibit high field strengths such as mobile phones and motor drives.
All AutomationDirect products are tested to withstand field strength levels up to
10V/m. which is the maximum required by the relevant EU standards. While all
products pass this test, analog modules will typically exhibit deviations of their
readings. This is quite normal, however, systems designers should be aware of this
and plan accordingly.
When assembling a control system using analog modules, these issues must be
adhered to and should be integrated into the system design. This is the responsibility
of the system builder/commissioner.

Network Isolation

For safety reasons, it is a specific requirement of the Machinery Directive that a keyswitch
must be provided that isolates any network input signal during maintenance, so that
remote commands cannot be received that could result in the operation of the machinery.
The FA--ISOCON does not have a keyswitch! Use a keylock and switch on your
enclosure which when open removes power from the FA--ISOCON. To avoid the
introduction of noise into the system, any keyswitch assembly should be housed in its
own earth grounded steel box and the integrity of the shielded cable must be maintained.
Again, for further information on EU directives we recommend that you get a copy of
our EU Installation Manual (DA--EU--M). Also, if you connect to the World Wide Web,
you
can
check
the
EU
Commissions
official
website
at:
http://ec.europa.eu/index_en.htm.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

Appendix I
EU Directives

Shielded Cables
within Enclosures

Termination

I--10

European Union Directives

DC Powered
Versions

EU Directives

Appendix I

Items Specific to
the DL405

Due to slightly higher emissions radiated by the DC powered versions of the DL405,
and the differing emissions performance for the different DC supply voltages, the
following stipulations must be met:
The PLC must be housed within a metallic enclosure with a minimum
amount of orifices.
I/O and communications cabling existing in the cabinet must be contained
within metallic conduit/trunking.
This equipment must be properly installed while adhering to the guidelines
of the PLC installation manual DA--EU--M, and is suitable for EN
61010--1 installation categories 1 or 2.
The rating between all circuits in this product are rated as basic insulation
only, as appropriate for single fault conditions.
The protection provided by the equipment may be impaired if the equipment
is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer.
It is the responsibility of the system designer to earth one side of all control
and power circuits, and to earth the braid of screened cables.
Input power cables must be externally fused and have an externally
mounted switch or circuit breaker, preferably mounted near the PLC.
NOTE: The DL405 internal base power supply has a 2A@250V slow blow fuse;
however, it is not replaceable, so external fusing is required.
When needed, carefully clean the outside plastic case of PLC components
using a dry cloth.
For hardware maintenance instructions, see the Maintenance and
Troubleshooting section in this manual. This section also includes
battery replacement information. Also, only replacement parts supplied
by Automationdirect.com or its agents should be used.

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. A

1
Index

A
Agency Approvals, 2--7
ASCII Table, G--2
Auxiliary Functions, 3--16, A--2
Handheld Programmer Configuration, A--10
Memory Cartridge Operations, A--11
Password Operations, A--12
RLL Operations, A--5

B
Bases, 2--10
CPU DIP Switches, 2--12
Types, 2--11
Battery Backup, 3--12
BCD Numbers, 3--33
Bit Maps, 3--44 to 3--57
Boolean Instructions, 5--4, 5--10 to 5--25

C
Cables, Programming, 2--15
Clock and Calendar, A--8
Instructions, 5--175
Communication Ports, Specifications, 3--9 to 3--12
Connect Solid State Devices, 2--21

Connector, I/O Ribbon Cable, 2--31

CPU
Auxiliary Functions, A--2
Battery Replacement, 9--2
Clock and Calendar, 3--15
Features, 3--2, 3--6
Memory Map, 3--34
Operating Modes, A--4
Operating System, 3--18
Password Protection, 3--15
Scan Time, 3--26
Setup, A--8
Set the Network Address, A--9
Specifications, 3--4 to 3--6
Status Indicators, 9--9
CPU Control Instructions, 5--177

D
Diagnostics, 3--23
DIP Switches, 3--8
DirectNET, Port Configuration, 4--21
Disabling Outputs, A--9
DL405 Aliases, 3--43
Drum Instruction Programming, 6--2
Control Techniques, 6--10
Drum Operation, 6--8
Step Transitions, 6--4 to 6--7

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition

Index--2
Drum Instructions, 6--12 to 6--14
Drum instructions, EDRUM, 6--14

Stage, 7--23
Stage Counter, 5--49 to 5--50
Stage Programming, 7--2
Subroutines, 5--181
Timers, 5--41 to 5--45
Up/Down Counter, 5--51 to 5--52

Error Codes, B--2 to B--8

Intelligent I/O Instructions, 5--189

European Directives, I--2

Interrupt Instructions, 5--185

Event drum, 6--15

Instructions, Compare, 5--82 to 5--86

F
Force I/O, 3--20

H
Hexadecimal Numbers, 3--33

I
I/O Modules, I/O Configuration, A--6
I/O Response Time, 3--24
I/O Wiring and Specifications, 2--27
I/O Module Charts, 2--33
Instruction Execution Times, C--2 to C--22
Instructions
Accumulator/Data Stack, 5--54 to 5--57
ASCII to HEX, 5--135
BCD to Binary, 5--128
Binary to BCD, 5--129
Binary to Real, 5--132
Bit Operations, 5--121 to 5--127
Comparative Boolean, 5--26 to 5--31
Counters, 5--46 to 5--48
Encode, 5--126
End Statement, 5--4
Execution Times, C--2 to C--28
Gray Code, 5--139
HEX to ASCII, 5--136
Immediate Instructions, 5--32 to 5--40
Interrupts, 5--186
Load Label, 5--162
Master Control Relays, 5--183
Move, 5--146
Move Memory Cartridge, 5--162
Out, 5--65 to 5--68
Real to Binary, 5--133
Set Bit, 5--167
Shift Register, 5--53

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition

K
Keyswitch Functions, 3--7

L
Local I/O Expansion, 4--11

M
Maintenance, 9--2
Battery Maintenance, 9--2
Code Identifiers, 9--6
Diagnostics, 9--4
Error Code Locations, 9--5
System Error Codes, 9--8
Test Modes, 9--19
Manual Organization, 1--2, 1--6
Masked Drums, 6--18
Math Instructions, 5--87
Increment, 5--117
Increment Binary, 5--120
Transcendental Functions, 5--118
Memory, F--2
Set Retentive Ranges, A--9
Memory Cartridge, 3--14
Memory cartridge, battery replacement, 9--3
Memory Map
DL430, 3--40
DL440, 3--41
DL450, 3--42
Message Instructions, 5--194 to 5--204
MODBUS, Port Configuration, 4--20
Module Placement, 4--4
I/O Configuration, 4--5

Index--3
Mounting Guidelines, 2--6
Base Dimensions, 2--5
Panel Layout, 2--6

N
Network Address, A--9
Network connections, MODBUS & DirectNET, 4--18
Network Instructions, 5--191
Network Master Operation, 4--28 to 4--31
Network Slave Operation, 4--22
Number Conversion Instructions, 5--128
Numbering Systems
BCD, H--5
Binary, H--2
Floating Point, H--6
Hexadecimal, H--3
Octal, H--4

O
Octal Numbers, 3--32

P
Part Numbering, 1--8
Passwords, A--12
PID

Analog Filter, 8--53

Bumpless Transfer, 8--13, 8--27
Cascade Control, 8--63
Tuning, 8--67
Control Introduction, 8--4
DirectSOFT 5 Filter, 8--54
DL450 Control, 8--6
Error Flags, 8--18
Error Term Selection, 8--33
Loop Modes, 8--28, 8--52
On/Off Control, 8--68
Operation, 8--9
Parameters, 8--32
PID View, 8--49 to 8--51
Ramp/Soak, 8--39
Reset Windup, 8--10, 8--34
Special Features, 8--52
Time Proportioning, 8--68

PID Alarms
Alarm Features, 8--3

Auto Tuning Error, 8--47

Hysteresis, 8--13, 8--36, 8--38
Monitor Limit, 8--35
Overflow/Underflow Error, 8--38
Programming Error, 8--38
PV Deviation, 8--36
Rate--of--Change, 8--13, 8--37
Setup Alarms, 8--35
PID Loop
Alarms, 8--13
Configure, 8--26
Features, 8--2, 8--3
Feedforward Control, 8--70
Freeze Bias, 8--11, 8--34
Loop Definitions, 8--21
Mode, 8--28
Operating Modes, 8--14
Special Loop Calculations, 8--14
Setup, 8--18
Terminology, 8--74
Time--Proportioning Control, On/Off Control
Example, 8--67
Transfer Mode, 8--27
Troubleshooting Tips, 8--72, 8--74
Tuning, 8--40
Auto , 8--44
Manual, 8--41 to 8--44
PID Mode 2 Word Description, 8--23
PID Mode Setting 1 Description, 8--22
PID Position Algorithm, 8--9, 8--15
Position Form, 8--9
PID Velocity Algorithm, 8--9
Algorithm Form, 8--12
Velocity Algorithm, 8--15
Pointers, 5--58
Power Budget, 4--7
Calculation Example, 4--9
Power Budget , Worksheet, 4--10
Product Weights, E--2
Program Control Instructions, 5--179
Program Media, 3--13
Program Mode, 3--19
Programming
Accumulator Logic Instructions, 5--70 to 5--85
Bit Operation Instructions, 5--121 to 5--127
Comparative Boolean, 5--7
Compare Instructions, 5--82 to 5--86
Counters, 5--46 to 5--48
Instruction Set Table, 5--2 to 5--4
Load Instructions, 5--59 to 5--64

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition

Index--4
Midline Outputs, 5--5
Out Instructions, 5--65 to 5--68
Pointers, 5--58
POP Instruction, 5--69
Shift Register, 5--53
Timers, 5--41 to 5--45
Programming Methods, 1--4

Q
Quick Start, 1--10, 1--12

R
Ramp/Soak Generator, 8--56
Controls, 8--58
DrectSOFT Example, 8--60
Flag Bit Description Table, 8--24
Profile Monitoring, 8--59
Table, 8--56
Table Flags, 8--58
Table Location, 8--25
Test the Profile, 8--62, 8--64
Testing, 8--59
Remote I/O Expansion, 4--12
Retentive Memory, A--9
Run Mode, 3--19

S
Safety Guidelines, 2--2
Emergency Stops, 2--3
Safety guidelines, Orderly System Shutdown, 2--4
Scan Time
Display, A--8
Set the Watchdog Timer, A--8
Scan Time Configuration, 3--15
Sinking/Sourcing, 2--19
Special Relays, D--2 to D--4
Specialty I/O, 3--20
Stage Programming, 7--2
Garage Door Opener Example, 7--10
Initial Stages, 7--5
Introduction, 7--2
Jump Instruction, 7--7
Parallel Processing Concepts, 7--19
Power Flow Transition, 7--18

DL405 User Manual, 4th Edition

Program Organization, 7--15

Stage View, 7--28
State Transition Diagrams, 7--3
Unconditional Outputs, 7--18
Status Indicators, 3--7
System Components, 1--4
System CRs, 3--39
System Design, 1--16
System Design Strategies, 4--2
System Parameters, 3--38

T
Table Instructions, 5--142
Technical Support, 1--2, 1--6
Test Modes, A--9
Timed Drum, 6--16
Transient Suppression, 2--23
Troubleshooting
Electrical Noise, 9--16
I/O modules, 9--14

V
V--memory Operations, A--6

W
Wiring
Expansion Unit, 2--14
I/O Module, 2--30
I/O Strategies, 2--16
I/O wiring strategies, 2--17
Multi--point Modules, 2--31
Power Input, 3--8
Wiring Guidelines, 2--13